Omni Flow

Manual Guide
Volume 1
System Architecture and Installation

Firmware Revisions 23.71/27.71
Orifice / Turbine
Gas Flow Metering Systems
Volume 2D
Basic Operation
Volume 3D
Configuration and
Advanced Operation
Volume 4D
Modbus Database
Addresses and
Index Numbers
Volume 5
Technical Bulletins
Warranty & Licences
Manual Guide
Effective May 1999
About Our Company

Measure the Difference!
Omni flow computers Our products are currently
being used world-wide at:
Offshore oil and gas
production facilities
Crude oil, refined
products, LPG, NGL and
gas transmission lines
Storage, truck and
marine loading/offloading
terminals
Refineries;
petrochemical and
cogeneration plants.
Omni Flow Computers, Inc. is the worlds leading manufacturer and supplier of
panel-mount custody transfer flow computers and controllers. Our mission is to
continue to achieve higher levels of customer and user satisfaction by applying
the basic company values: our people, our products and productivity.
Our products have become the international flow computing standard. Omni
Flow Computers pursues a policy of product development and continuous
improvement. As a result, our flow computers are considered the brain and
cash register of liquid and gas flow metering systems.
Our staff is knowledgeable and professional. They represent the energy,
intelligence and strength of our company, adding value to our products and
services. With the customer and user in mind, we are committed to quality in
everything we do, devoting our efforts to deliver workmanship of high caliber.
Teamwork with uncompromising integrity is our lifestyle.
Contacting Our Corporate Headquarters
"
Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

10701 Corporate Drive, Suite 300
Stafford, Texas 77477 USA
Phone:
281-240-6161
Fax:
281-240-6162
World-wide Web Site:

http://www.omniflow.com
!$"
E-mail Addresses:
techsupport@omniflow.com
info@omniflow.com
Getting User Support

Technical and sales support is available world-wide through our corporate or
authorized representative offices. If you require user support, please contact the
location nearest you (see insert) or our corporate offices. Our staff and
representatives will enthusiastically work with you to ensure the sound operation
of your flow computer.
ALL.71+ ! 05/99
xi
Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 User Manual
Manual Guide
About the Flow Computer Applications

Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 Flow Computers are integrable into the majority of
liquid and gas flow measurement and control systems. The current firmware
revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers are:
20.71/24.71: Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering
Systems with K Factor Linearization (US/metric units)
21.71/25.71: Orifice/Differential Pressure Liquid Flow Metering Systems
(US/metric units)
22.71/26.71: Turbine/Positive Displacement Liquid Flow Metering Systems
with Meter Factor Linearization (US/metric units)
23.71/27.71: Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems (US/metric units)
About the User Manual

This manual applies to .71+ firmware revisions of Omni 6000 and Omni 3000
Flow Computers. It is structured into 5 volumes and is the principal part of your
flow computer documentation.
Target Audience
As a users reference guide, this manual is intended for a sophisticated audience
with knowledge of liquid and gas flow measurement technology. Different user
levels of technical know-how are considered in this manual. You need not be an
expert to operate the flow computer or use certain portions of this manual.
However, some flow computer features require a certain degree of expertise
and/or advanced knowledge of liquid and gas flow instrumentation and electronic
measurement. In general, each volume is directed towards the following users:
Volume 1. System Architecture and Installation
Installers
System/Project Managers
Engineers/Programmers
Advanced Operators
Operators
Volume 2. Basic Operation
All Users
Volume 3. Configuration and Advanced Operation
Advanced Operators
Volume 4. Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers
Advanced Operators
Volume 5. Technical Bulletins
Users with different levels of expertise.
xii
ALL.71+ ! 05/99
Manual Structure
The User Manual comprises 5 volumes; each contained in separate binding for
easy manipulation. You will find a detailed table of contents at the beginning of
each volume.
Volume 1. System Architecture and Installation

Volume 1 is generic to all applications and considers both US and metric units.
This volume describes:
Basic hardware/software features

Installation practices
Calibration procedures
Flow computer specifications
Volume 2. Basic Operation

User Reference
Documentation - The User
Manual is structured into
five volumes. Volumes 1
and 5 are generic to all flow
computer application
revisions. Volumes 2, 3 and
4 are application specific.
These have four versions
each, published in separate
documents; i.e., one per
application revision per
volume. You will receive the
version that corresponds to
your application revision.
The volumes respective to
each application revision
are:
Revision 20/24.71:
Volume #s 2a, 3a, 4a
Revision 21/25.71:
Volume #s 2b, 3b, 4b
Revision 22/26.71:
Volume #s 2c, 3c, 4c
Revision 23/27.71:
Volume #s 2d, 3d, 4d
For example, if your flow
computer application
revision is 20/24.71, you will
be supplied with Volumes
2a, 3a & 4a, along with
Volumes 1 & 5.
This volume is application specific and is available in four separate versions (one
for each application revision). It covers the essential and routine tasks and
procedures that may be performed by the flow computer operator. Both US and
metric units are considered.
General computer-related features are described, such as:
The application-related topics may include:
Batching operations
Proving functions
PID control functions
Audit trail
Other application specific functions
Depending on your application, some of these topics may not be included in your
specific documentation. An index of display variables and corresponding key
press sequences that are specific to your application are listed at the end of
each version of this volume.
Volume 3. Configuration and Advanced Operation

Volume 3 is intended for the advanced user. It refers to application specific
topics and is available in four separate versions (one for each application
revision). This volume covers:
ALL.71+ ! 05/99
Overview of keypad functions

Adjusting the display
Clearing and viewing alarms
Computer totalizing
Printing and customizing reports
Application overview
Flow computer configuration data entry
User-programmable functions
Modbus Protocol implementation
Flow equations and algorithms
xiii
Manual Guide
Volume 4. Modbus
Database Addresses and Index Numbers
Volume 4 is intended for the system programmer (advanced user). It comprises
a descriptive list of database point assignments in numerical order, within our
firmware. This volume is application specific, for which there is one version per
application revision.
Volume 5. Technical Bulletins

Manual Updates and
Technical Bulletins Volume 5 of the User
Manual is a compendium of
Technical Bulletins. They
contain updates to the user
manual. You can view and
print updates from our
website:
http://www.omniflow.com
Volume 5 includes technical bulletins that contain important complementary

information about your flow computer hardware and software. Each bulletin
covers a topic that may be generic to all applications or specific to a particular
revision. They include product updates, theoretical descriptions, technical
specifications, procedures, and other information of interest.
This is the most dynamic and current volume. Technical bulletins may be added
to this volume after its publication. You can view and print these bulletins from
our website.
Conventions Used in this Manual

Typographical
Conventions - These are
standard graphical/text
elements used to denote
types of information. For
your convenience, a few
conventions were
established in the manuals
layout design. These
highlight important
information of interest to the
reader and are easily
caught by the eye.
Several typographical conventions have been established as standard reference

to highlight information that may be important to the reader. These will allow you
to quickly identify distinct types of information.
CONVENTION USED
Sidebar Notes / InfoTips
Example:
INFO - Sidebar notes are used to
highlight important information in
a concise manner.
Keys / Keypress
Sequences
Example:
[Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n]
DESCRIPTION
Sidebar notes or InfoTips consist of concise
information of interest which is enclosed in a grayshaded box placed on the left margin of a page.
These refer to topics that are either next to them, or
on the same or facing page. It is highly
recommended that you read them.
Keys on the flow computer keypad are denoted with
brackets and bold face characters (e.g.: the up
arrow key is denoted as [%]). The actual function of
the key as it is labeled on the keypad is what
appears between brackets. Keypress sequences
that are executed from the flow computer keypad are
expressed in a series of keys separated by a space
(as shown in the example).
Screen Displays
Example:
Use Up/Down Arrows
To Adjust Contrast;
Left, Right Arrows
To Adjust Backlight
xiv
Sample screens that correspond to the flow

computer display appear surrounded by a dark gray
border with the text in bold face characters and
mono-spaced font. The flow computer display is
actually 4 lines by 20 characters. Screens that are
more than 4 lines must be scrolled to reveal the text
shown in the manual.
ALL.71+ ! 05/99
CONVENTION USED
Headings
Example:
2. Chapter Heading
2.3. Section Heading
DESCRIPTION
Sequential heading numbering is used to categorize
topics within each volume of the User Manual. The
highest heading level is a chapter, which is divided
into sections, which are likewise subdivided into
subsections. Among other benefits, this facilitates
information organization and cross-referencing.
2.3.1. Subsection Heading
Figure Captions
Example:
Fig. 2-3. Figure No. 3 of
Chapter 2
Page Numbers
Example:
2-8
Application Revision and
Effective Publication Date
Examples:
All.71 ! 03/98
20/24.71 ! 03/98
21/25.71 ! 03/98
22/26.71 ! 03/98
23/27.71 ! 03/98
Figure captions are numbered in sequence as they

appear in each chapter. The first number identifies
the chapter, followed by the sequence number and
title of the illustration.
Page numbering restarts at the beginning of every
chapter and technical bulletin. Page numbers are
preceded by the chapter number followed by a
hyphen. Technical bulletins only indicate the page
number of that bulletin. Page numbers are located
on the outside margin in the footer of each page.
The contents of Volume 1 and Volume 5 are
common to all application revisions and are denoted
as All.71. Content of Volumes 2, 3 and 4 are
application specific and are identified with the
application number. These identifiers are included
on every page in the inside margin of the footer,
opposite the page number. The publication/effective
date of the manual follows the application
identification. The date is expressed as month/year
(e.g.: March 1998 is 03/98).
Trademark References
The following are trademarks of Omni Flow Computers, Inc.:
Omni 3000
Omni 6000
OmniCom
Other brand, product and company names that appear in this manual are
trademarks of their respective owners.
ALL.71+ ! 05/99
xv
Manual Guide
Copyright Information and Modifications Policy

This manual is copyright protected. All rights reserved. No part of this manual
may be used or reproduced in any form, or stored in any database or retrieval
system, without prior written consent of Omni Flow Computers, Inc., Stafford,
Texas, USA. Making copies of any part of this manual for any purpose other than
your own personal use is a violation of United States copyright laws and
international treaty provisions.
Omni Flow Computers, Inc., in conformance with its policy of product
development and improvement, may make any necessary changes to this
document without notice.
Warranty, Licenses and Product Registration
!
Important!
Product warranty and licenses for use of Omni flow computer firmware and of
OmniCom Configuration PC Software are included in the first pages of each
Volume of this manual. We require that you read this information before using
your Omni flow computer and the supplied software and documentation.
If you have not done so already, please complete and return to us the product
registration form included with your flow computer. We need this information for
warranty purposes, to render you technical support and serve you in future
upgrades. Registered users will also receive important updates and information
about their flow computer and metering system.
Copyright 1991-1999 by Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
xvi
ALL.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 1
User Manual
System Architecture
and Installation
Effective May 1999
Contents of Volume 1
1. Overview of Hardware and Software Features..................................................... 1-1

1.1. Introduction .......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2. Operators Panel .................................................................................................. 1-2
1.2.1.
LCD Display ..........................................................................................................1-2
1.2.2.
Electromechanical Totalizers.................................................................................1-2
1.2.3.
Diagnostic and Program LEDs...............................................................................1-2
1.2.4.
Active Alarm LED..................................................................................................1-2
1.2.5.
Alpha Shift LED.....................................................................................................1-2
1.2.6.
Operator Keypad ...................................................................................................1-2
1.3. Passive Backplane Mother Board....................................................................... 1-4

1.4. Back Panel Terminal Module............................................................................... 1-6
1.4.1.
Back Panel Terminations.......................................................................................1-6
1.4.2.
Extended Back Panel ............................................................................................1-7
1.5. Central Processor Module................................................................................... 1-8

1.6. Input/Output (I/O) Modules .................................................................................. 1-9
1.6.1.
Photo-Optical Isolation ........................................................................................ 1-10
1.6.2.
Digital I/O Modules.............................................................................................. 1-11
1.6.3.
Serial Communication Modules ........................................................................... 1-12
1.6.4.
Process I/O Combination Modules....................................................................... 1-16
1.7. Operating Power ................................................................................................ 1-17

1.8. Firmware and Software...................................................................................... 1-19
1.8.1.
Interrupt-Driven CPU........................................................................................... 1-19
1.8.2.
Cycle Time.......................................................................................................... 1-19
1.8.3.
On-line Diagnostics and Calibration..................................................................... 1-19
1.8.4.
PC Communications Interface ............................................................................. 1-19
1.8.5.
OmniCom Configuration PC Software ............................................................... 1-20
1.8.6.
Year 2000 Compliance ........................................................................................ 1-20
1.9. Initializing Your Flow Computer ........................................................................ 1-21
ii
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
2. Process Input/Output Combination Module Setup ............................................. 2-1

2.1. Introduction...........................................................................................................2-1
2.2. Features of the I/O Combo Modules....................................................................2-1
2.2.1.
Setting the Address of the Combo Modules........................................................... 2-2
2.2.2.
Hardware Analog Configuration Jumpers .............................................................. 2-2
2.2.3.
Process I/O Combo Module Addresses Versus Physical I/O Points ...................... 2-2
2.2.4.
Assigning Specific Signal Inputs ........................................................................... 2-3
2.2.5.
Sample Omni Flow Computer Configuration Charts .............................................. 2-4
2.3. The A and B Combo I/O Modules ........................................................................2-6

2.3.1.
A and B Combo Module Non-Selectable or Selectable Address ............................ 2-7
2.3.2.
The A Type Combo I/O Module............................................................................. 2-8
2.3.3.
The B Type Combo I/O Module........................................................................... 2-10
2.4. The E/D and E Combo Modules.........................................................................2-11

2.4.1.
The E/D Type Combo I/O Module ....................................................................... 2-11
2.4.2.
The E Type Combo I/O Module........................................................................... 2-12
2.5. The H Type Combo I/O Module..........................................................................2-13

2.6. The HV Type Combo I/O Module .......................................................................2-15
2.7. The SV Type Combo I/O Module........................................................................2-16
3. Mounting and Power Options ................................................................................ 3-1

3.1. Mechanical Installation.........................................................................................3-1
3.1.1.
Panel Mounting..................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2.
Nema 4 / 4X Configurations .................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.3.
Nema 7 Specification............................................................................................ 3-2
3.2. Input Power...........................................................................................................3-4

3.2.1.
AC Power ............................................................................................................. 3-4
3.2.2.
DC Power ............................................................................................................. 3-4
3.2.3.
Safety Considerations ........................................................................................... 3-4
3.3. Power Terminals...................................................................................................3-5

3.3.1.
CE Equipment Power Terminals ........................................................................... 3-5
3.3.2.
Extended Back Panel Power Terminals ................................................................ 3-6
3.4. Power Supply Module Switching Regulator .......................................................3-8
ALL.71+ w 05/99
iii
4. Connecting to Flowmeters..................................................................................... 4-1

4.1. Turbine Flowmeter (A or B Combo Module) ....................................................... 4-1
4.2. Wiring Flowmeter Signals to E Type Combo Modules ...................................... 4-2
4.3. Faure Herman Turbine Meters (E Combo Module).......................................... 4-3
4.4. Pulse Fidelity and Integrity Checking with E Type Combo Modules ................ 4-4
5. Connecting to Transducers and Transmitters ..................................................... 5-1

5.1. Wiring the Input Transducers.............................................................................. 5-1
5.2. Wiring of a Dry C Type Contact......................................................................... 5-2
5.3. Wiring RTD Probes .............................................................................................. 5-3
5.4. Wiring Densitometers .......................................................................................... 5-4
5.4.1.
Wiring Densitometer Signals to an E/D Type Combo Module ................................5-4
5.4.2.
Solartron Densitometers......................................................................................5-4
5.4.3.
Sarasota Densitometers ......................................................................................5-6
5.4.4.
UGC Densitometers ............................................................................................5-8
5.5. Wiring of Honeywell ST3000 Transmitters .................................................... 5-10

5.6. Wiring Micro Motion Transmitters.................................................................. 5-11
5.6.1.
Connecting Micro Motion RFT9739 Transmitter to A Type or E Type Process

I/O Combination Modules .................................................................................... 5-11
5.6.2.
Connecting Micro Motion RFT 9739 via RS-485 Serial Communications........... 5-12
5.6.3.
Connecting Micro Motion RFT9739 via Serial RS-232-C to 485 Converter ........ 5-13
6. Connecting Analog Outputs and Miscellaneous I/O Including Provers............. 6-1

6.1. Analog Outputs .................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2. Digital Inputs/Outputs .......................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1.
Wiring a Digital Point as an Input or an Output ......................................................6-2
6.2.2.
Connecting Various Digital I/O Devices .................................................................6-4
6.3. Provers ................................................................................................................. 6-5
iv
6.3.1.
Connecting Pipe Prover Detector Switches............................................................6-5
6.3.2.
Interfacing to a Brooks Compact Prover..............................................................6-5
6.3.3.
Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooks Compact Prover ............................6-6
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
7. Connecting to Serial Devices................................................................................. 7-1

7.1. Serial Port Connection Options...........................................................................7-1
7.2. Connecting to Printers .........................................................................................7-2
7.2.1.
Connecting to a Dedicated Printer (Port 1) ............................................................ 7-2
7.2.2.
Connecting to a Shared Printer (Port 1) ................................................................ 7-3
7.2.3.
Print Sharing Problems ......................................................................................... 7-3
7.3. Connecting to a Personal Computer and Modem ..............................................7-4

7.4. Peer-to-Peer Communications and Multi-drop Modes .......................................7-6
7.4.1.
Peer-to-Peer RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop Mode ................................................... 7-6
7.4.2.
Peer-to-Peer via RS-232-C Communications ........................................................ 7-7
7.4.3.
Keying the Modem or Radio Transmitter Carrier in Multi-drop Applications ........... 7-7
7.4.4.
RS-485 Four-wire Multi-drop Mode ....................................................................... 7-8
7.5. Connecting to a SCADA Device...........................................................................7-9

7.6. Interfacing the Fourth Serial Port to an Allen-Bradley KE Module ...............7-10
8. Diagnostic and Calibration Features .................................................................... 8-1

8.1. Introduction...........................................................................................................8-1
8.2. Calibrating in the Diagnostic Mode .....................................................................8-2
8.2.1.
Entering The Diagnostic Mode .............................................................................. 8-2
8.2.2.
Display Groups in the Diagnostic Mode................................................................. 8-3
8.2.3.
Leaving The Diagnostic Mode............................................................................... 8-3
8.3. Calibration Instructions........................................................................................8-4
ALL.71+ w 05/99
8.3.1.
Calibrating A Voltage or Current Analog Input....................................................... 8-4
8.3.2.
Calibrating an RTD Input Channel......................................................................... 8-5
8.3.3.
Calibrating a 4 to 20 mA Digital to Analog Output ................................................. 8-7
8.3.4.
Verifying the Operation of the Digital I/O Points .................................................... 8-8
9. Flow Computer Specifications .............................................................................. 9-1

9.1. Environmental ...................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2. Electrical............................................................................................................... 9-1
9.3. Microprocessor CPU............................................................................................ 9-1
9.4. Backplane............................................................................................................. 9-2
9.5. Process Input/Output Combo Modules .............................................................. 9-2
9.6. Flowmeter Pulse Inputs ....................................................................................... 9-2
9.7. Detector Switch Inputs ........................................................................................ 9-3
9.8. Detector Switch Inputs of E Combo Module ...................................................... 9-3
9.9. Analog Inputs ....................................................................................................... 9-3
9.10. RTD Inputs............................................................................................................ 9-3
9.11. Analog Outputs .................................................................................................... 9-4
9.12. Control Outputs/Status Inputs ............................................................................ 9-4
9.13. Multi-bus Serial I/O Interface ............................................................................... 9-5
9.13.1. RS-232 Compatible ...............................................................................................9-5
9.13.2. RS-485..................................................................................................................9-5
9.14. Operator Keypad.................................................................................................. 9-5

9.15. LCD Display .......................................................................................................... 9-5
9.16. Electromechanical Counters............................................................................... 9-6
9.17. Operating Mode Indicator LEDs.......................................................................... 9-6
9.18. Security................................................................................................................. 9-6
vi
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
Figures of Volume 1
Fig. 1-1.
Features of the Operator Front Panel ................................................................................ 1-3
Fig. 1-2.
Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 3000 ..................................................................... 1-4
Fig. 1-3.
Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 6000 ..................................................................... 1-5
Fig. 1-4.
Back Panel Terminations Omni 6000 and Omni 3000........................................................ 1-6
Fig. 1-5.
Extended Back Panel - Omni 6000 (left); Omni 3000 (right) .............................................. 1-7
Fig. 1-6.
Central Processor Module - Jumper Settings ..................................................................... 1-8
Fig. 1-7.
Matching the I/O Modules to the Back Panel Terminations ................................................ 1-9
Fig. 1-8.
Photo-optical Isolation - How It Works ............................................................................. 1-10
Fig. 1-9.
Digital I/O Module Model # 6011 - Jumper Settings ......................................................... 1-11
Fig. 1-10. RS-232/485 Module #68-6205 Showing Selection Jumpers and LED Indicators .............. 1-12
Fig. 1-11. Layout of Jumper Blocks Showing RS-232/485 Formats.................................................. 1-13
Fig. 1-12. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232/485 Module #68-6205 ................................................. 1-14
Fig. 1-13. Dual RS-232 Serial I/O Module Model - Jumper Settings................................................. 1-15
Fig. 1-14. Power Supply Module Model # 68-6118........................................................................... 1-18
Fig. 2-1.
Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 3000.............................................................. 2-4
Fig. 2-2.
Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 6000.............................................................. 2-5
Fig. 2-3.
The A and B Combo I/O Module - Configuration Jumpers ................................................. 2-6
Fig. 2-4.
A and B Combo Module - Non-Selectable / Selectable Address......................................... 2-7
Fig. 2-5.
A Type Combo Module - Flow Pulse Jumper Settings (Channel 3 or Channel 4) ............... 2-8
Fig. 2-6.
A Type Combo Module - Analog Input Jumper Settings..................................................... 2-9
Fig. 2-7.
B Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings - Frequency Densitometer Setup .................... 2-10
Fig. 2-8.
E/D Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings.................................................................... 2-11
Fig. 2-9.
E Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings ....................................................................... 2-12
Fig. 2-10. H Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings ....................................................................... 2-13

Fig. 2-11. HV Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings..................................................................... 2-15
Fig. 2-12. Omni Multivariable Interface (SV Type Combo) Module Model 68-6203 - Jumper
Settings ........................................................................................................................... 2-16
Fig. 3-1.
Panel Mounting - Omni 6000 (upper), Omni 3000 (lower) .................................................. 3-1
Fig. 3-2.
Input Power Terminals - Omni 3000 (upper), Omni 6000 (lower) ....................................... 3-5
Fig. 3-3.
Input Power Terminals - Extended Back Panel (Omni 6000 only) ...................................... 3-6
Fig. 3-4.
Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 6000)................................................ 3-7
Fig. 3-5.
Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 3000)................................................ 3-7
Fig. 3-6.
Power Supply Module Model 68-6118................................................................................ 3-8
ALL.71+ w 05/99
vii
Figures of Volume 1
Fig. 4-1.
Connecting to a Turbine Pre-amp (A or B Combo Modules) ...............................................4-1
Fig. 4-2.
Wiring to Turbine Pre-Amps (E Type Combo Modules Only)..............................................4-2
Fig. 4-3.
Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using Omni 24 VDC .....................................................4-3
Fig. 4-4.
Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using External 24 VDC...............................................4-3
Fig. 4-5.
Connecting Dual Coil Turbines for Pulse Fidelity Checking ................................................4-4
Fig. 5-1.
Wiring the 4-20 mA Inputs (Input Channels 1 & 2 shown)...................................................5-1
Fig. 5-2.
Wiring for Dry C Type Contact ...........................................................................................5-2
Fig. 5-3.
Wiring a 4-Wire RTD Temperature Probe ..........................................................................5-3
Fig. 5-4.
Wiring a Solartron Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a B Type I/O Combo Module ...5-4
Fig. 5-5.
Wiring a Solartron Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a B Type I/O Combo

Module...............................................................................................................................5-5
Fig. 5-6.
Wiring a Sarasota Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a B Type I/O Combo Module....5-6
Fig. 5-7.
Wiring a Sarasota Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a B Type I/O Combo

Module...............................................................................................................................5-7
Fig. 5-8.
Wiring a UGC Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a B Type I/O Combo Module..........5-8
Fig. 5-9.
Wiring a UGC Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a B Type I/O Combo Module .....5-9
Fig. 5-10. Wiring of a Honeywell Smart Transmitter ...................................................................... 5-10

Fig. 5-11. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter.............. 5-11
Fig. 5-12. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter Via
Two-wire RS-485 Communications (Serial I/O Module #68-6205) .................................... 5-12
Fig. 6-1.
Wiring Devices to the Flow Computers Analog Outputs.....................................................6-1
Fig. 6-2.
Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Input .............................................................................6-2
Fig. 6-3.
Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Output ..........................................................................6-3
Fig. 6-4.
Connecting Digital I/O Devices to the Flow Computer ........................................................6-4
Fig. 6-5.
Wiring to a Brooks Compact Prover ................................................................................6-5
Fig. 6-6.
Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooks Compact Prover ........................................6-6
Fig. 7-1.
Connecting a Printer to Serial Port #1 of the Flow Computer..............................................7-2
Fig. 7-2.
Connecting Several Flow Computers to a Shared Printer...................................................7-3
Fig. 7-3.
Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB25 Female Connector (Using Port #2 as an

example)............................................................................................................................7-4
Fig. 7-4.
Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB9 Female Connector .....................................7-5
Fig. 7-5.
Connecting Port #2 to a Modem.........................................................................................7-5
Fig. 7-6.
Wiring of Several Flow Computers using the Peer-to-Peer Feature via RS-485
Communications in Two-wire Multi-drop Mode ...................................................................7-6
Fig. 7-7.
Wiring of Several Flow Computers in the Peer-to-Peer Mode using RS-232-C

Communications. ...............................................................................................................7-7
viii
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
Fig. 7-8.
Wiring of Multiple Flow Computers to a PLC Device Via RS-485 Communications in

Four-wire Multi-drop Mode................................................................................................. 7-8
Fig. 7-9.
Typical Wiring of Port #3 to a SCADA Device via Modem ................................................. 7-9
Fig. 7-10. Wiring Serial Port #4 to Allen-Bradley KE Communications Module.............................. 7-10

Fig. 8-1.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Figure Showing Calibration of RTD Input Channel............................................................. 8-6
ix
Volume 1
1. Overview of Hardware and Software

Features
1.1.
BASIC FEATURES - Omni
flow computers are
applicable to liquid and gas
flow measurement, control
and communication systems,
and custody transfer
operations. Its basic features
are:
q 32-bit processing with
math co-processor for
fast, multi-tasking
execution
q 500 msec calculation
cycle
q Plug-in, assignable digital,
serial and combination I/O
modules
q Point-to-point digital
transmitter interface
q 14-bit A/Ds, temperature
trimmed
q No I/O multiplexers, no
potentiometers
q Photo-optical Isolation of
each I/O point
q Meter pulse fidelity
checking
q Optional Honeywell and
Rosemount digital
transmitter interface
modules
q Dual LEDs indicate
active/fused digital I/O
q Selectable digital I/O,
individually fused
q Standard, field-proven
firmware no need for
custom programming
q User-configurable control
logic
q Up to 4 flow/pressure
control loops
q User-configurable
variables for displays and
reports
(Continues)
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Introduction
Omni 3000 and Omni 6000 Flow Computers are reliable, easy to use,
uniquely versatile measurement instruments. They are factory-programmed for
single or multiple meter run configurations to measure crude oils, refined
products, NGLs, LPGs, ethylene, propylene, natural gas, and specialty gases.
Measurement of other flowing products can also be provided.
Extensive communications capability enables the Omni 6000 to be used in a
variety of Master/Slave configurations for high-speed data transfer applications,
and as a large communication submaster. The flow computer can also be
hardware configured as a medium-size Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) with
significant digital I/O capability.
Your Omni Flow Computer connects to various sensors monitoring pipeline flow
in your transmission, petrochemical or process measurement application. It
calculates, displays and prints data that will be used for operational or billing
functions.
The computer is configured to match your piping system requirements. Its nonrestrictive bus design permits any combination of inputs and outputs to meet
most metering, flow and valve control, and communication requirements.
Plug-in modules furnish the input and output channels as needed and provide
an assurance of maximum product life by higher accuracy measurement
technologies such as meter pulse fidelity checking, and Rosemount and
Honeywell digital transmitter interface modules. Up to 4 serial ports in some
models are available for printing reports and other communications tasks. All
I/O modules are quality tested and temperature trimmed to optimize the 14-bit
analog resolution, and burned-in before shipment for field installation.
1-1
Chapter 1
Overview of Hardware and Software Features
1.2.
BASIC FEATURES (Continued)
q Data archive and report
storage
q Modbus peer-to-peer
communications to
38.4kbps for PLC/DCS
q Real-time dial-up for
diagnostics
q International testing
q Includes OmniCom
configuration software
q Three year warranty
Operators Panel
The operators panel shown (Fig. 1-1) is standard for all applications and is
used to display and enter all data. All data can also be accessed via any of the
serial ports.
1.2.1.
LCD Display
The 4-line by 20-alpha-numeric character, back-lit Liquid Crystal Display is

updated every 200 ms. It displays all messages and system variables in English
language engineering units. Backlighting and display viewing angle are
adjustable from the keypad (press [Setup] then [Display] and follow the
displayed instructions).
1.2.2.
Electromechanical Totalizers
Three non-resetable, 6-digit electromechanical counters are included on the

front panel for non-volatile backup totalizing. They can be programmed to count
gross, net, mass or energy units at any rate up to 10 counts per second.
1.2.3.
Diagnostic and Program LEDs
These dual-color LEDs indicate when the user is in the Diagnostic Mode
calibrating the I/O modules, or when in the Program Mode changing the
configuration of the computer. The LEDs change from green to red after a valid
password is requested and entered. The computer is in the normal Display
Mode when neither of these LEDs are on.
1.2.4.
Active Alarm LED
New unacknowledged alarms cause this LED to glow red. This changes to
green as soon as the alarm is acknowledged by pressing the [Cancel/Ack] key
on the keypad.
1.2.5.
INFO - Pressing the [Alpha
Shift] key twice will put the
shift lock on. The shift lock is
canceled by pressing one
more time or automatically
after the [Display/Enter] key
is pressed.
Help System - These
computers are equipped with
a powerful context-sensitive
help system. Press the
[Help] key (bottom right)
twice to activate the help
displays. Cancel the help
screens by pressing the
[Prog] key.
1-2
Alpha Shift LED
This LED glows green to show that the next key only will be shifted. A red LED
indicates that the shift lock is on.
1.2.6.
Operator Keypad
Control of the flow computer is via the 34-button alphanumeric membrane

keypad, with tactile domes and audio feedback. Through the keypad you have
the capability to configure your system, access and modify calibration data online, and view or print process data. Configuration data can also be entered
remotely by serial port and is stored in battery backed-up CMOS SRAM
memory. Passwords and an internal program inhibit switch provide tamperproof security.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
DIAGNOSTIC LED
Glows green when in the
Diagnostic Mode. Glows
red when a valid
password is entered.
LCD DISPLAY
Is 4 lines by 20
characters. Backlight and
viewing angle are
adjustable via the keypad.
Flowrate
FT-101
Cumulative
FT-101
PROGRAM LED
Glows green when in the
Program Mode. Glows red
when a valid password is
entered.
BBL/Hr
1550.5
BBLS
234510
Total A
Total B
Total C
000682
009456
023975
DIAG/PROG KEY
Used to access
Diagnostic and Program
Modes.
Diagnostic
Alpha Shift
Diag
Prog
OPERATOR KEYPAD
Has 34 keys, domed
membrane with tactile
and audio feedback.
Alpha
Shift
Net
Gross
Press
Time
Counts
SPACE/CLEAR /
CANCEL/ACK KEY
Used to clear data and
insert spaces in the
Program Mode. It is also
used to cancel key press
sequences and, in the
Display Mode,
acknowledge alarms.
Fig. 1-1.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Prove
,
Cancel / Ack
Space
Clear
Status
0
Input
Setup
THREE-FUNCTION KEYS
These activate process
variable or alpha-numeric
character functions.
Product
Output
Analysis
Alarms
Batch
ALPHA SHIFT LED

Glows green for a single
character shift. Glows red
when the shift lock is on.
Meter
Preset
F
/
Orifice
Factor
Control
D.P.
Print
Density
SG/API
Energy
Temp
Mass
B
%
&
ACTIVE ALARM LED

Glows red when a new
alarm occurs. Glows
green when an
acknowledged alarm
exists.
Active Alarm
Program
ARROW KEYS
Used to move the cursor
and scroll displays. Also
used as software zero
and as span control
during calibration.
THREE 6-DIGIT,
ELECTROMECHANICAL
COUNTERS
These non-resetable
counters are assigned via
the keypad.
X
+
Help
Display
Enter
DISPLAY/ENTER / HELP
KEY
Used to enter a key press
sequence and to access
the Help System.
Features of the Operator Front Panel
1-3
Chapter 1
1.3.
INFO - Passive backplane
simply means that no active
circuitry is contained on it.
The active circuitry is
contained on the modules
that plug into it.
Passive Backplane Mother Board
Mounted on the passive backplane are DIN standard connectors which are
bussed in two sections. The front section is a high performance, 16-bit bus
which accepts the Central Processor Module. The Omni 6000 computer has 3
other connectors available in this section to accept memory expansion and
future product enhancements.
The rear 8-bit I/O bus section comprises 10 connectors on the Omni 6000 and 4
on the Omni 3000, which can accept any type of optically isolated I/O module
manufactured by Omni. The rearmost connector on both computers accepts the
system AC/DC power supply module. Dual ribbon cable assemblies (Omni
6000) and a single ribbon cable (Omni 3000) connect the I/O connectors on the
backplane to the back panel terminals. (See Fig. 1-2 below and Fig. 1-3 on
facing page.)
CAUTION!
These units have an integral

cabinet latching mechanism
which first must be
disengaged by lifting the
bezel upwards, before
withdrawing the unit from the
case.
Fig. 1-2.
1-4
Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 3000
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
CAUTION!

cabinet latching mechanism
which first must be
bezel upwards, before
withdrawing the unit from the
case.
Fig. 1-3.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 6000
1-5
Chapter 1
1.4.
Back Panel Terminal Module
The AC receptacle of the Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 back panel is a power line
filter with a separate AC fuse holder. The AC power is contained on a separate
four-conductor cable which plugs into the power supply. The power supply used
with this version is a Model 68-6118; no physical fuses (see 1.7. Operating
Power).
1.4.1.
Back Panel Terminations
The Omni 6000 terminal blocks are identified TB1 through TB10 with terminals
marked 1 through 12 for each block. These provide 120 circuit paths to the
passive backplane. The DC terminals are on TB11.
The Omni 3000 terminal blocks are identified as TB1 through TB4, with
terminals marked 1 through 12 for each block. These provide 48 circuit paths to
the passive backplane. The DC terminal is on TB5.
Back Panel Fuses - All DC

fuses are 3 amp fast-blow
manufactured by Littlefuse,
Model 225.003. All AC fuses
are amp slow-blow
Model 229.500.
Fig. 1-4.
1-6
Back Panel Terminations Omni 6000 and Omni 3000
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
1.4.2.
Extended Back Panel
Several flow computer mounting options are available with the extended back
panel. Screw type terminals are provided for AC and DC power. Extended 64conductor ribbon cables and the AC cables are provided with a standard length
of 5 feet.
For the Omni 6000 (dimensions: 3 x 18), this panel incorporates all the
terminal blocks TB1 through TB10, with terminals marked 1 through 12. In
addition to the terminal blocks, extra DC (fused), return and shield terminals are
provided for TB1 through TB8.
The Omni 3000 extended back panel (dimensions: 3 x 8) also incorporates
all the terminal blocks TB1 through TB4, with terminals marked 1 through 12. In
addition to the terminal blocks, extra DC (fused), return and shield terminals are
provided for TB1 and TB2.
Extended Back Panel

AC/DC Fuses - All DC fuses
are amp fast-blow
Model 225.250. The AC fuse
is amp slow-blow
Model 239.500. The fuse for
the back panels AC
receptacle is a 5x20mm,
amp slow-blow.
Fig. 1-5.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Extended Back Panel - Omni 6000 (left); Omni 3000 (right)
1-7
Chapter 1
1.5.
Central Processor Module
This module contains the Motorola 16/32-bit microprocessor operating at 16

MHz, a maximum of 512 kbytes of SRAM memory, 1 Mbyte of EPROM
program memory, math coprocessor and time of day clock. Positions U3 and
U4 on the Central Processor Module contain the program EPROMs. The
hardware real-time clock will continue to operate even when power loss to the
computer occurs. Time of power failure is logged and printed when the power is
restored.
CAUTION!
POTENTIAL FOR DATA

LOSS!
RAM Battery Backup Omni flow computers leave
the factory with a fully
charged Ni-Cd battery as
RAM power backup. RAM
data, including user
configuration and I/O
calibration data, may be lost
if the flow computer is
disconnected from external
power for more than 30 days.
Observe caution when
storing the flow computer
without power being applied
for extended periods of time.
The RAM back-up battery is
rechargeable and will be fully
charged after power has
been applied for 24 hours.
Math
Processor
Program
EPROM
Program
RAM
Archive
RAM
Backup
Batttery
J1
J2
EPROM Size
1 OR 4 Meg Bit
Select 4 Meg
As Shown
J3
Fig. 1-6.
1-8
Central
Processor
System Watchdog
J3 In = Enabled
J3 Out = Disabled
(Always Enabled)
Central Processor Module - Jumper Settings
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
1.6.
Input/Output (I/O) Modules
Omni flow computers utilize an I/O bus system. All I/O is modular and plug-in
for easy field maintenance and replacement. I/O circuitry is also photo-optically
isolated from all field wiring which makes it relatively immune to electrical noise
and prevents damage to the electronics.
Your Omni Flow Computer has a combination of 3 types of I/O modules:
o Digital I/O Modules
o Serial I/O Modules
o Process I/O Combo Modules
A and B Type Combo Modules
E and E/D Type Combo Modules
H Type Combo Modules
Almost any combination of I/O mix can be accommodated in the flow computer.
The only limitations are the number of I/O connectors (4 on Omni 3000, 10 on
Omni 6000) and the number of wires connecting them to the back panel field
wiring terminals (48 for Omni 3000, 120 for Omni 6000).
Your Omni Flow Computer has a standard order in which the modules are
plugged-in (Fig. 1-7; also see Fig. 1-2 and Fig. 1-3). This provides a standard
termination layout.
TB6
TB7
TB8
TB9
TB10
24
Digital I/O 1-12

12
13
TB2
TB3
TB4
24
Fig. 1-7.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
TB1
Combo I/O # 2
Combo I/O # 6
Combo I/O # 1
TB5
Combo I/O # 5
Serial I/O 3 & 4
TB4
Combo I/O # 4
Serial I/O 1 & 2
TB3
Combo I/O # 3
Digital I/O 13-24
TB2
Combo I/O # 2
12
13
Digital I/O 1 - 12
TB1
Omni 3000
Serial I/O 1 & 2
Omni 6000
Combo I/O # 1
INFO - Mother board

connectors do not have a
specific address. These are
pre-established at the
factory. Each Omni Flow
Computer will be supplied
with a termination diagram
indicating these settings.
Matching the I/O Modules to the Back Panel Terminations
1-9
Chapter 1
1.6.1.
Photo-Optical Isolation Transducer signals are
converted by the LED into
high frequency pulses of
light. These are sensed by
the photo-transistor which
passes the signal to the flow
computer.
Note that no electrical
connection exists between
the transducers and the
computer circuits.
Photo-Optical Isolation
The microprocessor circuitry is isolated via photo-optical devices from all field
wiring to prevent accidental damage to the electronics, including that caused by
static electricity. Photo-optical isolation also inhibits electrical noise from
inducing measurement errors. Independent isolation of each process input
provides high common-mode rejection, allowing the user greater freedom when
wiring transmitter loops. Furthermore, it minimizes ground loop effects and
isolates and protects your flow computer from pipeline EMI and transients.
Pipeline
Transducer
Signals That
May Pass On
Damaging
Transient
Noise
Fig. 1-8.
1-10
Opto Coupler IC
LED
Photo
Transistor
Isolated
Transducer
Signals
Passed On
To Sensitive
Computer
Circuits
Photo-optical Isolation - How It Works
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
1.6.2.
INFO - Some Digital I/O
modules have 12
replaceable fuses; one fuse
for each I/O point. Other
modules have electronic
fuses that trip when
overloaded and
automatically reset when
the fault condition is
removed.
Digital I/O Modules
Digital I/O modules provide discrete inputs and outputs to control provers,
samplers, injection pumps, motor operated valves (MOVs) and to provide remote
totalizing. Each digital module provides 12 digital I/O points with each point able
to be configured as either an input or output. The Omni 3000 normally has one
digital I/O module. Whereas, the 6000 can have a maximum of two digital
modules, resulting in 24 digital I/O points. The digital I/O module normally
occupies I/O Slots 1 and 2 on the Omni 6000 backplane, and I/O Slot 1 on Omni
3000.
Address jumpers on the digital I/O module are used to configure the module as
either module D1 or D2. Digital I/Os 1 through 12 are allocated to module D1
and 13 through 24 are allocated to D2.
JP1 In = Dig. 1 Rising Edge Trigger

JP2 In = Dig. 1 Falling Edge Trigger
Interrupt Request (IRQ)

Select Jumpers for
Pipe Prover Detector
(Non-Double Chronometry)
NOTE: If D2 remove all jumpers
Module Address
Jumper
Select D1
Select D2
Green LED On
Point Active
I/O Point LEDs - Each

digital I/O point has 2 LEDs.
One LED illuminates green
when the I/O point is active
and the other illuminates
green or red when a fault
condition exists. The fault
LED illuminates green when
an input over voltage
condition exists. An output
short circuit causes the fault
LED to illuminate red.
Individual Fuses
for Each I/O Point
F3
F2
F1
F6
F5
F4
F9
F8
F7
F12
F11
F10
I/O Point
#01
Dual (Red/Green)
Fuse Blown LED
Red On
= Sourcing
Current
Green On = Sinking
Current
#12
Digital I/O Point

LED Indicators
Fig. 1-9.
Digital I/O Module # 6011 Jumper Settings
IRQ, (Interrupt request) jumpers are provided on digital I/O modules for
interfacing to pipe prover detector switches. This feature applies only to liquid
measurement applications.
These jumpers are only used to configure digital I/O point 1 or digital I/O point 2
on module D1. All IRQ jumpers should be removed from D2 if a D2 module is
installed.
ALL.71+ ! 05/99
1-11
Chapter 1
1.6.3.
Serial Communication Modules
RS-232/485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205

INFO - Up to 12 flow
computers and/or other
compatible serial devices can
be multi-dropped using
Omnis proprietary RS-232-C
serial port. Thirty-two
devices may be connected
when using the RS-485
mode. Typically, one serial
I/O module is used on the
Omni 3000, providing two
ports. A maximum of two
serial modules can be
installed in the Omni 6000,
providing four ports.
Multivariable Transmitting
Devices - In addition to the
Serial I/O Module # 68-6205,
the flow computer must also
have an SV Module to
communicate with
multivariable transmitters.
This serial module is
jumpered to IRQ 3 when
used in combination with an
SV Module. Without an SV
Module, the jumper is placed
at IRQ 2. The SV Module
can only be used with this
serial module (68-6205) and
is not compatible with the
Serial I/O Module # 68-6005.
For more information, see
Technical Bulletin # TB980503.
Serial I/O Module # 68-6205 is capable of handling two communications ports

Each serial communication port is individually optically isolated for maximum
common-mode and noise rejection. Although providing RS-232C signal levels,
the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share one serial link.
Communication parameters such as baud rate, stop bits and parity settings are
software selectable.
In addition to RS-232, jumper selections have been provided on each port to
allow selection of RS-485 format. With this option, a total of two RS-485 ports
are available on each module.
Address Selection
Jumpers
Address S1
Selected
Address S2
Selected
LED Indicators
IRQ 2 Selected
Port #2 (4)
Jumpers
Port #1 (3)
Jumpers
Fig. 1-10. RS-232/485 Module #68-6205 Showing Selection Jumpers and

LED Indicators
1-12
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1

The RS-232/485 Module has been designed so that RS-232 or RS-485
communications standards can be selected by placement of 16-pin resistor
networks into the correct blocks. The following diagrams show the locations of
blocks JB4, JB5, JB6 for Port #1, and JB1, JB2, JB3 for Port #2 for each
format.
RS-232
JB1 or JB4
JB2 or JB5
RS-485
RS-485 2-WIRE
JB3 or JB6
RS-485
TERMINATED
RS-485 2-WIRE TERMINATED

Terminated/Nonterminated RS-485 - The
RS-485 devices located at
each extreme end of an RS485 run should be
terminated. Note that the
device located at an extreme
end may or may not be an
Omni Flow Computer.
JB1 or JB4
JB2 or JB5
JB3 or JB6
RS-485 2-WIRE NON-TERMINATED

JB1 or JB4
JB2 or JB5
JB3 or JB6
RS-232/485
NON-TERMINATED
RS-232
RS-232/485 4-WIRE
RS-232

JB1 or JB4
JB2 or JB5
JB3 or JB6
RS-485
TERMINATED

JB1 or JB4
RS-232/485
RS-232
RS-232/485 4-WIRE
JB2 or JB5
JB3 or JB6
RS-485 2-WIRE
RS-232
RS-485
TERMINATED
Fig. 1-11. Layout of Jumper Blocks Showing RS-232/485 Formats
ALL.71+ w 05/99
1-13
Chapter 1
Omni 6000
(Omni 3000)
Terminal
TB3 (TB2)
Note: Users of Micro

Motion RFT 9739 devices
connected the peer-to-peer
port (Port #2) of the Omni,
please note that the resistor
networks should be
positioned for 2-wire RS-485
and that Terminal (A) from
the RFT 9739 should be
wired to Omni 7 and (B) from
the RFT must be wired to
Terminal 11.
First
Serial
Port
Second
Serial
Port
RS-232-C
RS-485
2-Wire
RS-485
4-Wire
TX
TX-B
TERM
RX
RX-A
GND
GND
GND
RTS
TX-A
RDY
RX-B
TX
TX-B
TERM
RX
RX-A
10
GND
GND
GND
11
RTS
TX-A
12
RDY
RX-B
Fig. 1-12. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232/485 Module #68-6205
1-14
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1

Dual RS-232-Compatible Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005
computers can be multidropped to one RS-232C
serial device. Typically, one
serial I/O module is used on
the Omni 3000, providing two
Dual channel serial communication modules can be installed providing two RS232-C ports. Each serial communication port is individually optically isolated for
maximum common-mode and noise rejection. Although providing RS-232C
signal levels, the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share
one RS-232 device. Communication parameters such as baud rate, stop bits
and parity settings are software selectable.
S1
Serial Ports 1 & 2

Use the S1 Module
Setting
S0
Serial Ports 3 & 4

Use the S0 Module
Setting
RTS Out
TX Out
Chan. B
RTS Out
TX Out
Chan. A
LED Indicators
RX In
RDY In
RX In
Chan. A
Chan. B
RDY In
Fig. 1-13. Dual RS-232 Serial I/O Module Model - Jumper Settings
Serial Port Assignments

The first port can be configured as a Modbus protocol port. It can also be
configured as a printer port. The printer can be shared between multiple flow
computers. Reports can be printed on a daily, batch end, timed interval or on
demand basis. A reprint function provides backup should you experience printer
problems at any time. Customized report templates are input using the
OmniCom Configuration PC Software.
The second, third, and fourth ports are independent Modbus protocol channels.
The complete database of the flow computer is available for upload and
download. The OmniCom configuration program provided by Omni can use any
of these ports.
The fourth RS-232C can also be set up to communicate with Allen-Bradley PLC
devices.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
1-15
Chapter 1
1.6.4.
Process I/O Combination Modules
Meter runs utilize plug-in modules which include all necessary analog/digital
(A/D) converters and control circuitry. User selection of process I/O is available
with combo cards that can be a mix of meter pulse, frequency densitometer,
4-20 mA, 4-wire 100 ohm RTD inputs, and 4-20 mA outputs.
All process measurements such as temperature, pressure, density, and flow are
input via these process I/O combo modules. Each module will handle 4 inputs
of a variety of signal types and provides one or two 4-20 mA analog outputs
(except the SV Module which has six 4-20 mA outputs).
Seven types of combo I/O modules are available: A, B, E, E/D, H, HV and SV.
All modules accept analog and pulse frequency type inputs, except for the H
and HV Modules which interface digitally with Honeywell Smart Transmitters,
and the SV Module which interfaces serially with RS-485 compatible
The A and B Types use identical I/O boards. Likewise, the E and E/D Modules
are also identical, except for the position of a configuration jumper which
selects the type and address of each module.
INFO - The flow computer
allocates the physical I/O
point numbers according to
the module IDs, not the
position occupied on the
backplane.
Each of the combo modules installed must have a different identity i.e., you
cannot have two or more modules of the same type and address. Valid IDs are:
A1 through A6, B1 through B6, E/D-1 through E/D-6, E1 through E6, H1 through
H6, and SV1 through SV2. Only one HV Module can be installed.
Modules are plugged into DIN type connectors on the passive backplane. Each
backplane connector has 12 circuits which connect to the back panel terminal
strips via ribbon cables. Combo I/O modules are plugged into the backplane
starting at I/O Position #5 (Omni 6000) or I/O Position #3 (Omni 3000) and
working towards Position #10 (Omni 6000) or Position #4 (Omni 3000). The
preferred order is lowest number A Type to highest number H Type, them SV
and HV Modules.
The following chapter deals in more detail with process I/O combo modules and
includes illustrations and jumper settings. (See Chapter 2 Process I/O Combo
Module Setup.)
1-16
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
1.7.
Operating Power - The
indicated power is maximum
and includes the power used
by transmitter loops, etc. It
will vary depending on the
number of modules installed,
the number of current loops
and any digital output loads
connected.
CAUTION!
POTENTIAL FOR DATA

LOSS!
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Operating Power
Omni flow computers can be AC or DC powered.

When AC powered, 120 VAC 50 Watts is applied to the AC plug. For powering
transmitter loops when AC powered, approximately 500 mA at 24 VDC is
available from the DC terminal block. The flow computer can be special ordered
for operation on 220-250 VAC supplies. This requires a modified power supply
unit and a different cord set. AC power to the unit is fused by a 0.5 Amp (5x20
mm) slow-blow fuse located in the AC power receptacle.
To DC power the flow computer, apply 18 to 30 VDC, 50 Watts to the DC
terminal block. DC power into or out of the back panel DC power terminals is
fused by a 3 Amp, 2 AG fast-blow fuse located on the back panel next to the
DC power terminals.
All analog and digital circuits within the flow computer are powered from a 5volt switching regulator located on the power supply module. This is located in
the rear most connector on the computer backplane. The DC power which
supplies the switching regulator either comes directly from the DC terminals on
the back panel of the flow computer (18-30 VDC) or by rectifying the output of
the integral 120 VAC (240 VAC) to 20 VAC transformer. Regulated 5-volt power
is monitored by a 3-4 second shutdown circuit located on the power supply
module. When power is applied to the computer there will be a delay of 3 to 4
seconds before the unit powers up.
A recommended maximum of 500 mA of transducer loop power is available
with a fully loaded Omni system of 6 combo I/O modules, 2 digital I/O modules
and 2 dual serial I/O modules. The Omni must be DC powered if this 500 mA
limit is to be exceeded.
The maximum system configuration of the Omni is 24 process inputs, 12
process outputs, 24 digital I/O points, and 4 serial I/O channels dissipates
approximately 24 Watts. This causes an internal temperature of 15F (8.33C)
over the ambient. The unit should not be mounted in a cabinet or panel where
the ambient inside the cabinet will exceed 110F (43.33C).
1-17
Chapter 1
CAUTION
The Power Low and +5 v

Adjust are factory
adjustments that require the
use of special equipment.
DO NOT attempt to adjust.
AC Connector
Fig. 1-14. Power Supply Module Model # 68-6118
1-18
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
1.8.
Firmware and Software
Omni flow computers are supplied with pre-programmed firmware and PC

configuration software which permit a single unit to perform a great diversity of
combined flow measurement tasks, such as:
o Multiple Meter Run Totalizing, Batching, Proving, and Data Archiving
o Flow and Sampler Control
o Direct Interface to Gas Chromatographs and Smart/Multivariable
Transmitters
o Selectable Communications Protocols to Directly Interface to DCS, PLC
and SCADA Host Systems
The flow computer database numbers thousands of data points and provides
the tightest communications coupling yet between SCADA and the metering
system.
1.8.1.
Interrupt-Driven CPU
This is a very important aspect to firmware. It provides for a multi-tasking

environment in which priority tasks can be undertaken concurrently with
unrelated activity. This provides for high-speed digital signals to be output at the
same time as measurement computations and serial communications to a
printer or host computer, without degradation in speed or tasking.
All custody transfer measurement programs are stored in EPROM or Flash
Memory. This prevents damage due to electrical noise, or tampering with the
integrity of calculation specifications. SRAM programming can also be
accommodated.
1.8.2.
Cycle Time
All time-critical measurement functions are performed by the flow computer

every 500 msec. This provides greater accuracy of measurement calculations
and permits a faster response by pipeline operations in critical control functions,
such as opening or closing valves.
1.8.3.
On-line Diagnostics and Calibration
Extensive diagnostic software is built into the system which allows the
technician to locally or remotely debug a possible problem without interrupting
on-line measurement. Calibration of analog signals is performed through the
keypad and software. The system has only two potentiometers, both of which
are on the power supply and are factory set and need no adjustment.
1.8.4.
PC Communications Interface
The wide use of PCs and video display units makes it possible to provide
software for off-line/on-line access to measurement, configuration and
calibration data. Collection of historical reports, including alarms, interval
reports of any time sequence, liquid batch and prove reports, and full remote
technical intervention capabilities are also provided.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
1-19
Chapter 1
1.8.5.
INFO - Full details about the
OmniCom configuration
program are documented in
Appendix C.
On-line or off-line configuration of your Omni Flow Computer is possible using

an IBM PC compatible running the OmniCom program supplied with your flow
computer. This powerful software allows you to copy, modify and save to disk
entire configurations. The program also allows you to print customized reports
by inputting report templates that are uploaded to the flow computer.
1.8.6.
INFO - The current firmware
has been fully tested and
assured to be in
conformance to Year 2000
requirements. For more
information, please contact
our technical support staff.
1-20
OmniCom Configuration PC Software
Year 2000 Compliance
Omni flow computer firmware has been tested in conformance to Year 2000
requirements. It will accurately process time- and date-related data after
December 31st, 1999. Software and hardware designed to be used before,
during and after the calendar year 2000 will operate appropriately relating to
date information. All calculating and logic of time-related data will produce the
expected results for all valid date values within the application.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
1.9.
CAUTION!
POTENTIAL FOR DATA

LOSS!
Initializing Your Flow Computer
A processor reset signal is automatically generated when:

1) Power is applied.
2) The processor reset switch at the rear of the front panel is toggled.
3) The watchdog timer fails to be reset by firmware every 100 milliseconds.
The flow computer will perform a diagnostic check of all program and randomaccess memory whenever any of the above events occur.
The program is stored with a checksum in Non-volatile Read-only Memory. The
program alarms if the calculated checksum differs from the stored checksum.
The most obvious cause of such a problem would be a bent pin on a program
memory chip. The validity of all data stored in RAM memory is checked next.
This data includes totalizers, configuration data and historical data. Any
problems here will cause the computer to initialize the RAM and display the
following message:
RAM Data Invalid
Reconfigure
System
Using OMNI as
Initial Password
If due to the RAM area in the computer not agreeing with the checksum area,
the computer will display the following message:
RAM & Calibrate Data
Invalid, Reconfigure
& Re-calibrate Using
OMNI as Password
Assuming that the EPROM memory and RAM memory are valid, the flow
computer then checks the software configuration against the installed I/O
modules and displays a screen similar to the following:
INFO - For information on

adjusting module
configuration settings, see
Volume 3.
Module S-Ware H-Ware

A-1
Y
Y
B-1
Y
N
D-1
Y
Y
S-1
N
Y
Revision No. 023.70
EPROM Checksum 1B36
A N in the hardware column indicates that a module has been removed since
the software was configured. A N in the software column indicates that a
module has been added. In either case you should make the columns agree by
adding or removing modules or re-configuring the software.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
1-21
Volume 1
2. Process Input/Output Combination

Module Setup
INFO - User selection of
process I/O is available with
combo cards that can be a
mix of meter pulse, frequency
densitometer, 4-20mA, 4wire 100 ohm RTD inputs,
and fused 4-20mA outputs.
Combo Module Input
Features - The input
characteristics of each
combo module are as follows
(see table on right):
A Type: Each input can be
1-5v; 4-20mA. Inputs #1
and #2 also accept RTD.
Inputs #3 and #4 also
accept flow pulse signals.
B Type: Inputs #1, #2 & #3
can be 1-5v; 4-20mA.
Inputs #1 and #2 also
accept RTD. Input #3 also
accepts flow pulses and
Input #4 is fixed as a
frequency density input.
E/D Type: Inputs #1 and #2
can be 1-5v; 4-20mA and
RTD. Inputs #3 and #4
are frequency density.
E Type: Inputs #1 and #2
can be 1-5v; 4-20mA and
RTD. Inputs #3 and #4
accept flow pulses.
H Type: All inputs are
Honeywell DE Protocol.
HV Type: All inputs are
Honeywell Multivariable
DE Protocol.
SV Type: Each port (#1 and
#2) is capable of RS-485
multi-drop to various
2.1.
Introduction
All process measurement signals are input via the process I/O combination (or
combo) modules plugged into the backplane of the computer. There currently
are 7 types of combo modules available: A, B, E, E/D, H, HV, and SV Types.
The 7 types of modules are actually manufactured using only 4 types of printed
circuit modules. The first can be configured as either an A or B Module; the
second is used for an E or E/D Module; the third printed circuit is used for an H
or HV Type Module; and the fourth for an SV Module.
2.2.
Features of the I/O Combo Modules
Each combo module (except the SV Module) will handle 4 inputs of a variety of
signal types and provides one or two 4-20 mA analog outputs. The SV Module
has two ports and six 4-20 mA analog outputs. Only the E Combo Module has
Level A pulse fidelity checking and double chronometry proving capabilities.
The input/output capabilities and some of the features of the combo modules
are expressed in the following table.
INPUT/OUTPUT CAPABILITIES AND FEATURES OF EACH I/O COMBO MODULE T YPE

TYPE
INPUT #1
INPUT #2
INPUT #4
LEVEL A
FIDELITY
DOUBLE
CHRONOMETRY
PROVING
A
1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD
1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD
E/D
1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD
1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD
Two
4-20mA
No
No
One
4-20mA
No
No
Frequency Density
Two
4-20mA
No
No
Flow Pulses
Two
4-20mA
Yes
Yes
1-5v; 4-20mA; Flow Pulses

1-5v; 4-20mA
Flow Pulse
Frequency
Density
Honeywell DE Protocol
Two
4-20mA
No
No
HV
Honeywell Multivariable DE Protocol
Two
4-20mA
No
No
Six
4-20mA
No
No
PORT #1
SV
ALL.71+ w 05/99
INPUT #3
ANALOG
OUTPUTS
PORT #2
RS-485 Multi-drop to Various Multivariable Transmitters
2-1
Chapter 2
Process Input/Output Combination Module Setup
2.2.1.
Setting the Address of the Combo Modules
Jumpers are provided on each combo module which allow the user to select the
address needed to access the module. Changing the software functions of the
module is also done by moving the appropriate jumper; i.e., A or B Type, E or
E/D Type.
2.2.2.
Hardware Analog Configuration Jumpers
Other jumpers are provided on each module which select the correct hardware
analog configuration for the type of signal that each input channel will accept.
This allows the same basic hardware module to accept signals such as 4-20
mA, 1-5 VDC, 100 ohm RTD probes and voltage or current pulses from a
turbine, PD meter or digital densitometer.
2.2.3.
IMPORTANT!
Combo I/O modules are

sorted alphabetically and by
low- to-high address. Adding
or removing cards may
change the existing sort if the
Check I/O function is
executed.
Process I/O Combo Module Addresses Versus

Physical I/O Points
A flow computer will usually have several combo modules installed depending
on the number of flowmeter runs to be measured. If for example, 2 A Type, 2 B
Type, 1 E/D Type and 1 E Type Modules were installed, they would normally be
numbered A1, A2, B1, B2, E/D1 and E1. Other address combinations are
acceptable (e.g.: A2, A3, B1, B4, E/D2 & E2 ) as long as each has a unique
identity. In the above example where 6 modules (A1, A2, B1, B2, E/D1 & E1)
are installed, the physical I/O points are mapped as follows. (Note that E/D
modules come before the E modules!)
To standardize, Omni recommends that combo modules should always be
installed starting with the lowest number A Type Module in I/O Slot #5 (Slot #3
in Omni 3000) as shown, with additional modules being installed in ascending
order towards Slot #10 (Slot #4 in Omni 3000).
PROCESS I/O COMBO MODULE ADDRESSES VERSUS PHYSICAL I/O POINTS
2-2
M ODULE IDENTITY
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
BACKPLANE POSITION
PHYSICAL TERMINALS
A1
1-4
1&2
Slot 5
TB5 1-12
A2
5-8
3&4
Slot 6
TB6 1-12
B1
9-12
Slot 7
TB7 1-12
B2
13-16
Slot 8
TB8 1-12
E/D1
17-20
7&8
Slot 9
TB9 1-12
E1
21-24
9 & 10
Slot 10
TB10 1-12
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
2.2.4.
Assigning Specific Signal Inputs
The Omni factory pre-assigns the physical I/O points of each flow computer
based on information supplied at time of order. This configuration information is
stored in battery backed-up static CMOS RAM. If you wish to change or add to
these assignments, refer to the section Program Setup in Volume 3, Chapter
2 Flow Computer Configuration and follow these basic rules:
1) Digital densitometer signals can only be assigned to the fourth channel of
each B Type Combo Module, or the third and fourth channel of each E/D
Module.
2) RTD signals can only be assigned to the first or second channel of each
A, B, E/D or E combo module. Whenever possible, avoid using the
second RTD excitation current source of an A Type Combo Module as
this makes the second 4-20 mA output on that module inaccessable.
3) Pulse signals from flowmeters can be assigned only to the 3rd channel of
each combo module and/or the 4th channel of each A Combo Module and
E Combo Module (E/D Combo Modules excepted).
4) Pulse signals to be used for Pulse Fidelity Checking must be connected
to the 3rd and 4th channel of an E Combo Module with the third channel
assigned as the flow input.
5) Use the 3rd and 4th input channels of an E Combo Module for double
chronometry proving.
INFO - The message I/O
Type Mismatch is
displayed if you try to assign
the same physical I/O point
to more than one type of
variable.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
1) Physical I/O points may be assigned to more than one variable (i.e.,
common temperature or pressure sensors) but variable types cannot be
mixed (i.e., the same physical point cannot be assigned to temperature
and pressure, for example)
2-3
Chapter 2
2.2.5.
Sample Omni Flow Computer Configuration

Charts
The charts (below and facing page) are examples of the configuration chart
supplied with your flow computer. It shows the type of combo modules installed,
the assigned process variables, the I/O point numbers and the jumper settings
for each input channel. To avoid confusion, we recommend that you plan any
changes to the physical I/O setup on such a chart before making any changes.
Fig. 2-1.
2-4
Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 3000
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
CUSTOMER________________________ P.O.#____________
S.O.#_______
SOFTWARE________________________ COMPUTER
S/N__________________
MODEL #_________________________
TAG#__________________________
Fig. 2-2.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 6000
2-5
Chapter 2
2.3.
The A and B Combo I/O Modules
All I/O signals of the combo module are converted to the form of high frequency
pulse trains (0 to 25 kHz). These pulse trains are passed through opto-couplers
providing electrical isolation.
All 4 process inputs can accept analog input voltages which are first buffered
with a 1 megohm input buffer and then converted to pulse frequencies using
precision voltage-to-frequency converters. With 2 averaged 500 millisecond
samples, analog conversion resolution is 14 binary bits. Linearity is typically
0.01% and the temperature coefficient is trimmed to better than 15
PPM/F. Current inputs such as 4-20 mA are converted to 1-5 VDC by
jumpering-in a 250 ohm shunt resistor.
The conversion gain of Input Channels 1 and 2 can also be increased by a
factor of 10, allowing low level RTD signals (0.20 - 0.55 VDC) to be accepted.
Input Channels 3 and 4 can also be jumpered to accept pulse signals (0-12
kHz). In this case, the input stage is configured as Schmitt Trigger, whose
threshold is 3.5 VDC and hysteresis 0.5 VDC. The voltage-to-frequency
converter is bypassed in this mode. Input Channel 4 can also be jumpered for
AC coupling and a 1-volt trigger threshold, making it suitable for interfacing to
Solartron type densitometers.
Analog Outputs #1 and #2 are obtained in the reverse fashion. A softwarecontrolled pulse train (100 Hz to 5.0 kHz) is passed through opto-couplers and
converted to a current using precision frequency-to-current converters.
Resolution of these outputs is approximately 12 binary bits. The second analog
output is not available when the module is jumpered as a B Type.
A/B Module Type

Select Jumper
AC / DC Coupling
Channel # 4 Input
Channel #4 Pulse
Input Threshold
Input Channel #4
Input Channel #3
Input Channel #2
Input Channel #1
Module Address
Jumpers
2nd. RTD Excitation Source
or
2nd Digital-Analog Output
Fig. 2-3.
2-6
Input Type Select

Jumpers
The A and B Combo I/O Module - Configuration Jumpers
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1

Two RTD excitation current sources (3.45 mA) are available on the combo
module. The second RTD excitation source will not be available if the second 420 mA analog output is in use (see setting of JP12). This is a function of the
number of circuits available from the back panel terminal to each combo
module. On a B Type module the second analog output is not available,
therefore this second RTD excitation source is always available.
2.3.1.
A and B Combo Module Non-Selectable or

Selectable Address
The Combo Type A or B Module can either have a non-selectable address or a

selectable Address.
The non-selectable address type is featured in older versions of the Omni Flow
Computer. The address is programmed into the Programmable Array Logic
(PAL) integrated circuit and is factory set. The module address can only be
changed by replacing the PAL chip.
The selectable type address is featured in current versions of the Omni.
Normally, it is preset at the factory, however it allows the user to change the
address simply by selecting the correct type and address on the selection
jumpers.
Non-Selectable Address
Selectable Address
TYPE B SELECT ONLY

COMBO ADDRESS SELECT
(A0 SHOWN)
Fig. 2-4.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
A and B Combo Module - Non-Selectable / Selectable Address
2-7
Chapter 2
2.3.2.
INFO - The second analog
output is not available in
cases where JP12 is used to
select the second RTD
excitation current source.
You may be able to avoid
using the second RTD
excitation source and save
losing an analog output by
using an unused excitation
source on another combo
module.
The A Type Combo I/O Module
The A Type Module is the most common configuration. It accepts 4 process

inputs and provides two 4-20 mA analog outputs. Each module is connected to
the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables. The actual
terminal block used depends upon which backplane connector (TB?) the module
is plugged into.
A Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments
TB? Terminal 1
Input Channel #1 (1-5v, 4-20mA, RTD)
TB? Terminal 2
Input Channel #1 (Isolated Signal Return)
TB? Terminal 3
TB? Terminal 4
TB? Terminal 5
Input Channel #3 (1-5v, 4-20mA, Flowmeter Pulses)
TB? Terminal 6
TB? Terminal 7
Input Channel #4 (1-5v, 4-20mA, Flowmeter Pulses)
TB? Terminal 8
TB? Terminal 9
RTD Excitation Current Source #1
TB? Terminal 10
Signal Return Terminals 9, 11 & 12 (Internally connected to DC power return)
TB? Terminal 11
Analog Output #1 (4-20mA)
TB? Terminal 12
Analog Output #2 (4-20mA) or RTD Excitation Current Source #2 (See

JP12 Setting)
JP11
Select P
(Pulse Type
Input - Channel
3 or 4)
Chan 4 Threshold
JP11 In = 3.5 VDC Out = 1.2 VDC
4-20mA Jumper Out
(Pulse Type Input)
JP11
Select Module Type

JPB Out = A Type
Address Select
(Address #2 Shown)
Module
A0
A1
A2
#1
Out Out Out
#2
In
Out Out
#3
Out
In
Out
#4
In
In
Out
#5
Out Out
In
#6
In
Out
In
Fig. 2-5.
2-8
JP12
RTD2
D/A2
JP12 In D/A2
Position
JP13 In DC
Coupled Position
A Type Combo Module - Flow Pulse Jumper Settings (Channel 3

or Channel 4)
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
JP11
Select A
(Analog Type)
Input
JP11
4-20 mA Jumper In
(Remove for
1-5VDC Input)
JP13 In DC Coupled
Position for Preamp
Turbine Meter Input
(Channel 4)
Fig. 2-6.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Configured for Configured for Configured for

4-20 mA Input 1-5 VDC Input
RTD Input
A Type Combo Module - Analog Input Jumper Settings
2-9
Chapter 2
2.3.3.
INFO - You will need either a
B Type Combo Module or
E/D Type Combo Module
when using digital
densitometers connected to
the flow computer.
With a B Type Combo
Module, Analog Output #2 is
never available because the
periodic time function uses
the internal timer counter that
is normally used to generate
the second analog output.
The B Type Combo I/O Module
The B Type Combo Module also handles 4 process inputs but Input Channel 4
is now used to measure the periodic time of a digital densitometer. The module
always has Input Channel 4 jumpered as a frequency input. Signal coupling can
be AC or DC with trigger threshold adjustable for 1.5 or 3.5 Vpp sensitivity.
Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the
ribbon cables. The actual terminal block used depends upon which backplane
connector (TB?) the module is plugged into.
B Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments
TB? Terminal 1
TB? Terminal 2
TB? Terminal 3
TB? Terminal 4
TB? Terminal 5
Input Channel #3 (1-5v, 4-20mA, DC Coupled Flowmeter Pulses)
TB? Terminal 6
TB? Terminal 7
Input Channel #4 (AC Coupled Densitometer Frequency)
TB? Terminal 8
TB? Terminal 9
TB? Terminal 10
Signal Return Terminals 9, 11 & 12 (Internally connected to DC power return)
TB? Terminal 11
Analog Output #1 (4-20mA)
TB? Terminal 12
JP11
Select P
(Pulse Type
Input)
Channel 4 Threshold
JP11 Out = 1.2 VDC (Solartron
& Sarasota)
JP11 In = 3.5 VDC (UGC)
JP11
Select Module Type

JPB Out = A Type
Address Select
(Address #2 Shown)
Module
A0
A1
A2
#1
Out Out Out
#2
In
Out Out
#3
Out
In
Out
#4
In
In
Out
#5
Out Out
In
#6
In
Out
In
Fig. 2-7.
2-10
JP12
RTD2
D/A2
JP12 In RTD2
Position
Pulse (Frequency) Type

Densitometer Requires AC
Coupling - Channel 4
B Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings - Frequency

Densitometer Setup
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
2.4.
The E/D and E Combo Modules
The hardware of E/D and E Combo Modules are similar to that of the A and B
Modules (discussed previously) except that these modules provide 2 analog
input channels which can be configured by jumpers for 1-5 volt, 4-20 mA or 4wire RTDs, and 2 pulse input channels which can be used to input flowmeter
pulses or densitometer frequency signals. Two 4-20 mA analog outputs are
always available on these modules. The module hardware can also be
configured by the application software to provide Level A Pulse Fidelity
Checking on the two pulse input channels.
2.4.1.
The E/D Type Combo I/O Module
The E/D Type Combo Module is simply an E Combo Module with the JPD
jumper in place. Input Channels 1 and 2 are analog input channels which can
be configured by jumpers for 1-5 volt, 4-20 mA, or 4-wire RTDs. Input Channels
3 and 4 are always configured to measure periodic time and accept pulse
signals from digital densitometers. Each module is connected to the back panel
terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables. The actual terminal numbers
used depend upon which backplane connector (TB?) the module is plugged into.
E/D Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments
TB? Terminal 1
TB? Terminal 2
TB? Terminal 3
TB? Terminal 4
TB? Terminal 5
Input Channel #3 (AC or DC Coupled Digital Densitometer Pulses) *
TB? Terminal 6
Input Channel #4 (AC or DC Coupled Digital Densitometer Pulses) *
TB? Terminal 7
Not Used
TB? Terminal 8
RTD Excitation Current Source #2 *
TB? Terminal 9
TB? Terminal 10
Signal Return for signals marked (*) (Internally connected to DC power return)
TB? Terminal 11
Analog Output #1 (4-20mA) *
TB? Terminal 12
Input Threshold Select

JP8 and JP1
In = +3.5 Volt DC / Out = +1.2 Volt DC
JP5
JP8 THRES
JP6
JP3
Select Module Type

JPD In = E/D Module
RTD 4-20
INPUT 1
JP5
JP8 THRES
JP2
JP7
AC DC AC
INPUT 3
Address Select
(Address #2 Shown)
Module
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
A0
Out
In
Out
In
Out
In
Fig. 2-8.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
A1
Out
Out
In
In
Out
Out
JP5
A2
Out
Out
Out
Out
In
In
JP2
JP7
AC DC AC
INPUT 4
AC Coupling
Select
AC DC AC
INPUT 3
JP6
RTD 4-20
INPUT 2
JP1 THRES
AC DC AC
INPUT 4
JP4
RTD 4-20
INPUT 1
JP6
RTD 4-20
INPUT 2
DC Coupling
Select
4-20 mA
Selected
E/D Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings
2-11
Chapter 2
2.4.2.
The E Type Combo I/O Module
The E Type Combo Module is simply an E/D Combo Module with the JPD
jumper out. Double chronometry timers are provided in this module
configuration, allowing either pulse train to be proved. Input Channels 1 and 2
are analog input channels which can be configured by jumpers for 1-5 volt, 4-20
mA, or 4-wire RTDs. Input Channels 3 and 4 are always configured to accept
flowmeter pulses. Both RTD excitation current sources are also always
available. Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12
wires on the ribbon cables. The actual terminal numbers used depend upon
which backplane connector (TB?) the module is plugged into.
E COMBO MODULE BACK PANEL T ERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS

TB? Terminal 1
TB? Terminal 2
TB? Terminal 3
TB? Terminal 4
TB? Terminal 5
Input Channel #3 (AC or DC Coupled Flowmeter Pulses) *
TB? Terminal 6
Input Channel #4 (AC or DC Coupled Flowmeter Pulses) *
TB? Terminal 7
Double Chronometry Detector Switch In (Active Low) *
TB? Terminal 8
TB? Terminal 9
TB? Terminal 10
Signal Return for signals marked (*)

return)
TB? Terminal 11
TB? Terminal 12
Input Threshold Select

JP8 and JP1
In = +3.5 Volt DC / Out = +1.2 Volt DC
(Internally connected to DC power
JP5
JP8 THRES
JP6
JP3
Select Module Type

JPD Out = E Module
RTD 4-20
INPUT 1
JP5
JP8 THRES
JP2
JP7
AC DC AC
INPUT 3
Address Select
(Address #2 Shown)
Module
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
A0
Out
In
Out
In
Out
In
Fig. 2-9.
2-12
A1
Out
Out
In
In
Out
Out
JP5
A2
Out
Out
Out
Out
In
In
JP2
JP7
AC DC AC
INPUT 4
AC Coupling
Select
AC DC AC
INPUT 3
JP6
RTD 4-20
INPUT 2
JP1 THRES
AC DC AC
INPUT 4
JP4
RTD 4-20
INPUT 1
JP6
RTD 4-20
INPUT 2
DC Coupling
Select
4-20 mA
Selected
E Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
2.5.
The H Type Combo I/O Module
The H Type Combo Module is a special module which is used to communicate

using the Honeywell DE Protocol with 4 Honeywell Smart Transmitters. It
operates on a point-to-point basis. Honeywell Model ST3000 temperature,
pressure and differential pressure transmitters can be used. Transmitters
operating in the analog mode are automatically given a wake-up pulse and
switched into the DE Mode, as soon as they are connected and assigned a
meter run function. Two analog outputs are always available on this module.
Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the
ribbon cables. The actual terminal numbers used depend upon which backplane
connector (TB?) the module is plugged into.
H Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments

TB? Terminal 1
Input Channel #1 (Transmitter Positive Terminal)
TB? Terminal 2
Input Channel #1 (Transmitter Negative Terminal)
TB? Terminal 3
TB? Terminal 4
TB? Terminal 5
TB? Terminal 6
TB? Terminal 7
TB? Terminal 8
TB? Terminal 9
Not Used
TB? Terminal 10

return)
TB? Terminal 11
TB? Terminal 12
Module Address
Jumpers
Green LED
Indicates Any
Activity
Red LED Indicates
OMNI is
Transmitting
Transmitter Loop
Status LEDs
Fig. 2-10. H Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings
ALL.71+ w 05/99
2-13
Chapter 2

Four sets of LED indicators show the status of each transmitter loop. The red
LED flashes when the flow computer is transmitting data to the transmitter, such
as a change of range, etc. The green LED shows that data is being received by
a channel. Note that each communication channel uses 2 wires and operates in
the half duplex/simplex mode which means that the green LED shows the flow
computers transmissions also. Each transducer is operated in the 6-byte
broadcast mode. In this mode, the process variable is updated approximately
every 300 msec. The database of the transducer is compared against the flow
computers database every 1 or 2 minutes, depending on the type of transducer.
Any changes to the transducer database which will affect the integrity of the
measured variable must be made via the flow computer.
These entries are:
o
o
o
o
Transducer Zero (Lower Range Value)

Transducer Full Scale (Upper Range Value)
Transducer Damping Code (Filter Time Constant)
Transducer Tag Name
The flow computer will not allow any other devices to alter these variables.
Should they be altered, by the Honeywell Smart Field Communicator (SFC) for
example, they will be restored to their original value as shown in the flow
computer (transducer tag name excepted).
2-14
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
2.6.
The HV Type Combo I/O Module
The HV Type Combo Module is simply an H Module with the JP1, JP2 and JP3
address jumpers in the right-most setting (Address 15). The HV Combo Module
is used to communicate with Honeywell SMV3000 multivariable transmitters
via the DE Protocol. Operation of the LEDs is similar to the normal H Module.
Since only one multivariable transmitter is needed per meter run and since
there are a maximum of four meter runs, there will never be a need for more
then one HV Combo I/O Module.
Two analog outputs are always available on this module. Each module is
connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables.
The actual terminal numbers used depend upon which backplane connector
(TB?) the module is plugged into.
HV Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments
TB? Terminal 1
TB? Terminal 2
TB? Terminal 3
TB? Terminal 4
TB? Terminal 5
TB? Terminal 6
TB? Terminal 7
TB? Terminal 8
TB? Terminal 9
Not Used
TB? Terminal 10

return)
TB? Terminal 11
TB? Terminal 12
Module Address
Jumpers
Green LED
Indicates Any
Activity
Red LED Indicates
OMNI is
Transmitting
Transmitter Loop
Status LEDs
Fig. 2-11. HV Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings
ALL.71+ w 05/99
2-15
Chapter 2
2.7.
The SV Type Combo I/O Module
The SV I/O Combo Module has two RS-485 serial ports which are used to
communicate with devices such as Rosemount 3095 multivariable transmitters
via the Modbus Protocol. Dual LEDs on each port provide status of the
communications. The module also has six 4-20 mA outputs.
SV Modules and Other
Combo Module Types The flow computer can
handle only two SV Modules
and three other A, B, E/D, E
or H I/O Combo Modules. An
HV module can also be
installed in lieu of one of
these I/O combo modules.
SV Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments

TB? Terminal 1
Port #1 B (RS-485)
TB? Terminal 2
Port #1 A (RS-485)
TB? Terminal 3
Port #2 B (RS-485)
TB? Terminal 4
Port #2 A (RS-485)
TB? Terminal 5
Signal Return for D/A Outputs signals marked (*)
TB? Terminal 6
Signal Return for D/A Outputs signals marked (*)
TB? Terminal 7
TB? Terminal 8
TB? Terminal 9
TB? Terminal 10
TB? Terminal 11
TB? Terminal 12
Jumper In = 1st MV Module

Jumper Out = 2 nd MV Module
MV Address
Selection Jumpers
IRQ 2 Always Selected
LED Indicators
PORT 1 (3)
PORT 2 (4)
RTS Always Selected
Transmitting (TX)/Ready-toSend (RTS) LEDs Red

Receiving LEDs Green
Both Jumpers In = Port Terminated

Both Jumpers Out = Port Unterminated
MV RS-485
Termination Jumpers
Fig. 2-12. Omni Multivariable Interface (SV Type Combo) Module Model
68-6203 - Jumper Settings
2-16
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
3. Mounting and Power Options

3.1.
Mechanical Installation
Omni offers a variety of enclosure options which can all be customized based
on customer specified requirements:
q Panel Mounting
q NEMA 4/4X
q NEMA 7
3.1.1.
Panel Mounting - Panels
less than 1/8 inch thick can
be used but will require that
the rear of the computer be
supported.
CAUTION!
Panel Mounting
A panel with the correct size cut out as dimensioned below is required. Panels
should be a minimum of 1/8 inch thick. Use the two keyed nuts and clamping
bars provided to mount the flow computer to the panel.

latching mechanism which
first must be disengaged by
lifting the bezel upwards
before withdrawing the unit
from the case.
IMPORTANT!
The maximum length of the

ribbon cable that connects
the keypad to the CPU
module is 18 inches. The
operation of the Central
Processor Module (CPU) will
be significantly affected if
this length is exceeded.
Fig. 3-1.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Panel Mounting - Omni 6000 (upper), Omni 3000 (lower)
3-1
Chapter 3
Mounting and Power Options
3.1.2.
Nema 4 / 4X Configurations
Both the NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X are weather-proof enclosures. The NEMA 4 is
a standard steel enclosure, whereas the NEMA 4X is a stainless steel
enclosure. Both Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 flow computers can be mounted
inside the NEMAs on a sturdy swing frame. The NEMAs also include a 5 x 3
viewing window with a lexan plate to allow easy viewing. Custom enclosures
are available.
NEMA 4 / 4X FOR OMNI 6000 / 3000
Dimensions
Weight
24 in x 24 in x 12 in
80 lbs
(610 mm x 610 mm x 305

mm)
(36 kg)
3.1.3.
Compliance
q
q
q
q
NEMA 4, -12 & -13

UL 50, Type 4
CSA Enclosure 4
IEC 529, IP66
Nema 7 Specification
The NEMA 7 is an explosion-proof enclosure which allows switch or pushbutton

options for manipulating the contained flow computer. The viewing window is
sustained by a 3 circular glass thick. Both the Omni 6000 and Omni 3000
flow computers can be mounted in the NEMA 7 with minimal specification
variances. Custom enclosures are available.
NEMA 7
Dimensions
12 in x 18 in x 9 in
FOR OMNI 6000
Weight
Compliance
120 lbs
(54 kg)
q NEC
Division 1 & 2
Class I; Groups B, C & D
Class II; Groups E, F & G
Class III
q IEC
(305 mm x 457 mm x 203

mm)
Zone 0 & 1
Groups IIC, IIB & IIA
NEMA 7
FOR OMNI 3000
Dimensions
Weight
Compliance
12 in x 12 in x 8 in
(305 mm x 305 mm x 203
mm)
110 lbs
(50 kg)
q NEC
Division 1 & 2
Class I; Groups B, C & D
Class II; Groups E, F & G
Class III
q IEC
Zone 0 & 1
Groups IIC, IIB & IIA
3-2
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
3.2.
INFO - A recommended
maximum of 500mA of
transducer loop power is
available with a fully loaded
system of 6 combo I/O
modules, 2 digital I/O
modules and 2 dual serial
I/O modules. The computer
must be DC powered if this
500 mA limit is to be
exceeded.
Input Power
The Omni Flow Computer can be AC or DC powered.
3.2.1.
AC Power
When AC powered, 120 VAC, 50 Watts is applied to the AC terminal block.

Approximately 500 mA at 24 VDC is always available from the DC terminal
block to drive transducer loops, pre-amplifiers, and digital I/O loads when the
unit is powered by AC.
The flow computer can be special ordered for operation on 220-250 VAC
supplies. This requires a modified power supply unit and a different cord set.
CAUTION!
POTENTIAL FOR DATA

LOSS!
3.2.2.
DC Power
When DC powered, 18 to 30 volts at 24 Watts is applied to the DC terminal

block (this wattage figure does not include power sourced from the digital output
terminals).
3.2.3.
Safety Considerations
To ensure continued protection against fire, the AC fuse must always be

replaced with a 0.5 amp (5x20 mm) slow blow fuse. The DC fuse must be
replaced by a 3 amp, 2 AG fast blow.
Power should be connected via a suitable power disconnect switch certified as
being safe for the area (for grounding requirements, see sidebar note on facing
page).
ENVIRONMENTAL - The
maximum system
configuration of 24 process
inputs, 12 process outputs,
24 digital I/O points and 4
serial I/O channels dissipates
approximately 24 Watts. This
causes an internal
temperature rise of 15F over
the ambient. The unit should
not be mounted in a cabinet
or panel where the ambient
inside the cabinet will exceed
110F.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
3-3
Chapter 3
3.3.
3.3.1.
Power Terminals
CE Equipment Power Terminals
In this current version of the Omni 3000 and Omni 6000 back panel the AC
receptacle is a power line filter with a separate AC fuse holder. The AC power is
connected via a separate 4-wire conductor cable which plugs into the power
supply. The DC terminal is on TB 11 (for Omni 6000) and on TB5 (for Omni
3000).
The power supply used with this version is a Model 68-6118; no fuses.
Back Panel Fuses - All DC

fuses are 3 amp, fast-blow
Model 225.003,
manufactured by Littlefuse.
All AC fuses are amp,
slow-blow Model 229.500,
manufactured by Littlefuse
Earth Ground
Requirements -To minimize
the effects of electrical
transients, the outer case of
the flow computer should be
connected to a high quality
earth ground using the
grounding stud located on
the back of the unit (see Fig.
3-2).
Connect the shields of all
wiring to the same grounding
stud. To eliminate earth loop
currents, shields should be
left unconnected and taped
back at the other end.
Fig. 3-2.
3-4
Input Power Terminals - Omni 3000 (upper), Omni 6000 (lower)
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
3.3.2.
Extended Back Panel Power Terminals
Several mounting options are now available with the Omni 6000 flow computer
by requesting the Extended Back Panel Termination option. This panel
incorporates all the terminal blocks of Versions 2 and 3, TB1 through TB10 with
terminals marked 1 through 12. Screw type terminals are provided for AC and
DC power. In addition to TB1 through TB10, extra DC (fused), return and shield
terminals are provided for TB1 through TB8. Extended 64-conductor ribbon
cables and the AC cables are provided with a standard length of 5 feet.
Amp
Extended Back Panel

Fuses - All DC fuses are
amp fast-blow manufactured
by Littlefuse, Model 225.250.
The main DC fuse is 3 amp.
The AC fuse is amp slowblow manufactured by
Littlefuse, Model 239.500.
The fuse for the back panels
AC receptacle is a 5x20mm,
amp slow-blow.
amp
3 Amp
Fig. 3-3.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Input Power Terminals - Extended Back Panel (Omni 6000 only)
3-5
Chapter 3
3-6
Fig. 3-4.
Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 6000)
Fig. 3-5.
Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 3000)

ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
3.4.
Power Supply Module Switching

Regulator
All analog and digital circuits within the flow computer are powered from a 5volt switching regulator located on the power supply module. This is located in
the rear most connector on the computer backplane.
The DC power which supplies the switching regulator either comes directly from
the DC terminals on the back panel of the flow computer (18-30 VDC) or by
rectifying the output of the integral 120 VAC (240 VAC) to 20 VAC transformer.
DC power into or out of the back panel DC power terminals is fused by a 3
Amp, 2 AG fuse located on the back panel next to the DC power terminals.
Regulated 5-volt power is monitored by a 3 to 4 second shutdown circuit located
on the power supply module. When power is applied to the computer there will
be a delay of 3 to 4 seconds before the unit powers up.
CAUTION
The Power Low and +5 v

Adjust on the Power Supply
Module are factory
adjustments that require the
use of special equipment.
DO NOT attempt to adjust
Fig. 3-6.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Power Supply Module Model 68-6118
3-7
Volume 1
4. Connecting to Flowmeters
4.1.
Turbine Flowmeter (A or B Combo

Module)
Input Channels 3 and 4 can be independently jumpered to accept pulse signals.

Channel 3 on the A and B Combo Modules and Channel 4 on the A Combo
Module can be used to input turbine or positive displacement flowmeters. The
input threshold is 3.5 volts; hysteresis 1/2 volt.
Fig. 4-1.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Connecting to a Turbine Pre-amp (A or B Combo Modules)
4-1
Chapter 4
Connecting to Flowmeters
4.2.
Wiring Flowmeter Signals to E Type

Combo Modules
Input Channels 3 and 4 of each E Type Combo Module are used to input
signals from turbine or PD flowmeters. Both channels share a common signal
return at the Omni terminals. Input threshold can be jumpered for +1 or +3.5
volt. Input coupling can be AC or DC (see Chapter 2). Hysteresis is
approximately 0.5 volt.
Fig. 4-2.
4-2
Wiring to Turbine Pre-Amps (E Type Combo Modules Only)
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
4.3.
Faure Herman Turbine Meters (E

Combo Module)
Faure Herman Turbine Meters are used in liquid applications only. For these
flowmeters, high threshold jumpers JP1 and JP8 on the E Type Combo Module
must be installed.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Fig. 4-3.
Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using Omni 24 VDC
Fig. 4-4.
Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using External 24 VDC
4-3
Chapter 4
Connecting to Flowmeters
4.4.
Pulse Fidelity and Integrity Checking

with E Type Combo Modules
A flowmeter with dual channel out-of-phase outputs can be connected as

shown. The flow computer can be configured to continuously compare the
signals for frequency and sequence on a pulse-to-pulse basis, and alarm and
log any differences. (See Volume 5, Technical Bulletin TB-970901 for more
information on Pulse Fidelity Checking.)
Fig. 4-5.
4-4
Connecting Dual Coil Turbines for Pulse Fidelity Checking
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
5.
Connecting to Transducers and

Transmitters
5.1.
Wiring the Input Transducers
Because of the high density of connections on the back panel terminal, it is

recommended that wiring to the terminals be made with 18-22 gauge wire
wherever possible. Transducers should be wired using twisted pairs of 18 gauge
shielded wire. The shields should be connected together and grounded at the
flow computer end. To prevent ground loops, shields should be taped back and
insulated at the transducer end.
Each of the 4-20 mA process input channels are individually optically isolated.
The transducer may be connected in series with either the power or return line
of the transducer current loop. The figure shown below shows a transducer
wired in the power leg of the loop.
Fig. 5-1.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Wiring the 4-20 mA Inputs (Input Channels 1 & 2 shown)
5-1
Chapter 5
Connecting to Transducers and Transmitters
5.2.
Wiring of a Dry C Type Contact
Certain types of flowmeter photo-pulsers produce a low frequency contact pulse

output (typical 1 pulse per barrel). To accommodate these low frequencies, they
can be wired to any pulse input on A or E Type Combo Modules, as shown
below.
Fig. 5-2.
5-2
Wiring for Dry C Type Contact
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
5.3.
INFO - Each A or B Type
Combo Module always has 1
RTD excitation current
source available at Terminal
9. A second source is always
available on B Types at
Terminal 12.
Wiring RTD Probes
Channels 1 and 2 of each combo I/O module can be jumpered to accept a

signal from a 100 ohm RTD probe. The flow computer can be configured for the
DIN 43-760 curve (a= 0.00385) or the American curve (a=0.00392). The probe
is wired in a 4-wire configuration as shown below.
TIP - The excitation current

source for an RTD need not
come from the same combo
module from which the signal
is input. You will need to
recalibrate the input channel
if you choose to use an
excitation source from
another combo module.
Fig. 5-3.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Wiring a 4-Wire RTD Temperature Probe
5-3
Chapter 5
5.4.
5.4.1.
INFO - Because the density
pulse signal can be a small
AC signal with a large DC
offset, you must select AC
coupling and low trigger
threshold for the combo
module channel used; i.e.: on
the B Type Combo Modules,
JP13 in the AC position and
JP11 out; on E/D Combo
Modules, JP2 and JP7 in the
AC positions and JP1 and
JP8 out.
Input impedance will be
10kohms; 1.5Vpp is required
from the densitometer to
reliably trigger the input.
Wiring Densitometers
Wiring Densitometer Signals to an E/D Type
Combo Module
Two independent densitometers with RTD probes can be wired directly to an

E/D type combo module. For example, Solartron and UGC densitometers
can be wired to the same E/D Type Module.
5.4.2.
Solartron Densitometers
Connecting to a Solartron Digital Densitometer actually involves two devices:

the densitometer current pulse signal and the densitometer 4-wire RTD probe
attached to the vibrating tube. The pulse signal is connected to Channel 4 of a
B Type Combo Module. The RTD is connected to Channel 1 or Channel 2. The
device can be connected with or without safety barriers, depending on the
needs of the application.
INFO - When configuring the

flow computer, select the
DIN curve for this RTD
temperature point.
Fig. 5-4.
5-4
Wiring a Solartron Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a B

Type I/O Combo Module
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
NOTICE!
Diagrams shown are based

on published manufacturers,
data. Omni accepts no
responsibility for wiring or
installation of equipment in a
hazardous area. Equipment
must always be installed in
compliance with local and
national safety standards.
Fig. 5-5.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Wiring a Solartron Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a

B Type I/O Combo Module
5-5
Chapter 5
5.4.3.
pulse signal can be a small
AC signal with a large DC
offset, you must select AC
coupling and low trigger
threshold for the combo
module channel used; i.e.: on
the B Type Combo Modules,
JP13 in the AC position and
JP11 out; on E/D Combo
Modules, JP2 and JP7 in the
AC positions and JP1 and
JP8 out.
10kohms; 1.5Vpp is required
from the densitometer to
reliably trigger the input.
Sarasota Densitometers
The Sarasota Densitometer provides a voltage pulse signal representing

density and also a 4-wire 100 ohm RTD probe monitoring the temperature of
the device. The pulse signal is connected to Channel 4 of a B Type Combo
Module. The RTD is connected to Channel 1 or Channel 2 of any module. The
device can be connected with or without safety barriers, depending on the
needs of the application.
INFO - When configuring the

flow computer, select the
DIN curve for this RTD
temperature point.
Fig. 5-6.
5-6
Wiring a Sarasota Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a B

ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
NOTICE!

Fig. 5-7.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Wiring a Sarasota Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a B

5-7
Chapter 5
5.4.4.
pulse signal is a large DC
pulse signal with little or no
DC offset, you must select
DC coupling with normal
trigger threshold for the
combo module channel used;
i.e.: on the B Type Combo
Modules, JP13 in the DC
position and JP11 in; on E/D
Combo Modules, JP2 and
JP7 in the DC positions and
JP1 and JP8 in.
1Mohms; <3.0Vfor low level
and >4V.0 for high level is
required from the
densitometer to reliably
trigger the input.
UGC Densitometers
The UGC Densitometer output provides an open collector transistor that

requires an external pull-up resistor to 24 volts DC. The densitometer provides
a 24 volt DC pulse output in the range of 1 to 2 kHz. The pulse signal is
connected to Channel 4 of a B Type Combo Module and can be connected with
or without safety barriers, depending on the application requirements.
Fig. 5-8.
5-8
Wiring a UGC Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a B Type

I/O Combo Module
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
NOTICE!

Fig. 5-9.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Wiring a UGC Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a B

5-9
Chapter 5
5.5.
Wiring of Honeywell ST3000

Transmitters
Up to four Honeywell Smart Transmitters can be wired to each H Type Combo

I/O Module. Loop power is provided by the combo module. No external power is
required.
Fig. 5-10. Wiring of a Honeywell Smart Transmitter
5-10
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
5.6.
5.6.1.
Wiring Micro Motion Transmitters

Connecting Micro Motion RFT9739 Transmitter
to A Type or E Type Process I/O Combination
Modules
The frequency/pulse output that represents the volume flow from the RFT9739
Transmitter can be wired directly into either Frequency Channel 3 or 4 on A
Type or E Type Combo Modules. (See Technical Bulletin TB-980401.)
Fig. 5-11. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter
ALL.71+ w 05/99
5-11
Chapter 5
5.6.2.
Connecting Micro Motion RFT 9739 via RS-485

Serial Communications
Serial communication via RS-485 can be accomplished using the Peer-to-Peer

Mode via Omni Serial Port #2 of the RS-232-C/485 Serial Module # 68-6205,
with selection jumpers in the RS-485 position. (See Technical Bulletin TB980401.)
OMNI BACK PANEL TERMINALS

SERIAL PORT #2 (PEER-TO-PEER)
RS-485 MODE SELECTED
7 (B)
8
9
10
11 (A)
Fig. 5-12. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof)

Transmitter Via Two-wire RS-485 Communications (Serial I/O Module #686205)
5-12
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
5.6.3.
Connecting Micro Motion RFT9739 via Serial

RS-232-C to 485 Converter
Serial communication via RS-485 can also be accomplished utilizing the Peerto-Peer Mode via RS-232-C. (See Technical Bulletin TB-980401.)
Fig. 5-13. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof)

Transmitter Via Serial RS-485 Converter
ALL.71+ w 05/99
5-13
Volume 1
6. Connecting Analog Outputs and

Miscellaneous I/O Including Provers
6.1.
Analog Outputs
Analog outputs are available for remote terminal units, flow controllers, and
recording devices. The analog outputs source 4-20 mA into a load wired to the
DC power return. Maximum load resistance is 1000 ohms at 25 VDC. Digital-toAnalog conversion is accomplished with a 12-bit binary resolution.
Two outputs are available on each A Type Combo Module. One output is
available on each B Type Combo Module.
To calibrate, each of the outputs is set to 4.00 and 20.00 mA and the software
zero and span adjusted while in the Diagnostic Mode (described later). Any
value between 2.5 and 23.0 mA may be output.
Each output is assigned via the keypad or serial link to one of the many
variables available (see Volume 3).
Fig. 6-1.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Wiring Devices to the Flow Computers Analog Outputs
6-1
Chapter 6
Connecting Analog Outputs and Miscellaneous I/O Including Provers
6.2.
6.2.1.
Digital Inputs/Outputs
Wiring a Digital Point as an Input or an Output
Digital I/O modules handle 12 digital points. Each point can be independently
configured as either an input or output via the keypad or via a serial port.
The power and returns for all digital I/O signals are common with the DC power
terminals. Digital output loads are connected between the I/O terminal and DC
power return. An approximate total load of 500 mA per module (per 12 points) is
allowed although an individual point can handle 200 mA. Voltages applied to
I/O points used as inputs must not exceed the DC supply voltage at the DC
terminal, or the protective fuse for that point on the digital I/O module may
blow.
Fig. 6-2.
6-2
Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Input
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
Fig. 6-3.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Output
6-3
Chapter 6
6.2.2.
Connecting Various Digital I/O Devices
On the Omni 6000, Digital I/O Module #1, handling points 1 through 12, is
plugged into the backplane connector marked I/O Module #1. This in turn is
connected to Terminal Strip TB1-1 through 12. Digital I/O Module #2, handling
points 13 through 24, is plugged into the backplane connector marked I/O
Module #2 which is connected to Terminal Strip TB2-1 through 12. The Omni
3000 has only one digital I/O module which is connected to Terminal TB1-1
through 12 on the back panel.
The diagram below shows the typical wiring required to interface to other
devices, such as: switches, relays, provers, programmable logic controllers,
among other devices.
Fig. 6-4.
6-4
Connecting Digital I/O Devices to the Flow Computer
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
6.3.
6.3.1.
INFO - The prover detector
switch signal activates an
interrupt request into the
computer. Jumpers JP1 and
JP2 on the digital I/O module
(Fig. 1-5) control which edge
of the signal will cause the
interrupt. Pulse counting
should start when the sphere
first activates the detector
switch. Install JP1 in cases
where the detector switchs
normally opened contacts are
used (Fig. 1-9). Install JP2 in
cases where the detector
switchs normally closed
contacts are used.
Note: When using double

chronometry proving, the
detector switch input is on
Terminal 7 of an E Type
Combo I/O Module.
Provers
Connecting Pipe Prover Detector Switches
Pipe prover detector switches are the only I/O signal that must be connected to
a specific I/O point. They must be wired as shown in Fig. 6-4 to Digital I/O
Point #1, and the point assigned to Boolean 1700 in the software configuration
(see Volume 3). This is because Digital I/O Point #1 is internally jumpered to
cause a high priority interrupt of the computer used to start and stop prover
counting. Digital I/O Point #1 can still be used as a normal I/O point if pipe
proving is not needed.
6.3.2.
Interfacing to a Brooks Compact Prover
The Omni Flow Computer interfaces to the basic Brooks Compact Prover Skid
Electronics (the Brooks Control Box is not used). The control interface involves
one digital output to control the piston launch, a digital input point to monitor the
position of the piston, and a detector switch signal shared between each meter
run to be proved.
Compact provers use the Pulse Interpolation Method of measuring the
flowmeter counts between the detector switches. The interpolation method
requires that the detector switches activate high speed hardware timers on the
Omnis combo I/O module. The detector switch signals called first and final
pickoff by Brooks are connected to the Detector Switch input of each E Type
Combo Module installed in the flow computer.
The following diagram shows the complete installation, including 4-20 mA
signals representing the temperature and pressure of the prover tube as well as
the nitrogen plenum chamber. The 12-volt DC power supply is user supplied.
Fig. 6-5.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Wiring to a Brooks Compact Prover
6-5
Chapter 6
6.3.3.
Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooks

Compact Prover
The plenum chamber pressure is used as a spring to close the poppet valve of
the piston and cause the piston to be moved forward by the flowing liquid. The
pressure required to close the poppet valve varies with pipeline pressure. Too
high a plenum pressure causes the piston to be pushed downstream by this
excess pressure and can lead to inaccurate provings.
The Omni Flow Computer can monitor the plenum pressure and line pressure,
and automatically charge or vent nitrogen from the plenum chamber.
Before commencing a proving run, the Omni Flow Computer
plenum pressure versus the required pressure and activates either
or vent solenoid valve. The pressures will be matched within
entered deadband percent. The Omni activates the solenoids via
relays (not shown).
checks the
the charge
some user
low voltage
An additional enhancement shown is a pressure switch signaling low nitrogen

bottle pressure. In this case, the prove attempt would be aborted if it became
impossible to achieve the correct plenum pressure.
Fig. 6-6.
6-6
Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooks Compact Prover
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
7. Connecting to Serial Devices

7.1.
serial port. Thirty-two
devices may be connected
when using the RS-485
mode. Typically, one serial
I/O module is used on the
Omni 3000, providing two
RS-485 Communications
with an RS-232-C Serial I/O
Module #68-6005 - When
connecting to RS-485 serial
devices using Serial I/O
Module #68-6005, a RS-232to-485 Converter device must
be used.
Serial Port Connection Options
The total number of serial communication ports depends on the number of dual
port serial I/O modules installed. The Omni 6000 accepts 2 serial I/O modules;
the Omni 3000 accepts 1. Two optional serial communication I/O modules are
available with your flow computer (see Chapter 1): the RS-232-C (compatible)
Model #68-6005, and the RS-232-C/485 Model #68-6205. The older Model #686005 is only capable of RS-232 compatible serial communications. The newer
Model #68-6205 is capable of either RS-232 or RS-485 communications via a
selection jumper.
When jumpered for RS-232, the characteristics and functionality of this module
is identical to that of the older RS-232-C module, providing 2 optically isolated
RS-232-C serial ports which can operate from 0.3 to 38.4 kbps. These ports are
used for printers, personal computers, and SCADA devices. Although the output
voltage levels are compatible with the RS-232 standard, the output is actually
tristated when not sending data. This allows the transmit output from multiple
flow computers to be bussed. A terminating resistor is provided at the back
panel connections to pull down the transmitter signal to a mark (-9V). Hence, a
short jumper is required in many cases from TX (Out) to Term.
RS-485 communications allows interconnecting multiple flow computers,
programmable logic controllers, multivariable transmitters, and other serial
devices in either four-wire multi-drop mode or peer-to-peer two-wire multi-drop
mode.
have an SV Module to
communicate with RS-485
compatible multivariable
transmitters. This serial
module must be jumpered to
IRQ 3 when used in
combination with an SV
Module. Without an SV
Module, the jumper must be
placed at IRQ 2. The SV
Module can only be used with
this serial module (68-6205)
and is not compatible with
the Serial I/O Module # 686005. For more information,
see Technical Bulletin # TB980303.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
7-1
Chapter 7
Connecting to Serial Devices
7.2.
7.2.1.
INFO - The speed that data
can be accepted by the
printer depends on the size
of the input buffer (if any)
and the print mode (draft or
near letter quality). Typical
printers provide about 120
printed characters/second.
Connecting to Printers
Connecting to a Dedicated Printer (Port 1)
The following diagram shows the Omni Flow Computer connected to a

dedicated printer. The hardware handshake wire connected to Pin 20 of the
DB25 connector is optional, as the computer can be made to insert null
characters after each carriage return to match the computer data transmission
rate to the printer speed.
TIP - Most printers default to

the draft mode. Leave it there
for maximum performance.
Because of impact printer
limitations, no speed
improvement is obtained by
selecting baud rates over
2.4kbps.
Fig. 7-1.
7-2
Connecting a Printer to Serial Port #1 of the Flow Computer
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
7.2.2.
Connecting to a Shared Printer (Port 1)
Up to 12 Omni flow computers can share a printer. They are connected as

shown. One flow computer is assigned as the master and manages all traffic to
the printer. Each computer monitors the data transmitted to the printer by
having its TX terminal jumpered to its RX terminal. Resident firmware ensures
that only one computer will attempt to access the printer at any one time.
INFO - Note that only 1

terminating pull-down resistor
is jumpered in place.
Fig. 7-2.
7.2.3.
Note: Refer to Volume 3,
Chapter 2 for Printer
Settings.
Connecting Several Flow Computers to a Shared Printer
Print Sharing Problems
Most problems associated with printer sharing show up as garbled reports or

locked up printers. This is usually caused by one or more computers sending
data to the printer at the same time. Check your wiring to the figure above and
consult the following checklist if you experience problems:
1) Check that all computers are set to the same baud rate, stop bits, and
parity settings as the printer.
2) All computers must have the Transmitter Key Delay set to zero (0).
3) One and only one computer must have its Printer Priority Number set to
1. All computers must have a different priority number.
4) Some printers provide jumpers or switches which set the polarity of the
Printer Ready signal on Pin 20. This signal must be positive when the
printer is ready.
5) When not using the Printer Ready signal (Pin 20), ensure that you have
entered enough NULs to prevent overrunning the printer buffer.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
7-3
Chapter 7
7.3.
Note:
Depending upon whether

a printer or Allen-Bradley
PLC is used.
Connecting to a Personal Computer and

Modem
Ports #1 and #2 (Ports #3 and #4* of an Omni 6000) can provide access to the
computers database using a Modbus protocol interface. This port is usually
connected to a PC running the OmniCom configuration software. Up to 12
Omni flow computers can be connected to 1 PC. The Modbus protocol includes
an address field which ensures that only 1 unit will transmit at a time.

Fig. 7-3.
7-4
Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB25 Female

Connector (Using Port #2 as an example)
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1

ALL.71+ w 05/99
Fig. 7-4.
Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB9 Female

Connector
Fig. 7-5.
Connecting Port #2 to a Modem
7-5
Chapter 7
7.4.
Peer-to-Peer
Communications - The
peer-to-peer communication
feature allows you to multidrop up to 32 flow computers
and other devices in RS-485
serial communications mode,
and up to 12 using RS-232-C
communications.
Peer-to-Peer Redundancy
Schemes - Redundancy
schemes allows for
uninterrupted measurement
and control functionality by
interconnecting two
identically equipped and
configured flow computers
(see Technical Bulletin TB980402).
Peer-to-Peer Communications and Multidrop Modes
Serial Port #2 can also be configured by the application software to act as a

peer-to-peer Modbus master port. This is a half duplex/simplex link which
allows any Omni Flow Computer to communicate with any other flow computer
or Modbus slave device. That data link can operate at up to 38.4 kbps and uses
a proprietary token passing scheme. Interconnecting multiple flow computers
and or multiple serial devices can be accomplished via RS-232-Compatible or
RS-485 communications.
7.4.1.
Peer-to-Peer RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop Mode
The diagram below shows the wiring requirements for multi-dropping two or
more flow computers via RS-485 in two-wire mode. This option is available only
with the Omni Serial I/O Module #68-6205. (See Technical Bulletin #TB980401.)
UP TO 32 FLOW COMPUTERS
OmniCom and Peer-toPeer - The OmniCom

Configuration PC Software
package supplied with your
Omni Flow Computer cannot
be used on Serial Port #2
when it is being used as a
peer-to-peer link.
GND
RS-485 TWO-WIRE
TERMINATED
Fig. 7-6.
7-6
RS-485 TWO-WIRE
NON-TERMINATED
RS-485 TWO-WIRE
NON-TERMINATED
RS-485 TWO-WIRE
NON-TERMINATED
Wiring of Several Flow Computers using the Peer-to-Peer

Feature via RS-485 Communications in Two-wire Multi-drop
Mode
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
7.4.2.
Peer-to-Peer via RS-232-C Communications
more flow computers in RS-232 C (compatible) mode. When multi-dropping two
or more flow computers with other serial devices via the RS-232-C mode, an
RS-232-to-RS-485 standard converter may be required. (See Technical
Bulletin #TB-980401.)
Fig. 7-7.
7.4.3.
Note: Refer to Volume 3,
Chapter 2 Flow Computer
Configuration.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Wiring of Several Flow Computers in the Peer-to-Peer Mode

using RS-232-C Communications.
Keying the Modem or Radio Transmitter Carrier

in Multi-drop Applications
Use the RTS signal to key the modem or radio transmitter carrier in a multi-drop
application. A delay between activating the RTS signal and actually sending
data is provided to allow for carrier acquisition at the remote end. This delay
can be selected as 0.0 msec, 50 msec, 100 msec, or 150 msec.
7-7
Chapter 7
7.4.4.
RS-485 Four-wire Multi-drop Mode
more flow computers via RS-485 in four-wire mode to a third party PLC type
device. Note that in the wiring example shown below, the PLC acts as a master
and can communicate with either flow computer. A four-wire wiring system does
not allow communications between slaves; i.e., data can only be transferred
between master and slaves. The RS-485 option is available only with the Omni
Serial I/O Module #68-6205.
UP TO 32 RS-485 DEVICES
SLAVE
SLAVE
TX-B
MASTER
PLC DEVICE
A
RX
RX-A
A
TX
TX-A
RX-B
RS-485
RS-485 FOUR-WIRE RS-485 FOUR-WIRE
Fig. 7-8.
7-8
Wiring of Multiple Flow Computers to a PLC Device Via RS-485

Communications in Four-wire Multi-drop Mode
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
7.5.
Connecting to a SCADA Device
When using an Omni 6000 with 2 serial I/O modules installed, a second
Modbus port (Physical Port #3 used as an example) can provide access to the
computers database. This port can also be connected to a PC or any SCADA
device either directly, via modem, or via radio link.
Fig. 7-9.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Typical Wiring of Port #3 to a SCADA Device via Modem
7-9
Chapter 7
7.6.
Interfacing the Fourth Serial Port to an

Allen-Bradley KE Module
Port #4 is available on Omni flow computers with the second serial module
fitted. This port can be selected to communicate with Allen-Bradley devices
using DF1 full duplex or half duplex protocol, or set up for Modbus devices. The
example below assumes that the Allen-Bradley Protocol has been selected.
Fig. 7-10. Wiring Serial Port #4 to Allen-Bradley KE Communications

Module
7-10
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
8. Diagnostic and Calibration Features

8.1.
Introduction
In the diagnostic mode you can verify that the I/O modules and transducers are
working and are calibrated to specification.
The actual process transducers used may provide a variety of signal types,
ranging from voltage or current pulses of various levels, to linear analog signals
such as 4-20 mA., 1-5V, 0-1V or RTD elements. In the case of pulse inputs, the
input module provides amplification and/or level shifting, Schmitt triggering and
opto-isolation.
When analog signals are used the input module provides all signal conditioning,
opto-isolation, and converts the analog signal to a high frequency pulse train, in
the range of 0 - 20 kHz. By using a precision voltage to frequency converter,
typical linearity of +/-0.01 % is obtained.
Certain diagnostic displays are always available while in the Display Mode. For
example pressing [Input] then [Display] will display the raw frequency input
from each process input point. The up/down arrow keys can be used to scroll
through all inputs. A typical display shows:
INFO - When viewing an
analog input point, the
frequency displayed
approximates 1000Hz/mA.
When viewing a turbine or
photo pulsar signal, the
display is the actual input
frequency.
Input % Freq/Period
#1
2530
Input % /Freq/Period
#2
3021
Pressing [Output] [Status] [Display] shows the current percentage output for
each of the digital to analog 4-20 mA outputs.
INFO - 0.0% corresponds to

4mA. 100.0% corresponds to
20mA.
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Analog Output %
#1
55.79
Analog Output %
#2
34.10
8-1
Chapter 8
Diagnostic and Calibration Features

Important timing information is available by pressing [Time] then [Display] and
then scrolling down using the down arrow. The displays are as follows:
Power Applied
Time:
09:10:30
Date:
01/21/91
Power Last Lost

Time:
10:25:21
Date:
01/20/91
The previous two displays of power lost and power applied allow the user to
estimate the amount of product flow which may be unaccounted for in the event
of a power failure.
Scrolling down further displays:
Main Task Timing-Sec
20 mS Task
00.00
50 mS Task
00.00
100mS Task
00.01
500mS Task
00.04
Background
00.02
This timing information refers to various main application tasks that run within
the computer. The information may be useful to Omni in the event of a
problem.
8.2.
INFO - The Diagnostic LED
glows red after a valid
password has been asked for
and entered.
Calibrating in the Diagnostic Mode
In the Diagnostic Mode the user selects a specific process variable to calibrate
or view. The display shows the input channel and combo module used for the
variable. Calibration override values can be input and the input signals can be
viewed simultaneously as engineering values % span, input voltage and
current. Analog outputs and digital I/O points can also be viewed and
manipulated.
8.2.1.
Entering The Diagnostic Mode
To enter the diagnostic mode proceed as follows press the [Alpha Shift] key,
then the [Diag] key.
INFO - The Select
Input/Output screen must
be displayed when making a
new selection while in the
Diagnostic Mode. Return to
this screen by pressing the
[Diag] key once.
8-2
The front panel diagnostic LED will glow green and the following will be
displayed on the first three lines of the LCD Display:
Select Input/Output
to Calibrate,
Press "Diag" to Exit
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1

The fourth line of the display is used to show the users selection. The user can
choose to calibrate or view any analog input or output, or manipulate any set of
digital I/O points.
8.2.2.
INFO - Each input channel of
each combo module has had
its temperature coefficient
trimmed to 10 ppm/F. To
avoid temperature gradient
effects and for best results,
always allow the internal
temperature of the computer
to stabilize before making
your final calibration
adjustments.
Display Groups in the Diagnostic Mode
To display an input or output variable to calibrate, select from the following

display groups and associated key presses or select the I/O number if known,
(usually supplied on a separate sheet).
DISPLAY VARIABLES
VALID KEY PRESSES
All of the following key presses are valid in the Diagnostic Mode. To enter
the Diagnostic Mode, these key presses must be preceded by the [Alpha
Shift] [Diag] keys.
Input Channels
(n = 1 through 24)
Meter Temperature
Meter Pressure
Meter Density
(n = 1 through 4)
(n = 1 through 4)
(n = 1 through 4)
[Input] or [Input] [n]

[Temp] or [Temp] [Meter] [n]
[Press] or [Press] [Meter] [n]
[Density] or [Dens] [Meter] [n]
Meter Density Temp (n = 1 through 4)
[Density][Temp] or [Density][Temp][Meter][n]
Meter Dens Pressure (n = 1 through 4)
[Density][Press] or [Density][Press][Meter][n]
Prover Temperature (Left, Right)
[Prove} [Temp]
Prover Pressure (Left, Right)
[Prove} [Temp]
Output Channels
Digital I/O
8.2.3.
(n = 1 through 24)
(n = 1 or 2)
[Output] [n]
[Status] [n]
Leaving The Diagnostic Mode
Once you are done viewing and/or modifying the calibration settings, press
[Diag] to return to the selection screen below:
Select Input/Output
to Calibrate,
Press the [Diag] key again to return to the Display Mode (Diagnostic LED will
turn off).
ALL.71+ w 05/99
8-3
Chapter 8
8.3.
8.3.1.
Note: You can also calibrate
the input and output of your
choice by entering the
number of that input or
output; e.g.: Press [Input]
[1] [Enter]; press [Output]
[4] [Enter]. With this method
you can calibrate the inputs
and outputs to the computer
without having them
assigned to any I/O point
numbers.
Calibration Instructions
Calibrating A Voltage or Current Analog Input
While the above display is shown select the input variable to calibrate. For
example to calibrate Meter Run #1 Temperature, press [Meter] [1] [Temp] (or
the input # if known). The display shows:
Select Input/Output
to Calibrate,
Meter 1 Temp
Other key press combinations work. [Temp] [Meter] [1] means the same to the
computer as [Meter] [1] [Temp]. Pressing [Temp] without a meter number
allows all of the temperatures to be scrolled through and calibrated.
Now enter the selection by pressing [Display] and the following is displayed:
Temperature #1
Input# & Module 1-a1
Override
60.0
Calibrate Input ? _
INFO - Unless previously

entered, a request for a valid
password is made at this
point.
The calibrate override value
entered will be substituted for
all process variables
assigned to this physical I/O
point when the user answers
[Y] to Calibrate Input ?. It is
automatically removed when
the user presses the [Diag]
key to exit or make a new
selection.
8-4
The display shows the process variable name, the input channel number and
combo module used. This example shows Temperature Meter Run #1
connected to Channel 1 of Combo Module A1.
Before calibrating an input the user should enter a Cal Override value to be
used in all calculations in place of the live value.
Answer [Y] to the 'Calibrate Input ?' question and the following is displayed:
Meter 1
% Value
Input Volts
mA Value
27.5
50.00
3.000
12.00
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1

To calibrate the input channel follow these instructions:

adjustments.
INFO - The [ ]/[ ] keys are

used as a software Zero
potentiometer.
Adjustments made when the
Shift LED is on are
approximately ten times more
sensitive.
Holding the arrow keys
longer than two seconds
speeds up the rate of
adjustment.
1) Disconnect the transducer signal and replace it with a stable current or

voltage source capable of inputting 4.000 to 20.000 mA or 1.000 to
5.000 V signal.
2) Set the input signal to 4.000 mA or 1.000 V as applicable.
3) Using the Up/Down arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads
4.000 mA / 1.000 V.
4) Set the input signal to 20.000 mA or 5.000 V as applicable.
5) Using the Left/Right arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads
20.000 mA / 5.000 V.
6) Recheck step 2) No further adjustment is normally needed if the Zero is
adjusted at exactly 4.0 mA.
7) Disconnect the calibrator signal and reconnect the transducer signal.
8) Press the [Diag] key to return to the selection screen.
Select Input/Output
to Calibrate,
TIP - The Span adjustment

has no effect at 4mA or 1v.
Always adjust the Zero first
at exactly 4mA or 1v.
8.3.2.
Leaving the Diagnostic
Mode - In the Select
Input/Output screen, press
the [Diag] key to return to the
Display Mode (Diagnostic
LED will turn off).
Calibrating an RTD Input Channel
While the above screen is being displayed select a process variable which is
assigned as an RTD probe input. For example, assuming a pulse type
densitometer is installed, pressing [Meter] [1] [Density] [Temp] (or the input #
if known), selects the input channel used to process Meter Run #1's
Densitometer integral RTD. Other key press combinations will work, and
[Density] [Meter] [1] [Temp] all mean the same. Pressing [Density] [Temp]
allows the user to scroll through all density temperature channels.
Now enter the selection by pressing [Display] and the following is displayed:
Dens #1 Temperature
Input# & Module 2-B1
Cal Overide
60.0
Calibrate Input ? _
ALL.71+ w 05/99
8-5
Chapter 8

Enter the Calibrate Override value and answer [Y] to the 'Calibrate Input ?'
question and a screen similar to the following is displayed:
Dens#1 Deg.F
65.0
% Value
60.00
Resistance Value
Ohms
100.00
To Calibrate an RTD input channel proceed as follows :

adjustments.
1) Disconnect the RTD probe and connect precision decade resistance box.
capable of inputting 25.00 to 150.00 Ohms as shown below.
INFO - Installing the decade

box at the actual RTD probe
location provides maximum
accuracy, but can be
inconvenient. The errors
introduced by installing the
decade box at the back panel
terminals of the flow
computer are approximately
0.01% per 100 ohms of field
wiring resistance.
6) Recheck step 2). No further adjustment is normally needed if the Zero is

adjusted at exactly 25 Ohms.
2) Set the decade box to 25.00 Ohms.

3) Using the Up/Down arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads
25.00 Ohms.
4) Set the decade box to 150.00 Ohms.
5) Using the Left/Right arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads
150.00 Ohms.
7) Disconnect the decade box and reconnect the RTD probe.

Select Input/Output
to Calibrate,
TIP - The Span adjustment

has no effect at 4mA or 1v.
Always adjust the Zero first
at exactly 4mA or 1v.

LED will turn off).
Fig. 8-1.
8-6
Figure Showing Calibration of RTD Input Channel
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
8.3.3.
Calibrating a 4 to 20 mA Digital to Analog Output
Each of the analog outputs can be calibrated by monitoring the loop current with
an accurate milliamp meter and setting the output current to 4.00 mA and 20.00
mA. For example to calibrate Analog Output #1 proceed as follows:
While the 'Select Input/Output' screen is displayed, press [Output] [1]
[Display]. The display shows:
Analog Output #1
0%=4mA, 100%=20mA
Override %
0.00
Calibrate Output ? _
CAUTION!
At this point, the analog

output reflects the value of
the currently displayed
override, not the assigned
variable. The user must
ensure that any equipment
using the output signal will
not cause an unsafe
condition to arise or cause
erroneous results to be
generated.
Answer [Y] to the 'Calibrate Output ?' question and the display shows:
Analog Output #1
0%=4mA, 100%=20mA
Override %
0.00
Override Now Active
To calibrate the output channel follow these steps:
1) Connect an accurate milliamp meter in series with the load.
2) Input 0.00 % (4.00 mA) as the output override.
3) Using the Up/Down arrow keys adjust the output current until the milliamp
meter indicates 4.00 mA.
4) Input 100.00 % (20.00 mA) as the output override.
5) Using the Left/Right arrow key adjust the output current until the milliamp
meter indicates 20.00 mA.
6) Repeat steps 2) through 5) until no further improvement can be obtained.
7) Remove the milliamp meter and reconnect the load.

'Display Mode' (Diagnostic
LED will turn off).
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Select Input/Output
to Calibrate,
8-7
Chapter 8
8.3.4.
Verifying the Operation of the Digital I/O Points
The digital I/O points can be manipulated as a group by pressing [Status] [1]
for digital points 1 through 12 or [Status] [2] for digital points 13 through 24.
Pressing [Status] will allow the user to scroll to either group. Press [Display]
and a screen similar to the following is displayed:
Digital#1 I/O Points
Input
001011001011
Overide 101010101010
Force To Output ? _
CAUTION!
After answering [Y], the

digital outputs will reflect the
value of the currently
displayed override, not the
assigned variable. The user
must ensure that any
equipment using the output
signal will not cause an
unsafe condition to arise or
cause erroneous results to
be generated.
INFO - To avoid a hardware

conflict, only points that have
been assigned as outputs will
accept an override of 1; i.e.,
entering a 1 at an input
position will be ignored and
displayed as a 0.
The second line shows the status of the I/O points frozen at the time that the
screen was displayed. The points are numbered left to right (1 to 12) with a '0'
indicating that a point is off and a '1' indicating that a point is on. The third line
shows the override bit values that will be forced to the output port when the user
answers [Y] to the 'Force To Output ?' question. A screen similar to the
following is displayed:
Digital#1 I/O Points
Input
101110001101
Overide 101010101010
Override Now Active
The override '1's and '0's can be changed at any time while the 'Override Now
Active' line is displayed. The input status displayed on the second line should
always agree with the green LEDs on the edge of the digital I/O module. Red
LEDs lit indicate blown fuses on the digital I/O module.
Outputs on this I/O module that are assigned as totalizer outputs will stop
counting while the 'Override Now Active' line is displayed. Pulses to be output
are accumulated and are output at the maximum allowed rate as soon as the
[Diag] key is pressed.
Press [Diag] to return to the selection screen below:

LED will turn off).
8-8
Select Input/Output
to Calibrate,
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
9. Flow Computer Specifications

9.1.
Operating Temperature : q -15C to +65C
NOTICE!
Omni Flow Computers, Inc.,
pursuant to a policy of
product development and
improvement, may make any
necessary changes to these
specifications without notice.
Environmental
Storage Temperature : q -20C to +75C
Relative Humidity : q 80% non-condensing maximum
9.2.
Electrical
Supply Voltage : q 120 VAC, 50-500 Hz; or 18-30 VDC, 10-20
Watts (excluding transducer loops)
q Optional: 220-250 VAC, 50-500 Hz; or 1830 VDC, 10-20 Watts (excluding transducer
loops)
Transducer Output Power : q 24 VDC at 400 mA+ for
configurations (when AC powered)
most
Isolation : q All analog inputs and outputs are optically

isolated from computer logic supply
q Maximum common mode voltage on any
input or output is 250 VDC to chassis
ground.
9.3.
Microprocessor CPU
Type : q Motorola MC68HC000FN16
q Clock Speed: 16 MHz, 0 wait state;
Throughput 4,000,000 instructions/sec
Coprocessor : q Motorola MC68HC881/82FN16B
q Clock Speed: 16 MHz; Throughput 50,000
floating point operations/sec
EPROM Memory : q 1 Mbyte. expandable to 2 Mbytes max.
RAM Memory : q 512 bytes standard; Expandable to 1
Mbytes max.
Real Time Clock : q Battery
backed-up,
time
of
day;
programmable interval down to 1 msec
q Maintains time during power loss
q Reports downtime on power-up
Logic Voltage : q 5 VDC
Over-voltage Protection : q Crowbar on power supply fires at 6.25 VDC
approx.
Transient Protection : q Transorbs on power supply module
RAM Memory Battery Backup : q 3.6 VDC Ni-Cad; rechargeable
Typical Memory Backup Period : q 30-60 days (with power removed)
ALL.71+ w 05/99
9-1
Chapter 9
Flow Computer Specifications
9.4.
Backplane
Type : q Passive; configured
connectors
NOTICE!
with
plug-in
DIN
Number of I/O Module Slots : q Omni 3000: 4 slots

q Omni 6000: 10 slots
9.5.
TYPE
Process Input/Output Combo Modules

INPUT #1
INPUT #2
INPUT #3
INPUT #4
1-5v; 4-20mA; Flow Pulses
ANALOG
OUTPUTS
Two
4-20mA
Pipe Proving
One
4-20mA
Pipe Proving
Pipe Proving
Double Chron. Proving
Level A Pulse Fidelity
1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD
1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD
E/D
1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD
Frequency Density
Two
4-20mA
1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD
Flow Pulses
Two
4-20mA
1-5v; 4-20mA
Flow Pulse
Frequency
Density
Honeywell DE Protocol
Two
4-20mA
HV
Honeywell Multivariable DE Protocol
Two
4-20mA
PORT #1
SV
9.6.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PORT #2
RS-485 Multi-drop to Various Multivariable Transmitters
Six
4-20mA
Flowmeter Pulse Inputs

Input Frequency : q DC to 15 kHz.
Positive Going Trigger Threshold : q +4.0 Volts

Negative Going Trigger Threshold : q +2.0 Volts
Input impedance : q 1 M Ohm
Configuration : q Differential input (E module inputs are
single ended referenced to DC ret.)
Common Mode Voltage : q 250 VDC to chassis ground
Pulse Fidelity Check : q Channels are continuously compared for
frequency and sequence.
E Module Only : q Complete failure of either A or B channel
will not effect totalizing
q Simultaneous noise pulses are rejected
with 85% certainty
9-2
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
9.7.
Detector Switch Inputs

NOTICE!
Input Type : q Voltage

Gating Transition : q Application of voltage starts and stops

proves.
Minimum Time Pulse High : q 1 msec
Minimum Time Pulse Low : q 2 seconds
Input Impedance : q 4.7 k Ohms
Input On Voltage : q >10 V On, <4 VDC+ Off (referenced to DC
Power Return)
Debounce : q 2 sec in Software
9.8.
Detector Switch Inputs of E Combo

Module
(Double Chronometry)
q Driven by open collector transistor or Normally Open
switch.
q Debounce capacitor may be needed with switch type
detectors.
9.9.
Analog Inputs
Input Type : q 4 - 20 mA or 1-5 V
Input Impedance : q 1 MegOhm (250 Ohms) (4-20 mA range
selected by installing shunt resistor)
Resolution : q 14 Binary Bits, w/ 500 msec sample
Linearity : q 0.020% F.S. typical 1 Digit
Temperature Drift : q Less than 15 ppm/OF
9.10. RTD Inputs

RTD Configuration : q 4-wire Bridge
RTD Resistance : q 100 Ohm @ 32F
Excitation Current : q 3.45 mA Nominal
Maximum Field Wiring Resistance : q 1k Ohm per wire
Resolution : q 0.008 Ohms
Temperature Drift : q Less than 15 ppm/F
Linearity : q 0.020% F.S. typical 1 Digit
ALL.71+ w 05/99
9-3
Chapter 9
9.11. Analog Outputs

NOTICE!
Resolution : q 12 Binary Bits

Output : q Current source 4-20 mA (referenced to
transducer power return terminal)
Common Mode : q 250 Volts to chassis ground
Max./Min. Working Loop Voltage : q 30 VDC to 18 VDC
Loop Resistance : q 900 Ohm with 24 VDC Power
q 1.2 k Ohm with 30 VDC Power
Update Rate : q Each 500 milliseconds
9.12. Control Outputs/Status Inputs

(12 per module)
Configuration : q Open emitter Darlington transistor source
(Referenced to transducer power return
terminal)
Current Capacity : q 100 mA max., 500 mA per module
Output Voltage : q +DC - 1 V Nominal
Common Mode : q 250 Volts to chassis ground
Input Impedance : q 4.7 k Ohms in series with 2 LEDs
Input Voltage : q Input voltages > 8 to < DC voltage at back
panel DC terminal block, typically 24 VDC,
will be recognized as on
q Input voltages < +2 V will be recognized as
off
LEDs : q Operating and Fuse Indicators on each
channel
Scan Rate : q Outputs may be pulsed at 50Hz Maximum
9-4
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1
9.13. Multi-bus Serial I/O Interface

9.13.1. RS-232 Compatible
(2 per Module)
Serial Data Output Voltage : q 7.5 Volts typical
Recommended Load Impedance : q 1.5 k Ohm
Short Circuit Current : q 10 mA limited
Input Low Threshold : q Vl = -3.0 Volts
Input High Threshold : q Vh = +3.0 Volts
Baud Rate : q Software selectable
q Range 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 k bps
Common Mode Voltage : q 250 Volts to chassis ground
LEDs : q Indicator LEDs for each channel input,
output and handshaking signals
9.13.2. RS-485
(2 per Module)
Serial Data Output Voltage : q 5 Volts differential driver
Recommended Load Impedance : q 120 Ohm
Short Circuit Current : q 20 mA
Input Low Threshold : q 0.8 Volts
Baud Rate : q Software selectable
q Range 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 k bps
Common Mode Voltage : q 250 Volts to chassis ground
LEDs : q Indicator LEDs for each channel input,
output and handshaking signals
9.14. Operator Keypad

Keypad Characteristics : q 34-key, domed membrane, with tactile and
audio feedback
Material : q Autotex 2 Hard coat Polyester Film
Data Entry Lockout : q Internal switch and software passwords
Key Debounce : q Software controlled
9.15. LCD Display

Display : q 4 lines of 20 Characters
q 5 x 8 Dot Matrix
Character Height : q 4.75 mm
Display Data : q Alphanumeric, 80 characters
Backlight : q Green/Yellow LED
q Viewing angle, contrast and backlight
controlled from keypad
ALL.71+ w 05/99
9-5
Chapter 9
9.16. Electromechanical Counters

Quantity : q Three, with programmable function
NOTICE!
Display : q 6-digit, non-resetable

Character Height : q 5 mm
Maximum Count Rate : q 10 counts per second
9.17. Operating Mode Indicator LEDs

Quantity : q Four
Dual Color : q Red/Green
Indication : q Active Alarm LED
Green: to indicate acknowledged existing

alarm
Red: to indicate new, unacknowledged,
existing alarm
q Diagnostic LED
or
or
Green: to indicate Diagnostic

Calibration Mode is active
Red: to indicate password is active
q Program LED
Green:
to
indicate
Program
Configuration Mode is active
Red: to indicate password is active
q Alpha Shift LED
Green: to indicate Alpha Shift Lock

Mode is active
Red: to indicate alpha shift next key only
9.18. Security
Hardware : q Optional lock on housing and internal
keyboard program lockout
Software : q Multi-level password control
9-6
ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 2D
User Manual
Basic Operation
Orifice / Turbine
Effective May 1999
1. Basic Operating Features ...................................................................................... 1-1

1.1. Overview of the Keypad Functions .....................................................................1-1
1.2. Operating Modes ..................................................................................................1-2
1.2.1.
1.2.2.
1.2.3.
1.2.4.
Display Mode............................................................................................................. 1-2

Keypad Program Mode ............................................................................................. 1-2
Diagnostic and Calibration Mode .............................................................................. 1-2
Field Entry Mode ....................................................................................................... 1-2
1.3. Special Keys .........................................................................................................1-4

1.3.1.
1.3.2.
1.3.3.
1.3.4.
1.3.5.
1.3.6.
Display/Enter (Help) Key ........................................................................................... 1-4

Up/Down Arrow Keys ["]/[#].................................................................................... 1-4
Left/Right Arrow Keys [$]/[%]................................................................................... 1-4
Alpha Shift Key and LED ........................................................................................... 1-4
Program/Diagnostic Key [Prog/Diag]......................................................................... 1-5
Space/Clear (Cancel/Ack) Key.................................................................................. 1-5
1.4. Adjusting the Display ...........................................................................................1-5

1.5. Clearing and Viewing Alarms ..............................................................................1-6
1.5.1.
1.5.2.
1.5.3.
Acknowledging (Clearing) Alarms ............................................................................. 1-6

Viewing Active and Historical Alarms ........................................................................ 1-6
Alarm Conditions Caused by Static Discharges........................................................ 1-6
1.6. Computer Totalizing.............................................................................................1-6
2. PID Control Functions............................................................................................ 2-1

2.1. Overview of PID Control Functions.....................................................................2-1
2.2. PID Control Displays ............................................................................................2-2
2.3. Changing the PID Control Operating Mode ........................................................2-3
2.3.1.
2.3.2.
2.3.3.
2.3.4.
2.3.5.
Manual Valve Control ................................................................................................ 2-3

Automatic Valve Control............................................................................................ 2-3
Local Setpoint Select................................................................................................. 2-4
Remote Setpoint Select............................................................................................. 2-4
Changing the Secondary Variable Setpoint............................................................... 2-4
2.4. PID Control Remote Setpoint ..............................................................................2-4

2.5. Using the PID Startup and Shutdown Ramping Functions ...............................2-5
2.6. Startup Ramp/Shutdown Ramp/Minimum Output Percent................................2-5
2.7. PID Control Tuning...............................................................................................2-6
2.7.1.
2.7.2.
ii
Estimating The Required Controller Gain For Each Process Loop........................... 2-6
Estimating The Repeats / Minutes And Fine Tuning The Gain ................................. 2-7
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 2d
Basic Operation
3. Computer Batching Operations............................................................................. 3-1

3.1. Introduction.......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2. Batch Status ......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.3. Ending a Batch..................................................................................................... 3-2
4. Meter Factors for Turbine Flowmeters ................................................................. 4-1

4.1. Assigning or Changing Meter Factors via the Direct Access Method ............. 4-1
4.2. Assigning or Changing Meter Factors via the Menu Selection Method........... 4-1
5. Printed Reports ....................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1. Fixed Format Reports .......................................................................................... 5-1
5.2. Default Report Templates and Custom Reports ................................................ 5-2
5.3. Printing Reports................................................................................................... 5-2
5.4. Audit Trail ............................................................................................................. 5-3
5.4.1.
Audit Trail Report ...................................................................................................... 5-3
5.4.2.
Modbus Port Passwords and the Audit Trail Report .............................................. 5-3
6. Index of Display Variables ..................................................................................... 6-1
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
iii
Figures of Volume 2
Fig. 1-1. Flow Computer Front Panel Keypad......................................................................................... 1-1
Fig. 1-2. Block Diagram Showing the Keypad and Display Modes ......................................................... 1-3
Fig. 2-1. Typical PID Control Application - Single Loop .......................................................................... 2-1
iv
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 2d
Basic Operation
1. Basic Operating Features

1.1.
INFO - Within the document
the following convention is
used to describe various
key press sequences:
Individual keys are shown in
bold enclosed in brackets
and separated by a space.
Although not always
indicated, it is assumed for
the rest of this document
that the [Display/Enter] key
is used at the end of every
key press sequence to
enter a command.
Overview of the Keypad Functions
Thirty-four keys are available. Eight special function keys and twenty-six
dedicated to the alphanumeric characters A through Z, 0 through 9 and various
punctuation and math symbols.
The [Display/Enter] key, located at the bottom right, deserves special mention.
This key is always used to execute a sequence of key presses. It is not unlike
that the Enter key of a personal computer. Except when entering numbers in a
field, the maximum number of keys that can be used in a key press sequence is
four (not counting the [Display/Enter] key).
Fig. 1-1.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Flow Computer Front Panel Keypad
1-1
Chapter 1
Basic Operating Features

Key words such as Density, Mass and Temp appear over each of the
alphanumeric keys. These key words indicate what data will be accessed when
included in a key press sequence. Pressing [Net] [Meter] [1] for instance will
display net flow rates and total accumulations for Meter Run #1. Pressing the
[Net] key causes net flow rates and total accumulations for all active meter runs
to be displayed. In many instances, the computer attempts to recognize similar
key press sequences as meaning the same thing; i.e., [Net] [1], [Meter] [1]
[Net] and [Net] [Meter] [1] all cause the net volume data for Meter Run #1 to be
displayed. In most cases, more data is available on a subject then can be
displayed on four lines. The ["]/[#] (up/down) arrow keys allow you to scroll
through multiple screens.
1.2.
Operating Modes
Keyboard operation and data displayed in the LCD display depends on which of
the 3 major display and entry modes are selected.
1.2.1.
Display Mode
This is the normal mode of operation. Live meter run data is displayed and
updated every 200 msec. Data cannot be changed while in this mode.
1.2.2.
Keypad Program Mode
Configuration data needed by the flow computer can be viewed and changed via
the keypad while in this mode. When the Program Mode is entered by pressing
the [Prog] key, the Program LED glows green. This changes to red when a
valid password is requested and entered.
1.2.3.
Diagnostic and Calibration Mode
The diagnostic and calibration features of the computer are accessed by

pressing the [Diag] key ([Alpha Shift] then [Prog]. This mode allows you to
check and adjust the calibration of each input and output point. The Diagnostic
LED glows green until a valid password is requested and entered.
1.2.4.
Field Entry Mode
You are in this mode whenever the data entry cursor is visible, which is anytime
the user is entering a number or password while in the Program Mode or
Diagnostic Mode.
1-2
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 2d
Basic Operation
Fig. 1-2.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Block Diagram Showing the Keypad and Display Modes
1-3
Chapter 1
1.3.
1.3.1.
Special Keys
Display/Enter (Help) Key
This key is located bottom-right on the keypad.

Pressing once while in the Field Entry Mode will store the data entered in the
field to memory. Pressing twice within one second will cause the contextsensitive Help to be displayed. The Help displays contain useful information
regarding available variable assignments and selections. When in other modes,
use it at the end of a key press sequence to enter the command.
1.3.2.
Up/Down Arrow Keys ["]/[#]
These keys are located top-center on the keypad.

When in the Display Mode, the ["]/[#] keys are used to scroll through data
relevant to a particular selection.
When in the Program Mode, they are used to scroll through data and position the
cursor on data to be viewed or changed.
In the Diagnostic Mode, The up/down arrow keys are initially used to position the
cursor within the field of data being changed. Once you select an input or output
to calibrate or adjust, the up/down arrow keys are used as a software zero
potentiometer.
1.3.3.
Left/Right Arrow Keys [$]/[%]
These keys are located top-center on the keypad; to the left and right
respectively of the Up/Down Arrow Keys.
The [$]/[%] keys have no effect while in the Display Mode. When in Program
Mode, they are used to position the cursor within a data field.
In the Diagnostic Mode, they are initially used to position the cursor within the
field of data to be changed. Once you select an input or output to calibrate or
adjust, the left/right arrow keys are used as software span potentiometer.
1.3.4.
Alpha Shift Key and LED
This key is located top-right on the keypad.

Pressing the [Alpha Shift] key while in the Field Entry Mode causes the Alpha
Shift LED above the key to glow green, indicating that the next valid key press
will be interpreted as its shifted value. The Alpha Shift LED is then turned off
automatically when the next valid key is pressed.
Pressing the [Alpha Shift] key twice causes the Alpha Shift LED to glow red and
the shift lock to be active. All valid keys are interpreted as their shifted value until
the [Alpha Shift] key is pressed or the [Display/Enter] key is pressed.
When in the Calibrate Mode, zero and span adjustments made via the arrow
keys are approximately ten times more sensitive when the Alpha Shift LED is on.
1-4
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 2d
Basic Operation
1.3.5.
Program/Diagnostic Key [Prog/Diag]
This key is located top-left on the keypad.

While in the Display Mode, pressing this key changes the operating mode to
either the Program or Diagnostic Mode, depending on whether the Alpha Shift
LED is on. When in other modes, it cancels the current entry and goes back one
menu level, eventually returning to the Display Mode.
1.3.6.
Space/Clear (Cancel/Ack) Key
This key is located bottom-left on the keypad.

Static Discharges - It has
been found that applications
of electrostatic discharges
may cause the Active Alarm
LED to glow red. Pressing
the [Space/Clear] key will
acknowledge the alarm and
turn off the red alarm light.
Pressing this key while in the Display Mode acknowledges any new alarms that
occur. The Active Alarm LED will also change from red to green indicating an
alarm condition exists but has been acknowledged.
When in the Field Entry Mode, unshifted, it causes the current variable field
being changed to be cleared, leaving the cursor at the beginning of the field
awaiting new data to be entered. With the Alpha Shift LED illuminated, it causes
the key to be interpreted as a space or blank.
When in all other modes, it cancels the current key press sequence by flushing
the key input buffer.
1.4.
Adjusting the Display
Once the computer is mounted in its panel you may need to adjust the viewing
angle and backlight intensity of the LCD display for optimum performance. You
may need to re-adjust the brightness setting of the display should the computer
be subjected to transient electrical interference.
While in the Display Mode (Program LED and Diagnostic LED off), press
[Setup] [Display] and follow the displayed instructions:
Use Up/Down Arrows
To Adjust Contrast;
Left, Right Arrows
To Adjust Backlight
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
1-5
Chapter 1
TIP - Alarm flags are

latched while the red LED is
on. To avoid missing
intermittent alarms, always
press [Alarms] [Display] to
view alarms before pressing
[Cancel/Ack].
1.5.
Clearing and Viewing Alarms
1.5.1.
Acknowledging (Clearing) Alarms
New alarms cause the Active Alarm LED to glow red. Pressing the [Cancel/Ack]
key (bottom left), or setting Boolean Point 1712 via a digital I/O point or via a
Modbus command, will acknowledge the alarm and cause the Active Alarm LED
to change to green. The LED will go off when the alarm condition clears.
1.5.2.
Viewing Active and Historical Alarms
To view all active alarms, press [Alarms] [Display] and use the ["]/[#] arrow
keys to scroll through all active alarms.
Active Alarms
Temperature #1 Hi Hi
Pressure #2 Low
The last 500 time-tagged alarms that have occurred are always available for
printing (see Historical Alarm Snapshot Report in this chapter).
1.5.3.
Alarm Conditions Caused by Static Discharges
It has been found that applications of electrostatic discharges may cause the
Active Alarm LED to glow red. Pressing the [Space/Clear] key will acknowledge
the alarm and turn off the red alarm light.
1.6.
Computer Totalizing
Two types of totalizers are provided: 1) Three front panel electromechanical and
non-resetable; and 2) Software totalizers maintained in computer memory. The
electromechanical totalizers can be programmed to count in any units via the
Miscellaneous Setup Menu (Volume 3). The software totalizers provide batch
and daily based totals, and are automatically printed, saved and reset at the end
of each batch or the beginning of each contract day. Daily flow or time weighted
averages are also printed, saved and reset at the end of each day. Batch flow
weighted averages are also available in liquid application flow computers.
Software cumulative totalizers are also provided and can only be reset via the
Password Maintenance Menu (Volume 3). View the software totalizers by
pressing [Gross], [Net] or [Mass]. Pressing [Meter] [n] [Gross], [Net] or
[Mass] will display the software for Meter Run n.
1-6
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 2d
Basic Operation
2. PID Control Functions

2.1.
Overview of PID Control Functions
Four independent control loops are available. Each loop is capable of controlling
a primary variable (usually flow rate) with a secondary override variable (usually
meter back pressure or delivery pressure).
The primary and secondary set points can be adjusted locally via the keypad and
remotely via a communication link. In addition, the primary set point can be
adjusted via an analog input to the computer.
Contact closures can be used to initiate the startup and shutdown ramp function
which limits the control output slew rate during startup and shutdown conditions.
A high or low 'error select' function causes automatic override control by the
secondary variable in cases where it is necessary either to maintain a minimum
secondary process value or limit the secondary process maximum value.
Local manual control of the control output and bumpless transfer between
automatic and manual control is incorporated.
Fig. 2-1.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Typical PID Control Application - Single Loop
2-1
Chapter 2
PID Control Functions
2.2.
INFO - Select PID Loop 1
through 4 by entering n as
1, 2, 3 or 4.
PID Control Displays
While in the Display Mode press [Control] [n] [Display]. Press the down arrow
key to display the following screens:
Screen #1
Indicates which parameter

is being controlled; primary
or secondary
PID #1 VALVE STATUS

Open
50.00
Auto/Manual
Auto
Primary Controlling
Screen #2
PID #1 PRIMARY
Measured
20.00
Shows actual primary set
point being used in
engineering units
Setpoint
20.00
Screen #3
PID #1 SECONDARY
Measured
20.00
Shows actual secondary set
point being used in
engineering units
Setpoint
20.00
Screen #4
INFO - Data such as set
points or operating mode
cannot be changed while in
the Display Mode.
2-2
PID #1 SET POINT

Source is
Remote
Remote S.P.
Input
Value is
20.00
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 2d
Basic Operation
2.3.
INFO - Select PID Loop 1
through 4 by entering n as
1, 2, 3 or 4.
To access the next two
screens you must enter the
[Y] to select Manual Valve
or Local Setpoint even if a
Y is already displayed.
To cancel the Manual Mode
or Local Setpoint Mode,
enter [N].
Changing the PID Control Operating

Mode
Press [Prog] [Control] [n] to display the following screen:

PID#1 OPERATING MODE
Manual Valve(Y/N) N
Local Set.Pt(Y/N) N
Sec Set.Pt
750.0
2.3.1.
Manual Valve Control
To change to manual valve control enter [Alpha Shift] [Y] at the 'Manual Valve
(Y/N)' prompt and the following screen is displayed:
Primary Variable
(Measurement in
engineering units)
PID #1 MANUAL VALVE

Up/Down Arrow to Adj
Measure
20.00
50.00
Valve Control Open %
The switch from Auto to Manual is bumpless. Use the ["] key to open the valve
or the [#] key to close it. Press [Prog] once to return to the previous screen.
Manual Valve (Y/N) Y
Local Set.Pt(Y/N) N
Sec Set.Pt
750.0
Notice you are now in

Manual Valve Control
2.3.2.
Automatic Valve Control
To change from manual to automatic valve control, enter [N] at the 'Manual
Valve (Y/N)' prompt. The switch to automatic is bumpless if local setpoint is
selected.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
2-3
Chapter 2
2.3.3.
Local Setpoint Select
Enter [Alpha Shift] [Y] at the 'Local Set. Pt. (Y/N)' prompt and the following
screen is displayed:
PID#1 LOCAL SETPOINT
Up/Down Arrow to Adj
Measured
20.00
Setpoint
20.00
Primary Variable
(Measurement in
engineering units)
The switch from Remote to Local is bumpless. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to
increase or decrease the setpoint. Press [Prog] once to return to the previous
screen.
Notice you are now in
Automatic with Local Valve
Control

Manual Valve(Y/N) N
Local Set.Pt(Y/N) Y
Sec Set.Pt
750.0
Change the setpoint of the

secondary variable here
2.3.4.
Remote Setpoint Select
To change from local setpoint to remote setpoint, enter [Alpha Shift] [N] at the
'Local Set. Pt(Y/N)' prompt. The switch to remote setpoint may not be
bumpless, depending upon the remote set point source.
2.3.5.
Changing the Secondary Variable Setpoint
Move the cursor to the bottom line of the above display, press [Clear] and then
enter the new setpoint.
2.4.
!
IMPORTANT!
You must assign a remote

setpoint input even if one
will not be used. The 420mA scaling of this input
determines the scaling of
the primary controlled
variable.
2-4
PID Control Remote Setpoint
As described above, the PID control loop can be configured to accept either a
local setpoint or a remote setpoint value for the primary variable. The remote
setpoint is derived from an analog input (usually 4-20 mA). This input is scaled in
engineering units and would usually come from another device such as an RTU.
High/Low limits are applied to the remote setpoint signal to eliminate possible
problems of over or under speeding a turbine meter (see Volume 1, Chapter 8
for more details).
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 2d
Basic Operation
2.5.
Using the PID Startup and Shutdown

Ramping Functions
These functions are enabled when a startup and/or shutdown ramp rate between
0 and 99 percent is entered (see section PID Setup in Volume 3).
Commands are provided to Start the valve ramping open, Shutdown to the
minimum percent open valve or Stop the flow by closing the valve immediately
once it has been ramped to the minimum percent open.
These commands are accessed using the keypad by pressing [Prog] [Batch]
[Meter] [n], which will display the following:
Mtr1 Batch Start Y ?
Shutdown to Min% ?
Batch Stop ?
Print & Reset ?
2.6.
Startup Ramp/Shutdown Ramp/Minimum

Output Percent
Inputs are provided for startup/shutdown ramp rates and minimum output %
settings. When these startup/shutdown ramp rates are applied the control
output, movements will be limited to the stated % movement per second (see
Volume 3). On receipt of a shutdown signal, the output will ramp to the minimum
output % for topoff purposes.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
2-5
Chapter 2
2.7.
!
IMPORTANT!
PID Control Tuning - The

primary variable must be
tuned first. When tuning the
primary variable loop, you
must set the secondary
setpoint high or low enough
to the point where it will not
take control. Otherwise, the
PID loop will become very
unstable and virtually
impossible to tune. Adjust
the primary gain and
integral repeats per minute
until you achieve stable
control. Likewise, when
tuning the secondary
setpoint, the primary must
be set so it cannot interfere.
Once you have achieved
stable control of both loops,
you can then enter the
setpoints established for
each loop at normal
operating conditions.
PID Control Tuning
Individual control of gain and integral action are provided for both the primary
and secondary control loops. Tune the primary variable loop first by setting the
secondary setpoint high or low enough to stop the secondary control loop from
taking control. Adjust the primary gain and integral repeats per minutes for stable
control. Reset the primary and secondary set points to allow control on the
secondary variable without interference from the primary variable. Adjust the
secondary gain and integral repeats per minute for stable control of the
secondary variable.
2.7.1.
Estimating The Required Controller Gain For

Each Process Loop
Each process loop will exhibit a gain function. A change in control valve output
will produce a corresponding change in each of the process variables. The ratio
of these changes represents the gain of the loop (For example: If a 10 % change
in control output causes a 10% change in the process variable, the loop gain is
1.0. If a 10 % change in control output causes a 20 % change in process
variable, the loop gain is 2.0). To provide stable control the gain of each loop
with the controller included must be less than 1.0. In practice the controller gain
is usually adjusted so that the total loop gain is between 0.6 and 0.9.
Unfortunately the gain of each loop can vary with operating conditions. For
example: A butterfly control valve may have a higher gain when almost closed to
when it is almost fully open. This means that in many cases the controller gain
must be set low so that stable control is achieved over the required range of
control.
To estimate the gain of each loop proceed as follows for the required range of
operating conditions:
(1) In manual, adjust the control output for required flowing conditions and
note process variable values.
(2) Make a known percentage step change of output (i.e., from 20% to 22%
equals a 10% change).
3
(3) Note the percentage change of each process variable (i.e., 100 m /hr to
3
110 m /hr equals a 10% change).
INFO - The primary gain
interacts with the secondary
gain. The actual secondary
gain factor is the product of
the primary gain and
secondary gain factors.
2-6
(1) Primary Gain Estimate = 0.75 / (Primary Loop Gain).

(2) Secondary Gain =
Estimate).
0.75 / (Secondary Loop Gain x Primary Gain
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 2d
Basic Operation
2.7.2.
Estimating The Repeats / Minutes And Fine

Tuning The Gain
(1) Set the 'repeats / minute' to 40 for both primary and secondary loops.
(2) Adjust set points so that only the primary (sec) loop is trying to control.
(3) While controlling the primary (sec) variable, increase the primary (sec)
gain until some controlled oscillation is observed.
(4) Set the primary (sec) 'repeats/minute' to equal 0.75 / (Period of the
oscillation in minutes).
(5) Set the primary (sec) gain to 75% of the value needed to make the loop
oscillate.
(6) Repeat (2) through (5) for the secondary variable loop.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
2-7
Volume 2d
Basic Operation
3. Computer Batching Operations

3.1.
Introduction
A complete set of software batch totalizers and flow weighted averages are also
provided in addition to the daily and cumulative totalizers. These totalizers and
averages can be printed, saved and reset automatically, based on the amount of
flow delivered or on demand. The Omni flow computer can keep track of 4
independent meter runs running any combination of fluids or gases. Flowmeter
runs can be combined and treated as a station. The batch totalizers and batch
flow weighted averages are printed, saved and reset at the end of each batch.
The next batch starts automatically when the flow from the flowmeter exceeds
the meter active threshold. Flow received up to that point which does not exceed
the threshold is still included in the new batch, but the batch start time and date
are not captured until the threshold is exceeded.
3.2.
Batch Status
The batch status appears on the Status Report and is defined as either:
In Progress ------- Batch is in progress with the meter active.
Suspended ------- Batch is in progress with the meter not active.
Batch Ended ----- Batch End has been received, meter not active.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
3-1
Chapter 3
Computer Batching Operations
3.3.
Ending a Batch
A batch in progress is ended by setting the appropriate End Batch Flag in the
computers database. This can be done manually from the keypad, on a timed
basis, through a digital I/O point or via a Modbus command.
To manually end a batch from the keypad, press the [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n]
or [Prog] [Meter] [n] [Batch] keys and a screen similar to the following will be
displayed:
METER #1 BATCH
Print & Reset ?
Pressing [Prog] [Batch] and [Enter] (i.e., not specifying a meter run) will display
the following:
STATION BATCH
Print & Reset ?
Enter [Y] to the Print & Reset ? question and enter your password when
requested. The batch will be ended immediately and a Batch Report printed out.
The above displays will vary if the PID ramping functions are enabled (see
Chapter 2).
3-2
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 2d
Basic Operation
4. Meter Factors for Turbine Flowmeters

4.1.
Assigning or Changing Meter Factors via

the Direct Access Method
This applies only to turbine flowmeters. To assign or change the meter factor,
you must edit the meter run that has the turbine meter. Press [Prog] [Meter] [n]
[Enter], where n is the meter run number that has the turbine flowmeter (1-4). A
display similar to the following will be displayed:
METER RUN #1
Meter ID
Meter #1
Product No.
1
GC Stream
2
Scroll down until the cursor is on the Meter Factor entry. Press [Clear] and
enter the meter factor. Note that only numbers greater than 0.8000 and less than
1.2001 are allowed. The display will be similar to the following:
METER RUN #1
K-Factor12
Freq Point12
Meter Factor
4.2.
0
0
1.0002
Assigning or Changing Meter Factors via

the Menu Selection Method
Press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter], scroll down to Meter Run Setup and press
[Enter]. Scroll down through the meter run that corresponds to the turbine meter
to the Meter Factor entry. Press [Clear] and enter the meter factor.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
4-1
Volume 2d
Basic Operation
5. Printed Reports
-
5.1.
Fixed Format Reports
Several reports use a fixed format (i.e., cannot be changed by the user). These
are described below:
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Status Report
Shows general information on current active

flowmeters, batch status (In progress /
Suspended / Ended), current running
products, batch ID string, current alarms and
future batch information.
Historical Alarm Report
Date and time tags of the last 500 alarms,

when they occurred and are cleared. Meter
run specific alarms also snapshot the gross
volume and mass totalizers. Meter factor
changes are also recorded here.
Audit Trail Report
Date and time tags of up to the last 150

changes to the flow computer database made
via the local keypad. Changes made via either
Modbus port will also be recorded if the
password feature is being used on that port.
Product File Report
Shows information related to the product

setup of the flow computer. For turbine/PD
liquid flow computers, this data includes
product name, meter factors, override
gravities/densities and the equation or
standard to be used for each product. Gas
flow computers print product name, fluid type,
calculations standard, component analysis,
viscosity and isentropic overrides, SG and
heating value overrides for each product.
Config Data Report
Lists most configuration settings currently in

the flow computer.
5-1
Chapter 5
Printed Reports
5.2.
Default Report Templates and Custom

Reports
The following reports are user-configurable via the OmniCom configuration

program.
Snapshot Report
Batch Report
Daily Report
5.3.
INFO - Entering a number
between 1 and 500 at the
Hist Alarm ? line will
cause many previous
alarms to be printed. When
requesting reports, such as
previous daily, batch or
prover reports, you must
enter a number between 1
and 8; 1 refers to the last
report generated and 8
refers to the oldest report.
Up to 150 previous data
entry changes can be
printed when the Audit
Trail is requested.
Printing Reports
A Snapshot Report can be printed by pressing [Print] [Enter] and can also be
printed automatically on timed intervals (see Print Setup in Volume 3).
Other printed reports are accessed from the Program Mode. Press [Prog]
[Print] [Enter] and the following selection menu will be displayed:
*PRINT REPORT MENU*
Snapshot Report ?
Previous Snapshot?
Status Report ?(Y)
Prev. Batch (1-8)
Prev. Daily (1-8)
Hist Alarm ?
Audit Trail ? (Y)
Arch Starts
# of Arc Days
Product File ?(Y)
Config Report ?(Y)
Move the cursor to the report required and enter [Y] or the number of the
historical report you wish to print ([1] refers to the latest, [2] refers to the next to
latest etc). Press [Prog] twice to return to the Display Mode.
5-2
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 2d
Basic Operation
5.4.
Audit Trail
5.4.1.
Audit Trail Report
A fixed format report provides an audit trail of changes made to the flow
computer database. The number of changes that can be reported depends on
the type of changes made. The last 150 items are recorded. Each record
consists of a unique event number, time & date tag, database index number for
the variable changed and the new and old value of the variable, The starting
index number and the number of points changed is recorded when changes are
made remotely via a Modbus port, using OmniCom for instance.
Note1: Password entries
are recorded in this field. A
three-digit code signifies the
password source and level
of the password entered.
These codes are as follows:
PIPELINE COMPANY NAME
Date: xx/xx/xx
Event
No.
xxx
5.4.2.
Audit Trail Report

Time: xx:xx:xx
Time
Date
xx:xx:xx
xx/xx/xx
Index
Number1
xxxxx
Page:
1
Computer ID: REV2271
Old Value/
# of Points
x.xxxxxxxxxxx
New Value/
Serial Port
x.xxxxxxxxxxx
Port Passwords and the Audit Trail

Modbus
Report
The Audit Trail Report is stored within the flow computer and is used to
document and time and date stamp changes made to the flow computer
database, either via the local keypad or via password protected serial port
access. The report is formatted in columns as shown above:
PASSWORD CODES
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
100
Privileged Level Password entered at

the keypad
300
Level A Password entered via Serial

Port #3
101
Level 1 Password entered at local

keypad
301
Level B Password entered via Serial

Port #3
102
Level 2 Password entered at local

keypad
302
Level C Password entered via Serial

Port #3
103
Serial Port #2 Level A Password

entered at local keypad
400

Port #4
104

401

Port #4
105

402

Port #4
108
Level 1A Password entered at local

keypad
500

Port #1
200

Port #2
501

Port #1
201

Port #2
502

Port #1
202

Port #2
503

5-3
Volume 2d
Basic Operation
6. Index of Display Variables

Index of Display
Variables -These lists
contain variable groups and
corresponding key press
sequences needed to
display them. In most
cases, the sequence can be
reversed (i.e.: [Temp]
[Meter] [n] is the same as
[Meter] [n] [Temp]). In all
cases, the [Display/Enter]
key (keypad bottom right)
must be pressed to enter
the command. Some
variables may not be
displayed based on the
application or the physical
I/O assignments.
DISPLAY VARIABLES
VALID KEY PRESSES
Flow Rates and Totalizers

Batch Totalizers are displayed by including the [Batch] key before the key presses
shown below:
Daily & Cumulative Uncorrected Gross
[Gross] or [Gross] [Meter] [n]
Batch Uncorrected Gross
[Batch] [Gross] or [Batch] [Gross] [Meter] [n]
Batch Corrected Net
[Batch] [Net] or [Batch] [Net] [Meter] [n]
Daily & Cumulative Mass
[Mass] or [Mass] [Meter] [n]
Batch Mass
[Batch] [Mass] or [Batch] [Mass] [Meter] [n]
Daily & Cumulative Energy
[Energy] or [Energy] [Meter] [n]
Batch Energy
[Batch] [Energy] or [Batch] [Energy] [Meter] [n]
Premium Billing
[Net] [Setup] or [Net] [Setup] [Meter] [n]
Current Instantaneous Values

shown below:
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Meter Temperatures
[Temp] or [Temp] [Meter] [n]
Meter Pressures
[Press] or [Press] [Meter] [n]
Density
[Density] or [Density] [Meter] [n]
Unfactored Density
[Density] [Meter] [n]
Specific Gravity & SG @ Reference
[SG/API] or [SG/API] [Meter] [n]
Densitometer Temperatures
[Density] [Temp] or [Density] [Temp] [Meter] [n]
Densitometer Pressures
[Density] [Press] or [Density] [Press] [Meter] [n]
Orifice Differential Pressures
[D.P.] or [D.P.] [Meter] [n]
Orifice & Pipe Diameter
[Orifice] or [Orifice] [Meter] [n]
Auxiliary Inputs 1-4
[Analysis] [Input]
6-1
Chapter 6
Index of Display Variables
DISPLAY VARIABLES
VALID KEY PRESSES
Calculation Factors
shown below.
Compressibility Factors
[Temp] [Factor] or [Temp] [Factor] [Meter] [n]
Batch FWA Meter Factors
[Batch] [Meter] [n] [Factor]
Other Factors and Intermediate Calculation factors

Orifice Coefficients, Expansion & Velocity
Approach Factors, Coefficient Iteration
Loop Counters, Viscosity Isentropic
Exponent, Sound M/S & Calculation HV
[Orifice] [Factor] or [Orifice] [Factor] [Meter] [n]
Meter Factors & K Factors
[Factor] or [Meter] [n] [Factor]
Pycnometer Factors
[Density] [Factor] or [Density][Factor] [Meter] [n]
Solartron / Sarasota / UGC Factors
[Density] [Factor] or [Density][Factor] [Meter] [n]
Alarm Information
Active Alarms
[Alarms]
Transducer High/Low Alarm Limits
[Meter] or [Meter] [n]
Product Information
Running Product
[Product]
Product Number and Name

Fluid Code
Viscosity, Isentropic Exponent
Density @ Reference Conditions
Calculation Mode AGA 8 Method Used
[Product] [n] or [Analysis] [Product] [n]

Note: n = 1-4
Analyzer Status
Communication Status, Event Timer Status
& Alarm Word, Analysis & Sample
Number, Date & Time of Last Analysis
[Analysis] [Status] or
[Analysis] [Status] [Meter] [n]
Miscellaneous Displays
6-2
Current Time & Date

Power Last Applied Time & Date
Power Last Lost Time & Date
Task Timing Display
[Time]
Display of Raw Input Signals
[Input]
Display of Raw Output Signals
[Output]
Hardware Inventory / Software Version
[Status]
Honeywell Module Status
[Input] [Status]
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 2d
Basic Operation
DISPLAY VARIABLES
VALID KEY PRESSES
PID Control Displays

Primary Setpoint Source Local/Remote
Remote Setpoint Value
Primary Measurement & Setpoint
Secondary Measurement & Setpoint
Valve Open % & Auto/Manual Status
[Control] [n]
Transmitter Displays
Honeywell
Honeywell Transmitter Status
[Input] [Status]
User Displays
Up to eight additional displays can be programmed by the user (See Volume 3 for
more details).
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
6-3
Volume 3D
User Manual
Configuration and
Advanced Operation
Orifice / Turbine
Effective May 1999
1. Overview of Firmware Revisions 23.71/27.71 ...................................................... 1-1

1.1. Number of Meter Runs - Type of Flowmeters.....................................................1-1
1.2. Product Configuration..........................................................................................1-1
1.3. Configurable Sensors per Meter Run..................................................................1-2
1.4. Temperature, Pressure and Differential Pressure Transmitters .......................1-2
1.5. Densitometers ......................................................................................................1-2
1.6. Gas Chromatographs ...........................................................................................1-2
1.7. Station Capability .................................................................................................1-2
1.8. Gas Products - Information Stored / Product.....................................................1-2
1.9. Type of Gases Measured .....................................................................................1-2
1.10. Totalizing and Batching .......................................................................................1-3
1.11. PID Control Functions..........................................................................................1-3
1.12. Time Weighted and Flow Weighted Averages....................................................1-3
1.13. User-Programmable Digital I/O............................................................................1-3
1.14. User-Programmable Logic Functions .................................................................1-3
1.15. User-Programmable Alarm Functions ................................................................1-3
1.16. User-Programmable Variables.............................................................................1-4
1.17. User Display Setups .............................................................................................1-4
1.18. User Report Templates ........................................................................................1-4
1.19. Serial Communication Links ...............................................................................1-4
1.20. Peer-to-Peer Communications ............................................................................1-4
1.21. Archive Data..........................................................................................................1-4
1.22. OmniCom
Software Communications Package ..............................................1-5
1.23. OmniView
Software Communications Package ..............................................1-5
ii
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
Configuration and Advanced Operation
2. Flow Computer Configuration ............................................................................... 2-1

2.1. Introduction.......................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2. Configuring with the Keypad in Program Mode ................................................ 2-1
2.2.1.
Entering the Program Mode ...................................................................................... 2-1
2.2.2.
Changing Data .......................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2.3.
Menu Selection Method............................................................................................. 2-2
2.2.4.
Random Access Method ........................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.5.
Passwords................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.3. Getting Help ......................................................................................................... 2-4

2.4. Program Inhibit Switch........................................................................................ 2-4
2.5. Configuring the Physical Inputs / Outputs......................................................... 2-5
2.5.1.
Miscellaneous I/O Configuration (Misc. Setup Menu) ............................................... 2-5
2.5.2.
Physical I/O Points not Available for Configuration ................................................... 2-6
2.5.3.
Password Maintenance Settings ............................................................................... 2-6
2.5.4.
Entries Requiring a Valid Privileged Password ......................................................... 2-7
2.5.5.
Module Settings......................................................................................................... 2-7
2.5.6.
Meter Station I/O Assignments ................................................................................. 2-8
2.5.7.
Meter Run I/O Assignments .................................................................................... 2-10
2.5.8.
PID Control I/O Assignments .................................................................................. 2-12
2.5.9.
Analog Output Assignments.................................................................................... 2-14
2.5.10. Front Panel Counter Settings .................................................................................. 2-15

2.5.11. Programmable Boolean Statements ....................................................................... 2-16
2.5.12. Programmable Variable Statements ....................................................................... 2-18
2.5.13. User Display Settings .............................................................................................. 2-20
2.5.14. Digital I/O Point Settings ......................................................................................... 2-22
2.5.15. Serial Input / Output Settings ................................................................................. 2-24
2.5.16. Custom Modbus Data Packet Settings................................................................. 2-26
2.5.17. Programmable Logic Controller Setup .................................................................... 2-27
2.5.18. Archive File Setup ................................................................................................... 2-27
2.5.19. Peer-to-Peer Communications Settings.................................................................. 2-28
2.6. Setting Up the Time and Date ........................................................................... 2-33

2.6.1.
Accessing the Time/Date Setup Submenu ............................................................. 2-33
2.6.2.
Time and Date Settings........................................................................................... 2-33
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
iii
2.7. Configuring Printers...........................................................................................2-34

2.7.1.
Accessing the Printer Setup Submenu ................................................................... 2-34
2.7.2.
Printer Settings........................................................................................................ 2-34
2.8. Configuring Gas Chromatograph (GC) Analyzers............................................2-36

2.8.1.
Accessing the Analyzer Setup Submenu ................................................................ 2-36
2.8.2.
Analyzer Settings..................................................................................................... 2-36
2.9. Configuring Premium Billing Threshold Levels (Revision 23.71+ - US

Customary Units Only).......................................................................................2-38
2.9.1.
Accessing Premium Billing Settings........................................................................ 2-38
2.9.2.
Premium Billing Threshold Settings ........................................................................ 2-38
2.10. Configuring PID Control Outputs ......................................................................2-39

2.10.1. Accessing the PID Control Setup Submenu ........................................................... 2-39
2.10.2. PID Control Output Settings .................................................................................... 2-39
2.11. Configuring Meter Specific Gravity / Density ...................................................2-41

2.11.1. Accessing the Gravity/Density Setup Submenu...................................................... 2-41
2.11.2. Meter Specific Gravity / Density Settings ................................................................ 2-41
2.12. Configuring Meter Temperature ........................................................................2-43

2.12.1. Accessing the Temperature Setup Submenu ......................................................... 2-43
2.12.2. Station and Meter Run Temperature Settings......................................................... 2-43
2.12.3. Station and Meter Run Density Temperature Settings............................................ 2-44
2.13. Configuring Meter Pressure ..............................................................................2-45

2.13.1. Accessing the Pressure Setup Submenu................................................................ 2-45
2.13.2. Station and Meter Run Pressure Settings ............................................................... 2-45
2.13.3. Station and Meter Run Density Pressure Settings .................................................. 2-46
2.14. Configuring Differential Pressure .....................................................................2-47

2.14.1. Accessing the Differential Pressure Setup Submenu ............................................. 2-47
2.14.2. Station and Meter Differential Pressure Settings .................................................... 2-47
2.15. Configuring the Meter Station ...........................................................................2-49

2.15.1. Accessing the Station Setup Submenu................................................................... 2-49
2.15.2. Meter Station Settings ............................................................................................. 2-49
2.16. Configuring Meter Runs.....................................................................................2-53

2.16.1. Accessing the Meter Run Setup Submenu ............................................................. 2-53
2.16.2. Meter Run Settings.................................................................................................. 2-53
iv
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
2.17. Configuring Miscellaneous Factors.................................................................. 2-58

2.17.1. Accessing the Factor Setup Submenu.................................................................... 2-58
2.17.2. Factor Settings ........................................................................................................ 2-58
2.18. Configuring Fluid Data and Analysis of Products ........................................... 2-60

2.18.1. Accessing the Fluid Data & Analysis Setup Submenu ............................................ 2-60
2.18.2. General Fluid Data & Analysis (Product) Settings................................................... 2-60
2.18.3. Additional Settings for Natural Gas Product............................................................ 2-61
3. User-Programmable Functions ............................................................................. 3-1

3.1. Introduction.......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2. User-Programmable Boolean Flags and Statements ........................................ 3-1
3.2.1.
What is a Boolean? ................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2.2.
Sign (+, -) of Analog or Calculated Variables (5001 8999) .................................. 3-3
3.2.3.
Boolean Statements and Functions .......................................................................... 3-3
3.2.4.
How the Digital I/O Assignments are Configured...................................................... 3-8
3.3. User Programmable Variables and Statements............................................... 3-10

3.3.1.
Variable Statements and Mathematical Operators Allowed.................................... 3-10
3.3.2.
Using Boolean Variables in Variable Statements.................................................... 3-12
3.3.3.
Entering Values Directly into the User Variables..................................................... 3-13
3.3.4.
Using the Variable Expression as a Prompt............................................................ 3-13
3.3.5.
Password Level Needed to Change the Value of a User Variable.......................... 3-13
3.3.6.
Using Variables in Boolean Expressions ................................................................ 3-14
3.4. User Configurable Display Screens.................................................................. 3-15
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
4. Flow Equations and Algorithms for U.S. Customary Units (Revision 23.71+) .. 4-1
4.1. Flow Rate for Gas Differential Pressure Devices (Orifice, Nozzle and
Venturi)..................................................................................................................4-1
4.1.1.
Mass Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions Qm (Klbm/hr) .............................................. 4-1
4.1.2.
Volumetric Gross Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions Qv (MCF/hr) ............................ 4-1
4.1.3.
Volumetric Net Flow Rate at Base Conditions Qb (MSCF/hr).................................. 4-1
4.1.4.
Energy Flow Rate at Base Conditions Qe (MMBTU/hr) ........................................... 4-2
4.1.5.
Nomenclature............................................................................................................ 4-2
4.1.6.
Diameters and Diameter Correlations....................................................................... 4-3
4.1.7.
Velocity of Approach Factor Ev ............................................................................... 4-5
4.1.8.
Discharge Coefficients Cd........................................................................................ 4-6
4.1.9.
Fluid Expansion Factor Referenced to Upstream Pressure Y1............................. 4-10
4.2. Flow Rate for Gas Turbine Flowmeters ............................................................4-12

4.2.1.
Volumetric Gross Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions QV (MCF/hr).......................... 4-12
4.2.2.
Mass Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions Qm (Klbm/hr) ............................................ 4-12
4.2.3.
Volumetric Net Flow Rate at Base Conditions Qb (MSCF/hr)................................ 4-12
4.2.4.
Energy Flow Rate at Base Conditions Qe (MMBTU/hr) ......................................... 4-12
4.2.5.
Nomenclature.......................................................................................................... 4-13
4.3. Densities and Other Properties of Gas .............................................................4-14
vi
4.3.1.
AGA Report N 8: Compressibility for Natural Gas and Other Related

Hydrocarbon Gases ................................................................................................ 4-14
4.3.2.
ASME 1967 Steam Equation r............................................................................. 4-18
4.3.3.
Water Density.......................................................................................................... 4-18
4.3.4.
NBS Density (lb/CF), Viscosity Isentropic Exponent, Sound Velocity, and

Enthalpy................................................................................................................... 4-18
4.3.5.
Density and Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Calculated from Digital

Densitometer and Gravitometer Output Frequency ................................................ 4-19
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
5. Flow Equations and Algorithms for S.I. (Metric) Units (Revision 27.71+).......... 5-1
5.1. Flow Rate for Gas Differential Pressure Devices (Orifice, Nozzle and
Venturi) ................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1.
Mass Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions Qm (ton/hr) ................................................. 5-1
5.1.2.
Volumetric Gross Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions Qv (m /hr) ............................... 5-1
5.1.3.
Volumetric Net Flow Rate at Base Conditions Qb (m /hr)........................................ 5-2
5.1.4.
Energy Flow Rate at Base Conditions Qe (GJ/hr).................................................... 5-2
5.1.5.
Nomenclature............................................................................................................ 5-2
5.1.6.
Diameters and Diameter Correlations....................................................................... 5-3
5.1.7.
Coefficient of Discharge C....................................................................................... 5-5
5.1.8.
Fluid Expansion Factor ......................................................................................... 5-8
5.2. Flow Rate for Gas Helical Turbine Flowmeters ................................................. 5-9
3
5.2.1.
Volumetric Gross Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions QV (m /hr) ............................... 5-9
5.2.2.
Mass Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions Qm (ton/hr) ................................................. 5-9
5.2.3.
Volumetric Net Flow Rate at Base Conditions Qb (m /hr)........................................ 5-9
5.2.4.
Energy Flow Rate at Base Conditions Qe (GJ/hr).................................................... 5-9
5.2.5.
Nomenclature.......................................................................................................... 5-10
5.3. Densities and Other Properties of Gas............................................................. 5-11

O
5.3.1.
AGA Report N 8: Compressibility for Natural Gas and Other Related

Hydrocarbon Gases ................................................................................................ 5-11
5.3.2.
ASME 1967 Steam Equation r............................................................................. 5-15
5.3.3.
Water Density.......................................................................................................... 5-15
5.3.4.
NBS Density, Viscosity Isentropic Exponent, Sound Velocity, and Enthalpy .......... 5-15
5.3.5.
Density and Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Calculated from Digital Densitometer
and Gravitometer Output Frequency....................................................................... 5-16
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
vii
Figures of Volume 3
Fig. 1-1. Typical Gas Flow Metering Configuration Using Turbine and Orifice Flowmeters ................... 1-1
Fig. 2-1. Figure Showing Program Inhibit Switch .................................................................................... 2-4
Fig. 3-1. Figure Showing Automatic Four-Meter Flow Zone Thresholds ................................................ 3-6
Fig. 3-2. Figure Showing Four-Meter Run Valve Switching .................................................................... 3-7
Fig. 3-3. Keypad Layout - A through Z Keys ......................................................................................... 3-16
viii
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
1. Overview of Firmware Revisions 23.71/27.71

Orifice / Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems
1.1.
Number of Meter Runs - Type of

Flowmeters
Minimum 1 run, maximum 4 runs - gas orifice or turbine meter run.
1.2.
Product Configuration
Parallel runs measuring the same product or independent runs with different
products.
TURBINE METERS
ORIFICE METERS
FT
FT
FT
FT
Fig. 1-1.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Typical Gas Flow Metering Configuration Using Turbine and

Orifice Flowmeters
1-1
Chapter 1
Overview of Firmware Revision 23.71/27.71
1.3.
Configurable Sensors per Meter Run
Meter turbines, differential pressures, meter temperature and pressure, meter

density, density temperature and pressure.
1.4.
Temperature, Pressure and Differential

Pressure Transmitters
All transmitters can be either 4-20mA, 1-5V or Honeywell DE digital protocol

types. In addition temperature sensors can also be four wire DIN or American
curve RTD probes connected directly.
1.5.
Densitometers
Can be configured for any combination or mix of individual or shared

densitometers of any type (analog specific gravity, analog density, digital
Solartron pulse, digital Sarasota pulse or digital UGC pulse); the maximum
number that can be connected is four.
1.6.
Gas Chromatographs
Where applicable, analysis data can be obtained automatically via a serial

communication port from a gas chromatograph. Standard protocols
communicate with (1) Applied Automation analyzers, (2) Daniels Danalyzer,
(3) other analyzers which communicate using Modbus protocol.
1.7.
Station Capability
Meter runs may be combined or subtracted in any mode to provide station flow
rates and totalizers. Can be used in 'Check /Pay' meter systems to monitor flows
and alarm if deviations exceed a preset limit.
1.8.
Gas Products - Information Stored /

Product
Information for four different gases can be stored. Product setup information
includes: name, type of gas, component analysis, relative density at reference
conditions and calculation algorithm to be used when running the product.
1.9.
Type of Gases Measured
Natural gas and other fluids covered by: AGA 3 1992; API 14.3; AGA 8 Reports
1994, 1992 and 1985; ASTM Steam; NIST Steam, Water, Argon, Nitrogen,
Oxygen, paraHydrogen, and Ethylene using NIST 1048.
1-2
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
1.10. Totalizing and Batching

Gross (uncorrected) volume, Net (standard conditions) volume, Mass and
Energy totalizers are provided for each meter run and defined station group.
Separate totalizer sets provide, Cumulative (non resetable) Daily and Batch
totalizers. The Batch totalizers can be used to provide either weekly, monthly or
on demand totalizing information.
1.11. PID Control Functions

Four independent control loops are provided for control of a primary variable with
either high or low override control by a secondary variable. Contact closure
inputs are activated to provide a startup ramp function for each control loop if
needed. Primary set point can be adjusted via an analog input, a keypad entry or
communication link. Control loops are not dedicated and may be cascaded.
Data is processed every 500 msec.
1.12. Time Weighted and Flow Weighted

Averages
Either Flow weighted or time weighted averages for all input variables and
correction factors based on daily flow or batch flow are standard. Because errors
such as entering an incorrect orifice diameter, would cause large flow errors and
errors in the flow weighted averages, time weighted averages are calculated for
orifice metering runs. Averaging does not occur if the flow rate is zero. All
variables associated with Turbine metering runs are flow weighted averaged.
Gas chromatograph data is always time weighted.
1.13. User-Programmable Digital I/O

Each I/O point is individually configurable as either an input or output with
variable 'delay On' and 'delay Off'. Pulse widths are adjustable when used as
auxiliary totalizer outputs or sampler outputs.
1.14. User-Programmable Logic Functions

Sixty-four logic statements can be user programmed to control meter run
switching and provide user auxiliary control functions.
1.15. User-Programmable Alarm Functions

Sixteen of the programmable logic statements described above can be used to
contain custom text messages which can be displayed, logged and printed.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
1-3
Chapter 1
Overview of Firmware Revision 23.71/27.71
1.16. User-Programmable Variables

Sixty-four user variables can be programmed to manipulate data for display and
printing or remote access via a communication port. Typical uses include,
special units conversions, customer averaging algorithms for leak detection,
special limit checking and control functions. The programmable variable
statements can also be used to type cast data of one type to another (i.e.,
change a floating point variable to an integer type so that a PLC or DCS system
can make use of it).
1.17. User Display Setups

The user may specify eight key press combinations which recall display screens.
Each user display screen can show four variables each with a descriptive tag
defined by the user.
1.18. User Report Templates

Using OmniCom the user can generate custom report templates or edit existing
templates. These are uploaded into the flow computer. Custom templates for the
snapshot, batch end, daily and prove reports can be defined.
1.19. Serial Communication Links

Up to four serial data links are available for communications with other devices
such as printers, SCADA systems, PLCs and other Omni Flow Computers.
Ports communicate using a superset of the Modbus protocol (ASCII or RTU).
Printer data is ASCII data.
1.20. Peer-to-Peer Communications

Omni flow computers can be user configured to communicate with each other as
equal peers. Groups of data variables can be exchanged or broadcast between
other flow computers. Multiple flow computers can share resources such as a
PLC.
1.21. Archive Data

Two types of data archiving are possible in the flow computer. (1) Formatted
ASCII text using custom report templates, (2) Raw Data using archive records
and files.
1-4
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
Software Communications
1.22. OmniCom
Package
OmniCom software is provided with each flow computer, and allows the user to
configure the computer on-line or off-line using a personal computer.
Software Communications
1.23. OmniView
Package
A Man-Machine Interface package for the Omni Flow Computer is also available
as an option.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
1-5
Volume 3d
2. Flow Computer Configuration

2.1.
Introduction
Configuration data is stored in the computer's battery backed-up RAM memory

which will retain its data for at least 1 to 2 months with no power applied.
Configuration data can be entered using one of three methods:
1) Configure off-line using the OmniCom PC configuration program and then
uploading all data at once.
2) Configure on-line using the OmniCom PC configuration program which
uploads each change as it is entered.
3) Enter configuration data via the front panel keypad using the Program
Mode.
Methods 1) and 2) require an IBM compatible PC running the OmniCom
Configuration Software and are described in Volume 5 and in OmniCom Help.
Method 3) is described here.
2.2.
2.2.1.
Configuring with the Keypad in Program

Mode
Entering the Program Mode
INFO - Key presses are

denoted in bold face
between brackets; e.g.: the
enter key appears in this
manual as [Enter].
While in the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The front panel Program LED
above the key will glow green and the following selection menu will be displayed
th
on the first three lines of the LCD display. The 4 line of the display is used to
show the user key presses.
th
Press Keys to Select

Group Entry, or
Press "Prog" to Exit
INFO - The 4 line of the

display is used to show the
user key presses.
2.2.2.
Changing Data
Data can be accessed using a sequential list of menu prompts or in a random

access manner by going directly to a specific group of entries.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
2-1
Chapter 2
Flow Computer Configuration
2.2.3.
INFO - Characters in [ ]
refer to key presses.
TIP - It is best to use the
menu selection method
when programming an
application for the first time
as every possible option
and variable will be
prompted. Once a computer
is in operation and you
become familiar with the
application you can decide
to use the faster Random
Access Method.
To use the menu selection
method, while in the
Program Mode (program
LED on) press [Setup]
[Enter]. A Setup Menu
similar to the one on the
right will be displayed.
Menu Selection Method

*** SETUP MENU ***
Misc Configuration _
Time/Date Setup
Printer Setup
Analyser Setup
PID Control Setup
Grav/Density Setup
Temperature Setup
Pressure Setup
DP Inches of Water
Station Setup
Meter Run Setup
Factor Setup
FluidData&Analysis
Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to the appropriate
entry and press [Enter] to access a particular submenu. The first menu, 'Misc
Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the
number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer;
i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for
configuration data unless a transducer has been defined.
2.2.4.
Random Access Method
In addition to the Setup Menu, the data is also presented in related groups such
as Temperature, Pressure, Meter, etc. You press the group key of your choice to
get to a data area. By specifying a meter run before or after a group you go
directly to the data for that group and that group only.
Once a group is selected use the 'Up/Down' arrow keys to step to a specific data
entry within the group. You can view data and, assuming a valid password has
been entered, change its value as required. If an error is made, press [Clear],
re-enter the correct data and press [Enter] to enter the new value. The cursor
will automatically step to the next data item in that group unless that would cause
a total change of screen (i.e., you can always verify your entry). A list of data
groups and associated key presses is listed later in this chapter.
Example:
Pressing [Temp] will allow you access to temperature data for all meter runs.
Pressing [Meter] [1] [Temp] or [Temp] [Meter] [1] will allow access to only
Meter Run #1 temperature data. For example, pressing [Meter] [1] [Temp] will
display the following until the [Enter] key is pressed.
th
The 4 line of the display is

used to show the user key
presses.
2-2
Press
Group
Press
Meter
Keys to Select
Entry, or
"Prog" to Exit
1 Temp
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

Pressing the [Enter] key will display a screen similar to this:
TEMPERATURE #1 Deg.F
Low Limit
30.0
High Limit
125.0
Override
60.0
2.2.5.
INFO - Most entry groups
occupy multiple screens so
be sure to use the [$]/[%]
to scroll and see all data.
Passwords
Except when changing transducer high/low alarm limits, a password is usually

asked for when changing the configuration data within the computer.
The flow computer has independent password protection of the following:
Local Keypad Access / Modbus Port #1 (selectable)
(Physical Serial Port #1)
Modbus Port #2 - (Physical Serial Port #2)
Local Keypad Access

Three password levels are provided:
Privileged Level
Allows complete access to all entries within the flow

computer including keypad passwords 1, 1A and 2
below. The initial privileged password for each Modbus
port is selected via this password level.
Level 1
This level allows technician access to most entries

within the flow computer with the exception of I/O
Points assignments, programmable variables and
Boolean statements and passwords other than
Keypad Level 1.
Level 1A
This level allows technician access to the following

entries only:
Meter Factors
K Factors
Densitometer
Correction
Factors
(Pycnometer
Factor)
Level 2
Allows access to the operator type entries. These

entries include:
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Transducer Manual Overrides

Product Gravity Overrides
Prover Operations
Batching Operations
2-3
Chapter 2

Changing Passwords at the Keypad
1) At the keypad press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter].

2) With the cursor blinking on 'Misc Configuration', press [Enter].
3) With the cursor blinking on 'Password Main?', press [Enter].
4) Enter the Privileged Level Password (up to 6 Characters) and press
[Enter].
5) The Level 1, 1A and Level 2 passwords can now be viewed and changed
if required.
INFO - See Technical

Bulletin TB-960701 in
Volume 5 for setting Level
B and Level C passwords
using OmniCom.
Note: Level B and Level C

passwords for each Modbus
port cannot be viewed or
changed from the keypad.
INFO - The Help System is

not limited to just the
Program Mode. Context
sensitive help is available in
all modes of operation.
1) Scroll down to access each of the Modbus serial port 'Level A' passwords.
These are labeled Serial 1 (if Modbus Protocol is selected), 'Serial 2',
Serial 3', and 'Serial 4' corresponding to the physical port numbering for
Modbus Ports 1, 2, 3 and 4.
2.3.
Getting Help
Context sensitive help is available for most data entries. Help is summoned by
pressing the [Display/Enter] key twice ([Help] key) with the cursor on the data
field in question. Help screens are frequently more than 1 full screen so always
use the [$]/[%] keys to scroll in case there is more. Press [Prog] or [Enter]
once to exit the help system and return to your original screen.
2.4.
Program Inhibit Switch
A 'Program Inhibit Switch' mounted behind the front panel prevents unauthorized
changing of data when in the 'Inhibit' position. Most data can be viewed while the
switch is in the program inhibit position, but any attempt to alter data will be
ignored and cause 'PROGRAM LOCKOUT' to be displayed on the bottom line of
the LCD display.
The inner enclosure of the flow computer can be locked or sealed within the
outer enclosure blocking access to the 'Program Inhibit Switch'.
CAUTION!
These units have an

integral latching mechanism
which first must be
bezel upwards before
withdrawing the unit from
the case.
Fig. 2-1.
2-4
Figure Showing Program Inhibit Switch
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
2.5.
Tip - It is best to use the
Menu Selection Method
(see 2.2.3, this chapter)
when programming an
prompted. Once a
computer is in operation
and you become familiar
with the application you can
decide to use the faster
(see 2.2.4, this chapter).
INFO - The first menu, 'Misc

Configuration', should
always be completed first
as these entries specify the
number and type of input
and output devices
connected to the flow
computer. You are advise to
complete all entries under
this menu before
proceeding. Only
transducers that have been
assigned to physical I/O
points will be available for
further configuration (i.e.,
the menus following the
'Misc Configuration' menu
do not ask for or accept
configuration data unless a
transducer has been
defined). (See 2.5.2, this
chapter)
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Configuring the Physical Inputs /

Outputs
The Omni Flow Computer can accept many I/O modules and be configured to
match just about any combination of measurement transmitters. Configuring the
physical I/O means setting up the number of meter runs, what types of
transducers are to be used and to which physical I/O points they are connected.
2.5.1.
Miscellaneous I/O Configuration (Misc. Setup

Menu)
The physical I/O configuration of the flow computer is changed by entering the
Misc. Setup menu while the 'Select Group Entry' screen is displayed (see
9.2.1. Entering the Program Mode).
Press Keys to Select
Group Entry, or
Press "Prog" to Exit
Setup
Press [Setup] then [Enter] and the following selection menu will be displayed:
*** SETUP MENU ***
Time/Date Setup
Station Setup
The cursor automatically appears at the Misc Configuration option. Press
[Enter] and the following selection menu will be displayed:
*** Misc. Setup ***
Password Maint?(Y)
Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station?(Y)
Config Meter n
Config PID ? n
Config D/A Outn
Front Pnl Counters
Program Booleans ?
Program Variables?
User Display ? n
Config Digitaln
Serial I/O n
Peer/Peer Comm(Y)?
Custom Packet n
Archive File n
2-5
Chapter 2
2.5.2.
Physical I/O Points not Available for

Configuration
Configuration parameter groups are only prompted as needed. Meter runs and
transducers which are not assigned to a physical I/O point will not be available
for configuration. In these cases the following message will be displayed:
Variable Selected is
Not Assigned to a
Physical I/O Point
If this message is displayed

check the I/O point
assignment for the variable.
2.5.3.
INFO - Characters in { }
refer to password levels.
Characters in [ ] refer to
key presses.
TIP - Use the blank lines
provided next to each
configuration option to write
down the corresponding
settings you entered in the
flow computer.
Some of these entries may
not appear on the display or
in OmniCom. Depending on
the various configuration
settings of your specific
metering system, only those
configuration options which
are applicable will be
displayed.
Note: In the privileged

password area all
passwords are legible upon
entering the correct
privileged password. In all
other cases when requested
for a password, upon
entering the password, the
Omni will display all entered
characters as asterisk.
Password Maintenance Settings
Password maintenance settings can only be entered via the Omni front panel
keypad. Enter [Y] at Password Maint ? of the Misc Setup menu to open the
following entries:
{PL} Privileged
_______________
Enter the privileged password to allow you to view and change all configuration data including
other passwords.
{PL} Level 1
_______________
Enter the Level 1 password to allow entry of all configuration data except entries which
determine the physical I/O personality of the computer.
{PL} Level 1A
_______________
Enter the Level 1A password to allow entry of Meter factors, K Factors and Density Correction
Factors only.
{PL} Level 2
_______________
Enter the Level 2 password which is required for operator type entries such as gravity
overrides and meter factors.
{PL} Serial Port #1 Password
_______________
Enter the Serial Port password. All data in the Modbus database except passwords can be
read via the serial ports. These passwords allow writes to the Modbus database. Password
protection can be disabled by entering a blank field as a password.
{PL} Lockout Switch Active? (Serial Port #1)
_______________
Enter [N] for the lockout switch to be inactive for this serial port.
Enter [Y] for the lockout switch to be active for this serial port.
_______________
Enter the Serial Port #2 Password.
2-6
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
2.5.4.
key presses.
flow computer.
displayed.
Entries Requiring a Valid Privileged Password
The following entries display only when a Valid Privileged Password is entered:
{PL} Model Number (0=3000, 1=6000)
{PL} Re-configure Archive
CAUTION!
If you change the number or

type of installed I/O
modules, you must perform
the Check Modules
Function to inform the
computer that you wish to
use the new hardware
configuration.
_______________
Enter [Y] to re-configure archive records definition. Enter [N] when finished.
{PL} Archive Run (Y/N)
_______________
Enter [Y] to start the archive running.
{PL} Reset All Totalizers ? (Y/N)
_______________
Reset All Ram and Reset Totalizers will only display after the privileged password has been
entered. will clear to zero all internal totalizers. You can change totalizer decimal place
settings after entering [Y]. The three electromechanical totalizers on the front of the computer
cannot be zeroed.
{PL} Reset All RAM ? (Y/N)
_______________
This entry is used by the OmniCom configuration software to determine the maximum I/O
capability of the computer.
_______________
Resetting all RAM will clear all configuration data, calibration data and totalizers. This means
that all configuration data will have to be re-entered.
{PL} Input Calibrate Default ?
_______________
Entering a [Y] here will set all the analog input calibration constants used to scale zero and
span settings to the default value. This will require you to re calibrate all the inputs. You can
also do this on a channel by channel basis by entering the input channel number.
{PL} D/A Calibrate Default ?
_______________
Entering a [Y] here will set all the analog output calibration constants used to scale zero and
span settings to the default value. This will require you to re-calibrate all the outputs. You can
also do this on a channel by channel basis by entering the output channel number.
2.5.5.
Module Settings
Enter [Y] at Check Modules ? of the Misc Setup menu and a screen similar
to the following will display:
MODULE S-WARE H-WARE
A-1
Y
Y
B-1
Y
Y
E/D-1
Y
Y
E-1
Y
Y
H-1
Y
Y
D-2
Y
Y
S-2
Y
Y
Update S-Ware ?
{PL} Update S-Ware ? (Y)
_______________
A table is displayed showing all of the physically installed I/O modules verses the I/O modules
recognized by the software (see display example above). You must answer the 'Update
Software' question entering [Y] whenever you change the number or type of installed
modules. The available I/O point numbers are allocated to each module at this time according
to the type and number of each module (see Chapter 2 for more information).
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
2-7
Chapter 2
2.5.6.
Meter Station I/O Assignments
INFO - The number of

process variable I/O points
available depends on the
number of combo modules
installed (see Chapter 2 in
Volume 1 for more
information). Point numbers
range from 01 through 24.
Assign [0] to invalidate the
assigning of a variable.
Enter [Y] at Config Station ? of the Misc Setup menu to open the following
entries:
I/O Type Mismatch - The

computer will not let you
assign the same I/O point #
to incompatible transducer
types; i.e., an I/O point
cannot be assigned as a
temperature input for Meter
Run #1 and a pressure
input for Meter Run #2. If
the I/O Type Mismatch
message is displayed,
recheck the I/O.
{PL} Reference Specific Gravity (SG) I/O Point #
{PL} Station Configured As:
_______________
Station Totals and Flows Defined As: Define which meter runs will be included in the station
flow rates and totalizers. Meter data can be added or subtracted.
Example: Entering [1] [+] [2] [-] [3] [-] [4] defines the station flows and totals as the result of
Meter Runs #1 and #2 added together, subtracted by the flows of Meters #3 and #4.
Enter [0] for no station totalizers.
SG Transducer Tag
_______________
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this SG transducer on the LCD display.
SG Transducer Type
_______________
Enter the SG transducer type: 1=4-20mA signal, 2=Solartron 3096 digital pulse.
{PL} Nitrogen (N2) % I/O Point #

Shared Transducers Enter the same I/O point to
share transducers between
meter runs.
_______________
Enter the physical I/O point number used to input the gas specific gravity at reference
conditions (Points 1-24) The live SG will be used in the AGA 8 equation. Enter [0] if no live
SG is available.
_______________
Enter the physical I/O point number used to input this gas analysis variable (Points 1-24) The
data from this input signal will be used in the AGA 8 equation of state. Enter [0] if this signal
is not available to the flow computer.
N2 % Transducer Tag
_______________
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this transducer on the LCD display.
Correcting a Mistake Enter an I/O point # of [0] to
cancel an incorrectly
entered I/O point #, then
enter the correct number.
Assigning I/O Point #99 This indicates that the
associated variable will be
available for display and be
used in all calculations, but
will not be obtained via a
live input. The variable
value is usually downloaded
into the flow computer
database via a
communication port or via a
user variable statement.
2-8
{PL} Carbon Dioxide (CO2) % I/O Point #
_______________
data from this input signal will be used in the AGA 8 equation of state. Enter [0] if this signal
is not available to the flow computer.
CO2 % Transducer Tag
_______________
{PL} Gas Heating Value (HV) % I/O Point #
_______________
data from this input signal will be used in the AGA 8 equation of state and used to calculate
energy flow. Enter [0] if this signal is not available to the flow computer.
Gas HV Transducer Tag
_______________
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

Auxiliary Input Assignment
key presses.
{PL} Auxiliary Input #1 I/O Point #
Enter the physical I/O point number to which this auxiliary input is connected. Auxiliary Inputs
can be used to enter miscellaneous variables.
Auxiliary Input #1 Tag

flow computer.
displayed.
_______________
_______________
Auxiliary Input Type
_______________
Enter the Auxiliary Input Type:

0 = DIN RTD
1 = American RTD
2 = Honeywell Smart Transmitter or 4-20mA.
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
_______________
_______________
_______________
2-9
Chapter 2
2.5.7.
Config Meter Runs Physical I/O information for
up to 4 meter runs can be
entered. Transducers that
are not assigned an I/O
point will not be available for
display or further
configuration.
INFO - The number of

process variable I/O points
available depends on the
number of combo modules
installed (see Chapter 2 in
Volume 1 for more
information). Point numbers
range from 01 through 24.
Assign [0] to invalidate the
assigning of a variable.
I/O Type Mismatch - The
computer will not let you
assign the same I/O point #
to incompatible transducer
types; i.e., an I/O point
cannot be assigned as a
temperature input for Meter
Run #1 and a pressure
input for Meter Run #2. If
the I/O Type Mismatch
message is displayed,
recheck the I/O.
Shared Transducers Enter the same I/O point to
share transducers between
meter runs.
Meter Run I/O Assignments
Enter [1], [2], [3] or [4] at Config Meter "n" of the Misc Setup menu to open
the following entries:
{PL} Select Turbine/Orifice Flowmeter
{PL} Flowmeter I/O Point #
Assigning I/O Point #99 This indicates that the

associated variable will be
available for display and be
used in all calculations, but
will not be obtained via a
live input. The variable
value is usually downloaded
into the flow computer
database via a
communication port or via a
user variable statement.
2-10
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
This entry applies only when turbine meters are selected in the entry above. Enter the number
of the I/O point used to input the flow signal for each meter run. Flowmeter pulse inputs can
rd
th
only be assigned to the 3 input channel of A, B and E combo modules, and 4 input channel
of A and E combo modules.
Flowmeter Tag
_______
_______
_______
_______
This entry applies only when turbine meters are selected in the entry above. Enter the 8character tag name used to identify this flowmeter on the LCD display.
{PL} Dual Pulse Fidelity Check
_______
_______
_______
_______
This entry applies only when turbine meters are selected in the entry above. Enter [Y] to
enable 'Level A' pulse fidelity and security checking for this meter run (API MPMS Chapter 5,
Section 5). This can only be achieved with a flowmeter device which is fitted with two pickoffs
which produce pulse trains signals which are not coincident. The pulse trains must be
connected to channels 3 and 4 of an 'E Type Combo Module'.
The Omni will continuously compare both pulse trains and alarm any differences of phase or
frequency between the pulse trains. Totalizing will be unaffected by a failure of either pulse
train and simultaneous transients and noise pulses will be rejected with an 85 % certainty.
Enter [N] if pulse fidelity checking is not to be used.
{PL} DP Low Range I/O Point #
_______
_______
_______
_______
This entry applies only when orifice meters are selected in the entry above. Enter the I/O point
used to input the signal from the low range differential pressure signal for this meter run.
Duplicate I/O assignments can be made when a transducer is shared between meter runs.
(e.g.: forward and reverse flow).
DP Low Range Tag

Correcting a Mistake Enter an I/O point # of [0] to
cancel an incorrectly
entered I/O point #, then
enter the correct number.
_______________
Each meter run may use either a turbine/positive displacement meters or differential pressure
transmitters (orifice). Enter [Y] to select turbine meter or [N] to select orifice meter.
_______
_______
_______
_______
This entry applies only when turbine meters are selected in the entry above. Enter the 8character tag name used to identify this transmitter on the LCD display.
{PL} DP High Range I/O Point #
_______
_______
_______
_______
This entry applies only when orifice meters are selected in the entry above. Enter the I/O point
used to input the signal from the low range differential pressure (DP) signal for this meter run.
Duplicate I/O assignments can be made when a transducer is shared between meter runs.
(e.g.: forward and reverse flow).
Enter [0] if stacked DP transmitters are not used.
DP High Range Tag
_______
_______
_______
_______
This entry applies only when turbine meters are selected in the entry above. Enter the 8character tag name used to identify this transmitter on the LCD display.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
key presses.
flow computer.
displayed.
{PL} Temperature I/O Point #
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the I/O point number used to input the temperature signal for each meter run. Duplicate
I/O assignments are allowed when a sensor is shared by more than one meter run.
Temperature Transmitter Tag _______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this temperature transducer on the LCD
display.
Temp Transmitter Type
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the Temperature Transmitter Type:

0 = DIN RTD probe (=0.0385)
1 = American RTD probe (=0.0392)
2 = Honeywell smart transmitter or linear 4-20mA output.
{PL} Pressure I/O Point #
_______
_______
Enter the I/O point number used to input the pressure signal for each meter run. Duplicate I/O
assignments are allowed when a sensor is shared by more than one meter run.
Pressure Transducer Tag
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this pressure transducer on the LCD display.
{PL} Density I/O Point #
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the I/O point number used to input the density signal for each meter run. Duplicate I/O
assignments are allowed when a densitometer is shared by more than one meter run. Digital
th
pulse densitometers can only be assigned I/O point numbers corresponding to the 4 input
rd
th
channel of a B type Combo Module or the 3 and 4 input channels of an E/D combo module.
Density Transducer Tag
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density transducer on the LCD display.
Densitometer Type
_______
_______
_______
_______
{PL} Dens Temperature I/O Point # _______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the Densitometer Type:

1
2
3
4
5
6
=
=
=
=
=
=
Not applicable
4-20 SG linear
4-20 Density linear (gr/cc)
Solartron pulse
Sarasota pulse
UGC pulse.
Enter the I/O point number used to input the signal applied to compensate for temperature
effects at the densitometer for each meter run.
If the densitometer has no temperature sensor fitted, enter the same I/O point assignment as
the meter run temperature sensor.
Dens Temp Transmitter Tag
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density temperature transducer on the
LCD display.
Dens Temp Transmitter Type _______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the Densitometer Temperature Transmitter Type:

0 = DIN RTD probe (=0.0385)
1 = American RTD probe (=0.0392)
2 = Honeywell smart transmitter or linear 4-20mA output.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
2-11
Chapter 2
{PL} Dens Pressure I/O Point
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the I/O point number used to input the signal applied to compensate for pressure effects
at the densitometer for each meter run.
If the densitometer has no pressure sensor fitted, enter the same I/O point assignment as the
meter run pressure sensor.
Dens Press Transducer Tag
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density pressure transducer on the LCD
display.
2.5.8.
Proportional Integral
Derivative (PID) -- For
practical reasons we refer
to PID Control Loops in this
manual. However, your flow
computer actually performs
the Proportional Integral
(PI) function and does not
apply the derivative term.
The addition of the
derivative term would
greatly complicate tuning of
the control loop and besides
is not normally applicable to
the types of flow and
pressure control used in
pipelines.
PID Control I/O Assignments
Enter [1], [2], [3] or [4] at Config PID ? "n" of the Misc Setup menu to open
the following password Privileged Level {PL} entries:
Assign Primary Variable
Loop #2
Loop #3
Loop #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the database index number of the primary variable in the PID loop (see the sidebar).
Remarks
____________ ____________ ____________ ____________
Enter a remark in this 16-character field to identify the function of each variable assignment.
Primary Action (F/R)
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter [F] (forward action) if the value of the primary variable increases as the controller output
% increases. Enter [R] (reverse action) if the value of the primary variable decreases as the
controller output % increases.
Remote Setpoint I/O Point #

Valid Assignments - Any
integer or floating point
variable within the database
can be assigned to be the
primary or secondary
controlled variable (see
Volume 4 for a complete
listing of database
addresses and index
numbers).
Loop #1
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the I/O point number that the remote set point analog signal is connected to (01-24).
Assign this point to 99 in cases where the set point will be downloaded via a communication
port. Enter [0] if you will not be using a remote setpoint.
Assign Secondary Variable
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the database index number of the secondary variable in the PID loop (see the sidebar).
Remarks
____________ ____________ ____________ ____________
Enter a remark in this 16-character field to identify the function of each variable assignment.
Secondary Action (F/R)
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter [F] (forward action) if the value of the primary variable increases as the controller output
% increases. Enter [R] (reverse action) if the value of the primary variable decreases as the
controller output % increases.
2-12
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
Error Select (L/H)
Loop #1
Loop #2
Loop #3
Loop #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
This entry determines the circumstances under which the primary or secondary variables are
controlled. Enter [L] for low or [H] for high error select, according to the following modes:
MODE #1
Are both primary and secondary actions
forward?
yes
no
&
Enter [L] for Low

Error Select
MODE #2
Are both primary and secondary actions
forward?
yes
no
'
yes
Is secondary
action forward?
no
&
Enter [H] for High

Error Select
Enter [H] for High

Error Select
'
Is secondary
action forward?
no
Enter [L] for Low

Error Select
Mode #1: The controller will attempt to control the primary variable but will switch to
controlling the secondary variable, should the controller be trying to drive the secondary
variable ABOVE its setpoint. An example of this mode would be controlling flow rate (primary)
while not exceeding a MAXIMUM delivery pressure (secondary).
Mode #2: The controller will attempt to control primary variable but will switch to controlling
the secondary variable, should the controller be trying to drive the secondary variable BELOW
its setpoint. An example of this mode would be controlling flow rate (primary) while not
dropping below a MINIMUM pressure value (secondary).
Startup Mode (L/M)
_______
_______
_______
_______
This entry determines how the computer handles a system reset such as a momentary loss of
power. Enter [L] (Last) to cause the PID loop to stay in the operating mode it was last in
before the system reset. Enter [M] (Manual) to cause the PID loop to startup with the PID loop
in manual control mode and with the valve open % as it was before the system reset.
PID Tag
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter an 8-character tag name to identify the PID controller output signal on the LCD display.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
2-13
Chapter 2
2.5.9.
key presses.
flow computer.
displayed.
Analog Output Assignments
Press [n] [Enter] at Config D/A Out "n" of the Misc Setup menu to open the
following password Level 1 {L1} entries (n = D/A Output #):
Analog Output #1
at 4mA
at 20mA
__________
__________
__________
Under Assign, enter the database index number of the variable that will be assigned to the
digital-to-analog output points.
Under at 4mA and at 20mA, enter the required scaling parameters in engineering units at
4mA and 20mA (e.g.: For Meter #1 Net Flow Rate assign 7102. Typical scaling might be
4mA=0.0 Bbls/hr and 20mA=1000.0 Bbls/hr).
Remark
_______________
Enter a remark in this 16-character field which identifies and documents the function of each
digital-to-analog output.
Analog Output #2
Remark
Analog Output #3
Remark
Analog Output #4
Remark
Analog Output #5
Remark
Analog Output #6
Remark
Analog Output #7
Remark
Analog Output #8
Remark
Analog Output #9
Remark
Analog Output #10
Remark
Analog Output #11
Remark
Analog Output #12
Remark
2-14
Assign
__________
__________
__________
_______________
__________
__________
__________
_______________
__________
__________
__________
_______________
__________
__________
__________
_______________
__________
__________
__________
_______________
__________
__________
__________
_______________
__________
__________
__________
_______________
__________
__________
__________
_______________
__________
__________
__________
_______________
__________
__________
__________
_______________
__________
__________
__________
_______________
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
2.5.10. Front Panel Counter Settings

Enter [Y] at Front Pnl Counters of the Misc Setup menu to open the
following password Level 1 {L1} entries:
Assign Front Panel Counter
Counter A
Counter B
Counter C
__________
__________
__________
Enter the database index number of the accumulator variable that will be output to this
electromechanical counter.
The unit of measure is the same as that shown on the LCD for the totalizer (i.e., barrels, klbs,
3
m , etc.) The maximum count rate is limited to 10 counts per second. Count rates higher than
10 pulses per second will cause the computer to remember how many counts did not get
output and continue to output after the flow stops until all buffered counts are output.
Remark
____________ ____________ ____________
Enter a remark in this 16-character field which identifies and documents the function of each
front panel counter.
Pulses/Unit
__________
__________
__________
Enter the number of pulses per unit (volume, mass, energy).
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
2-15
Chapter 2
2.5.11. Programmable Boolean Statements

Program Booleans These 64 Boolean
statements are evaluated
every 100 msec starting at
Point 1025 continuing
through 1088. Each
statement can contain up to
3 Boolean variables,
optionally preceded by the
slash (/) denoting the NOT
Function and separated by
a valid Boolean operator:
Operator Symbol
NOT
/
AND
&
OR
+
EXOR
*
EQUAL
=
IF
)
GOTO
G
MOVE
:
COMPARE
%
INDIRECT
E.g.: 1025 1002&/1003

Boolean 1025 is true when
point 1002 is true AND point
1003 is NOT true.
Note: Points 1002 and
1003 in this example reflect
the status of Physical
Digital I/O Points 2 and 3.
There are no limitations as
to what Boolean points can
be used in a statement.
Statements can contain the
results from other
statements.
E.g.: 1026 /1025+1105
Boolean 1025 is NOT true
OR Point 1105 is true.
Using the = operator, the
result of a statement can
initiate a command.
E.g.: 1027 1719=1026
Request a Snapshot
Report when Boolean 1026
is true.
Note: See Volume 4 for
detailed list of Booleans and
Status Commands.
2-16
Enter [Y] at Program Booleans ? of the Misc Setup menu to open the
following password Privileged Level {PL} entries:
Boolean Point 10xx
Equation or Statement
Comment or Remark
25:
_______________________ _______________________
26:
_______________________ _______________________
27:
_______________________ _______________________
28:
_______________________ _______________________
29:
_______________________ _______________________
30:
_______________________ _______________________
31:
_______________________ _______________________
32:
_______________________ _______________________
33:
_______________________ _______________________
34:
_______________________ _______________________
35:
_______________________ _______________________
36:
_______________________ _______________________
37:
_______________________ _______________________
38:
_______________________ _______________________
39:
_______________________ _______________________
40:
_______________________ _______________________
41:
_______________________ _______________________
42:
_______________________ _______________________
43:
_______________________ _______________________
44:
_______________________ _______________________
45:
_______________________ _______________________
46:
_______________________ _______________________
47:
_______________________ _______________________
48:
_______________________ _______________________
49:
_______________________ _______________________
50:
_______________________ _______________________
51:
_______________________ _______________________
52:
_______________________ _______________________
53:
_______________________ _______________________
54:
_______________________ _______________________
55:
_______________________ _______________________
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

Boolean Point 10xx
Comment or Remark

flow computer.
56:
_______________________ _______________________
57:
_______________________ _______________________
58:
_______________________ _______________________
59:
_______________________ _______________________
Program Booleans These 64 Boolean

Point 1025 continuing
through 1088. Each
statement can contain up to
3 Boolean variables,
slash (/) denoting the NOT
Function and separated by
a valid Boolean operator:
Operator Symbol
NOT
/
AND
&
OR
+
EXOR
*
EQUAL
=
IF
)
GOTO
G
MOVE
:
COMPARE
%
INDIRECT
E.g.: 1025 1002&/1003

point 1002 is true AND point
1003 is NOT true.
Note: Points 1002 and
1003 in this example reflect
the status of Physical
Digital I/O Points 2 and 3.
There are no limitations as
to what Boolean points can
be used in a statement.
Statements can contain the
results from other
statements.
E.g.: 1026 /1025+1105
Boolean 1025 is NOT true
OR Point 1105 is true.
Using the = operator, the
result of a statement can
initiate a command.
E.g.: 1027 1719=1026
Request a Snapshot
Report when Boolean 1026
is true.
60:
_______________________ _______________________
61:
_______________________ _______________________
62:
_______________________ _______________________
63:
_______________________ _______________________
64:
_______________________ _______________________
65:
_______________________ _______________________
66:
_______________________ _______________________
67:
_______________________ _______________________
68:
_______________________ _______________________
69:
_______________________ _______________________
70:
_______________________ _______________________
71:
_______________________ _______________________
72:
_______________________ _______________________
73:
_______________________ _______________________
74:
_______________________ _______________________
75:
_______________________ _______________________
76:
_______________________ _______________________
77:
_______________________ _______________________
78:
_______________________ _______________________
79:
_______________________ _______________________
80:
_______________________ _______________________
81:
_______________________ _______________________
82:
_______________________ _______________________
83:
_______________________ _______________________
84:
_______________________ _______________________
85:
_______________________ _______________________
86:
_______________________ _______________________
87:
_______________________ _______________________
88:
_______________________ _______________________
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
2-17
Chapter 2
2.5.12.
Programmable Variables These 64 variable
the statement that
determines the value of
Points 7025 through 7088.
Each statement can contain
up to 3 variables or
constants. Variables can be
$ symbol denoting the
ABSOLUTE value of the
variable is to be used.
Constants are identified by
placing a # symbol ahead
of the number. These and
other operators are:
Operator Symbol
ABSOLUTE
$
CONSTANT
#
POWER
&
MULTIPLY
*
DIVIDE
/
ADD
+
SUBTRACT
EQUAL
=
IF
)
GOTO
G
MOVE
:
COMPARE
%
INDIRECT
The order of precedence is:

1) ABSOLUTE
2) POWER
3) MULTIPLY/DIVIDE
4) ADD/SUBTRACT
In cases where operators
have the same precedence,
left to right.
E.g.: The value of floating
point variable 7035 is
defined as:
7035:7027&#0.5*7026
The power operator is
evaluated first (the value of
Point 7035 is set equal to
the square root of the
number contained in Point
7027) and the result is
multiplied by the number
stored in variable 7026.
Note that statements can
contain the results of other
statements. (See OmniCom
Help for more information
by pressing [F1] on your PC
keyboard in the Configure
Variable Statement menu.)
2-18
Programmable Variable Statements
Enter [Y] at Program Variables ? of the Misc Setup menu to open the
following password Privileged Level {PL} entries:
Prog Variable 70xx
Comment or Remark
25:
_______________________ _______________________
26:
_______________________ _______________________
27:
_______________________ _______________________
28:
_______________________ _______________________
29:
_______________________ _______________________
30:
_______________________ _______________________
31:
_______________________ _______________________
32:
_______________________ _______________________
33:
_______________________ _______________________
34:
_______________________ _______________________
35:
_______________________ _______________________
36:
_______________________ _______________________
37:
_______________________ _______________________
38:
_______________________ _______________________
39:
_______________________ _______________________
40:
_______________________ _______________________
41:
_______________________ _______________________
42:
_______________________ _______________________
43:
_______________________ _______________________
44:
_______________________ _______________________
45:
_______________________ _______________________
46:
_______________________ _______________________
47:
_______________________ _______________________
48:
_______________________ _______________________
49:
_______________________ _______________________
50:
_______________________ _______________________
51:
_______________________ _______________________
52:
_______________________ _______________________
53:
_______________________ _______________________
54:
_______________________ _______________________
55:
_______________________ _______________________
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

Prog Variable 70xx

settings you enter in the
flow computer.

detailed list of Booleans and
Status Commands
Valid Numeric Variables These are any long integer

or floating point number
within the database (Points
5000-8999), including
Boolean variables. For the
purpose of evaluation,
Boolean variables have the
value of 1.0 if they are True
and 0.0 if they are False.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Comment or Remark
56:
_______________________ _______________________
57:
_______________________ _______________________
58:
_______________________ _______________________
59:
_______________________ _______________________
60:
_______________________ _______________________
61:
_______________________ _______________________
62:
_______________________ _______________________
63:
_______________________ _______________________
64:
_______________________ _______________________
65:
_______________________ _______________________
66:
_______________________ _______________________
67:
_______________________ _______________________
68:
_______________________ _______________________
69:
_______________________ _______________________
70:
_______________________ _______________________
71:
_______________________ _______________________
72:
_______________________ _______________________
73:
_______________________ _______________________
74:
_______________________ _______________________
75:
_______________________ _______________________
76:
_______________________ _______________________
77:
_______________________ _______________________
78:
_______________________ _______________________
79:
_______________________ _______________________
80:
_______________________ _______________________
81:
_______________________ _______________________
82:
_______________________ _______________________
83:
_______________________ _______________________
84:
_______________________ _______________________
85:
_______________________ _______________________
86:
_______________________ _______________________
87:
_______________________ _______________________
88:
_______________________ _______________________
2-19
Chapter 2
2.5.13. User Display Settings

Valid Index Number
Assignments - Any 32-bit
can be assigned to be
viewed via a user display
(see Volume 4 for a
complete listing).
Valid Key Press
Sequences - You may
select a sequence of up to 4
key presses to recall each
display. This does not count
the [Display/Enter] key
press which must be used
to signal the end of the
sequence. Each key is
identified by the red A
through Z character on
each valid key.
Valid keys are listed below
[A] - also labeled [Gross]
[B] - also labeled [Net]
[C] - also labeled [Mass]
[D] - also labeled [Energy]
[E] - also labeled [S.G./API]
[F] - also labeled [Control]
[G] - also labeled [Temp]
[H] - also labeled [Press]
[I] - also labeled [Density]
[J] - also labeled [D.P.]
[K] - also labeled [Orifice]
[L] - also labeled [Meter]
[M] - also labeled [Time]
[N] - also labeled [Counts]
[O] - also labeled [Factor]
[P] - also labeled [Preset]
[Q] - also labeled [Batch]
[R] - also labeled [Analysis]
[S] - also labeled [Print]
[T] - also labeled [Prove]
[U] - also labeled [Status]
[V] - also labeled [Alarms]
[W] - also labeled [Product]
[X] - also labeled [Setup]
[Y] - also labeled [Input]
[Z] - also labeled [Output]
The [
]/[
]/[
]/[
] (Up/
Down/Left/Right arrow) keys
and the [Prog], [Alpha
Shift] and [Clear] keys
cannot be used in a key
press sequence.
Note: The A through Z
keys are used simply to
identify key presses. The
[Alpha Shift] key does not
need to be used when
recalling user displays.
2-20
Enter 1 through 8 for the selected user display at User Display ? n of the
Misc Setup menu to open the following password Level 1 {L1} entries:
User Display #1 Key Press Sequence
[ ][ ][ ][ ]
Using the keys marked A through Z, enter the sequence of key presses needed to recall the
selected user display (see the side bar for details). A maximum of 4 keys are allowed. User
key press sequences take priority over any existing resident key press sequences.
st
1 Variable Tag
_______________
Enter an 8-character tag name used to identify the display variable on the LCD display.
st
1 Variable Index Number
_______________
Enter the database index number of the variable that you want to appear on the LCD display.
Each variable within the flow computer database is assigned an index number or address.
Any Boolean integer or floating point variable within the database can be displayed.
st
1 Variable Decimal Point Position
_______________
Enter the number of digits to the right of the decimal point for the variable. Valid entries are 0
through 7. The computer will display each variable using the display resolution that you have
selected, except in cases where the number is too large or too small. In either case, the flow
computer will adjust the decimal position or default to scientific display mode.
nd
Tag
Index #
Decimal Points
Variable
____________
________
____________
rd
3 Variable
____________
________
____________
th
____________
________
____________
4 Variable

st
1 Variable
nd
[ ][ ][ ][ ]
Tag
Index #
Decimal Points
____________
________
____________
Variable
____________
________
____________
rd
3 Variable
____________
________
____________
th
____________
________
____________
4 Variable

st
1 Variable
nd
[ ][ ][ ][ ]
Tag
Index #
Decimal Points
____________
________
____________
Variable
____________
________
____________
rd
3 Variable
____________
________
____________
th
____________
________
____________
4 Variable
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

Valid Index Number
Assignments - Any 32-bit
can be assigned to be
viewed via a user display
(see Volume 4 for a
complete listing).
Valid Key Press
Sequences - You may
select a sequence of up to 4
key presses to recall each
display. This does not count
the [Display/Enter] key
press which must be used
to signal the end of the
sequence. Each key is
identified by the red A
through Z character on
each valid key.
Valid keys are listed below
[A] - also labeled [Gross]
[B] - also labeled [Net]
[C] - also labeled [Mass]
[D] - also labeled [Energy]
[E] - also labeled [S.G./API]
[F] - also labeled [Control]
[G] - also labeled [Temp]
[H] - also labeled [Press]
[I] - also labeled [Density]
[J] - also labeled [D.P.]
[K] - also labeled [Orifice]
[L] - also labeled [Meter]
[M] - also labeled [Time]
[N] - also labeled [Counts]
[O] - also labeled [Factor]
[P] - also labeled [Preset]
[Q] - also labeled [Batch]
[R] - also labeled [Analysis]
[S] - also labeled [Print]
[T] - also labeled [Prove]
[U] - also labeled [Status]
[V] - also labeled [Alarms]
[W] - also labeled [Product]
[X] - also labeled [Setup]
[Y] - also labeled [Input]
[Z] - also labeled [Output]
The [
]/[
]/[
]/[
] (Up/
Down/Left/Right arrow) keys
and the [Prog], [Alpha
Shift] and [Clear] keys
cannot be used in a key
press sequence.
Tag
Index #
Decimal Points
____________
________
____________
Variable
____________
________
____________
3 Variable
rd
____________
________
____________
th
____________
________
____________
st
1 Variable
nd
4 Variable

st
1 Variable
nd
[ ][ ][ ][ ]
Tag
Index #
Decimal Points
____________
________
____________
Variable
____________
________
____________
rd
3 Variable
____________
________
____________
th
____________
________
____________
4 Variable

st
1 Variable
nd
[ ][ ][ ][ ]
Tag
Index #
Decimal Points
____________
________
____________
Variable
____________
________
____________
rd
3 Variable
____________
________
____________
th
____________
________
____________
4 Variable

st
1 Variable
nd
[ ][ ][ ][ ]
Tag
Index #
Decimal Points
____________
________
____________
Variable
____________
________
____________
rd
3 Variable
____________
________
____________
th
____________
________
____________
4 Variable

st
1 Variable
nd
[ ][ ][ ][ ]
Tag
Index #
Decimal Points
____________
________
____________
Variable
____________
________
____________
rd
3 Variable
____________
________
____________
th
____________
________
____________
4 Variable
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
[ ][ ][ ][ ]
2-21
Chapter 2
2.5.14. Digital I/O Point Settings

flow computer.
displayed.
Enter 1 through 24 for the selected digital I/O Point at Config Digital n of the
Misc Setup menu to open the following password Level 1 {L1} entries:
Assign
Digital I/O #1
Remark
Digital I/O #2
Remark
Digital I/O #3
Config Digital n - Assign

each physical I/O point to a
Modbus address of a
Boolean variable. There are
no limitations as to what
Boolean points can be
assigned to physical I/O
points. Enter [0] (zero) for
Modbus control.
Assigning as Pulse
Outputs - Meter and
Station Accumulators may
be output in the form of
pulses.
Pulse Width - Pulse width
is measured using 10msec
ticks; i.e., 100 = 1 second.
Pulse per Unit - Pulse per
unit entry can be used to
provide unit conversion
(e.g.: entering 4.2 pulses
per barrel will give 1 pulse
every 10 gallons as there
are 42 gallons in a barrel).
The units of volume, mass
and energy flow are the
same as is displayed on the
LCD.
Assigning as Control
Output - Any internal alarm
or Boolean can be output.
Remark
Digital I/O #4
Remark
Digital I/O #5
Remark
Digital I/O #6
Remark
Digital I/O #7
Remark
Digital I/O #8
Remark
Digital I/O #9
Remark
Digital I/O #10
Remark
Digital I/O #11
Remark
Digital I/O #12
Remark
2-22
________
Pulse Width Pulse/Unit or Delay On
________ ________
Delay Off
________ ________
_______________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

Assign
Delay On/Off - Used to

delay or stretch a control
output. The delay is
measured using 100msec
ticks; i.e., 10 = 1 second.
Assigning as Status or
Command Inputs Switches, etc., can be used
to trigger events within the
flow computer, such as end
a batch or start a prove
sequence (see the facing
page for more details).
1700 Dummy Boolean Assign all physical I/O
points which will be used
only in Boolean statements
for sequencing or control to
1700. This sets up the
points as an input only.
valid assignments.
Digital I/O #13

Remark
Digital I/O #14
Remark
Digital I/O #15
Remark
Digital I/O #16
Remark
Digital I/O #17
Remark
Digital I/O #18
Remark
Digital I/O #19
Remark
Digital I/O #20
Remark
Digital I/O #21
Remark
Digital I/O #22
Remark
Digital I/O #23
Remark
Digital I/O #24
Remark
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
________
Pulse Width Pulse/Unit or Delay On
________ ________
Delay Off
________ ________
_______________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
2-23
Chapter 2
2.5.15. Serial Input / Output Settings

Baud Rates Available 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600, 19200, 38400.
Data Bits - 7 or 8 - 7 for
ASCII Modbus, 8 for RTU
Modbus.
Enter [1], [2], [3] or [4] at Serial I/O n of the Misc Setup menu to open the
following entries:
Port #1
Port #2
Port #3
Port #4
{L1} Baud Rate
_______
_______
_______
_______
{L1} Number of Stop Bits
_______
_______
_______
_______
{L1} Number of Data Bits
_______
_______
_______
_______
{L1} Parity Bit (Even/Odd/None)
_______
_______
_______
_______
{L1} Transmit Carrier Key Delay
_______
_______
_______
_______
Stop Bits - 0, 1 or 2.
Parity Bit - Odd, Even,
None.
Transmitter Carrier Key
Delay - Delays are
approximate only. 0=msec,
1=50msec, 2=100msec,
3=150msec.
Modbus Type - Select the
protocol type which
matches the Modbus
master device. If the master
can support either ASCII or
RTU, choose RTU protocol
as it is approximately twice
as efficient as the ASCII
protocol. Serial Ports #3
and #4 have additional
protocol options.
Compatible Modicon
OmniCom will not operate if
downloading configuration
with this entry set to Y.
Enter one of the following options:

0 = 0 msec delay
1 = 50 msec delay
2 = 100 msec delay

3 = 150 msec delay
You must enter [0] for Transmitter Carrier Key Delay for any port that will be used with a
shared printer.
{L1} Serial Port Type
_______
This entry corresponds to Serial Port #1 only. Enter one of the following options:
0 = Printer
1 = Modbus RTU
{L1} Modbus Protocol Type
_______
_______
_______
This entry does not apply to Serial Port #1. Enter the type of protocol to be used on this port:
0 = Modbus RTU
1 = Modbus ASCII
2 = Modbus RTU (modem).
Serial Port #4 has the following additional options:
3 = Allen Bradley Full Duplex
4 = Allen Bradley Half Duplex
Mixed protocols are not allowed on a communication link. All devices must use the same
protocol type. The RTU protocol is preferred as it is twice the speed of the ASCII. Selecting
'Modbus RTU Modem' provides RTU protocol with relaxed timing which is usually needed
when communicating via smart modems. These modems have been found to insert intercharacter delays which cause a premature end of message to be detected by the flow
computer.
IMPORTANT: You must select either 'Modbus RTU' or 'Modbus RTU Modem' protocol for the
port that will be used to communicate with OmniCom PC configuration software.
{L1} Modbus ID
_______
_______
_______
This entry does not apply to Serial Port #1 when a printer is selected as the port type. Enter
the Modbus slave ID number that this serial port will respond to (1 through 247 acceptable).
This entry will be disabled for Serial Port #1 if a printer is selected as the port type.
2-24
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
key presses.
flow computer.
displayed.
Skip CRC/LCR Check - If

you have disabled the error
checking on incoming
messages, you must
substitute dummy bytes in
the message string.
Outgoing messages will
always include the error
checking bytes.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
{L1} Modicon Compatible (Y/N)
Port #1
Port #2
Port #3
Port #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter [Y] to configure these Modbus ports to be compatible with Modicon PLC equipment
(e.g.: 984 series) and DCS systems (e.g.: Honeywell TDC3000 systems using the Advanced
Process Manager APM-SI). This entry will be disabled for Serial Port #1 if a printer is selected
as the port type.
In this mode the point number indexes requested and transmitted while using the Modbus
RTU modes are actually one less than the index number documented in this manual. ASCII
mode transmissions use the address documented in this manual. Data is counted in numbers
of 16 bit registers rather than points. i.e., To request two 4 byte IEEE floating point variables,
index numbers 7101 and 7102, would require the host to ask for 4 registers starting at index
7100. IEEE Floating Point data bytes are transmitted in swapped format:
NORMAL IEEE FLOAT FORMAT

Byte #1
Biased
Exponent
Byte #2
MS
Mantissa
{L1} CRC Enabled
Byte #3
Mantissa
ORDER TRANSMITTED
Byte #4
LS
Mantissa
Byte #1
Mantissa
_______
Byte #2
Byte #3
LS
Biased
Mantissa Exponent
_______
_______
Byte #4
MS
Mantissa
_______
Many protocols use either a CRC, LRC or BCC error check to ensure that data received is not
corrupted. The flow computer can be configured to ignore the error checking on incoming
messages. This allows software developers an easy means of debugging communications
software. Error checking should only be disabled temporarily when debugging the
master slave communication link. The computer expects dummy characters in place of the
CRC, LRC or BCC.
Enter [Y] to perform error checking on incoming messages. For maximum data integrity
always enter [Y] during normal running conditions. Enter [N] to disable error checking on
incoming messages. This entry will be disabled for Serial Port #1 if a printer is selected as the
port type.
2-25
Chapter 2
Data Packet Settings

2.5.16. Custom Modbus
INFO - Packets defined are
usually read-only and must
always be retrieved as a
packet. When Modicon 984
is selected these packet
setup entries are used to
define a logical array of
variables which can be read
or written in any grouping.
The number of data points
is always input in terms of
Omni logical elements;
i.e., an IEEE floating point
number comprises two 16bit words but is considered
one logical element.
key presses.
flow computer.
displayed.
Custom Modbus Data Packets are provided to reduce the number of polls
needed to read multiple variables which may be in different areas of the
database. Groups of data points of any type of data can be concatenated into
one packet by entering each data group starting index numbers 001, 201 and
401. The number of data bytes in a custom packet in non-Modicon compatible
mode cannot exceed 250 (RTU mode) or 500 (ASCII mode). When Modicon
compatible is selected, the number of data bytes in a custom packet cannot
exceed 400 (RTU mode) or 800 (ASCII mode).
Enter [1], [2] or [3] to select a data packet at Custom Packet n of the Misc
Setup menu to open the entries below. Under Index #, enter the database
address or Modbus index number for each start data point of each group. Under
Points, enter the number of consecutive data points to include in each data
group.
Custom Modbus Data Packet #1 (Addressed at 001)

{L1} Index # | Points
Index # | Points
Index # | Points
Index # | Points
#1_______|_____
#2_______|_____
#3_______|_____
#4_______|_____
#5_______|_____
#6_______|_____
#7_______|_____
#8_______|_____
#9_______|_____ #10_______|_____ #11_______|_____ #12_______|_____

#13_______|_____ #14_______|_____ #15_______|_____ #16_______|_____
#17_______|_____ #18_______|_____ #19_______|_____ #20_______|_____

Index # | Points
Index # | Points
Index # | Points
#1_______|_____
#2_______|_____
#3_______|_____
#4_______|_____
#5_______|_____
#6_______|_____
#7_______|_____
#8_______|_____

Index # | Points
Index # | Points
Index # | Points
#1_______|_____
#2_______|_____
#3_______|_____
#4_______|_____
#5_______|_____
#6_______|_____
#7_______|_____
#8_______|_____
#9_______|_____ #10_______|_____ #11_______|_____ #12_______|_____

#13_______|_____ #14_______|_____ #15_______|_____ #16_______|_____
#17_______|_____ #18_______|_____ #19_______|_____ #20_______|_____
2-26
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
2.5.17. Programmable Logic Controller Setup

key presses.
flow computer.
displayed.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Note: See Technical Bulletin TB-960702 Communicating with AllenBradley Programmable Logic Controllers in Volume 5 for
information on the PLC Group n submenu.
2.5.18. Archive File Setup

Note: See Technical Bulletin TB-960703 Storing Archive Data within the
Flow Computer in Volume 5 for information on the Archive File n
submenu.
2-27
Chapter 2
2.5.19. Peer-to-Peer Communications Settings

key presses.
flow computer.
displayed.
TIP - For maximum

efficiency, always start
Modbus ID numbers from 1.
Serial Port #2 of the flow computer can be configured to act as a simple Modbus
slave port or as a peer-to-peer communication link. Using the peer-to-peer link
allows multiple flow computers to be interconnected and share data.
Enter [Y] at Peer / Peer Comm (Y) ? of the Misc Setup menu to open the
following submenu:
{L1} Activate Redundancy Mode
_______________
The active redundancy mode feature allows two flow computers to operate as a pair. Each
flow computer receives the same process signals and performs the same calculations; i.e., in
redundancy. This mode is typically used in critical applications where failure of a flow
computer cannot be tolerated.
Enter [Y] to allow both flow computers to manage the peer-to-peer link between them and
automatically switch between being the master or slave computer. Important data such as
meter factors and PID control settings can be continually exchanged between flow computers
ensuring that at any time, should a failure occur to one, the other unit would be able to
assume control of the PID and ticketing functions.
The redundancy mode requires that four digital I/O ports be cross-connected to sense
watchdog failure modes using the following points 2714=Input master status, 2864=Output
Master status, 2713 Input watchdog status, 2863 = Output of watchdog status. (See Technical
Bulletin TB-980402 in Volume 5.)
{L1} Next Master in Sequence
_______________
Enter the slave number of the next flow computer in sequence in the peer-to-peer
communication sequence to pass over control. After the flow computer completes all of it's
transactions it will attempt to pass over master control of the Modbus link to this Modbus ID.
For maximum efficiency, always start Modbus ID definitions from 1.
Enter the Modbus ID of this flow computer if there are no other peers in sequence on the
communication link.
Enter [0] to disable the peer-to-peer feature and use Serial Port #2 as a standard
Modbus slave port.
{L1} Last Master in Sequence ID #
_______________
Enter the slave number of the last Omni (the highest Modbus ID number) in the peer-to-peer
communication sequence. This is required for error recovery. Should this flow computer be
unable to hand over control to the 'next master in sequence' (see previous entry), it will
attempt to establish communications with a Modbus slave with a higher Modbus ID. It will
keep trying until the ID number exceeds this entry. At that point the flow computer will start at
Modbus ID #1.
Enter the Modbus ID of this flow computer if it is the only master on the link.
{L1} Retry Timer
_______________
Should any slave device fail to respond to a communication request, the master device will
retry to establish communications several times. Enter the number of 50 millisecond ticks that
the flow computer should wait for a response from the slave device. To ensure fast recovery
from communication failures, set this entry to as low a number as possible. Enter [3] for peerto-peer links involving only Omni flow computers. Other Modbus devices may require more
time to respond.
2-28
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

Transaction #1
{L1} Target Slave ID #
key presses.
_______________
Each transfer of data is called a transaction. Enter the Modbus ID # of the other slave
involved in the transaction. Modbus ID 0 can be used to broadcast write to all Modbus slave
devices connected to the peer-to-peer link. Other valid IDs range from 1-247.
{L1} Read/Write ?
_______________
Enter [R] if data will be read from the slave. Enter [W] if data will be written to the slave.
INFO - The Omni Flow
Computer determines what
Modbus function code and
what data type is involved
by the Modbus index
number of the data within
the Omnis database. The
Source Index determines
the data type for a write.
The Destination Index
determines the data type for
a read.
Function codes used are:
01=Read Multiple Booleans
15=Write Multiple Booleans
03=Read Multiple Variables
16=Write Multiple Variables
{L1} Source Index #
_______________
Enter the database index number or address of the Modbus point where the data is to be
obtained, corresponding to the first data point of the transaction. This is the slaves database
index number when the transaction is a read, and the masters database index number when
the transaction is a write. Refer to Volume 4 for a list of available database addresses or
index numbers.
{L1} Number of Points
_______________
Enter the number of contiguous points to transfer. Each transaction can transfer multiple data
points that can be any valid data type recognized by the Omni. The maximum number of
points that can be transferred depends on the type of data:
IEEE floats (4bytes each)

32-bit Integers (4 bytes each)
16-bit integers (2 bytes each)
Packed coils or status (8 to a byte)
63 max
63 max
127 max
2040 max.
The Omni automatically knows what Modbus function to use and what data types are involved
by the Modbus index number of the data within the flow computer database. The destination
index number determines the data type when the transaction is a read. The source index
number determines the data type when the transaction is a write.
{L1} Destination Index #
_______________
Enter the database index number or address of where the data is to be stored (destination
index or address). If the transaction is a read, this will be the index number within the master
Omnis database. If the transaction is a write, this will be the register number within the
remote slaves database.
Transaction #2
Target Slave ID #
_______________
Read/Write ?
_______________
Source Index #
_______________
Number of Points
_______________
Destination Index #
_______________
Transaction #3
Target Slave ID #
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
_______________
Read/Write ?
_______________
Source Index #
_______________
Number of Points
_______________
Destination Index #
_______________
2-29
Chapter 2

Transaction #4

flow computer.
displayed.
Target Slave ID #
_______________
Read/Write ?
_______________
Source Index #
_______________
Number of Points
_______________
Destination Index #
_______________
Transaction #5
Target Slave ID #
_______________
Read/Write ?
_______________
Source Index #
_______________
Number of Points
_______________
Destination Index #
_______________
Transaction #6
Target Slave ID #
_______________
Read/Write ?
_______________
Source Index #
_______________
Number of Points
_______________
Destination Index #
_______________
Transaction #7
Target Slave ID #
_______________
Read/Write ?
_______________
Source Index #
_______________
Number of Points
_______________
Destination Index #
_______________
Transaction #8
Target Slave ID #
2-30
_______________
Read/Write ?
_______________
Source Index #
_______________
Number of Points
_______________
Destination Index #
_______________
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

Transaction #9
key presses.
flow computer.
displayed.

Computer determines what
Modbus function code and
what data type is involved
by the Modbus index
number of the data within
the Omnis database. The
Source Index determines
the data type for a write.
The Destination Index
determines the data type for
a read.
Function codes used are:
01=Read Multiple Booleans
15=Write Multiple Booleans
03=Read Multiple Variables
16=Write Multiple Variables
Target Slave ID #
_______________
Read/Write ?
_______________
Source Index #
_______________
Number of Points
_______________
Destination Index #
_______________
Transaction #10
Target Slave ID #
_______________
Read/Write ?
_______________
Source Index #
_______________
Number of Points
_______________
Destination Index #
_______________
Transaction #11
Target Slave ID #
_______________
Read/Write ?
_______________
Source Index #
_______________
Number of Points
_______________
Destination Index #
_______________
Transaction #12
Target Slave ID #
_______________
Read/Write ?
_______________
Source Index #
_______________
Number of Points
_______________
Destination Index #
_______________
Transaction #13
Target Slave ID #
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
_______________
Read/Write ?
_______________
Source Index #
_______________
Number of Points
_______________
Destination Index #
_______________
2-31
Chapter 2

Transaction #14

flow computer.
displayed.
Target Slave ID #
_______________
Read/Write ?
_______________
Source Index #
_______________
Number of Points
_______________
Destination Index #
_______________
Transaction #15
Target Slave ID #
_______________
Read/Write ?
_______________
Source Index #
_______________
Number of Points
_______________
Destination Index #
_______________
Transaction #16
Target Slave ID #
2-32
_______________
Read/Write ?
_______________
Source Index #
_______________
Number of Points
_______________
Destination Index #
_______________
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
2.6.
and output devices
computer; i.e., the menus
following the 'Misc
Configuration' menu do not
ask for configuration data
unless a transducer has
been defined.
Flow Computer
Configuration via the
Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method
when programming an
prompted. Once a
described below.
Once you have finished
entering data in a setup
submenu, press the [Prog]
key to return to the Select
Group Entry screen.
Proceed as described in
this manual for each setup
option.
Setting Up the Time and Date
2.6.1.
Accessing the Time/Date Setup Submenu
Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the Select Group Entry
screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the
following will be displayed:
*** SETUP MENU ***
Misc Configuration
Time/Date Setup
_
Printer Setup
Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Time/Date Setup
and press [Enter] to access the submenu.
2.6.2.
Time and Date Settings
{L1} Omni Time
____:____:____
Enter Current Time using the correct method 'hh:mm:ss'. To change only the hour, minutes or
seconds, move cursor to the respective position and enter the new setting.
{L1} Omni Date
____/____/____
Enter Current Date using the correct method 'mm/dd/yy' or dd/mm/yy. To change only the
month, day or year, move cursor to the respective position and enter the new setting.
{L1} Select Date Format Type
_____________
Select date format required by entering [Y] or [N]:

Y = month/day/year
N = day/month/year
Time and Date Setup via

the Random Access
Method - Setup entries
require that you be in the
Program Mode. In the
Display Mode press the
[Prog] key. The Program
LED will glow green and the
Select Group Entry
screen will appear. Then
press [Time] [Enter] and
use [$] / [%] keys to scroll.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
2-33
Chapter 2
2.7.
and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Flow Computer
when programming an
prompted. Once a
described below.
Group Entry screen.
option.
2.7.1.
Configuring Printers
Accessing the Printer Setup Submenu
*** SETUP MENU ***
Misc Configuration
Time/Date Setup
Printer Setup
_
Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Printer Setup and
press [Enter] to access the submenu.
2.7.2.
Printer Settings
{L1} Computer ID
{L1} Print Interval in Minutes
2-34
_______________
Enter the number of minutes between each interval report. Entering [0] will disable interval
reports. The maximum allowed is 1440 minutes which will provide one interval report per 24hour period.
{L1} Print Interval Start Time
_____:_____
Enter the start time from which the interval report timer is based (e.g.: Entering 01:00 with a
Print Interval of 120 minutes will provide an interval report every odd hour only).
{L1} Daily Report Time
_____:_____
Enter the hour at which the daily report will print at the beginning of the contract day (e.g.:
07:00).
{L1} Disable Daily Report?

Printer Setup via the
Random Access Method Setup entries require that
you be in the Program
Mode. In the Display Mode
press the [Prog] key. The
Program LED will glow
green and the Select
Group Entry screen will
appear. Then press [Print]
[Setup] [Enter] and use
[$] / [%] keys to scroll.
_______________
Appears on all reports. Enter up to 8 alphanumeric characters to identify the flow computer.
_______________
Enter [Y] to disable the Daily Report (default is 'N'). This simply blocks the report from
printing. Data will still be sent to the historical buffers (last 8) and archive if archive is setup.
{L1} Daylight Savings Time Start
_____/_____/_____
Enter the Day/Month/Year that daylight savings time begins.
{L1} Daylight Savings Time End
_____/_____/_____
Enter the Day/Month/Year that daylight savings time ends.
{L1} Clear Daily Totals at Batch End?
_______________
Enter [N] to provide 24 hour totals of all flow through the flowmeter regardless of what product
is run. Select [Y] to clear the totalizers at the end of each batch. This would mean that the
daily totalizers would not necessarily represent 24 hours of flow but the amount of flow since
the last batch end or the daily report
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

{L1} Automatic Hourly Batch Select?

flow computer.
_______________
Enter [Y] to automatically cause a batch end every hour on the hour. If customized reports are
selected a batch end report will be printed. If default reports are selected no batch end report
will be printed.
{L1} Automatic Weekly Batch Select?
_______________
Enter a number 1 through 7 to automatically print a batch end report in addition to a daily
report on a specific day of the week (0=No batch end, 1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, etc.).
{L1} Automatic Monthly Batch Select?
_______________
Enter a number 1 through 31 to automatically print a batch end report in place of a daily report
on a specific day of the month (0=No batch end).
{L1} Print Priority
_______________
Enter [0] when the computer is connected to a dedicated printer. If several computers are
sharing a common printer, one computer must be designated as the master and must be
assigned the number 1. The remaining computers must each be assigned a different Print
Priority number between 2 and 12.
{L1} Number of Nulls
_______________
For slow printers without an input buffer, a number of null characterss can be sent after each
carriage return or line feed. A number between 0-255 will be accepted. Set this to 0 if your
printer supports hardware handshaking and you have connected pin 20 of the printer
connector to terminal 6 of the flow computer (see Chapter 3).
{L1} Use Default Report Templates?
_______________
Entering [Y] instructs the flow computer to use the default report formats for Daily Batch End,
Snapshot and Prover Reports. Enter [N] if you have downloaded your own custom report
templates using the OmniCom program.
Common Printer Control
Codes Epson, IBM & Compatible:
Condensed Mode= 0F
Cancel Condensed= 12
OKI Data Models:
Condensed Mode= 1D
Cancel Condensed= 1E
HP Laser Jet II &
Compatible:
Condensed= 1B266B3253
Cancel Cond= 1B266B3053
{L1} Condensed Print Mode Control String
_______________
Certain default report templates exceed 80 columns when the computer is configured for 4
meter runs and a station. Enter the hexadecimal character string which will put the printer into
the condensed print mode. Data must be in sets of 2 characters (i.e., 05 not 5). A maximum
of 5 control characters are allowed.
{L1} Cancel Condensed Print Mode Control String
_______________
Uncondensed Print Mode. Enter the hexadecimal character string which when sent to the
printer will cancel the condensed print mode. Data must be in sets of 2 characters (i.e., 05 not
5). A maximum of 5 control characters are allowed.
{L1} Company Name _____________________________________________

___________________________________________________________
Two lines of the display allow entry of the Company Name. On each line enter a maximum of
19 characters and press [Enter]. Both lines are concatenated and appear on all reports.
{L1} Location ___________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________
Two lines of the display allow entry of the station location Name. On each line enter a
maximum of 19 characters and press [Enter]. Both lines are concatenated and appear on all
reports.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
2-35
Chapter 2
2.8.
and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Flow Computer
when programming an
prompted. Once a
described below.
Group Entry screen.
option.
Analyzer Setup via the
appear. Then press
[Analysis] [Enter] or
[Analysis] [Setup] [Enter]
and use [$] / [%] keys to
scroll.
2.8.1.
Configuring Gas Chromatograph (GC)

Analyzers
Accessing the Analyzer Setup Submenu
*** SETUP MENU
Time/Date Setup
Printer Setup
Analyser Setup
***
_
Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Analyzer Setup
2.8.2.
Analyzer Settings
GC Analyzer ID #
_______________
Enter the identifying number of the Applied Automation or Daniels Danalyzer gas
chromatograph. This is the serial communication ID number of the analyzer.
GC Analyzer Type
_______________
Enter the gas analyzer type: 0=Applied Automation, 1=Danalyzer.The Omni flow computer
can communicate and retrieve analysis data from either an Applied Automation or a Daniels
Danalyzer chromatograph. In both cases the flow computer uses the 3rd serial port for
communications. When talking to an Applied Automation, the flow computer uses the AA
proprietary HCI-A protocol interface. When talking to a Danalyzer, Modbus ASCII or RTU is
used.
Results Interval (Minutes)
_______________
Enter the maximum number of minutes that the flow computer should wait for results from
either type of gas chromatograph. When operating with an Applied Automation analyzer, the
flow computer will request results from the chromatograph if it is not in the 'listen only' mode.
The 'GC Alarm' bit will be set if no results are received after this request.
Listen Only Mode
_______________
Enter [Y] to set the flow computer to the Listen Only mode. Enter [N] to disable this mode. In
many cases, more than one flow computer will be connected to a single gas analyzer. Only
one flow computer is allowed to act as a host device and request data from the analyzer. All
of the remaining computers must 'listen' to the result data 'only'.
GC Fail Code
_______________
The selections are: 0=Always use the last good analysis from the GC, 1=Always use the
manual overrides located in the 'Fluid Data and Analysis' menu, 2=Use the manual overrides
if the GC fails.
A failure may be due to a fatal error flagged by the GC indicating that the composition data
may not be reliable. Fatal errors usually are caused by some type of hardware problem at the
GC. EPROM error, D/A converter error, etc. A breakdown of communications between the
flow computer and the GC will also cause a GC failure error.
2-36
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

Gas Chromatograph Component Numbers
flow computer.
displayed.
Danalyzer C6+ Settings Danalyzer instruments (as

of May 1994) group all
components C6 through C8
as a C6+ group. Four
different groupings of C6+
can be provided. These
groups are numbered 108,
109, 110 and 111 in the
Danalyzer documentation.
For the Omni to work
correctly the Danalyzer
must be setup with the C6+
analysis value as the first
component in its
component table. The Omni
will automatically determine
the correct values of C6, C7
and C8 from the component
code selected at the
Danalyzer. Because of this,
there should be no
component number 1 in the
Omni setup.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Each gas chromatograph can be unique in the total number of components it

can recognize and the order than they are presented. For the following settings,
enter the component number position for each of the components listed below.
Enter [0] for any unused components.
Methane (CH4)
_______________
Nitrogen (N2)
_______________
Carbon Dioxide (CO2)
_______________
Ethane (C2H6)
_______________
Propane (C3H8)
_______________
Water (H2O)
_______________
Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S)
_______________
Hydrogen (H2)
_______________
Carbon Monoxide (CO)
_______________
Oxygen (O2)
_______________
i-Butane (iC4H10)
_______________
n-Butane (nC4H10)
_______________
i-Pentane (iC5H12)
_______________
n-Pentane (n C5H12)
_______________
n-Hexane (C6H14)
_______________
n-Heptane (C7H16)
_______________
n-Octane (C8H16)
_______________
n-Nonane
_______________
n-Decane
_______________
Helium (He)
_______________
Argon (Ar)
_______________
Heating Value (SV)
_______________
Specific Gravity (SG)
_______________
2-37
Chapter 2
2.9.

and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Premium Billing
Threshold Level Setup via
the Random Access
Method - Premium Billing
settings only apply to
Firmware Revision 23.71+
(US customary units) and
can only be accessed via
the Random Access
Method.
Setup entries require that
appear. Then press [Net]
[Setup] [Enter] or [Setup]
[Net] [Enter].
2-38
2.9.1.
Configuring Premium Billing Threshold

Levels (Revision 23.71+ - US Customary
Units Only)
Accessing Premium Billing Settings
Premium Billing settings can only be accessed via the Random Access Method.
Valid keypress sequences in the Program Mode are [Net] [Setup] [Enter] or
[Setup] [Net] [Enter].
2.9.2.
Premium Billing Threshold Settings
Flow which occurs below Level 1 threshold will be accumulated in the 'Base
Level' totalizer. Flow occurring between the Level 1 and the Level 2 threshold will
accumulate in the 'Level 1' totalizer. Flow occurring between the Level 2 and the
Level 3 threshold will accumulate in the 'Level 2' totalizer. Flow occurring above
the Level 3 threshold will accumulated in the 'Level 3' totalizer.
The 'Special Billing' threshold acts just like a fourth premium level when it is set
to be greater in value than the Level 3 threshold but overrides any other premium
threshold that is set greater than the Special Billing threshold.
Premium totalizers are stored for each meter run and the station for the last 10
days (see database points 6n01-6n61 in Chapter 2 of Volume 4).
For the following settings, enter the premium billing flow threshold levels in
thousand standard cubic feet (MSCF)/hour.
Station
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
Premium Level 1
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Premium Level 2
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Premium Level 3
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Special Billing
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
2.10. Configuring PID Control Outputs

2.10.1. Accessing the PID Control Setup Submenu

flow computer.
displayed.
Flow Computer
when programming an
prompted. Once a
described below.
Group Entry screen.
option.
2.10.2. PID Control Output Settings
PID Control Output Setup

via the Random Access
Select Group Entry
press [Control] [n] [Enter]
(n = PID Control Loop # 1,
2, 3 or 4). Use [$] / [%]
keys to scroll.
{L1} Primary Gain Factor
*** SETUP MENU ***

Printer Setup
Analyser Setup
PID Control Setup _
Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to PID Control
Setup and press [Enter] to access the submenu.
Loop #1
Loop #2
Loop #3
Loop #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Operating Mode
Manual Valve Open (Y/N)
Enter [Y] to adjust the valve open % and adjust using the [$]/[%] keys. Enter [N] to change
to AUTO mode.
Local Setpoint (Y/N)
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter [Y] to use a local set point and adjust using the [$]/[%] keys. Enter [N] for Remote set
point mode.
Secondary Setpoint Value
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the value in engineering units for the set point of the secondary variable. The primary
variable will be the controlled variable until the secondary variable reaches this set point. The
secondary variable will not be allowed to drop below or rise above this set point, depending on
the "Error Select" entry in the Config PID menu.
Tuning Adjustments
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter a value between 0.01 to 99.99 for the Primary Gain Factor (Gain=1/Proportional Band).
{L1} Primary Integral Factor
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter a value between 0.0 and 40.00 for the Primary Integral Factor (Repeats/Min=1/Integral
Factor ) the reciprocal of the reset period).
{L1} Secondary Gain Factor
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter a value between 0.01 to 99.99 for the Secondary Gain Factor (Gain=1/Proportional
Band).
The actual controller gain factor used when controlling the secondary variable is the product
of this entry and the 'Primary Gain Factor'. Tune the primary control variable first and then use
this entry to adjust for stable control of the secondary variable.
{L1} Secondary Integral Factor
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter a value between 0 and 40.00 for the Secondary Integral Factor (Repeats/Min=1/Integral
Factor ) the reciprocal of the reset period).
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
2-39
Chapter 2

and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
PID Startup, Stop and

Shutdown Ramp
Command Points - These
have been added to
eliminate the need to
manipulate the PID
permissives directly. Using
these command points
greatly simplifies operation
of the PID ramping
functions. (See database
points 1727-1730, 17881791, 1792-1795
respectively.)
{L1} Deadband %
Loop #1
Loop #2
Loop #3
Loop #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the dead band percent range. PID Control will only compensate for setpoint deviations
out of this range. The control output will not change as long as the process input and the
setpoint error (deviation) is within this dead band percentage limit range.
{L1} Startup Ramp %
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the maximum percentage to which the valve movement is limited per 500 msec at startst
up. The control output is clamped at 0% until the 1 PID Permissive (PID #1-#4 ) database
points 1722-1725) is set true. The control output % is then allowed to increase at the start-up
ramp rate.
{L1} Shutdown Ramp %
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the maximum percentage to which the valve movement is limited per 500 msec at
st
shutdown. When the 1 PID Permissive is lost, the control output will ramp-down towards 0%
at the shutdown ramp rate.
nd
During the ramp-down phase, a 2 PID Permissive (PID #1-#4 ) database points 1752nd
1755) is used to provide a ramp hold function. If this 2 permissive is true, 100 msec before
entering the ramp-down phase, the control output % will ramp-down and be held at the
minimum ramp-down limit % (see the following entry) until it goes false. The control output will
then immediately go to 0% (see sidebar).
{L1} Minimum Ramp to %
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the minimum percentage that the control output will be allowed to ramp down to. In
many cases, it is important to deliver a precise amount of product. This requires that the
control output be ramped to some minimum % and held there until the required delivery is
complete. The control output is then immediately set to 0%.
Primary Controlled (Remote Setpoint) Variable

{L1} Low Limit
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the engineering unit value below which the primary setpoint variable is not allowed to
drop while in the remote setpoint mode.
{L1} High Limit
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the engineering unit value above which the primary setpoint variable is not allowed to
rise while in the remote setpoint mode.
Secondary Controlled (Setpoint) Variable

{L1} Zero Value
_______
_______
_______
_______
If a secondary controlled variable is used, enter the value in engineering units of the variable
which will represent zero.
{L1} Full Scale Value
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the value in engineering units of the secondary variable at controller full scale, which is
usually 2 times the normal operating setpoint setting.
2-40
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
2.11. Configuring Meter Specific Gravity /

Density
flow computer.
displayed.
and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
2.11.1. Accessing the Gravity/Density Setup Submenu

*** SETUP MENU ***
Analyser Setup
PID Control Setup
Grav/Density Setup _
Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Grav/Density
2.11.2. Meter Specific Gravity / Density Settings

Specific Gravity / Density Data
Station
Low Alarm Limit
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the gravity/density below which the gravitometer/densitometer low alarm activates.
High Alarm Limit
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the gravity/density above which the gravitometer/densitometer high alarm activates.
Flow Computer
when programming an
prompted. Once a
described below.
Group Entry screen.
option.
{L2} Override Value ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the gravity/density value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on
the override code. An * displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is
substituted. Each product setup can specify a gravity override to be used when ever that
product is run. The override gravity in the product setup area overrides any transducer
override.
{L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the Override Code strategy:
0
1
2
3
4
5
=
=
=
=
=
=
Never use override code

Always use override code
Use override code on transmitter failure
On transmitter failures use last hour's average
On transmitter failure use station transducer value
On transmitter failure use absolute value of override SG/API of the running product.
{L1} Value at 4 mA ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

These entries apply if an analog gravitometer or densitometer is specified during the 'Config
Meter Run' in 'Misc. Setup'. Engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or
LRV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
{L1} Value at 20 mA________ ________ ________ ________ ________

These entries apply if an analog gravitometer or densitometer is specified during the 'Config
Meter Run' in 'Misc. Setup'. Engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5
Volts, or URV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
2-41
Chapter 2

Station
Meter Specific
Gravity/Density Setup via
the Random Access
Select Group Entry
enter the key press
sequence that corresponds
to the options you want to
configure:
Specific Gravity:
To access these settings,
press [S.G.] [Enter] or
[S.G.] [Meter] [n] [Enter] or
[Meter] [n] [S.G./API]
[Enter].
Density:
press [Density] [Enter] or
[Density] [Meter] [n]
[Enter] or [Meter] [n]
[Density] [Enter].
Digital Densitometers:
press [Factor] [Density]
[Meter] [n] [Enter] or
[Density] [Factor] [Meter]
[n] [Enter].
(n represents the meter
run # 1, 2, 3 or 4).
Note: Digital densitometers
can only be configured via
the Random Access
Method.
INFO - Densitometer
constants are usually on a
calibration certificate
supplied by the
densitometer manufacturer.
Usually they are based on
SI or metric units. For US
customary applications you
must ensure that the
constants entered are
based on gr/cc, F and
PSIG. Constants are always
displayed using scientific
notation; e.g.:
K0=-1.490205E+00 (gr/cc)
To enter K0, press [Clear]
and press [-1.490205]
[Alpha Shift] [E] [+00]
[Enter].
2-42
{L1A} Factor A
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
This entry applies if an analog (4-20mA density linear) or a digital densitometer is specified
during the 'Config Meter Run' in 'Misc. Setup'. It is not available when using specific gravity
gravitometers. Enter the Pycnometer Density correction factor (Limit: 0.8 to 1.2). (Usually very
close to 1.0000).
Digital Densitometer Factors

The following additional entries are required if a digital densitometer is specified
during the 'Config Meter Run' in the 'Misc. Setup' menu. There are three
selections which refer to digital densitometers: 4 = Solartron, 5 = Sarasota, 6 =
UGC. ({L1} Password Level required.)
Solartron
Station
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
K0
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
K1
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
K2
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
K18
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
K19
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
K3
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
K4
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
K5
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Sarasota
Station
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
D0
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
T0
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Tcoef
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Tcal
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Pcoef
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Pcal
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
UGC
Station
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
K0
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
K1
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
K2
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
TC
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Kt1
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Kt2
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Kt3
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Pc
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Kp1
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Kp2
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Kp3
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
2.12. Configuring Meter Temperature

and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Flow Computer
when programming an
prompted. Once a
described below.
Group Entry screen.
option.
Meter Temperature Setup
via the Random Access
Select Group Entry
press [Temp] [Enter], or
[Temp] [Meter] [n] [Enter]
or [Meter] [n] [Temp]
[Enter] (n = Meter Run # 1,
2, 3 or 4). Use [$] / [%]
keys to scroll.
2.12.1. Accessing the Temperature Setup Submenu

*** SETUP MENU ***
PID Control Setup
Grav/Density Setup
Temperature Setup _
Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Temperature
2.12.2. Station and Meter Run Temperature Settings

Station
Low Alarm Limit
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature below which the flowmeter low alarm activates. Transducer values
approximately 5% below this entry fail to low.
High Alarm Limit
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature above which the flowmeter high alarm activates. Transducer values
approximately 5% above this entry fail to high.
{L2} Override
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the
override code. An * displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is
substituted.
{L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=

{L1} at 4mA*
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or lower
range limit (LRV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
{L1} at 20mA*
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5 Volts, or
upper range limit (URV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
Note:
* Not Valid when a RTD

Probe is specified.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
2-43
Chapter 2

Station
key presses.
flow computer.
displayed.
Meter Density
Temperature Setup via the
Random Access Method To access these settings, in
the Program Mode press
[Density] [Temp] [Enter].

Probe is specified.
Meter #3
Meter #4
This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo
module. The process variable (i.e., temperature) is filtered by the transmitter before being
sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.
For Temperature Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code:
0
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
=
0 seconds
0.3 seconds
0.7 seconds
1.5 seconds
3.1 seconds
5
6
7
8
9
=
=
=
=
=
6.3 seconds
12.7 seconds
25.5 seconds
51.5 seconds
102.5 seconds
2.12.3. Station and Meter Run Density Temperature

Settings
Station
Low Alarm Limit
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature below which the densitometer low alarm activates. Transducer values
approximately 5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.
High Alarm Limit
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature above which the densitometer high alarm activates. Transducer values
approximately 10% above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the
substituted.
{L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=

{L1} at 4mA*
Note:
Meter #2
{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________
{L2} Override
INFO - The Density
Temperature sensor is used
to compensate for
temperature expansion
effects which effect the
periodic time of oscillation
of the densitometer. It is
also used when desired to
calculate the density of the
liquid to reference
temperature using API
2540; Table 23, 23A or 23B.
Meter #1
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or lower
{L1} at 20mA*
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volts, or
upper range limit (URV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________

module. The process variable (i.e., temperature) is filtered by the transmitter before being
sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.
0
1
2
3
4
2-44
=
=
=
=
=
0 seconds
0.3 seconds
0.7 seconds
1.5 seconds
3.1 seconds
5
6
7
8
9
=
=
=
=
=
6.3 seconds
12.7 seconds
25.5 seconds
51.5 seconds
102.5 seconds
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
2.13. Configuring Meter Pressure

and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Flow Computer
when programming an
prompted. Once a
described below.
Group Entry screen.
option.
Meter Pressure Setup via
the Random Access
Select Group Entry
press [Press] [Enter], or
[Press] [Meter] [n] [Enter]
or [Meter] [n] [Press]
[Enter] (n = Meter Run # 1,
2, 3 or 4). Use [$] / [%]
keys to scroll.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
2.13.1. Accessing the Pressure Setup Submenu

*** SETUP MENU ***
Grav/Density Setup
Temperature Setup
Pressure Setup
_
Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Pressure Setup
2.13.2. Station and Meter Run Pressure Settings

Station
Low Alarm Limit
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure below which the flowmeter low alarm activates. Transducer values
approximately 5% below this entry fail to low.
High Alarm Limit
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure above which the flowmeter high alarm activates. Transducer values
approximately 10% above this entry fail to high.
{L2} Override
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the
substituted.
{L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=

{L1} at 4mA*
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or lower
{L1} at 20mA*
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5volts, or upper
range limit (URV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
2-45
Chapter 2

Station
flow computer.
Meter Density Pressure

Setup via the Random
Access Method - To
access these settings, in
[Density] [Press] [Enter].
INFO - The Density
Pressure sensor is used to
compensate for pressure
effects which effect the
periodic time of oscillation
of the densitometer. It is
also used when desired to
calculate the density of the
liquid at the densitometer to
equilibrium pressure using
API 2540 MPMS 11.2.1 or
11.2.2.
Note:

Probe is specified.
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________

module. The process variable (i.e., pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to
the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.
For Pressure Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code:
0
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
=
0 seconds
0.16 seconds
0.32 seconds
0.48 seconds
1 seconds
5
6
7
8
9
=
=
=
=
=
2 seconds
4 seconds
8 seconds
16 seconds
32 seconds
2.13.3. Station and Meter Run Density Pressure Settings

Station
Low Alarm Limit
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure below which the densitometer low alarm activates. Transducer values
approximately 5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.
High Alarm Limit
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure above which the densitometer high alarm activates. Transducer values
approximately 10% above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.
{L2} Override
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
substituted.
{L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=

{L1} at 4mA*
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or lower
{L1} at 20mA*
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volts, or upper
range limit (URV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________

module. The process variable (i.e., pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to
0
1
2
3
4
2-46
=
=
=
=
=
0 seconds
0.16 seconds
0.32 seconds
0.48 seconds
1 seconds
5
6
7
8
9
=
=
=
=
=
2 seconds
4 seconds
8 seconds
16 seconds
32 seconds
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
2.14. Configuring Differential Pressure

and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Flow Computer
when programming an
prompted. Once a
described below.
Group Entry screen.
option.
Meter Differential
Pressure Setup via the
appear. Then press [D.P.]
[Enter], or [D.P.] [Meter]
[n] [Enter] or [Meter] [n]
[D.P.] [Enter] (n = Meter
Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4). Use [$]
/ [%] keys to scroll.
2.14.1. Accessing the Differential Pressure Setup

Submenu
*** SETUP MENU ***
Temperature Setup
Pressure Setup
DP Inches of Water _
Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to DP Inches of
Water and press [Enter] to access the submenu.
2.14.2. Station and Meter Differential Pressure Settings

Station
Low Alarm Limit
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the flowing differential pressure below which the orifice flowmeter low alarm digital point
activates.
High Alarm Limit
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the flowing differential pressure above which the orifice flowmeter high alarm digital
point activates.
{L2} Override Value ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

substituted.
{L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=

{L1} Low DP at 4mA________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure engineering units that the low range DP transmitter outputs at 4mA or
1volt, or LRV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
{L1} Low DP at 20mA________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure engineering units that the low range DP transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
2-47
Chapter 2

Station
flow computer.
displayed.
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________

module. The process variable (I.e., pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to
For Differential Pressure/Pressure Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code:
0
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
=
0 seconds
0.16 seconds
0.32 seconds
0.48 seconds
1 seconds
5
6
7
8
9
=
=
=
=
=
2 seconds
4 seconds
8 seconds
16 seconds
32 seconds
{L1} Hi DP at 4mA ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure engineering units that the high range DP transmitter outputs at 4mA or
1volt, or LRV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
{L1} Hi DP at 20mA________
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure engineering units that the high range DP transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5
Meter Density Pressure
Setup via the Random
Access Method - To
access these settings, in
[Density] [Press] [Enter].
Note: Differential pressure

is expressed as inches of
water (US units) and either
kPa or mBar (metric units),
depending upon setting
made in the Factor Setup
menu.
{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________

module. The process variable (I.e., pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to
For Differential Pressure/Pressure Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code:
0
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
=
0 seconds
0.16 seconds
0.32 seconds
0.48 seconds
1 seconds
High DP Select %
5
6
7
8
9
=
=
=
=
=
2 seconds
4 seconds
8 seconds
16 seconds
32 seconds
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
The flow computer will automatically switch over to the signal from the high range DP
transmitter when the signal from the low range transmitter exceeds this percent of its range.
The switch over will not occur if the high range transmitter has failed or is not installed.
Low DP Select %
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
The flow computer will automatically switch over to the signal from the low range DP
transmitter when the signal from the high range transmitter falls below this percent of its
range. The switch over will not occur if the high range transmitter has failed or is not installed.
2-48
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
2.15. Configuring the Meter Station

and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Meter Station Setup via
the Random Access
LED will glow green and
Select Group Entry
press [Meter] [Enter] and
use [$] / [%] keys to scroll.
Meter Station Run
Switching Flow Rate
Thresholds - The Omni
flow computer has 3
Boolean flags which are set
or reset depending on the
station flow rate:
Run Switching Flag #1 at
Modbus database point
1824.
1825.
1826.
Each of these flags has a
low threshold and high
threshold flow rate. Each
flag is set when the station
flow rate exceeds the
corresponding high
threshold value. These flags
reset when the station flow
rate falls below the
respective low threshold
limit.
See Chapter 3 for more
information on how to
include these flags in
Boolean statements to
automatically switch meter
runs depending on flow
rates.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
2.15.1. Accessing the Station Setup Submenu

*** SETUP MENU ***
Pressure Setup
DP Inches of Water
Station Setup
_
Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Station Setup and
2.15.2. Meter Station Settings

{L1} Station ID
_______________
Enter 8 alphanumeric characters maximum. This string variable usually appears in user
custom reports (Modbus database point 4815).
Flow Low Alarm Limit
_______________
Enter the flow rate below which the Station Low Flow Alarm activates (Modbus database point
1810). Flow rates 5% below this value activate the Low Low Alarm (Modbus database point
1809).
Flow High Alarm Limit
_______________
Enter the flow rate above which the Station High Flow Alarm activates (Modbus database
point 1811). Flow rates 5% above this value activate the High High Alarm (Modbus database
point 1812).
{L1} Gross Flowrate Full Scale
_______________
Enter the gross flow rate at full-scale for the meter station. Sixteen-bit integer variables
representing station gross and net flow rate are included in the database at 3802 and 3804.
These variables are scaled using this entry and stored as percentage of full scale with a
resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 999 = 0% to 99.9%)
{L1} Mass Flowrate Full Scale
_______________
Enter the mass flow rate at full-scale for the meter station. A 16-bit integer variable
representing station mass flow rate is included in the database at 3806. This variable is
scaled using this entry and stored as percentage of full scale with a resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0
to 1000 = 0% to 100.0%)
Run Switch Operating Mode
_______________
In multi-meter run systems the flow computer can be configured to automatically open and
close meter run block valves depending upon orifice differential pressure. Enter [Y] to select
Automatic mode if you have a multi-run system and wish to have the flow computer control
the MOV block valves. Enter [N] to select 'Manual' mode if you wish to operate the valves via
the keypad of the flow computer manually or via a Modbus link. Ignore this entry if you do not
have MOVs which are controlled by the flow computer.
2-49
Chapter 2

Run Switch Delay Timer
key presses.
flow computer.
displayed.
Flow Computer
when programming an
prompted. Once a
described below.
Group Entry screen.
option.
Gas Analysis Variables These variables are:

Reference Specific
Gravity (Ref SG)
Nitrogen (N2) %
Carbon Dioxide (CO2) %
Heating Value (HV)
Note:
_______________
Enter the amount of time in seconds that you want the flow computer to allow for each meter
run block valve to open and flow rate to be established. If, after this amount of time differential
pressure or flow rate has not been detected, the meter run block valve will be given the 'close'
command and the meter run alarmed as being out of service. The flow computer will not
attempt to open a meter run which is out of service until it is placed back in service, either via
the flow computer keypad or via a Modbus command.
Run Switch Threshold Low Differential Pressure %
_______________
A meter run will be closed when the differential pressure across the orifice falls below this
threshold percentage of its maximum range. Orifice runs are closed starting from the highest
meter run number to the lowest. The last meter run is always left open but may be closed via
manual command.
Run Switch Threshold High Differential Pressure %
_______________
A meter run will be opened when the differential pressure across the orifice of the last run
opened exceeds this percentage of its maximum range. Meter runs are opened in order from
lowest to highest skipping any meter runs which may not be in service. Runs placed back in
service will automatically be utilized when the flow computer 'wraps around' (i.e., opens the
highest numbered meter run and then starts looking for any runs that may have be out of
service previously).
Gas Analysis Variables

Ref. SG
Low Alarm Limit
N2 %
CO2 %
HV
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the gas analysis variable value to be used as the low alarm point. The low alarm will
activate when the input variable falls below this value.
High Alarm Limit
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the gas analysis variable value to be used as the high alarm point. The high alarm will
activate when the input variable goes above this value.
{L2} Override Value
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the engineering value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the
substituted.
{L2} Override Code
________ ________ ________ ________

0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=

{L1} Value at 4mA*
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt. This entry does not
apply for reference specific gravity when Solartron 3096 gravitometer is selected as the
reference SG transducer type.
{L1} Value at 20mA*
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volt. This entry does not
apply for reference specific gravity when Solartron 3096 gravitometer is selected as the
reference SG transducer type.
Probe is specified.
2-50
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

Specific Gravity of Reference Gas X
key presses.
_______________
This entry applies only if Solartron 3096 gravitometer is selected as the reference specific
gravity transducer type. Enter the reference specific gravity of 'Reference Gas X or Y'. Sample
gases X and Y are used to determine the calibration constants K0 and K2 for the Solartron
3096 specific gravity transducer.
Time Reference of Gas X

flow computer.
displayed.
Gas Analysis Variable &

Auxiliary Input Setup via
the Random Access
LED will glow green and
Select Group Entry
press [Analysis] [Input]
[Enter] or [Analysis]
[Input] [n] [Enter] (n =
Auxiliary Input # 1, 2, 3 or
4). Use [$] / [%] keys to
scroll.
Note:

Probe is specified.
_______________
gravity transducer type. Enter the periodic times (in microseconds) recorded when measuring
the two sample gases X and Y used to determine the calibration constants K0 and K2 for the
Solartron 3096 specific gravity transducer.
Specific Gravity of Reference Gas Y
_______________
gravity transducer type. Enter the reference specific gravity of 'Reference Gas X or Y'. Sample
gases X and Y are used to determine the calibration constants K0 and K2 for the Solartron
3096 specific gravity transducer.
Time Reference of Gas Y
_______________
gravity transducer type. Enter the periodic times (in microseconds) recorded when measuring
the two sample gases X and Y used to determine the calibration constants K0 and K2 for the
Solartron 3096 specific gravity transducer.
Auxiliary Inputs
Low Limit
Input #1
Input #2
Input #3
Input#4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the auxiliary input signal value below which the Low Alarm activates.
High Limit
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the auxiliary input signal value above which the High Alarm activates.
{L2} Override
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the value (in engineering units) which will be substituted for the transducer value
depending, on the override code selected. An * displayed along side of the value indicates
that the override value is substituted.
{L2} Override Code
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______

0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=

{L1} at 4mA*
_______
Enter the value (in engineering units) that produces a transmitter output of 4mA or 1vol, or
LRV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters t.
{L1} at 20mA*
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the value (in engineering units) that produces a transmitter output of 20mA or 5 Volts, or
URV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
2-51
Chapter 2

{L1} Damping Code
_______
_______
_______
_______
module. The process variable (I.e., temperature/pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before
being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.
0
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
=
0 seconds
0.16 seconds
0.32 seconds
0.48 seconds
1 seconds
5
6
7
8
9
=
=
=
=
=
2 seconds
4 seconds
8 seconds
16 seconds
32 seconds

0
1
2
3
4
2-52
=
=
=
=
=
0 seconds
0.3 seconds
0.7 seconds
1.5 seconds
3.1 seconds
5
6
7
8
9
=
=
=
=
=
6.3 seconds
12.7 seconds
25.5 seconds
51.5 seconds
102.5 seconds
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
2.16. Configuring Meter Runs

and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Flow Computer
when programming an
prompted. Once a
described below.
Group Entry screen.
option.
Meter Run Setup via the
appear. Then press
[Meter] [n] [Enter] (n =
Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4).
Use [$] / [%] keys to scroll.
2.16.1. Accessing the Meter Run Setup Submenu

*** SETUP MENU ***
DP Inches of Water
Station Setup
Meter Run Setup
_
Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Meter Run Setup
2.16.2. Meter Run Settings

Meter #1
Meter ID
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the ID of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters) for each meter run. This ID
usually appears on reports.
Product # Analysis Selected
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the product number for the analysis data to be used for each meter run. The flow
computer is capable of processing up to four meter streams each with independent fluids and
or analysis data. Product and analysis data can be common to any number of metering runs.
Valid product numbers are 1-4.
GC Analyzer Stream Number
________ ________ ________ ________
In many cases a gas chromatograph or gas analyzer will be shared between several meter
runs or flow streams. When data is transmitted to the flow computer the analyzer will identify
which flow stream the analysis data pertains to. Enter the number of the flow stream that this
meter run should match before using the analysis data.
Flow Low Limit
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the flow rate for each meter run below which the Flow Low Alarm (database point 1n21)
activates. Flow rates 5% below this value will activate the Low Low Alarm (Modbus database
point 1809).
Flow High Limit
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the flow rate for each meter run above which the Flow High Alarm (database point
1n22) activates. Flow rates 5% below this value will activate the High High Alarm (Modbus
database point 1812).
Alternate Access to Meter

Run Settings from Meter
Station Setup - After
entering the Meter Station
Settings, without exiting,
press the [%] key and you
will scroll down through
each Meter Run setup
entry.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
2-53
Chapter 2

Meter #1
key presses.
flow computer.
displayed.
Gross Flow at Full Scale
Meter #3
Meter #4
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the gross flow rate at full-scale for each meter run. Sixteen-bit integer variables
representing meter run gross and net flow rate are included in the database at 3n42 and 3n40
respectively. These variables are scaled using this entry and stored as percentage of full
scale with a resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 1000 = 0% to 100.0%)
Mass Flow at Full Scale
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the mass flow rate at full-scale for each meter run. A 16-bit integer variable representing
meter run mass flow rate is included in the database at 3n44. This variable is scaled using
this entry and stored as percentage of full scale with a resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 1000 = 0%
to 100.0%)
Additional Entries when Turbine Meter Type Selected

The following entries apply when a turbine meter is selected in the Config
Meter n submenu of the Misc Configuration menu. Unless otherwise
indicated, the password level for these settings is {L1}.
Active Frequency Threshold

appear. Then press
Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4).
Meter #2
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the Active Frequency Threshold for each meter run. Flow meter pulse frequencies equal
or greater than this threshold will cause the Meter Active Flag (1n05) to be set.
By using any Boolean statement you can use this flag bit to enable and disable totalizing by
controlling the Disable Meter Run Flags (Modbus database points 1736, 1737, 1738 & 1739).
Example: 1030:1736=/1105 ) Turn off Meter #1 flow if not greater than Active Frequency.
Error Check Threshold
________ ________ ________ ________
This entry will display only when Dual Pulse is selected under Config Meter Runs (Misc
Setup). It applies only when a 'E' combo module is fitted and 'Pulse Fidelity Checking' is
enabled.
Enter the Pulse Fidelity Error Check Threshold (in Hz) for each meter run. To eliminate bogus
alarms and error count accumulations, the dual pulse error checking functions are disabled
until the sum of both pulse trains exceeds the pulses per seconds entered for this setting.
Example: Entering 50 for this threshold means that the dual pulse error checking will be
disabled until both A and B channels of the flowmeter pick-offs are providing 25 pulses per
second each.
Max Error Counts/Batch
________ ________ ________ ________
This entry will display only when Dual Pulse is selected under Config Meter Runs (Misc
Configuration). It applies only when a 'E' combo module is fitted and 'Pulse Fidelity Checking'
is enabled.
Enter the maximum number of error pulses allowed in one transaction for each meter run. The
alarm points are:
*
*
*
*
1n48
1n49
1n50
1n51
A/B Comparitor Error Detected

A Channel Failed
B Channel Failed
A and B Channels not equal
The dual pulse A/B Comparitor Error Alarm (1n48) is activated when the accumulated error
counts between the flowmeter channels exceeds this count threshold. Accumulated error
counts are cleared for every batch.
2-54
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

Meter #1

and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
{L1A} K Factor #1

entry.
keys to scroll.
{L1A} K Factor #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
________ ________ ________ ________
This entry applies for simple flow-based linearization of K Factor. Enter the K Factors for each
meter run. In this case, up to 12 K Factors and the associated flowmeter pulse frequencies
are entered per meter run to define the K Factor Curve. The flow computer will continuously
monitor the flowmeter pulse frequency and calculate gross flow based on and interpolated K
Factor derived from the entered data points. Use only K Factor #1 in cases where flowmeter
linearizing is not required. The K Factors associated with the lowest or highest frequency point
will be used in cases where the flowmeter frequency is outside of the entered values.
Frequency Point 1
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the flowmeter pulse frequency associated with the corresponding K Factor. The
frequency points must be entered lowest to highest (Hz).
Frequency Point 2
{L1A} K Factor #3
Frequency Point 3
{L1A} K Factor #4
Frequency Point 4
{L1A} K Factor #5
Frequency Point 5
{L1A} K Factor #6
Frequency Point 6
{L1A} K Factor #7
Frequency Point 7
{L1A} K Factor #8
Frequency Point 8
{L1A} K Factor #9
Frequency Point 9
{L1A} K Factor #10
Frequency Point 10
{L1A} K Factor #11
Frequency Point 11
{L1A} K Factor #12
Frequency Point 12
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Meter #2
________ ________ ________ ________

________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
2-55
Chapter 2

Meter #1
key presses.
flow computer.
displayed.
appear. Then press
Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4).
Meter Factor
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the meter factor for the turbine flowmeter. The meter factor is a multiplier close to
1.0000 included to correct for small changes in flow meter characteristics. Net and mass flows
are dependent on this number. Meter factors are determined by proving the flowmeter against
some known standard volume or standard rate.
Meter Model
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the model number of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters). This entry
usually appears on the prove report.
Meter Size
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the size of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters). This entry usually appears
on the prove report.
Serial Number
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the serial number of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters). This entry usually
appears on the prove report.
Transducer Density Select ?
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter [Y] if you have a densitometer transducer measuring flowing density on this metering
run and you wish to use this density value to calculate mass and volume flow rate. Enter [N]
to cause the flow computer to use the appropriate equation of state.
Additional Entries when Orifice Meter Type Selected

The following entries apply when an orifice meter is selected in the Config
Meter n submenu of the Misc Configuration menu. Unless otherwise
indicated, the password level for these settings is {L1}.
Low Flow Cutoff
________ ________ ________ ________
Differential pressure signals lower than the value entered here will not be totalized. Differential
pressure is expressed as 'inches of water' for U.S. units applications and 'kPa' or mBar for
metric units applications.
Orifice/Venturi Throat Diameter
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the diameter (inches or mm) of the orifice bore at the orifice plate reference
temperature. The actual diameter of the orifice bore is calculated continuously based on the
flowing temperature of the fluid.
Orifice/Venturi Ref. Temperature
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature (F for US units or C for metric units) that corresponds to the
temperature of the orifice plate when the bore was measured.
Orifice/Venturi Expansion Coef.
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the expansion coefficient for the type of material of the orifice plate (see table below).
The orifice bore diameter will expand and contract depending upon the temperature and
thermal expansion coefficient for the type of plate material. The orifice equations require the
linear coefficient of expansion.
US Customary Units
-100 to 300 F = 6.20 x e
-73.3 to 148.9 C = 1.12 x e
304/316 Stainless Steel
-100 to 300 F = 9.25 x e
-73.3 to 148.9 C = 1.67 x e
-7 to 154 F = 7.95 x e
-21.6 to 67.8 C = 1.43 x e
Monel
-6
-6
-6
Meter #1
2-56
Metric Units
Mild Steel Plate
-5
-5
Meter #2
-5
Meter #3
Meter #4
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
entry.
keys to scroll.

Pipe Measured Diameter
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the diameter of the meter tube pipe (inches or mm) at the reference temperature. The
actual diameter of the meter tube used in the equations is calculated continuously based on
the flowing temperature of the fluid.
Pipe Reference Temperature
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature (F for US units or C for metric units) that corresponds to the
temperature of the metering tube when the orifice diameter was measured.
Pipe Expansion Coefficient
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the expansion coefficient for the type of material of the pipe. The meter tube diameter
will expand and contract depending upon the temperature and thermal expansion coefficient
for the type of pipe material. The orifice equations require the linear coefficient of expansion.
US Customary Units
Metric Units
Mild Steel Plate
-100 to 300 F = 6.20 x e
-73.3 to 148.9 C = 1.12 x e
-100 to 300 F = 9.25 x e
-73.3 to 148.9 C = 1.67 x e
-7 to 154 F = 7.95 x e
-21.6 to 67.8 C = 1.43 x e
-6
Monel
Use Downstream Pressure ?
-6
-6
-5
-5
-5
________ ________ ________ ________
Static pressure of the flowing fluid can be obtained from either the upstream or downstream
pressure tap. Enter [Y] if downstream pressure is used. Enter [N] if upstream pressure is
used.
Disable Isentropic Temp Correct. ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter [Y] (for Yes) to disable the downstream-to-upstream temperature correction calculation
which assumes that an 'isentropic expansion' occurs after the orifice plate. The default for this
entry is 'Yes' as AGA-3/API 14.3 do NOT mandate the use of this correction. This entry
should always be [Y] when the temperature of the fluid is measured upstream of the orifice. At
high differential pressures across the orifice, a significant cooling of the fluid can take place as
it decompresses, if temperature is measured downstream of the orifice you may choose to
ignore this effect by entering [Y] or correct for this effect by entering [N] (for No). The flow
computer corrects the downstream temperature to the equivalent upstream temperature.
Type of Differential Pressure Taps ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the Flange or Pipe Tap:
0 = Orifice flange
4 = ASME flow nozzle
1 = Orifice pipe
5 = Venturi (C=0.084)
2 = Orifice corner
6 = Venturi (C=0.995)
3 = Orifice D & D/2
The flow computer must be informed as to where the differential pressure taps are located on
the orifice metering tube.
Transducer Density Select ?
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter [Y] if you have a densitometer transducer measuring flowing density on this metering
run and you wish to use this density value to calculate mass and volume flow rate.
Enter [N] to cause the flow computer to use the appropriate equation of state.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
2-57
Chapter 2
2.17. Configuring Miscellaneous Factors

and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Flow Computer
when programming an
prompted. Once a
described below.
Group Entry screen.
option.
Factor Setup via the
appear. Then press
[[Factor] [Enter], or
[Factor] [Meter] [n]
[Enter], or [Meter] [n]
[Factor](n = Meter Run # 1,
2, 3, or 4). Use [$] / [%]
keys to scroll.
2.17.1. Accessing the Factor Setup Submenu

*** SETUP MENU
Station Setup
Meter Run Setup
Factor Setup
***
_
Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Factor Setup and
2.17.2. Factor Settings

3
{L1} Kg/m to Lb/ft
_______________
This entry applies to Revision 23 (US units) only. Enter the multiplier needed to convert the
3
3
Solartron densitometer readings from Kg/m to Lb/ft (default = 0.062428).
{L1} Atmospheric Pressure
_______________
Enter the Atmospheric Pressure in PSIa (US units) or absolute metric units (KPaa or mBara).
This is used to convert flowing (gauge) pressure readings in PSIg to PSIa (absolute pressure
units) for US units, and for the metric version to absolute units (KPaa or mBara), in
conformance with pressure (metric) units selected. Absolute pressure is required for the
equations of state.
3
{L1} Ft to Gallon Factor
_______________
This entry applies to Revision 23 (US units) only. Enter the number of gallons in a cubic foot
(default = 7.480556).
{L1} Base Pressure
_______________
Enter the contract base pressure in PSIg (US units) or absolute metric units (KPAa or mBara),
in conformance with pressure (metric) units selected. This is required by the AGA 8 density
equation.
{L1} Base Temperature
_______________
Enter the contract base temperature in F (US units) or C (metric units). This is used by the
AGA 8 density equation.
{L1} Density of Air
_______________
This entry is needed only for natural gas measurement where AGA 8 will NOT be used to
calculate 'density at base conditions' (see 'Specific Gravity' entry in the 'Fluid Data &
Analysis' menu. Entering [0] forces the flow computer to use AGA 8 to calculate density at
base conditions. Net flow is calculated by dividing mass flow rate by density at base
conditions.
{L1} Flow Average Factor
_______________
This entry applies only to turbine meters. The flow averaging factor is the number of
calculation cycles used to smooth the displayed flow rate. A number 1-99 will be accepted. (A
calculation cycle is 500msec).
2-58
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

Alarm Deadband %
key presses.
flow computer.
displayed.
Factor Setup via the
appear. Then press
[[Factor] [Enter], or
[Factor] [Meter] [n]
[Enter], or [Meter] [n]
[Factor](n = Meter Run # 1,
2, 3, or 4). Use [$] / [%]
keys to scroll.
_______________
Nuisance alarms can occur when input variables spend any amount of time near the high or
low alarm set points. These nuisance alarms can swamp the alarm log with useless alarms
leaving no room for real alarms. This entry sets a percentage limit based on the 'high alarm'
entry. A variable must return within the high/low alarm limits by more than this amount before
the alarm is cleared.
Example: High limit is 100F, Low limit is 20F, Alarm deadband is set to 2%. A transducer
input which exceeded 100F will set the 'high alarm'. The transducer signal must drop 2
percent below the high alarm setpoint (98F) before the alarm will clear.
{L1} Roll All Totalizers
_______________
This entry is read-only and can only be changed at the keypad of the flow computer.
Totalizers within the computer can be rolled at 8 or 9 significant digits.
Totalizer Decimal Place Resolution

The following are read-only entries that cannot be changed via OmniCom. To
change totalizer resolution you must first 'Clear All Totals' in the 'Password
Maintenance' menu from the front panel keypad of the flow computer. You will
then be given the opportunity to set the totalizing resolution. Valid decimal place
settings are: XX; X.X; X.XX; and X.XXX.
Gross (Uncorrected) Totalizer Decimal Places
_______________
Enter the number of decimal places for gross totalizer resolution.
Net (Corrected) Totalizer Decimal Places
_______________
Enter the number of decimal places for net totalizer resolution.
Mass Totalizer Decimal Places
_______________
Enter the number of decimal places for mass totalizer resolution.
Energy Totalizer Decimal Places
_______________
Enter the number of decimal places for energy totalizer resolution.
More Factors and System Constants

Flow Weighted Average ?
_______________
Two averaging methods are available: flow weighted and time weighted. These methods do
not modify the averaged variable if there is no flow taking place. Gas Chromatograph data is
always time weighted. Enter [Y] to calculated averages weighted by mass flow increment.
Enter [N] to calculate averages weighted by time period.
Select Pressure Units
_______________
This entry applies to Revision 27 (metric units) only, and is a global selection for all pressure
2
variables within the flow computer (1Bar=100KPa, 1kg/cm =98.0665KPa). Display resolution
2
is: XX.XKPa, X.XXXBar, or X.XXXKg/cm . Enter the pressure units you want to use: 0=KPa;
2
1=Bar; 2=Kg/m .
Select Differential Pressure Units
_______________
This entry applies to Revision 27 (metric units) only, and is a global entry which applies to all
DP variables within the flow computer (1KPA=10mBar. Display resolution is: x.xxKPa or
x.xmBar. Enter the DP units you want to use: 0=KPa; 1=mBar.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
2-59
Chapter 2
2.18. Configuring Fluid Data and Analysis of

Products
and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Flow Computer
when programming an
prompted. Once a
described below.
Group Entry screen.
option.
Product Setup via the
appear. Then press
[Product] [Enter] or
[Product] [n] [Enter] (n =
Product # 1 through 16).
2.18.1. Accessing the Fluid Data & Analysis Setup

Submenu
*** SETUP MENU ***
Meter Run Setup
Factor Setup
FluidData&Analysis _
Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Fluid Data &
Analysis and press [Enter] to access the submenu.
2.18.2. General Fluid Data & Analysis (Product) Settings

Fluid data and analysis for up to four different gas products can be stored. Gas
product setup data includes: name, type of gas, component analysis, relative
density at reference conditions, and calculation algorithms to be used when
running the product
{L1} Fluid Name
Prod. #1
Prod. #2
Prod. #3
Prod. #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the name of the product (up to 8 alphanumeric characters). Appears on reports.
{L1} Fluid Type
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the type of fluid product:

0 = None.
1 = Natural Gas (AGA 8 1992 Equation of State).
2 = Steam (ASTM).
3 = Steam (NIST/NBS).
4 = Water (Keenan & Keys).
5 = Argon (NIST 1048).
6 = Nitrogen (NIST 1048).
7 = Oxygen (NIST 1048).
8 = Hydrogen (NIST 1048).
9 = Ethylene(NIST 1048).
10 =
Ethylene (IUPAC).
{L1} Reference Density
_______
This entry is not required when AGA8 is selected. Reference density is required to calculate
3
3
standard volume. Enter the density of the gas or water in Lb/ft (US units) or Kg/m (metric
units) at standard temperature and pressure.
Prod. #1
2-60
Prod. #2
Prod. #3
Prod. #4
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
flow computer.
displayed.

{L1} Flowing Fluid Viscosity
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the absolute viscosity of the gas at flowing conditions in centipoise units. For NIST 1048
products only, enter -999 to have the flow computer calculate the viscosity using the
equation of state.
{L1} Isentropic Exponent
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the Isentropic Exponent dimensionless factor for this product at flowing conditions. For
NIST 1048 fluids only, enter -999 to have the flow computer calculate it for you using the
equation of state.
{L1} Heating Value (HV)
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter a minus (negative) override value if you want the flow computer to calculated a heating
value to calculate energy totals. Heating value is calculated using AGA-5, GPA 2172 or ISO
6976 for natural gas. NIST algorithms are used for steam and other gases. HV is expressed in
BTU/SCF (US units) or MJ/Nm3 (metric units). Enter a positive override value to be used in
place of the calculated value in systems where a gas chromatograph (GC) is not available. In
systems which use a GC this override is also the fall back value should the GC fail. The GC
HV if available will always be used unless it is assigned the component number '0' in the
'Analysis Setup' menu. Energy can also be calculated using the live 4-20mA value obtained
from a BTU analyzer. In this case the analyzer value overwrites this entry in the #1 product
area only.
2.18.3. Additional Settings for Natural Gas Product

INFO - AGA 8 can also be
used for many other gas
mixtures, including carbon
dioxide.
AGA 8 Method Select
Prod. #1
Prod. #2
Prod. #3
Prod. #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the AGA 8 calculation method for characterization of the natural gas mixture (see
selections below). You must select a 'detailed method' if you will be connected to a gas
chromatograph analyzer.
0 = Disable AGA 8 Calculations.
1 = 1994 - Detailed Analysis.
2 = 1994 - HV / SG / CO2.
3 = 1994 - SG / N2 / CO2.
5 = 1992 - HV / SG / CO2.
6 = 1992 - SG / N2 / CO2.
8 = 1985 - HV / SG / CO2.
9 = 1985 - HV / SG / N2 / CO2.
10 =
1985 - SG / N2 / CO2.
11 =
1985 - HV / N2 / CO2.
12 =
1985 - SG / CO2 / C1.
Heating Value Method Select
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the method used to calculate the heating value of the gas: 0=AGA-5, 1=GPA 2172-96,
2=ISO 6976-95. The energy flow of the gas may or may NOT be calculated using the method
selected, depending upon the manual override value for the entered HV.
Water Content
_______
_______
_______
_______
This entry applies to Revision 23 (US units) only. Enter the amount of water that the gas
contains in Lbs/MMCF. It is used to calculated the correction factor FWV. Due to the
resolution of FWV (X.XXXX) water contents of 7 Lbs/MMCF and less produce FWV factors of
1.0000. Factor FWV corrects the net volume and therefore energy for water content. Enter
zero if a GC is providing water content in the compositional analysis.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
2-61
Chapter 2

Prod. #1
Prod. #2
Prod. #3
Prod. #4
_______
_______
_______
_______

and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Specific Gravity
Product Setup via the

appear. Then press
[Product] [Enter] or
[Product] [n] [Enter] (n =
Product # 1 through 16).
The following entries apply to AGA 8 1992 and 1994 calculation methods, and
represent component mole percentage overrides. Enter the mole percentages of
each component of the gas stream. These percentages are used to calculate the
flowing density and heating value if the application does not have a gas
chromatograph (GC) analyzer or the GC fails. This data may be overwritten by
data received from the GC. All entries apply for the detailed analysis method.
Notes: These entries apply

to the following AGA 8
1994/1992 methods when
selected:
* AGA 8 1994/1992
HV/SG/CO2
# AGA 8 1994/1992
SG/N2/CO2
2-62
Enter a minus (negative) number to instruct the flow computer to calculate 'density at
reference conditions' using the AGA 8 equation of state (detailed methods only). Net volumes
are calculated by dividing mass flow by 'density at reference conditions'. Otherwise enter a
positive override value of specific gravity at reference conditions that will be used together
with the 'density of air' entry to calculate 'density at reference conditions'. On product #1 only
this value is overwritten if SG is to be obtained from Solartron 3096 gravitometer. In cases
where a chromatograph is used, this entry serves as the GC failure override. The GC value of
SG if available will also be used unless the component number for SG is set to '0' in the
'Analysis Setup' menu.
Entries for AGA 8 1994/1992 Methods
Component # - Mole % Override
Prod. #1
Prod. #2
Prod. #3
Prod. #4
01 - % Methane (CH4)
_______
_______
_______
_______
02 - % Nitrogen (N2)
_______
_______
_______
_______
*#
03 - % Carbon Dioxide (CO2)
_______
_______
_______
_______
04 - % Ethane (C2H6)
_______
_______
_______
_______
05 - % Propane (C3H8)
_______
_______
_______
_______
06 - % Water (H2O)
_______
_______
_______
_______
07 - % Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) _______
_______
_______
_______
08 - % Hydrogen (H2)
_______
_______
_______
_______
09 - % Carbon Monoxide (CO) _______
_______
_______
_______
10 - % Oxygen (O2)
_______
_______
_______
_______
11 - % i-Butane (iC4H10)
_______
_______
_______
_______
12 - % n-Butane (nC4H10)
_______
_______
_______
_______
13 - % i-Pentane (iC5H12)
_______
_______
_______
_______
14 - % n-Pentane (nC5H12)
_______
_______
_______
_______
15 - % n-Hexane (C6H14)
_______
_______
_______
_______
16 - % n-Heptane (C7H16)
_______
_______
_______
_______
17 - % n-Octane (C8H16)
_______
_______
_______
_______
18 - % n-Nonane
_______
_______
_______
_______
19 - % n-Decane
_______
_______
_______
_______
20 - % Helium (He)
_______
_______
_______
_______
21 - % Argon (Ar)
_______
_______
_______
_______
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

Entries for AGA 8 1985 Methods
flow computer.
displayed.
The following entries apply to AGA 8 1985 calculation methods, and represent
component mole percentage overrides. Enter the mole percentages of each
component of the gas stream. These percentages are used to calculate the
flowing density and heating value if the application does not have a gas
chromatograph (GC) analyzer or the GC fails. This data may be overwritten by
data received from the GC. All entries apply for the detailed analysis method.
Component # - Mole % Override
Prod. #1
Prod. #2
Prod. #3
Prod. #4
#^
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
03 - % Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) _______
_______
_______
_______
04 - % Water (H2O))
_______
_______
_______
_______
05 - % Helium (He)
_______
_______
_______
_______
06 - % Methane (CH4)
_______
_______
_______
_______
Notes: These entries apply

to the following AGA 8 1985
methods when selected:
07 - % Ethane (C2H6
_______
_______
_______
_______
08 - % Propane (C3H8)
_______
_______
_______
_______
* AGA 8 1985 HV/SG/CO2

# AGA 8 1985
09 - % i-Butane (iC4H10)
_______
_______
_______
_______
10 - % n-Butane (nC4H10)
_______
_______
_______
_______
11 - % i-Pentane (iC5H12)
_______
_______
_______
_______
12 - % n-Pentane (nC5H12)
_______
_______
_______
_______
13 - % n-Hexane (C6H14)
_______
_______
_______
_______
14 - % n-Heptane (C7H16)
_______
_______
_______
_______
15 - % n-Octane (C8H16)
_______
_______
_______
_______
16 - % n-Nonane
_______
_______
_______
_______
17 - % n-Decane
_______
_______
_______
_______
18 - % Oxygen (O2)
_______
_______
_______
_______
19 - % Carbon Monoxide (CO) _______
_______
_______
_______
20 - % Hydrogen (H2)
_______
_______
_______
*#^ 02 - % Carbon Dioxide (CO2)
HV/SG/N2/CO2 &
SG/N2/CO2 &
HV/N2/CO2
^ AGA 8 1985 SG/CO2/C1

INFO - AGA 8 can also be
used for many other gas
mixtures, including carbon
dioxide.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
01 - % Nitrogen (N2)
_______
2-63
Volume 3d
3. User-Programmable Functions
3.1.
Introduction
The computer performs many functions, displays and prints large amounts of
data, but there are always some application-specific control functions,
calculations or displays that cannot be anticipated.
The Omni Flow Computer incorporates several programmable features that
enable the user to easily customize the computer to fit a specific application.
User-programmable Boolean Flags and Statements

User-programmable Variables and Statements
User-configurable Display Screens
User-customized Report Templates
The first three Items are explained here. The last item requires the use of the
OmniCom PC configuration software that comes with the flow computer.
3.2.
3.2.1.
User-Programmable Boolean Flags and

Statements
What is a Boolean?
A Boolean point is simply a single bit register within the computer (sometimes
called a flag) which has only two states, On or Off (True or False, 1 or 0). These
Boolean flags or points are controlled and/or monitored by the flow computer and
represent alarms, commands and status points. Each Boolean point is given an
identifying number within the data base of the computer allowing the state (On or
Off) to be monitored or modified by assigning that Boolean point to a physical
digital I/O point or accessing it via a communication port. A maximum of 24
physical digital I/O points are available for monitoring limit switches, status
signals or controlling relays or lamps.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
3-1
Chapter 3
User-Programmable Functions
Boolean points are numbered as follows:
INFO - The 4-digit point

numbers referred to in this
chapter are Modbus index
numbers used to identify
each variable (Boolean or
other) within the Modbus
database. A complete
listing and descriptions of
database points is included
in Volume 4.
1001 through 1024

1025 through 1088
1089 through 1099
1100 through 1199
1200 through 1299
1300 through 1399
1400 through 1499
1500 through 1699
1700 through 1799
1800 through 1899
2100 through 2199
2200 through 2299
2300 through 2399
2400 through 2499
2600 through 2623
2700 through 2759
2800 through 2876
2877 through 2899
Physical Digital I/O Points 1 through 24

Programmable Boolean Points (64 total)
Programmable Pulse outputs (11 total)
Meter Run #1 Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.)
Scratchpad Storage for Results of Boolean Statements
Command or Status Inputs
Station Boolean Flags (Alarms, Status etc.)
Meter Run #1 Totalizer Roll-over Flags
Miscellaneous Station Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.)
Miscellaneous Boolean Command and Status Points
Station Totalizer Roll-over Flags
More Miscellaneous Boolean Command and Status Points
Physical Digital I/O Points (1001 1024)

Each of the physical digital I/O points is assigned to a valid Boolean point
number as detailed above. Points 1700 through 1799 are command inputs
which are described later, all other point assignments indicate that the I/O point
is to be set up as an output point. Output points which are dedicated as flow
accumulator outputs can be set up for pulse widths ranging from 10 msec to 100
sec in 10 msec increments. All other output point assignments have associated
'time ON delay' and 'time OFF delay' timers which are adjustable from 0.0 to
1000 sec in 100 msec increments.
Programmable Boolean Points (1025 1088)

There are 64 user flags or Boolean points are available and are controlled by 64
Boolean statements or equations. These are provided to perform sequencing
and control functions. Each statement or equation is evaluated every 100 msec.
starting at point 1025 and ending at point 1088. The results of these Boolean
statements can then assigned to physical digital I/O points. There are no
restrictions as to what Boolean points can be used in a Boolean statement
including the results of other Boolean statements or the status of physical I/O
points.
Programmable Accumulator Points (1089 1099)

There are 11 Programmable points that are used with Variable Points 7089
through 7099 for programming pulse outputs for Digital I/O or Front Panel
Counters.
3-2
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

One-Shot Boolean Points (1501 1649)
The 149 Boolean flags located between 1501 and 1650 are used to store
temporary data that has been received via the Modbus link or put there by a
Boolean statement. These Boolean variables can be sent to a digital output or
used in the Boolean statements described above.
Scratch Pad Boolean Points (1650 1699)

The 50 Boolean flags located between 1650 and 1699 can be use as momentary
commands. When set true they remain on for two seconds.
3.2.2.
Sign (+, -) of Analog or Calculated Variables

(5001 8999)
The sign of analog or calculated variables can also be used in a Boolean

statements by simply specifying the point number. The Boolean value of the
variable is 'true ' if it is positive and 'false' if it has a negative value.
3.2.3.
Boolean Statements and Functions
Each Boolean statement consists of up to 3 variables optionally preceded by the

Boolean 'NOT' function and separated by one of the Boolean functions 'AND',
'OR', 'Exclusive OR' or 'EQUAL' . The following symbols are used to represent
the functions:
Function
Symbol
NOT
AND
OR
EX OR
EQUAL
IF
GOTO
MOVE
COMPARE
/
&
+
*
=
)
'G'
:
%
The '=' function allows a statement to be used to change the state of the
Boolean point on the left of the equal sign (usually a command point). Evaluation
precedence is left to right.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
3-3
Chapter 3
To program the Boolean points proceed as follows:
From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] and the following
menu will be displayed:
*** Misc. Setup ***
Password Maint?(Y)
Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station?(Y)
Config Meter "n"
Config PID ? "n"
Config D/A Out "n"
Front Pnl Counters
Program Booleans ? _
Program Variables ?
User Display ? "n"
Scroll down to 'Set Boolean ? (Y)' and enter [Y]. Assuming that no Booleans are
as yet programmed, the display shows:
Boolean Point #10xx
25: _
Rmk
26:
Note that the cursor is on the line labeled 25: At this point enter the Boolean
equation that will cause Boolean point 1025 to be ON (True) / OFF (False).
INFO - Points 1005 and

1006 reflect the current
status of physical I/O Points
05 and 06 which could be
inputs connected to the
outside world or outputs
controlling relays, etc.
For example, to turn Boolean 1025 ON whenever Boolean 1005 is OFF, OR

whenever 1006 is ON, enter [/1005+1006] (note the use of the '/' to indicate the
'NOT' function).
Boolean Point #10XX
25: /1005+1006
Rmk
26: _
Boolean 1025 could then be used in the statement following which defines
Boolean 1026. For example, by including Boolean 1205 which indicates that
Meter #2 is active and flowing (see following page), Boolean 1026 will be ON
whenever 'Meter 2 is active and flowing' AND (1005 is NOT ON OR 1006 is ON).
TIP - Leave plenty of empty

statements between
programmed ones. This will
allow you to modify the
execution order of your
program if you need to later.
Boolean Point #10xx

25: /1005+1006
Rmk
26: 1205&1025
Use the 'Up/Down' arrow keys to scroll though all 64 programmable Boolean
points.
3-4
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

Remember that the Boolean statements are evaluated in order starting from
1025 proceeding to 1088 . For maximum speed always ensure that statements
used in other statements are evaluated ahead of time by placing them in the
correct order.
Example 1: Meter Failure Alarm for Two-Meter Run Application

INFO - Use the Exclusive
OR function * to compare 2
points. The result of an
Exclusive OR of 2 points is
true only if both points are
different states.
Object: Using signals from 'flow sensing switches' inserted into the pipeline,
provide an alarm output which activates whenever the signals from the flow
switches and flow meter signals differ, also provide a snapshot report by setting
command point 1719.
How the hardware is configured:
INFO - Booleans 1025,

1026 and 1027 are only
used as an example here.
Any unused programmable
Booleans can be used for
this function.
Physical I/O points 02 and 03 are setup as inputs by assigning them to 1700
(see the Command and Status Booleans on a later page). They are connected to
flow sensing switches on meter runs 1 and 2 respectively. The switches activate
with flow.
Physical I/O point 04 is connected to a 'meter fail alarm bell'. The output is
assigned to Programmable Boolean 1027. A 'delay ON' of 5 seconds is selected
to eliminate spurious alarms which would occur during startup and shutdown. A
'delay OFF' of 5 seconds is selected to ensures that the alarm bell remains on
for at least 5 seconds.
The Booleans are programmed as follows:
True if Meter #1 fails.

True if Meter #2 fails.
Request snapshot if
either meter fails.
BOOLEAN POINT #10xx

25: 1105*1002
26: 1205*1003
27: 1719=1025+1026
28:
Notes:
Boolean Point 1025 is
true (Meter 1 failed)
whenever 'Meter 1
Active' (Point 1105)
differs from 'Flow
Detected' Flow Switch 1
(Point 02).
true (Meter 2 failed)
whenever 'Meter 2
Active' (Point 1205)
differs from 'Flow
Detected' Flow Switch 2
(Point 03).
true (Meter 1 OR 2
failed) whenever point
1025 OR 0126 are true.
The Boolean Command
Bit 1719 is set when
true.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
3-5
Chapter 3
Example 2: Automatic Run Switching for 4-Meter Run Application
Object: To improve metering accuracy by automatically selecting the correct
flow meter run to be active in a multi run application. Small turbines need to be
protected from over-speeding while for best accuracy larger turbines should be
valved off when the flow drops below their minimum rate. In the example shown,
except when switching from one flow meter to the other, only one flow meter run
is active at one time. This is one example only. The number of runs open for a
given application at any flow rate obviously depends on the size of the flow
meters used.
Fig. 3-1.
Figure Showing Automatic Four-Meter Flow Zone Thresholds
Switching is based on the station flow gross flow rate which is compared to
preset switching thresholds entered by the user (See 'Meter Station Settings' in
Chapter 2). Threshold Flags 1, 2 and 3 are set and reset according to the actual
station flow rate.
The first task is identify the 4 zones and assign programmable Boolean points to
them. This allows us to include them in further Boolean statements.
Zone 1 = NOT Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3
Zone 2 = Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3
Zone 3 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND NOT Flag3
Zone 4 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND Flag 3
3-6
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

As each statement can have only 3 terms in it we must pre-process some part of
the equations. The term 'NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3' appears in Zone 1 and 2
equations.
Now we assign valid point numbers to our statements and rewrite them the way
they will be input.
First one term needs to be pre-processed to simplify:
1025 = NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3
25: /1825&/1826
Next the flow Zones are defined:

Zone 1 = NOT Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3
26: /1824&1025
Zone 2 = Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3
27: 1824&1025
Zone 3 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3
28: 1824&1825&/1826
Zone 4 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND Flag 3
29: 1824&1825&1826
The program thus far looks like:

/ Flag 2 & / Flag 3
BOOLEAN POINT #10xx

25: 1105*1002
26: 1205*1003
27: 1719=1025+1026
28: 1824&1825&/1826
29: 1824&1825&1826
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
In our example each meter run valve (V1, V2, V3 and V4) fails closed, energizes
to open. A limit switch mounted on each valve indicates the fully open position
(SW1, SW2, SW3 and SW4).
Fig. 3-2.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Figure Showing Four-Meter Run Valve Switching
3-7
Chapter 3
3.2.4.
How the Digital I/O Assignments are Configured
We will use Physical I/O Points 11, 12, 13 and 14 to connect to valve limit
switches SW1, SW2, SW3 and SW4 respectively. The switches activate when
the appropriate valve is fully open. The points are designated as inputs by
assigning them to the dummy input Boolean Point 1700 (see the Command and
Status Booleans on a later page). Their data base point numbers are simply their
I/O point number preceded by 10 (e.g.: I/O Point 11 = 1011).
Physical I/O points 15, 16, 17 and 18 are wired so as to open the meter run
valves V1, V2, V3 and V4. They will be assigned to the Boolean Flags 32 (Point
1032) through 35 (Point 1035) which represent the required state of V1 through
V4 as explained below.
The Boolean equations are as follows:
V1 = (NOT SW2 AND NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 1
Valve #1 is opened when the flow is in Zone 1 and will remain open until at least
1 of the other 3 valves is fully open.
Valves V2, V3 and V4 are programmed in a similar fashion.
To simplify we pre-process the common terms. The term 'NOT SW3 AND NOT
SW4' is used to determine V1 and V2. The term 'NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2' is
used to determine V3 and V4.
Assigning the next valid point numbers to our statements and re-write them the
way they will be input.
1030 = NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4
30: /1013&/1014
1031 = NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2
31: /1011&/1012
The final Equations to determined the state of V1, V2, V3 and V4 are as follows:
V1= NOT SW2 AND (NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 1
32: /1012&1030+1026
V2 =NOT SW1 AND (NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 2
33: /1011&1030+1027
V3= (NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2) AND NOT SW4 OR Zone 3
34: 1031&/1014+1028
V4 =(NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2) AND NOT SW3 OR Zone 4
35: 1031&/1013+1029
The computer evaluates each expression from left to right, so the order of the
variables in the above statements is critical. The logic requires that the OR
variable comes last.
3-8
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

The final program consists of 11 statements:
Zone 1
BOOLEAN POINT #10xx

25: /1825&/1826
26: /1824&1025
27: 1824&1025
28: 1824&1825&/1826
29: 1824&1825&1826
30: /1013&/1014
31: /1011&/1012
32: /1012&1030+1026
33: /1011&1030+1027
34: 1031&/1014+1028
35: 1031&/1013+1029
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
V1
V2
V3
V4
The only thing left to do now is assign Booleans 1032, 1033, 1034 and 1035 to
the appropriate digital I/O points which control V1, V2, V3 and V4. Here is a
summary of all of the digital I/O as assigned:
INFO - A list of Modbus

database addresses and
index numbers is included
in Volume 4 of the Omni
User Manual.
1026 is set by 1834 and

cleared by 1835.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
PHYSICAL I/O
POINT
ASSIGNED TO
BOOLEAN
WIRED TO
SYMBOL
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1700
1700
1700
1700
1032
1033
1034
1035
Valve 1 Fully Open Switch

Valve 1 Actuator
Valve 2 Actuator
Valve 3 Actuator
Valve 4 Actuator
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
V1
V2
V3
V4
Any pulse signal can be latched by using a small program similar to the
following:
BOOLEAN POINT #10xx

25: /1834&/1026
26: /1835&/1025
27:
3-9
Chapter 3
3.3.
User Programmable Variables and

Statements
There are 64 user-programmable floating point variables within the flow

computer numbered 7025 through 7088. The value stored in each of these
variables depends on an associated equation or statement. These statements
are evaluated every 500 msec and the resultant variable values can be displayed
on the LCD display, printed on a report, output to a D-A output, or accessed via
one of the communication ports. Typical uses for the variables and statements
include providing measurement units conversions, special averaging functions,
limit checking and comparisons.
3.3.1.
Variable Statements and Mathematical Operators

Allowed
Each statement can contain up to 3 variables or constants. The following

symbols are used to represent the functions:
Operator
TIP - The order of
precedence is: ABSOLUTE,
POWER, MULTIPLY &
DIVIDE, ADD &
SUBTRACT. Where
operators have the same
precedence the order is left
to right.
ADD
SUBTRACT
MULTIPLY
DIVIDE
CONSTANT
POWER
ABSOLUTE
EQUAL
IF STATEMENT
GOTO STATEMENT
MOVE
COMPARE
Symbol
+
*
/
#
&
$
=
)
G
:
%
Description
Add the two variables or constants
Subtract the RH variable or constant from LH
Multiply the two variables or constants
Divide the two variables or constants
The number following is interpreted as a constant
Raise the LH variable to the power of the RH
Use the abs. unsigned value of variable following
Make the variable on left equal to the expression
Compares the variable to another (What if?)
Go to a different variable
Move statement or result to another variable.
Compare a value with or equal to
To program the user variables proceed as follows: From the Display Mode press
[Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] and the following menu will be displayed:
*** Misc. Setup ***
Password Maint?(Y)
Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station?(Y)
Config Meter "n"
Config PID ? "n"
Config D/A Out"n"
Front Pnl Counters
Program Booleans ?
Program Variables? _
3-10
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

Scroll down to 'Program Variables ? (Y)' and enter [Y]. Assuming that no
variables are as yet programmed, the display shows:
PROG. VARIABLE #70xx
25:
_
26:
27:
Note that the cursor is on the line labeled 25:. At this point enter the variable
equation that will calculate the value of variable 7025.
Example 1:
To provide a variable (7025) which represents Meter Run #1 gross flow rate in
MCF per day' in place of the usual MCF per hour, multiply the 'MCF per hour'
variable (7101) by the constant 24.
25: 7101*#24
26:
27:
bbls/hr x 24 = bbls/day
Example 2:
To provide a variable that represents 'gallons per minute' (7026) we can convert
the 'barrels per hour' variable (7101) to gallons by multiplying by 0.7 (0.7 = 42/60
which is the number of gallons in a barrel / divided by the number of minutes in
an hour).
25: 7101*#24
26: 7101*#.7_
27:
bbls/hr x 0.7 = gal/min
Example 3:
To provide a variable (7028) that represents meter run #1 temperature in
'degrees Celsius' we subtract 32 from the 'degrees Fahrenheit' variable (7105)
and divide the result (7027) by 1.8.
F - 32.0

25: 7101*#24
26: 7101*#.7_
27: 7105-#32
28: 7027/#1.8
(F - 32.0) / 1.8 = C
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
3-11
Chapter 3
Example 4:
Gross barrels within the flow computer are simply flow meter counts divided by
the flow meter 'K-Factor' (pulses per barrel); i.e., gross barrels are not meter
factored. To provide a variable (7029) which represents Meter Run #1 gross
meter factored barrels, multiply the batch gross barrel totalizer (5101) by the
batch flow weighted average meter factor (5114).

25: 7101*#24
26: 7101*#.7_
27: 7105-#32
28: 7027/#1.8
29: 5101*5114

F - 32.0
(F - 32.0) / 1.8 = C
Gross bbls x Mtr Factor
3.3.2.
Using Boolean Variables in Variable Statements
Boolean points used in a programmable variable statement are assigned the

value 1.0 when the Boolean value is TRUE and 0.0 when the Boolean value is
FALSE. By multiplying by a Boolean the user can set a variable to 0.0 when the
Boolean point has a value FALSE.
Example:
Provide a variable (7025) which functions as a 'Report Number'. The report
number which will appear on each 'batch end report' must increment
automatically after each batch and reset to zero at the contract day start hour on
January 1 of each year.
Add 1.0 at Batch End
Clear batch report
number on Jan 1
Contract Hour

25: 7025+1835
26: 1834)7025=#0
27:
Boolean 1835 is true one calculation cycle at the end of a batch. Boolean point
1834 is equal to 1.0 for one calculation cycle on the contract day start hour on
January 1. If statement 1834 is true we reset counter 7025.
3-12
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
3.3.3.
Entering Values Directly into the User Variables
In some cases it may be necessary to enter data directly into a user variable (not
the expression, just the variable). For example, to preset the 'Report Number'
Variable 7025 in the example above we proceed as follows. While in the Display
Mode press [Prog] [Input] [Enter], the following will display:
USER VARIABLE #7025
Value
1234
7025+1835
Current value (can be

changed by the user).
Expression for this
variable (cannot be
changed from this entry).
3.3.4.
Using the Variable Expression as a Prompt
Entering plain text into the expression associated with the variable causes the
computer no problems. It ignores the text and leaves the variable unchanged.
For example:
USER VARIABLE 7025
Value ?
.00018
Enter Lbs to SCF ?
3.3.5.
Password Level Needed to Change the Value of a

User Variable
The first four variables, 7025, 7026, 7027 and 7028 require Level 2 password.
the remaining variables require Level 1.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
3-13
Chapter 3
3.3.6.
Note: See the beginning of
this chapter on how to
program a Boolean
expression if necessary:
Using Variables in Boolean Expressions
In some cases it is also necessary to trigger some type of an event based on the
value of a calculated variable. Boolean variables used in the Boolean
expressions and described in the previous text can have only one of two values,
ON or OFF (TRUE or FALSE). How can the floating point numbers described in
this chapter be used in a Boolean expression? Simply using the fact that a
variable can be either positive (TRUE) or negative (FALSE). Any variable or
floating point can be used in a Boolean expression.
Example:
Provide an alarm and snapshot report which will occur when the absolute
difference in net flow rate between Meter Runs #1 and #2 exceeds 10 bbls/hr,
but only when Meter Run #1 flow rate is greater than 1000 bbls/hr.
Result can be positive or
negative.
Absolute flow difference
minus 10.

30: 7102-7202
31: $7030-#10
32: 7102-#1000
Positive if flow rate is

greater than 1000.
Variable 7031 will be positive (TRUE) if Meter Runs #1 and #2 flow rates differ
by more than 10 bbls/hr. Variable 7032 will be positive (TRUE) when Meter Run
#1 flow rate exceeds 1000 bbls/hr .
User variables 7031 and 7032 shown above must both be positive for the alarm
to be set. In addition, we will require that the condition must exist for 5 minutes to
minimize spurious alarms. The alarm will be activated by Physical I/O Point #02
and we will use Boolean statements 1025 and 1026.
Enter the following Boolean statements (1025 and 1026 used as example only):
True when both are
positive.
Snapshot report when

alarm active.
BOOLEAN POINT #10xx

25: 7031&7032
26: 1719=1002
27:
To complete the example we assign Digital I/O Point #02 (Point # 1002) to 1025
and select a 'delay on' of 3000 to provide a 5 minute delay on activate (3000
ticks = 3000 x 100 msec = 300 seconds). Set the delay off to 0.
3-14
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
3.4.
User Configurable Display Screens
The user can specify up to eight display screen setups. Each display screen can
be programmed to show four variables, each with a descriptive tag. Any variable
within the data base can be selected for display.
Steps needed to configure a display screen are:
INFO - The computer
checks for the user display
key presses first so you
may override an existing
display screen by selecting
the same key press
sequence.
1) Specify a sequence of up to four key presses that will be used to recall the
display. Key presses are identified by the A through Z character on each
key. For each variable (four maximum):
2) Specify the eight character string to be used to identify the variable. Any
valid characters on the keypad can be used.
3) Specify the database index or point number.
4) Specify the display resolution of the variable (i.e., how many digits to the
right of the decimal point).
Should the number exceed the display capacity, the decimal will be automatically
shifted right to counter the overflow. The computer will shift to scientific display
mode if the integer part of the number exceeds +/- 9,999,999.
To configure the user display screens proceed as follows:
From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] and the following
menu will be displayed:
*** Misc. Setup ***
Password Maint?(Y)
Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station?(Y)
Config Meter "n"
Config PID ? "n"
Config D/A Out"n"
Front Pnl Counters
Program Booleans ?
Program Variables?
User Display ? "n" _
Scroll down to 'User Display ? "n" and enter 1 through 8 to specify which
screen you wish to configure.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
3-15
Chapter 3
The screen for Display #1 shows:
USER DISPLAY #1
Key Press
_
Var #1 Tag
Var #1 Index
Var #1 Dec.
Var #2 Tag
Var #2 Index
Var #2 Dec.
Var #3 Tag
Var #3 Index
Var #3 Dec.
Var #4 Tag
Var #4 Index
Var #4 Dec.
Use the 'UP/DOWN' arrows to scroll through the screen. For 'Key Press' enter
the key press sequence (up to 4 keys) that will be used to recall this display.
The keys are identified by the letters A through Z.
Fig. 3-3.
3-16
Keypad Layout - A through Z Keys
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

Example:
You wish to recall 'User Display #1' by pressing [Gross] [Meter] [1], select the
key sequence [A] [L] [O] as shown below.
USER DISPLAY #1
Key Press A L O
Var #1 Tag
Var #1 Index
Var #1 Dec.
Continue configuring User Display #1 by entering the description tag, index
number and decimal position required for each variable.
Press [Gross] [Meter]

[1]
Description Tag
Index # for Meter #1 Flow
Rate
Display XXXX.XX
Description Tag
Index # for Meter #1
Batch Barrels
Display XXXX.XX
Description Tag
Preset Count
Display XXXX.XX
Description Tag
USER DISPLAY #1
Key Press
A L O
Var #1 Tag
M1 MSCF
Var #1 Index
7101
Var #1 Dec.
2
Var #2 Tag M1 MMSCF
Var #2 Index
5101
Var #2 Dec.
0
Var #3 Tag M1 PRSET
Var #3 Index
5116
Var #3 Dec.
0
Var #4 Tag M1 MFACT
Var #4 Index
5114
Var #4 Dec.
4
Var #4 Tag _

Batch F.W.A. M/F
Display XXXX.XX
Description Tag
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
3-17
Chapter 3
In the preceding example, User Display #1 is used to display Meter Run #1:
Variable #1
Flow rate in MSCF per Hour
Variable #2
Accumulated Batch MSCF
Variable #3
Meter Factor for the Batch
Variable #4
Not Used
The screen is recalled by pressing [Gross] [Meter] [1] [Enter] and displays:
USER DISPLAY # 1
M1 MSCF
1234.56
M1 MMSCF
123456789
M1 MFACT
1.0000
3-18
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
4. Flow Equations and Algorithms for U.S.

Customary Units (Revision 23.71+)
4.1.
Flow Rate Units - For
practical reasons, the Omni
flow computer displays
calculated flow rates in
thousands of units per hour,
in comparison to the
standards (AGA and API).
Therefore, the flow
equations must be divided
by 1000.
Flow Rate for Gas Differential Pressure

Devices (Orifice, Nozzle and Venturi)
The practical flow equations expressed in this section are based on the following
standards:
O
American Gas Association Report N 3: Orifice Metering of Natural Gas and

other Related Hydrocarbon Fluids, Part 3: Natural Gas Applications (AGA 3)
O
American Gas Association Report N 5: Fuel Gas Energy Metering
(AGA 5)
O
American Gas Association Report N 8: Compressibility Factors of Natural
Gas and Other Related Hydrocarbon Gases (AGA 8)
American Petroleum Institute: Manual of Petroleum Measurement
Standards, Chapter 14: Natural Gas Fluids Measurement; Section 3:
Concentric, Square-Edged Orifice Meters; Part 1: General Equations and
Uncertainty Guidelines (API MPMS 14.3.1)
American Society of Mechanical Engineers: Measurement of Fluid Flow in
Pipes Using Orifice, Nozzle, and Venturi (ASME MFC-3M)
4.1.1.
Mass Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions Qm

(Klbm/hr)
Qm =
4.1.2.
[N
C d E v Y1 d 2
1000
Qm
f
Volumetric Net Flow Rate at Base Conditions Qb

(MSCF/hr)
Qb =
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volumetric Gross Flow Rate at Flowing

Conditions Qv (MCF/hr)
Qv =
4.1.3.
Qm
b
4-1
Chapter 4
Flow Equations and Algorithms for U.S. Customary Units (Revision 23.71+)
4.1.4.
Energy Flow Rate at Base Conditions Qe

(MMBTU/hr)
Qe =
4.1.5.
( Q b HV )
1000
Nomenclature
The following symbols are used in the flow rate equations. Some of these require
further elaboration or calculation, which can be found in the indicated standards.
Qm = mass flow rate at flowing (actual) conditions for gas differential
pressure flowmeters, in thousands of pounds mass per hour
(Klbm/hr)
Qv = volume (gross) flow rate at flowing (actual) conditions for gas
differential pressure flowmeters, in thousands of cubic feet per
hour (MCF/hr)
Qb = volume (net) flow rate at base (standard/reference) conditions for
gas differential pressure flowmeters, in thousands of standard
cubic feet per hour (MSCF/hr)
Qe = energy flow rate at base (standard/reference) conditions for gas
differential pressure flowmeters, in millions of British thermal
units per hour (MMBTU/hr)
N1 = factor of combined numerical constants and unit conversions
= 359.072
Cd = coefficient of discharge (dimensionless see 5.1.8 this chapter)
Ev = velocity of approach factor (dimensionless see 5.1.7 this
chapter)
Y1 = fluid expansion factor referenced to upstream static pressure
(dimensionless see 5.1.9 this chapter)
d = orifice plate bore or nozzle/Venturi throat diameter at flowing
temperature, in inches (see 5.1.6 this chapter)
f = fluid density at upstream flowing conditions (actual temperature

and pressure), in pounds mass per cubic foot (lbm/CF)
= differential pressure, in inches of water at 60F, which is the static
pressure difference measured between the upstream and
downstream flange tap holes or in the throat taps.
b = fluid density at base conditions (standard/reference temperature

and pressure), in pounds mass per cubic foot (lbm/CF)
HV = volumetric heating value at reference conditions, in British
thermal units per standard cubic foot (BTU/SCF)
4-2
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
4.1.6.
Diameters and Diameter Correlations
The various orifice meter flow equations require calculating the diameters of the
orifice plate bore or of the nozzle/Venturi throat, the meter tube (internally), and
the beta ratio. These calculated diameters are also used to calculate the pipe
Reynolds number, which is used in calculating discharge coefficients.
Orifice Plate Bore or Nozzle / Venturi Throat Diameter d (inches)

The calculated diameter (in inches) of the orifice plate bore or of the throat of the
nozzle or Venturi tube at flowing temperature is used in the flow equations to
calculate flow rates and the pipe Reynolds number. It is the internal diameter of
the orifice plate measuring aperture (bore) or throat computed at flowing
temperature, and is defined as follows:
d = dr 1 + 1 Tf - Tr
Where:
temperature, in inches
dr = reference orifice plate bore or nozzle/Venturi throat diameter at
reference temperature, in inches
1 = linear coefficient of thermal expansion of the orifice plate or
nozzle/Venturi throat material, in/inF
Tf = temperature of the fluid at flowing conditions, in F
Tr1 = reference temperature for the orifice plate bore or nozzle/Venturi
throat diameter, in F
Upstream Meter Tube (Pipe) Internal Diameter D (inches)

The calculated upstream internal meter tube diameter (in inches) at flowing
temperature is used in the flow equations to calculate the diameter ratio and the
pipe Reynolds number. It is the inside diameter of the upstream section of the
meter tube computed at flowing temperature, and is defined as follows:
D = D r 1 + 2 Tf - Tr2
)]
Where:
D = upstream internal meter tube diameter or upstream diameter of
classical Venturi tube at flowing temperature, in inches
Dr = reference meter tube internal diameter at reference temperature,
in inches
2 = linear coefficient of thermal expansion of the meter tube material,
in in/inF
Tf = temperature of the fluid at flowing conditions, in F
Tr
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
= reference temperature for the meter tube internal diameter, in F
4-3
Chapter 4
Diameter (Beta) Ratio
Dimensionless Values Both the diameter (beta)

ratio and pipe Reynolds
number are dimensionless;
however, consistent units
must be used.
The diameter ratio (or beta ratio) is defined as the calculated orifice plate bore or
nozzle/Venturi throat diameter divided by the calculated meter tube internal
diameter:
= d
Where:
D = upstream meter tube (pipe) internal diameter at flowing
Pipe Reynolds Number RD and Rd

The pipe Reynolds number is used in the equation for calculating the coefficient
of discharge for differential pressure flowmeters. It is a correlating parameter
used to represent the change in the orifice plate, nozzle or Venturi tube
coefficient of discharge with reference to either the meter tube diameter (RD) or
the bore (throat) diameter (Rd), and the fluid mass flow rate (its velocity through
the orifice), the fluid density, and the fluid viscosity.
Pipe Reynolds Number Referenced to the Meter Tube Diameter RD
The following equation applies to orifice, nozzle and Venturi differential pressure
flow metering devices, except for pipe-tapped orifice flowmeters.
RD =
48 qm
D
Where:
RD = pipe Reynolds number referenced to the upstream internal meter
tube diameter or upstream diameter of a classical Venturi tube
qm = mass flow rate at flowing (actual) conditions for differential
pressure flowmeters, in lbm/sec
= universal constant
= 3.14159
= absolute (dynamic) viscosity of fluid at flowing conditions, in
lbm/ftsec
D = upstream internal meter tube diameter or upstream diameter of a
classical Venturi tube at flowing temperature, in inches
4-4
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
Pipe Reynolds Number Referenced to the Bore or Throat Diameter Rd

The following equation applies only to pipe-tapped orifice meters.
Rd =
48 qm
d
Where:
Rd = pipe Reynolds number referenced to the orifice plate bore or
nozzle/Venturi throat diameter
qm = mass flow rate at flowing (actual) conditions for differential
pressure flowmeters, lbm/sec
= 3.14159
lbm/ftsec
4.1.7.
Dimensionless Values The calculated velocity of
approach factor is
dimensionless; however,
consistent units must be
used.
Velocity of Approach Factor Ev
The velocity of approach factor is used in the differential pressure flowmeter

equations to calculate the flow rate. It relates the velocity of the flowing fluid in
the flowmeter approach section (upstream meter tube) to the fluid velocity in the
orifice plate, nozzle or Venturi tube. The velocity of approach factor is defined by
the following expression:
Ev =
1
1 - 4
Where:
Ev = velocity of approach factor
= diameter (beta) ratio (see 5.1.6 this chapter)
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
4-5
Chapter 4
4.1.8.
Dimensionless Values The calculated coefficient of
discharge is dimensionless;
must be used.
Discharge Coefficients Cd
The equations for the coefficient of discharge (Cd) have been determined from
test data and correlated as a function of the diameter ratio (), the meter tube
diameter (D), and the pipe Reynolds number (RD). It is used in the flow rate
equations.
Coefficient of Discharge for Orifice Flowmeters

With Flange Taps (RG Equation) Cd(FT)
The Reader-Harris/Gallager (RG) equation for concentric, square-edged, flangetapped orifice flowmeter coefficient of discharge [Cd(FT)] is a function of the
orifice geometry and of a specified pipe Reynolds number, and is defined as
follows:
0.7
6
C (FT) + 0.000511 10
R
i
D
C d (FT) =
0.8
19000
+ 0.0210 + 0.0049
RD
0.35
4 10
RD
Where:
Cd(FT) = coefficient of discharge at a specified pipe Reynolds number for
flange-tapped orifice flowmeters
Ci(FT) = coefficient of discharge at an infinite pipe Reynolds number for
flange-tapped orifice flowmeters
= Ci(CT) + Tap Term
Where:
Ci(CT) = coefficient of discharge at an infinite pipe Reynolds
number for corner-tapped orifice flowmeters
0.5961 + 0.0291 2 - 0.2290 8
=
+ 0.003 (1- ) max ( 2.8 - D, 0.0
)]
Tap Term = Upstrm + Dnstrm
0.0433 + 0.0712 e-8.5L1
0.8
Upstrm =
19000
1 - 0.23
RD
0.0116 2 L 2
1-
Dnstrm =
11
.
1 - 0.14
4-6
0.1145 e-6.0L1
4

1- 4
2 L2
- 0.52
1-
19000
RD
0.8
13
.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

Where:
e = Napierian constant = 2.71828
L1 = dimensionless
location
correction
for
upstream
tap
= 1/D
= L2
L2 = dimensionless correction for downstream tap
location
D = upstream internal meter tube diameter or
upstream diameter of a classical Venturi tube at
flowing temperature, in inches (see 5.1.6 this
chapter)
tube diameter (see 5.1.6 this chapter)
With Corner Taps Cd(CT)
C d (CT) = 0.5959 + 0.0312 2.1 - 0.184 8 + 91.71 2.5 (RD )
0.75
Where:
Cd(CT) = coefficient of discharge at a specified pipe Reynolds number for
orifice flowmeters with corner taps
With D and D/2 Taps Cd(DT)
-1
2.1
- 0.184 8 + 0.039 4 1- 4
0.5959 + 0.0312
C d (DT) =
0
.
75
3
2.5
- 0.01584 + 91.71
R
(
)
D
Where:
Cd(DT) = coefficient of discharge at a specified pipe Reynolds number for
orifice flowmeters with D and D/2 taps
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
4-7
Chapter 4
With Pipe Taps Cd(PT)
C d (PT) = C i (PT ) 1+

875
d 830 - 5000 + 9000 2 - 4200 3 75 +

Rd
Where:
Cd(PT) = coefficient of discharge at a specified pipe Reynolds number for
orifice flowmeters with pipe taps
Ci(PT) = coefficient of discharge at an infinite pipe Reynolds number for
orifice flowmeters with pipe taps
=
Ce (PT)
875
15 830 - 5000 + 90002 - 42003 75 +
1+
d 10 6
( )
Where:
Ce(PT) = coefficient of discharge for orifice flowmeters with pipe
taps when the pipe Reynolds number Rd is equal to
6
[d(10 )/15]
0.0182
0.06 2
+ 0.44
0.5925 +
D
D
0.225 5
14
= + 0.935 +
+ 1.35
1.43
2
+ 0.5 ( 0.25 - )
D
D = upstream internal meter tube diameter or upstream diameter of a

classical Venturi tube at flowing temperature, in inches (see 5.1.6
this chapter)
d = orifice plate bore diameter at flowing temperature, in inches (see
5.1.6 this chapter)
Rd = pipe Reynolds number referenced to the diameter of the orifice
plate bore (see 5.1.6 this chapter)
4-8
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
Coefficient of Discharge for ASME Flow Nozzles Cd(FN)

Dimensionless Values The calculated coefficient of
discharge is dimensionless;
must be used.
10 6
C d (FN) = 0.9975 - 0.00653
RD
0.5
Where:
Cd(FN) = coefficient of discharge at a specified pipe Reynolds number for
ASME flow nozzles
Rd = pipe Reynolds number referenced to the diameter of the orifice
plate bore (see 5.1.6 this chapter)
Coefficient of Discharge for Classical Venturi Tubes

With Rough Cast / Fabricated Convergent Section Cd(VTR/F)
Cd(VTR/F) = 0.984
When:
4 inches
48 inches
0.3
0.75
2 x 10
RD 6 x 10
Where:
Cd(VTR/F) = discharge coefficient for classical Venturi tube with a rough cast
or fabricated convergent section
RD = pipe Reynolds number (see 5.1.6 this chapter)
With Machined Convergent Section Cd(VTM)
Cd(VTM) = 0.995
When:
2 inches
10 inches
0.3
0.75
2 x 10
RD 2 x 10
Where:
Cd(VTM) = discharge coefficient for a classical Venturi tube with a machined
convergent section
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
4-9
Chapter 4
4.1.9.
Expansion Factor
Referenced to Upstream
Pressure Y1 - The flow
rate equations for
differential pressure flow
metering devices always
require using the expansion
factor referenced to
upstream pressure (Y1),
even when the static
pressure is measured at
downstream taps.
Fluid Expansion Factor Referenced to Upstream

Pressure Y1
The fluid expansion factor (Y) is used to take into account the compressibility of
the fluid in calculation the flow rate. This coefficient is determined from
correlating the diameter ratio (), the differential pressure (), the flowing
isentropic exponent (), and the absolute static pressure () at upstream (Y1)
conditions. This factor is used in the mass flow rate equation for differential
pressure metering devices and can be calculated using the following
expressions:
Upstream Expansion Factor for Orifice Plates

With Flange / Corner / D & D/2 Taps
Dimensionless Values The calculated fluid

expansion factor is
used.
Y1 = 1 -
( 0.41 + 0.35 ) x
4
Where:
Y1 = fluid expansion factor based on the absolute static pressure at
the upstream tap
x1
= upstream acoustic ratio
x1 = ratio of differential pressure to absolute static pressure measured

at the upstream tap
When static pressure is measured at upstream flange tap holes:
x1 =
N3f1
When static pressure is measured at downstream flange tap holes:

x1 =
N3f2 +
Where:
= orifice differential pressure, in inches of water at 60F
N3 = unit conversion factor
= 27.707
f1 = absolute static pressure at the upstream tap
f2 = absolute static pressure at the downstream tap
= isentropic exponent
4-10
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

With Pipe Taps
x
Y1 = 1 - 0.333 + 1.145 2 + 0.7 5 + 12 13 1

Where:
Y1 = fluid expansion factor based on the absolute static pressure at
the upstream tap
x1
= upstream acoustic ratio
x1 = ratio of differential pressure to absolute static pressure measured

at the upstream tap
x1 =
N3f1
Where:
= orifice differential pressure, in inches of water at 60F
N3 = unit conversion factor
= 27.707
f1 = absolute static pressure at the upstream tap
Upstream Expansion Factor for ASME Flow Nozzles and Classical

Venturi Tubes
Y1 =
1 - 4
2/
1 - ( -1)/

- 1
1 -
1 - 4 2/
Where:
Y1 = fluid expansion factor at upstream (pressure) conditions
= pressure ratio
=
1
2
Where:
1 = absolute upstream static pressure of the fluid
2 = absolute downstream static pressure of the fluid
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
4-11
Chapter 4
4.2.
4.2.1.
Flow Rate for Gas Turbine Flowmeters

Conditions QV (MCF/hr)
QV =
4.2.2.
Pulses
3600
KF

(Klbm/hr)
Q m = Q V f MF
4.2.3.

(MSCF/hr)
Qb = Q V
4.2.4.
Energy Flow Rate at Base Conditions Qe

(MMBTU/hr)
Qe =
4-12
f
MF
b
(Q b
HV )
1000
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
4.2.5.
Nomenclature
QV = volumetric gross flow rate at flowing conditions for gas turbine
flowmeters, in thousands of cubic feet per hour (MCF/hr)
Qm = mass flow rate at flowing conditions for gas turbine flowmeters, in

thousands of pounds mass per hour (Klb/hr)
Qb = volumetric net flow rate at base conditions for gas turbine
flowmeters, in thousands of standard cubic feet per hour
(MSCF/hr)
turbine flowmeters, in millions of British thermal units per
standard cubic foot (MMBTU/SCF)
Pulses = number of pulses emitted from the flowmeter pulse train per
second.
f = fluid density at flowing conditions (actual temperature and

pressure), in pounds mass per cubic foot (lbm/CF)
b = reference density at base conditions (standard/reference
temperature and pressure), in pounds mass per cubic foot
(lbm/CF)
KF = K factor, in pulses per thousand cubic feet (Pulses/MCF)
MF = meter factor (dimensionless)
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
4-13
Chapter 4
4.3.
Densities and Other Properties of Gas
4.3.1.
O
AGA Report N 8
Documentation
References - Detailed
information on
computations performed in
conformance to the different
editions of this standard can
be found in the following
O
AGA Report N 8 versions:
Second Edition, July
nd
1994: 2 Printing,
O
Catalog N XQ9212
Second Edition,
November 1992:
O
Catalog N XQ9212
December 1985:
O
Catalog N XQ1285
AGA Report NO 8: Compressibility for Natural Gas

and Other Related Hydrocarbon Gases
Omni flow computer firmware has been programmed in conformance with the
December 1985, November 1992, and July 1994 editions of the American Gas
O
Association Report N 8 (AGA 8). This standard provides computation
methodology for compressibility and supercompressibility factors and densities
of natural gas and other hydrocarbon gases.
Of the three editions, the July 1994 edition is considered the most reliable,
accurate and complete. However, due to contract requirements or other
conditions, some users may want to apply an earlier AGA 8 version.
The December 1985 edition of AGA 8 incorporates improvements to the
accuracy of computations compressibility and supercompressibility factors
beyond the capabilities of AGAs Manual for the Determination of
O
Supercompressibility Factors for Natural Gas (December 1962; Catalog N
L00304). Other improvements included in this version were the expansion in the
ranges of gas composition, temperature and pressure, and applications to gas
thermodynamic properties.
A very significant improvement to this standard is apparent in the AGA 8
November 1992 edition. Major changes incorporate more precise computations
of compressibility factors and densities of natural gas and related hydrocarbon
gases, calculation uncertainty estimations and upgraded FORTRAN computer
program listings. Other improvements include enhanced equations of state,
more accurate calculations for rich gases based on new velocity of sound data,
revised correlation methodology.
The current AGA 8 manual was updated in July 1994 for the purpose of
correcting typographical errors found in the previous edition, improving the
computer programs, and achieving consistency with GPA 2172-94 and the 1992
O
edition of AGA Report N 3, Part 3.
For reference purposes and as a comparison and contrast exposition of these
AGA 8 editions, the following is a brief presentation of some aspects applied by
the Omni flow computer, which include:
Types of Gases
Mole Percent Ranges of Gas Mixture Characteristics
Natural Gas Compound Identification Codes
Methods for Gas Mixture Characterization
AGA 8 1994/1992 Methods
AGA 8 1985 Methods
4-14
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

Types of Gases
The AGA 8 report is intended for natural gases and other related hydrocarbons
gases. Omni flow computer programs include calculations and other information
O
from the three latest editions of the AGA Report N 8 at the time of firmware
release. The following table lists the type of gases, the corresponding
identification codes assigned to each gas type in the computer program, and the
mole % range of gas mixture characteristics contained in Omni firmware that
have been taken from AGA 8 1994, 1992 and 1985 editions.
Comparative Table of Natural Gas Types, Identification Codes

and Mole Percent Ranges
o
(AGA Report N 8 Editions Applicable to Omni Flow Computers)
Note:
# The normal range is

considered to be zero for
these compounds, as
follows:
AGA 8 1994: oxygen &
argon
AGA 8 1992: hydrogen,
carbon monoxide,
oxygen & argon
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
1994 / 1992
TYPE OF
GAS
MIXTURE
ID
CODE
Methane
Nitrogen
Carbon Dioxide
Ethane
Propane
Water Vapor
Hydrogen Sulfide
Hydrogen
Carbon Monoxide
Oxygen
Iso-Butane
Normal Butane
Iso-Pentane
Normal Pentane
Normal Hexane
Normal Heptane
Normal Octane
Normal Nonane
Normal Decane
Helium
Argon
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
1985
MOLE % RANGE
NORMAL
EXPANDED
45.0 to 100.0
0 to 50.0
0 to 30.0
0 to 10.0
0 to 4.0
0 to 0.5
0 to 0.02
0 to 10.0 / #
0 to 3.0 / #
#
0 to 100.0
0 to 100.0
0 to 100.0
0 to 100.0
0 to 12.0
0 to Dew Point
0 to 100.0
0 to 100.0
0 to 3.0
0 to 21.0
0 to 1.0
0 to 6.0
(Total Butanes)
(Total Butanes)
0 to 0.3
0 to 4.0
(Total Pentanes)
(Total Pentanes)
0 to 0.2
0 to Dew Point
(Hexane Plus Heavier (Hexane Plus Heavier

Hydrocarbons)
Hydrocarbons)
0 to 0.2
#
0 to 3.0
0 to 1.0
ID
CODE
MOLE %
RANGE
6
1
2
7
8
4
3
20
19
18
10
9
12
11
13
14
15
16
17
5
N/A
50.0 to 100.0
0 to 50.0
0 to 50.0
0 to 20.0
0 to 5.0
0 to 1.0
0 to 1.0
0 to 1.0
0 to 1.0
0 to 1.0
0 to 3.0
(Butanes)
0 to 2.0
(Pentanes)
0 to 1.0
(Hexane Plus Heavier
Hydrocarbons)
0 to 1.0
0 to 1.0
4-15
Chapter 4
O
AGA REPORT N 8 - 1994/1992 EDITIONS:

Three methods of characterization of a gas mixture from the AGA 8 1994/1992
editions are available for use on the Omni Flow Computers: the Detailed Method
and the Gross Characterization Methods (#1 & #2).
The Detailed Characterization Method
The gas phase pressure-temperature-density behavior of natural gas mixtures is
accurately described by the detailed characterization method, for a wide range of
conditions. This behavior can also be accurately describe for the pure
components methane, ethane, carbon dioxide, nitrogen and hydrogen and binary
mixtures of these components. A low density correlation was developed for
propane and heavier hydrocarbons, and binary mixtures of these components
with methane, ethane, nitrogen and carbon dioxide. The uncertainty of
compressibility factors and density calculations for natural gases from production
separators, which can contain mole percentages of hexanes plus heavier
hydrocarbons greater than 1%, is reduced by this method. Correlations were
developed to reduce the calculation uncertainty of the following:
Natural gases containing hydrogen sulfide (sour gas): correlations of the
density behavior of pure hydrogen sulfide and binary mixtures of hydrogen
sulfide with methane, ethane, nitrogen and carbon
Natural gases containing water vapor (wet gas): second virial correlations
for water and binary mixtures of water with methane, ethane, nitrogen and
carbon dioxide
Gross Characterization Methods
The following table identifies the nominal ranges of gas characteristics for which
these methods are used:
Notes:
* Reference conditions:
Combustion at 60F,
14.73 psia: Density at
60F. 14.73 psia.
** Reference conditions:
Combustion at 25C,
0.101325 MPa: Density
at 0C, 0.101325 MPa
RANGE
QUANTITY
Relative Density
Gross Heating Value *
Gross Heating Value **
Mole % Methane
Mole % Nitrogen
Mole % Carbon Dioxide
Mole % Ethane
Mole % Propane
Mole % Butanes
Mole % Pentanes
Mole % Hexanes Plus
Mole % Helium
0.56 to 0.87
477 to 1150 Btu/scf
18.7 to 45.1 MJ/m3
45.2 to 98.3
0.3 to 53.6
0.04 to 28.94
0.24 to 9.53
0.02 to 3.57
0.01 to 1.08
0.002 to 0.279
0.0005 to 0.1004
0 to 0.158
Method #1: Utilizes the volumetric gross heating value (HV), relative density,
mole fraction CO2.
Method #2: Utilizes Relative Density, mole fraction N2, mole fraction CO2.
4-16
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

O
AGA REPORT N 8 - 1985 EDITION:

Six methods of characterization of a gas mixture from the AGA 8 1985 edition
are available for use on the Omni Flow Computers: the primary method and five
alternate methods.
Primary Characterization Method
The primary method is the most accurate method in this AGA 8 version for
characterization of natural gas, for computations using the equation of state for
compressibility factor. This method consists of a complete compositional
analysis (the mole fractions of all components) of a natural gas mixture.
Alternate Characterization Methods
An alternate characterization method is used when a complete compositional
analysis for a natural gas is not available. One of the five alternate methods can
be used to estimate the mole fractions of methane and other important
hydrocarbons in the natural gas, as well as diluents other than carbon dioxide
and nitrogen. These characterization methods do not include water vapor or
hydrogen components.
Various combinations of the following quantities are utilized:
Real Gas Relative Density (Specific Gravity) (G), at 60F and 14.73 psia
Real Gas Gross Heating Value per Unit Volume (HV), at 60F and 14.73
3
psia (BTU/ft )
Mole Fraction of Carbon Dioxide [x(CO2)]
Mole Fraction of Nitrogen [x(N2)]
Mole Fraction of Methane [x(CH4)]
These alternate methods yield estimates of the mole fraction of the following:
Methane
Ethane
Propane
Normal Butane
Iso-Butane
Total Pentanes
Total Hexanes plus Heavier Hydrocarbon Gases
Total Diluents other than Nitrogen and Carbon Dioxide
The five alternate characterization methods are:
(1) The Gravity, Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen Method
(2) The Gravity, Heating Value, Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen Method
(3) The Gravity, Heating Value, Carbon Dioxide Method
(4) The Heating Value, Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen Method
(5) The Gravity, Methane, Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen Method
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
4-17
Chapter 4
4.3.2.
r
ASME 1967 Steam Equation
The Omni flow computer applies the ASME 1967 steam equation. This equation
is a closed-form solution (non-iterative), developed using reduced properties;
pressure (r) and temperature parameters (Tr), to define the reduced volume (r)
of steam.
4.3.3.
Acknowledgement - The
implementation of the
Keenan & Keyes steam
tables was based on the
work of Don Kyle of Kyle
Engineering, Inc.
Water Density
Water density calculations performed by the Omni flow computer are derived
from the fundamental equation which expresses the characteristic function ,
known as the Helmholtz free energy, in terms of the independent variables
density () and temperature (T). This fundamental equation from which water
density is derived has been obtained from: Joseph H. Keenan, Frederick G.
Keyes, et al., Steam Tables: Thermodynamic Properties of Water Including
Vapor, Liquid and Solid Phases (John Wiley & Sons, 1969), page 134.
4.3.4.
NBS Density (lb/CF), Viscosity Isentropic

Exponent, Sound Velocity, and Enthalpy
The NBS Technical Note 1048 (Issued July 1982) is used to calculate density
3
(lb/ft ), absolute viscosity (C.P.) isentropic exponent, sound velocity, and
enthalpy (BTU/lb) for the following gases:
4-18
Argon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Hydrogen
Ethylene
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
4.3.5.
Density and Specific

Gravity Values
Determined from
Densitometer and
Gravitometer Frequency
Signals - The equations
used to determine the
density and specific gravity
via gas density and specific
gravity transducers are
provided by the respective
manufacturers.
Density and Relative Density (Specific Gravity)

Calculated from Digital Densitometer and
Gravitometer Output Frequency
The calculations expressed in this section are performed by the Omni to

determine the density from frequency signals received from the following third
party densitometers and gravitometers:
Sarasota / Peek
UGC
Solartron
Sarasota Density (lb/CF)

Sarasota density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a
Sarasota densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as
shown below:
2D ' t - t '
1 + K t - t '
0
0
0
D c = DCF

'
'
2x t 0
t0
Where:
Dc = corrected density
DCF = Density correction factor
Note:
* D0 must be expressed
in pounds per cubic foot
(lb/CF).
D0 = calibration constant, in mass/volume*

t = densitometer oscillation period in microseconds (sec)
t0 = calibration constant, in microseconds
t0' = Tcoef x (Tf - Tcal) + Pcoef x (Pf - Pcal) + t0
K = spool calibration constant
Tf = flowing temperature, in F
Tcoef = temperature coefficient, in sec/F
Pf = flowing pressure, in psig
Pcoef = pressure coefficient, in sec/psig
Pcal = calibration pressure, in psig
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
4-19
Chapter 4
UGC Density (lb/CF)

Gravity Values
Determined from
Densitometer and
manufacturers.
UGC density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a UGC

densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as shown
below:
UNCORRECTED DENSITY:
D = K 0 + (K 1 t) + K 2 t 2
Where:
D = uncorrected density, in lb/CF
K0
K 1 = calibration constants of density probe, entered via the keypad

K 2
t = densitometer oscillation time period, in microseconds (sec)
CORRECTED DENSITY:
K 3 D + K 2 D + K 1 f - c
D c = DCF
+ D
+ K D2 + K D + K
T
T
f
t2
t1
c
t3
Where:
Dc = corrected density, in lb/CF
DCF = density correction factor
D = uncorrected density, in lb/CF
K 1
K 2 = pressure constants
K 3
= flowing pressure, in psig
c = calibration pressure, in psig
K t1
K t2 = temperature constants
K t3
T = flowing temperature, in F
Tc = calibration temperature, in F
4-20
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

Solartron
Density (kg/m3)
INFO - For Solartron gas

density transducers, it is
NOT necessary to convert
the calibration sheet from
metric to US customary
units.
Solartron density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a

Solartron frequency densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure
corrections as detailed below.
D = K 0 + (K 1 t) + K 2 t 2
Where:
D = uncorrected density, in kg/m
K0
3
K 1 = calibration constants supplied by Solartron, in kg/m and C
K 2
TEMPERATURE CORRECTED DENSITY:
DT = D
[1 +
K 18 (TF - 20 )
] + [ K 19 (TF
- 20)
TF + 273
Where:
DT = temperature corrected density, in kg/m
D = uncompensated density, in kg/m
K 18
= calibration constants supplied by Solartron
K 19
TF = Temperature in C
ACTUAL DENSITY:
Da = DT 1 +
K3
(D T + K 4 )
K 5
Where:
Da = actual density, in kg/m
DT = temperature compensated density, in kg/m
K3
K 4 = calibration constants supplied by Solartron

K 5
G =
Gas Specific Gravity

Ratio of Specific Heats
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
4-21
Chapter 4
Solartron
NT 3096 Gravitometer: Relative Density (Specific
Gravity)/Output Frequency Relationship

Gravity Values
Determined from
Densitometer and
manufacturers.
The relationship between the gravitometer output frequency and the specific
gravity is given by the following:
G = K0 + K2 T
Where:
G = specific gravity of a gas determined from the transducer
frequency signal
T = periodic time of the sample gas specific gravity at stable
temperature and at the selected reference chamber pressure, in
microseconds (sec)
=
G - K0
K2
K0 = calibration constant
=
G Y - K 2 TY 2
=
GX - G Y
TX - TY
GX = specific gravity of calibration (sample) gas X
GY = specific gravity of calibration (sample) gas Y
TX = periodic time of a known calibration (sample) gas of X specific
gravity under stable operating conditions, in sec
TY = periodic time of a known calibration (sample) gas of Y specific
4-22
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
5. Flow Equations and Algorithms for S.I.

(Metric) Units (Revision 27.71+)
5.1.
Flow Rate Units - For
practical reasons. the Omni
flow computer displays
calculated flow rates in
thousands of units per hour,
in comparison to the
standards (ISO). Therefore,
the flow equations must be
either divided or multiplied
by 1000.
Flow Rate for Gas Differential Pressure

Devices (Orifice, Nozzle and Venturi)
The practical flow equations expressed below are based on the International
Standard ISO 5167-1: Measurement of Fluid Flow by Means of Pressure
Differential Devices, Part 1: Orifice Plates, Nozzles and Venturi Tubes Inserted in
Circular Cross-section Conduits Running Full.
5.1.1.

(ton/hr)
K1
Qm =
C
1-
d2
1000
Where:
1
= velocity of approach factor = Ev
1 - 4
Therefore also:
Qm =
5.1.2.
K 1 C E v d 2
1000

Conditions Qv (m3/hr)
Qv =
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Qm
1000
f
5-1
Chapter 5
Flow Equations and Algorithms for S.I. (Metric) Units (Revision 27.71+)
5.1.3.

(m3/hr)
Qb =
5.1.4.
Energy Flow Rate at Base Conditions Qe (GJ/hr)

Qe =
5.1.5.
Qm
1000
b
( Qb
HV
1000
Nomenclature
The following symbols are used in the flow rate equations. Some of these require
further elaboration or calculation, which can be found on the following pages in
this chapter and in the indicated standards.
Qm = mass flow rate at flowing (actual) conditions for differential
pressure flowmeters, in tons per hour (ton/hr)
Qv = volume (gross) flow rate at flowing (actual) conditions for
3
differential pressure flowmeters, in cubic meters per hour (m /hr)
Qb = volume (net) flow rate at base (standard/reference) conditions for
3
differential pressure flowmeters, in cubic meters per hour (m /hr)
Qe = energy flow rate at base (standard/reference) conditions for
differential pressure flowmeters, in gigajoule per hour (GJ/hr)
K1 = factor of combined numerical constants and unit conversions
= 0.005654862
C = coefficient of discharge (dimensionless see 6.1.7 this chapter)
= diameter (beta) ratio (dimensionless see 6.1.6 this chapter)
Ev = velocity of approach factor (dimensionless) = 1
1 - 4
= fluid expansion factor (dimensionless see 6.1.8 this chapter)

d = orifice plate bore (throat) diameter at flowing temperature
conditions, in meters (see 6.1.6 this chapter)
= differential pressure, in Pascals (Pa), which is the static pressure
difference measured between the upstream and downstream tap
holes (or in the throat of a Venturi tube).
= fluid density at flowing conditions (actual temperature and

3
pressure), in kilograms per cubic meter (kg/m )
b = fluid density at base conditions (standard/reference temperature
3
and pressure), in kilograms per cubic meter (kg/m )
5-2
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
5.1.6.
Diameters and Diameter Correlations
The various flow equations require calculating the diameters of the orifice plate
bore or nozzle/Venturi throat, the meter tube or pipe (internally), and the
diameter (beta) ratio. These calculated diameters are also used to calculate the
pipe Reynolds number, which is used in calculating discharge coefficients.
Orifice Plate Bore or Nozzle / Venturi Throat Diameter d (mm)

The calculated diameter (in millimeters) of the orifice plate bore or of the throat
of the nozzle or Venturi tube at flowing temperature is used in the flow equations
to calculate flow rates and the pipe Reynolds number. It is the internal diameter
of the orifice plate measuring aperture (bore), or the throat of the nozzle or the
Venturi tube, computed at flowing temperature. It is defined as follows:
d = dr 1 + 1 T f - Tr 1
)]
Where:
d = orifice plate bore (or nozzle/Venturi throat) diameter at flowing
temperature, in mm
dr = reference orifice plate bore diameter or throat at reference
temperature, in mm
1 = linear coefficient of thermal expansion of the orifice plate or
nozzle/Venturi throat material, in mm/mmC
T = temperature of the fluid at flowing conditions, in C
Tr
= reference temperature for the orifice plate bore or nozzle/Venturi

throat diameter, in C
Meter Tube (Pipe) Internal Diameter D (mm)

The calculated internal diameter of the meter tube (in millimeters) at flowing
temperature is used in the flow equations to calculate the diameter ratio and the
pipe Reynolds number. It is the inside diameter of the upstream section of the
meter tube computed at flowing temperature, and is defined as:
D = D r 1 + 2 (Tf - Tr2 )
Where:
D = meter tube internal diameter at flowing temperature, in mm

Dr = reference meter tube internal diameter at reference temperature,
in mm
2 = linear coefficient of thermal expansion of the meter tube material,
in mm/mmC
Tf = temperature of the fluid at flowing conditions, in C
Tr
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
= reference temperature for the meter tube internal diameter, in C
5-3
Chapter 5
Diameter (Beta) Ratio
Dimensionless Values Both the diameter (beta)

ratio and the pipe Reynolds
number are dimensionless;
must be used.
The diameter ratio (or beta ratio) is defined as the calculated orifice plate bore
diameter divided by the calculated meter tube internal diameter:
= d
Where:
d = orifice plate bore diameter at flowing temperature, in mm
D = meter tube internal diameter at flowing temperature, in mm
Pipe Reynolds Number RD

The pipe Reynolds number is used in the equation for calculating the coefficient
of discharge for differential pressure flowmeters. It is a correlating parameter
used to represent the change in the devices coefficient of discharge with
reference to the meter tube diameter, the fluid mass flow rate (its inertia or
velocity through the device), the fluid density, and the fluid viscosity, It is a
parameter that expresses the ratio between the inertia and viscous forces, and is
calculated using the following equation:
RD =
4 qm
D
Where:
RD = pipe Reynolds number
qm = mass flow rate at flowing (actual) conditions, in kg/sec
= 3.14159
Pascalssecond
D = meter tube internal diameter at flowing temperature, in meters
5-4
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
5.1.7.
INFO - The coefficient of
discharge, as defined for
and incompressible fluid
flow, relates the actual flow
rate (at flowing conditions)
to the theoretical
(reference) flow rate
through a device.
Calibration of standard
primary devices by means
of incompressible fluids
(liquids) shows that the
discharge coefficient is
dependent only on the pipe
Reynolds number (RD) for a
given primary device in a
given installation. The
numerical value of the
coefficient of discharge (C)
is the same for different
installation whenever such
installations are
geometrically similar and
the flows are characterized
by identical pipe Reynolds
numbers. (ISO 5167-1:
1991; page 3.)
Note: For pipelines with:

D 58.62mm
and
L1 0.4333
use
4
4 -1
0.039 = (1- )
in the discharge coefficient
equation for orifice plates.
Coefficient of Discharge C
The equations for the coefficient of discharge (C) have been determined from
test data and correlated as a function of the diameter ratio (), the pipe diameter
(D), and the pipe Reynolds number (RD). It is used in the flow rate equations and
is defined by the following equations:
Coefficient of Discharge for Orifice Plates C(OP)

The discharge coefficient for orifice plates is given by the Stolz equation:
C(OP) = 0.5959 + 0.0312
+ 0.09 L 1 4 1 4
2.1
- 0.184
+ 0.0029
2.5
10 6
R
D
0.75
0.0337 L'2 3
Where:
C(OP) = discharge coefficient for orifice plate
L1 = relative upstream pressure tapping spacing
= l1/D
Where:
l1 =
D =
distance of the upstream tapping from the upstream

orifice plate face
pipe diameter
L2 = relative downstream pressure tapping spacing

Dimensionless Values The discharge coefficient is
used.
= l2/D
Where:
l2 =
D =
distance of the downstream

downstream orifice plate face
pipe diameter
tapping
from
the
FOR CORNER TAPPINGS:

L1 = L2 = 0
FOR D AND D/2 TAPPINGS:
L1 = 1
L2 = 0.47
FOR FLANGE TAPPINGS:
25.4
L1 = L2 =
D
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
5-5
Chapter 5
Coefficient of Discharge for ISA 1932 Nozzles C(IN)
C(IN) = 0.99 - 0.2262
4.1
- 0.00175
- 0.0033
4.15
10 6
R
D
1.15
Where:
C(IN) = discharge coefficient for ISA 1932 nozzle
Coefficient of Discharge for Long Radius Nozzles C(LN)

10 6
C(LN) = 0.9965 - 0.00653 0.5
RD
0.5
Where:
C(LN) = discharge coefficient for long radius nozzle
Coefficient of Discharge for Classical Venturi Tubes

Venturi Tube with an Rough Cast / Fabricated Convergent Section
C(VTR/F)
C(VTR/F) =
0.984
When:
100 mm
800 mm
0.3
0.75
2 x 10
RD 2 x 10
Where:
C(VTR/F) = discharge coefficient for classical Venturi tube with an as cast
convergent section
5-6
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
Venturi Tube with a Machined Convergent Section C(VTM)

C(VTM) = 0.995
When:
50 mm
250 mm
0.4
0.75
2 x 10
RD 1 x 10
Where:
C(VTM) = discharge coefficient for a classical Venturi tube with a machined
convergent section
Venturi Tube with a Rough-welded Sheet-iron Convergent Section
C(VTRS)
C(VTRS) = 0.985
When:
200 mm
1200 mm
0.4
0.7
2 x 10
RD 2 x 10
Where:
C(VTRS) = discharge coefficient for a classical Venturi tube with a roughwelded sheet-iron convergent section
Coefficient of Discharge for Venturi Nozzles C(VN)

C( VN) = 0.9858 - 0.196 4.5
Where:
C = discharge coefficient for Venturi nozzle
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
5-7
Chapter 5
5.1.8.
Dimensionless Values The fluid expansion factor
is dimensionless; however,
used.
Fluid Expansion Factor
The fluid expansion factor () is used to take into account the compressibility of
the fluid in calculation the flow rate. This coefficient is determined from
correlating the diameter ratio (), the differential pressure (), the flowing
isentropic exponent (), and the absolute static pressure () at upstream (1) or
downstream (2) conditions. In addition to these variables, the pressure ratio is
also correlated for fluids flowing through nozzle type and Venturi type devices.
Expansion Factor at Upstream Conditions 1

The fluid expansion factor at upstream (pressure) conditions is given by the
following expressions:
Orifice Plates
1 = 1 - 0.41 + 0.35 4
Where:
1 = fluid expansion factor at upstream (pressure) conditions
= diameter (beta) ratio
= differential pressure
Nozzles, Long Radius Nozzles, Venturi Tubes and Venturi Nozzles
1 =
1 - 4
2/
1 - ( -1)/

- 1
1 -
1 - 4 2/
Where:
= pressure ratio
=
1
2
= diameter (beta) ratio
5-8
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

Expansion Factor at Downstream Conditions 2
The fluid expansion factor at downstream (pressure) conditions for differential
pressure flow metering devices is given by the following expressions:
2 = 1
1 +
Where:
2 = fluid expansion factor at downstream (pressure) conditions
= differential pressure
5.2.
Flow Rate for Gas Helical Turbine

Flowmeters
5.2.1.

Conditions QV (m3/hr)
QV =
5.2.2.

(ton/hr)
Qm =
5.2.3.
Pulses
3600
KF
( QV
f MF
f
MF
b
Energy Flow Rate at Base Conditions Qe (GJ/hr)

Qe =
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
1000

(m3/hr)
Qb = Q V
5.2.4.
( Qb
HV
1000
5-9
Chapter 5
5.2.5.
Nomenclature
QV = volumetric gross flow rate at flowing conditions for gas turbine
3
flowmeters, in cubic meters per hour (m /hr)
Qm = mass flow rate at flowing conditions for gas turbine flowmeters, in

tons per hour (ton/hr)
Qb = volumetric net flow rate at base conditions for gas turbine
3
flowmeters, in cubic meters per hour (m /hr)
turbine flowmeters, in gigajoule per hour (GJ/hr)
Pulses = number of pulses emitted from the flowmeter pulse train per
second
f = fluid density at flowing conditions (actual temperature and

3
pressure), in kilograms per cubic meter (Kg/m )
b = reference density at base conditions (standard/reference
3
temperature and pressure), in kilograms per cubic meter (Kg/m )
3
KF = K factor, in pulses per cubic meter (pulses/m )

MF = meter factor (dimensionless)
HV = volumetric heating value at reference conditions, in megajoule
3
per standard cubic meter (MJ/m )
5-10
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
5.3.
Densities and Other Properties of Gas
5.3.1.
O
AGA Report N 8
Documentation
References - Detailed
information on
computations performed in
conformance to the different
editions of this standard can
be found in the following
O
AGA Report N 8 versions:
Second Edition, July
nd
1994: 2 Printing,
O
Catalog N XQ9212
Second Edition,
November 1992:
O
Catalog N XQ9212
December 1985:
O
Catalog N XQ1285
AGA Report NO 8: Compressibility for Natural Gas

and Other Related Hydrocarbon Gases
Omni flow computer firmware has been programmed in conformance with the
December 1985, November 1992, and July 1994 editions of the American Gas
O
Association Report N 8 (AGA 8). This standard provides computation
methodology for compressibility and supercompressibility factors and densities
of natural gas and other hydrocarbon gases.
Of the three editions, the July 1994 edition is considered the most reliable,
accurate and complete. However, due to contract requirements or other
conditions, some users may want to apply an earlier AGA 8 version.
The December 1985 edition of AGA 8 incorporates improvements to the
accuracy of computations compressibility and supercompressibility factors
beyond the capabilities of AGAs Manual for the Determination of
O
Supercompressibility Factors for Natural Gas (December 1962; Catalog N
L00304). Other improvements included in this version were the expansion in the
ranges of gas composition, temperature and pressure, and applications to gas
thermodynamic properties.
A very significant improvement to this standard is apparent in the AGA 8
November 1992 edition. Major changes incorporate more precise computations
of compressibility factors and densities of natural gas and related hydrocarbon
gases, calculation uncertainty estimations and upgraded FORTRAN computer
program listings. Other improvements include enhanced equations of state,
more accurate calculations for rich gases based on new velocity of sound data,
revised correlation methodology.
The current AGA 8 manual was updated in July 1994 for the purpose of
correcting typographical errors found in the previous edition, improving the
computer programs, and achieving consistency with GPA 2172-94 and the 1992
O
edition of AGA Report N 3, Part 3.
For reference purposes and as a comparison and contrast exposition of these
AGA 8 editions, the following is a brief presentation of some aspects applied by
the Omni flow computer, which include:
Types of Gases
Mole Percent Ranges of Gas Mixture Characteristics
Natural Gas Compound Identification Codes
AGA 8 1994/1992 Methods
AGA 8 1985 Methods
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
5-11
Chapter 5
Types of Gases
The AGA 8 report is intended for natural gases and other related hydrocarbons
gases. Omni flow computer programs include calculations and other information
O
from the three latest editions of the AGA Report N 8 at the time of firmware
release. The following table lists the type of gases, the corresponding
identification codes assigned to each gas type in the computer program, and the
mole % range of gas mixture characteristics contained in Omni firmware that
have been taken from AGA 8 1994, 1992 and 1985 editions.
Comparative Table of Natural Gas Types, Identification Codes

and Mole Percent Ranges
o
(AGA Report N 8 Editions Applicable to Omni Flow Computers)
Note:
# The normal range is

considered to be zero for
these compounds, as
follows:
AGA 8 1994: oxygen &
argon
AGA 8 1992: hydrogen,
carbon monoxide,
oxygen & argon
5-12
1994 / 1992
TYPE OF
GAS
MIXTURE
ID
CODE
Methane
Nitrogen
Carbon Dioxide
Ethane
Propane
Water Vapor
Hydrogen Sulfide
Hydrogen
Carbon Monoxide
Oxygen
Iso-Butane
Normal Butane
Iso-Pentane
Normal Pentane
Normal Hexane
Normal Heptane
Normal Octane
Normal Nonane
Normal Decane
Helium
Argon
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
1985
MOLE % RANGE
NORMAL
EXPANDED
45.0 to 100.0
0 to 50.0
0 to 30.0
0 to 10.0
0 to 4.0
0 to 0.5
0 to 0.02
0 to 10.0 / #
0 to 3.0 / #
#
0 to 100.0
0 to 100.0
0 to 100.0
0 to 100.0
0 to 12.0
0 to Dew Point
0 to 100.0
0 to 100.0
0 to 3.0
0 to 21.0
0 to 1.0
0 to 6.0
(Total Butanes)
(Total Butanes)
0 to 0.3
0 to 4.0
(Total Pentanes)
(Total Pentanes)
0 to 0.2
0 to Dew Point
(Hexane Plus Heavier (Hexane Plus Heavier

Hydrocarbons)
Hydrocarbons)
0 to 0.2
#
0 to 3.0
0 to 1.0
ID
CODE
MOLE %
RANGE
6
1
2
7
8
4
3
20
19
18
10
9
12
11
13
14
15
16
17
5
N/A
50.0 to 100.0
0 to 50.0
0 to 50.0
0 to 20.0
0 to 5.0
0 to 1.0
0 to 1.0
0 to 1.0
0 to 1.0
0 to 1.0
0 to 3.0
(Butanes)
0 to 2.0
(Pentanes)
0 to 1.0
(Hexane Plus Heavier
Hydrocarbons)
0 to 1.0
0 to 1.0
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

O
AGA REPORT N 8 - 1994/1992 EDITIONS:

Three methods of characterization of a gas mixture from the AGA 8 1994/1992
editions are available for use on the Omni Flow Computers: the Detailed Method
and the Gross Characterization Methods (#1 & #2).
The Detailed Characterization Method
The gas phase pressure-temperature-density behavior of natural gas mixtures is
accurately described by the detailed characterization method, for a wide range of
conditions. This behavior can also be accurately describe for the pure
components methane, ethane, carbon dioxide, nitrogen and hydrogen and binary
mixtures of these components. A low density correlation was developed for
propane and heavier hydrocarbons, and binary mixtures of these components
with methane, ethane, nitrogen and carbon dioxide. The uncertainty of
compressibility factors and density calculations for natural gases from production
separators, which can contain mole percentages of hexanes plus heavier
hydrocarbons greater than 1%, is reduced by this method. Correlations were
developed to reduce the calculation uncertainty of the following:
Natural gases containing hydrogen sulfide (sour gas): correlations of the
density behavior of pure hydrogen sulfide and binary mixtures of hydrogen
sulfide with methane, ethane, nitrogen and carbon
Natural gases containing water vapor (wet gas): second virial correlations
for water and binary mixtures of water with methane, ethane, nitrogen and
carbon dioxide
Gross Characterization Methods
The following table identifies the nominal ranges of gas characteristics for which
these methods are used:
Notes:
* Reference conditions:
Combustion at 60F,
14.73 psia: Density at
60F. 14.73 psia.
** Reference conditions:
Combustion at 25C,
0.101325 MPa: Density
at 0C, 0.101325 MPa
RANGE
QUANTITY
Relative Density
Gross Heating Value *
Gross Heating Value **
Mole % Methane
Mole % Nitrogen
Mole % Carbon Dioxide
Mole % Ethane
Mole % Propane
Mole % Butanes
Mole % Pentanes
Mole % Hexanes Plus
Mole % Helium
0.56 to 0.87
477 to 1150 Btu/scf
18.7 to 45.1 MJ/m3
45.2 to 98.3
0.3 to 53.6
0.04 to 28.94
0.24 to 9.53
0.02 to 3.57
0.01 to 1.08
0.002 to 0.279
0.0005 to 0.1004
0 to 0.158
Method #1: Utilizes the volumetric gross heating value (HV), relative density,
mole fraction CO2.
Method #2: Utilizes Relative Density, mole fraction N2, mole fraction CO2.
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
5-13
Chapter 5
O
AGA REPORT N 8 - 1985 EDITION:

Six methods of characterization of a gas mixture from the AGA 8 1985 edition
are available for use on the Omni Flow Computers: the primary method and five
alternate methods.
Primary Characterization Method
The primary method is the most accurate method in this AGA 8 version for
characterization of natural gas, for computations using the equation of state for
compressibility factor. This method consists of a complete compositional
analysis (the mole fractions of all components) of a natural gas mixture.
Alternate Characterization Methods
An alternate characterization method is used when a complete compositional
analysis for a natural gas is not available. One of the five alternate methods can
be used to estimate the mole fractions of methane and other important
hydrocarbons in the natural gas, as well as diluents other than carbon dioxide
and nitrogen. These characterization methods do not include water vapor or
hydrogen components.
Various combinations of the following quantities are utilized:
Real Gas Relative Density (Specific Gravity) (G), at 60F and 14.73 psia
Real Gas Gross Heating Value per Unit Volume (HV), at 60F and 14.73
3
psia (BTU/ft )
Mole Fraction of Carbon Dioxide [x(CO2)]
Mole Fraction of Nitrogen [x(N2)]
Mole Fraction of Methane [x(CH4)]
These alternate methods yield estimates of the mole fraction of the following:
Methane
Ethane
Propane
Normal Butane
Iso-Butane
Total Pentanes
Total Hexanes plus Heavier Hydrocarbon Gases
Total Diluents other than Nitrogen and Carbon Dioxide
The five alternate characterization methods are:
(1) The Gravity, Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen Method
(2) The Gravity, Heating Value, Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen Method
(3) The Gravity, Heating Value, Carbon Dioxide Method
(4) The Heating Value, Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen Method
(5) The Gravity, Methane, Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen Method
5-14
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d
5.3.2.
r
ASME 1967 Steam Equation
The Omni flow computer applies the ASME 1967 steam equation. This equation
is a closed-form solution (non-iterative), developed using reduced properties;
pressure (r) and temperature parameters (Tr), to define the reduced volume (r)
of steam.
5.3.3.
Acknowledgement - The
implementation of the
Keenan & Keyes steam
tables was based on the
work of Don Kyle of Kyle
Engineering, Inc.
Water Density
Water density calculations performed by the Omni flow computer are derived
from the fundamental equation which expresses the characteristic function ,
known as the Helmholtz free energy, in terms of the independent variables
density () and temperature (T). This fundamental equation from which water
density is derived has been obtained from: Joseph H. Keenan, Frederick G.
Keyes, et al., Steam Tables: Thermodynamic Properties of Water Including
Vapor, Liquid and Solid Phases (John Wiley & Sons, 1969), page 134.
5.3.4.
NBS Density, Viscosity Isentropic Exponent,

Sound Velocity, and Enthalpy
The NBS Technical Note 1048 (Issued July 1982) is used to calculate density
3
(lb/ft ), absolute viscosity isentropic exponent, sound velocity, and enthalpy for
the following gases:
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Argon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Hydrogen
Ethylene
5-15
Chapter 5
5.3.5.

Gravity Values
Determined from
Densitometer and
manufacturers.
Density and Relative Density (Specific Gravity)

Calculated from Digital Densitometer and
Gravitometer Output Frequency
The calculations expressed in this section are performed by the Omni to

determine the density from frequency signals received from the following third
party densitometers and gravitometers:
Sarasota
UGC
Solartron
Sarasota Density kg/m3

Sarasota density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a
Sarasota densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as
shown below:
2D ' t - t '
0
0
D c = DCF
t0'
) 1 + K (t - t )
0
2x t 0 '
'
Where:
Dc = corrected density
DCF = Density correction factor
Note:
* D0 must be expressed
in kilograms per cubic
3
meter (kg/m ).
D0 = calibration constant, in mass/volume*

t = densitometer oscillation period in microseconds (sec)
t0 = calibration constant, in microseconds
t0' = Tcoef x (Tf - Tcal) + Pcoef x (Pf - Pcal) + t0
K = spool calibration constant
Tf = flowing temperature, in C
Tcoef = temperature coefficient, in sec/C
Pf = flowing pressure, in kPa
Pcoef = pressure coefficient, in sec/kPa
Pcal = calibration pressure, in kPa
5-16
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

UGC Density kg/m3
UGC density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a UGC
densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as shown
below:
D = K 0 + (K 1 t) + K 2 t 2
Where:
K0
K 1 = calibration constants of density probe, entered via the keypad

K 2
CORRECTED DENSITY:
D c = DCF
) ( - )
D + K ) (T - T ) + D
K D2 + K D + K
2
1
3
+ K t3 D 2 + K t2
t1
Where:
Dc = corrected density, in kg/m
DCF = density correction factor

D = uncorrected density, kg/m
K 1
K 2 = pressure constants
K 3
= flowing pressure, in kPa
c = calibration pressure, in kPa
K t1
K t2 = temperature constants
K t3
T = flowing temperature, in C
Tc = calibration temperature, in C
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
5-17
Chapter 5
Solartron
Density kg/m3
INFO - For Solartron gas

density transducers, it is
NOT necessary to convert
the calibration sheet from
metric to US customary
units.
Solartron density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a

Solartron frequency densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure
corrections as detailed below.
D = K 0 + (K 1 t) + K 2 t 2
Where:
K0
3
K 1 = calibration constants supplied by Solartron, in kg/m and C
K 2
TEMPERATURE CORRECTED DENSITY:
DT = D
[1 +
K 18 (TF - 20 )
] + [ K 19 (TF
- 20)
TF + 273
Where:
DT = temperature corrected density, in kg/m
D = uncompensated density, in kg/m
K 18
= calibration constants supplied by Solartron
K 19
ACTUAL DENSITY:
Da = DT 1 +
K3
(D T + K 4 )
K 5
Where:
Da = actual density, in kg/m
DT = temperature compensated density, in kg/m
K3
K 4 = calibration constants supplied by Solartron

K 5
G =
Gas Specific Gravity

Ratio of Specific Heats
5-18
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
Volume 3d

Solartron
NT 3096 Gravitometer: Relative Density (Specific
Gravity)/Output Frequency Relationship

Gravity Values
Determined from
Densitometer and
manufacturers.
The relationship between the gravitometer output frequency and the specific
gravity is given by the following:
G = K0 + K2 T
Where:
G = specific gravity of a gas determined from the transducer
frequency signal
T = periodic time of the sample gas specific gravity at stable
temperature and at the selected reference chamber pressure, in
microseconds (sec)
=
G - K0
K2
=
G Y - K 2 TY 2
=
GX - G Y
TX - TY
GX = specific gravity of calibration (sample) gas X
GY = specific gravity of calibration (sample) gas Y
TX = periodic time of a known calibration (sample) gas of X specific
TY = periodic time of a known calibration (sample) gas of Y specific
23/27.71+ ! 05/99
5-19
Volume 4D
User Manual
Modbus Database
Addresses and
Index Numbers
Orifice / Turbine
Effective May 1999
Protocol Implementation ...................................................................... 1-1

1. Modbus
1.1. Introduction ..........................................................................................................1-1
1.2. Modes of Transmission........................................................................................1-1
1.2.1.
1.2.2.
ASCII Framing and Message Format........................................................................ 1-2

Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) Framing and Message Format................................... 1-2
1.3. Message Fields .....................................................................................................1-2

1.3.1.
1.3.2.
1.3.3.
1.3.4.
Address Field ............................................................................................................ 1-2

Function Code Field .................................................................................................. 1-3
Data Field .................................................................................................................. 1-3
Error Check Field ...................................................................................................... 1-3
1.4. Exception Response ............................................................................................1-4

1.5. Function Codes ....................................................................................................1-4
1.5.1.
1.5.2.
1.5.3.
1.5.4.
1.5.5.
1.5.6.
1.5.7.
1.5.8.
1.5.9.
1.5.10.
Function Codes 01 and 02 (Read Boolean Status)................................................... 1-4

Function Codes 03 and 04 (Read 16-Bit Register Sets) ........................................... 1-6
Function Code 05 (Write Single Boolean)................................................................ 1-7
Function Code 06 (Write Single 16-Bit Integer) ....................................................... 1-8
Function Code 07 (Read Exception Status) ............................................................. 1-9
Function Code 08 (Loopback Test)........................................................................ 1-10
Function Code 15 (Write Multiple Boolean ) .......................................................... 1-11
Function Code 16 (Write 16-Bit Register Sets) ...................................................... 1-12
Function Code 65 (Read ASCII Text Buffer).......................................................... 1-14
Function Code 66 (Write ASCII Text Buffer).......................................................... 1-14
1.6. Custom Data Packets .........................................................................................1-15

1.7. Peer-to-Peer on the Modbus
Link ...................................................................1-16
1.8. Half Duplex Wiring Configuration Required .....................................................1-16
1.9. Active Master ......................................................................................................1-16
1.10. Error Recovery....................................................................................................1-16
ii
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
2. User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001 - 2999) ..................................... 2-1

2.1. Custom Data Packets or Modicon G51 Compatible Register Arrays............ 2-1
2.2. Archive Control Flags .......................................................................................... 2-1
2.3. Status / Command Data....................................................................................... 2-2
2.3.1.
2.3.2.
2.3.3.
2.3.4.
2.3.5.
2.3.6.
2.3.7.
2.3.8.
2.3.9.
2.3.10.
2.3.11.
2.3.12.
2.3.13.
2.3.14.
2.3.15.
2.3.16.
2.3.17.
2.3.18.
2.3.19.
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Reading and Writing the Physical Digital I/O ............................................................ 2-2

Programmable Booleans........................................................................................... 2-2
Programmable Accumulator Points .......................................................................... 2-2
Meter Run Status and Alarm Points.......................................................................... 2-3
User Scratch Pad Boolean Points ............................................................................. 2-6
User Scratch Pad One-Shot Boolean Points ............................................................ 2-6
Command Boolean Points/Variables ........................................................................ 2-7
Meter Station Alarm and Status Points ................................................................... 2-10
Meter Totalizer Roll-over Flags ............................................................................... 2-14
Miscellaneous Meter Station Alarm and Status Points ........................................... 2-16
Commands Which Cause Custom Data Packets to be Transmitted Without a
Poll .......................................................................................................................... 2-17
Commands Needed To Accomplish a Redundant Flow Computer System ........... 2-17
Boolean Status Points Used for Meter Tube Switching .......................................... 2-18
Archive Trigger Commands .................................................................................... 2-18
Station Totalizer Roll-over Flags ............................................................................. 2-19
Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags ............................................................ 2-20
Status Booleans Relating to Redundant Flow Computer Systems ......................... 2-20
More Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags ................................................... 2-20
Boolean Command Outputs and Status Points Used For Meter Tube Switching... 2-21
iii
3. 16-Bit Integer Data (3001 - 3999) ........................................................................... 3-1

3.1. Custom Data Packet Definition Variables...........................................................3-1
3.1.1.
3.1.2.
3.1.3.
Custom Data Packet #1 ............................................................................................ 3-1

3.2. Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data.......................................................................3-2

3.3. Meter Run 16-Bit Integer Data .............................................................................3-2
3.4. Scratchpad 16-Bit Integer Data............................................................................3-4
3.5. User Display Definition Variables........................................................................3-5
3.5.1.
3.5.2.
3.5.3.
3.5.4.
3.5.5.
3.5.6.
3.5.7.
3.5.8.
User Display Number 1 ............................................................................................. 3-5

3.6. Data Used to Access the Raw Data Archive Records ........................................3-8
3.7. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data ...........................................................3-10
3.8. Gas Chromatograph 16-Bit Integer Data...........................................................3-11
3.9. Meter Station 16-Bit Integer Data ......................................................................3-12
3.10. Danalyzer Gas Chromatograph Data.................................................................3-14
3.11. Flow Computer Time and Date Variables .........................................................3-15
3.12. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data ...........................................................3-16
4. 8-Character ASCII String Data (4001 - 4999)......................................................... 4-1

4.1. Meter Run ASCII String Data................................................................................4-1
4.2. Scratch Pad ASCII String Data ............................................................................4-2
4.3. User Display Definition String Variables ............................................................4-2
4.4. String Variables Associated with the Station Auxiliary Inputs .........................4-3
4.5. Meter Station 8-Character ASCII String Data......................................................4-3
iv
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
5. 32-Bit Integer Data (5001 - 6999)............................................................................ 5-1

5.1. Meter Run 32-Bit Integer Data ............................................................................. 5-1
5.2. Scratch Pad 32-Bit Integer Data.......................................................................... 5-4
5.3. Station 32-Bit Integer Data ................................................................................. 5-5
5.4. Premium Level 32-Bit Integer Data (US Customary Units Only)....................... 5-8
5.4.1.
5.4.2.
5.4.3.
Flow Rate Threshold Triggers (MSCF/Hour) ............................................................ 5-8

Non-Resetable Totalizers (MSCF) ............................................................................ 5-8
MSCF Totalizers Stored the Last 10 days for Meter and Station .............................. 5-9
6. 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (7001 - 8999)....................................................... 6-1

6.1. Digital-to-Analog Outputs 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data .............................. 6-1
6.2. User Variables 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data................................................. 6-1
6.3. Programmable Accumulator 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Variables .................. 6-2
6.4. Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ........................................................ 6-2
6.5. Scratch Pad 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ..................................................... 6-6
6.6. PID Control 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ...................................................... 6-6
6.7. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data............................... 6-7
6.8. Miscellaneous Variables 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ................................ 6-9
6.9. Meter Station 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ................................................. 6-10
6.10. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data............................. 6-14
6.10.1. Previous Batch Average.......................................................................................... 6-14
6.10.2. Previous Hours Average......................................................................................... 6-15
6.10.3. Previous Days Average .......................................................................................... 6-15
6.10.4. Live Calculated Data (Information Only) ................................................................. 6-16
6.10.5. Statistical Moving Window Averages of Transducer Inputs .................................... 6-16
6.10.6. Miscellaneous In Progress Averages...................................................................... 6-16
6.10.7. More Miscellaneous In Progress Averages............................................................. 6-17
6.10.8. Previous Batch Quantities ....................................................................................... 6-17
6.10.9. Miscellaneous Live or Calculated Data ................................................................... 6-18
6.10.10. Station Previous Batch Average Data.................................................................... 6-19
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
7. ASCII Text Data Buffers (9001 - 9499)................................................................... 7-1

7.1. Custom Report Templates ...................................................................................7-1
7.2. Previous Batch Reports .......................................................................................7-1
7.3. Previous Daily Reports ........................................................................................7-2
7.4. Last Snapshot Report ..........................................................................................7-2
7.5. Miscellaneous Report Buffer ...............................................................................7-2
8. Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001 - 18999)............................................ 8-1

8.1. Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data.............................................8-1
8.1.1.
8.1.2.
8.1.3.
8.1.4.
8.1.5.
8.1.6.
8.1.7.
Meter Run Configuration Data................................................................................... 8-1

General Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data ...................................... 8-3
Serial Port Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data ............................................................ 8-3
Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data .................. 8-5
Programmable Logic Controller Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data........................... 8-6
Peer-to-Peer Setup Entries 16-Bit Integer Data ........................................................ 8-8
Raw Data Archive Files 16-Bit Integer Data............................................................ 8-12
8.2. Flow Computer Configuration 16-Character ASCII String Data ......................8-16

8.3. Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit Long Integer Data .................................8-19
8.4. Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data......................8-26
8.5. Product AGA-8 Component Override 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data...........8-30
8.6. Gas Chromatograph 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data......................................8-32
8.7. More Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ............8-33
8.8. Product Previous Hourly and Daily Averages - AGA 8 Mol % 32-Bit IEEE
Floating Point Data.............................................................................................8-35
8.8.1.
8.8.2.
vi
Previous Hourly Averages ....................................................................................... 8-35

Previous Daily Averages ......................................................................................... 8-36
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
Protocol Implementation
1. Modbus
1.1.
Introduction
Omni Flow Computers implement a superset of the Gould Modbus Protocol on

Serial Ports #1 (selectable), #2, #3 and #4 (selectable), thus allowing
simultaneous communications with two totally independent Modbus systems.
Maximum transmission baud rate is 38.4 kbps with an average answer response
time of 70 msec plus any modem warm-up time.
The Modbus Protocol specifies one master and up to 247 slaves on a common
communication line. Each slave is assigned a fixed unique device address in the
range of 1 to 247. The Master always initiates the transaction. Transactions are
either a query/response type (only one slave is accessed at a time) or a
broadcast / no response type (all slaves are accessed at the same time). A
transaction comprises a single query and single response frame or a single
broadcast frame.
1.2.
Modes of Transmission
Two basic modes of transmission are available: ASCII or Remote Terminal Unit
(RTU). The mode selected depends on the equipment being used.
AVAILABLE TRANSMISSION MODES

TRANSMISSION MODE
ASCII
RTU
Hexadecimal
8-bit binary
Start Bits
Data Bits
Coding System
NUMBER OF BITS:
Parity (Optional)
Stop Bits
1 or 2
1 or 2
Error Checking
LRC
CRC
300 bps to 38.4 kbps
300 bps to 38.4 kbps
Baud Rate
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Odd, Even, None (1 or 0) Odd, Even, None (1 or 0)
1-1
Modbus
Chapter 1
1.2.1.
ASCII Framing and Message Format
Framing in ASCII Transmission Mode is accomplished by the use of the colon (:)
character indicating the beginning of a frame and a carriage return (CR) line feed
(LF) to delineate end of frame. The line feed character also serves as a
synchronizing character which indicates that the transmitting station is ready to
receive an immediate reply.
ASCII MESSAGE FORMAT

BEGINNING
OF
ADDRESS
FRAME
Assuming 7 bits per
transmitted character.
FUNCTION
CODE
DATA
ERROR
CHECK
END
FRAME
READY TO
RECEIVE
RESPONSE
OF
2 Char
2 Char
N x 2 Char
2 Char
CR
LF
7 Bits
14 Bits
14Bits
N x 14 Bits
14 Bits
7 Bits
7 Bits
1.2.2.
Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) Framing and

Message Format
Frame synchronization can be maintained in RTU Transmission Mode only by

simulating a synchronous message. The 'OMNI' monitors the elapsed time
between receipt of characters. If 3.5 character times elapse without a new
character or completion of the frame, then the frame is reset and the next bytes
will be processed looking for a valid address.
RTU MESSAGE FORMAT
1.3.
1.3.1.
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
DATA
ERROR CHECK
8 Bits
8 Bits
N x 8 Bits
16 Bits
Message Fields
Address Field
The address field immediately follows the beginning of the frame and consists of
2 characters (ASCII) or 8 bits (RTU). These bits indicate the user assigned
address of the slave device that is to receive the message sent by the master.
Each slave must be assigned a unique address and only the addressed slave
will respond to a query that contains its address. When the slave sends a
response, the slave address informs the master which slave is communicating.
In broadcast mode, an address of zero (0) is used. All slaves interpret this as an
instruction to read and take action, but do not issue a response message.
1-2
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
1.3.2.
Note: See 4.5 for
descriptions and examples
of these function codes.
See 4.4 for a description of
exception responses.
Function Code Field
The function code field tells the addressed slave what function to perform. The
high order bit of the function code field is set by the slave device to indicate that
other than a normal response is being transmitted to the Master device. This bit
remains 0 if the message is a query or a normal response message.
FUNCTION CODE
1.3.3.
ACTION
01
READ MULTIPLE BOOLEAN POINTS
03
READ STRINGS OR MULTIPLE 16 OR 32 BIT VARIABLES
05
WRITE SINGLE BOOLEAN POINT
06
WRITE SINGLE 16 BIT INTEGER
15
WRITE MULTIPLE BOOLEAN POINTS
16
WRITE STRINGS OR MULTIPLE 16 OR 32 BIT VARIABLES
65
READ ASCII TEXT BUFFER
66
WRITE ASCII TEXT BUFFER
Data Field
The data field contains the information needed by the slave to perform the
specific function or it contains data collected by the slave in response to a query.
This information may be text strings, values, exception code or text buffers.
1.3.4.
Error Check Field
This field allows the master and slave devices to check a message for errors in
transmission. A transmitted message may be altered slightly due to electrical
noise or other interference while it is on its way from one unit to another. The
error checking assures that the master and the slave do not react to messages
that have been changed during transmission. The error check field uses a
longitudinal redundancy check (LRC) in the ASCII Mode and a CRC-16 check in
the RTU Mode. The bytes checked include the slave address and all bytes up to
the error checking bytes. Checking is done with the data in the binary mode or
RTU mode.
The LRC Mode

The error check is an 8-bit binary number represented and transmitted as two
ASCII hexadecimal (hex) characters. The error check is produced by first
stripping the Colon, CR and LF and then converting the hex ASCII characters to
binary. Add the binary bytes (including slave address) discarding any carries,
and then two's complement the result. At the received end the LRC is
recalculated and compared to the LRC as sent. The colon, CR, LF, and any
imbedded non-ASCII hex characters are ignored in calculating the LRC (see
Reference Guide for more details).
page 1-7 of the Gould Modbus
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
1-3
Modbus
Chapter 1
The CRC Mode
The message is considered as one continuous binary number whose most

significant bit (MSB) is transmitted first. The message is pre-multiplied by x 16
16
15
2
(shifted left 16-bits), then divided by (x +x +x +1) expressed as the binary
number (11000000000000101).The integer quotient digits are ignored and the
16-bit remainder (initialized to all ones at the start to avoid the case of all zeros
being an accepted message) is appended to the message (MSB first) as the two
CRC check bytes. The resulting message including CRC, when divided by the
same polynomial (x16 + x15 + x2 + 1) at the receiver will give a zero remainder if
no errors have occurred (see pages1-4 through 1-6 of the Gould Modbus
Reference Guide for more details).
1.4.
Exception Response
Programming or operation errors are those involving illegal data in a message,

no response or difficulty in communicating with a slave. These errors result in an
exception response from the slave, depending on the type of error. When such a
message is received from the master the slave sends a response to the master
echoing the slave address, function code (with high bit set), exception code and
error check fields. To indicate that the response is a notification of an error, the
high order bit of the function code is set to 1.
EXCEPTION CODE
1.5.
1.5.1.
Note:
Function Code 02 is
identical to Function Code
01. It can be used by
communication devices that
do not support Function
Code 01.
DESCRIPTION
01
ILLEGAL FUNCTION
02
ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS
03
ILLEGAL DATA VALUE
04
DATA CANNOT BE WRITTEN
05
PASSWORD NEEDED
Function Codes
Function Codes 01 and 02 (Read Boolean Status)
These functions allow the user to obtain the on/off status of Booleans used to
control discrete outputs from the addressed slaves only. Broadcast mode is not
supported with this function code. In addition to the slave address and function
field, the message requires that the information field contain the initial point
number to be read (starting point) and the number of points that will be read to
obtain the Boolean data.
Boolean points are numbered as from 1001; (Boolean number 1= 1001). The
data is packed one bit for each Boolean flag variable. The response includes the
slave address, function code, quantity of data characters, the data characters,
and error checking. Data will be packed with one bit for each Boolean flag
(1 = on, 0 = off). The low order bit of the first character contains the addressed
flag and the remainder follows. For Boolean quantities that are not even
multiples of eight, the last characters will be filled-in with zeros at high order end.
1-4
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
Example: Read Booleans 1120 to 1131 from Slave Device #01.

POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : ASCII TRANSMISSION MODE
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
: 3031
3031
DATA STARTING POINT #
NUMBER OF POINTS
HI
LO
HI
LO
LCR CHECK
8-BIT
3034
3630
3030
3043
3845 CR LF
POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : RTU TRANSMISSION MODE

ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
01
01
NUMBER OF POINTS
HI
LO
HI
LO
CRC CHECK
16-BIT
04
60
00
0C
nn nn
SLAVE RESPONSE : ASCII Transmission Mode

DATA
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
BYTE
COUNT
HI
LO
LCR CHECK
8-BIT
: 3031
3031
3032
3038
3030
4634 CR LF
SLAVE RESPONSE : RTU Transmission Mode

DATA
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
BYTE
COUNT
HI
LO
LCR CHECK
8-BIT
01
01
02
08
00
nn nn
The status of Booleans 1120 through 1127 is shown as 08 (hex) = 0000 1000
(binary). Reading right to left, this shows that status 1123 is on. The other data
flags are decoded similarly. Due to the quantity of Boolean status requested, the
last data field, which is shown as 00 (hex) = 0000 0000 (binary), contains the
status of only four flags. The four left most bits are provided as zeros to fill the 8bit format.
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
1-5
Modbus
Chapter 1
1.5.2.
Note:
Function Code 04 is
identical to Function Code
03. It can be used by
communication devices that
do not support Function
Code 03.
Register Groups for Long

Integer Variable Type Points 6XXX or 15XXX long
integers apply only to
Revision 23 for US
customary units.
Function Codes 03 and 04 (Read 16-Bit Register

Sets)
Function Codes 03 and 04 allow the master to obtain the binary contents of
holding registers in the addressed slave. The protocol allows for a maximum of
125 16-bit registers to be obtained at each request. Broadcast mode is not
allowed for functions 03 and 04.
These 16-bit registers are also grouped in sets of registers and accessed as one
variable. The numeric range of the point number defines the variable type and
indicates how many 16-bit registers make up that variable.
REGISTER GROUPS FOR TYPES OF VARIABLES
O
POINT #
RANGE
VARIABLE
TYPE
16-BIT REGS. / N OF BYTES / MAX POINTS /

POINT
POINT
MESSAGE
3XXX or 13XXX
Short Integer
1 Register
2 Bytes
125
4XXX
8-Char. ASCII String
4 Registers
8 Bytes
31
6XXX or 15XXX
Long Integer
2 Registers
4 Bytes
62
17XXX or 18XXX
IEEE Floating Point
2 Registers
4 Bytes
62
14XXX
8 Registers
16 Bytes
15
The addressed slave responds with its address and the function code, followed
by the information field. The information field contains a single byte indicating the
number of data bytes returned followed by the actual data bytes. The data is
returned in multiples of two bytes, with the binary content right justified. The data
is sent MS Byte first.
Example: Read Short Integer Message 3012 through 3013 from Slave #2.
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
02
03
QUANTITY OF POINTS
HI
LO
HI
LO
CRC CHECK
16-BIT
0B
C4
00
02
nn nn

DATA
DATA
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
BYTE
COUNT
HI
LO
HI
LO
CRC CHECK
16-BIT
02
03
04
1F
40
1F
3E
nn nn
The slave responds with its address and the function code, byte count of the
data field followed by the actual data field. In the example above, the data field
contains 4 bytes representing the value of the requested data.
1-6
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
1.5.3.
Function Code 05 (Write Single Boolean)
This message forces a single Boolean variable either on or off. Boolean

variables are points numbered 1XXX or 2XXX. Writing the 16-bit value 65,280
(FF00 HEX) will set the Boolean on. Writing the value zero will turn it off. All
other values are illegal and will not effect the Boolean. Using a slave address 00
(Broadcast Mode) will force all slaves to modify the desired Boolean.
Example: Turn Single Boolean Point 1711 on - Slave #2.
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
02
05
BOOLEAN POINT #
DATA
HI
LO
HI
LO
CRC
CHECK
06
AF
FF
00
nn nn
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
02
05
BOOLEAN POINT #
DATA
HI
LO
HI
LO
CRC
CHECK
06
AF
FF
00
nn nn
The normal response to the command request is to retransmit the message as

received after the Boolean state has been altered.
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
1-7
Modbus
Chapter 1
1.5.4.
Function Code 06 (Write Single 16-Bit Integer)
Any numeric variable that has been defined on the 16-bit integer index table can
have its contents changed by this message. The 16-bit integer points are
numbered from 3XXX or 13XXX.
When used with slave address zero (Broadcast Mode) all slaves will load the
specified points with the contents specified. The following example sets one
16-bit integer at address 3106 (0C22 HEX) of Slave #2 (i.e., load address 3106
with data 0003).
Example: Set Single 16-Bit Integer Slave #2.

POINT #
DATA
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
HI
LO
HI
LO
CRC
CHECK
02
06
0C
22
00
03
nn nn

POINT #
DATA
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
HI
LO
HI
LO
CRC
CHECK
02
06
0C
22
00
03
nn nn
The normal response to a Function 06 query is to retransmit the message as

received after the 16-bit integer has been altered.
1-8
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
1.5.5.
Function Code 07 (Read Exception Status)
This function allows the user to obtain the status of the five events and
determine the communication port number (serial port number). These events
are programmed and cannot be reconfigured. Following are the five events:
&
&
&
&
&
EPROM Checksum error flag

Program mode
Diagnostic mode
Master status
Power failed flag
Example: Request to Modbus ID # 13 (Address HEX: 0D) to respond with event

status and communication port number.
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
0D
07
CRC CHECK
8-Bit
DATA
nn nn

ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
DATA
CRC CHECK
8-Bit
0D
07
4C
nn nn
The slave responds with the Modbus OD number (address), the function code,
and the data, followed by the CRC check. In the above example, the data field
contains 1 byte representing the value of the requested data. Following is the
conversion of hexadecimal data to binary, to determine the event status and
communication port number.
Hex 4C = 0100 1100 (Bit 7, Bit 6, Bit 5, Bit 4, Bit 3, Bit 2, Bit 1, Bit 0)
Bit 7, Bit 6, Bit 5 represent the communication port:
Port #
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 4, Bit 3, Bit 2, Bit 1, Bit 0 represent the following event status:
Bit 4 '
Bit 3 '
Bit 2 '
Bit 1 '
Bit 0 '
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Power failed flag (1=Yes, 0=No); Modbus database address = 1829

Master status (1=Yes, 0=No); Modbus database address = 2864
In diagnostic mode (1=Yes, 0=No)
In program mode (1=Yes, 0=No)
Invalid EPROM Checksum error flag (1=Yes, 0=No); Modbus database
address = 1837
1-9
Modbus
Chapter 1
1.5.6.
Function Code 08 (Loopback Test)
Function Code 08 sends diagnostics test message to slave, to evaluate

communications processing. The purpose is to test the communication system
only; it does not perform any write function. The system (slave) responds with an
echo.
Example: Loopback Test Simple return of query message sent to Slave
Address Identification # 13.

ADDRESS
0D
FUNCTION
CODE
08
DATA DIAGNOSTICS
CODE
DATA DIAGNOSTICS
CODE
HI
LO
HI
LO
00
00
A5
37
CRC
CHECK
nn nn

ADDRESS
0D
FUNCTION
CODE
08
DATA DIAGNOSTICS
CODE
DATA DIAGNOSTICS
CODE
HI
LO
HI
LO
00
00
A5
37
CRC
CHECK
nn nn
The slave responds with an echo; i.e., identical Modbus ID (address), function
code, and data.
1-10
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
1.5.7.
Function Code 15 (Write Multiple Boolean )
Function Code 0FHEX (15) writes to each Boolean variable in a consecutive block
of Boolean variables to a desired on or off state. Each Boolean is packed in
the data field, one bit for each Boolean flag (1 = on, 0 = off). The data field
consists of increments of 2 bytes and can be up to 250 bytes (2000 points).
Boolean points are packed right-to-left, 8 to a byte with unused bits set to '0'. The
use of slave address 00 (Broadcast Mode) will force all slaves to modify the
desired Boolean bits. The following example writes to 14 Boolean variables
starting at address 1703. The data field value 05, 1703 through 1710, and data
field value 20 represents the status of points 1711 through 1716. These data
values are transmitted as 0000 0101 and 0010 0000, indicating that Booleans
points 1703, 1705, 1716 are to be forced on and 1704 and 1706 through 1715
are to be forced off (the two most significant positions of the second byte are
unused and set to 0).
Example: Turn on Boolean points 1703, 1705, 1716 ON Slave #3.
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
03
0F
STARTING
ADDRESS
QUANTITY
OF POINTS
06
00
A7
0E
DATA
BYTE
COUNT
HI
LO
02
05
20
CRC
CHECK
nn
nn

ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
03
0F
STARTING
ADDRESS
OF POINTS
06
00
A7
QUANTITY
0E
CRC
CHECK
'nn'
'nn'
The normal response to a Function 15 query is to echo the slave address,

function code, starting address, and quantity of points written.
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
1-11
Modbus
Chapter 1
1.5.8.
Function Code 16 (Write 16-Bit Register Sets)
Function Code 10HEX (16) allows the master to change the binary contents of
holding registers in the addressed slave. The protocol allows for a maximum of
125 16-bit registers to be changed at each download. Using a slave address of
zero (00) allows the master to change registers in all slaves simultaneously
(Broadcast Mode).
These 16-bit registers are also grouped as sets of registers and accessed as
one variable. The numeric range of the point number defines the variable type
and indicates how many 16-bit registers make up that variable.
Register Groups for Long
Integer Variable Type Points 6XXX or 15XXX long
integers apply only to
Revision 23 for US
customary units.
REGISTER GROUPS FOR TYPES OF VARIABLES

O
POINT #
RANGE
VARIABLE
TYPE
16-BIT REGS. / N OF BYTES / MAX POINTS /

POINT
POINT
MESSAGE
3XXX or 13XXX
Short Integer
1 Register
2 Bytes
125
4XXX
4 Registers
8 Bytes
31
6XXX or 15XXX
Long Integer
2 Registers
4 Bytes
62
7XXX or 17XXX
IEEE Floating Point
2 Registers
4 Bytes
62
14XXX
8 Registers
16 Bytes
15
The addressed slave responds with its address and the function code, followed
by the information field. The information field contains a single byte indicating the
number of data bytes returned and the actual data bytes. The data is sent as
multiples of two bytes, with the binary content right justified. The data is sent MS
Byte first.
Example: Write Short Integers 3012 through 3013 to Slave #2.
Byte Count: The Byte
Count will be increments of
2, 4, 8 or 16 bytes
depending on the address
range of the points
downloaded.
ADDR
FUNC
CODE
02
10
STARTING
POINT #
QUANTITY
OF POINTS
0B
00
C4
02
DATA
DATA
BYTE
COUNT
HI
LO
HI
LO
04
1F
40
1F
3E
CRC
CHECK
nn
nn

ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
02
10
STARTING
ADDRESS
OF POINTS
0B
00
C4
QUANTITY
02
CRC
CHECK
'nn'
'nn'
The slave responds with its address and the function code, starting point number
and quantity of points.
1-12
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
Example: Write a Long Integer 5101 to Slave #4

ADDR
FUNC
CODE
04
10
STARTING
POINT #
QUANTITY
OF POINTS
13
00
ED
01
DATA
DATA
BYTE
COUNT
HI
LO
HI
LO
04
00
4F
20
4E
CRC
CHECK
nn
nn

ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
04
10
STARTING
ADDRESS
OF POINTS
13
00
ED
QUANTITY
01
CRC
CHECK
nn
nn
The slave responds with its address and the function code, starting point number
and quantity of points.
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
1-13
Modbus
Chapter 1
1.5.9.
Function Code 65 (Read ASCII Text Buffer)
Function Code 41HEX (65) allows the master to read the contents of an ASCII text
buffer within an addressed slave. Data is always sent and received in packets
containing 128 characters. Packets are numbered from 0 to 255. The size of the
text buffer is always an exact multiple of 128 bytes. The last buffer will contain a
HEX 1A (end of file character). The last buffer will contain an ASCII ^Z (end of
file character).
nd
Example: Read 2 packet of an ASCII Text Buffer Point 9001 from Slave # 5.
POINT #
PACKET #
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
HI
LO
HI
LO
05
41
23
29
00
01
CRC
CHECK
nn
nn

POINT #
PACKET #
ADDR
FUNC
CODE
HI
LO
HI
05
41
23
29
00
Lo
DATA
BYTE 0
01
30
Data
B
128
YTE
41
CRC
CHECK
nn
nn
1.5.10. Function Code 66 (Write ASCII Text Buffer)

Function Code 42HEX (66) is used by the master to download an ASCII text buffer
to an addressed slave. Data is always sent and received in packets containing
128 characters. Packets are numbered from 0 to 255. The size of the text buffer
is always an exact multiple of 128 bytes. The last buffer will contain a HEX 1A
(end of file character).
st
Example: Write 1 packet of an ASCII Text Buffer Point 9002 to Slave # 2.

POINT #
PACKET #
ADDR
FUNC
CODE
DATA
HI
LO
HI
Lo
BYTE 0
02
42
23
2A
00
00
39
DATA
B
128
YTE
2F
CRC
CHECK
nn
nn
1-14
POINT #
PACKET #
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
HI
LO
HI
LO
02
42
23
2A
00
00
CRC
CHECK
nn
nn
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
1.6.
Custom Data Packets
Many point numbers were left unused when numbering the variables within the
database. This allows for future growth and different application data. Without
custom data packets many polls would be required to retrieve data distributed
throughout the database. The custom data packets allows you to concatenate or
join different groups or sets of data in any order and of any data type into 1
message response. These custom packets are a type 03 read and are located at
points 1, 201 and 401 in the database.
Example: Read Custom Data Packet #1 at Point 0001 from Slave #2.
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
02
03
STARTING POINT #
QUANTITY OF POINTS
HI
LO
HI
LO
CRC CHECK
16-BIT
00
01
00
00
nn nn
Dummy number
of points
DATA
ADDRESS
BYTE
COUNT
HI
LO
HI
LO
CRC CHECK
16-BIT
02
03
??
??
??
??
??
nn
Depends on the size of

packet configured
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
DATA
FUNCTION
CODE
nn
Depends on the number

and type of data points
included
1-15
Modbus
Chapter 1
1.7.
Link
Peer-to-Peer on the Modbus
Serial Port #2 (Modbus Port #1) can be configured to allow peer-to-peer

communications. In this mode any Omni flow computer can act as a Modbus
master and communicate with any other Modbus device on the communication
link (see technical Bulletin TB-980401 Peer-to-Peer Basics).
1.8.
Half Duplex Wiring Configuration

Required
The physical wiring of a Modbus link is usually full duplex, although the Modbus
communication protocol is a half duplex protocol (i.e., both devices never
transmit at the same time). For peer-to-peer communications the physical link
must be wired for half duplex operation with all transmit and receive terminals
wired in parallel (see 7.4 in Volume 1). This allows all devices to hear all
transmissions; even their own.
1.9.
Active Master
Control of the communication link is passed from the current master to the next
master in the sequence by broadcasting the ID number of the next master in
sequence. When that flow computer has completed its transaction list (see 7.4 in
Volume 1) it will in turn hand over control to the next master in the sequence.
1.10. Error Recovery

Should the next master in the sequence fail to take control of the link the current
master will search for an active master. To ensure best performance and fastest
recovery in the event of an error, always number Modbus masters consecutively
starting from 01.
1-16
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
2. User-Defined, Status and Command Data

(0001 - 2999)
2.1.
INFO - This data is
accessed using Modbus
function code 03 for reads
and 16 for writes. Boolean
data bits are packed 8 to a
byte.
Custom Data Packets or Modicon G51

Compatible Register Arrays
These three addresses specify reserved areas used to access user defined
groups of data variables. Data can be accessed as read only blocks of data or
the data is arranged as an array of adjacent 16-bit registers which can be read or
written independently, if the Modicon Compatible mode is selected when setting
up the serial port.
0001
Custom Data Packet / Array #1

Maximum 250 bytes using Modbus RTU mode (for Packet/Array definition see Index
3001-3040).
0201

Maximum 250 bytes using Modbus RTU mode (for Packet/Array definition see Index
3041-3056).
0401

Maximum 250 bytes using Modbus RTU mode (for Packet/Array definition see
Indices 3057-3096).
2.2.
Archive Control Flags
Data to be added into the Text Archive RAM is flagged by embedding Boolean
Point 1000 or 2000 within the appropriate custom report immediately preceding
the data to be archived. You may enable or disable the archiving of data by
resetting or setting this variable.
1000
Archive Control Flag
2000
Report data following flag will be archived but not printed.

Report data following flag is printed and archived.
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
2-1
Chapter 2
User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001- 2999)
2.3.
2.3.1.
!
IMPORTANT
Never set a physical I/O

point which has been
assigned as an input as this
could cause a DC voltage to
appear on the input
terminals of that point which
may conflict with any
voltage already present on
those terminals.
Status / Command Data

Reading and Writing the Physical Digital I/O
The current status of physical Digital I/O Points 01 through 12 (Omni 3000) or 01
though 24 (Omni 6000) can be accessed by reading Modbus Indexes 1001
through 1024.
All points which are to be written to exclusively via the Modbus link must first
have the point assigned to Modbus control by entering zero (0) for 'Digital Point
Assign' (see 2.5.14 in Volume 3). Assigning to '0' prevents the Omni application
software from overwriting the Modbus write.
1001
Digital I/O Point #1
to
1024
2.3.2.
INFO - Boolean data is
function codes 01 for reads,
05 for single point writes
and 15 for multiple bit
writes. Boolean data is
packed 8 points to a byte
when reading.
Digital I/O Point #24
Programmable Booleans
Points 1025 through 1088 are updated every 100 msec with the current value of
the programmable Boolean statements (see 2.5.11 in Volume 3). You may read
from or write to these variables, but anything that you write may be overwritten by
the flow computer depending upon the logic functions programmed into the logic
statement.
1025
Boolean Point #25
to
1088
2.3.3.
Boolean Point #88
Programmable Accumulator Points
Points 1089 through 1099 are paired with Floating Point Variables 7089 through
7099. For example, numeric data placed in 7089 can be output as pulses by
assigning a Digital I/O Point to 1089.
1089
Programmable Accumulator #1
Used to pulse out data placed into 7089.
to
1099

Used to pulse out data placed into 7099.
2-2
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
2.3.4.
Application Revisions
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
database corresponds to
23.71/27.71 for
Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow
Metering Systems. Both US
and metric unit versions are
considered.
Note:
* Used to assign
accumulator to the front
panel counters or digital
I/O points)
Meter Run Status and Alarm Points
The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. For
example: Point 1105 is the Meter Active Flag for Meter Run #1. Point 1405 would
be the Meter Active Flag for Meter Run #4.
1n00
Spares
1n01
Pulses - Gross
1n02
Pulses - Net
1n03
Pulses - Mass
1n04
Pulses - Energy
1n05
Meter Run Active Flag

Flow pulses above threshold frequency or DP greater than cutoff.
1n06
Spare
1n07
Any Meter Run Specific Alarm This Meter

Clears if acknowledged.
1n08
Batch End Acknowledge

Toggle ON/OFF.
1n09
Applied Automation - Gas Chromatograph - Communication Status

0=No communication; 1=Communication OK.
1n10
Spare
1n11
Applied Automation - Gas Chromatograph - Communication Alarm

Communication failure (no response) if On.
1n12

500 msec pulse.
1n13
Calculation Alarm
Usually temperature, pressure or density is outside of the range of the algorithm
selected.
1n14
Override In Use - Density Pressure
1n15
Override In Use - Differential Pressure
Override in use for any reason.
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
1n16
Override In Use - Temperature
1n17
Override In Use - Pressure
1n18
Override In Use - Gravity/Density Transducer
1n19
Override In Use - Density Temperature
2-3
Chapter 2

when reading.
INFO - Transducer and flow

rate alarms remain set while
the alarm condition exists.
Alarms - All alarms

indicated the current alarm
condition at the time they
are reset.

1n20
Mass Flowrate - Low Low Alarm
1n21
Mass Flowrate - Low Alarm
1n22
Mass Flowrate - High Alarm
1n23
Mass Flowrate - High High Alarm
1n24
Meter Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
1n25
Meter Temperature - Low Alarm
1n26
Meter Temperature - High Alarm
1n27
Meter Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n28
Meter Pressure - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
1n29
Meter Pressure - Low Alarm
1n30
Meter Pressure - High Alarm
1n31
Meter Pressure - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n32
Gravity/Density - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
1n33
Gravity/Density - Low Alarm
1n34
Gravity/Density - High Alarm
1n35
Gravity/Density - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n36
Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
1n37
Density Temperature - Low Alarm
1n38
Density Temperature - High Alarm
1n39
Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n40
Differential Pressure - Low Range - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
1n41
Differential Pressure - Low Range - Low Alarm
1n42
Differential Pressure - High Range - High Alarm
1n43
Differential Pressure - High Range - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n44
Density Pressure - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
1n45
Density Pressure - Low Alarm
1n46
Density Pressure - High Alarm
1n47
Density Pressure - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n48
Turbine - Meter Comparitor Alarm
1n49
Turbine - Channel A Failed
1n50
Turbine - Channel B Failed
1n51
Turbine - Difference Detected Between A & B Channel
Only when dual pulse fidelity check enabled.

Total absence of pulses on Channel A.
Total absence of pulses on Channel B.
Missing or added pulses.
2-4
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
1n52
Differential Pressure - Low Range Selected
1n53
Differential Pressure - High Range Selected
1n54
Any Meter Run Specific Alarm This Meter
1n55
Meter Off-line Flag
1n56
Batch in Progress Flag
Refers to when stacked DPs are used.

23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Clears only if acknowledged and alarm condition is cleared.

Pulses for 500 msec when Meter Active (1n05) goes false.
Set when flow occurs at start of batch. Reset at batch end command.
1n57
INFO - The second digit of
the index number defines
the number of the meter
run.
Batch Start Acknowledge

Pulses for 500 msec when 1727-1730 command is received.
1n58
Meter Not Active / Batch Suspended

True when batch is in progress but Meter Active (1n05) is false.
1n59
Spare
to
1n76
Spare
1n77
Correctable Totalizer Error Occurred
1n78
Non-correctable Totalizer Error
Primary totalizer checksum error secondary totalizer checksum OK.

Primary and secondary totalizers reset to zero because both checksums incorrect.
Note: See 2n00 area for

even more meter run
alarms and status points.
1n79
Differential Pressure in Use - Low Alarm
1n80
Differential Pressure in Use - High Alarm
1n81
Spare
to
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
1n99
Spare
1500
Spare
2-5
Chapter 2
2.3.5.
when reading.
User Scratch Pad Boolean Points
There are two groups of user scratchpad flags which can be used to store the
results of Boolean statements or to group data to be transmitted or received over
a Modbus data link.
1501
Scratchpad - Point 01
to
1649
2.3.6.
Scratchpad - Point 149
User Scratch Pad One-Shot Boolean Points
Many times it is necessary to send a command which momentarily turns on a

Boolean point. The following one-shot Boolean points simplify this action. They
remain activated for exactly 2 seconds after they have been written to.
1650
Scratchpad One-Shot - Point 01
to
1699
2-6
Scratchpad One-Shot - Point 50
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
2.3.7.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
INFO - Unless indicated as

being Level Sensitive,
most commands are 'edge
triggered'.
To activate a command simply write a '1' (1 = True) to that point. It is not

necessary to write a '0' (0 = False) after the command. The status of a command
may also be read or used as input in a Boolean or variable statement.
1700
INFO- Notice that all write

commands have indexes /
point addresses with a 7 in
rd
the 3 digit from the right.
Dummy
Used only to reserve a digital I/O point to be used as an input. Point 1700 can be
assigned to as many I/O points as needed.
1701
Spare
1702
End Batch - Station

End batch on all meter runs defined in station.
1703
Hardware Interaction Unreliable operation will
result if a command which
has been assigned to a
digital I/O point directly also
needs to be activated via a
Modbus write. This is
because the On/Off state of
the digital I/O point
overwrites the command
point every 100 msec and
most command point
actions are only triggered
every 500 msec.
Command Boolean Points/Variables
End Batch - Meter #1

Points 1703-1706 individual end batch commands always work.
1704
1705
1706
1707
Spare
to
1711
Spare
1712
Station Alarm Acknowledge
1713
Reset Power Failed Flag
Acknowledges all alarms.

See power fail Flag 1829.
1714
Spare
to
1718
Spare
1719
Request Local Snapshot Report
1720
Snapshot Report to Modbus Buffer
Printed on local printer connected to flow computer.

Move Snapshot Report to buffer located at 9402.
1721
Alarm Report to Modbus Buffer

Move Alarm Report to buffer located at 9402.
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
2-7
Chapter 2

#

triggered'. To activate a
command simply write a '1'
or 'True' to that point. It is
not necessary to write a '0'
or 'False' after the
command is given. The
status of a command may
also be read or used as
input in a Boolean or
variable statement.
1722
st
1 PID Permissive - Loop #1

Points 1722-1725 enable PID startup and shutdown ramping for the respective meter
(see 1752-1755). Level sensitive.
st
1723
1724
1725
1726
Spare
1727
Start Ramp-up PID - Loop #1
st
st
st
nd
Initiates PID start up sequence by activating 1 and 2 PID Permissive (see 1n57 for
acknowledge pulse). These commands are edge triggered, simply turn on.
Note:
# These points are

defaulted to active and
need not be manipulated
unless the application
requires it.
1728
1729
1730
1731
Spare
1732
Alarm Acknowledge - Meter Run #1
1733
1734
1735
Points 1732-1735 are meter run specific alarms only.
Note:
1736
Disable Flow Totalizing - Meter Run #1
* These points also affect
1737
1738
1739
1740
Synchronize Gas Chromatograph Time & Date with Flow Computer
station totalizing (see

also point 1761). Level
sensitive.
Applied Automation only.
1741
Remote Up Arrow Key
1742
Remote Down Arrow Key
Duplicates the keypad function. Level sensitive.

Duplicates the keypad function. Level sensitive.
1743
Spare
to
1750
2-8
Spare
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
1751
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Freeze Analog Inputs

Used when calibrating analog inputs. Freezes ALL analogs. Level sensitive.
1752
nd
PID Permissive - Meter #1
Points 1752-1755 limit the PID ramp-down to the minimum output % setting (see
1722-1725). Level sensitive.
nd
1754
nd
1755
nd
1756
Orifice Plate Change - Meter #1
1753
Points 1756-1759 freeze all flow rates for the meter while changing orifice plates.
Level sensitive.
1757
1758
1759
1760
Leak Detection Freeze Command

Stores totalizers, temperatures, pressures and density variables to temporary storage
(see 5n66 and 7634). This command is usually broadcast to all RTUs simultaneously.
1761
Disable Flow Totalizing Station

This command has no effect in individual meter run totalizing (see also points 17361739). Level sensitive.
1762
Remote Print - Previous Batch Report #1

At local printer.
to
INFO- Notice that all write

rd
1769
Remote Print - Previous Batch Report #8
1770
Remote Print - Previous Daily Report #1

At local printer.
to
1777
Remote Print - Previous Daily Report #8
1778
Spare
to
1785
Spare
1786
Remote Print - Alarm Report

At local printer.
Note: More Command

Boolean Points are located
at address 2701.
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
1787
Spare
2-9
Chapter 2

1788
CAUTION
Stored archive data may be

lost! See chapter on Raw
Data Archive before
manipulating these data
points. These functions are
duplicated using integers at
13920 and 13921.
1789
Shutdown PID - Loop #2
1790
1791
1792
Stop Flow PID - Loop #1
1793
1794
1795
! 1796
Raw Data Archive Run
! 1797
Alarms - All alarms

indicated the current alarm
condition at the time they
are reset.
2-10
nd
Reconfigure Archive
Level sensitive.
1798
Spare
to
Spare
Meter Station Alarm and Status Points
Data points not specifically connected to a particular meter run are grouped
here. These include flow computer general system alarms and metering group
*
1801
Positive - Gross Pulses
1802
Positive - Net Pulses
1803
Positive - Mass Pulses
1804
Positive - Energy Pulses
1805
Negative - Gross Pulses
1806
Negative - Net Pulses
1807
Negative - Mass Pulses
1808
Negative - Energy Pulses
1809
Flowrate - Low Low Alarm
Points 1805-1808 refer to flow which occurs in the reverse direction.
* Used to assign
accumulators to the front
panel electromechanical
counters and digital I/O
points.
st
Level sensitive.
2.3.8.
Note:
st
Points 1792-1795 deactivate the 1 and 2 PID permissive, causing the valve to
ramp to the top off setting, and then immediately closes the valve. If the valve is
already at the top off setting, the valve immediately closes.
1800

when reading.
Points 1788-1791 start ramp-down to top off valve setting by deactivating the 1 PID
permissive. These commands are edge triggered; simply turn on.

triggered'. To activate a
command simply write a '1'
or 'True' to that point. It is
not necessary to write a '0'
or 'False' after the
command is given. The
status of a command may
also be read or used as
input in a Boolean or
variable statement.
For points 1809-1812, flow rate units are mass units for all products.
1810
Flowrate - Low Alarm
1811
Flowrate - High Alarm
1812
Flowrate - High High Alarm
1813
Spare
1814
Spare
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
1815
Any System Alarm
1816
Any New System Alarm
Includes acknowledged alarms also.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Does not include acknowledged alarms.
1817

Toggle state at batch end (see 1835).
1818
Gas Chromatograph - Failure

Gas chromatograph fatal error received.
1819
Gas Chromatograph - Mol% - Override in Use
1820
Gas Chromatograph - Communication Alarm
Mol% overrides in product area being used.

Communication lost with gas chromatograph.
1821
Spare
to
1826
Spare
1827
Leak Detection Freeze Command was received

See point 1760.
Note:
1828
Day Start Flag
1829
Power Fail Flag
1830
Print Buffer Full Flag
True at specified day start hour (e.g.: 07:00:00).
# These points pulse high

for one 500 msec cycle
time.
True after power up (see 1713 for reset).

Reports may be lost if 32K spooling buffer overflows due to the printer being off-line
or jammed with paper.
1831
Hour Start Flag
1832
Week Start Flag

True at specified day start hour Monday.
1833
Month Start Flag
1834
Year Start Flag
1835
1836
Snapshot Printed
True at specified day start hour on 1st day of month.

True at specified day start hour on 1st January.
Pulses at batch end (see 1817).
Indicates snapshot report printed.
1837
EPROM Error Flag

Invalid checksum detected in EPROM memory.
1838
Peer-to-Peer Master Flag

Momentarily true when this computer is peer-to-peer master.
1839
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Spare
2-11
Chapter 2

when reading.

~
1840
Boolean Statement Alarm
1841
Variable Statement Alarm
Tried to execute more than 100 Boolean statements.

Tried to execute more than 100 variable statements.
1842
Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #1 - Communication Error

Points 1842-1857 refer to an error occurred while communicating with the slave in the
appropriate transaction. If a slave is involved in multiple transactions which fail, only
the first will be flagged.
to
1857
Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #16 - Communication Error
1858
Calendar Day Start Flag
1859
Calendar Week Start Flag
1860
Calendar Month Start Flag
Notes:
~ The system limits the

maximum number of
statement evaluations to
100 to protected against
possible lock-ups due to
recursive loops. Any
additional statement
evaluations are ignored.
# These points pulse high
Format: 00:00:00.
Format: 00:00:00 Monday.
Format: 00:00:00 1st day of month.
1861
Calendar Year Start Flag

st
Format: 00:00:00 Jan 1 .
for one 500 msec. cycle

time.
1862
Reference Specific Gravity - Transducer Failed Low
1863
Reference Specific Gravity - Low Alarm
1864
Reference Specific Gravity - High Alarm
1865
Reference Specific Gravity - Transducer Failed High
1866
Mol% Nitrogen - Transducer Failed Low
to
1869
Mol% Nitrogen - Transducer Failed High
1870
Mol% Carbon Dioxide - Transducer Failed Low
to
1873
Mol% Carbon Dioxide - Transducer Failed High
1874
Heating Value - Transducer Failed Low
to
1877
Heating Value - Transducer Failed High
1878
Previous Batch - Station Alarm Flag

Set if any station alarm during the previous batch.
1879
Previous Batch - Station Totalizer Roll-over Flag

Set if any station totalizer rolled during the previous batch.
1880
Previous Daily - Station Totalizer Roll-over Flag

Set if any station totalizer rolled during the previous day.
2-12
1881
Spare
1882
Spare
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
1883
Auxiliary Input #1 - Transducer Failed Low
1884
Auxiliary Input #1 - Low Alarm
1885
Auxiliary Input #1 - High Alarm
1886
Auxiliary Input #1 - Transducer Failed High
1887
to
1890
1891
Note:
* These flags are usually

used to conditionally
print appropriate
information messages
on the batch and daily
reports.
to
1894
1895
to
Note: See 2600 area and
2800 area for more station
1898
1899
Spare
to
1999
Spare
2000

Report data following flag is printed and archived (see 1.2, this chapter).
2001
Spare
to
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
2099
Spare
2n00
Spares
2-13
Chapter 2
2.3.9.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Note: The In Progress

flags are those which the
flow computer uses when
printing the reports on the
connected printer.
Use the Previous flags if
the report is being printed
by another device such as a
SCADA or MMI. This is
necessary because the flow
computer clears the In
Progress data immediately
after it prints the local
report.
2-14
Meter Totalizer Roll-over Flags
The following Boolean points are flags indicating that a totalizer has rolled-over
(i.e., reached maximum count and restarted from zero). These flags are used to
conditionally print characters (usually **) in front of the totalizer which has rolled
on the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni Custom Report Template
will show how this is accomplished. The second digit of the index number
defines the number of the meter run. See also points at 2801 for station versions
of these flags.
2n01
Batch In Progress - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n02
Batch In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n03
Batch In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n04
Batch In Progress - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n05
Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n06
Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n07
Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n08
Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n09
Daily In Progress - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n10
Daily In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n11
Daily In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n12
Daily In Progress - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n13
Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n14
Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n15
Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n16
Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n17
Previous Batch - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n18
Previous Batch - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n19
Previous Batch - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n20
Previous Batch - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n21
Previous Batch - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n22
Previous Batch - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n23
Previous Batch - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n24
Previous Batch - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n25
Previous Daily - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n26
Previous Daily - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n27
Previous Daily - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n28
Previous Daily - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
2n29
Previous Daily - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

when reading.
2n30
Previous Daily - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
Note: Notice that all write

rd
2n40
Spare
2n41
Meter Hourly Archive Trigger Flag
2n42
Spare
2n31
Previous Daily - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n32
Previous Daily - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n33
Spare
to
Note: See 1800 area and

2800 area for more station
to
2n99
Spare
2500
Spare
to
2600
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Spare
2-15
Chapter 2
2.3.10. Miscellaneous Meter Station Alarm and Status

Points
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
INFO - To differentiate
between normal message
responses and unsolicited
transmissions, Modbus
function code 67 appears in
the transmitted message
rather than function code
03.
2601
Override in Use - Auxiliary Input #1
2602
2603
2604
2605
Override in Use - Reference Specific Gravity
2606
Override in Use - % Nitrogen Transducer
2607
Override in Use - % Carbon Dioxide Transducer
2608
Override in Use - Heating Value Transducer
2609
Spare
to
2619
Spare
2620
Calibration Data Checksum Error
2621
System Initialized Flag
Correctable as secondary copy was OK.

True after power up or system reset, clears when reset power fail command is set
(1713).
2622
Day Light Savings Time

On means that spring adjustment was made. Off means autumn adjustment was
made.
2623
Archive Memory Alarm

0=Ok; 1=Fail.
2624
Spare
to
2700
2-16
Spare
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
2.3.11. Commands Which Cause Custom Data Packets

to be Transmitted Without a Poll
when reading.

rd
Activating any of the edge triggered command points below causes the
appropriate Custom Data Packet to be transmitted out of the selected serial
port without the serial port being polled for data. This function can be useful
when communicating via VSAT satellite systems where operating cost is directly
proportional to RF bandwidth used.
2701
Data Packet #1 to Serial Port #1
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
2.3.12. Commands Needed To Accomplish a Redundant

Flow Computer System
Accomplishing a redundant flow computer system requires two identically
configured flow computers to share input and output signals. In addition four
digital I/O points are cross connected to enable each flow computer to monitor
the other.
2713
Others - Watchdog Status
2714
Others - Master Status
Assigned to a digital I/O point monitoring other flow computers watchdog (see 2863).
Assigned to a digital I/O point monitoring other flow computers master status (see
2864).
2715
Assume Master Status Command
2716
Assume Slave Status Command
Set to take mastership. Edge triggered.

Set to relinquish mastership. Edge triggered.
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
2-17
Chapter 2
2.3.13. Boolean Status Points Used for Meter Tube

Switching
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Status inputs and outputs are required to achieve the automatic meter tube
switching function. The command input points below are used to interface to
motor-operated valve (MOV) limit switch signals and allow the user to take an
MOV out of service. See 2877 to 2896 for points needed to send MOV open
and close commands.
2717
Meter #1- MOV - Open Status

Must be activated when the MOV is fully open.
INFO - To differentiate
between normal message
responses and unsolicited
transmissions, Modbus
function code 67 appears in
the transmitted message
rather than function code
03.
How the MOV Limit

Switches are Interpreted 2717=On
2717=Off
2717=Off
2717=On
2718=Off Open
2718=On Closed
2718=Off Travel
2718=On Illegal
2718
Meter #1 - MOV - Closed Status
2719
Meter #1 - MOV - In Service Command / Status
Must be activated when the MOV is fully closed.

Read/Write point used to remove an MOV from service. The flow computer also
controls this point. Level sensitive.
2720
Meter #2 - MOV - Open Status
2721
2722
Meter #2 - MOV - In Service Status
2723
2724
2725
2726
2727
2728
2729
Spare
to
2732
Spare
2.3.14. Archive Trigger Commands

2733
Archive Trigger Command - Meter #1
2734
2735
2736
2737
Spare
The archive trigger commands will trigger Point 2n41 Meter Hourly Archive Flag.
to
2800
2-18
Spare
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
2.3.15. Station Totalizer Roll-over Flags

when reading.

rd
INFO - Remember that the

station is defined as a group
of individual meter runs.
In Progress Flags - The In

Progress flags are the flags
which the flow computer
uses when printing the
reports on the connected
printer.
Use the Previous flags if
the report is being printed
by another device such as
an SCADA or MMI. This is
necessary because the flow
computer clears the In
Progress data immediately
after it prints the local
report.
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
The following Boolean points are flags indicating that a totalizer has rolled-over
(i.e., reached maximum count and restarted from zero). These flags are used to
conditionally print characters (usually ** ) in front of the totalizer which has rolled
on the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni Custom Report Template
will show how this is accomplished. See also points at 2n01 for meter run
versions of flags.
2801
Batch In Progress - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2802
Batch In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2803
Batch In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2804
Batch In Progress - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2805
Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2806
Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2807
Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2808
Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2809
Daily In Progress - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2810
Daily In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2811
Daily In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2812
Daily In Progress - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2813
Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2814
Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2815
Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2816
Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2817
Previous Batch - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2818
Previous Batch - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2819
Previous Batch - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2820
Previous Batch - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2821
Previous - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2822
Previous - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2823
Previous - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2824
Previous - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2825
Previous Daily - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2826
Previous Daily - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2827
Previous Daily - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2828
Previous Daily - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2-19
Chapter 2
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.

2829
Previous Daily - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2830
Previous Daily - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2831
2832
Previous Daily - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

Previous Daily - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2833
Print Snapshot - Reference Relative Density (SG) Flag
2834
Print Snapshot - Mol% Nitrogen (N2) Flag
2835
Print Snapshot - Mol% Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Flag
2836
Print Snapshot Heating Value (HV) Flag
2837
Spare
to
2857
Spare
2.3.16. Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags

INFO - Remember that the
station is defined as a group
of individual meter runs.
All totalizers within the flow computer are long integer types. This data type
uses an implied decimal position. The computer uses these flags internally to
determine how to format all totalizers of the same type for printing purposes.
2858
Print 0 Decimal Place for Gross Totalizer
2859
Print 1 Decimal Place for Gross Totalizer
2860
Print 2 Decimal Places for Gross Totalizer
2861
Print 3 Decimal Places for Gross Totalizer
2862
Spare
2.3.17. Status Booleans Relating to Redundant Flow

Computer Systems
2863
Watchdog Status Out

Normally High Watchdog. Monitored by other flow computer in a redundant system
(see 2713).
2864
Master Status
Indicates mastership. Monitored by other flow computer in a redundant system (see
2714).
2.3.18. More Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags
2-20
2865
Print 0 Decimal Place for Mass Totalizer
2866
Print 1 Decimal Place for Mass Totalizer
2867
Print 2 Decimal Places for Mass Totalizer
2868
Print 3 Decimal Places for Mass Totalizer
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d

when reading.
2869
Print 0 Decimal Place for Net Totalizer
2870
Print 1 Decimal Place for Net Totalizer
2871
Print 2 Decimal Places for Net Totalizer
2872
Print 3 Decimal Places for Net Totalizer
2873
Print 0 Decimal Place for Energy Totalizer
2874
Print 1 Decimal Place for Energy Totalizer
2875
Print 2 Decimal Places for Energy Totalizer
2876
Print 3 Decimal Places for Energy Totalizer
2.3.19. Boolean Command Outputs and Status Points

Used For Meter Tube Switching
Status inputs and outputs are required to achieve the automatic meter tube
switching function. The command output points below are used to open and
close the motor-operated valve (MOV). Alarm points are also provided which
indicate MOV problems. See 2717 for points needed to interface to the MOV
limit switches.
2877
Meter #1 - Open MOV - Command Out
2878
Meter #1 - Close MOV - Command Out
2879
Meter #1 - MOV - Alarm Out
Activates to open MOV.

Activates to close MOV.
MOV limit switches are indicating an illegal valve position.
2880
Meter #1 - Time-out Alarm - Opening MOV
2881
Meter #1 - Time-out Alarm - Closing MOV
MOV took too long opening.

MOV took too long closing.
MOV Alarms: Any MOV

alarm will cause the flow
computer to take the MOV
out of service (see 2719)
and send a close MOV
command.
2882
to
2886
2887
to
2891
2892
to
2896
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
2-21
Chapter 2
2897
Spare
to
3000
2-22
Spare
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
3. 16-Bit Integer Data (3001 - 3999)

3.1.
INFO - These short integers
are accessed using Modbus
function code 03 for reads,
06 for single writes and 16
for multiple register writes.
3.1.1.
Custom Data Packet Definition Variables

Custom Data Packet #1
The 16-bit integers needed to define the 20 groups of data that make up
Custom Data Packet #1 which is accessed at database Index 0001 are listed
below.
3001
Group 1 - Starting Index Point Number
3002
Group 1 - Number of Index Points
to
3039
3040
3.1.2.
The 16-bit integers needed to define the 8 groups of data that make up Custom
Data Packet #2 which is accessed at database Index 0201 are listed below.
3041
3042
to
3055
3056
3.1.3.
The 16-bit integers needed to define the 20 groups of data that make up
Custom Data Packet #3 which is accessed at database Index 0401 are listed
below.
3057
3058
to
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
3095
3096
3-1
Chapter 3
16-Bit Integer Data (3001- 3999)
3.2.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data
3097
Spare
3098
Number of Totalizer Digits

Totalizers roll at: 0=9 digits; 1=8 digits.
3099
Spare
3100
Spare
3.3.
Meter Run 16-Bit Integer Data
example: 3106 is the 'Meter Active Frequency' for Meter Run # 1. The same
point for Meter Run # 4 would be 3406.
3n01
Override Code - Temperature

For points 3n01-3n05: 0=Never use; 1=Always use; 2=Use if transmitter fails; 3=If
transmitter fails use last hours average.
3n02
Override Code - Pressure
3n03
Override Code - Gravity/Density
3n04
Override Code - Density Temperature
3n05
Override Code - Density Pressure
3n06
Active Threshold Hz
Point 1n05 is set when flow pulses exceed this frequency.
3n07
Use Transducer Density
3n08
Turbine or Differential Pressure
3n09
Override Code - Differential Pressure
3n10
Static Pressure - Location Select
3n11
AGA 8 - Method Selection
3n12
Orifice Taps
3n13
Disable Downstream/Upstream Temperature - Isentropic Correction
0=Use equation; 1=Use transducer.

0=Use differential pressure; 1=Use turbine meter.
0=Upstream; 1=Downstream.
1 to 3=1994; 4 to 6=1992; 7 to 12=1985
0=Flange; 1=Pipe; 2=Corner taps; 3=D&D/2; 4=Nozzle; 5 & 6= Venturi
Note:
0=No; 1=Yes.
# Downstream
temperature can be
corrected to upstream
conditions assuming an
isentropic expansion
after the orifice. Default
is Disable because
AGA 3 / API 14.3 DO
NOT mandate this
correction.
3-2
3n14
Product Number Select
3n15
Gas Chromatograph Analyzer - Stream Number Selection
3n16
Spare
1 to 4.
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
3n17
Hour in Progress - Flow Time
3n18
Last Hours - Flow Time
3n19
PID Control Mode
3n20
Setpoint Mode
500msec ticks (0-7200).

500msec ticks (0-7200).

Do not write if 3n20 is 1. 1=Manual; 0=Auto.
Read only. DO NOT WRITE! 1=Local; 0=Remote.
3n21
PID Loop Status

Read only. 1=Secondary; 0=Primary.
3n22
Frequency Point - K Factor #1

For points 3n22-3n33, see the 17500 area for matching K-Factors.
3n23
3n24
3n25
3n26
3n27
3n28
3n29
3n30
3n31
3n32
3n33
3n34
Comparitor Error Threshold

When dual pulse error checking enabled only.
Notes:
# 2s complement numbers
based on span entries
17176 through 17189.
Values expressed as
percentages of span in
tenth percent
increments;. i.e., 1000
represents 100.0%
~ 2s complement numbers
based on the 4-20 mA
spans. Values are
expressed as
tenth percent
increments; i.e., 1000
equals 100.0 %.
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Spare
3n36
Meter Run - Flow Time - Hours Since Day Start
3n37
Meter Run - Flow Time - Minutes Since Day Start
3n38
Meter Run - Flow Time - Hours Previous Day
3n39
Meter Run - Flow Time - Minutes Previous Day
3n40
Current Net Flowrate
3n41
Net Totalizer
3n42
Current Gross Flowrate
3n43
Gross Total
3n44
Current Mass Flowrate
3n45
Mass Total
3n46
Current Meter Run Pressure
3n47
Current Meter Run Temperature
3n48
Current Transducer Density/Gravity
3n49
Energy Flowrate
3n50
Energy Total
* Unsigned integer
totalizers cumulative
based. They roll at
65536.
3n35
3-3
Chapter 3
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.

3n51
Applied Automation - Gas Chromatograph Status
3n52
Applied Automation - Gas Chromatograph Alarm Code
3n53
Spare
to
3n99
Spare
3500
Spare
3.4.
Scratchpad 16-Bit Integer Data
Ninety-nine integer registers are provided for user scratch pad. These registers
are typically used to store and group data that will be moved via peer-to-peer
operations or similar operations.
3501
Scratchpad - Short Integer #1
to
3-4
3599
Scratchpad - Short Integer #99
3600
Spare
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
3.5.
The 16-bit integers needed to define the variables that appear in the eight User
Displays are listed below. Look in the 4601 area for string associated with setting
up User Displays.
3.5.1.
3601
User Display Number 1

Database Index Number of 1st Variable
3602
Decimal Places for 1st Variable
3603
Database Index Number of 2nd Variable
3604
Decimal Places for 2nd Variable
3605
Database Index Number of 3rd Variable
3606
Decimal Places for 3rd Variable
3607
Database Index Number of 4th Variable
3608
Decimal Places for 4th Variable
3.5.2.

st
3609
Database Index Number of 1 Variable
3610
3611
3612
3613
3614
3615
3616
Decimal Places for 4 Variable
3.5.3.
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
User Display Definition Variables
th

st
3617
3618
3619
3620
3621
3622
3623
3624
th
3-5
Chapter 3
3.5.4.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
3625
st
3626
3627
3628
3629
3630
3631
3632
3.5.5.
3633
th

st
3634
3635
3636
3637
3638
3639
3640
3.5.6.
3641
3-6
th

st
3642
3643
3644
3645
3646
3647
3648
th
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
3.5.7.
3649

st
3650
3651
3652
3653
3654
3655
3656
3.5.8.
3657
th

st
3658
3659
3660
3661
3662
3663
3664
3665
Spare
th
to
3700
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Spare
3-7
Chapter 3
3.6.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Data Used to Access the Raw Data

Archive Records
See the chapter describing how to use the raw data archiving features of the flow
computer including how to manipulate the pointers below.
3701
Archive 701 - Maximum Records
3702
Archive 701 - Current Record Number
Number of data records in archive file.

Number of the last record updated.
3703
Archive 701 - Request Record Number

Write the number of the record you wish to read.
3704

3705
3706

3707
3708
3709

3710
3711
3712

3713
3714

3715

3716

3717
3718

3-8
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d

3719
3720
3721

3722
3723
3724

3725
3726

3727

3728

3729
3730

3731
3732
3733

3734
3735

3736

23/27.71+ ! 05/98
3-9
Chapter 3
3.7.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
3737
More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data

Archive File System - Memory Allocation Status
0=OK; 1=Allocation Error.
3738
Spare
to
3750
Spare
3751
Run Switching in Auto Mode
3752
Run Switching Timer
0=No; 1=Yes.
Seconds allowed for flow to settle during MOV operations.
3753
Spare
to
3768
Spare
3769
Number of Historical Alarms to Modbus Buffer

Used by OmniCom when reading the Historical Alarm Report. OmniCom first writes to
this variable the number of historical alarm events to be included on the report.
3-10
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
3.8.
Gas Chromatograph 16-Bit Integer Data
The data points below are used to map the component order of the GC analysis
to the component order needed by AGA8.
3770 Component # n for % Methane
3771 Component # n for % Nitrogen
3772 Component # n for % Carbon Dioxide
3773 Component # n for % Ethane
3774 Component # n for % Propane
3775 Component # n for % Water
3776 Component # n for % Hydrogen Sulfide
3777 Component # n for % Hydrogen
3778 Component # n for % Carbon Monoxide
3779 Component # n for % Oxygen
3780 Component # n for % i-Butane
3781 Component # n for % n-Butane
3782 Component # n for % i-Pentane
3783 Component # n for % n-Pentane
3784 Component # n for % n-Hexane
3785 Component # n for % n-Heptane
3786 Component # n for % n-Octane
3787 Component # n for % n-Nonane
3788 Component # n for % n-Decane
3789 Component # n for % Helium
3790 Component # n for % Argon
3791 Component # n for Heating Value
3792 Component # n for Reference Relative Denisty
3793
Spare
to
3799
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Spare
3-11
Chapter 3
3.9.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Notes:
* Unsigned integer
totalizers cumulative
based. They roll at
65536.
3800
Meter Station 16-Bit Integer Data

Special Diagnostic Function
Used to enable rigorous Audit Trail reporting of all serial port transactions (see side
bar note).
3801
Spare
3802
Current Net Flowrate
3803
Net Totalizer
3804
Current Gross Flowrate
3805
Gross Totalizer
3806
Current Mass Flowrate
3807
Mass Totalizer
3808
Spare
~ To avoid flushing the

audit trail, audit events
other than complete
downloads to the flow
computer are usually not
documented in the audit
trail unless serial port
passwords have been
enabled. If pass-words
are enabled, the target
address is recorded for
single point writes.
Rigorous auditing of a
serial port or group of
serial ports can be
activated by placing the
appropriate hexadecimal
code in 3800 (S = Serial
Port):
00 00 00 AA = Audit S1
00 00 AA 00 = Audit S2
00 AA 00 00 = Audit S3
AA 00 00 00 = Audit S4
To monitor multiple
ports; e.g:
AA 00 AA 00 = Audit S4
& S2
to
3810
Spare
3811
Current Energy Flowrate
3812
Energy Totalizer
3813
Fluid Type Select - Product #1
3814
3815
3816
3817
AGA 8 Method Select - Product #1
3818
3819
3820
3821
Heating Value Method Select - Product #1
3822
3823
3824
3825
Spare
# 2s complement numbers
based on span entries
17176 through 17189.
Values expressed as
tenth percent
increments. i.e. 1000
represents 100.0% . No
over range or under
range checking is done.
0=AGA 5; 1=GPA 2172-96
to
3828
3-12
Spare
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d

3829
Flow Average Factor
3830
Print Priority
3831
Number of Nulls After CR
3832
Print Interval in Minutes
Number of 500 msec calculation cycles to average.

0=Not sharing a printer; 1=Master; n=slaves 2-12.
Used to slow data to a printer if no hardware handshake.
Time interval between automatic snapshot reports.
3833
Automatic - Weekly Batch Select
3834
Automatic - Monthly Batch Select
0=None; 1=Monday; 7=Sunday.

st
0=None; 1=1 day of the month.
3835
Automatic - Hourly Batch Select

0=No; 1=Yes.
3836
Default Report Templates

0=Custom templates; 1=Default reports.
3837
Gas Chromatograph Analyzer - Type Select
3838
Clear Daily @ Batch End Select
0=Applied Automation; 1=Danalyzer.

0=24hr Totals; 1=Cleared at batch end.
3839
Analyzer Number
3840
Gas Chromatograph - Result Interval
3841
Gas Chromatograph - Listen Only Mode
ID Used in communications
Will ask gas chromatograph for data if no new result sent within this many minutes.
0=Be master; 1=Be slave - listen only.
3842
Select Date Type

Selects date format: 0=dd/mm/yy; 1=mm/dd/yy.
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
3-13
Chapter 3
3.10. Danalyzer Gas Chromatograph Data

23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
INFO - The addresses on

the right (3047-3057) are
the corresponding
addresses in the Danalyzer.
3843
Danalyzer - Alarm Word - 3046

For point 3843-3854, see Danalyzer documentation for complete details about
mapping of alarm registers. Critical alarms in this register.
3844
3845
3846
3847
3848
3849
3850
3851
3852
3853
3854
3855
Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Month
3856
Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Day
3857
Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Year
3858
Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Hour
3859
Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Minute
3860
Spare
Critical alarms in this register.
Points 3855-3859 represent the time and date when the last analysis was started.
to
3866
3-14
Spare
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
3.11. Flow Computer Time and Date Variables

Time and date can be read and written here. See also 4847 and 4848.
3867
Current - Hour
0-23.
3868
Current - Minute
3869
Current - Second
3870
Current - Month
0-59.
0-59.
1-12.
3871
Current - Day of Month

1-31.
3872
Current - Year
3873
Current - Day of Week
3874
Disable Daily Report
0-99; Year 2000=00.

Read only. 1=Monday; 7=Sunday.
0=print daily report; 1=no daily report.
3875
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Number of Days Since Beginning of Year
3-15
Chapter 3
3.12. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data

23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
3876
Spare
to
3879
Spare
3880
Override Code - Reference Specific Gravity
3881
Override Code - Nitrogen
3882
Override Code - Carbon Dioxide
3883
Override Code - Heating Value
3884
Override Code - Gas Chromatograph
3885
Spare
to
4099
3-16
Spare
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
4. 8-Character ASCII String Data (4001 - 4999)

4.1.
INFO - These ASCII string
variables are accessed
using Modbus function
codes 03 for all reads and
16 for all writes.
Note: The index number of

each string refers to the
complete string which
occupies the space of 4
registers. It must be
accessed as a complete
unit. You cannot read or
write a partial string. Each
point counts as one point in
the normal Omni Modbus
mode.
Meter Run ASCII String Data
example: 4114 is the 'Meter ID' for Meter Run #1. The same point for Meter Run
#4 would be 4414. Each ASCII string is 8 characters occupying the equivalent of
4 short integer registers (see the side bar comments).
4n00
Spares
4n01
Running Batch - Start Date
4n02
Running Batch - Start Time
4n03
Batch End - Date
4n04
Batch End - Time
4n05
Running Product Name
4n06
Current - Calculation Mode

Algorithm set used, in string format.
Modicon Compatible
Mode - For the purpose of
point count only, each string
counts as 4 registers. The
starting address of the
string still applies.
4n07
Spare
4n08
Spare
4n09
Meter Factor Used in Net / Mass

Used on reports. It contains Yes or No. Characters 1-8.
Note:
# Last batch end for this
4n10
Spare
4n11
Meter - Serial Number
4n12
Meter - Size
4n13
Meter - Model
4n14
Meter - ID
4n15
Flow Meter Tag / Low Range Tag - Differential Pressure
4n16
Differential Pressure - High Range Tag
4n17
Transmitter Tag - Temperature
4n18
Transmitter Tag - Pressure
4n19
Transmitter Tag - Densitometer
4n20
Transmitter Tag - Density Temperature
meter run.
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
4n21
Transmitter Tag - Density Pressure
4n22
Output Tag - PID Control
4-1
Chapter 4
8-Character ASCII String Data (4001- 4999)

4n23
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Spare
to
4n99
Spare
4500
Spare
4.2.
Scratch Pad ASCII String Data
Storage for ninety-nine ASCII strings is provided for user scratch pad. These
registers are typically used to store and group data that will be moved via peerto-peer operations or similar operations.
4501
Scratchpad - ASCII String #1
to
4599
Scratchpad - ASCII String #99
4600
Spare
4.3.
User Display Definition String Variables
The string variables which define the descriptor tags that appear in the eight
User Displays and the key press combinations which recall the displays are
listed below.
INFO - See 3601 area for
more data points needed to
setup the user displays.
4601
User Display #1 - Descriptor Tag - Line #1
4602
4603
4604
4605
to
4632
4633
User Display #1 - Key Press Sequence
to
4640
User Display #8 - Key Press Sequence
4641
Spare
to
4706
4-2
Spare
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
4.4.
codes 03 for all reads and
16 for all writes.
Note: The index number of

each string refers to the
occupies the space of 4
registers. It must be
point counts as one point in
mode.
Modicon Compatible
4707
String Variables Associated with the

Station Auxiliary Inputs
Auxiliary Tag - Input #1
to
4710
Auxiliary Tag - Input #4
4711
Spare
to
4806
4.5.
Spare
Meter Station 8-Character ASCII String

Data
4807
Date of Last Database Change
4808
Time of Last Database Change
4809
Reserved
4810
Esc Sequence to Print Condensed
Updated each time the Audit Trail is updated.
Raw ASCII characters sent to printer (see 14149 for Hex ASCII setup).
4811
Esc Sequence to Print Normal

Raw ASCII characters sent to printer (see 14150 for Hex ASCII setup).
4812
Daylight Savings Starts

Date format field (**/**/**).
4813
Daylight Savings Ends

Date format field (**/**/**).
4814
Spare
4815
Station - ID
4816
Spare
4817
Spare
4818
Print Interval Timer Start Time

Time format field (**:**:**).
4819
Time to Print Daily Report

Time format field (**:**:**).
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
4-3
Chapter 4
8-Character ASCII String Data (4001- 4999)
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
4820
Product #1 - Name
4821
Product #1 - Name
4822
Product #1 - Name
4823
Product #4 - Name
4824
Spare
to
4831
Spare
4832
Reference Specific Gravity Tag
4833
Nitrogen Tag
4834
Carbon Dioxide Tag
4835
Heating Value Tag
4836
Flow Computer ID
4837
Company Name
4838
Company Name
Characters 1-8.
Characters 9-16.
4839
Company Name
Characters 17-24.
4840
Company Name
4841
Company Name
4842
Station Location
4843
Station Location
Characters 25-32.
Characters 33-38. (Note: Last two characters are spares.)
Characters 1-8.
Characters 9-16.
4844
Station Location
4845
Station Location
4846
Station Location
4847
Current Date
4848
Current Time
Characters 17-24.
Characters 25-32.
Characters 33-38. (Note: Last two characters are spares.)
Note:
Point 3842 selects date format (see also 3870-3872).
* The flow computer time

and date can be set by
writing to these ASCII
variables. Be sure to
include the colons ( : ) in
the time string and the
slashes ( / ) in the date
string.
See also 3867-3869.
4849
Software Version Number
4850
Online Password / EPROM Checksum
Example: 23.71
Dual function point. Write password. Read provides EPROM Checksum.
4851
Spare
to
5000
4-4
Spare
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
5. 32-Bit Integer Data (5001 - 6999)

5001
INFO - These 32-bit long
integer variables are
for multiple writes. Note that
the index number for each
variable refers to one
complete long integer which
occupies the space of two
16-bit registers. It must be
write a partial 32-bit integer.
Each 32-bit long integer
counts as one point in the
normal Omni Modbus
mode.
Modicon Compatible
point count only, each 32-bit
integer counts as two
registers. The starting
address of the 32-bit integer
still applies.
to
5099
5.1.
# These Variables are

stored with 4 places after
the implied decimal
point. i.e. 10000 is
interpreted as 1.0000
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Spare
Meter Run 32-Bit Integer Data
example: 5105 is the 'Cumulative Gross Totalizer' for Meter Run # 1. The same
point for Meter Run # 4 would be 5405.
5n00
Spares
5n01
Batch in Progress - Gross Totalizer

Points 5n01-5n04 represent the total batch quantities measured so far for the batch in
progress. Results are moved to 5n50 area at the end of the batch.
5n02
Batch in Progress - Net Totalizer
5n03
Batch in Progress - Mass Totalizer
5n04
Batch in Progress - Energy Totalizer
5n05
Cumulative In Progress - Gross Totalizer

Points 5n05-5n08 are non-resetable totalizers which are snapshot for opening
readings.
Notes:
* The increment for all

totalizers depends upon
the totalizer resolution
settings shown in the
Factor Setup menu of
OmniCom. They can
only be changed via the
keypad entries made in
the Pass-word
Maintenance menu after
Resetting all Totalizers.
Spare
5n06
Cumulative In Progress - Net Totalizer
5n07
Cumulative In Progress - Mass Totalizer
5n08
Cumulative In Progress - Energy Totalizer
5n09
Todays In Progress - Gross Totalizer

Points 5n09-5n12 are total daily quantities measured since the day start hour today.
These are moved to the 5n54 area at the start of a new day.
5n10
Todays In Progress - Net Totalizer
5n11
Todays In Progress - Mass Totalizer
5n12
Todays In Progress - Energy Totalizer
5n13
Meter Factor in Use Now
5n14
Average Meter Factor - Batch in Progress
5n15
Average Meter Factor - Todays In Progress
5n16
Spare
5n17
Spare
5-1
Chapter 5

5n18
Dual Pulse (Comparitor) Error Counts for Batch

When pulse fidelity check enabled only.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
5n19
Batch Number
5n20
Raw Input Counts (500 msec)

Turbine counts this 500 msec cycle.
5n21
Mol % - Methane / Nitrogen
5n22
Mol % - Nitrogen / Carbon Dioxide
5n23
Mol % - Carbon Dioxide / Hydrogen Sulfide
5n24
Mol % - Ethane / Water
5n25
Mol % - Propane / Helium
5n26
Mol % - Water / Methane
5n27
Mol % - Hydrogen Sulfide / Ethane
5n28
Mol % - Hydrogen / Propane
5n29
Mol % - Carbon Monoxide / n-Butane
5n30
Mol % - Oxygen / i-Butane
Notes:
5n31
Mol % - i-Butane / n-Pentane
# These Variables are
5n32
Mol % - n-Butane / i-Pentane
5n33
Mol % - i-Pentane / n-Hexane
5n34
Mol % - n-Pentane / n-Heptane
5n35
Mol % - n-Hexane / n-Octane
5n36
Mol % - n-Heptane / n-Nonane
5n37
Mol % - n-Octane / n-Decane
5n38
Mol % - n-Nonane / Oxygen
5n39
Mol % - n-Decane / Carbon Monoxide
5n40
Mol % - Helium / Hydrogen
5n41
Mol % - Argon
5n42
Spare
5n43
In Progress - Raw Input Counts for Hour
5n44
In Progress - Gross Total for Hour
Mol % - The order of the

analysis components varies
depending upon which AGA
8 algorithm is selected
(1992-94 or 1985). The Mol
% data in this area comes
from either live gas
chromatograph data,
4020mA data, or override
values (see 17230 area for
example).
stored with 4 places after

the implied decimal
point. i.e. 10000 is
interpreted as 1.0000
Raw turbine counts for the hour so far.

Points 5n44-5n47 represent the total quantities for the current hour in progress.
These will be moved to 5n74 area at the start of the new hour.
5n45
In Progress - Net Total for Hour
5n46
In Progress - Mass Total for Hour
5n47
In Progress - Energy Total for Hour
5n48
In Progress - Raw Input Counts for Batch
5n49
In Progress - Raw Input Counts for Day
Raw turbine counts; this batch.

Raw turbine counts; today so far.
5-2
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
5n50
normal Omni Modbus
mode.
Modicon Compatible
still applies.
Previous Batch - Gross Totalizer

Points 5n50-5n53 represent the total batch quantities for the previous batch.
5n51
Previous Batch - Net Totalizer
5n52
Previous Batch - Mass Totalizer
5n53
Previous Batch - Energy Totalizer
5n54
Previous Days - Gross Totalizer

Points 5n54-5n57 are the total quantities for the previous day; day start hour to day
start hour.
5n55
Previous Days - Net Totalizer
5n56
Previous Days - Mass Totalizer
5n57
Previous Days - Energy Totalizer
5n58
Current Batch - Opening Gross Totalizer

Points 5n58-5n61 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at the start of the batch in
progress. These variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous batch.
5n59
Current Batch - Opening Net Totalizer
5n60
Current Batch - Opening Mass Totalizer
5n61
Current Batch - Opening Energy Totalizer
5n62
Todays - Opening Gross Totalizer

Points 5n62-5n65 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at day start hour for today.
These variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous day.
5n63
Todays - Opening Net Totalizer
5n64
Todays - Opening Mass Totalizer
5n65
Todays - Opening Energy Totalizer
5n66
Cumulative - Gross Total @ Leak Detection Freeze Command

Points 5n66-5n69 are cumulative totalizers snapshot when the Leak Detection Freeze
Command (1760) is received (see also points 7634, 7644, 7654 & 7664).
5n67
Cumulative - Net Total @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
5n68
Cumulative - Mass Total @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
5n69
Cumulative - Energy Total @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
5n70
Increment - Gross Totalizer

Points 5n70-5n73 contains the incremental integer counts that were added to the
totalizers for this current cycle (500msec).
5n71
Increment - Net Totalizer
5n72
Increment - Mass Totalizer
5n73
Increment - Energy Totalizer
5n74
Previous Hourly - Gross Total

Points 5n74-5n77 represent the total quantities measured for the last hour. These are
moved here from 5n44 area at the end of hour.
5n75
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Previous Hourly - Net Total
5n76
Previous Hourly - Mass Total
5n77
Previous Hourly - Energy Total
5-3
Chapter 5

5n78
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Previous Batch - Opening Gross

Data from 5n58 area gets moved to 5n78-5n81 at the end of each batch.
5n79
Previous Batch - Opening Net
5n80
Previous Batch - Opening Mass
5n81
Previous Batch - Opening Energy
5n82
Previous Days - Opening Gross
5n83
Previous Days - Opening Net
Data from 5n62 area gets moved to 5n82-5n85 at the end/beginning of each day.
5n84
Previous Days - Opening Mass
5n85
Previous Days - Opening Energy
5n86
Previous Batch - Closing Gross Total
5n87
Previous Batch - Closing Net Total
5n88
Previous Batch - Closing Mass Total
5n89
Previous Batch - Energy Total
5n90
Previous Batch - Batch Report Number

Use this value on Batch Report.
5n91
Spare
to
5n99
Spare
5500
Spare
5.2.
Scratch Pad 32-Bit Integer Data
Ninety-nine 32-bit integer registers are provided for user scratch pad. These
registers are typically used to store the results of variable statement calculations,
to group data that will be moved via peer-to-peer operations or similar types of
operations.
5501
Scratchpad - 32-Bit Integer #1
to
5599
Scratchpad - 32-Bit Integer #99
5600
Spare
to
5800
5-4
Spare
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
5.3.
normal Omni Modbus
mode.
Modicon Compatible
still applies.
5801
Station 32-Bit Integer Data

Batch in Progress - Gross Totalizer
Points 5801-5804 are total batch quantities measured so far for the batch in progress.
These are moved to 5850 area at the end of the batch.
5802
5803
Batch in Progress - Net Totalizer

Batch in Progress - Mass Totalizer
5804
Batch in Progress - Energy Totalizer
5805
Cumulative in Progress - Gross Totalizer

Points 5805-5808 are non-resetable totalizers which are snapshot for opening
readings.
5806
5807
Cumulative in Progress - Net Totalizer

Cumulative in Progress - Mass Totalizer
5808
Cumulative in Progress - Energy Totalizer
5809
Todays in Progress - Gross Totalizer

Points 5809-5812 are total daily quantities measured since the day start hour today.
These are moved to the 5854 area at the start of a new day.
5810
5811
Todays in Progress - Net Totalizer

Todays in Progress - Mass Totalizer
5812
Todays in Progress - Energy Totalizer
5813
Spare
Note:

OmniCom. They can
the Pass-word
to
5843
Spare
5844
Station - In Progress - Gross Total for Hour

Points 5844-5847 represent the total station quantities for the current hour in
progress. These will be moved to 5n74 area at the start of the new hour.
5845
Station - In Progress - Net Total for Hour
5846
Station - In Progress - Mass Total for Hour
5847
Station - In Progress - Energy Total for Hour
5848
Time in hhmmss format
5849
Date in yymmdd format
Read (e.g.: the number 103125 represents 10:31:25).

Read (e.g.: the number 970527 represents May 27, 1997). The date format used here
does not follow the US/European format selection.
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
5-5
Chapter 5

5850
Previous Batch - Gross Totalizer

Points 5850-5853 are total batch quantities for the previous batch. These are moved
here from 5801 area at the end of a batch.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
5851
Previous Batch - Net Totalizer
5852
Previous Batch - Mass Totalizer
5853
Previous Batch - Energy Totalizer
5854
Previous Days - Gross Totalizer

Points 5854-5857 are total quantities for the previous day; day start hour to day start
hour. These are moved here from 5809 area at the end of the day.
5855
Previous Days - Net Totalizer
5856
Previous Days - Mass Totalizer
5857
Previous Days - Energy Totalizer
5858
Current Batch - Opening Gross Totalizer

Points 5858-5861 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at the start of the batch in
progress. These variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous batch.
5859
Current Batch - Opening Net Totalizer
5860
Current Batch - Opening Mass Totalizer
5861
Current Batch - Opening Energy Totalizer
5862
Todays - Opening Gross Totalizer

Points 5862-5865 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at day start hour for today.
These variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous day.
5863
Todays - Opening Net Totalizer
5864
Todays - Opening Mass Totalizer
5865
Todays - Opening Energy Totalizer
5866
Cumulative - Gross Total @ Freeze

Points 5866-5869 are cumulative totalizers snapshot when the Leak Detection Freeze
Command (1760) is received (see also points 7634, 7644, 7654 & 7664).
5867
Cumulative - Net Total @ Freeze
5868
Cumulative - Mass Total @ Freeze
5869
Cumulative - Energy Total @ Freeze
5870
Increment - Gross Totalizer
Note:

OmniCom. They can
the Pass-word
5-6
Points 5870-5873 contain the incremental integer counts that were added to the
totalizers for this current cycle.
5871
Increment - Net Totalizer
5872
Increment - Mass Totalizer
5873
Increment - Energy Totalizer
5874
Previous Hourly - Gross

Points 5874-5877 represent the total quantities measured for the last hour. These are
moved here from 5844 area at the end of hour.
5875
Previous Hourly - Net
5876
Previous Hourly - Mass
5877
Previous Hourly - Energy
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
5878
normal Omni Modbus
mode.
Modicon Compatible
still applies.
Previous Batch - Opening Gross

Data from 5858 area gets moved to points 5878-5881 at the end of each batch.
5879
Previous Batch - Opening Net
5880
Previous Batch - Opening Mass
5881
Previous Batch - Opening Energy
5882
Previous Days - Opening Gross

Data from 5862 area gets moved to points 5882-5885 at the end/beginning of each
day.
5883
Previous Days - Opening Net
5884
Previous Days - Opening Mass
5885
Previous Days - Opening Energy
5886
Previous Batch - Closing Gross Total
5887
Previous Batch - Closing Net Total
5888
Previous Batch - Closing Mass Total
5889
Previous Batch - Closing Energy Total
5890
Previous Batch - Batch Number
5891
Previous Batch - Product Number
5892
Spare
to
6000
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Spare
5-7
Chapter 5
5.4.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Premium Level 32-Bit Integer Data (US

Customary Units Only)
The data below is provided to configure Premium Level Totalizing (applicable

to Revision 23.71 in US Units only). This scheme provides separate totalizers
which are used to segment Thousand Standard Cubic Feet (MSCF) flow based
on flow-rate zones. These zones are: Base, Level 1, Level 2, Level 3 and Special
Billing. The special billing threshold is checked first and then Levels 1, 2 and 3.
example: 6104 is the 'Special Billing Threshold for Meter Run # 1. The same
point for Meter Run # 4 would be 6404. Station data is located at 6804.
5.4.1.
Addresses in the 6000
Range - For Revision
23.71+ (US units) only, this
index number range
corresponds to long
integers. Other application
revisions have this range
assigned to IEEE floating
points.
Flow Rate Threshold Triggers (MSCF/Hour)
6n00
Spares
6n01
Premium Level 1 - Threshold
6n02
Flow below this threshold is Base MSCF.

Flow between Level 1 and 2 is Level 1 MSCF.
6n03

Flow between Level 2 and 3 is Level 2 MSCF. Flow above this is Level 3 MSCF)
6n04
Special Billing - Threshold

Flow above this trigger is Special Billing MSCF.
Flow below is divided up between Base, Level 1, 2 and 3.
6n05
5.4.2.
Spare
Non-Resetable Totalizers (MSCF)
Note:

OmniCom. They can be
only be changed via keypad entries made in the
Password Maintenance
menu after Resetting all
Totalizers.
5-8
6n06
Cumulative - Base Totalizer
6n07
Cumulative - Premium Level 1 - Totalizer
6n08
6n09
6n10
Cumulative - Special Billing - Totalizer
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d

normal Omni Modbus
mode.
Modicon Compatible
still applies.
5.4.3.
MSCF Totalizers Stored the Last 10 days for

Meter and Station
6n11
Todays - Base Totalizer
6n12
Todays - Premium Level 1 - Totalizer
6n13
6n14
6n15
Todays - Special Billing - Totalizer
6n16
Last Days - Base Totalizer
6n20
Last Days - Special Billing - Totalizer
6n21
nd
nd
to
to
*
6n25
6n26
3 Last Days - Base Totalizer
rd
to
Note:
rd
6n30
3 Last Days - Special Billing - Totalizer
6n31
6n35
6n36
6n40
6n41

Totalizers.
th
to
th
th
to
th
th
to
th
6n45
6n46
th
to
*
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
6n50
th
5-9
Chapter 5

*
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
6n51
th
to
th
6n55
6n56
th
to
th
6n60
6n61
6n65
6n66
Reserved
Note:

Totalizers.
th
to
th
to
6n99
Reserved
6500
Reserved
to
6800
Reserved
6801
Station - Todays - Base Totalizer
6802
Station - Todays - Premium Level 1 - Totalizer
6803
6804
6805
Station - Todays - Special Billing - Totalizer
6806
Station - Last Days - Base Totalizer
to
*
6810
Station - Last Days - Special Billing - Totalizer
6811
Station - 2
nd
Station - 2
nd
to
*
5-10
6815
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
*
normal Omni Modbus
mode.
Modicon Compatible
still applies.

Totalizers.
rd
Station - 3 Last Days - Base Totalizer
to
rd
6820
Station - 3 Last Days - Special Billing - Totalizer
6821
th
to
th
6825
6826
6830
6831
6835
6836
th
to
th
th
to
Note:
6816
th
th
to
th
6840
6841
6845
6846
th
to
th
th
to
th
6850
6851
th
to
*
th
6855
6856
Reserved
to
7000
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Reserved
5-11
Modbus
Volume 4d
6. 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (7001 - 8999)

6.1.
INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE
Floating Point variables are
function code 03 for all
reads, 06 for single writes
or 16 for single or multiple
writes. Note that the index
number for each variable
refers to the complete
floating point variable which
16- bit registers. It must be
write a partial variable. Each
floating point variable
normal Omni Modbus
mode.
Digital-to-Analog Outputs 32-Bit IEEE

Floating Point Data
Any analog output point which physically exists can be read via these point
numbers. Data returned is expressed as a percentage of the output value.
Only those points which physically exist and have been assigned to Modbus
control by assigning zero (0) at 'D/A Out Assign' (see 2.5.9 in Volume 3) should
be written to Outputs which are not assigned to Modbus control will be
overwritten every 500 msec by the flow computer. Data written should be within
the range of -5.00 to 110.00.
7001
Analog Output #1
to
7012
Analog Output #12
7013
Spare
to
Modicon Compatible
point count only, each IEEE
float point counts as 2
address of the variable still
applies.
7024
6.2.
Spare
User Variables 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point

Data
Database points 7025 through 7088 have been assigned as user variables (see
Volume 3). The value contained in the variable depends on the associated
program statement which is evaluated every 500 msec. You may read these
variables at any time. You may also write to these variables but anything you
write may be overwritten by the flow computer depending on the evaluation of
the statement. Leave the statement blank or simply put a comment or prompt
into it to avoid having the flow computer overwrite it.
7025
User-Programmable Variable #1
to
7088
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
User-Programmable Variable #64
6-1
Chapter 6
32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (7001- 8999)
6.3.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Programmable Accumulator 32-Bit IEEE

Floating Point Variables
Points 7089 through 7099 are paired with Boolean Point Variables 1089 through
1099. Numeric data placed in 7089, for example, can be output as pulses by
assigning a digital I/O point to 1089.
7089
Data placed into 7089 is pulse out using 1089.
to
7099

Data placed into 7099 is pulse out using 1099.
6.4.
the number of the meter run
number.
Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point

Data
The second digit of the index number defines the meter run number. For
example: 7105 is the 'Temperature' variable for Meter Run #1. The same point
for Meter Run #4 would be 7405.
INFO - Calculated averages

can be either flow weighted
or time weighted depending
upon point number.
<
7n00
Spares
7n01
Flowrate - Gross
3
MACF/hr or m /hr.
Notes:
<
7n02
< Current live values which

are updated every
500msec.
* Current values in use

now.
Flowrate - Net
3
MSCF/hr or m /hr.
<
7n03
Flowrate - Mass
<
7n04
Flowrate - Energy
Klb/hr or ton/hr.
MMBTU/hr or GJ/hr.
7n05
Temperature
7n06
Pressure
7n07
Density in Use
3
Lb/ACF or kg/m .
7n08
Flowing Transducer Density Before Factoring
7n09
Flowing Transducer Density After Factoring
Temperature and pressure corrected.

7n09=7n08 x 7n43.
7n10
Density Transducer Temperature
7n11
Density Transducer Pressure
Corrects for transducer temperature expansion effects.

Corrects for transducer pressure expansion effects.
6-2
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d

normal Omni Modbus
mode.
7n12
Orifice - Diameter
7n13
Orifice - Flow Coefficient C
7n14
Orifice - Expansion Factor Y
7n15
Orifice - Velocity of Approach Factor EV
AGA 3 Coefficient.
AGA 3 Coefficient.
AGA 3 Coefficient.
7n16
Orifice - Differential Pressure
7n17
Meter Tube Diameter
Inches of Water (kpa or millbar).

Temperature corrected.
Modicon Compatible
applies.
Notes:
* Current values in use

now.
# When orifice metering is

#
~ The data in these

variables may be
calculated real time or
the same data as
entered elsewhere
depending on the fluid
type selected or the
equation of state
selected.
Batch In Progress - Average Meter Run Temperature
7n19
Batch In Progress - Average Meter Run Pressure
7n20
Batch In Progress - Average of Density in Use
7n21
Batch In Progress - Average Density Transducer Temperature
7n22
Batch In Progress - Average Density Transducer Pressure
7n23
Batch In Progress - Flow Coefficient C
7n24
Batch In Progress - Expansion Factor Y
7n25
Batch In Progress - Velocity of Approach Factor EV
7n26
Batch In Progress - Orifice Diameter
7n27
Batch In Progress - Orifice Differential Pressure
7n28
Day In Progress - Velocity of Approach Factor EV
7n29
Day In Progress - Average Temperature
selected, these variables

are the average of the
square rooted value
which is then squared
before storing.
7n18
7n30
Day In Progress - Average Pressure
7n31
Day In Progress - Average Density in Use
7n32
Day In Progress - Average Density Transducer Temperature
7n33
Day In Progress - Average Density Transducer Pressure
7n34
Day In Progress - Flow Coefficient C
7n35
Day In Progress - Expansion Factor Y
7n36
Day In Progress - Orifice Diameter
7n37
Day In Progress - Orifice Differential Pressure
* ~ 7n38
Reference Density being Used to Calculate Net

3
Lb/ft or Kg/m (NIST, ASME calculations).
* ~ 7n39
Viscosity being Used in AGA3

Centi poise (pa.s).
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
* ~ 7n40
Isentropic Exponent being Used in AGA3
7n41
Ref. Specific Gravity being Used in AGA 8
7n42
Heating Value being Used in AGA 8
6-3
Chapter 6

7n43
Viscosity Override
7n44
Isentropic Override
7n45
Measured Orifice Diameter - @ Reference Temperature
7n46
Orifice Plate - Coefficient of Thermal Expansion
7n47
Orifice Plate - Reference Temperature
7n48
Measured Meter Tube Diameter - @ Reference Temperature
7n49
Meter Tube - Coefficient of Thermal Expansion
7n50
Meter Tube - Reference Temperature
7n51
Differential Pressure - Low Cutoff
Centi poise (pa.s).

23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.

the number of the meter run
number.
Inches of Water (kpa or millbar). 1n05 is set when DP above this.
7n52
Differential Pressure - Low Limit
7n53
Differential Pressure - High Limit
7n54
Differential Pressure - Override Value
7n55
Low Range - Differential Pressure - @ 4mA
7n56
Low Range - Differential Pressure - @ 20mA
7n57
High Range - Differential Pressure - @ 4mA

nd
DP when using stacked DPs.
7n58
High Range - Differential Pressure - @ 20mA
7n59
Differential Pressure - High Switch Over %
7n60
Differential Pressure - Low Switch Over %
Use High DP if Low DP is greater than this %.

Use Low DP if High DP is less than this %.
7n61
Meter Run Mass Flowrate - Low Limit
7n62
Meter Run Mass Flowrate - High Limit
7n63
Meter Temperature - Low Limit
7n64
Meter Temperature - High Limit
7n65
Meter Temperature - Override
7n66
Meter Temperature - @ 4mA
7n67
Meter Temperature - @ 20mA
7n68
Meter Pressure - Low Limit
to
7n72
6-4
Meter Pressure - @ 20mA
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
7n73
Modicon Compatible
applies.
Gravity / Density Transducer - Low Limit

Indicated at either flowing or reference conditions, depending on which is selected.

normal Omni Modbus
mode.
to
7n77
Gravity / Density Transducer - @ 20mA
7n78
Density Transducer - Temperature - Low Limit
to
7n82
Density Transducer - Temperature - @ 20mA
7n83
Density Transducer - Pressure - Low Limit
to
7n87
Density Transducer - Pressure - @ 20mA
7n88
Density Transducer - Correction Factor

Used to correct densitometer.
7n89
Densitometer - Constant #1
7n90
7n91
K0/D0.
Note:
* Various factors used by

various vendors of digital
densitometers.
K1/T0.
K2/Tcoef.
7n92
7n93
7n94
7n95
K18/Tcal/Tc.
K19/Pcoef/Kt1.
K20A/Pcal/Kt2.
K20B/Kt3.
7n96
7n97
7n98
7n99
K21A/Pc.
K21B/Kp1.
Kr. (For UGC densitometers: Kr/KP2.)
Kj. (For UGC densitometers: Kj/KP3.)
7500
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Spare
6-5
Chapter 6
6.5.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Scratch Pad 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point

Data
Ninety-nine IEEE 32-bit floating point registers are provided for user scratch pad.
These registers are typically used to store and group data that will be moved via
peer-to-peer operations or similar uses.
7501
Scratchpad - IEEE Float #1
to
7599
Scratchpad - IEEE Float #99
7600
Spare
Notes:
+ Do not write to these

variables. They are
provided for read only
information.
> Writing to these

variables will have no
effect as the flow
computer overwrites
these values with either
the remote or local
primary Setpoint value
depending on the
operating mode of the
control loop.
~ Only writes made while

in the 'Remote' mode will
be meaningful. These
variables are overwritten
with the current value of
the primary controlled
variable when in all other
modes.
^ Only writes made while

in the 'Manual' mode will
be meaningful. These
variables are
overwritten by the flow
computer in all other
operating modes.
< Writes to these variables

are always accepted.
6-6
6.6.
PID Control 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point

Data
7601
PID Control #1 - Local Primary Variable Setpoint Value
>
7602
PID Control #1 - Primary Setpoint Value in Use
7603
PID Control #1 - Remote Primary Setpoint Value
7604
PID Control #1 - Control Output Percent
<
7605
PID Control #1 - Secondary Variable Setpoint
7606
>
7607
7608
7609
<
7610
7611
>
7612
7613
7614
<
7615
7616
>
7617
7618
7619
<
7620
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
7621 Spare
normal Omni Modbus
mode.
to
7623 Spare
6.7.
7624
Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE

Floating Point Data
Equation of State - Velocity of Sound - Meter Run #1
Points 7624 - 7627 are current live values.
Modicon Compatible
applies.
7625
7626
7627
7628
Spare
7629
Equation of State - Heating Value - Meter Run #1
7630
7631
7632
7633
Spare
7634
Meter Run #1 - Temperature @ Leak Detect Freeze Command
Current live values.
INFO - See 7n01 through

7n99 for more meter run
related data.
Notes:
* These variables
represent the
incremental flow which is
accumulated each 500
msec. calculation cycle
in float format (also see
points 5n70 for integer
format).
See 1760 command.
7635
Meter Run #1 - Pressure @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
7636
Meter Run #1 - Density / Gravity @ Leak Detect Freeze Command
7637
Spare
# Flowing variables are

snapshot and stored
here when the Leak
Detection Freeze
command (1760) is
received (also see points
5n66).
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
to
7639
Spare
7640
Meter Run #1 - Gross Volume Increment
7641
Meter Run #1 - Net Increment Volume
7642
Meter Run #1 - Mass Increment
7643
Meter Run #1 - Energy Increment
7644
Meter Run #2 - Temperature @ Freeze Command
7645
Meter Run #2 - Pressure @ Freeze Command
7646
Meter Run #2 - Density / Gravity @ Freeze Command
6-7
Chapter 6

7647
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.

related data.
Notes:
Spare
to
7649
Spare
7650
7651
Meter Run #2 - Net Volume Increment
7652
7653
7654
7655
7656
7657
Spare
* These variables
represent the
incremental flow which is
accumulated each 500
msec. calculation cycle
in float format (also see
points 5n70 for integer
format).
to
7659
Spare
# Flowing variables are

snapshot and stored
here when the Leak
Detection Freeze
command (1760) is
received (also see points
5n66).
7660
7661
7662
7663
7664
7665
7666
7667
Spare
to
6-8
7669
Spare
7670
7671
7672
7673
7674
Station - Temperature @ Freeze Command
7675
Station - Pressure @ Freeze Command
7676
Station - Density / Gravity @ Freeze Command
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
7677
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.

related data.
Spare
to
7679
Spare
7680
Station - Gross Volume Increment
7681
Station - Net Volume Increment
7682
Station - Mass Volume Increment
7683
Station - Energy Volume Increment
7684
Spare
to
7700
6.8.
INFO - The data is only
meaningful when the input
channel is used as an
analog input or a Honeywell
digital transducer input. For
pulse type input channels
see data points located at
15131 through 15154.
Spare
Miscellaneous Variables 32-Bit IEEE

Floating Point Data
The percentage of span for each of the 24 process input channels is available
as a floating point variable point.
7701
Process Input - Channel # 1
to
7724
Process Input - Channel # 24
7725
Spare
to
7800
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Spare
6-9
Chapter 6
6.9.
normal Omni Modbus
mode.
7801
Meter Station 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point

Data
Station - Gross Flowrate
3
MACF/hr or m /hr.
7802
Station - Net Flowrate

3
MSCF/hr or m /hr.
7803
Station - Mass Flowrate
7804
Station - Energy Flowrate
Klbs/hr or ton/hr.
MMBTU/hr or GJ/hr.
7805
Reference Specific Gravity
7806
Nitrogen
7807
Carbon Dioxide
Live transducer value, if available.

7808
Modicon Compatible
applies.
Heating Value
Live calorimeter value (BTU/SCF or MJ/m ).
7809
Auxiliary Input #1
Points 7809-7812 represent miscellaneous live input signals provided for user-defined
functions.
7810
Auxiliary Input #2
7811
Auxiliary Input #3
7812
Auxiliary Input #4
7813
Time - hhmmss
Read only (e.g.: the number 103125 represents 10:31:25).
7814
Date - yymmdd
Read only (e.g.: the number 970527 represents May 27/ 97; the date format used
here does not follow the US/European format selection).
7815
Danalyzer Non-Normalized Total Mol %

Point 7038 in gas chromatograph. Sum of components.
7816
Spare
7817
Density K0 Value
7818
Density K2 Value
This point is used for Solartron 3096 relative density device.

This point is used for Solartron 3096 relative density device.
7819
Spare
to
7821
6-10
Spare
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
7822
Product #1 - Reference Density
7823
Spare
7824
7825
Spare
7826
7827
Spare
7828
7829
Spare
to
7848
Spare
Note:
7849
Solartron 3096 - Reference Specific Gravity of Gas x Type (Gx)
* Solartron 3096
7850
Solartron 3096 - Period Time - Gas x Type (Tx)
7851
Solartron 3096 - Reference Specific Gravity of Gas y Type (Gy)
7852
Solartron 3096 - Period Time - Gas y Type (Ty)
7853
Mass Flowrate - Low Limit
Gravitometer Factors.
Indicates flow rate low limit in mass units.
7854
Mass Flowrate - High Limit

Indicates flow rate high limit in mass units.
7855
Spare
to
7860
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Spare
6-11
Chapter 6

7861
Reference Specific Gravity - Low Limit

Points 7861-7863 are configuration settings used when the reference SG is a live
input.

normal Omni Modbus
mode.
7862
Reference Specific Gravity - High Limit
7863
Reference Specific Gravity - Override
7864
Reference Specific Gravity - @ 4mA
7865
Reference Specific Gravity - @ 20mA
7866
Nitrogen % - Low Limit
7867
Nitrogen % - High Limit
7868
Nitrogen % - Override
7869
Nitrogen % - @ 4mA
7870
Nitrogen % - @ 20mA
7871
Carbon Dioxide - Low Limit
7872
Carbon Dioxide - High Limit
7873
Carbon Dioxide - Override
7874
Carbon Dioxide - @ 4mA
7875
Carbon Dioxide - @ 20mA
7876
Spare
Points 7866-7870 are configuration settings used when the % N2 is a live 4-20 mA.
Points 7871-7875 are configuration settings used when the CO2 is a live 4-20 mA.
Modicon Compatible
applies.
to
7887
Spare
7888
Cubic Feet to Gallon - Conversion Factor
7889
Spare
7890
Contract Base - Density of Air
7891
Local Atmospheric Pressure
7892
Contract Base - Temperature
7893
Gram/cc to lb/ft - Conversion Factor
7894
Contract Base - Pressure
#
Note:
# Miscellaneous
conversion factors and
constants.
6-12
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
7895
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Heating Value - Low Limit

Points 7895-7899 are configuration settings used when the calorimeter input is a live
3
4-20 mA (US customary units are BTU/SCF; metric units are MJ/m ).
7896
7897
7898
7899
7900
Spare
to
8500
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Spare
6-13
Chapter 6
6.10. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE

Floating Point Data
normal Omni Modbus
mode.
Modicon Compatible
applies.
The following data refers to Meter Run #1. The same data is available for all
meter runs at the following addresses:
Meter Run #1
Meter Run #2
Meter Run #3
Meter Run #4
@
@
@
@
8501
8601
8701
8801
through
through
through
through
8599
8699
8799
8899
6.10.1. Previous Batch Average

8501
Previous Batch - Average Temperature
8502
Previous Batch - Average Pressure
8503
Previous Batch - Average Density
8504
Previous Batch - Average Differential Pressure or Turbine Pulses

Depends on setup.
8505
Previous Batch - Average Velocity Factor (Ev) or Turbine K Factor
8506
Previous Batch - Average Orifice Coefficient (Cd) or Turbine Meter

Factor
8507
Previous Batch - Average Expansion Factor (Y)
8508
Previous Batch - Average Orifice Bore Diameter
Depends on setup.
Depends on setup.
Previous Batch Average Refers to data stored at the
time of the last Batch End
command. It will remain
valid until the next batch
end. This is the data that
should be used by SCADA
or MMIs to build Monthly or
Batch Reports.
8509
Previous Batch - Average Density Temperature
8510
Previous Batch - Average Density Pressure
8511
Previous Batch - Average Density Correction Factor
8512
Previous Batch - Average Mol % Nitrogen
8513
Previous Batch - Average Mol % Carbon Dioxide
8514
Previous Batch - Average Reference Specific Gravity
8515
Previous Batch - Average Heating Value
8516
Previous Batch - Average Extension Factor or Gross Volume

Square root (DP x Density); or turbine meter gross flow.
8517
Previous Batch - Average Combined Flow Factor

Cd x Ev x Y.
6-14
8518
Spare
8519
Spare
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
6.10.2. Previous Hours Average

23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Previous Hours Average Refers to data stored at the

end of the last hour. It is
valid for one hour and is
then overwritten. This is the
data that should be used by
SCADA or MMIs which
need hourly averages.
8520
Previous Hours - Average Temperature
8521
Previous Hours - Average Pressure
8522
Previous Hours - Average Differential Pressure or Raw Turbine Counts
8523
Previous Hours - Average Density in Use
8524
Previous Hours - Average Mol % Nitrogen
8525
Previous Hours - Average Mol % Carbon Dioxide
8526
Previous Hours - Average Reference Specific Gravity
8527
Previous Hours - Average Heating Value
8528
Previous Hours - Average Extension Factor or Gross Volume

8529
Previous Hours - Average Combined Flow Factor

Cd x Ev x Y.
8530
Previous Hours - Average K Factor

Average of curve.
Previous Days Average Refers to data stored at the

end of the contract day. It is
valid for 24 hours and
overwritten at the day start
hour. This is the data that
should be used by SCADA
or MMIs to build daily
reports.
6.10.3. Previous Days Average

8531
Previous Days - Average Temperature
8532
Previous Days - Average Pressure
8533
Previous Days - Average Density
8534
Previous Days - Average Differential Pressure or Turbine Pulses
8535
Previous Days - Average Velocity Factor (Ev) or Turbine K Factor
8536
Previous Days - Average Orifice Coefficient (Cd) or Turbine Meter

Factor
8537
Previous Days - Average Expansion Factor (Y)
Depends on setup.
Depends on setup.
Depends on setup.
8538
Previous Days - Average Orifice Bore Diameter
8539
Previous Days - Average Density Temperature
8540
Previous Days - Average Density Pressure
8541
Previous Days - Average Density Correction Factor
8542
Previous Days - Average Mol % Nitrogen
8543
Previous Days - Average Mol % Carbon Dioxide
8544
Previous Days - Average Reference Specific Gravity
8545
Previous Days - Average Heating Value
8546
Previous Days - Average Extension Factor or Gross Volume
8547
Previous Days - Average Combined Flow Factor

Cd x Ev x Y.
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
6-15
Chapter 6

normal Omni Modbus
mode.
Modicon Compatible
applies.
INFO - The indicated data

(8501-8599) refers to Meter
Run #1. The same data is
available for all meter runs
at the following addresses:
Meter Run #1:
8501 through 8599
Meter Run #2:
8601 through 8699
Meter Run #3:
8701 through 8799
Meter Run #4:
8801 through 8899
Note: See 5n50 and 5850

for matching totalizer data.
6-16

8548
Current AGA 8 - Compressibility Factor
8549
Previous Days - Gross in Float Format
8550
Previous Days - Net in Float Format
MACF.
MSCF.
8551
Previous Days - Mass in Float Format

KLbs.
6.10.4. Live Calculated Data (Information Only)

8552
Previous Days - Energy in Float Format
8553
Current AGA 8 - FPV Factor
MMBTU.
6.10.5. Statistical Moving Window Averages of

Transducer Inputs
8554
Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Differential Pressure Low Range
8555
Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Differential Pressure High Range
8556
Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Temperature
8557
Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Pressure
8558
Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Density
8559
Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Density Temperature
8560
Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Density Pressure
6.10.6. Miscellaneous In Progress Averages

8561
In Progress - Batch Average - Density Correction Factor
8562
In Progress - Daily Average - Density Correction Factor
8563
In Progress - Hourly - Average - Water Vapor Factor (FWV)
8564
In Progress - Daily - Average - Water Vapor Factor (FWV)
8565
Previous - Hourly Average - Water Vapor Factor (FWV)
8566
Previous - Daily Average - Water Vapor Factor (FWV)
8567
Specific Gravity in Use
8568
Heating Value in Use
8569
Spare
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
6.10.7. More Miscellaneous In Progress Averages

23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
8570
In Progress - Hourly Average - Temperature
8571
In Progress - Hourly Average - Pressure
8572
In Progress - Hourly Average - Differential Pressure or Raw Turbine

Counts
8573
In Progress - Hourly Average - Density in Use
8574
In Progress - Hourly Average - Mol % Nitrogen
8575
In Progress - Hourly Average - Mol % Carbon Dioxide
8576
In Progress - Hourly Average - Reference Specific Gravity
8577
In Progress - Hourly Average - Heating Value
8578
In Progress - Batch Average - Mol % Nitrogen
8579
In Progress - Batch Average - Mol % Carbon Dioxide
8580
In Progress - Batch Average - Reference Specific Gravity
8581
In Progress - Batch Average - Heating Value
8582
In Progress - Daily Average - Nitrogen
8583
In Progress - Daily Average - Carbon Dioxide
8584
In Progress - Daily Average - Reference Specific Gravity
8585
In Progress - Daily Average - Heating Value
6.10.8. Previous Batch Quantities

Previous Batch
Quantities - Refers to data
stored at the time of the last
Batch End command. It
will remain valid until the
next batch end. These
variables are floating point
duplicates of integer data at
5n50 area. These points are
for MMI or SCADA retrieval,
not for Batch Recalculation.
8586
Previous Batch - Gross in Float Format
8587
Previous Batch - Net in Float Format
8588
Previous Batch - Mass in Float Format
MACF.
MSCF.
KLbs.
8589
Previous Batch - Energy in Float Format

MMBTU.
Note: See 8501 area for

other Previous Batch data.
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
6-17
Chapter 6
6.10.9. Miscellaneous Live or Calculated Data

normal Omni Modbus
mode.
8590
Dry BTU in Use from Gas Chromatograph
8591
Reference Density in Use

Calculated by AGA 8.
8592
Water Content in Use
8593
Upstream Temperature in Use
8594
Upstream Pressure in Use
8595
Differential Pressure Low Range in Use
Calculated value or override value.

Calculated if transducer is located downstream.
Calculated if transducer is located downstream.
One of theses variables (8595 or 8596) is moved to 7n16 depending upon which of
the transducers is selected.
8596
Differential Pressure High Range in Use
8597
Water Vapor Factor (FWV) in Use
8598
K Factor in Use
Interpolated from curve.
Modicon Compatible
applies.
INFO - The indicated data

(8501-8599) refers to Meter
Run #1. The same data is
available for all meter runs
at the following addresses:
Meter Run #1:
8501 through 8599
Meter Run #2:
8601 through 8699
Meter Run #3:
8701 through 8799
Meter Run #4:
8801 through 8899
Weighted Averages Time Weighted or Flow

Weighted averages can be
selected on a global basis
(see point 13394).
8599
Calculated Flowing Density in Use
8700
Spare
8601
Meter 2 - Miscellaneous 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data
to
8699
8700
Spare
8701
to
8799
8800
Spare
8801
to
8899
6-18
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
8900
Spare
to
8948
Spare
6.10.10. Station Previous Batch Average Data

8949
Station - Previous Daily - Gross in Float Format
8950
Station - Previous Daily - Net in Float Format
8951
Station - Previous Daily - Mass in Float Format
8952
Station - Previous Daily - Energy in Float Format
8953
Spare
to
8985
Spare
8986
Station - Previous Batch - Gross in Float Format
8987
Station - Previous Batch - Net in Float Format
8988
Station - Previous Batch - Mass in Float Format
8989
Station - Previous Batch - Energy in Float Format
8990
Spare
to
9000
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Spare
6-19
Modbus
Volume 4d
7. ASCII Text Data Buffers (9001 - 9499)

7.1.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
INFO - These ASCII text

buffers are accessed using
Modbus function codes 65
for reads and 66 for writes.
The index number for each
9000 type variable refers to
the complete text buffer
which may be as big as
8192 bytes. Data is
transmitted or received as
multiple transmissions of
128 byte packets (see
Chapter 6)
Custom Report Templates
These are ASCII text files which serve as a format template for certain printed
reports.
9001
Report Template - Snapshot / Interval
9002
Report Template - Batch
9003
Report Template - Daily
9004
Spare
to
9100
7.2.
Spare
Previous Batch Reports
Copies of the last 8 Batch Reports are stored.

9101
Batch Report - Last
9102
Batch Report - 2
9103
Batch Report - 3 Last
9104
9105
9106
9107
9108
9109
Spare
nd
Last
rd
th
th
th
th
th
to
9300
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Spare
7-1
Chapter 7
ASCII Text Data Buffers (9001- 9499)
7.3.
INFO - These ASCII text
buffers are accessed using
Modbus function codes 65
for reads and 66 for writes.
The index number for each
9000 type variable refers to
the complete text buffer
which may be as big as
8192 bytes. Data is
transmitted or received as
multiple transmissions of
128 byte packets (see
Chapter 6)
Previous Daily Reports
Copies of the last 8 Daily Reports are stores

9301
Previous Days Report - Last
9302
Previous Days Report - 2
nd
Last
rd
9303
Previous Days Report - 3 Last
9304
9305
9306
9307
9308
9309
Spare
th
th
th
th
th
to
9400
Spare
7.4.
Last Snapshot Report
9401
Last Local Snapshot / Interval Report
7.5.
Miscellaneous Report Buffer
The following buffer is used to retrieve miscellaneous reports. Report data is

loaded into this buffer depending on which bit is written to integer point 15129.
Reports which are retrieved using this buffer are:
Current Snapshot Report

Alarm Report
Audit Trail Report
Status Report
Product File Report
Text Archive Data defined by integers 15127 and 15128 is also retrieved using
this buffer.
9402
9403
Miscellaneous Report Buffer
Spare
to
13000
7-2
Spare
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
8. Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001 18999)

!
CAUTION!
Flow computer
configuration data is
especially critical to the
correct operation of the flow
computer. Any
modifications to this data
while operating the flow
computer could cause
unpredictable results which
could cause measurement
or control errors. Users are
encouraged to consult with
before manipulating
configuration data directly
via a serial port or
programmable variable
statements.

The following data is especially critical to the correct operation of the flow
computer. Any modifications to this data while operating the flow computer could
cause unpredictable results which could cause measurement or control errors.
Users are encouraged to consult with Omni before manipulating configuration
data directly via a serial port or programmable variable statements.
8.1.
8.1.1.
Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit

Integer Data
Meter Run Configuration Data
13001
Meter Run #1 - Flow I/O Point
13002
Meter Run #1 - Temperature I/O Point
13003
Meter Run #1 - Temperature Type
13004
Meter Run #1 - Pressure I/O Point
13005
Meter Run #1 - Density I/O Point
13006
Meter Run #1 - Density Type
13007
Meter Run #1 - Density Temperature I/O Point
13008
Meter Run #1 - Density Temperature Type
13009
Meter Run #1 - Density Press I/O Point
13010
Meter Run #1 - Density @ Reference Conditions
13011
Meter Run #1 - Differential Pressure Low Range I/O Point
13012
Meter Run #1 - Differential Pressure High Range I/O Point
13013
Meter Run #1 - Flowmeter Dual Pulse Fidelity
0=DIN RTD; 1=Amer RTD; 2=4-20mA/Honeywell.
1=API; 2=SG; 3=gr/cc; 4=Solartron; 5=Sarasota; 6=UGC.

23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
0=DIN RTD; 1=Amer RTD; 2=4-20mA/Honeywell.
0=Flowing; 1=Reference.
0=No; 1=Yes.
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
8-1
Chapter 8
Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001- 18999)

13014
CAUTION!
Flow computer
computer. Any
before manipulating
statements.

to
13026
13027
to
13039
13040
to
13052
13053
Reference Specific Gravity I/O Point
13054
Reference Specific Gravity Type

1=4-20mA; 2=Solartron 3096.
13055
Nitrogen I/O Point
13056
Spare
13057
Carbon Dioxide I/O Point
13058
Heating Value I/O Point
13059
Spare
to
13073
8-2
Spare
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
8.1.2.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
General Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit

Integer Data
13074
Flow Computer Type
13075
Number of A Combo Modules Installed
13076
Number of B Combo Modules Installed
0=3000; 1=6000.
13077
Number of C Combo Modules Installed
13078
Number of Digital Modules Installed
13079
Number of Serial Modules Installed
13080
Number of E Combo Modules Installed
13081
Number of H Combo Modules Installed
13082
Number of ED Combo Modules Installed
13083
Spare
13084
Spare
8.1.3.
Serial Port Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data
13085
Serial Port #1 - Port Type
13086
Serial Port - ID
0=Printer; 1=Modbus.
Read only point which reports back the number of the port you are connected to.
13087
Serial Port #1 - Baud Rate

1200-38400 bps.
13088
Serial Port #1 - Data Bits
13089
Serial Port #1 - Stop Bits
13090
Serial Port #1 - Parity
7 or 8.
0, 1 or 2.
O, E, N.
13091
Serial Port #1 - Transmit Key Delay

0=0hms; 1=50 msec; 2=100 msec; 3=150 msec.
13092
Serial Port #1 - Modbus ID
13093
Serial Port #1 - Protocol Type
13094
Serial Port #1 - Enable CRC Checking
13095
Serial Port #1 - Modicon Compatible
0-247.
0=RTU; 1=ASCII; 2=RTU Modem.
0=No CRC, 1=CRC check.
0=Omni Mode; 1=Modicon 984 Mode.
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
8-3
Chapter 8
CAUTION!
Flow computer
computer. Any
before manipulating
statements.

13096
13097
13098
13099
13100
Serial Port #2 - Transmit Key Delay
13101
Serial Port #2 - Modbus ID
13102
Serial Port #2 - Modbus Mode RTU / ASCII
13103
13104

0=Omni; 1=Modicon 984 compatible.
13105
Spare
to
13107
Spare
13108
13109
13110
13111
13112
Serial Port #3 - Transmit Delay
13113
Serial Port #3 - Modbus or Node ID
13114

0=Modbus RTU; 1=Modbus ASCII; 2=Modbus RTU Modem (Relaxed Timing);
3=Applied Automation Gas Chromatograph; 4=Danalyzer RTU; 5=Danalyzer ASCII.
13115
13116

0=Omni; 1=984 compatible.
13117
Spare
to
13119
Spare
13120
13121
13122
13123
13124
Serial Port #4 - Transmit Delay
13125
13126
Serial Port #4 - Modbus or Node ID
13127

0=Modbus RTU; 1=Modbus ASCII; 2=Modbus RTU Modem (Relaxed Timing);
3=Allen-Bradley Full Duplex DF1; 4=Allen-Bradley Half Duplex.
13128

0=Omni, 1=984 compatible. If Allen-Bradley Protocol selected above: 0=CRC; 1=BCC
error checking.
8-4
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
8.1.4.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Proportional Integral Derivative (PID)

Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data
13129
PID Loop #1 - I/O Point Assignment - Remote Setpoint
13130
PID Loop #1 - Primary Variable
13131
PID Loop #1 - Secondary Variable
13132
PID Loop #1 - Primary Action
13133
PID Loop #1 - Secondary Action
13134
PID Loop #1 - Error Select
0=Forward; 1=Reverse.
0=Forward; 1=Reverse.
0=Low; 1=High.
13135
PID Loop #1 - Startup Mode

0=Last state; 1=Manual.
13136
to
13142
13143
to
13149
13150
to
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
13156
13157
I/O Point Assignment - Auxiliary Input #1
13158
13159
13160
8-5
Chapter 8
8.1.5.
!
CAUTION!
Programmable Logic Controller Configuration 16Bit Integer Data
Flow computer
computer. Any
before manipulating
statements.

13161
PLC Group #1 - Starting Address
13162
PLC Group #1 - Index 1
13163
PLC Group #1 - Number of Points 1
Allen-Bradley PLC-2 Translation Tables.
13164
13165
13166
13167
13168
13169
13170
13171
13172
13173
13174
13175
13176
13177
13178
13179
13180
13181
13182
13183
13184
13185
13186
13187
13188
13189
13190
13191
13192
13193
13194
13195
to
8-6
13225
13226
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
13227
13228
to
13258
13259
13260
13261
to
13271
13272
13273
13274
to
13284
13285
13286
Spare
to
13292
Spare
13293
Input Type - Auxiliary Input #1
13294
13295
13296
13297
Spare
For points 13293-13296: 0=DIN; 1=Amer; 2=4-20mA.
to
13299
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Spare
8-7
Chapter 8
8.1.6.
!
CAUTION!
Peer-to-Peer Setup Entries 16-Bit Integer Data
Flow computer
computer. Any
before manipulating
statements.
13300
Current Master ID
13301
Reserved Register
Real-time. Shows current peer-to-peer master.

Debug only.
13302
Transaction #1 - Slave ID
13303
Transaction #1 - Read / Write
13304
Transaction #1 - Source Index
13305
Transaction #1 - Number of Points
13306
Transaction #1 - Destination Index
13307
to
13311
13312
to
13316
13317
to
13321
13322
to
13326
13327
to
13331
13332
to
13336
8-8
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
13337
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
to
13341
13342
to
13346
13347
to
13351
13352
to
13356
13357
to
13361
13362
to
13366
13367
to
13371
13372
to
13376
13377
to
13381
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
8-9
Chapter 8
CAUTION!
Flow computer
computer. Any
before manipulating
statements.

13382
Next Master ID
13383
Last Master ID In Sequence
13384
Retry Timer
A non zero entry here turns on peer-to-peer mode.
Number of 50 msec ticks between retries; default=3.
13385
Activate Redundancy Mode

0=single unit; 1=dual flow computer system.
13386
Number of Decimal Places for Gross Totalizer
13387
Number of Decimal Places for Net Totalizer
13388
Number of Decimal Places for Mass Totalizer
13389
Number of Decimal Places for Energy Totalizer
13390
Spare
to
13393
Spare
13394
Select Averaging Method

0=Time weighted; 1=Flow weighted.
13395
Spare
13396
Override Code - Auxiliary Input #1
13397
13398
13399
13400
Meter Run #1 - Differential Pressure Low Range Damping Factor
13401
Meter Run #1 - Differential Pressure High Range Damping Factor
13402
Meter Run #1 - Temperature Damping Factor
13403
Meter Run #1 - Pressure Damping Factor
13404
Meter Run #1 - Density Temperature Damping Factor
13405
Meter Run #1 - Density Pressure Damping Factor
13406
to
13411
Meter Run #2 - Density Press Damping Factor
13412
to
13417
8-10
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
13418
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
to
13423
13424
Spare
to
13432
Spare
13433
Auxiliary Input #1 - Damping Factor
13434
13435
13436
13437
Spare
to
13461
Spare
13462
Redundancy - Master PID #1 - Valve Mode

Slave keeps copy of primary units settings in points 13462-13469 in case it becomes
master.
13463
Redundancy - Master PID #1 - Setpoint Mode
13464
13465
13466
13467
13468
13469
13470
Redundancy - Slave PID #1 - Valve Mode
13471
Redundancy - Slave PID #1 - Setpoint Mode
13472
13473
13474
13475
13476
13477
13478
Spare
to
13499
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Spare
8-11
Chapter 8
8.1.7.
!
CAUTION!
Flow computer
computer. Any
before manipulating
statements.

Raw Data Archive Files 16-Bit Integer Data
The following entries are used to define the record structure of each Raw Data
Archive file:
13500
Archive 701 #1 - Starting Index
13501
Archive 701 #1 - Number of Points
to
13530
13531
Archive 701 #16 - Number of points
13532
Spare
to
13539
Spare
13540
13541
to
13570
13571
13572
Spare
to
13579
Spare
13580
13581
to
13610
13611
13612
Spare
to
13619
Spare
13620
13621
to
8-12
13650
13651
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
13652
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Spare
to
13659
Spare
13660
13661
to
13690
13691
13692
Spare
to
13699
Spare
13700
13701
to
13730
13731
13732
Spare
to
13739
Spare
13740
13741
to
13770
13771
13772
Spare
to
13779
Spare
13780
13781
to
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
13810
13811
8-13
Chapter 8
CAUTION!
Flow computer
computer. Any
before manipulating
statements.

13820
13821
to
13850
13851
13852
Spare
to
13859
Spare
13860
13861
to
13890
13891
13892
Spare
to
13899
Spare
13900
Trigger Boolean - Archive 701

Points 13900-13909 contain the point numbers of the trigger points which cause the
data to be stored when the trigger goes from low to high.
13901
13902
13903
13904
13905
13906
13907
13908
13909
13910
Spare
to
13919
!*
CAUTION!
Spare
!*
POTENTIAL FOR DATA

LOSS! Read Archive
documentation before
manipulating points 13920
and 13921.
!*13920
Archive Run ?
0=Stops archiving; 1=Starts archiving.
!*13921
Reconfigure Archive?
0=No configuration allowed; 1=Configuration changes allowed.
8-14
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
13930
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Archive 711 #1 Starting Index

Points 13930-13961 are dummy read-only points which show the structure of the
Alarm Archive.
13931
Archive 711 #1 Number of Points
to
13960
13961
13962

Points 13962-13993 are dummy read-only points which show the structure of the
Audit Trail.
13963
to
13992
13993
13994
Spare
to
14000
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Spare
8-15
Chapter 8
8.2.
!
CAUTION!
Flow Computer Configuration 16Character ASCII String Data
Flow computer
computer. Any
before manipulating
statements.
14001
Boolean Statement #1025
to
14048
14049
OmniCom - Download Serial Number & File Name
14050
OmniCom - Download PC ID
14051
Variable Statement #7025
to
14098
14099
Spare
14100
Station Total and Flowrate Definition
14101
Comment String (Remarks) - Boolean Statement #1025
to
14148
Comment String (Remarks) - Boolean Statement #1072
14149
Printer Condense Mode String

Points 14149 & 14150 represent the hexadecimal ASCII version of what is actually
sent to the printer.
14150
Printer Uncondensed Mode String
14151
Comment String - Variable Statement #7025
to
14198
14199
Spare
to
14200
Spare
14201
to
14216
8-16
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
14217
codes 03 for reads, and 16
for writes.
Note that the index number
for each string refers to the
occupies the space of eight
string counts as one point in
mode.
Modicon Compatible
Mode - For the purposes of
Spare
to
14220
Spare
14221
to
14236
14237
Spare
to
14240
Spare
14241
Comment String - Boolean Statement #1073
to
14256
Comment String - Boolean Statement #1088
14257
Spare
to
14260
Spare
14261
to
14276
14277
Spare
to
14300
Spare
14301
Comment String - Assign - Digital to Analog Output #1
to
14312
Comment String - Assign - Digital to Analog Output #12
14313
Spare
to
14320
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Spare
8-17
Chapter 8

14321
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Comment String - Assign - Digital I/O Point #1
to
14344
Comment String - Assign - Digital I/O Point #24
14345
Spare
to
14359
Spare
14360
Comment String - Assign - PID #1 - Primary Variable
14361
Comment String - Assign - PID #1 - Secondary Variable
14362
14363
14364
14365
14366
14367
14380
Comment String - Assign - Front Panel Counter A
14381
Comment String - Assign - Front Panel Counter B
14382
Comment String - Assign - Front Panel Counter C
14383
Spare
to
15000
8-18
Spare
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
8.3.
for multiple writes.
for each variable refers to
one complete long integer
which occupies the space of
two 16-bit registers. It must
be accessed as a complete
normal Omni Modbus
mode.
Modicon Compatible
still applies.
15001

Long Integer Data
Assign - Analog Output #1
to
15012
Assign - Analog Output #12
15013
Digital Point #1 - Assignment
15014
Digital Point #1 - Timer - Delay On
15015
Digital Point #1 - Timer - Delay Off
15016
Digital Point #1 - Timer - Pulse Width
100 msec ticks.

100 msec ticks.
10 msec ticks.
15017
to
15020
15021
to
15024
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
8-19
Chapter 8

15025
CAUTION!
Flow computer
computer. Any
before manipulating
statements.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
to
15028
15029
to
15032
15033
to
15036
15037
to
15040
15041
to
15044
15045
to
15048
15049
to
15052
15053
to
15056
15057
to
15060
8-20
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
15061
normal Omni Modbus
mode.
Modicon Compatible
still applies.
to
15064
15065
to
15068
15069
to
15072
15073
to
15076
15077
to
15080
15081
to
15084
15085
to
15088
15089
to
15092
15093
to
15096
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
8-21
Chapter 8

15097
CAUTION!
Flow computer
computer. Any
before manipulating
statements.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
to
15100
Digital Point #22 - Timer - Pulse Width (10msec Ticks)
15101
to
15104
15105
to
15108
15109
Assign - Front Panel Counter A
15110
Assign - Front Panel Counter B
15111
Assign - Front Panel Counter C
15112
Max Comparitor - Error Counts per Batch - Meter #1
15113
15114
15115
15116
Spare
Points 15112-15115 represent dual pulse error checks.
to
15119
Spare
15120
Input / Output Status of Digital Points

Real-time, read-only! Indicates which points are inputs (1) and which are outputs (0).
#1=Bit 0; #24=Bit 23.
15121
Spare
15122
On/Off Status of Digital Points

Real-time, read-only! #1=Bit 0; #24=Bit 23: 0 =Off, 1=On.
15123
Spare
to
15125
8-22
Spare
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
15126
32-Bit Packed Status Word

Exclusively for OmniCom use (see Bit Layout below).

normal Omni Modbus
mode.
LSB
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
Modicon Compatible
still applies.
((((((
((((((
((((((
((((((
((((((
((((((
((((((
((((((
((((((
((((((
((((((
((((((
((((((
((((((
((((((
((((((
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
))))))
))))))
))))))
))))))
))))))
))))))
))))))
))))))
))))))
))))))
))))))
))))))
))))))
))))))
))))))
))))))
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
(((((( N/A
(((((( N/A
(((((( N/A
(((((( N/A
(((((( N/A
(((((( N/A
(((((( N/A
(((((( N/A
(((((( N/A
(((((( N/A
Power Fail Flag
End Batch #4
End Batch #3
End Batch #2
End Batch #1
End Batch Station
))))))
))))))
))))))
))))))
))))))
))))))
))))))
))))))
))))))
))))))
MSB
15127
Text Archive Data - Number of Days to Retrieve
15128
Text Archive Data - Starting Date of Requested
Exclusively for OmniCom use.

Fix date format (YYDDMM).
15129
32-Bit Command Word #1

LSB
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
(((((( N/A ))))))

End Batch Station
End Batch Meter #1
End Batch Meter #2
End Batch Meter #3
End Batch Meter #4
(((((( N/A ))))))
(((((( N/A ))))))
(((((( N/A ))))))
(((((( N/A ))))))
(((((( N/A ))))))
Alarm Acknowledge
Reset Power Fail Flag
(((((( N/A ))))))
(((((( N/A ))))))
(((((( N/A ))))))
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
(((((( N/A ))))))

(((((( N/A ))))))
Send Snapshot to Printer
Load Snapshot to 9402
Load Alarms to 9402
Load Prod File to 9402
Load Status to 9402
Load Audit Trail to 9402
(((((( N/A ))))))
(((((( N/A ))))))
(((((( N/A ))))))
(((((( N/A ))))))
(((((( N/A ))))))
(((((( N/A ))))))
(((((( N/A ))))))
(((((( N/A ))))))
MSB
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
8-23
Chapter 8

15130
CAUTION!
32-Bit Command Word #2

Flow computer
computer. Any
before manipulating
statements.
LSB
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
B0
Decrease PID #1 Setpoint @ 1%

Rate
B16
Decrease PID #1 Valve @ 1%

Rate
B1
Increase PID #1 Setpoint @ 1%

Rate
B17
Increase PID #1 Valve @ 1%

Rate
B2
Decrease PID #1 Setpoint @

0.1% Rate
B18
Decrease PID #1 Valve @ 0.1%

Rate
B3
Increase PID #1 Setpoint @

0.1% Rate
B19
Increase PID #1 Valve @ 0.1%

Rate
B4

Rate
B20

Rate
B5

Rate
B21

Rate
B6

0.1% Rate
B22

Rate
B7

0.1% Rate
B23

Rate
B8

Rate
B24

Rate
B9

Rate
B25

Rate
B10

0.1% Rate
B26

Rate
B11

0.1% Rate
B27

Rate
B12

Rate
B28

Rate
B13

Rate
B29

Rate
B14

0.1% Rate
B30

Rate
B15

0.1% Rate
B31

Rate
MSB
15131
Raw Process Input - Input #1

Real-time, read-only! 1kHz~1mA.
to
15154
Raw Process Input - Input #24
15155
Spare
to
15199
8-24
Spare
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
Archive Data File Size

normal Omni Modbus
mode.
Modicon Compatible
still applies.
Information Only Data!

*
15200
Size of Text - Archive File
15201
Size of Archive - File 701
15202
15203
15204
15205
15206
15207
15208
15209
15210
15211
Spare
15212
Spare
15213
Archive File n Failed

Indicates which archive file failed; e.g.: if archive files 1-4 occupy allocated memory,
this point will read 5 (n=1-10). (See points 2623, 15200-15210, and 15214.)
Note:
* Archive Data File Size These variables contain

the number of bytes
each archive file uses
within memory. They are
updated when the
archiving process is
started and memory is
allocated. The maximum
memory that can be
allocated to this group of
variables is a total of
229359 bytes.
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
15214
Total Number of Archive Files Allocated
15215
Spare
to
17000
Spare
8-25
Chapter 8
8.4.
17001
INFO - These 32-bit IEEE

normal Omni Modbus
mode.
Modicon Compatible
applies.

IEEE Floating Point Data
Digital-to-Analog - Output #1 - @ 4mA
Engineering units which equal to 0%.
17002

Engineering units which equal to 100%.
to
17023
17024
17025
Pulses per Unit - Digital I/O #1
to
17048
Pulses per Unit - Digital I/O #24
17049
Pulses per Unit - Counter A
17050
Pulses per Unit - Counter B
17051
Pulses per Unit - Counter C
17052
PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - Low Limit

Setpoint download will be limited to this setting.
17053
PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - High Limit
17054
PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - @ 4mA
17055
PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - @ 20mA
17056
PID #1 - Primary Gain
17057
PID #1 - Primary Repeats/Minute
Setpoint download will be limited to this setting.

Note:
Sets the zero of the controller.
# Input expected is
engineering units.
Sets the maximum span of the controller.
17058
PID #1 - Secondary Value - @ Zero
17059
PID #1 - Secondary Value - @ Full Scale
17060
PID #1 - Secondary Gain
17061
PID #1 - Secondary Repeats/Minute
17062
PID #1 - Maximum Ramp Up Rate % - p/500 msec
17063
PID #1 - Secondary Setpoint
17064
PID #1 - Maximum Ramp Down Rate % - p/500msec
Limits rate of valve movement at startup only.
Limits the rate of valve movement at shutdown only.
17065
PID #1 - Min Output % - To Ramp To

This valve open % is used to slow the flow rate and complete the delivery (i.e., topoff).
17066
PID #1 - Deadband %
No change in output if the % error is less than this
8-26
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
17067
CAUTION!
Flow computer
computer. Any
before manipulating
statements.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
to
17081
PID #2 - Deadband %
17082
to
17096
PID #3 - Deadband %
17097
to
17111
PID #4 - Deadband %
17112
Output in Percent - Digital to Analog #1

Read-only, Live Value.
to
17123
Output in Percent - Digital to Analog #12

Read-only, Live Value.
17124
Spare
to
17135
Spare
17136
PID #1 - Primary Controlled Variable Value
17137
PID #1 - Secondary Controlled Variable Value
17138
PID #1 - Control Output %
17139
PID #1 - Primary Setpoint Value
17140
PID #1 - Secondary Setpoint Value
17141
Spare
to
17145
Spare
17146
to
17150
17151
Spare
to
17155
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Spare
8-27
Chapter 8

17156

normal Omni Modbus
mode.
Modicon Compatible
applies.
to
17160
17161
Spare
to
17165
Spare
17166
to
17170
17171
Spare
to
17175
Spare
17176
Meter #1 - Full Scale - Gross Flowrate

Used to scale integer volume flow rate variables 3140 & 3142.
17177
Meter #1 - Full Scale - Mass Flowrate

Used to scale integer mass flow rate variable 3144.
8-28
17178
Spare
17179
Meter #1 - Meter Factor
17180
17181
17182
Spare
17183
17184
17185
17186
Spare
17187
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
CAUTION!
Flow computer
computer. Any
before manipulating
statements.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
17188
17189
17190
Spare
17191
17192
Station - Full Scale - Gross
17193
Station - Full Scale - Mass
(Used to scale integer volume flow rate variables 3802 & 3804.
Used to scale integer mass flow rate variable 3806.
17194
Meter #1 - Venturi Pressure Loss %
17195
17196
17197
17198
Alarm Deadband %
0-5%. Global dead-band applied to all analog alarms. Variable must return this % out
of alarm for alarm to cancel.
17199
Spare
to
17229
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Spare
8-29
Chapter 8
8.5.
normal Omni Modbus
mode.
Product AGA-8 Component Override 32Bit IEEE Floating Point Data
Some of the data points listed below have two components displayed for each
point. The component to the left of the / is used when AGA 8 1992 or 1994 is
selected. The component to the right of the / is used when AGA 8 1985 is
selected.
The following points correspond to AGA 8, 1994/1992 and 1985. They represent
Product Mol % data.
AGA 8 - 1994/1992
AGA 8 - 1985
17230
Product #1 - Mol % - Methane
Nitrogen
17231
Product #1 - Mol % - Nitrogen
Carbon Dioxide
17232
Product #1 - Mol % - Carbon Dioxide
Hydrogen Sulfide
17233
Product #1 - Mol % - Ethane
Water
Modicon Compatible
applies.
17234
Product #1 - Mol % - Propane
Helium
17235
Product #1 - Mol % - Water
Methane
17236
Product #1 - Mol % - Hydrogen Sulfide
Ethane
17237
Product #1 - Mol % - Hydrogen
Propane
17238
Product #1 - Mol % - Carbon Monoxide
n-Butane
17239
Product #1 - Mol % - Oxygen
i-Butane
17240
Product #1 - Mol % - i-Butane
n-Pentane
17241
Product #1 - Mol % - n-Butane
i-Pentane
17242
Product #1 - Mol % - i-Pentane
n-Hexane
17243
Product #1 - Mol % - n-Pentane
n-Heptane
17244
Product #1 - Mol % - n-Hexane
n-Octane
17245
Product #1 - Mol % - n-Heptane
n-Nonane
17246
Product #1 - Mol % - n-Octane
n-Decane
17247
Product #1 - Mol % - n-Nonane
Oxygen
17248
Product #1 - Mol % - n-Decane
Carbon Monoxide
17249
Product #1 - Mol % - Helium
Hydrogen
17250
Product #1 - Mol % - Argon
Spare
17251
Product #1 - Viscosity
Centipoise or ca.s.
Note:
17252
Product #1 - Isentropic Exponent K
17253
Product #1 - Heating Value
replaced with live values

when using 4-20mA
inputs for Carbon
Dioxide, Nitrogen, BTU
or SG.
BTU / Ft or MJ/m .
# These variables are

17254
Product #1 - Reference Specific Gravity

Live value when using 4-20mA SG input.
17255
17256
Product #1 - Water Content
17257
Spare
to
17259
8-30
Spare
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
17260
CAUTION!
Points 17260-17286 correspond to AGA 8 - 1994/1992 & 1985. They represent

Product #2 Mol % data.
Flow computer
computer. Any
before manipulating
statements.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Product #2 - Methane / Nitrogen
to
17286
17287
Spare
to
17289
Spare
17290

to
17316
17317
Spare
to
17319
Spare
17320

to
17346
17347
Spare
to
17349
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Spare
8-31
Chapter 8
8.6.
normal Omni Modbus
mode.
Modicon Compatible
applies.
8-32
Gas Chromatograph 32-Bit IEEE Floating

Point Data
Data received from the gas chromatograph is stored here. This data is moved to
the correct product variable area (17230, etc.) in the order specified in points at
3770.
17350
Analyzer - Component #1
17351
17352
17353
17354
17355
17356
17357
17358
Analyzer -Component #9
17359
17360
17361
17362
17363
17364
17365
17366
17367
17368
17369
17370
17371
17372
17373
17374
17375
17376
17377
17378
17379
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
8.7.
!
CAUTION!
More Flow Computer Configuration

32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data
Flow computer
computer. Any
before manipulating
statements.
17380
Auxiliary Input #1 - Low limit
17381
Auxiliary Input #1 - High Limit
17382
Auxiliary Input #1 - Override Value
17383
Auxiliary Input #1 - @ 4mA
17384
17385
to
17389
17390
to
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
17394
17395
to
17399
17400
Spare
to
17479
Spare
17480
Run Switch - Threshold Low %
17481
Run Switch - Threshold High %
Differential pressure input % less then this flags that a meter run should be closed.
Differential pressure input % greater then this flags that a meter run should be
opened.
17482
Spare
to
17500
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Spare
8-33
Chapter 8

17501

normal Omni Modbus
mode.
Modicon Compatible
applies.
Meter #1 - K Factor #1
See 3122 for matching flow frequency entry.
17502
17503
17504
17505
17506
17507
17508
17509
17510
17511
17512
17513
Spare
to
17600
Spare
17601
to
17612
17613
Spare
to
17700
Spare
17701
to
17712
17713
Spare
to
17800
Spare
17801
to
17812
8-34
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
17813
CAUTION!
Flow computer
computer. Any
before manipulating
statements.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Spare
to
18100
8.8.
Spare
Product Previous Hourly and Daily

Averages - AGA 8 Mol % 32-Bit IEEE
Floating Point Data
Some of the data points listed below have two components displayed for each
point. The component to the left of the / is used when AGA-8 1992 or 1994 is
selected. The component to the right of the / is used when AGA-8 1985 is
selected. (Note: n = Product # 1, 2, 3 or 4.)
8.8.1.
Previous Hourly Averages
18n00
Spares
18n01
Mol % -
Methane
Nitrogen
18n02
Mol % -
Nitrogen
Carbon Dioxide
18n03
Mol % -
Carbon Dioxide
Hydrogen Sulfide
18n04
Mol % -
Ethane
Water
18n05
Mol % -
Propane
Helium
18n06
Mol % -
Water
Methane
AGA 8 - 1994/1992
AGA 8 - 1985
18n07
Mol % -
Hydrogen Sulfide
Ethane
18n08
Mol % -
Hydrogen
Propane
18n09
Mol % -
Carbon Monoxide
n-Butane
18n10
Mol % -
Oxygen
i-Butane
18n11
Mol % -
i-Butane
n-Pentane
18n12
Mol % -
n-Butane
i-Pentane
18n13
Mol % -
i-Pentane
n-Hexane
18n14
Mol % -
n-Pentane
n-Heptane
18n15
Mol % -
n-Hexane
n-Octane
18n16
Mol % -
n-Heptane
n-Nonane
18n17
Mol % -
n-Octane
n-Decane
18n18
Mol % -
n-Nonane
Oxygen
18n19
Mol % -
n-Decane
Carbon Monoxide
18n20
Mol % -
Helium
Hydrogen
18n21
Mol % -
Argon
Spare
18n22
Dry BTU
18n23
BTU Used
Gas Chromatograph information only (not used by Omni).
18n24
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
8-35
Chapter 8

18n25

normal Omni Modbus
mode.
Modicon Compatible
applies.
Spare
to
18n50
8.8.2.
Spare
Previous Daily Averages

AGA 8 - 1994/1992
AGA 8 - 1985
18n51
Mol % -
Methane
Nitrogen
18n52
Mol % -
Nitrogen
Carbon Dioxide
18n53
Mol % -
Carbon Dioxide
Hydrogen Sulfide
18n54
Mol % -
Ethane
Water
18n55
Mol % -
Propane
Helium
18n56
Mol % -
Water
Methane
18n57
Mol % -
Hydrogen Sulfide
Ethane
18n58
Mol % -
Hydrogen
Propane
18n59
Mol % -
Carbon Monoxide
n-Butane
18n60
Mol % -
Oxygen
i-Butane
18n61
Mol % -
i-Butane
n-Pentane
18n62
Mol % -
n-Butane
i-Pentane
18n63
Mol % -
i-Pentane
n-Hexane
18n64
Mol % -
n-Pentane
n-Heptane
18n65
Mol % -
n-Hexane
n-Octane
18n66
Mol % -
n-Heptane
n-Nonane
18n67
Mol % -
n-Octane
n-Decane
18n68
Mol % -
n-Nonane
Oxygen
18n69
Mol % -
n-Decane
Carbon Monoxide
18n70
Mol % -
Helium
Hydrogen
18n71
Mol % -
Argon
Spare
18n72
Dry BTU
18n73
BTU Used
Gas Chromatograph information only (not used by Omni).
18n74
18n75 Spare
to
18n99 Spare
8-36
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Modbus
Volume 4d
)
These addresses are
reserved for product
development.
Reserved
to
Note:
18500
18999
Reserved
19000
Reserved
to
19999
Reserved
20000
Reserved
to
29999
Reserved
30000
Reserved
to
39999
Reserved
40000
Reserved
49999
to
23/27.71+ ! 05/98
Reserved
8-37
Volume 5
User Manual
Technical Bulletins
960701 Overview of OmniCom Configuration PC Software
960702 Communicating with Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers
960703 Storing Archive Data within the Flow Computer
960704 Communicating with Honeywell ST3000 Smart Transmitters
970701 Stability Requirements: Final Calibration of Flow Computer
970702 Secondary Totalizers Provide Net Volume at Temperatures Other than 15C or 60F
970801 Using Boolean Statements to Provide Custom Alarms in the Flow Computer
970802 Omni Flow Computer Modbus Database: Overview
970803 Meter Factor Linearization
970804 Calculation of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy: Using Gas Chromatograph, Product Overrides or Live 4-20mA
Analyzer Inputs of Specific Gravity and Heating Value
970901 Dual Pulse Flowmeter Pulse Fidelity Checking

980201 Communicating with Honeywell TDC3000 Systems
980202 Recalculating a Previous Batch within the Flow Computer
980401 Peer-to-Peer Basics
980402 Using the Peer-to-Peer Function in a Redundant Flow Computer Application
980501 Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Sensor Interface Issues
980502 Communicating with Honeywell SMV3000 Multivariable Transmitters
980503 Serial I/O Modules: Installation Options
980504 Multivariable Flow Transmitter Interfaces: Serial Connectivity and Data Transfer Issues
980701 Using the Totalizer Maintenance Mode
980801 Unsolicited Transmissions of Custom Modbus Data Packets
980802 Digital I/O Modules: Installation Options
980803 Upgrading the Flow Computer Firmware
981101 Using the Audit Trail (Event Logger) Feature and Sealing of the Flow Computer
990101 Communicating with Instromet Q-Sonic Ultrasonic Gas Flowmeters
Effective May 1999
Date: 07
23
96
Author(s): Kenneth D. Elliott / Robert L. Stallard
TB # 960701
Overview of OmniCom Configuration PC

Software
Contents
User Manual Reference This technical bulletin
complements the information
contained in Volume 3,
Chapter 2 Flow Computer
Configuration, and is
applicable to all firmware
revisions.
This bulletin was previously
published as an appendix to
user manuals of firmware
revisions Version .70 and
earlier.
OmniCom Configuration
PC Software - This powerful
software package allows you
to setup, copy or modify, and
save to disk entire
configurations for Omni flow
computers. It also allows you
to create custom reports and
displays. You can work
online, offline and remotely.
Scope .............................................................................................................. 2
Abstract........................................................................................................... 2
Configuring the Flow Computer.................................................................... 2
Report Configurator ....................................................................................... 3
Operations Utilities and Help......................................................................... 3
Dial-up Access................................................................................................ 3
Passwords Using OmniCom.......................................................................... 3
Local Keypad Access ................................................................................................4
Changing Passwords at the Keypad ..........................................................................4
Setting Up the Initial 'Level B' and 'Level C' Passwords for each Modbus Port............5
Maintaining the Modbus Port Password Using OmniCom ........................................5
Disabling Modbus Port Passwords ............................................................................6
Getting Started ............................................................................................... 6

Installation Requirements..........................................................................................6
Installation Procedure ...............................................................................................6
Opening a File ..........................................................................................................7
View .........................................................................................................................7
Off-line......................................................................................................................7
On-line......................................................................................................................7
Reports.....................................................................................................................8
Utilities......................................................................................................................8
I/O Point Assignment List ................................................................................................................ 8
OmniCom Setup ........................................................................................................................... 8
OmniCom Application .................................................................................................................... 9
Archive Start/Stop Command .......................................................................................................... 9
Prover Commands......................................................................................................................... 10
Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................... 10
Omni Front Panel Emulator ........................................................................................................... 10
Help........................................................................................................................10
Registration of License and Software Support .........................................................11
TB-960701 w ALL REVS
Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 Flow Computers
Technical Bulletin
Scope
OmniCom Software is compatible with all firmware revisions of Omni
6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers. It is installed in a personal computer from
which you can configure your flow computer.
Abstract
OmniCom is a simple-to-use yet sophisticated PC-based configuration program
that can be used to setup, copy or modify, and save to disk entire configurations
for Omni flow computers. You can also select custom report options and modify
report templates and Omni display screens that are resident within the program,
or create new ones. These can then be uploaded to the flow computer. Default
reports provide standard data and formats for most requirements.
Major application programming has already been developed by Omni and is
resident in EPROM. This is of particular importance in custody transfer
measurement contracts. They require that the relevant API, AGA, GPA or ISO
standards are fully implemented and not exposed to tampering.
The OmniCom program allows you to develop your own system requirements
by a simple process of menu selection and table completion. This replicates the
data entry tables which can be accessed through the front panel keypad of your
Omni Flow Computer.
Configuring the Flow Computer

For Further Help - If you
require further help, call
Omnis technical support at:
( +1-281-240-6161
Configuring the flow computer involves specifying what transducers are going to
be used, their calibrated ranges and the physical I/O points being assigned.
Other data needed by the flow computer relates to the flowing product to be
measured, the type of calculations to be used, and communication and control
features.
You will usually configure the flow computer in the Off-line Mode and then
upload your data. You do not have to be connected to the flow computer at this
time. You will usually go to the Online Menu only when you need to
communicate directly with the flow computer. Any changes made are
immediately reflected in the flow computer.
Overview of OmniCom
TB-960701
Report Configurator
One of OmniCom's indispensable features is the ability to reformat default
reports by using OmniCom's report templates. This is the ONLY feature not
available through the front panel keypad. Any variable defined in the Modbus
database, or programmed as a variable can be inserted into a report with
accompanying text. Reports can be created in languages other than English to
suit local needs.
Operations Utilities and Help

Accessing Help in
OmniCom - At the 'Using
Help' feature, press [Enter]
and [F1] for editing
keystrokes.

( +1-281-240-6161
Operational tools such as remotely proving meters, and reading hardware

diagnostics are provided. Diagrams are also provided for communications cable
hook-up. Application Programs and PC Setup for OmniCom can also be
selected. As you work through the entries, you will find entry-sensitive Help that
explains the meaning of the particular entry. Whether at the flow computer
keypad or at a PC there is always assistance.
Dial-up Access
Omni Flow Computers encourages the installation of a telephone dial-up
modem as a ready means of providing installation and maintenance support for
customer and vendor alike. Serial communication passwords provide enhanced
security. Three levels of password pre-exist within Omni flow computers to
provide privileged or restricted access to critical configuration and calibration
data.
The OmniCom program allows you to upload/download data to and from the
flow computer in an on-line mode at a range of baud rates by direct-wire or by
telephone dial-up modem access. This is particularly useful when the flow
computer is in use. Occasionally, you will want to modify configuration or
calibration data, or just monitor activity. You can do all this without interfering
with pipeline or process operations or with communication links to host SCADA
or DCS systems.
Passwords Using OmniCom

Except when changing transducer high/low alarm limits, a password is usually
asked for when changing the configuration data within the computer.
The flow computer has independent password protection of the following:
INFO - For Firmware
Revisions 70+, Physical
Serial Port #1 is selectable
as a Modbus RTU, Modbus
RTU (modem), or printer
port. This serial port on
previous revisions was only a
printer port.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Local Keypad access

Modbus Port #1 (Physical serial Port #1)
Technical Bulletin
Local Keypad Access

Three password levels are provided:
a) Privileged Level - Allows complete access to all entries within the flow
computer including keypad passwords (b) and (c) below. The initial
privileged password for each Modbus port is selected via this password
level.
b) Level 1 - This level allows technician access to most entries within the
flow computer with the exception of I/O Points assignments,
programmable variables and Boolean statements and passwords other
than Keypad level 1.
c) Level 1A - Allows access to the following entries:
Meter factors and K Factors
Densitometer correction factors (pycnometer factor)
d) Level 2 - Allows access to the operator type entries. These entries
include:
Transducer manual overrides
Product gravity overrides
Prover operations
Batching operations
Changing Passwords at the Keypad

1) At the keypad press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter]
2) With the cursor blinking on 'Misc Configuration' press [Enter]
3) With the cursor blinking on 'Password Main?'
press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter]
4) Enter the 'Privileged Level' Password (up to 6 characters) press [Enter]
5) The 'Level 1',Level 1A and 'Level 2' passwords can now be viewed and
changed if required.
INFO - Level B and Level C
port cannot be viewed or
changed from the keypad.
6) Scroll down to access each of the Modbus serial port 'Level A'
passwords. These are labeled 'Ser1Passwd', Ser2 Passwd', 'Ser3
Passwd' and Ser4 Passwd corresponding to the physical port numbering
for Modbus Ports 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively.
TB-960701
Overview of OmniCom
Setting Up the Initial 'Level B' and 'Level C' Passwords for
each Modbus Port
7) Enter an initial 'Level A' Password for the appropriate physical serial port
at the keypad of the Omni Flow Computer as described above.
8) Connect a PC running OmniCom Software to the selected serial port of
the Omni Flow Computer. Open a file and 'Receive Omni Configuration
Data'.
9) A red pop-up screen will appear which notes that a password is required
to proceed. If any other screen appears at this point, check wiring and
communication settings, Modbus ID, baud rate, etc.
10) Do not enter the 'Level A' password at this point. Keep pressed [Alt] as
you press [E] to edit the passwords. A second red pop-up screen will
appear asking for the 'current valid password'. A good practice would be
to use uppercase letters (activate [CapsLock] on the keyboard) because
when setting passwords from the flow computers keypad, they are
always entered in uppercase.
11) Enter the 'Level A' password that was selected for this serial port.
12) You are asked if you would like to change the 'Level A', 'Level B' and
'Level C' passwords. Select to change 'Level B' at this point. You will be
asked to enter a password. As you enter the password, asterisks will
show in place of the characters you typed. You will be asked to re-enter
the password to ensure that what you typed was correct.
13) To setup a Level C password, repeat Steps 2 and 6 substituting Level
C for Level B at Step 6.
Maintaining the Modbus Port Password Using OmniCom

After the initial passwords have been setup for each of the Modbus serial ports
as shown above, they may be changed at any time while logged on with
OmniCom.
1) While keeping pressed the [Alt] key, press [E] at any time and the popup screen appears asking for a password. This screen can be forced to
appear by keeping pressed [Alt] as you press [P] while viewing any
editing screen; i.e., any screen with data fields that can be edited.
2) When asked, enter your current password. Password Level B and
Level C users are allowed to change only their own password levels.
Level A password users can change levels A, B and C.
Technical Bulletin
Disabling Modbus Port Passwords

INFO - Level B and Level C
(serial) port cannot be viewed
or changed from the keypad;
i.e., you must use OmniCom
to view, change or delete
these password levels.
Level B and Level C passwords should be disabled via OmniCom (see

sidebar) before disabling the privileged Level A password at the keypad.
1) To disable each password proceed as though you are going to change or
set-up the password.
2) Press the [Delete] key six (6) times where the initial password was
entered followed by the [Enter] key (no asterisks will show).
3) When asked to re-enter the password, re-enter six [Delete] key presses
followed by the [Enter] key.
4) Repeat this procedure for both Level B and Level C passwords.
5) From the Omni flow computer keypad, delete the 'Level A' password for
the appropriate Modbus serial port (see Volume 3). To do this, move the
cursor to the serial Level A password to disable and press the [Clear]
key and then the [Enter] key.
Getting Started
CAUTION!
Terminate and Stay Resident
(TSR) programs such as
SideKick and Keyboard
Macro processors can affect
the operation of high speed
communication programs
such as OmniCom. They do
this by 'stealing' processor
cycles or turning off the
hardware interrupt system of
the personal computer.
These programs may have to
be disabled when you are in
the 'On-line' Mode, if you
encounter difficulties
communicating with the
Omni flow computer.
Installation Requirements
To properly run OmniCom, and have sufficient memory for report templates
and copies of the database, you will require the following:
IBM PC (or compatible)
MS DOS, V3.3 or later (excepting 4.01)
640Kb RAM
20Mb Free Hard Disk Space with a minimum of one floppy disk drive,
3" 1.44 Mb
Monochrome or color monitor with EGA or VGA graphics capability
One RS-232 serial port
One LPT port (optional)
One RS-232 modem (optional at various supported baud rates)
Installing OmniCom
Revisions Previous to 70 Before you install earlier
revisions of OmniCom
software, you must save your
existing phone directory
entries and setup. For
instructions and any other
assistance you may need,
please contact our technical
support staff at the following
phone number:
( +1-281-240-6161
Installation Procedure
OmniCom is delivered on 1.44 Mb, 3" diskettes in an archived format. To
install, do the following:
1) Insert the diskette into your PC's corresponding floppy disk drive.
2) Type the respective drive letter followed by a colon (e.g.: A: or B).
3) Type Install and press [Enter].
The OmniCom installation program will guide you through the rest of the
installation.
Overview of OmniCom
TB-960701
Opening a File
Accessing Help in
keystrokes.

( +1-281-240-6161
First open an existing Omni-supplied file. Each application and derived files
come with their own set of templates. You can then 'SAVE AS' to create a new
file to commence your configuration. Each file that you create will occupy
approximately 60 Kbytes of disk space. This includes 36 Kbytes for the
configuration file and 6 Kbytes for each of the four custom report templates.
All menu selections are supported by entry-sensitive Help. No matter where
you are, by pressing [F1] you can obtain an explanation of the requirements for
your entry selection.
View
Files can be viewed separately or in parallel with a file that is currently being
edited. This allows you to compare various numeric entries in similar files. This
can be helpful if you are maintaining historical files that track changes you have
made. You may not be able to use the View feature with certain variations of
flow computer configuration files because newer firmware include additional
entry fields not available in earlier revisions.
Off-line
You will usually begin in the Off-line Mode to configure your flow computer. It
naturally leads in to the 'Omni Configuration' Menu selections. Only when you
complete this section will you be able to activate the various 'Setup' options and
proceed to establish your calibration ranges and other related data. Before you
begin the configuration of I/O, be sure you know what number and type of
physical I/O has been installed in the flow computer. A mismatch between your
off-line configuration and physical hardware will not make a data upload to the
flow computer meaningful in key areas of your configuration data.
On-line
When you have completed building your configuration database, you are then
ready to upload data to your Omni flow computer. The OmniCom program uses
the Modbus RTU binary protocol which mandates the use of 8 data bits. Be
sure that the serial I/O parameters in both devices have been properly setup
before attempting to communicate. Baud rate and parity settings are less critical
but must also be the same.
With a direct-connect to a PC, OmniCom will perform an auto baud rate search
and display an error if baud rates are incompatible (see 2.5.16. Serial
Input/Output Settings in Volume 3). Baud rates from 1.2 kbps to 38.4 kbps
are supported. When using a modem, the auto baud rate search is not
performed. In this case, the baud rate is that at which the modem is setup.
Some personal computers may not have the processing power to support the
higher baud rates. Note also that modems are capable of using a higher baud
rate at the RS-232 connector than they are communicating on the telephone
line. If the modems connect but the flow computer does not respond, try
adjusting the flow computers baud rate.
Technical Bulletin
Reports
The 'Report' Menu allows you to retrieve snapshot and historical reports from
the flow computer or from your hard disk. These are pre-formatted default
reports that are included in the Omni application software. You can also
customize your own reports from standard templates. By using the on-screen
report editor, you can add or delete text and data character strings which
identify the variable in the computer's Modbus database. [F1] for help
describes the control functions to enable you to format the report easily. Bring
up a report template and move the cursor onto the 'XXXX.XX' fields. Press
[Enter] and a pop-up menu defines the variable being used. Type or edit text
anywhere, move the cursor and keeping pressed [Shift] as you press [$]
enables you to enter or delete any database address from the report.
Utilities
The Utilities Menu has several useful tools for setting up and maintaining
OmniCom. The utilities available are:
q
q
q
q
I/O Point Assignment List

OmniCom Setup
OmniCom Application
Archive Maintenance
q Prover/Batch
Commands
q Diagnostics
q Omni Panel
End
I/O Point Assignment List

When the configuration of your flow computer is complete, you should review
your assignment of physical I/O by accessing the display under 'I/O Point
Assignment List'. An I/O mismatch can result in erroneous calibration ranges
and consequential errors in measurement and control of your metering system!
This utility shows a summary list that indicates what physical I/O points are
assigned to which variables. Point numbers with asterisks '*' next to them are
used for more than one variable. Check the list to ensure you have not assigned
a physical I/O point to more than one transducer type; e.g.: An I/O point cannot
be assigned to a temperature and pressure transmitter at the same time. The
flow computer will not allow this to happen in the On-line mode, but OmniCom
does not check for this in the Off-line mode.
OmniCom Setup
This utility allows you to:
q Select the type of video monitor.
q Turn the sound effects on/off.
q Setup the modem command strings.
Overview of OmniCom
TB-960701
OmniCom Application
Use this utility before you start to select the software version of OmniCom that
matches the firmware version number of your Omni flow computer. The
firmware versions are:
US VERSIONS
Turbine / Positive Displacement /
Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering
20
Systems (with K Factor
Linearization)
21
Orifice / Differential Pressure

Liquid Flow Metering Systems
Turbine / Positive Displacement

22 Liquid Flow Metering Systems
(with Meter Factor Linearization)
23
Orifice / Turbine Gas Flow

Metering Systems
M ETRIC VERSIONS
Turbine / Positive Displacement /
Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering
24
Systems (with K Factor
Linearization)
25
Orifice / Differential Pressure

Liquid Flow Metering Systems
Turbine / Positive Displacement

26 Liquid Flow Metering Systems
(with Meter Factor Linearization)
27
Orifice / Turbine Gas Flow

Metering Systems
Archive Start/Stop Command
WARNING!
Warning: The flow computer
will not accept changes made
to the archive setup at the
time of a 'Transmit Omni
Configuration' upload unless
the archiving feature has
been turned off.
Accessing Help in
keystrokes.
When this menu is entered, OmniCom tries to establish communications with

the flow computer using the comm parameter settings currently selected in the
'Start Comm' submenu of the 'Online' menu. It does this to establish the status
of the 'Archive' flag and 'Archive Config Enable' flag. Check comm settings if all
items on the menu are inactive; i.e., OmniCom is unable to communicate with
the target computer.
Any changes made to the flow computers configuration which involves the
format of the data record, number of records in an archive file, or the total
number of archive files within the flow computer, will cause the memory used to
store the archive data to be reinitialized. This would cause all data stored in
archive to be lost. Therefore, no changes to the target flow computers archive
configuration will be allowed unless automatic data archiving has been disabled
and the 'Archive Config Enable' flag is on.

( +1-281-240-6161
Technical Bulletin
Prover Commands
Proving features displayed here can only be viewed when communicating
directly with an Omni Flow Computer.
You may monitor or control the operation of a meter prover which is controlled
by a remote Omni flow computer. You must have already established
communications with the flow computer before making this selection. If you
have not established communications with a flow computer you will receive one
of the following error messages:
Byte count does not match expected - OmniCom is confused and thinks
your modem is connected to a flow computer. Try dialing out first.
No response from Omni - You are either not connected to anything or the
slave ID number of the flow computer you are trying to talk to does not
match OmniCom's setting.
Use the 'Shift' key with the appropriate 'Function' key to select the flowmeter
you wish to remote prove.
The 'Status Window' shows the event history and the 'Omni Display' echoes
data shown locally at the Omni flow computer.
Diagnostics
You must be connected and online with a flow computer for this selection to
work. The screen displays diagnostic information about the flow computer
such as number and type of I/O modules fitted, status of digital I/O, current
output percent of analog outputs and raw input signals coming into the flow
computer.
Omni Front Panel Emulator

When this feature is selected, an illustration of the Omni front panel is displayed
by which all the functions of an Omni Flow computer are emulated. Use the
mouse to click on simulated buttons to access real time displays and make
entries. OmniCom is actually displaying the same LCD display buffer
information and the mouse click are actually sending data into the same key
stroke buffer as the front panel keypad. Performance is much better at 9600
baud or higher. You must have setup the baud rate and other communication
settings in the 'Start Comm' menu before you can use Omni Panel.
Help
Accessing Help in
keystrokes.
10
You can further customize your Help screens by making use of an on-screen
editor. Via this feature you can modify Help text by additions or deletions to suit
your own needs and operations. Windows can be resized and repositioned to
suit your own personal preference. This can be particularly useful as an
additional memory aid, if the Operations Manual is not available to you, or if
additional information is required for other users of this program.
TB-960701
Overview of OmniCom
Registration of License and Software Support

( +1-281-240-6161
Remember to mail in the registration of your distribution diskette to Omni flow

computers. OmniCom is provided with each Omni flow computer on a singleuser license basis. Any additional installations of this program will require reregistration by the user. This will ensure that you will have the opportunity to
receive free telephone support, and notice of program revisions and new addon programs for your installation.
11
Date: 07
23
96
TB # 960702
Communicating with Allen-Bradley
Programmable Logic Controllers

Contents
contained in the User
Manuals, and is applicable
to all firmware revisions.
earlier.
Allen-Bradley
Communications - This
feature allows
communicating with AllenBradley PLCs. However,
Omni Flow Computers is not
responsible for the operation,
connectivity or compatibility
of Allen-Bradley products,
and furthermore, we do not
warrant these products.
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract........................................................................................................... 2
Protocol and Error Checking......................................................................... 2
PLC Supported ............................................................................................... 2
Flow Computer Database............................................................................... 2
4th and 5th Digit from the Right Identifies Type of Variable........................................2
3rd Digit from Right Identifies which Area within the Application .................................3
How the Allen-Bradley

Accesses the Omni Flow Computer Database..... 3
PLC-2 .......................................................................................................................3
PLC-3 .......................................................................................................................3
PLC-5 .......................................................................................................................3
Valid Starting Addresses of PLC-5 Files ....................................................................4
16-Bit Integers ................................................................................................................................. 4
8-Character Strings ......................................................................................................................... 4
32-Bit Integers ................................................................................................................................. 4
32-Bit IEEE Floating Points ............................................................................................................. 4
Bit Integers ...................................................................................................................................... 4
16-Character Strings ....................................................................................................................... 4
32-Bit Integers ................................................................................................................................. 4
32-Bit IEEE Floating Points ............................................................................................................. 4
Scope
All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers allow
communications with Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs).
This technical bulletin refers to communication aspects specific to the Omni
Flow Computer and serves as information only. Please refer to the
manufacturer for any support or information on Allen-Bradley products.
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
The Omni 6000 flow computer provides serial communications between the
flow computer and an Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controller (PLC),
usually via a KE or KF Communication Module connected to the Data Highway.
Data is transmitted serially at a maximum rate of 38.4 kbps using 8 data bits, 1
stop bit and no parity bit. Average speed of response to a message request is
approximately 75 msec.
Protocol and Error Checking

Both the DFI full duplex protocol and the half duplex protocol are supported.
CRC or BCC error checking can be utilized when using either full duplex or half
duplex.
PLC Supported
The Omni computer supports the following Allen-Bradley PLC types and
messages. Note that bit level operations are not supported.
PLC-2
PLC-3
PLC-5
SLC-502/3
Unprotected Block Reads and Writes

Word Range Reads and Writes
Typed Reads and Writes
Unprotected Typed Reads and Writes
Flow Computer Database

Serial Ports #1, #2, #3 and #4 in .71+ firmware revisions support
communications using superset of Modbus Protocol. This is the native
communications language of the flow computer. Several thousand variables are
available within the Database. The primary numbering system used to identify
these variables is their 'index number'. The actual digits of the index number
indicate the type of variable and in many cases application area within the
computer.
4th and 5th Digit from the Right Identifies Type of

Variable
1???
3???
4???
5???
7???
8???
13???
14???
Variable is a digital status or command bit

Variable is a 16 bit signed integer
Variable is a 8 character ASCII string
Variable is a 32 bit IEEE floating point
Variable is a 32 bit IEEE floating point
Variable is a 16 character ASCII string
15??? Variable is a 32 bit signed integer

17??? Variable is a 32 bit IEEE floating point
TB-960702
Communicating with Allen-Bradley

Programmable Logic Controllers
3rd Digit from Right Identifies which Area within the

Application
?1??
?2??
?3??
?4??
?5??
?6??
?7??
?8??
?9??
Variable relates to Meter Run #1

Variable is scratchpad
Variable is PID related or scratchpad
Variable is a command write.
Variable is related to station functions
Variable is related to prover functions
How the Allen-Bradley

Accesses the Omni
Flow Computer Database
PLC-2
This family is usually limited as to the type of data and address range. Data is
always transferred as block reads and writes.
Five translation tables are provided where the user can specify what data within
the database will be concatenated into read or write groups. The starting
address of each data block is selectable.
Note: The PLC2 does not
understand 32-bit integer or
32-bit IEEE floating points
but can pass these variable
types to devices that do
understand them.
o Translation Tables #1 through #3 are used to set up block reads which

can contain status points packed 16 to a word, 16-bit or 32-bit integers
and IEEE floating points.
o Translation Table #4 is used for block writes of status and command bits
only. Data is packed 16 to a word.
o Translation Table #5 provides for block writes to any selected data.
PLC-3
This family can use the methods described above as well as 'word range reads
and writes' of any variable within the database (see PLC-5 list for starting
addresses).
PLC-5
This family utilizes 'typed reads and writes' of the complete Database. To
accommodate the PLC-5 'file system method of addressing, the Modbus index
numbers serve as the basis of the internal file system of the computers as it
appears to a PLC-5 device. Table below shows typical examples:
Technical Bulletin
MODBUS INDICES VERSUS PLC-5 ADDRESSES

M ODBUS INDEX #
PLC-5 ADDRESS
ELEMENT SIZE
COMMENT
1101
N11:01
1 Word (16 Flags)
Meter #1 Status Flags
1217
N12:17
1 Word (16 Flags)
Meter #2 Status Flags
1701
N17:01
1 Word (16 Flags)
Command Flags
3201
N32:01
1 Word (Integer)
Meter #1 Data
3210
N32:10
1 Word (Integer)
Offsets track
3901
N39:01
1 Word (integer)
Prover Data
4101
B41:01
1 Byte (ASCII)
4 Words per Variable
4102
B41:02
1 Byte (ASCII)
1 Byte per element
5101
N51:01
1 Word (Long Integer)
2 Words per variable
5102
N51:02
5103
N51:03
Same again
7401
F74:01
2 Words (IEEE Float)
7405
F74:05
2 Words (IEEE Float)
Offsets track
Valid Starting Addresses of PLC-5 Files

16-Bit Integers
N10:01 N11:01 N12:01 N13:01 N14:01 N15:01 N16:01 N17:01 N18:01 N19:01
N30:01 N31:01 N32:01 N33:01 N34:01 N35:01 N36:01 N37:01 N38:01 N39:01
8-Character Strings
B41:01 B42:01 B43:01 B44:01 B45:01 B46:01 B47:01 B48:01 B49:01
32-Bit Integers
N51:01 N52:01 N53:01 N54:01 N55:01 N58:01 N59:01
32-Bit IEEE Floating Points

F70:01
F71:01
F72:01
F73:01
F74:01
F75:01
F76:01
F77:01
F78:01
F79:01
Bit Integers
N130:01 N134:01
16-Character Strings
B140:01
32-Bit Integers
N150:01
32-Bit IEEE Floating Points

F170:01
Date: 07
23
96
TB # 960703
Storing Archive Data within the Flow

Computer
Contents
contained in Volume 2 and
Volume 3, and is applicable
to all firmware revisions 71+.
earlier.
Data Archiving - The

archiving feature allows you
to store raw data, ASCII text
data and historical reports.
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract........................................................................................................... 2
Raw Data Archiving........................................................................................ 2
Retrieving Data .........................................................................................................3
Raw Data Archive Point Addresses ...........................................................................4
Archive Configuration Changes .................................................................................5
Setting the 'Reconfig Archive' Flag .................................................................................................. 6
Possible Loss of Data when Starting and Stopping the Archive ...................................................... 6
Defining the Archive Records .......................................................................................................... 6
How The Available Memory Is Allocated....................................................................7

Checking The Archive File Memory Status Screens ...................................................8
Summary 0f Raw Data Archiving Features ................................................................9
Raw Data Archive Definition: Alarm/Event Log and Audit Event Log....... 10
Alarm/Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address 711 ..................................10
Audit Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address 712. ..................................10
Using The Custom Reports to Access the Text Archive Feature .............. 11
Custom Report Templates ........................................................................... 12
Scope
All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the
archiving feature. This feature allows you to archive raw data, ASCII data and
historical reports.
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
Definitions & Terminology
Archive Address - A unique
Modbus address used to
read a data record from an
archive file. These addresses
are in the 700 series; i.e.,
701, 702, 703, etc.
Archive Record - A
structure containing a fixed
set of data variables which
cannot exceed 250 bytes in
length. Data within the record
can be of any valid data type
in any order.
Archive Trigger Boolean The actual event which
causes the flow computer to
capture and store a record
within the archive file. The
trigger can be any Boolean
including the result of a
Boolean statement.
Block Read - Modbus
protocol block read requires
that Function Code 03 (read
multiple registers) be used to
retrieve data.
Circular Archive File - A file
of n records arranged as a
circular buffer which always
contains the most recent n
records; i.e., the oldest data
record is overwritten by each
new record as it is added.
Current Record Pointer - A
16-bit read-only integer
register containing a number
between 0 and n,
representing the position of
the most recently added
record within the archive file.
The pointer is adjusted after
each complete record is
added. A value of 0 indicates
that no data records have
been added since the last
initialization of the archive
memory.
(Continues)
The flow computer provides three distinct methods of storing data. These are as
follows:
1) Raw Data Archive
Data records are defined and stored in raw binary

format in circular files of 'n' records per file. Ten
user configurable files are provided as well as an
alarm file and audit trail file. This data can be
retrieved using standard Modbus Function Codes
3 and 6.
2) Text Archive Data
ASCII data which is captured and saved whenever a

Snapshot, Daily, Batch End or Prove report is
printed. Data is stored chronologically. To retrieve
this data you must use OmniCom, OmniView or
a custom Modbus driver which understands the
proprietary Omni Modbus Function Codes 64 and
65.
3) Historical Reports These are exact copies of data that was sent to the
local printer in ASCII format. The flow computer
stores the last eight copies of each of the following
reports: Daily, Batch End and Prove.
Method 3 is limited to storing the last eight reports and is therefore not
considered archive data. Therefore this chapter will be limited to describing how
Methods 1 and 2 are used to store archive data within the flow computer.
Raw Data Archiving

A maximum of ten archive files can be user configured. Two additional
archive files, the alarm archive and audit trail archive are also included but are
fixed in format and cannot be user configured.
Each user configurable archive file consists of 'n' archive records, where 'n' is
defined by the user. A record consists of a time and date stamp followed by a
number of user defined variables of any valid data type as described by its
archive record definition table. The amount of memory an archive consumes is
calculated by multiplying the record size in bytes times the number of records in
the archive. Associated with each archive file is an archive trigger Boolean.
Data is captured and stored in each of the archive files whenever the
appropriate trigger occurs; e.g., at the end of a batch or beginning of the day,
etc. Three additional registers per archive file serve to indicate (a) maximum
number of records, (b) current record pointer and (c) requested record to read
pointer.
TB-960703
Storing Archive Data within the Flow Computer
Retrieving Data
Definitions & Terminology
(Continued)
Maximum Records
Register - A 16-bit readonly integer adjacent to the
Current Record Pointer
which contains the number
n, indicating the maximum
number of records within the
archive file.
Requested Record Pointer
- A 16-bit read/write integer
used to select a specific
record within an archive file.
Time and Date Stamp - Six
bytes of binary data
representing the date and
time that the archive record
was stored. The byte order is
as follows:
q Byte 1 = Month (1-12) or
Day (1-31)
q Byte 2 = Day (1-31) or
Month (1-12)
q Byte 3 = Year (0-99)
q Byte 4 = Hour of Day (023)
q Byte 5 = Minute (0-59)
q Byte 6 = Seconds (0-59)
q European Format
Selected (dd/mm/yy)
Valid Data Types q 32-bit IEEE floating point
data
q 32-bit long integer data
q 16-bit integer data
q 8-byte ASCII string data;
byte packed Boolean
status data
Data records are retrieved one record at a time by writing the number of the
record required, to the requested record pointer register. The data can then
be accessed immediately by a block read of the archive address. Data must
be read as one complete block. Also, because the flow computer always
responds with a complete record, the 'number of registers' field of the Modbus
poll request is ignored by the flow computer.
The following record retrieval method is simple and efficient; it works well
assuming that there is only one host device retrieving data. The method
assumes that the number of the last record retrieved is left in the requested
record pointer within the flow computer. This will not be the case when more
than one host device will be retrieving data; in this case each host device must
know the number of the last record it retrieved.
1) Read the maximum records register, current record pointer and
requested record pointer. These registers are adjacent to each other in
the flow computers database.
2) A current record pointer value of 0 indicates that the archive file has
been initialized (i.e. cleared to binary zeroes/ASCII Nulls) and no trigger
event has occurred since initialization).
3) Compare the contents (just read) of the current record pointer with the
requested record pointer.
4) If the records numbers are equal no additional records have been added
since the last read and no further action is needed.
5) If the record numbers are not equal, increment the value of requested
record pointer.
6) If the resultant value is greater than the value obtained from the
maximum record pointer, roll-over has occurred and record number
one should be retrieved by writing '1' to the requested record pointer
register. Otherwise write the incremented value to the requested record
pointer register.
7) After writing to the requested record pointer register in the flow
computer, the selected archive record can be read immediately using
Modbus function '3' (read multiple registers). Archive file addresses are in
the 700 area of the flow computers database (i.e., archive file 1 = 701,
archive file 2 = 702 etc.).
8) Repeat steps 3 through 7 until all records are read.
During the normal course of events, the host attempts to read the next record in
sequence based on the number of the last record it retrieved. An archive
record containing binary 0s indicates that the archive has been initialized since
the last read and that the host should restart by reading record number one
(assuming that the current record pointer is not 0).
Technical Bulletin
Raw Data Archive Point Addresses
Archive #1
Record Access Address

Access Record Date/Time Only
Maximum # of Records
Last Record Updated Pointer
Record Req To Read Pointer
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0701
0751
3701
3702
3703
Archive #2

Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0702
0752
3704
3705
3706
Archive #3

Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0703
0753
3707
3708
3709
Archive #4

Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0704
0754
3710
3711
3712
Archive #5

Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0705
0755
3713
3714
3715
Archive #6

Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0706
0756
3716
3717
3718
Archive #7

Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0707
0757
3719
3720
3721
Archive #8

Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0708
0758
3722
3723
3724
Archive #9

Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0709
0759
3725
3726
3727
TB-960703
Archive #10

Record Req To Read Pointer4
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0710
0760
3728
3729
3730
Alarm Archive Record Access Address

Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0711
0761
3731
3732
3733
Audit Archive
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0712
0762
3734
3735
3736

Archive Configuration Changes

Archive configuration changes can be made via OmniCom or directly from the
key-pad of the flow computer. As the OmniCom program includes extensive
help screens which document this subject, this appendix will concentrate on
configuring the archive features via the keypad.
From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter]. The LCD screen
displays:
*** SETUP MENU ***
Time/Date Setup
Station Setup
Select 'Misc. Configuration' and press [Enter]. The following displays:
*** MISC SETUP ***
Password Maint?(Y) _
Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station?(Y)
Select 'Password Maint' and press [Enter]. Enter the privileged password
when prompted and scroll down the screen until the following is displayed:
PASSWORD MAINTENANCE
Reconfig Archive ? Y
Archive Run?(Y/N) N
Reset All Totals ?
Technical Bulletin
Setting the 'Reconfig Archive' Flag

Any configuration changes that are made to any of the archive files such as
changes to the size or number of records will force the flow computer to
reallocate and clear to zero the RAM memory used to store archive data. To
avoid accidental data loss, the flow computer requires that two entries are
manipulated correctly before changes to the archive configuration can be made.
The 'Reconfig Archive' flag must be set to 'Y and the Archive Run' flag must
be set to 'N'.
Possible Loss of Data when Starting and Stopping the Archive

To conserve archive storage, the user may on some occasions wish to set the
'Archive Run' flag to 'N' . This can be done at any time without loss of existing
data as long as the 'Reconfig Archive' flag is not set to 'Y'. If the 'Reconfig
Archive' flag is accidentally set to 'Y' no data will be lost until the 'Archive Run'
flag is set to 'Y' (this allows the user to retrieve data before it is lost).
Defining the Archive Records

After setting the 'Reconfig Archive' flag to 'Y' as described above, press the
[Prog] key once to return to the 'Misc Setup' menu. It will be possible to define
or change any archive file configuration by scrolling down the display until the
following screen is displayed:
*** MISC SETUP ***
Archive File "n" _
Enter a number between 1 and 10 to select a specific archive file to modify (1
for example). The following screen will display:
ARCHIVE 701 RECORD
#1 Index
0
#1 Points
0
#2 Index
0
#2 Points
0
Begin entering the data that you require to be archived. The example below will
cause variables 7101, 7102, 7103, 5101, 5102 and 5103 to be archived.
INFO - The Alarm and
Audit Trail archive files are
fixed format and cannot be
changed.
ARCHIVE 701 RECORD

#1 Index
7101
#1 Points
3
#2 Index
5101
#2 Points
3
TB-960703
A maximum of 16 groups of variables may be included in an archive record.

Data can be of any valid type. The record is limited to a total of 250 data bytes
remembering that the time and date stamp included in each record occupies 6
bytes. Scrolling down the screen displays the following:
ARCHIVE 701 RECORD
Max Records
0
Trig Boolean
0
Circular Archive File - A file
of n records arranged as a
circular buffer which always
contains the most recent n
records; i.e., the oldest data
record is overwritten by each
new record as it is added.
Enter the maximum number of archive records to be contained within this

circular archive file.
At the 'Trig Boolean' entry, enter the database address of the Boolean trigger
which will cause the flow computer to store the archive data record. For
example, entering 1831 (the 'hour start flag) would cause the flow computer to
store data at hourly intervals.
Once you have entered all the necessary data for all of the archive records
return to the following screen which is in the 'Password Maintenance' menu.
Archive Run (Y/N) N
INFO - Redefining the

archive Boolean trigger does
not cause the archive RAM
to be cleared.
Set 'Reconfig Archive' to 'N' and 'Archive Run' to 'Y'. At this point the flow
computer will reinitialize archive RAM memory and attempt to allocate memory
as configured.
How The Available Memory Is Allocated

Approximately 250,000 bytes of memory are available for the storage of
archived data, this includes 'Raw Data' and 'ASCII Text Data'. Archive memory
is allocated dynamically, i.e. the memory required to satisfy the 'Raw Data
Archive' is allocated first, one archive file at a time. The memory remaining
after the Raw Data Archive files are setup is what is used by the Text Archive
described later.
Technical Bulletin
Checking The Archive File Memory Status Screens

The 'Archive File Memory Status' screens display automatically whenever the
user attempts to re-start data archiving for the first time after reconfiguring the
archive structure. These screens can also be accessed at any time by pressing
'Setup' 'Status' 'Display' while in the display mode. A correctly configured
archive structure is indicated by the following screen.
INFO - The number of files
allocated changes depending
on how many archive files
have been configured
ARCHIVE FILE STATUS

Archive Memory
OK
Files Allocated
3
An incorrectly configured archive structure is indicated by the following screen.
ARCHIVE FILE STATUS
Archive Memory Error
Files Allocated
3
Archive memory errors are caused when RAM memory is insufficient for the
number and size of archive files configured. In this case the 'Start Archive'
command is ignored and the flow computer allocates memory to as many
archive files as possible. The number on the 'Files Allocated' line of the display
shows how many files were allocated before the memory ran out.
Scroll down the screen to see the actual number of bytes allocated to each
archive file. All remaining memory not allocated to the 'Raw Data Archive Files'
is allocated to the 'Text Archive' buffer. The display below is typical.
ARCHIVE FILE STATUS
709 ArcSize
10000
710 ArcSize
8192
TextArcSize
100256
TB-960703
Summary 0f Raw Data Archiving Features

o Ten independent archive files are available for user configuration.
o Two additional archive files, the 'alarm event log' and 'audit trail log' are
provided.
o Archive files consist of multiple records in a circular array.
o Mixed types of variable data can be stored in records of 250 bytes
maximum.
o Except for the 'alarm log' and 'audit trail log', content and maximum
number of records in an archive file are configurable.
o Data is read in block form one record at a time.
o Each archive has a unique address (701, 702, 703, etc.).
o Each archive has a set of integer registers used to indicate most current
record pointer, maximum number of records, and required record pointer.
o Data is captured and stored in an archive file whenever the appropriate
trigger event occurs.
o Multiple archive files can be controlled by the same trigger event.
o Empty archive records contain binary 0s / ASCII Null characters.
o To avoid errors, host devices reading archive data should dynamically
determine the record pointer roll over value based on the number of
record integers read each time from the flow computer.
o Any configuration changes made to the archive setup such as redefinition
of any record or change in the number of records within any archive will
cause all data stored in the entire archive system to be reset. To prevent
accidental erasure of all archived data the user must first halt all
archiving by setting the Archive Run/Halt Flag' to false (0), and setting
the 'Config Archive Flag' to true (1).
Technical Bulletin
Raw Data Archive Definition: Alarm/Event Log

and Audit Event Log
Alarm/Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address
711
Note: Alarm types are:
0 = Log event, sound beeper
and display in LCD any
edge change in bit
identified by field #3.
1 = Log event, sound beeper
and display in LCD rising
edge changes in bit
identified by field #3
2 = Event log any edge
change in bit identified
by field #3. No beeper or
LCD display action.
3 = Event log rising edge
changes in bit identified
by field #3. No beeper or
LCD display action.
Rising edge change means 0
to1 transition.
Field #1
3-Byte Date
(MM, DD, YY or DD, MM, YY)
Field #2
3-Byte Time
(HH, MM, SS)
Field #3
16-Bit Integer
(Modbus Index # of alarm or event)
Field #4
1 Byte
(Alarm Type - see sidebar)
Field #5
1 Byte
(Boolean Value, 1 or 0 representing Alarm or

OK)
Field #6
IEEE Float
(Value of transducer variable at the time of alarm

or event)
Field #7
32-Bit Integer
(Volume totalizer at time of event or alarm)
Field #8
32-Bit Integer
(Mass totalizer at the time of the event or alarm)
Audit Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address

712.
Note: Fields 5 and 6 are set

to 0.0 when the variable type
changed is String. Fields 7
and 8 contain null characters
when the variable type
changed is NOT a string.
When fields 7 and 8 contain
8 character strings the
remaining 8 characters are
padded with nulls.
Field #1
3-Byte Date
(MM, DD, YY or DD, MM, YY)
Field #2
3-Byte Time
(HH, MM, SS)
Field #3
16-Bit Integer
(Event number, increments for each event, rolls

at 65535)
Field #4
16-Bit Integer
(Modbus index of variable changed)
Field #5
IEEE Float
(Numeric variable value before change - old

value)
Field #6
IEEE Float
(Numeric variable value after change - new

value)
Field #7
16-Char ASCII (String variable value before change - old value)
Field #8
16-Char ASCII (String variable value after change - new value)
Field #9
32-Bit Integer
Field #10 32-Bit Integer
10
(Volume totalizer at time of change)

(Mass totalizer at the time of the change)
TB-960703
Using The Custom Reports to Access the Text

Archive Feature
The actual data which will be archived in the 'Text Archive' buffer is identified
within the body of a 'User Custom Report Template'. This is done by enclosing
the data in question between braces '{}' and preceding the opening brace '{'
character with either Boolean 1000 (archive the data identified between the
braces) or Boolean 2000 (print and archive the data identified between the
braces). In the example 'Batch End' report shown below, the first half of the
report will be printed and stored in the 'Text Archive' while the second half of
the report will not print but will be stored in the 'Text Archive'.
The user has embedded a

Boolean point address 2000
to indicate that the following
data enclosed by the {}
characters is to be printed
and archived.
When embedding the point,
set the width=1
and number of decimal
places=0.
The User has embedded a

Boolean point address 1000
to indicate that the following
data enclosed by the {}
characters is to be archived
only and not printed.
When embedding the point,
set the width=1
and number of decimal
places=0.
INFO - Data is archived only

when the report is processed
for the first time. Reprinting a
stored report does not cause
any data to be stored in the
archive.
X{
Batch Report
Date :
XX/XX/XX
Company Name
Time : XX:XX:XX
Meter ID
XXXXXXXX
Product ID
XXXXXXXX
API Table Selected
XXXXXXXX
Batch Start Date
XX/XX/XX
Batch Start Time
XX:XX:XX
Batch End Date
XX/XX/XX
Batch End Time
XX:XX:XX
Batch Gross (IV) BBL
XXXXXXXXX
Batch Net (GSV) BBL
XXXXXXXXX
Batch Mass LB
XXXXXXXXX
X{
Opening Gross (IV) BBL
XXXXXXXXX
Opening Net (GSV) BBL
XXXXXXXXX
Opening Mass LB
XXXXXXXXX
Closing Gross (IV) BBL
XXXXXXXXX
Closing Net (GSV) BBL
XXXXXXXXX
Closing Mass LB
XXXXXXXXX
Batch Flow Weighted Averages:
Gross Flow (IV) BBL/HR
XXXXXX.X
Temperature Deg.F
XXXXXX.X
Pressure PSIG
XXXXXX.X
Flowing Density GM/CC
XXXXXX.X
API @ 60 Deg.F
XXXXXX.X
VCF
X.XXXX
CPL
X.XXXX
Meter Factor
X.XXXX
}
Computer ID :
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XX/XX/XX
XX:XX:XX
XX/XX/XX
XX:XX:XX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX}
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXX.X
XXXXX.X
XXXXX.X
XXXXX.X
XXXXX.X
X.XXXX
X.XXXX
X.XXXX
The template files shown below can be used to archive text data whenever the
report is processed.
1)
2)
3)
4)
'FILENAME.TP1'
'FILENAME.TP2'
'FILENAME.TP3'
'FILENAME.TP4'
Snapshot Report
Batch Report
Daily Report
Prover Report
11
Technical Bulletin
Custom Report Templates

A default selection of files with the extension 'TP?' are created automatically
when OmniCom is installed, They can be found in the 'OMNI2?' subdirectories.
For example the OMNI20 subdirectory contains the following template files:
Note:
To avoid duplication and

conserve disk space
these templates do not
have matching TP1, TP2
and TP3 templates.
Select TP1 though TP3
from the appropriate set
(A, B, C or D) above
depending on
independent or common
product.
REV20A.TP1
Interval Report
Independent Products
REV20A.TP2
Batch Report
REV20A.TP3
Daily Report
REV20A.TP4
Prove Report
REV20B.TP1
Interval Report
REV20B.TP2
Batch Report
REV20B.TP3
Daily Report
REV20B.TP4
Prove Report
REV20C.TP1
Interval Report
Common Product
REV20C.TP2
Batch Report
Common Product
REV20C.TP3
Daily Report
Common Product
REV20C.TP4
Prove Report
Common Product
REV20D.TP1
Interval Report
Common Product
REV20D.TP2
Batch Report
Common Product
REV20D.TP3
Daily Report
Common Product
REV20D.TP4
Prove Report
Common Product
REV20E.TP4*
Prove Report
Master Meter Method
REV20M.TP4*
Prove Report
Mass Meter Proving
Normal Pipe Prover
REV20MC.TP4* Prove Report
Mass Meter Proving
Double Chronometry
REV20LC.TP4* Prove Report
Double Chronometry
Viscosity Linearization
REV20LP.TP4* Prove Report
Pipe Prover
Viscosity Linearization
Double Chronometry
Normal Pipe Prover
Double Chronometry
Normal Pipe Prover
Templates can only be accessed if they exist; i.e., if you are currently working
on 'FILENAME.OMI' opening the custom templates will just create an empty
file. You must first create a set of templates by copying the appropriate sample
templates as follows:
1) At the OmniCom File menu select 'Shell to DOS'.
2) Type the following to create a set of custom templates for a common
product system using a full sized pipe prover (assumes Rev. 20.xx
application):
COPY OMNI20\REV20D.TP? OMNI20\filename.TP?
3) Type EXIT to return to OmniCom.
In the above example OMNI20 is the sub directory which contains all files
related to Application Revision 20. Likewise OMNI24 refers to Revision 24
applications.
12
Date: 07
23
96
TB # 960704
Communicating with Honeywell
ST3000/STT3000 Smart Transmitters

Contents
Manual, and is applicable to
all firmware revisions.
earlier.
Communication with
Honeywell
ST3000/STT3000 Smart
Transmitters - This feature
allows you to communicate
with Honeywell Smart
Temperature and Pressure
Transmitters, via Omnis H
type Process I/O Combo
Module and using
Honeywells DE Protocol.
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract........................................................................................................... 1
Digitally Enhanced (DE) Protocol Overview ................................................. 2
Transmitter Database..................................................................................... 2
Using the Honeywell
Handheld Communicator......................................... 3
Combo Module LED Status Indicators.......................................................... 3
Switching Between Analog and Digital Mode............................................... 4
Auto Mode ................................................................................................................4
Manual Operation .....................................................................................................4
Viewing the Status of the Honeywell

Transmitter from the Omni Front
Panel ............................................................................................................... 4
Scope
All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the
feature of communicating with Honeywell ST3000 Smart Transmitters. This
feature uses Honeywells Digitally Enhanced (DE) Protocol and requires that an
H Combo I/O Module be installed in your flow computer.
Abstract
Using 'H' Combo I/O Modules, the Omni Flow Computer can communicate with
Honeywell Smart Temperature and Pressure Transmitters using Honeywells
DE Protocol. Up to 4 transmitters can be connected to each 'H' Type Combo
Module, with loop power being provided by the combo module.
Technical Bulletin
Digitally Enhanced (DE) Protocol Overview

Digital data is transmitted serially between the flow computer and Honeywell
Smart Transmitters by modulating the current in the two wire loop connecting
the devices. Power for the transmitter is also taken from this current loop. Data
is transmitted at 218.47 bits per second with a digital '0' = 20 mA and a digital
'1 = 4 mA.
In normal operation, the Honeywell transmitter operates in the '6-byte Broadcast
Mode'. In this mode, the transmitter transmits the following data to the flow
computer every 366 msec:
Byte #1
Status Flags
Byte #2-#4 Process Variables % Span Value (3-byte floating point)
Byte #5
Database ID (indicates where in the transmitters database Byte
#6 below belongs)
Byte #6
Database Data Value
Transmitter Database
By using the data contained in Bytes #5 and #6, the flow computer builds and
maintains an exact copy of the smart transmitters configuration database. A
transmitter database varies in size from about 90 bytes for a pressure
transmitter to 120 bytes for a temperature transmitter. It takes between 30 and
45 seconds to completely build a copy of the transmitter database within the
flow computer. The transmitter database is continuously compared against the
flow computer configuration settings for that transmitter. The flow computer
automatically corrects any differences between the databases by writing the
correct configuration data to the transmitter.

ST3000 Smart Transmitters
TB-960704
Using the Honeywell

Handheld
Communicator
The flow computer is responsible for configuring the following entries within the
transmitter:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Lower Range Value (LRV) or Zero

Transmitter Span or Upper Range Limit (URL)
Damping Factor
Tag Name
Any changes made to 1, 2 and 3 using the handheld communicator will be

overwritten by the flow computer. In the digital mode it is not necessary to
calibrate the transmitter output using the handheld communicator. The digital
signal can be calibrated using the normal Omni analog input method described
in Chapter 8 of Volume 1.
Combo Module LED Status Indicators

Each I/O channel of the 'H' Combo module has a set of two LED indicators, one
green and one red. The green LED shows all communication activity taking
place on the channel (flow computer, transmitter and handheld communicator if
connected). The Red LED lights only when the flow computer is transmitting
data to the transmitter.
Normal digital operation is indicated by a regular pulsation of the green LED
(about 3 per second). The red LED will be seen to blink whenever a
configuration change is made in the flow computer which affects that particular
transmitter.
Technical Bulletin
Switching Between Analog and Digital Mode.

Auto Mode
Connecting an analog mode Honeywell smart transmitter to the computer will
cause the flow computer to automatically switch the transmitter to the digital DE
mode, sending out a communication request to the Honeywell transmitter. A
switch over to the digital mode by the transmitter will cause the green LED on
the H combo module to pulse steadily indicating that communications have
been established.
Manual Operation
For manual operation, do the following:
1. Disable communications between the Honeywell transmitter and the flow
computer by deleting all I/O point assignments within the flow computer
to that I/O point.
2. Using the Honeywell SFC, SCT or any Honeywell handheld
communicator, press [Shift] [A/D] and wait till the handheld displays
'Change to Analog?'
3. Answer (Yes) by pressing [Enter]. SFC Working will be displayed. The
'H' Combo modules green LED on that channel will stop pulsing.
4. Re-enter the I/O point to cause the Omni to send the communication
request command to the Honeywell and after three command sends the
green LED on the Honeywell module will pulse at a steady 3Hz rate.
Transmitter from the Omni Front Panel

To verify the data being received from the smart transmitter, press [Input]
[Status] and [Enter] from the front panel. The following displays:
H1-2 Transmitter
PV%
25.00
Status
IDLE
LRV
.0
SPAN
150.0
Damp Sec.
.00
Conformity bit
0
SW Revision
2.1
Serial #
xxxxxxxx
Transmitter Type GP
URL
3000
ID/TAG
PT202
SV
.00

TB-960704
H1-2 Transmitter : Indicates the Honeywell Combo Module (H1) and the
channel number on that module (Channel 2 in this case).
PV%
: Process variable value in percentage of the transmitters

span. A -25.00 displayed on the Omni could mean that
the transmitter is not communicating (see Status
definition below).
Status
: There are five status states.

1) OK
: Communications
between
the
flow
computer and smart Honeywell transmitter
are OK. The database within the
transmitter matches the flow computer.
2) Idle
: This flow computer I/O point has been

assigned to a Honeywell transmitter but is
not receiving data from the transmitter.
Possible cause is a wiring problem such as
reversal of wiring. If you observe the
status LEDs you will note that the flow
computer
attempts
to
establish
communications by sending a wake-up
command every 10 seconds or so.
3) Bad PV : Communications
between
the
flow
are OK but the transmitter has determined
that a critical error has occurred within the
transmitter meaning the value of the
process variable cannot be trusted. The
flow computer will set the transducer
failure alarm and follow the fail code
strategy selected by the user for this
transducer.
4) DB Error : Communications
between
the
flow
are OK but the flow Computer has
determined that the database within the
flow computer does not agree with the
database within the transmitter. If you
observe the status LEDs you will note that
the flow computer attempts to correct the
transmitters database by writing the
correct data to the transmitter once every
30-45 seconds or so.
Technical Bulletin
5) 4 Byte
: The transmitter is operating in the 4-Byte

Broadcast Mode. Because the flow
computer will not tolerate this mode of
operation, this status display should only
be displayed momentarily as the flow
computer will automatically switch the
transmitter into the 6-Byte Broadcast
Mode.
LRV
: Lower Range Value of the transmitter in engineering

units. Engineering units are degrees Celsius for
temperature transmitters, inches of water for differential
pressure transmitters, and pounds per square inch for
pressure transmitters.
Span
: The Span of the transmitter in engineering units (the

Span is the difference between the lower and upper
ranges of the transmitter). Engineering units are degrees
Celsius for temperature transmitters, inches of water for
differential pressure transmitters, and pounds per square
inch for pressure transmitters. The flow computer will
display DB Error if the user tries to enter a span of 0%
or a span which would exceed the transmitters upper
range limit' (URL).
Damp Seconds
: Damping Time of the transmitter output in seconds.
Conformity Bit
: Meaningful only with differential pressure transmitters.

Conformity Bit 0 = linear output; Conformity Bit 1 =
square root output. This bit should always be 0 for smart
temperature transmitters.
Software Revision : Current Software installed within the smart device.

Serial #
: Serial Number of the smart transmitter.
Transmitter Type : Valid transmitter types are:

TT = Temperature Transmitter
DP = Differential Pressure Transmitter
GP = Gauge Pressure Transmitter

TB-960704
URL
: Upper Range Limit of the transmitter in engineering

units. The transmitter will not accept configuration entries
which exceed this value.
ID/TAG
: ASCII string used to identify the transmitter.
SV
: Secondary Process Variable Value expressed in C. This

represents sensor temperature for pressure transmitters,
and junction temperature for temperature transmitters.
The flow computer may or may not have a value in this
field, depending upon whether the SV is included in the
part of the transmitters database which is sent to the
Omni.
Date: 07
02
97
TB # 970701
Stability Requirements: Final Calibration of

Flow Computer
Contents
contained in Volume 1, and
is applicable to Revision
20.70/24.70+.
published with a different
page layout.
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract........................................................................................................... 1
Instructions .................................................................................................... 1
Scope
All Omni 6000/3000 Flow Computers have calibration stability requirements.
Abstract
Because of the temperature sensitivity and bit resolutions of the A/D and D/A
converters, and the high accuracy requirements, it is important that the
following procedures are followed when calibrating flow computer I/O circuits.
Instructions
(1) Adjust the power supply to give 5.05-5.10 volts at backplane test points.
(2) All final calibrations must be performed using the matching set of combo
modules and power supply module (i.e. changing the power supply or
adjusting the voltage during the final calibration requires that a sample
calibration made up to that point be checked. If there is a noticeable
change, all calibrated points should be rechecked).
(3) Before calibrating, eliminate temperature gradient errors by closing the
box and allowing at least 20 minutes for temperature stabilization to
occur. Ensure that unit is not in a high air draft area (i.e. in the path of a
fan or AC duct) Make adjustments such as jumper repositioning quickly.
Wherever possible keep the unit closed to retain internal heat. Board
replacements will require that sufficient time be allowed to achieve
temperature stability.
(4) Observe temperature stability requirements of any equipment used in
the calibration process (i.e., current and voltage generators, digital
voltmeters etc.).
TB-970701 w ALL.70+
Date: 07
04
97
TB # 970702
Secondary Totalizers Provide Net Volume at

Temperatures Other than 15C or 60F
Contents
contained in Volumes 2, 3
and 4, applicable to firmware
revisions 20/24.71+ and
21/25.71+.
page layout.
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract........................................................................................................... 1
Database Location of Second Set of Net Totalizer Data Points .................. 2
Keypad Entries Needed to Display the Extra Totalizers .............................. 2
Scope
All firmware Versions 20/24 and 21/25, Revisions.70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000
Flow Computers have secondary net totalizers for when more than one
reference temperature is required.
Abstract
Some times it is necessary to provide net totalizers at more than one reference
temperature.
Following are the Modbus data points that are used to provide secondary net
totalizers in the Omni. Secondary totalizers are calculated real time just like the
normal totalizers.
The secondary totalizers are activated by setting up floating point data point
7699 with the secondary reference temperature required. This data point is
initialized to 0 at a cold start up which effectively disables the extra totalizers
and their appearance on the Omni default reports (obviously, 0 cannot be used
as a second reference temperature).
You may set up 7699 with a simple variable statement. For example: 7699=#68
will provide a second set of net totalizers corrected to 68 degrees. You may also
initialize point 7699 via a one time Modbus write. If you choose to use the
statement method you may remove the statement immediately after you enter
it, but you should probably leave it to serve as a document trail.
Note that the Omni initializes point 7699 to 0.0 on a cold boot. A cold boot
occurs after a Clear All Ram command is executed.
TB-970702 w ALL.70+
Technical Bulletin
Database Location of Second Set of Net

Totalizer Data Points
CURRENT
BATCH
PREVIOUS
BATCH
CURRENT
DAILY
PREVIOUS
DAY
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
5196
5296
5396
5198
5298
5398
5197
5297
5397
5199
5299
5399
Meter #4
Station
5496
5896
5498
5898
5497
5897
5499
5899
Keypad Entries Needed to Display the Extra

Totalizers
Secondary totalizers are viewed using the same key presses used to view the
normal net totalizers. For example: pressing [Meter] [n] [Net] or [Net] [Meter]
[n] will display meter n net flow rates and totalizers followed by the secondary
net totalizers. Pressing [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Net] will display the batch net
totalizer followed by the secondary batch net totalizer. Likewise, the Station
secondary totals are viewed using the same key presses that are used to view
the normal station net total. Pressing [Net] will display the station net totalizer
followed by the secondary net totalizer. Pressing [Batch] [Net] will display the
station batch net totalizer followed by the secondary batch net totalizer.
TB-970702 w ALL.70+
Date: 08
04
97
TB # 970801
Using Boolean Statements to Provide

Custom Alarms in the Flow Computer
Contents
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract........................................................................................................... 1
Example: ..................................................................................................................2
Scope
all firmware revisions Version
.70+.
page layout.
All firmware revisions Version .70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers
have the feature of customizing alarms with Boolean statements.
Abstract
The flow computer automatically records and logs many important alarm events
and status changes. These events include transducer Low Alarm and High
Alarm states and failure of any transducer connected to the flow computer
which is measurement related.
There are instances however where the flow computer user would like to
monitor other internal or external status events that may have nothing to do with
the measurement functions. These alarms may be the result of a digital I/O
point changing state, or the result of a Boolean logic statement or a variable
statement comparison.
Because of this requirement, the last 16 Boolean statements of the flow
computer serve the dual function of evaluating normal logic expressions, and
also providing user configurable alarm messages. The alarm message text to
be logged and displayed can be entered into the expression fields in any of
these last 16 Boolean statements. These statement numbers are, 1057 through
1072 for flow computers with 48 Boolean statements, and 1073 through 1088
for computers with 64 statements.
Each Boolean statement has an associated status point which is accessed using
the same address as the statement number (Modbus Point 1072 for instance).
The logic state of this status bit normally reflects the logical result of the
statement (1 or 0, true or false). When the statement is used to provide a
custom alarm message it functions in a different manner. To cause an alarm
message to be logged, simply turn on the status point associated with the
message.
TB-970801 w ALL.70+
Technical Bulletin
Example:
In this example, the user wishes to monitor a tank level switch that is connected
to Digital I/O Point #1. When the tank level is high, the level switch applies 24
volts to the digital I/O point.
Digital I/O Point #1 is first assigned to the Dummy Boolean 1700, this reserves
the Point as a digital Input . Modbus Point 1001 will simply follow the digital
level applied to the terminals of digital point #1. Had it been Digital Point #22,
Modbus Point 1022 would be affected.
1025:
1072=1001
Move logic value of Digital I/O #1 into Point 1072.
1072:
High Level Alarm
Actual alarm text which appears in alarm log.
Statement 1025 (above) is used to transfer the logic state of Digital I/O Point #1
to Point 1072, activating the user alarm whenever 24 volts is applied to the
input terminals by the tank high level switch contacts.
TB-970801 w ALL.70+
Date: 08
08
97
TB # 970802
Omni Flow Computer Modbus

Database:
Overview
Contents
contained in Volume 4
Modbus Database
Address and Index
Numbers, applicable to all
firmware revisions .70+.
page layout.
Modbus Database Modbus function codes are

shown in hexadecimal
th
notation. The 4 digit (from
the right) of the data point
address defines the data
type.
TB-970802 w ALL.70+
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract........................................................................................................... 2
Database Extents...................................... 4
I/O Driver Concerns When Interfacing to Omni Equipment....................... 12
For Example:.................................................................................................................................. 12
Write Single Variable - Modbus Function 06 ............................................................12

Address Ranges - Future Expansion .......................................................................12
Scope
All firmware revisions Versions 70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers
are characterized by a Modbus database structured as described in this
technical bulletin.
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
The following are the data types within the database:
Digital Flag Bits
: Also known as Boolean bits, status bits and

command bits. All data points of this type can
be read via Modbus function code 01 and
written to using function codes 05 and 0F .
Function codes 01 and 0F transfer byte
packed data that is sent in the byte order they
are prepared (not word order). Points are
packed eight to a byte, packing from least
significant to most significant Unused bit
positions within a byte are cleared on
transmission from the Omni and ignored by
the Omni when receiving.
Writing to status points is allowed but
normally is pointless as the status point will
be refreshed by the Omni every 500 ms.
Valid addresses for this type of data are:
1XXX i.e. 1101, 1705, 1921 etc.
16-bit Integer Registers
: All data points of this type can be read via

Modbus function code 03 and written to using
function codes 06 and 10.
Byte order transmitted is: MS byte then LS
byte.
X3XXX i.e. 3121, 13133 etc.
8-character ASCII Strings : All data points of this type can be read via
function code 10 (note that function code 06
is not available on this data type).
Byte order transmitted is as you would type it.
4XXX i.e. 4101, 4502 etc.
32-bit Integer Registers
: Formatted as twos complement. All data

points of this type can be read via Modbus
function 03 and written to using function
codes 06 and 10.
Byte order transmitted is: MS byte of MS
word, LS byte of MS word, MS byte of LS
word then LS byte of LS word.
Valid addresses for this data type are: X5XXX
i.e. 5101, 15205 etc.
TB-970802 w ALL.70+
TB-970802

Database: Overview
32-bit IEEE Floating Point : All data points of this type can be read via
Modbus function 03 and written to using
function codes 06 and 10.
Byte order transmitted is: Mantissa Sign
bit/Exponent byte,
LS Exponent bit/MS
mantissa byte, middle significant mantissa
byte then LS mantissa byte.
Valid addresses for this data type are: X7XXX
i.e. 7210, 17006 etc.
16-character ASCII Strings : All data points of this type can be read via
function code 10 (note that function code 06
is not available for this data type).
Byte order transmitted is as you would type it.
14XXX i.e. 14001, 14022 etc.
TB-970802 w ALL.71+
Technical Bulletin

Database
Extents
Data within the Omni Flow Computer data base is organized in logical groups.
Certain data written to the Omni requires special processing to occur in the
Omni before it is stored in the data base. Other data is grouped together
because it is related in function i.e. a collection of real-time data for a specific
process.
The list that follows shows the extent of each table or set of data points within
the data base. Because the sets of data are not connected, data from adjacent
sets cannot be read or written in the same poll.

Database Extents
DATA POINT
ADDRESS
DATA TYPE
APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
FUNCTION CODES
(HEX)
COMMENTS
Used to Read/Write
03
00001
Mixed
03 (06) (10)
03
00201
Mixed
03 (06) (10)
03
00401
Mixed
0701
Mixed
03
0702
Mixed
03
0703
Mixed
03
0704
Mixed
03
0705
Mixed
03
0706
Mixed
03
0707
Mixed
03
0708
Mixed
03
0709
Mixed
03
0710
Mixed
03
03 (06) (10)
User-defined read only packet - Omni

native mode.
User-defined array - Modicon
compatible.
native mode.
User defined array - Modicon
compatible.
native mode.
User defined array - Modicon
compatible.
#1 User defined data archive record Firmware Revisions .70+.
#10 User defined data archive record
- Firmware Revisions .70+.
TB-970802 w ALL.70+

Database: Overview
TB-970802

Database Extents (Continued)
DATA POINT
ADDRESS
DATA TYPE
APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
FUNCTION CODES
(HEX)
COMMENTS
Used to
Read (Write)
0711
Mixed
03
0712
Mixed
03
Status &
Command
01, (05), (OF)
Status
01
Status
01
Status
01
Status
01
Status &
Command
01, (05), (OF)
Status &
Command
01, (05), (OF)
Status
01
Status
01
Status
01
Status
01
Status
01
Status
01
Status
01
1001
to
1099
1101
to
1199
1201
to
1299
1301
to
1399
1401
to
1499
1501
to
1699
1701
to
1799
1801
to
1899
1901
to
1999
1301
to
1399
2001
to
2100
2101
to
2199
2201
to
2299
2301
to
2399
TB-970802 w ALL.71+
Alarm/Event Log archive record Firmware Revisions .70+.

Audit Log archive record - Firmware
Revision Versions .70+.
Point 1600 is a dummy point

included to concatenate tables 15XX
and 16XX.
Reserved for Future Expansion currently will return error exception

02 (illegal data address).
Technical Bulletin

DATA POINT
ADDRESS
DATA TYPE
APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
FUNCTION CODES
(HEX)
COMMENTS
Used to
Read (Write)
2401
to
2499
2501
to
2699
2701
to
2799
2801
to
2899
2901
to
2999
3001
to
3099
3101
to
3199
3201
to
3299
3301
to
3399
3401
to
3499
3501
to
3599
3601
to
3699
3701
to
3799
3801
to
3899
3901
to
3999
Status
01
Status
01
Status &
Command
01, (05), (OF)
Status
01
Status
01
16-bit Integer
Register
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Register
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Register
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Register
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Register
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Register
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Register
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Register
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Register
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Register
03, (06), (10)


TB-970802 w ALL.70+

Database: Overview
TB-970802

DATA POINT
ADDRESS
DATA TYPE
APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
FUNCTION CODES
(HEX)
COMMENTS
Used to
Read (Write)
4001
to
4099
4101
to
4199
4201
to
4299
4301
to
4399
4401
to
4499
4501
to
4599
4601
to
4699
4701
to
4799
4801
to
4899
4901
to
4999
5001
to
5099
5101
to
5199
5201
to
5299
5301
to
5399
5401
to
5499
TB-970802 w ALL.71+
8-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
8-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
8-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
8-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
8-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
8-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
8-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
8-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
8-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
8-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
03, (06), (10)
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
03, (06), (10)
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
03, (06), (10)
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
03, (06), (10)
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
03, (06), (10)


Technical Bulletin

DATA POINT
ADDRESS
DATA TYPE
APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
FUNCTION CODES
(HEX)
COMMENTS
Used to
Read (Write)
5501
to
5599
5601
to
5699
5701
to
5799
5801
to
5899
5901
to
5999
6001
to
6099
6101
to
6199
6201
to
6299
6301
to
6399
6401
to
6499
6501
to
6799
6801
to
6899
6901
to
6999
7001
to
7099
7101
to
7199
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
03, (06), (10)
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
03, (06), (10)
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
03, (06), (10)
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
03, (06), (10)
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
Applicable to Firmware Revisions

22/26.71+ only.
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit, 2s Complement (Firmware

Revision 23.70+ only).
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)

32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)

32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)

Revisions 23.70+ and 22/26.71+
only).
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)

22/26.71+ only.
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)

32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)

32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)

TB-970802 w ALL.70+

Database: Overview
TB-970802

DATA POINT
ADDRESS
DATA TYPE
APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
FUNCTION CODES
(HEX)
COMMENTS
Used to
Read (Write)
7201
to
7299
7301
to
7399
7401
to
7499
7501
to
7599
7601
to
7699
7701
to
7799
7801
to
7899
7901
to
8499
8501
to
8599
8601
to
8699
8701
to
8799
8801
to
8899
8901
to
8999
9001
to
9499
9500
to
13000
TB-970802 w ALL.71+
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
ASCII Text
Buffers
41, (42)

20/24.71+ and 22/26.71+ only.

20.71+ and 22/26.71+ only.
Maximum of sixty-four 128-byte
buffers per data point .
Reserved for Future Expansion - currently will return error exception 02

(illegal data address).
Technical Bulletin

DATA POINT
ADDRESS
DATA TYPE
APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
FUNCTION CODES
(HEX)
COMMENTS
Used to
Read (Write)
13001
to
13299
13301
to
13399
13401
to
13499
13501
to
13599
13601
to
13699
13701
to
13799
13801
to
13899
13901
to
13999
14001
to
14099
14101
to
14199
14201
to
14299
14301
to
14399
14400
to
15000
15001
to
15299
15300
to
17000
10
16-bit Integer
Registers
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Registers
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Registers
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Registers
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Registers
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Registers
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Registers
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Registers
03, (06), (10)
16-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
16-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
16-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
16-character
ASCII String
03, (10)

32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)

TB-970802 w ALL.70+

Database: Overview
TB-970802

DATA POINT
ADDRESS
DATA TYPE
APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
FUNCTION CODES
(HEX)
COMMENTS
Used to
Read (Write)
17001
to
17399
17401
to
17499
17501
to
17899
17901
to
18099
18101
to
18199
18200
to
49999
TB-970802 w ALL.71+
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
Not applicable to Firmware Revisions

22 & 26.
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
Not applicable to Firmware Revisions

21/25 & 22/26.
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)

32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)

23/27.71+ only.

11
Technical Bulletin
I/O Driver Concerns When Interfacing to Omni

Equipment
Most but not all of the data is grouped in blocks of 100 or so data points. These
blocks in many cases are not connected.
Limit requests for contiguous data across different blocks by examining the third
digit from the right of the data point start and end addresses. If the digit is
different break up the poll request.
For Example:
An application requires data from points 7188, 7201 and 7210 to be read and
displayed on screen. An intelligent I/O driver may determine that it is more
efficient to read 23 data points starting with point 7188 and discard the unused
data. In this particular example the Omni will transmit the data for points 7188
through 7199 and blank data will be returned for data points 7200 through 7210
because the data requested is in two different blocks within the Omni. To obtain
the data correctly the I/O driver should determine that point 7188 and point
7201 are in different data blocks (because the third digit from the right changed
from a 1 to a 2) and send out two data requests; one request for point 7188 and
another for points 7201 through 7210.
Write Single Variable - Modbus Function 06

Omni software revisions 20.44 and greater implement this function on all 16-bit
and 32-bit data points. Revisions prior to 20.44 implement function 06 on 16-bit
integers only. To maintain compatibility with early Omni software revisions it
may be advisable to use function 10 to write to single data points as well as
multiple data points.
Address Ranges - Future Expansion

Some of the address ranges specified in this document encompass more data
than may be available on all applications at this time, Omni advises that for
future compatibility any software driver developed should be able to support
these address ranges.
12
TB-970802 w ALL.70+
Date: 08
12
97
TB # 970803
Meter Factor Linearization

Contents
contained in Volume 2 and
Volume 3, applicable to
Firmware Revision
22.70+/26.70+. This bulletin
was previously published
with a different page layout.
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract........................................................................................................... 2
Meter Factor Linearization Function...........................................................................2
Meter Factor Validation and Control Chart Functions.................................................3
Scope
Firmware Revisions 22.70+ and 26.70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow
Computers have the feature of Meter Factor Linearization. This feature applies
to Turbine/Positive Displacement Liquid Flow Metering Systems (with Meter
Factor Linearization).
TB-970803 w 22/26.70+
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
Meter Factor Linearization Function
Flowmeter performance varies depending upon flow rate and fluid viscosity.
The flow computer can compensate for this variation in performance by
applying a meter factor which is determined by interpolation of a base meter
factor curve. The user develops this base meter factor curve by proving the
flowmeter at various flow rates and determining the meter factors for those flow
rates.
A base meter factor curve must be developed for each product or fluid
viscosity. The curve can consist of from one to twelve meter factor / flow rate
points.
The MF is continuously adjusted for

flowrate during a delivery. The MF is
flow weight averaged for the batch.
Prove Base
Flowrate
Meter Factor
The flow computer lifts or lowers
the MF curve based on the MF
obtained at the latest official
flowmeter proving.
MFs are normalized to the

Prove Base Flowrate for
validation / comparison and
historical archival purposes.
Flowrate
Fig. 1.
Base Meter Factor Curve
TB-970803 w 22/26.70+
TB-970803
Meter Factor Linearization
Meter Factor Validation and Control Chart Functions

The second purpose of the base meter factor curve is also to act as a reference
against which any meter factors developed during subsequent provings of the
flowmeter can be compared. As an aid to this comparison the user specifies the
base proving flow rate. This value is the flow rate which is considered to be the
normal for the flowmeter concerned. For comparison purposes, each
subsequent meter factor is normalized to the base proving flow rate and must
pass two tests before it can be implemented. The first test checks that the
calculated meter factor is within some maximum percentage deviation from the
base curve.
The second test verifies that the meter factor when normalized to the base
proving flow rate is within some maximum percentage deviation from the
historical average of the last n meter factors. Only normalized and
implemented meter factors are included in the historical average. The number
n can be one through 10.
Test 2 - Maximum Deviation

Allowed From The Average
of The Last n Meter Factors
Meter Factor at
Actual Flowrate
(Passes Test 1)
Historical Average of
Last n Meter Factors
Base MF Curve
Test 1 - Maximum Deviation

Allowed From Base Curve
Fig. 2.
TB-970803 w 22/26.71+
Meter Factor Normalized to

Prove Base Flowrate
(Fails Test 2)
The Function of the Meter Factor Base Curve
Date: 08
28
97
TB # 970804
Calculation of Natural Gas Net Volume and

Energy: Using Gas Chromatograph, Product
Overrides or Live 4-20mA Analyzer Inputs of
Specific Gravity and Heating Value
Contents
contained i nVolume 3 ,
applicable to Revision
23.71/27.71.
page format.
Natural Gas Net Volume

and Energy Calculation Natural gas net volume and
energy calculations apply to
all gas flow computers,
(firmware Revisions
23/27.71) shipped after July
1997. These calculations are
considered using a gas
chromatograph, product
overrides, or live 4-20 mA
analyzer inputs of specific
gravity (SG) and heating
value (HV).
TB-970804 w 23/27.71+
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract ........................................................................................................... 2
Basic Calculation
s ......................................................................................... 2
Critical Configuration Entries Which Affect the Calculation of Net Volume
and Energy ..................................................................................................... 2
Density of Air at Base Condition ..............................................................................2
s
Gas Relative Density (SG .).......................................................................................3
Gas Heating Value (HV )............................................................................................3
Key Analyzer Setup Menu Entries Neede .................................................................3
d
No Gas Chromatograph Used - Manual Overrides Require ...........................................................
d
3
Component Analysis Data Obtained From a Gas Chromatograp ..................................................
h
4
Using Manual Overrides for Component Analysis Dat ...................................................................
a
4
Component Analysis Data via a Serial Data Lin .............................................................................
k
4
Using Live Inputs for Heating Value, Specific Gravity, Nitrogen or Carbon Dioxid .........................
e
4
Scope
Computers have the feature of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy
Calculation. This feature applies to Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems.
This bulletin covers natural gas net volume and energy calculations using a gas
chromatograph, product overrides, or live 4-20 mA analyzer inputs of specific
gravity (SG) and heating value HV).
(
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
Gas compositional data needed by the flow computer to calculate flowing
density, mass flow and energy flow of natural gas can be obtained from various
sources. The following describes how the flow computer should be configured
for each possible scenario.
Basic Calculations
The basic calculations are:
q Net Volume = Mass Flow / Density @ Base Conditions
q Energy = Net Volume x Heating Value
(1)
(2)
Density at Base Conditions can be obtained by one of the following methods:

q
q
q
q
(GC Relative Density) x (Density of Air @ Base Conditions)

(Override Relative Density) x (Density of Air @ Base Conditions)
(Live 4-20mA Relative Density) x (Density of Air @ Base Conditions)
Calculated using Detailed Method of AGA 8
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Heating Value is obtained using one of the following methods:

Heating Value Calculation The flow computer always
calculates Heating Value
using one of the mentioned
standards, even if it is
instructed not to use it.
These calculated values are
stored in the data base and
can be used to compare
against the values obtained
from the GC or calorimeter.
7629=Mtr #1 calculated HV
q
q
q
q
GC Analysis HV
Manual Override HV
Live 4-20mA HV
Calculated using AGA 5, GPA 2172 or ISO 6976
(component analysis required)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
Component Analysis Data is obtained from one of the following sources:

q
q
q
q
Online Danalyzer or Applied Automation Gas Chromatograph

Manual Overrides in the Fluid Data Analysis menu
Serial Communication Link
Live 4-20mA SG, HV, N2 and CO2
(AGA 8 gross calculation methods only)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
Critical Configuration Entries Which Affect the

Calculation of Net Volume and Energy
Density of Air at Base Conditions
This entry is in the Factor Setup menu. Setting this entry to 0 ensures that
gas density at base conditions is calculated using AGA 8. (method (6) previous
page). Entering the density of air at base conditions assuming a valid gas
relative density (SG) is available (see next paragraph) will override the AGA 8
calculation of gas density at base conditions. In this case gas density at base
conditions is calculated using either method (3), (4) or (5) (previous page).
TB-970804 w 23/27.71+
TB-970804
Calculation of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy
Gas Relative Density (SG)

This entry is located in the Fluid Analysis Data menu. One entry per active
product is required. It is mandatory that this field contain a valid value of SG
for all AGA 8 gross calculation methods except for 1985 method #4. The data
in this field can be manually entered or, automatically overwritten by a live 420mA input of SG if it exists. This entry also serves as the GC SG override if
a GC is providing gas relative density (SG) and a GC failure occurs.
Entering a minus value in this field will force the flow computer to calculate gas
density at base conditions using AGA 8. (method (6) previous page). Entering
the gas relative density (SG) assuming a non zero Density of Air @ Base
Conditions is entered (see above) will override the AGA 8 calculation of gas
density at base conditions. In this case gas density at base conditions is
calculated using either method (3), (4) or (5) (previous page).
When an AGA 8 detailed method is selected and a GC is used to provide gas
relative density (SG), this entry field is ignored unless a GC failure occurs and
the GC Fail Code entry is set to Use Override on GC Failure.
Gas Heating Value (HV)

This entry is located in the Fluid Analysis Data menu. One entry per active
product is required. It is mandatory that this field contain a valid value of HV
for AGA 8 gross calculation method #1 and also AGA 8 1985 methods #2 and
#4. The data in this field can be manually entered or, automatically overwritten
by a live 4-20mA input of HV if it exists. This entry also serves as the GC HV
override if a GC is providing gas heating value (HV) and a GC failure occurs.
Entering a minus value in this field will force the flow computer to use a
calculated gas heating value (HV) calculated using either AGA 5, GPA 2172 or
ISO 6976 ( method (10) previous page). Entering a positive value into the gas
heating value (HV) entry will override the AGA 5, GPA 2172 or ISO 6976
calculation of gas heating value (HV).
When an AGA 8 detailed method is selected and a GC is used to provide gas
heating value (HV), this entry field is ignored unless a GC failure occurs and
the GC Fail Code entry is set to Use Override on GC Failure.
Key Analyzer Setup Menu Entries Needed

The following text discusses only those key entries that must be made to ensure
that the right values for component analysis are used in the calculation of Net
Volume and Energy Flow.
No Gas Chromatograph Used - Manual Overrides Required

Select Always Use Fluid Data Overrides for GC Fail Code in the Analyzer
Setup menu. No other entries are needed.
TB-970804 w 23/27.71+
Technical Bulletin
Component Analysis Data Obtained From a Gas Chromatograph

Select either Never Use Fluid Data Overrides or On Fail Use Fluid Data
Overrides for GC Fail Code in the Analyzer Setup menu to ensure that the
GC data is used in place of the Fluid Data & Analysis Data overrides.
Using the GC Heating Value and Relative Density. To ensure that the
heating value and relative density calculated by GC are used in the
calculations, make sure that component numbers are assigned for the
Heating Value and Specific Gravity entries in the Analyzer Setup menu.
The number entered is not critical, simply use the next consecutive numbers
after all the other components are numbered.
Ignoring the GC Heating Value and Relative Density. Entering 0 for the
component number for Heating Value and Specific Gravity entries in the
Analyzer Setup menu causes the flow computer to ignore the heating value
and relative density sent by the GC and to use the override values entered
in the Fluid Data & Analysis Data menu.
Using Manual Overrides for Component Analysis Data

Activate the Fluid Data & Analysis entries by selecting Always Use Fluid Data
Overrides for GC Fail Code in the Analyzer Setup menu. No other entries are
needed in the Analyzer Setup menu.
Enter the compositional analysis data values into the appropriate fields in the
Fluid Data & Analysis menu.
Component Analysis Data via a Serial Data Link

Compositional analysis data values should be written into the appropriate
Modbus points normally containing the manual overrides in the Fluid Data &
Analysis menu.
Using Live Inputs for Heating Value, Specific Gravity, Nitrogen or

Carbon Dioxide
In the Station Configure menu, assign valid I/O points where 4-20mA and/or
Solartron 3096 gravitometer signals will be connected. Input valid scaling
factors in the Station N2 / SG Setup menu.
Note that override data fields in Product #1 entries of the Fluid Data &
Analysis Data menu are overwritten by live data values when 4-20mA inputs
are used for HV, SG, N2 or CO2.
TB-970804 w 23/27.71+
Date: 09
01
97
TB # 970901
Dual Pulse Flowmeter Pulse Fidelity

Checking
Contents
contained in Volumes 1, 3
and 4, and is applicable to
firmware revisions 20/24,
22/26 and 23/27 Versions
.71+, relating to helical
turbine flowmeters.
page layout.
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract........................................................................................................... 2
Installation Practices...................................................................................... 2
How the Flow Computer Performs Fidelity Checking .................................. 3
Correcting Errors ........................................................................................... 3
Common Mode Electrical Noise and Transients.........................................................3
Noise Pulse Coincident with an Actual Flow Pulse.....................................................3
Total Failure of a Pulse Channel ...............................................................................4
Alarms and Displays ...................................................................................... 4

Pulse Fidelity Checking The dual pulse fidelity
checking feature allows you
to reduce flowmeter
measurement uncertainty
caused by added or missing
pulses due to electrical
transients or equipment
failure.
Scope
Firmware Revisions 20/24, 22/26 and 23/27 Versions.70+ of Omni 6000/Omni
3000 Flow Computers have the feature of Dual Pulse Fidelity Checking. This
feature applies to Turbine/Positive Displacement Liquid and Gas Flow Metering
Systems.
TB-970901 w 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
The object of dual pulse fidelity checking is to reduce flowmeter measurement
uncertainty caused by added or missing pulses due to electrical transients or
equipment failure. Correct totalizing of flow must be maintained whenever
possible. This is achieved by correct installation practices and by using turbine
or positive displacement flowmeters which provide two pulse train outputs. In
addition, an E Combo I/O Module must be installed and the correct
configuration settings entered in the Omni Flow Computer.
The two pulse trains are called the A pulse and the B pulse. In normal
operation, both signals are equal in frequency and count but are always
separated in phase or time. The API Manual of Petroleum Measurement
Standards (Chapter 5, Section 5) describes several levels of pulse fidelity
checking ranging from Level E to Level A. Level A is the most stringent
method, requiring automatic totalizer corrections whenever the pulse trains are
different for any reason.
For all practical purposes, Level A as described in the API document is
probably unachievable. The Omni Flow Computer implements a significantly
enhanced Level B pulse security method by not only continuous monitoring and
alarming of error conditions but also correcting for obvious error situations, such
as a total failure of a pulse train or by rejecting simultaneous transient pulses.
No attempt is made to correct for ambiguous errors, such as missing or added
pulses. These errors are detected, alarmed and quantified only.
Installation Practices
When using pulse fidelity checking, it is assumed that the user begins with and
maintains a perfect noise free installation. The user must ensure that each
pulse train input to the flow computer is a clean, low impedance signal which
will not be subject to extraneous noise or electromagnetic transients. Any
regular occurrence of these types of events must cause the equipment and/or
wiring to be suspect and investigated. Pulse fidelity check circuitry is not
intended to facilitate continued operation with a poor wiring installation which is
prone to noise or transient pickup.
TB-970901w 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+
TB-970901
Dual Pulse Flowmeter Pulse Fidelity Checking
How the Flow Computer Performs Fidelity

Checking
Hardware on the E Combo I/O Module of the Omni Flow Computer continuously
monitors the phase and sequence of the two pulse trains. It also monitors the
frequency of the pulse trains. The flow computer determines the correct
sequence of flowmeter pulses based on the time interval between pulses rather
than the absolute phase difference. It does this by comparing the leading edges
of both pulse trains at a set clock interval of 16 microseconds. Maintaining a
minimum phase shift between the pulse trains (as indicated below) ensures that
related pulse edges of each channel are, in worst case, at least 5 clock samples
apart.
M AXIMUM PULSE
INPUT FREQUENCY
M AXIMUM PHASE
SHIFT REQUIRED
1.5 kHz
45 degrees
3.0 kHz
90 degrees
6.0 kHz
180 degrees
Correcting Errors
Missing or added pulses to either pulse train are considered ambiguous errors
and cannot be corrected. However, they are detected with a 100% certainty and
will be counted, eventually causing an alarm. Totalizing will continue using the
A Pulse Train.
Common Mode Electrical Noise and Transients

INFO - A certainty of 85% is
a conservative specification.
Tests on production units
show that a 95% detection is
a more typical proportion.
This is due to the time skew
between pulse channels
being closer to 1 msec than 2
msec.
Common mode electrical noise and transients occur at the same instant in time
(during the same clock period) on each pulse channel. They are detected with a
certainty of 85%*. The certainty can never be 100% because of the slight
differences in time (approximately 2 microseconds) that it takes each pulse to
travel through its associated input circuitry. These simultaneous pulses are not
used to totalize flow but are counted and will cause an alarm.
Noise Pulse Coincident with an Actual Flow Pulse

It is possible that a common mode noise pulse can occur during the same
sample period as an actual flow pulse. In this case, the pulse would be
detected, alarmed and rejected for totalizing, causing a missing pulse.
Statistically though, worst case at 3 kHz pulse input frequency, the odds are
approximately 20:1 that the pulse should be rejected. To not reject the pulse
would mean accepting 20 times as many extra flow pulses. The 20:1 ratio is
based on the ratio of the periodic time of the flow pulses divided by the periodic
time of the sample period (e.g.: 333.3msec / 16msec approximately equals 21).
TB-970901w 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+
Technical Bulletin
Total Failure of a Pulse Channel

A total failure of either pulse train will be detected with a 100% certainty. The
flow computer will alarm this condition and continue totalizing with the
remaining pulse train as recommended in API MPMS (Chapter 5, Section 5).
Alarms and Displays

To avoid spurious nuisance alarms such as can occur when flow begins, pulse
fidelity checking is disabled until the incoming frequency exceeds a user preset
frequency. Any differences in the two pulse trains will then be accumulated and
used to trigger an alarm when a user preset value is exceeded. Error
accumulations can be displayed or printed at any time. They are reset only at
the start of a new batch. Alarms are time tagged and recorded in the historical
alarm log.
TB-970901w 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+
Date: 02
06
98
TB # 980201

TDC3000
Systems
Contents
all firmware revisions
Versions .71+.
Communication Options
with Honeywell TDC3000
Systems - The Omni flow
computer can communicate
with Honeywell TDC3000
Systems via SIO modules in
combination with APM or
HPM modules. PLCG or
CLM modules communicate
directly with the Omni.
MVIP Testing - The Omni

flow computer has been
tested by Honeywell Phoenix
as part of their MVIP
certification program.
Contact Honeywell at:
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract........................................................................................................... 2
Communication Method 1: APM / HPM - SIO................................................ 2
FTA Array Points ......................................................................................................3
32-Bit Long Integer Variables .......................................................................................................... 3
Configuring The Omni Flow Computer ......................................................................4

Data Grouping Option (a) Custom Data Packet Setup ...............................................4
Modbus Function Codes Used to Access Custom Packet Data Within The Omni.......4
Data Grouping Option (b) Variable Statement Moves to Scratchpad Variables...........6
Communication Method 2: Programmable Logic Gateway (PLCG) ............ 6

Selection of Communication Method............................................................ 8
Scope
All firmware revisions Version .71+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 flow computers
have the capability of communicating with Honeywell TDC3000 Systems. This
is a new feature that requires specified communication modules.
(602) 313-5830
TB-980201 w ALL.71+
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
This technical bulletin addresses the various serial communication options that
can be used to transfer data between Omni flow computers and Honeywell
TDC3000 systems. The hardware equipment used and the limitations of each
method are also discussed.
Three types of serial communication modules are available:
1) Serial I/O (SIO) module in combination with either an Advanced Process

Manager (APM) or High Performance Process Manager (HPM) module.
2) Programmable Logic Controller Gateway (PLCG)

3) Communication Link Module (CLM)
MVIP testing was performed using an Omni 6000 and Honeywell module types
(1) and (2) above. Due to the unavailability of equipment and time constraints,
tests were not performed using the CLM module. After MVIP testing it was the
opinion of the Honeywell engineer that communications with the more powerful
and flexible CLM module would pose no problem to the Omni. The nature of the
types of tasks performed by the CLM module usually mean that a certain
amount of custom I/O driver programming is the norm. This being the case, the
CLM is the most flexible but also most expensive connectivity option.
Communication Method 1: APM / HPM - SIO

Honeywell engineers state that with regard to serial communication there are no
differences between the APM-SIO connection and the HPM-SIO connection.
This document will target the APM system but all discussion will also apply to
the HPM system.
The APM is a I/O rack system used to get I/O signals into the DCS system. It is
comprised of a plug in APM processor module and various other serial I/O,
analog I/O and digital I/O plug in modules. The APM rack system can be
expanded by adding one or more additional racks. Assuming open slots are
available, up to 16 SIO modules can be connected to each APM system. Each
SIO module is connected to the target equipment via a Field Termination
Assembly (FTA). Each FTA has 2 serial ports with each port individually
configurable as either an RS232 port or 2 wire RS485 port. Port characteristics
are as follows:
q
q
q
q
Modicon compatible Modbus RTU protocol

Maximum baud rate of 19200 kbps
Data bits 8
Stop bits and parity selectable
TB-980201 w ALL.71+
TB-980201

TDC3000 Systems
FTA Array Points

Each FTA has a maximum amount of memory space allocated by the APM.
This memory is organized in 16 blocks called Array Points. In addition, each
HPM or APM is limited to 80 Array points in total that must be shared between
all the SIO modules in its rack system. Each Array Point can therefore hold 512
bits of data and can hold one type of data variable.
Each Array Point can therefore be configured as one of the following:
512
32
16
16
Coils or Status points.

16 bit Short Integer registers
IEEE Floating point variables
32 bit Long Integer variables (see below)
With a maximum of 16 array points available per FTA it can be seen that data
consolidation and grouping becomes very important. Typical TDC3000-Omni
systems will require a mixture of data types to be exchanged, this further
complicates the configuration process. The user must take care not to waste
valuable memory space by partially filling array points. Try to minimize the
types of variable (e.g.: if you only need to read a few short integers consider
converting them to long integers within the flow computer using variable
statements). The limited number of array points also impacts how many Omni
flow computers can be connected (multi dropped) to each FTA for example:
Most applications require long integer totalizers, IEEE floating point values and
also alarm statuses. This means that at least 3 array points will be needed per
Omni and that assumes that 16 IEEE floats, 16 totalizers and 512 alarms will be
sufficient to transfer all the data needed by the TDC3000 system (extremely
unlikely, as there could be up to 4 meter runs configured).
32-Bit Long Integer Variables

Long integer types are not supported directly by the TDC3000 system. They can
be read as 2 concatenated 16-bit short integers and combined within the
TDC3000 system. The Honeywell cannot write to Omni long integer types
because the Honeywell SIO Modbus protocol does not support Modbus function
code 16 (write multiple registers) for integer registers. The protocol does
however support writing to IEEE Floating point variables. Omnis experience
has shown that there are very few instances where the TDC3000 system needs
to write long integers within the flow computer. Typical long integer data that
there has been a need to write in the past has been duplicated in IEEE floats as
shown below and on following page.
TB-980201 w ALL.71+
Long Integer
IEEE Float
Meter #1 - Current MF in Use

5113
5213
5313
5413
7796
7797
7798
7799
Station Running Batch Size

Station Next Batch Size
5819
5820
7787
7783
Technical Bulletin
Long Integer
IEEE Float
Meter #1 - Next Batch Size
5820
7783
Meter #2 - Running Batch Size

5825
5826
7788
7784

5831
5832
7789
7785

5837
5838
7790
7786
Configuring The Omni Flow Computer

Setup the flow computer serial port settings to match the Honeywell FTA
settings and make sure to select Modicon Compatible.
In view of the Honeywell array point limitation it is important to group the data
as efficiently as possible within the Omni flow computer. Two options are
available:
1) Custom data packet arrays
2) Move data to flow computer scratchpad variables using Variable
Statements
Method 1 must be used if it will be necessary to both read and write into the
variables. Method 2 can only be used when it is only necessary to read data.
Data Grouping Option (a) Custom Data Packet Setup

The Omni flow computer has 3 custom data packet areas where data can be
grouped. These 3 data areas are addressed starting at Modbus addresses
0001, 0201 and 0401. Configure these data areas by completing the custom
packet setup menus in the flow computer.
When the Omni serial port is set as being Modicon Compatible the custom
packet data is read / write accessible by the TDC3000 system. Unlike the FTA
arrays, the Omni does allow mixed data types within a custom data
packet/array. This means that multiple FTA array points can be associated with
one custom packet.
Modbus Function Codes Used to Access Custom Packet

Data Within The Omni
The Omni supports the following Modbus function codes to access custom
packet data:
Read Multiple Registers
Write Multiple Registers
Write Single Register
03
16
06
TB-980201 w ALL.71+
TB-980201

TDC3000 Systems
From the above it can be seen that Boolean variables must be handled
differently when grouped within a custom array. They cannot be accessed using
the normal Modbus function codes 01, 05 and 15. They can be read and written
but as byte packed bits within Registers not as Coils and Status bits. For this
reason it is recommended that writes to Boolean coils be accomplished by using
the normal Modbus function code 05 and writing directly to the database
Boolean point address.
CAUTION!
Because Boolean data is byte
packed the user must ensure
that the number of Booleans
included in the custom
packet are grouped in such a
way as to ensure that the
packet always contains an
even number of bytes (i.e.
the function codes we are
using expect to be dealing
with registers and you cant
have half a register).
Here is an example showing a typical setup using the custom packet located at
address 0001:
ADDRESS
FTA ARRAY # USED
Packet #01 Point #

# of Points
Packet #02 Point #
# of Points
Packet #03 Point #
# of Points
Packet #04 Point #
# of Points
Packet #05 Point #
# of Points
Packet #06 Point #
# of Points
Packet #07 Point #
# of Points
Packet #08 Point #
# of Points
Packet #09 Point #
# of Points
Packet #10 Point #
# of Points
7101
8
7201
8
7301
8
7401
8
5101
4
5201
4
5301
4
5401
4
3101
4
3201
4
0001 - 0016
0017 - 0032
0033 - 0048
0049 - 0064
0065 - 0072
0073 - 0080
0081 - 0088
0089 - 0096
0097 - 0100
0101 - 0104
Packet #11 Point #

# of Points
Packet #12 Point #
# of Points
Packet #13 Point #
# of Points
Packet #14 Point #
# of Points
Packet #15 Point #
# of Points
Packet #16 Point #
# of Points
Packet #17 Point #
# of Points
Packet #18 Point #
# of Points
Packet #19 Point #
# of Points
Packet #20 Point #
# of Points
3301
4
3401
4
1105
48
1205
48
1305
48
1405
48
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0105 - 0108
0109 - 0112
0113 - 0115
0116 - 0118
0119 - 0121
0122 - 0124
Total 16 Floats
Total 16 Floats
Total 16 Long Int.
Total
Int.
16
Short
Total 24 Packed
Bytes
These packets are available but

are not used in this example.
The above shows a total of 32 floating points,16 long integers, 16 short integers
and 192 Boolean status bits packed in 24 bytes being mapped in 1 custom data
packet and 5 FTA arrays.
TB-980201 w ALL.71+
Technical Bulletin
Data Grouping Option (b) Variable Statement Moves to

Scratchpad Variables
Option (b) is limited to when data needs to be read but not written to. Non
contiguous data is moved into the flow computer scratchpad variables located
at:
Boolean Scratchpad Variables
Integer Scratchpad Variables
String Scratchpad Variables
Long Integer Scratchpad Variables
Floating Point Scratchpad Variables
1501
3501
4501
5501
7501
through
through
through
through
through
1699
3599
4599
5599
7599
User Boolean statements are used to group Boolean bits as follows:

Example:
1025:
1026:
1501=1105:1169
1565=1205:1269
Move 64 bits to 1501 through 1564

Move 64 bits to 1565 through 1628
User variable statements are used to move all of the remaining data types as
follows:
Example:
7025:
7026:
7501=7101:7103
7504=7201:7203
Move 3 floats to 7501 through 7503

Move 3 floats to 7504 through 7506
Communication Method 2: Programmable

Logic Gateway (PLCG)
The PLCG is meant to receive register data from PLCs representing unscaled
analog values and 16-bit counters. Functionality is built into the PLCG which
allows the user to easily scale analog inputs of 0-9999 or 0-4095 into
engineering units. Alarm points can also be entered and monitored. This
philosophy is at odds with the Omni flow computer as the vast majority of the
variables within the flow computer are in engineering units requiring no scaling
or alarm checking in the PLCG. In addition most of the data is contained in
IEEE floating point format or 32-bit long integer values.
The Modbus protocol supported by the PLCG unlike the APM-SIO module does
not support reads or writes of IEEE floating point data. The protocol also does
not support multiple register writes which would be required to write data to a
flow computer long integer type.
The PLCG can however be configured to scale other nominal ranges such as 0999 of which there are some variables of this type within the flow computer as
shown below:
Mtr#1
Mtr#2
Mtr#3
Mtr#4
Station
Current Gross Flow Rates

Current Net Flow Rates
Current Mass Flow Rates
Current S&W Corrected Flow Rates
3142
3140
3144
3149
3242
3240
3244
3249
3342
3340
3344
3349
3442
3440
3444
3449
3804
3802
3806
Current Temperature
Current Pressure
Current Analog Density
3147
3146
3148
3247
3246
3248
3347
3346
3348
3447
3446
3448
3809
3808
3810
TB-980201 w ALL.71+

TDC3000 Systems
TB-980201
Counter inputs ranging from 0-65535 are treated more generically requiring no
scaling and are usually used for display purposes or are passed to an
Application Module (AM) for processing.
There are two options to monitor totalizing within the Omni flow computer:
1) Read long integer totalizers as two consecutive counter inputs and

combine in the Application Module (AM) as follows:
Totalizer = (high register * 65536) + low register
2) Read specially provided 16 bit integer non-resetable totalizers that roll at

65536 within the Omni data base shown below.
Gross Totalizer
Net Totalizer
Mass Totalizer
S&W Corrected Net Totalizer
Mtr#1
Mtr#2
Mtr#3
Mtr#4
Station
3143
3141
3145
3150
3243
3241
3245
3250
3343
3341
3345
3350
3443
3441
3445
3450
3805
3803
3807
The advantage of option (1) above is that any of the internal totalizers of the
flow computer can be read in this manner and the results displayed by the
TDC3000 system will match the flow computer displayed values. Option (2) is
limited to one set of non-resetable totals which are not normally displayed at the
flow computer and are of limited use.
Using Variable Statements within the Omni flow computer makes it easy to
convert just about any variable within the flow computers data base into a 16bit register that can be read by the PLCG as either a counter or an analog
(assuming the data will fit), the only problem being the availability of enough
variable statements (64 are provided).
Example 1: Variable read as counter for display only
7025:
3501=7105*#10
3501 contains M #1 temperature in tenths of

degrees
Example 2: Variable read as unscaled analog 0-4095 representing 50 to 150 F

7026:
7105-#50
Adjust for 50 degree zero point
7027:
3502=7026*#40.95
100 degree span = 4095, move to scratch

integer 3502
Note that in Example 2 above, no attempt was made to limit the impact of over
or under range values passed to the PLCG. It is the authors understanding that
inputs outside of the expected range cause bad process value alarms in the
PLCG.
TB-980201 w ALL.71+
Technical Bulletin
Selection of Communication Method

Analysis of the various methods available shows that communications via the
APM-SIO or HPM-SIO are most likely to provide the best solution, providing
reasonable access to the flow computers database and requiring no custom
driver programming in the TDC3000 system. Because of the awkward
philosophical fit between the PLCG and flow computer type devices, many of
the built in features of the PLCG (such as scaling and alarming) cannot be
used. For this reason the use of a PLCG is not recommended except for
instances where one already exists in a system and has an open port and an
APM or HPM is not available. The CLM module is potentially the most flexible
solution but the cost impact of any custom software driver development must
be determined. Omni does not know whether a compatible protocol driver
exists at this time, please contact Honeywell for more information in this regard.
TB-980201 w ALL.71+
Date: 02
23
98
Author(s): Kenneth D. Elliott / T.J. Tajani / R.L. Stallard
TB # 980202
Recalculating a Previous Batch within the

Flow Computer
Contents
Chapter 3 Computer
Batching Operations,
applicable to Revision
20.71/24.71+.
Batch Recalculation - The

batch recalculation feature
allows you to adjust
quantities of the previous 4
batches at measurement
locations where SG60/API60
and S&W values only
become available after the
batch has been delivered.
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract........................................................................................................... 2
Calculations Performed ................................................................................. 2
Using the Flow Computer Keypad to Recalculate a Previous Batch
Ticket .............................................................................................................. 3
Step 1.......................................................................................................................3
Step 2.......................................................................................................................3
Step 3.......................................................................................................................3
Step 4.......................................................................................................................4
Step 5.......................................................................................................................4
How the Flow Computer Manages the Modbus Database ........................... 5

Previous Batch Data that Is Writable .........................................................................6
Conclusion ..................................................................................................... 7
Scope
Computers have the feature of Batch Recalculation. This feature applies to
Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems (with K
Factor Linearization.
TB-980202 w 20/24.71+
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
The purpose of recalculating a previous batch is to make batch quantity
corrections based on SG60/API60 and Sediment and Water data becoming
available via sample analysis performed after a batch delivery is complete. At
measurement locations where SG60/API60 and S&W values are not available
online, sampler devices continuously extract a representative sample of fluid
during a batch. At the end of the batch the sample container is sent for lab
analysis. The data obtained from the analysis report can then be used to
recalculate the batch correction factors and therefore batch quantities. Historical
data from these analysis reports is also used to determine what values of
SG60/API60 should be used for real time calculation of future batches that are
known to have similar characteristic. These batches ultimately can also be
recalculated when their actual analysis is determined.
Calculations Performed
q The liquid correction factors Ctl and Cpl are first recalculated using the
sample analysis SG60/API60 and the batch flow weighted average
temperature and pressure calculated during the batch.
q Gross Standard Volume (GSV) is recalculated using the newly calculated
Ctl and Cpl.
q The Sediment and Water correction factor Csw is calculated using the
sample analysis S&W%.
q Net Standard Volume (NSV) is recalculated using the recalculated GSV
and Csw factor.
TB-980202 w 20/24.71+
TB-980202
Recalculating a Previous Batch within the Flow Computer
Using the Flow Computer Keypad to

Recalculate a Previous Batch Ticket
CAUTION!
To ensure that previous

batch data is correctly
recalculated do not
recalculate a batch close to
ending a current batch in
progress.
Step 1
Press [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n] [Enter] (n = meter run number). The Omni
LCD screen will display:
METER #1 BATCH
Print & Reset ?
Select Prev# Batch 1
Enter API60
.0
Enter SG60
.0000
Enter %S&W
.00
Recalculate&Print?
TIP - Note that only 4 lines

can be displayed at one time.
Use the scroll up or down
arrows keys to display
additional text.
Step 2
Select which previous batch you wish to recalculate. The Omni stores the last 4
completed batches numbered as:
1 = last batch completed
to
4 = oldest batch completed.
Press [
] to scroll down to Select Prev # Batch and enter a number between
1 and 4, depending upon which batch is to be recalculated.
The flow computer moves the selected previous batch data to the previous
batch data points within the database (see explanation later in this document)
Step 3
Enter Password when requested.
TB-980202 w 20/24.71+
Technical Bulletin
Step 4
Scroll to either Enter API60 or Enter SG60. Type in a valid value and press
[Enter].
Step 5
Scroll to Recalculate & Print?. Press [Y] and then [Enter].
At this time the flow computer will recalculate the batch data and send the
report to the printer and the Historical Batch Report Buffer in RAM memory.
Batch report data can also be captured in Raw Data Archive RAM using the
trigger Boolean 1n76. The default batch report shows the batch number as
XXXXXX-XX where the number ahead of the - is the batch number (5n90) and
the number after the - is the number of times that the batch has been
recalculated (3n52). Variable (3n52) is reset to 0 at the end of a batch and
increments each time the batch is recalculated.
TB-980202 w 20/24.71+
TB-980202
How the Flow Computer Manages the Modbus

Database
A pointer mechanism has been utilized which avoids having to have duplicate
data points for every batch report variable for each of the four previous batches.
Only one set of data points for previous batch data are mapped within the
Modbus database. A pointer register is used to determine which set of previous
batch data will be available by accessing the previous batch data points within
the Modbus database.
Using the batch gross totalizer variable as an example, we have:
Note: The second digit of the
index number (indicated as
n) defines which meter run
you are working with (i.e., n
= 1, 2, 3 or 4).
q Modbus address of Current Batch in Progress Gross Totalizer is 5n01

q Modbus address of Previous Batch Gross Totalizer is 5n50
q Modbus address of Pointer register to select which previous batch is
mapped is 3n51
As the batch progresses, the gross totalizer (5n01) accumulates flow. At the end
of the batch the flow computer performs the following actions:
1) #3 previous batch data replaces #4 previous batch data

4) Current batch data replaces #1 previous batch data
5) Pointer register 3n51 is set to the value 1 so that the Modbus database
addresses for previous batch will access data for the batch just ended.
This ensures that the batch report which prints immediately at the end of
a batch and gets its data from the Modbus database, includes the
correct information.
The following table (using the batch gross totalizer as an example) shows
typical data that would be read by accessing Modbus points 5n01 and 5n50.
The data read depends upon the value of pointer register 3n51.
TB-980202 w 20/24.71+
STEP
DESCRIPTION
Technical Bulletin
CURRENT
BATCH
1ST PREV.
BATCH
2ND PREV.
BATCH
3RD PREV.
BATCH
4TH PREV.
BATCH
5n01
5n50
5n50
5n50
5n50
Value contained in
Pointer register
3n51.
First batch running.
12340
First batch ended.
23450
12340
Second batch
ended.
34560
23450
12340
Third batch ended.
45670
34560
23450
12340
Fourth batch ended.
56780
45670
34560
23450
12340
6123
56780
45670
34560
23450
Fifth batch ended

with sixth batch
running.
Previous Batch Data that Is Writable

Except for the data listed below, all data points for previous batch transactions
are read only for reasons of data integrity.
M ETER #1
M ETER #2
M ETER #3
M ETER #4
STATION
SG 60 or Reference
Density (Rev. 24.71)
8508
8608
8708
8808
8908
API 60 Gravity
8519
8619
8719
8819
8919
Sediment and Water

Percentage (BS&W)
8517
8617
8717
8817
8917
Command Boolean which

triggers the recalculation
2756
2757
2758
2759
1798
TB-980202 w 20/24.71+
TB-980202
Conclusion
Note: Setting these registers
via Variable Statements is
not allowed and will not
produce the expected results
The flow computer retains data for the last four completed batches. Only one
set of this data can be accessed at a time. Pointer registers, 3151 Meter Run
#1, 3251 Meter Run #2, 3351 Meter Run #3, 3451 Meter Run #4n and 3879 for
Meter Station are used to determine what set of batch data will be accessed.
API60/SG60 and S&W data can be adjusted and the batch recalculated by
writing a 1 to points, 2756 for Meter Run #1, 2757 for Meter Run #2, 2758 for
Meter Run #3, 2759 for Meter Run #4 and 1798 for Meter Station.
TB-980202 w 20/24.71+
Date: 04
06
98
TB # 980401
Peer-to-Peer Basics
Contents
contained in User Manual,
and is applicable to all
firmware revisions Version
.70+.
This is an updated edition
that replaces previously
published bulletins under the
same title.
See also the following:
q TB-980402 - Using the
Peer-to-Peer Function in a
Redundant Flow
Computer Application
q Volume 1 - 1.6.3. Serial
Communication Modules
Peer-to-Peer
peer-to-peer communication
feature allows you to multidrop up to 32 flow computers
and other devices in RS-485
serial communications mode,
and up to 12 using RS-232-C
communications.
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract........................................................................................................... 2
Determining Which Computer Will Be Master .............................................. 2
Communication Settings for the Peer-to-Peer Link ..................................... 3
Foreign Modbus Devices and Single Master Systems................................. 3
Wiring Options ............................................................................................... 4
RS-232-C Wiring Requirements ................................................................................4
RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Wiring Requirements ...................................................5
RS-485 Wiring Requirements....................................................................................6
Setting up Transactions ................................................................................ 8

What Modbus Function Codes Are Used...................................................... 8
Special Considerations when Modicon Compatible is Selected for Port
#2..................................................................................................................... 8
Using Peer-to-Peer with Micro Motion
Coriolis Mass Meters ................... 9
The Micro Motion Meter is a Modicon Compatible Device ........................................11
Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer Transactions .................................................. 11
Scope
schemes allows for
interconnecting two
configured flow computers.
TB-980401 w ALL.70+
All firmware revisions Version .70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers
have the Peer-to-Peer Communication feature.
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
Communications between Omni flow computers is accomplished using the
peer-to-peer function. This function is available only on Serial Port #2 with data
being transmitted and received using Modbus RTU protocol. A data transaction
list within each flow computer defines each Read or Write operation to be
transacted for that computer. A maximum of 16 transactions per flow computer
are available. The transaction list must be contiguous (i.e., an empty
transaction will be treated as the end of list).
Two optional serial communication I/O modules are available with your flow
computer: the RS-232-C (compatible) Model #68-6005, and the RS-232-C/RS485 Model #68-6205. The older Model #68-6005 is only capable of RS-232
compatible serial communications. The newer Model #68-6205 is capable of
either RS-232 or RS-485 communications via a selection jumper. When
jumpered for RS-232, the characteristics and functionality of this module is
identical to that of the older RS-232-C module.
Determining Which Computer Will Be Master

Each flow computer wishing to communicate must temporarily become a
Modbus Master so that messages may be initiated and its transaction list
processed. This is accomplished when the current Modbus Master completes its
transaction list and broadcasts the Modbus address of the next computer to be
the master. The computer with the Modbus ID which matches the broadcast
then assumes mastership and proceeds to process its transaction list. A timeout occurs whenever the next master in sequence does not take mastership and
the broadcast will be retried once. Should the computer still fail to respond, the
current master will attempt to pass mastership to the next computer in
sequence by incrementing the Modbus ID by one and re-broadcasting the new
Modbus ID. Each flow computer needing to process a transaction list (i.e., be a
master) requires the following three entries: (1) Next Master in Sequence; (2)
Last Master in Sequence; and (3) Retry Timer (50mS ticks).
These entries are in the Peer-to-Peer Setup menu and function as follows:
Entry 1 : This entry is the Modbus ID for the next flow computer master. A
non zero entry here is what actually turns on the peer-topeer function. Modbus IDs for master devices in the link must
be assigned starting at 1, and for maximum efficiency not contain
any missing IDs (i.e., 1, 2, 3, 4, Not 1, 3, 6, 10, for instance).
Entry 2 : This entry is the Modbus ID for the last flow computer master.
Any master failing to find the next master will keep trying
Modbus IDs until it reaches this ID, it will then start the search
again at Modbus ID 1.
Entry 3 : This entry is used to setup the communication retry rate. When
the peer-to-peer link is solely comprised of Omni flow computers
this entry should be set to 3 ticks (150 msec).
TB-980401 w ALL.70+
TB-980401
Peer-to-Peer Basics
Communication Settings for the Peer-to-Peer

Link
The following settings must be used:
q
q
q
q
Modbus RTU Protocol

8 Data Bits
1 Stop Bit
No Parity
While slower baud rates can be used, 38.4 kbps or 19.2 kbps will provide
maximum performance.
Foreign Modbus Devices and Single Master

Systems
INFO - It is important to note
that in a peer-to-peer system,
only the flow computers that
have a non-zero entry for
Next Master in Sequence
are limited to using Serial
Port #2, all of the other flow
computers are simply acting
as Modbus slaves and can
use any valid Modbus serial
port.
TB-980401 w ALL.70+
The peer-to-peer function is not limited to multiple Omni flow computers. Some
applications simply require a single flow computer master to communicate with
a variety of Modbus slave devices which may be flow computers, PLCs etc. In
these cases, the entries 1 and 2 above would be set to 1 in the master flow
computer only, signifying only one master is in the system. Entry 3 above would
normally be set to 3 but may need to be increased depending upon the
message response time of any foreign Modbus devices in the system.
Technical Bulletin
Wiring Options
RS-232-C Wiring Requirements
The following diagram shows the wiring requirements using the RS-232-C
termination option. When multiple flow computers are used as peer-to-peer
masters, they are connected in two-wire, multi-drop mode.
Computer uses a proprietary
tristatable
RS-232-Compatible serial
port, which unlike a normal
RS-232 port, can be multidropped, interconnecting up
to 12 flow computers or other
serial devices.
Omni #1
Omni #2
Omni #3
Omni #4
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
Fig. 1.
Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements using the

RS-232-C Termination Option
TB-980401 w ALL.70+
TB-980401
Peer-to-Peer Basics
RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Wiring Requirements

The following diagram shows a typical installation where two flow computers are
connected to a PLC via an RS-232 to RS-485 converter module.
Omni #1
Omni #2
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
5
6
7
8
9
7
8
9
10
11
12
10
11
12
Fig. 2.
TB-980401 w ALL.70+
RS-232 to 485
Converter
(Disable Echo)
R
S
2
3
2
TX-A
TX-B
RX-A
RX-B
PLC
R
A S
B 4
8
5
Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with PLC

using a Standard RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Module
Technical Bulletin
RS-485 Wiring Requirements

have an MV Module to
communicate with
This serial module is
jumpered to IRQ 3 when
used in combination with an
MV Module. Without an MV
Module, the jumper is placed
at IRQ 2. The MV Module
can only be used with this
serial module (68-6205) and
is not compatible with the
Serial I/O Module # 68-6005.
For more information, see
Technical Bulletin # TB980303.
The diagram below shows a typical peer-to-peer installation using RS-485

communications, where four flow computers are interconnected in a two-wire,
multi-drop mode.
Omni #1
Omni #2
Omni #3
Omni #4
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
(B)
7
8
10
10
10
(A)
RS-485 Two-wire
Terminated
11
(A)
12
RS-485 Two-wire
Non-terminated
11
(B)
12
6
(B)
10
11
Fig. 3.
(B)
(A)
12
RS-485 Two-wire
Non-terminated
11
(A)
12
RS-485 Two-wire
Terminated

RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop
TB-980401 w ALL.70+
TB-980401
Peer-to-Peer Basics
The peer-to-peer communication link may also be used to transfer data to and
from any other Modbus slave device such as a PLC. The following diagram
shows a typical installation using RS-485 where two flow computers are
connected to a PLC in a two-wire, multi-drop mode.
Omni #1
Omni #2
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
5
6
(B)
7
8
9
10
(A)
11
12
RS-485 Two-wire
Terminated
Fig. 4.
TB-980401 w ALL.70+
(B)
7
8
9
10
(A)
11
12
PLC
R
S
A 4
8
5
B
RS-485 Two-wire
Non-terminated
Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with PLC

using the RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop
Technical Bulletin
Setting up Transactions
To process a transaction the flow computer requires the following data for each
transaction:
Modbus Broadcast
Address 0 - This address
only applies to write
transactions.
Slave ID
: The Modbus address of the target device.

This can be any valid Modbus address
including the broadcast address 0.
Read or Write
: Select the appropriate operation.
Source Point Number
: Specifies the data base address of the
variable in the source device. For a read
operation the slave is the source. For a write
operation the source is the Omni flow
computer master.
Number of Points
: The number of consecutive data variables to
transfer between devices, starting at the
source point number or address.
Destination Point Number : Specifies the data base address of the
variable in the destination device. For a write
operation the slave is the destination. For a
read operation the destination is the Omni
flow computer master.
What Modbus Function Codes Are Used

The flow computer decides what Modbus function code will be used depending
upon the Omni flow computer data type specified in the transaction.
Transactions involving short or long integers or IEEE floats will use Modbus
function codes 03H for reads and 10H for writes. Boolean variables are packed 8
to a byte starting at LS bit and use function codes 01H for reads and 0FH for
writes.
Special Considerations when Modicon

Compatible is Selected for Port #2
Some adjustments to the previous entries are needed when communicating
with devices that require Modicon Compatible to be selected for the peer-topeer port.
1) All data base point addresses (whether source or destination) referring to
the foreign Modicon compatible device, should be entered as one less
than the point address listed. This is needed because the Modicon device
automatically adds one to the address received over the data link and
subtracts one from the address before transmitting. References to data
base point addresses within the Omni flow computer master still use the
normal point address as shown in the Omni documentation.
2) The number of points entry becomes the number of 16 bit registers to
transfer, rather than the number of data variables.
TB-980401 w ALL.70+
TB-980401
Peer-to-Peer Basics
Using Peer-to-Peer with Micro Motion
Coriolis Mass Meters

The Omni flow computer can be configured to accept mass or volume pulses
from a Micro Motion (MM) Coriolis Meter RFT transmitter as well as
communicate via Modbus to the device and obtain variables such as fluid
density and MM transducer alarm status.
The flow computer is equipped with special firmware code to make the interface
to the Micro Motion meter more useful and hopefully simpler. The
communication link between the Micro Motion meter and the flow computer is
via the peer-to-peer link. It is possible to have multiple Micro Motion meters
connected to multiple flow computers as shown below.
Omni #1
Omni #2
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
Micro
Motion
RFT #2
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
R
S
27 (Z22) 4
26 (D22) 8
5
7
8
7
8
9
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
RS-232 to 485
Converter
(Disable Echo)
R
S
2
3
2
TX-A
TX-B
RX-A
RX-B
R
27 (Z22)
S
26 (D22) 4
8
5
Micro
Motion
RFT #1
Note: Termination Points 26 & 27

correspond to the explosion-proof
field-mount RFT9739; and (D22)
& (Z22) to the rack-mount version
of the model.
Fig. 5.
TB-980401 w ALL.70+
Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with Micro

Motion RFT Transmitters using a RS-232 to RS-485 Converter
Technical Bulletin
The following diagram shows a typical peer-to-peer installation using RS-485,

where two flow computers are connected to two Micro Motion RFT9739
transmitters via a proprietary RS-232/485 Serial I/O Module #68-6205.
Micro Motion Elite
Model
RFT9739 Transmitter
Connectivity - Both fieldmount (explosion-proof) and
rack-mount models of the
RFT9739 transmitter have
the A and B channels
reversed to the industry
standard applied to Omni
flow computers; i.e., the flow
computers A channel
connects to Micro Motions B
channel. Omni has tested
this connectivity with the
Micro Motion RFT9739 FieldMount Transmitter, but
connecting to the rack-mount
version has not yet been
tested. Information on this
connectivity has been
provided by Micro Motion,
Inc. Please contact Micro
Motion for further
information.
Omni #1
Omni #2
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
5
6
7 (B)
8
9
10
(A)
11
12
7 (B)
8
9
10
(A)
11
12
RS-485 Two-wire
Terminated
Fig. 6.
10
RS-485 Two-wire
Non-terminated
Note: Termination resistors

may be required with some
installations.
Micro
Motion
RFT9739
#1
Micro
Motion
RFT9739
#2
(B)
26 (D22)
(B)
26 (D22)
(A)
27 (Z22)
120W
(A)
27 (Z22)
Note: Termination Points 26 & 27

correspond to the explosion-proof
field-mount RFT9739; and (D22)
& (Z22) to the rack-mount version
of the model.
Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with Micro

Motion RFT9739 Transmitters using the RS-485 Two-wire Multidrop.
TB-980401 w ALL.70+
TB-980401
Peer-to-Peer Basics
The Micro Motion Meter is a Modicon Compatible Device

Some adjustments to the peer-to-peer entries are needed when communicating
with devices that require Modicon Compatible to be selected for the peer-topeer port (Serial Port #2).
1) All data base point addresses (whether source or destination) referring to
the foreign Modicon compatible device, should be entered as one less
than the point address listed. This is needed because the Modicon device
automatically adds one to the address received over the data link and
subtracts one from the address before transmitting. References to data
base point addresses within the Omni flow computer master still use the
normal point address as shown in the Omni documentation.
2) The number of points entry becomes the number of 16 bit registers to
transfer, rather than the number of data variables.
Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer Transactions

Note: Meter Run #1 Density
I/O point must be assigned to
99 and Serial Port #2 must
be assigned to be Modicon
Compatible for this to work
correctly. Note also that the
MM Modicon documentation
manual lists the flowing
density as point number
20249. This is common with
Modicon compatible devices.
Where there is a 5 digit
address, drop the first digit
and subtract 1 from the point
address before using it in a
transaction.
The following peer-to-peer transaction reads the flowing density of the fluid
from the Micro Motion device (Modbus ID #2) and stores it in data base point
7108 (unfactored density, meter run #1).
Transaction #1
Target Slave ID
Read/Write ?
Source Point #
# of Points
Destination Pnt #
........
2
........
R
........ 248
........
2
........ 7108
The next transaction reads a 16-bit integer register from the MM meter which
contains packed alarm status bits. These are stored in a special register within
the flow computer which causes them to be time and date tagged, printed and
logged just as though they were flow computer alarms.
Transaction #2
Target Slave ID
Read/Write ?
Source Point #
# of Points
Destination Pnt #
........
2
........
R
........
0
........
1
........ 3118
The examples above refer to Meter #1 transactions that the flow computer is
requesting. More transactions may be needed depending upon what data is
required and how many meter runs are being used.
TB-980401 w ALL.70+
11
Date: 04
07
98
Author(s): Kenneth E. Elliott / Robert L. Stallard
TB # 980402
Using the Peer-to-Peer Function in a

Redundant Flow Computer Application
Contents
firmware revisions Versions
.70+.
This is an updated edition of
the bulletin previously
published under the same
title.
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract........................................................................................................... 2
RS-232-C Wiring Requirements ..................................................................... 2
RS-485 Wiring Requirements......................................................................... 3
Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer for Redundant Flow Computer Applications . 3
Sensing Failures and Switching between Redundant Computers.............. 5
Changing the Master / Slave Status via a Modbus Serial Port .................... 6
Redirecting the Control Signals .................................................................... 6
schemes allows for
interconnecting two
configured flow computers.
Sharing Input Signals Between Primary and Secondary Flow Computers 7

Re-Calibration of Analog Inputs.................................................................... 7
Sharing Digital I/O Signals Between Primary and Secondary Flow
Computers ...................................................................................................... 7
Scope
All firmware revisions Versions .70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers
have the Peer-to-Peer Communications feature, which is available only on
Serial Port #2. This features includes the capability of setting-up redundant flow
computer schemes.
TB-980402 w ALL.70+
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
Redundancy involves using two identically equipped flow computers and
connecting them in such a way to ensure uninterrupted measurement and
control functionality in the event of failure of one of the units. This requires that
all input and output signals are connected to both computers. During normal
operation, one computer is designated the primary and the other computer the
secondary or backup. To ensure synchronization between both devices,
important variables such as PID controller settings, control valve positions and
proving meter factors must be transmitted from the primary flow computer via
the peer-to-peer link to the secondary flow computer. Should a failure of the
primary flow computer occur, the secondary flow computer is automatically
promoted to primary and assumes all control and measurement functions. In
this case the data flow on the peer-to-peer link reverses automatically and the
new master begins to transmit critical data to the slave, assuming that it is
functioning. Peer-to-peer communication errors can occur during the switch
over and are normal. They are cleared by pressing the [Ack] key on the flow
computer keypad or writing to point 1712 (acknowledge station alarms). If the
other flow computer is non-operational, the peer-to-peer communication errors
cannot be cleared.
RS-232-C Wiring Requirements

The following diagram shows the wiring needed when flow computers are
applied in a redundancy scheme via the peer-to-peer feature and using the
proprietary RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005. They are connected
in a two-wire multi-drop mode.
Fig. 1.
Omni #1
Omni #2
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
10
10
11
11
12
12
Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements (RS-232-C

Serial Port)
TB-980402 w ALL.70+
TB-980402
Using the Peer-to-Peer Function in a Redundant Flow Computer Application
RS-485 Wiring Requirements

The diagram below shows the wiring needed when flow computers are applied
in a redundancy scheme via the peer-to-peer feature and using the proprietary
RS-232/485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205. They are connected in a multidrop mode using the RS-485 two-wire termination option.
Omni #1
Omni #2
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
5
6
(B)
7
8
9
10
(A)
11
12
(B)
7
8
9
10
(A)
11
12
RS-485 Two-wire
Terminated
Fig. 2.
RS-485 Two-wire
Terminated

RS-485 Two-wire Termination Mode in a Redundant Flow
Computer Scheme
Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer for Redundant

Flow Computer Applications
The Activate Redundancy Mode entry is found in the peer-to-peer setup menu.
Answering Yes causes the Next Master and Last Master entries to disappear
from the menu. They no longer need to be entered as the two flow computers
now manage these two entries automatically. Any data needing to be
synchronized between the flow computers will need to be setup by the user as
transactions in the peer-to-peer menu.
TB-980402 w ALL.70+
Technical Bulletin
Two transactions are needed to handle redundant PID control:

Transactions #1 & #2 Both primary and secondary
flow computers must have
these entries if they will be
used for PID control.
q Transaction #1: Sends
the primary flow computer
PID control mode settings
(Auto/Manual,
Local/Remote) to the
secondary flow computer.
q Transaction #2: Sends
the primary flow computer
PID set points and valve
position values to the
Transaction #1
Target Slave ID
Read/Write ?
Source Point #
NO of Points
Destination Pnt #
........
........
........
........
........
2
W
13462
8
13470
Transaction #2
Target Slave ID
Read/Write ?
Source Point #
NO of Points
Destination Pnt #
........
........
........
........
........
2
W
7601
20
7601
More peer-to-peer transactions are needed if additional data needs to be

transferred, meter factors for example.
Flow computers containing firmware Revisions 22 or 26 handle meter factor
implementation differently than Revisions 20 or 24. These applications
maintain historical meter factor entries which are triggered and stored when the
meter factor is accepted and implemented at the end of a meter proving. As
only the primary flow computer will be doing the actual proving, three special
variables with associated firmware code have been added to the data base of
revisions 22 and 26. By writing to and reading from these variables via the
peer-to-peer link, the secondary flow computer can implement the meter factor
result obtained when the primary computer completes and accepts a prove
result.
The following two transactions are required:
Transactions #3 & #4
(Applicable to Firmware
Versions 22 & 26 Only) Both primary and secondary
flow computers must have
these entries.
q Transaction #3: Used to
send the prove meter
factor (5904) and the
number of the meter last
proved (5905) to the
q Transaction #4:
Confirms that the meter
factor has been
implemented in the
secondary flow computer
by reading back a copy of
the number of the meter
run just proved (5906).
Transaction #3
Target Slave ID
Read/Write ?
Source Point #
NO of Points
Destination Pnt #
........
........
........
........
........
2
W
5904
2
5904
Transaction #4
Target Slave ID
Read/Write ?
Source Point #
O
N of Points
Destination Pnt #
........
........
........
........
........
2
R
5906
1
5906
TB-980402 w ALL.70+
TB-980402
Sensing Failures and Switching between

Redundant Computers
Setting Up Peer-to-Peer
Transactions - For each
transaction, the flow
computer requires the
following data (see TB#
980401, Peer-to-Peer
Basics):
q Target Slave ID: Modbus
database address of
target device.
q Read/Write?: Read (R)
selects slave as source
device and master as
destination device. Write
(W) selects master as
source device and slave
as destination device.
q Source Point #:
Specifies database
address (or first address
in sequence) of data to
transfer from source to
destination device.
O
q N of Points: Total
number of consecutive
database addresses in
sequence to transfer.
q Destination Point #:
Specifies database
address (or first address
in sequence) in
destination device of data
received from source
device.
Redundancy Failover
Wiring - Any 4 digital I/O
points may be used to
provide a failover switching
mechanism. Fig. III.8-3 is an
example that shows digital
I/O 9 through 12 being used
When Activate Redundancy is selected in the peer-to-peer menu, data base

variables are activated to provide a redundancy switching mechanism which is
accomplished by cross connecting 4 digital I/O points from each flow computer
(primary and secondary).
These database variables are:
2863
Watchdog status for this computer. Goes true 5 seconds after

initialization and remains true as long as the flow computer is
functioning correctly.
Mastership status for this flow computer. True whenever this flow
computer is the primary or master computer in the redundancy
scheme.
Watchdog status input from the other flow computer. This flow
computer will assume mastership if it sees this point go false.
Mastership status input from the other flow computer. This flow
computer will relinquish mastership if it sees this point go true.
2864
2713
2714
Omni #1
Omni #2
TB1
TB1
8
Other Master Status (2714)
Master Status (2864)
10
Others Watchdog (2713)
11
Watchdog Out (2863)
12
Master Status (2864)

Others Watchdog (2713)
Watchdog Out (2863)
9
10
11
12
TB11
TB11
Fig. 3.
TB-980402 w ALL.70+
Others Master Status (2714)
Omni 6000 / 3000 Redundancy Failover Wiring
Technical Bulletin
Changing the Master / Slave Status via a

Modbus Serial Port
Sometimes it may be necessary to force a swap of primary (master) and
secondary (slave) flow computers. For example, if both primary and secondary
flow computers are functioning correctly (i.e. watchdogs are OK) but the MMI
serial communication link to the primary flow computer was lost, it would be
necessary to make the secondary flow computer the primary. Two special data
base points are available to provide this function, they are:
2715
Note: The 2716 command

will not work if the other flow
computers watchdog status
is not active (i.e., the other
computer must be
functioning correctly before
this flow computer can give
up mastership).
2716
Be Master - writing a one to this point automatically promotes this

flow computer to master. This in turn causes the digital I/O point
which is assigned point 2864 ( Mastership Status ) to go true.
Assuming the digital I/O are cross connected as shown in the
preceding figure, the other flow computer will automatically
relinquish mastership when this happens.
Be Slave - writing a one to this point automatically demotes this flow
computer to slave. This in turn causes the digital I/O point which is
assigned point 2864 ( Mastership Status ) to go false. Assuming the
digital I/O are cross connected as shown in the preceding figure, the
other flow computer will automatically assume mastership when this
happens.
Both the above commands are edge triggered needing only to be turned on,
they do not need to be turned off.
Redirecting the Control Signals

In the event of a primary/secondary flow computer swap, a method is needed to
redirect the appropriate 4-20 mA signals to control valves and other functions.
One way of doing this is to use a DC relay with type C contacts. Suitable relays
are available with multiple sets of contacts. The relay can be energized by the
digital output assigned to indicate Mastership Status from one of the flow
computers.
TB-980402 w ALL.70+
TB-980402
Sharing Input Signals Between Primary and

Secondary Flow Computers
In a redundant system all input signals must be connected to both primary and
secondary flow computers. Voltage pulse signals such as flowmeters and
densitometer devices must be connected in parallel to the appropriate inputs of
both flow primary and secondary computers. Current pulse signals must first be
converted to voltage pulses by suitable input shunt resistor or source resistor.
As a general rule, follow the wiring recommendations shown for a normal single
flow computer installation (see Volume 1 of the User Manual) and then simply
wire the second flow computer terminals in parallel with the first computer.
Analog 4-20 mA signals should be converted to 1-5 volt signals by using a low
temperature coefficient precision 250 ohm resistor. For each signal, configure
the combo modules of both flow computers for 1-5 volt inputs and wire them in
parallel across an appropriate 250 ohm resistor mounted externally to the flow
computers.
Re-Calibration of Analog Inputs

Each flow computer input channel which is configured for 1 - 5 volt input signals
will need to be verified for accuracy. Re-calibration may be necessary
depending upon the accuracy of the 250 ohm resistor used and how well it
matches the internal 250 ohm resistor that was used when the input channel
was originally calibrated. The system wiring between the flow computer and the
250 ohm resistor can also slightly affect the input calibration.
Sharing Digital I/O Signals Between Primary

and Secondary Flow Computers
Digital I/O channels configured as status inputs should be simply wired in
parallel (ORed) with the other flow computer. Digital I/O channels configured as
outputs may possibly require relay isolation similar to that needed for analog
outputs described previously. Typical output signals that need to be relay
isolated are sampler pulse outputs. Prover control signals do not usually need
to be relay isolated as the secondary computer will never be attempting to
control the prover while it is the slave or secondary computer. The user will
need to determine which outputs need to be isolated based on whether it is
possible or likely that the slave computer would activate the output when not in
control.
TB-980402 w ALL.70+
Date: 05
03
98
TB # 980501
Rosemount
3095FB Multivariable Sensor
Interface Issues
Contents
applicable to Firmware
Revision 21.72+/25.72+ and
23/72.+/27.72+.
Scope .............................................................................................................. 2
Abstract........................................................................................................... 2
Important Omni Flow Computer Compatibility Issues When Using SV
Combo Modules ............................................................................................. 3
Serial Communication Module Compatibility .............................................................3
Other Known System Incompatibilities ......................................................................3
Equipment Ordering Limitations ................................................................................3
Connectivity Issues When Connecting to the 3095FB Multivariable

Transmitters: Multi-drop versus Point-to-Point ........................................... 4
Advantages of Multi-drop Configurations ...................................................................4
Disadvantages of Multi-drop Configurations ..............................................................4
Jumper Settings for the Omni SV Combo Module ....................................... 5

Setting the Address of the SV Combo Module ...........................................................6
Setting the Termination Jumpers for the Each of the SV RS-485 Ports ......................6
Initial Setup of the Rosemount

3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter.......... 8
Connecting the 3095FB to the Omni Flow Computer .................................. 9
3095FB Transmitter RS-485 Connections ...............................................................10
3095FB Transmitter Power Connections and Requirements ....................................10
Isolation and Transient Protection Issues ................................................................11
Wiring Considerations When Replacing a Multi-dropped 3095FB Transmitter..........11
Configuring the Omni Flow Computer to use the 3095FB Multi Variable
Transmitter ................................................................................................... 12
Configuring the Meter Run I/O.................................................................................12
Selecting the Device Type ............................................................................................................. 12
Selecting the SV Combo Module Port............................................................................................ 12
Select Modbus Address for 3095FB.............................................................................................. 12
What I/O Points are Used and Why .............................................................................................. 12
DP, Pressure and Temperature Setup Entries Needed.............................................14
Data Transferred between the 3095FB Transmitter and the Omni Flow
Computer ...................................................................................................... 14
Polling Intervals for Process Variables and Critical Alarms ......................................15
Critical 3095FB Alarms Monitored By The Flow Computer.......................................15
Synchronizing the 3095FB and the Flow Computer Configurations......... 16
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
Technical Bulletin
Viewing the 3095FB Data at the Flow Computer Front Panel .................... 16
Installing, Replacing and Calibrating 3095FB Transmitters....................... 17
Wiring Issues ......................................................................................................... 17
Using the Omni Flow Computer to Set the Modbus Address of the 3095FB ............. 18
Using a Laptop PC to Trim the 3095FB Calibration ................................................. 19
Scope
Firmware Revisions 21.72+/25.72+ and 23.72+/27.72+ of Omni 6000/Omni
3000 Flow Computers are affected by the issues contained in this technical
bulletin. This Bulletin applies to Orifice/Differential Pressure Liquid Flow
Metering Systems and to Orifice Gas Flow Metering Systems.
Abstract
The Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable sensor assembly is used to measure
differential pressure (DP), static pressure (SP) and line temperature (T).
Application of the 3095FB is limited to flow computer revisions 21, 23, 25 and
27 which work with differential head devices such as orifice meters, nozzles and
venturi meters. Because the flow computer is limited to a maximum of four
meter runs it is also limited to a maximum of four 3095FB multivariable
transmitters.
Data is accessed from the 3095FB transmitter via a 2 wire RS-485 data link at
9600 baud using Modbus protocol. Technically, it would have been possible to
use one of the flow computers standard serial ports to communicate with the
3095FB but this would have caused several problems:
q Reduced the number of serial ports available for use with SCADA, PLCs
and OmniCom etc.
q Extra 'A type combo modules would have to be purchased simply to
provide analog outputs in a minimum system requiring just the
multivariables.
Omni chose to design a special SV combo module which includes two 2 wire
RS-485 ports and six 4-20 mA analog outputs. With this module it becomes
possible to provide a powerful Omni 3000 system with the following specs:
q Four meter runs with Differential Pressure, Static Pressure and
Temperature inputs.
q Four communication ports for SCADA, PLC, Printer, OmniCom etc.
q Twelve Digital I/O for logic control
q Six digital to analog outputs.
This SV module is capable of connecting to one to four 3095FBs in various
multi-drop configurations. A second SV combo module can be utilized in
applications where point to point operation of more than two multivariable
transmitters is desirable.
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
Rosemount
3095FB Multivariable Sensor Interface Issues
TB-980501
Important Omni Flow Computer Compatibility

Issues When Using SV Combo Modules
The SV combo modules are effectively serial I/O modules which have been
specially designed to communicate with various multivariable transmitters.
Changes have been made to the IRQ priorities to accommodate these SV
combo modules. These IRQ changes also involve the Serial I/O Combo
Modules that are used to connect to printers, OmniCom, PLCs and SCADA
devices.
Serial Communication Module Compatibility

SV combo modules cannot be installed in flow computer systems containing
RS-232-C Serial I/O Combo modules model type 68-6005. The IRQ settings on
the 68-6005 serial combo module are not jumper selectable and are
incompatible with the 'SV combo modules. The flow computer will not be able
to initialize or boot up if this module is installed (this will be evident by a blank
LCD screen which flashes its backlighting on and off every 1.5 seconds).
The more recent 68-6205 serial module which is both RS-232-C and RS-485
compatible, has jumper selectable IRQ settings, these must be installed in the
IRQ 3 position when an SV combo module is present (see technical bulletin
TB-980503 for more details).
Other Known System Incompatibilities

At the time this bulletin was prepared, it was not possible to install both an SV
combo module and an HV (Honeywell multivariable) combo module.
Equipment Ordering Limitations

Because of the compatibility issues raised in the above paragraphs, it is not
possible for the customer to retrofit existing flow computer installations with SV
combo modules. Any system which requires SV combo modules, must be
purchased new from Omni, or the system must be returned to Omni to be
modified (contact a sales person at Omni for upgrade details and pricing).
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
Technical Bulletin
Connectivity Issues When Connecting to the

3095FB Multivariable Transmitters: Multi-drop
versus Point-to-Point
The 3095 FB multivariable transmitter is a four wire device, two power wires
and two wires for the RS-485 serial communication link. It can be connected in
a point-to-point or multi-drop wiring configuration.
Advantages of Multi-drop Configurations

The advantages of multi-drop configurations are:
q Possibly less wire may be needed to connect devices under certain
conditions. This may or may not be the case depending upon
equipment placement.
q One Omni SV Combo module can handle up to four 3095 FB
multivariable transmitters. An Omni 3000 can be used in place of an
Omni 6000 and handle four meter runs.
Disadvantages of Multi-drop Configurations

Disadvantages of multi-drop configurations are:
q Multiple Modbus IDs required. Each multi-dropped transmitter must
have a unique Modbus ID which matches the Modbus ID selected within
the flow computer for that meter run multivariable.
q Possibility of errors when replacing multivariable transmitters.
Because of the multiple Modbus addresses it is not possible to simply
take a transmitter off the shelf and install it in a multi-drop configuration.
This is because transmitters come from Rosemount with the Modbus
address defaulted to 1 and there may already be a transmitter in the loop
using that address. Adding a second transmitter with the same address
as an existing transmitter would effectively cause a loss of signal on both
transmitters (existing and new). Depending upon where the transmitter is
in the wiring, termination jumpers may or may not be required on the
replacement transmitter (see below).
q Transmitter interaction is possible. While not likely, a hardware failure
in one transmitter could compromise the integrity of the shared RS-485
link causing a loss of flow signals for all meter runs. Calibrating a
transmitter via a laptop computer requires the wiring to be disturbed, care
must be taken not to disconnect other transmitters in the same multi-drop
loop.
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
Rosemount
TB-980501
q RS-485 termination requirements more complex. RS-485

transmission wires must have only one beginning and one end (they
cannot be used in a star configuration). Both ends of the wire must be
terminated, meaning only two devices in the loop need terminating. In a
point-to-point configuration, this simply means both the flow computer
and transmitter are terminated. In a multi-drop configuration, the user
must ensure that only the end devices have the termination jumpers in.
This means that some transmitters may have the terminating jumpers in
while others may have them out. Remember that the Omni may or may
not be at the end of the wire so it may or may not be one of the
terminated devices.
q Process variable update time may exceed the flow computers 500
msec cycle time. Critical measurement or control systems require that
the process variables be input to the flow computer as fast as possible for
best performance.
Jumper Settings for the Omni SV Combo

Module
The Multi Variable SV Combo module contains several sets of jumpers which
must be installed correctly (see figure below).
Port 1 (3)
Tx/RTS Leds Red
Recv Led Grn
SV RS-485 Termination Jumpers

Both Jmpers In = Port Terminated
Both Jmpers Out = Port Non-Terminated
Always RTS
SV Address Jumper
Jmp In = 1st SV Combo
Jmp Out = 2nd SV Combo
Always IRQ 2
2
Fig. 1.
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
BRD SEL
4 IRQ
Port 2 (4)
Tx/RTS Leds Red
Recv Led Grn
RTS
T
E
R
M
GND
T
E
R
M
RTS
GND
T
E
R
M
T
E
R
M
SV Port 1 ( 3 )
SV Port 2 ( 4 )
Port Numbers in ( ) are for 2nd SV Module
Omni Model 68-6203 Multivariable Interface Module - SV Combo

Module
Technical Bulletin
Setting the Address of the SV Combo Module

The flow computer can accept up to two SV Combo modules, each with a
unique address determined by the BRD SEL jumper shown in Figure 1. With
this jumper fitted the flow computer will report that a SV1 module is installed
and SV ports 1 and 2 will be available. Without this jumper in the BRD SEL
position the flow computer will report that a SV2 module is installed and SV
ports 3 and 4 will be available. Note that a system can have a SV2 module
without a SV1 being installed, in this case only SV ports 3 and 4 would be
available.
Setting the Termination Jumpers for the Each of the SV

RS-485 Ports
Multivariable RS-485 communication circuits must have two ends only, a star
configuration with more than two ends or a loop configuration with no
ends is not allowed. The devices at both ends of the circuit must be jumpered
to provide termination.
3095 FB
MV
ID #1
Omni
Flow
Computer
Fig. 2.
3095 FB
MV
ID #2
3095 FB
MV
ID #3
This Device
Must Be
Terminated
3095 FB
MV
ID #4
This Device
Must Be
Terminated
Multi-drop Configuration with Flow Computer Terminated
Both jumpers marked TERM must be installed to terminate a flow computer

SV port (see Fig. 1 previous page). Termination settings for the 3095FB are
shown later in this document.
3095 FB
MV
ID #1
This Device
Must Be
Terminated
3095 FB
MV
ID #4
Omni
Flow
Computer
3095 FB
MV
ID #2
Fig. 3.
3095 FB
MV
ID #3
This Device
Must Be
Terminated
Multi-drop Configuration with Flow Computer Non-terminated
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
Rosemount
TB-980501
3095 FB
MV
ID #1
3095 FB
MV
ID #2
3095 FB
MV
ID #3
3095 FB
MV
ID #4
Omni
Flow
Computer
Star Configuration Not Allowed!
Fig. 4.
Unacceptable Configuration - Five Termination Points
All 4 MV Ports of
Flow Computer
Must Be Terminated
3095 FB
MV
ID #1
3095 FB
MV
ID #1
3095 FB
MV
ID #1
3095 FB
MV
ID #1
Omni
Flow
Computer
Using
Independent
MV Ports
Fig. 5.
Modbus IDs of 3095FBs

Can Be The Same In This
Point to Point Configuration
All Four 3095FB

Transmitters
Must Be Terminated
Point-to-Point Wiring Configuration
In the point-to-point configuration each 3095FB transmitter is connected to an

independent SV port of the flow computer. Because each SV port is now
connected to only one 3095FB, each 3095FB can now use the default Modbus
address 1, greatly simplifying transmitter replacement issues discussed later in
this document.
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
Technical Bulletin
Initial Setup of the Rosemount

3095FB Multi
Variable Transmitter
The 3095FB module has two sets of DIP switches and a jumper set which must
be setup according to the wiring configuration used to connect to the Omni Flow
Computer.
PULL DOWN (B)

PULL UP (A)
AC TERMINATION
All ON = Terminated
All OFF = Un-Terminated
o
o
o
SECURITY o
o
OFF
ON
o
o
o
o
o
Security OFF to
allow configuration
ON
1 2 3
S1 S2
ON
1 2
All ON For 9600 Baud
Fig. 6.
Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Setup Switches and Jumpers
Place the security jumper in the OFF position, this allows the Omni flow
computer to write to the 3095FB registers ensuring that the internal
configuration matches the flow computer. Both baud rate switches S1 and S2
must be set to 9600; i.e., in the ON position. The termination switches should
be all ON or all OFF depending upon whether device termination is required.
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
Rosemount
TB-980501
Connecting the 3095FB to the Omni Flow

Computer
TERMINAL
Fig. 7.
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
Port #1(3) RS 485 B wire
Port #1(3) RS 485 A wire
Port #2(4) RS 485 B wire
Port #2(4) RS 485 A wire
Signal Return for 4-20mA Outputs
Signal Return for 4-20mA Outputs
4-20mA Analog Output # 5
10
11
12
Back Panel Termination Assignments - SV Combo Module
A
RS-485
B
+
PWR
-
Fig. 8.
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Wiring Terminals
Technical Bulletin
3095FB Transmitter RS-485 Connections

Two terminals are provided marked A and B, these are connected to the A and
B terminals of other multi-dropped 3095FBs and to the Omni SV Combo
module terminals. These connections should be made using twisted pair
unshielded wire with a minimum gauge dependent upon the distance to be run.
Use 22 AWG minimum, 18 AWG maximum for runs less than 1000 ft. Use 20
AWG minimum, 18 AWG maximum for runs of 1000 to 4000 ft. Shielded
twisted pair cable can be used but may have an attenuating effect due to a
higher capacitance per foot thereby limiting the maximum wire run length to
less than 4000 ft.
3095FB Transmitter Power Connections and

Requirements
Terminals marked + and - are provided to connect the 3095FB to a 7.5 VDC.
to 24 VDC. power supply. This power supply must be able to provide 10 mA per
installed 3095FB plus an additional 100 mA which is needed when any 3095FB
in the system is transmitting data to the flow computer. Ripple on this power
supply must be less than 2%. Wiring gauge should be selected as per the
previous paragraph and can be unshielded un-twisted pair, but for best
performance should be shielded and twisted.
4000 Ft. Maximum
Omni Flow Computer
A
B
A
MV Port #4
B
MV Port #3
7.5 VDC to 24 VDC

Power Supply
150 mA Minimum
+
-
10
No Stubs over 6 ft.
RS 485 Bus
A
MV Port #1
B
A
MV Port #2
B
Fig. 9.
Termination ON
A
RS-485
B
A
RS-485
B
A
RS-485
B
+
PWR
-
+
PWR
-
+
PWR
-
Termination OFF
Termination OFF
Termination ON
Connecting The Flow Computer to Multi-dropped 3095

Transmitters
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
Rosemount
TB-980501
Isolation and Transient Protection Issues

The design of the 3095FB transmitter does not provide any DC isolation
between the power connections and the RS-485 connections. Applying voltages
between the power wiring and RS-485 wiring greater than the allowable
common mode voltage of a RS-485 driver circuit could damage the 3095FB.
The Omni flow computer SV port is optically isolated and can handle common
mode voltages of +/- 250 VDC with respect to chassis ground.
Inductive base transient protectors including the Rosemount Model 470, can
adversely affect the output of the 3095FB. Do not use the Model 470 for
transient protection with the 3095FB. If transient protection is desired, install
the optional Transient Protection Terminal Block described in Appendix B of
the Rosemount 3095FB Manual (pub. 00809-0100-4738).
Wiring Considerations When Replacing a Multi-dropped

3095FB Transmitter
If downtime of other 3095FB transmitters in a multi-dropped system cannot be
tolerated, make sure to provide a suitable and safe means of disconnecting
power and signal from each individual 3095FB transmitter. Because of the
power requirements of the RS-485 the 3095FB cannot be made
intrinsically safe. This means that proper safety procedures must be
followed before any covers are removed from any devices or junction
boxes located in hazardous areas. Refer to Rosemount 3095FB Manual
(publication 00809-0100-4738) for correct installation of the 3095FB
transmitter.
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
11
Technical Bulletin
Configuring the Omni Flow Computer to use

the 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter
Configuring the Meter Run I/O
Selecting the Device Type
The existing Select Turbine Y/N entry in the Config Meter Run menu has
been changed to Select Device Type. Valid selections at this point are:
0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=
DP Sensor
Turbine Meter
3095FB Multivariable
SMV 3000 Multivariable
When 2 is selected above the following entries appear:
Selecting the SV Combo Module Port

The number of ports available depends upon what SV Combo Modules are
fitted in the flow computer. Ports 1 and 2 are available when SV Combo Module
#1 is fitted, ports 3 and 4 when SV Combo Module #2 is present. It is possible to
have SV ports 3 and 4 without SV ports 1 and 2 assuming SV Combo Module
#2 is the only SV module fitted.
Select Modbus Address for 3095FB

In point-to-point mode (i.e., each SV port is connected to a single 3095FB) it is
recommended that you select Modbus ID 1 at this point. This is the default ID
used by Rosemount when the 3095 is shipped. In multi-drop mode each
3095FB connected to a SV port must have its own address which can be
between 1 and 247.
What I/O Points are Used and Why

Even though the multivariable data is obtained serially and not via analog input
channels, the flow computer must have a storage structure in RAM to place the
data. Omni has chosen to treat the data as closely as possible to that obtained
by conventional means and use the same physical I/O RAM structure as is used
for analog inputs. The main difference being that with analog and pulse inputs
you would manually assign the I/O points to be used for each input. When using
the 3095FB multi variable, the flow computer automatically assigns three I/O
point assignments for the DP, temperature and pressure sensors within the
3095FB. The I/O point numbers are allocated in the order that the 3095FBs are
configured using the above three entries (it has nothing to do with SV port or SV
module numbers). The starting I/O point for the first 3095FB configured is the
first point immediately after the last I/O point used by any other A, B, E/D, E or
H combo modules in the system (see examples on facing page).
12
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
Rosemount
TB-980501
EXAMPLE 1 CONFIGURATION
6000 - 2A - 1B 1SV
A1 Combo Module I/O Points
1-4
5-8
B1 Combo Module I/O Points
9 - 12
st
3095FB Configured Uses
DP=13, T=14, P=15
nd
DP=16, T=17, P=18
3 3095FB Configured Uses
DP=19, T=20, P=21
4th 3095FB Configured Uses
DP=22, T=23, P=24
rd
Fig. 10. I/O Points Used by SV Combo Modules - Example 1
EXAMPLE 2 CONFIGURATION
6000 - 1A - 1E/D 1SV
1-4
E/D1 Combo Module I/O Points
5-8
st
DP=9, T=10, P=11
2nd 3095FB Configured Uses
DP=12, T=13, P=14
rd
DP=15, T=16, P=17
th
DP=18, T=19, P=20
Fig. 11. I/O Points Used by SV Combo Modules - Example 2
Bi-directional Flow and 3095FB Transmitters

Sometimes it is necessary to use a process variable obtained from a 3095FB in
more than one meter run. For example, When measuring bi-directional flow it is
customary to configure one meter run within the Omni flow computer as
forward flow and a second meter run as reverse flow. To do this, simply
configure both meter runs as Device Type = 2 (3095FB Multi Variable), select
the same SV port and Modbus ID, the Omni flow computer will recognize that
both meter runs are using the same 3095FB device and allocate only one set of
I/O assignments.
Referencing 3095FB Variables Elsewhere in the Configuration

While the DP, temperature and pressure obtained from the 3095FB multi
variable are used to calculate flow, it may also be necessary to use either the
temperature and/or the pressure to correct a densitometer device mounted in
close proximity. To do this simply note the I/O point numbers automatically
assigned to the 3095FB when it was configured and reuse these point numbers
as needed.
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
13
Technical Bulletin
DP, Pressure and Temperature Setup Entries Needed

Once I/O points have been assigned to the 3095FB multi variable transmitter by
the flow computer the Differential Pressure, Temperature and Pressure setup
menus become active. Data entries in these menus are:
q
q
q
q
Low Alarm Setpoint

High Alarm Setpoint
Override Value
Override Code
0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=
Never Use Override Value

Always Use Override Value
Use Override on a 3095FB Communication Failure or Critical Error
Use Last Hours Average on a 3095FB Communication Failure or
Critical Error
q 4mA Value (read only)

q 20mA Value (read only)
q Damping Code
0
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
=
0.108 Seconds
0.216 Seconds
0.432 Seconds
0.864 Seconds (Default)
1.728 Seconds
5
6
7
8
=
=
=
=
3.456 Seconds
6.912 Seconds
13.824 Seconds
27.648 Seconds
All of these data entries are changeable when using analog transmitters but
when using the 3095FB multi variable transmitter the 4mA and 20mA scaling
values cannot be changed. The upper and lower range of the 3095FB sensors
are fixed by design. The Omni flow computer simply reads these values and
displays them in the 4mA and 20mA fields for information only.
While the 3095FB transmitter has internal alarm setpoints and alarm status
points, Omni has chosen to ignore the 3095FB integral alarming functions and
use the existing flow computer alarm setpoints and alarm status points. The
Low and High Alarm Setpoints of the flow computer therefore behave exactly as
they would with an analog transmitter. The 3095FB Critical Alarm states are
monitored continuously.
Data Transferred between the 3095FB

Transmitter and the Omni Flow Computer
In operation the Omni flow computer automatically sets up the 3095FB
transmitter to use the correct floating point format and units of measure needed
to match the flow computers configuration. The Omni continuously reads the
following data:
q
q
q
q
q
q
14
Process Variables DP, Pressure and Temperature

Individual Transmitter Sensor Ranges
Critical Transmitter Alarms (Sensor failures etc)
Transmitter Information (Body and Fill material etc)
Manufacturers Code
Transmitter Tags
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
Rosemount
TB-980501
Polling Intervals for Process Variables and Critical

Alarms
The message poll scheme comprises regular reads of the process variable
values and critical alarms every 200msec per 3095FB connected to a flow
computer SV port. This means that in a multi-drop system with four transmitters
the process variable update time will be 4 x 200msec or 800msec.
Critical 3095FB Alarms Monitored By The Flow Computer

Critical alarm points within the 3095FB are monitored and mapped into the
Omni flow computer Modbus database as follows:
Alarms Associated with the 3095FB Providing Data to Meter Run n
M ODBUS
ADDRESS
Note:
1n96 is flow computer

generated.
ALARM POINT DESCRIPTION
ACTION TAKEN IF ALARM IS ACTIVE

(SEE ALSO FAILURE CODE SETTING)
1n83
DP signal 10% above upper

range limit
DP transmitter failure flagged
1n84
DP signal 10% below lower

range limit
DP transmitter failure flagged
1n85
Pressure signal 10% above

upper range limit
Pressure transmitter failure flagged
1n86
Pressure signal 10% below

lower range limit
1n87
Pressure sensor is shorted
1n88
Pressure sensor bridge is

open circuit
1n89
Temperature signal 10%

above upper range limit
Temperature transmitter failure flagged
1n90
Temperature signal 10%

below lower range limit
1n91
Temperature RTD is
disconnected
1n92
Sensor internal temperature

above upper range limit
DP, P and T, transmitter failures

flagged
1n93
Sensor internal temperature

below upper range limit

flagged
1n94
Critical 3095FB sensor

electronics failure

flagged
1n95
Security jumper of 3095FB is

set to Write Protect
DP, P and T transmitter failures flagged

if write to 3095FB is attempted and fails.
^ 1n96
No Communications between
the Omni and 3095FB unit

flagged
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
15
Technical Bulletin
Synchronizing the 3095FB and the Flow

Computer Configurations
To ensure that the flow computer correctly interprets the 3095FB data, the flow
computer continuously verifies that the configuration of the 3095FB transmitter
matches that required by the flow computer. Additional message polls verifying
this data are interleaved with the normal message polls used to retrieve the
process variables and alarms.
Notes: Numbers in ( ) are
Modbus addresses within the
3095FB database
**
The flow computer will

attempt to correct the
database of the 3095FB
transmitter if miss
matches are detected for
these variables.
The flow computer will

adjust its database to
agree with the 3095FB
database if miss matches
are detected for these
variables.
Critical 3095FB configuration data which is checked every 10 seconds are:

q
q
q
q
q
q
q
Floating Point Number Format

** (0132)
Measurement Engineering Units of Measure
** (0060 - 0062)
Minimum and Maximum Ranges of each Signal
* (7407 - 7416)
Transmitter Identification (Information Only)
(0001 - 0011)
Damping Factors
** (7421, 7424, 7427)
Transmitter ASCII Tags (3x8 characters)
** (0032 - 0047)
Transmitter Information (Materials of Construction)
(0017 - 0029)
Viewing the 3095FB Data at the Flow

Computer Front Panel
Differential Pressure, Temperature and Pressure variables and averages are
viewed using the normal key press combinations as described in the Omni Flow
Computer User Manual.
A display list of 3095FB transmitter information can be displayed by pressing
Setup n Enter. Data is organized by SV port number n and in the order that
the transmitters were configured. The following information and diagnostic data
is displayed (example shows first transmitter on the #1 SV port as an example):
st
1 digit is the SV port

nd
number, 2 digit is the
Modbus Address of the
3095FB
16
SV Port 1 - 1
Manufactur Rosemount
Model
3095/Modbus
Out Board Rev 108.0
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
Rosemount
TB-980501
If you continue to scroll down, the following data will be displayed:
Sensor Mod Rev

142
Sensor Serial 839193
Xmtr Ser
19644
H/W Rev
3
Modbus Rev
5
Sensor Type
GP
DP Range -250 to 250
SP Range
0-800 psi
PT Range-40 to 1200F
Isolator Matl 316SS
Fill Fluid Silicone
Flange Mtrl
316SS
Flange Type Coplaner
Drain/Vent
316SS
O-Ring PTFE(Teflon)
Seal Type
None
Seal Fill
None
Seal Isolator
None
NumberofSeals
None
Installing, Replacing and Calibrating 3095FB

Transmitters
Wiring Issues
If downtime of other 3095FB transmitters in a multi-dropped system cannot be
tolerated, make sure to provide a suitable and safe means of disconnecting
power and signal from each individual 3095FB transmitter. Because of the
power requirements of the RS-485 the 3095FB cannot be made
intrinsically safe. This means that proper safety procedures must be
followed before any covers are removed from any devices or junction
boxes located in hazardous areas. Refer to Rosemount 3095FB Manual
(publication 00809-0100-4738) for correct installation of the 3095FB
transmitter.
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
17
Technical Bulletin
Using the Omni Flow Computer to Set the Modbus

Address of the 3095FB
The 3095FB transmitter will normally be shipped with a default Modbus address
of 1. While this is fine for a point to point installation, it will cause a problem if
two or more devices have the same Modbus ID in a multi-drop scheme. The
Modbus ID of a transmitter can be set using the Configurator User Interface PC
Software available from Rosemount. It is anticipated though that some
situations may arise where a 3095FB transmitter must be installed or replaced
without this software being available. In this case the Omni flow computer can
be connected to a 3095FB in the point to point mode using any available SV
port and the Modbus ID changed to what is required in the flow computer
configuration.
CAUTION!
This procedure involves

broadcast transmitting a
Modbus address out of a SV
port. All devices connected to
this SV port will have their
Modbus address set to the
ID broadcast. This would
cause data collisions and a
complete loss of
communication when more
than one 3095FB transmitter
is connected. Be sure to
temporarily disconnect any
3095FB transmitters which
addresses you do not want to
change.
Proceed as follows:
1. Setup the 3095FB as described previously in the section titled Initial
Setup of the Rosemount 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter.
2. Setup the 3095FB to be RS-485 terminated.
3. Connect the transmitter to any open SV port (terminal A to A, B to B).
The SV port should be jumpered for RS-485 termination. If this SV
channel is not an open channel, all 3095FB transmitters except the one
needing the address change must be disconnected.
4. Apply power to the 3095FB transmitter.
5. At the flow computer front panel press the following keys:
[Alpha Shift] [Diag]
The computer will enter the Diagnostic mode.
[Setup] [n] [Enter]
Where n is the SV port number that the 3095FB

is connected to.
6. The following warning screen may display ( SV port 1 is used as an

example) or the screen in (7) below will display.
SV Port # 1
This Port Currently
Configured For Use!
Continue (Y/N)?
This means that the flow computer has detected that this SV port is
currently configured to communicate with one or more transmitters. You
may or may not have selected the wrong SV port (see the cautions in
sidebar).
7. If you wish to continue with the address broadcast operation enter Y

and the following screen will display.
SV Port # 1
Change Xmtr Address
New Address
_
Idle
18
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
Rosemount
TB-980501
8. Scroll down to New Address and enter the address required. Press
Enter and the following message will display.
Sending New Address
9. The flow computer will wait a short time and then attempt to
communicate with the 3095FB using the new address. If
communications are established the following message will be displayed
for a few seconds.
Address Changed
The following message will display for a second or two should the
transmission fail.
Failed to Change
Should this message appear check your wiring, switch and jumper
settings and repeat the procedure.
10. Disconnect and reinstall 3095FB to the appropriate SV port for normal
operation making sure to observe the termination requirements of only
two devices at the end of a loop being terminated.
Using a Laptop PC to Trim the 3095FB Calibration

The flow computer provides no way of calibrating or trimming the output of the
3095FB multi variable transmitter. To calibrate the transmitter use the
Configurator User Interface PC Software available from Rosemount. The user
must disconnect the 3095FB needing calibrating and connect it in point to point
mode with the Laptop or PC running the Rosemount Interface Software.
Remember to follow all correct safety procedures when removing
transmitter covers or junction boxes. Read the manufactures warnings
and recommendations as printed in the 3095FB manual. Be aware that
when removing a transmitter from a multi-drop installation, wiring may be
disturbed and disruption of the circuit may cause a loss of all measurement
signals due to loss of power, signal or RS-485 termination.
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
19
Date: 05
05
98
TB # 980502

SMV3000
Multivariable Transmitters
Contents
all firmware revisions .72+.
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract........................................................................................................... 2
DE Protocol Overview .................................................................................... 2
Transmitter Database..................................................................................... 2
The Honeywell
Handheld Communicator .................................................. 3
Communication with
Honeywell
SMV3000
Smart Transmitters - This
feature allows you to
communicate with Honeywell
SMV3000 Smart
Multivariable Transmitters
which provide Differential
Pressure , Temperature and
Static Pressure, via Omnis
HV type Process I/O Combo
Modules and using
Honeywells DE Protocol.
Combo Module LED Status Indicators.......................................................... 3

Switching Between Analog and Digital Mode............................................... 3
Viewing the Status of the Honeywell Transmitter from the Keypad............ 4
Transmitter from the Keypad......... 5
Obtaining More Detailed Status Information from the Keypad.................... 8
Transducer Alarms Logged by the Flow Computer ................................... 12
HV Combo Module Address Jumpers ......................................................... 13
How the I/O Points are Assigned................................................................. 14
OmniCom Revision ...................................................................................... 15
Getting Tech Support Technical support is available

at:
( (281) 240-6161
Email should be sent via the
WEB Page at:
www.omniflow.com
or email to:
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
Scope
All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers containing
firmware 21.72+, 23.72+, 27.72+ are able to communicate with Honeywell
SMV3000 Smart Multivariable Transmitters. This feature uses Honeywells DE
Protocol and requires that an HV Combo I/O Module be installed in your flow
computer.
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
Using an HV Combo I/O Module, the Omni Flow Computer can communicate
with up to 4 Honeywell SMV3000 Smart Multivariable transmitters. These
transmitters provide Differential Pressure, Temperature and Pressure signals
using Honeywells DE Protocol. Only one HV Type Combo Module can be
installed in the flow computer. Loop power is provided by the HV combo
module.
DE Protocol Overview
Digital data is transmitted serially between the flow computer and Honeywell
Smart Transmitters by modulating the current in the two wire loop connecting
the devices. Power for the transmitter is also taken from this current loop. Data
is transmitted at 218.47 bits per second with a digital 0 = 20 mA and a digital
1 = 4 mA.
In normal operation, the Honeywell transmitter operates in the 6-byte Burst
Mode. In this mode, the transmitter transmits the following data to the flow
computer every 366 msec:
Byte #1
Byte #2-#4
Byte #5
Byte #6
Status Flags
Process Variables % Span Value (3-byte floating point)
Database ID (indicates where in the transmitters database Byte #6
below belongs)
Database Data Value
Transmitter Database
By using the data contained in Bytes #5 and #6, the flow computer builds and
maintains an exact copy of the multivariable transmitters configuration
database. The transmitter database which is sent to the Omni flow computer is
about 132 bytes. Based on the burst rate of the transmitter it can take about 45
to 55 seconds to completely build a copy of the transmitter database within the
flow computer. The transmitter database is continuously compared against the
flow computer configuration settings for that transmitter. The flow computer
automatically corrects any differences between the databases by writing the
correct configuration data to the transmitter.
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
TB-980502

SMV3000 Multivariable Transmitters
The Honeywell
Handheld Communicator
The flow computer is responsible for configuring the following entries within the
transmitter:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Lower Range Value or Zero

Transmitter Span or Max Range
Damping Factor
Tag Name
DP, SP and Temperature conformance bits
Any changes made to 1, 2, 3 and 5 using the handheld communicator will be

overwritten by the flow computer. In the digital mode it is not absolutely
necessary to calibrate the transmitters outputs using the handheld
communicator. The user can however trim the transmitters output calibration
using the handheld communicator if he so desires without interference from the
flow computer (see Honeywell documentation for details of trimming corrects).
Whether the transmitter is trimmed with the handheld or not, the digital signals
should be final calibrated end to end using the normal analog input method
described in Chapter 8 of Volume 1.
Combo Module LED Status Indicators

Each I/O channel of the HV Combo module has a set of two LED indicators,
one green and one red. The green LED shows all communication activity taking
place on the channel (flow computer, transmitter and handheld communicator if
connected). The Red LED lights only when the flow computer is transmitting
data to the transmitter.
Normal digital operation is indicated by a regular pulsation of the green LED
(about 3 per second). The red LED will be seen to blink whenever a
configuration change is made in the flow computer which affects that particular
transmitter.
Switching Between Analog and Digital Mode.

Connecting an analog mode Honeywell multivariable transmitter to the
computer will cause the flow computer to automatically switch the transmitter to
the digital DE mode sending out a series of Wake up commands to the
Honeywell transmitter. A switch over to the digital mode by the transmitter will
cause the green LED on the combo module to pulse steadily indicating that
communications have been established.
To disable the wake up command and initialize communications between the
Honeywell transmitter and the flow computer, delete all I/O point assignments
within the flow computer to that I/O point. Using the Honeywell handheld
communicator press [Shift] [A/D] and wait till the handheld displays Change to
Analog? Answer by pressing [Enter] (Yes). SFC Working will be displayed.
The green LED on the HV Combo module on that channel will stop pulsing.
Re-entering the I/O point will cause the Omni to send the wake up command to
the Honeywell and after three command sends the green LED on the Honeywell
module will pulse at a steady 3Hz rate.
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
Technical Bulletin

Transmitter from the Keypad
To verify the data being received from the smart transmitter, press [Input]
[Status] and [Enter] from the front panel. The following data displays:
HV-1 Transmitter
DB Status
OK
Gstatus NON-CRITICAL
DP%
25.00
SP%
76.50
TT%
32.13
DP LRV
0.0
DP Span
400.0
DP Damp Secs.
.16
DP Conformity bit 0
SP LRV
406.8
SP Span
27680.2
SP Damp Secs
.16
SP Conformity bit 0
TT LRV
.0
TT Span
100.0
TT Damp Secs
.3
TT Conformity bit 0
SW Revision
2.1
Serial # xxxxxxxxxx
DP Range
400.0
SP Range
20760.5
TT Range
850.0
ID/TAG
SMV-3000
Filter Hertz
60
SensorType RTD-PT100
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
TB-980502

Transmitter from the Keypad

HV-1 Transmitter : Indicates the Honeywell Multivariable Combo Module
(HV) and the channel number on that module. As there
can be only one HV module installed, this number can
only be 1 through 4.
DB Status
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
: There are five status states.

1) OK
: Communications
between
the
flow
are OK. The database within the
transmitter matches the flow computer.
2) Idle
: This flow computer I/O point has been
assigned to a Honeywell transmitter but is
not receiving data from the transmitter.
Possible cause is a wiring problem such as
reversal of wiring. If you observe the
status LEDs you will note that the flow
computer
attempts
to
establish
communications by sending a wake-up
command every 10 seconds or so.
3) Bad PV : Communications
between
the
flow
are OK but the transmitter has determined
that a critical error has occurred within the
transmitter meaning the value of the
process variable cannot be trusted. The
flow computer will set the transducer
failure alarm and follow the fail code
strategy selected by the user for this
transducer.
4) DB Error : Communications
between
the
flow
are OK but the flow Computer has
determined that the database within the
flow computer does not agree with the
database within the transmitter. If you
observe the status LEDs you will note that
the flow computer attempts to correct the
transmitters database by writing the
correct data to the transmitter once every
30-45 sec or so.
5) 4 Byte : The transmitter is operating in the 4-Byte
Burst Mode. Because the flow computer
will not tolerate this mode of operation,
this status display should only be
displayed momentarily as the flow
computer will automatically switch the
transmitter into the 6-Byte Burst Mode.
Technical Bulletin
Gstatus
: Gross Status Flag value:

1) OK
: No errors are reported by the SMV
transmitter.
2) Critical
Critical error reported by the SMV
transmitter.
3) Non-Critical : An error of a non critical nature has
been reported by the SMV transmitter.
4) Reserved : Consult Honeywell if this status value is
returned.
DP%
: Differential pressure variable value in percentage of the

transmitter span. A -25.00 could mean that the
transmitter is not communicating (see Status definition
previous).
SP%
: Static pressure variable value in percentage of the

previous).
TT%
: Temperature variable value in percentage of the

previous).
DP LRV
: Lower Range Value of the DP variable in engineering

units. Engineering units are inches of water at 39
degrees Fahrenheit.
DP Span
: The Span of the Differential pressure variable in

engineering units (the span is the difference between the
lower and upper ranges of the transmitter). Engineering
units are inches of water at 39 degrees Fahrenheit. The
flow computer will display DB Error if the user tries to
enter a span of 0% or a span which would exceed the DP
sensor range (described later).
DP Damp Secs
: Damping Time of the DP transmitter output in seconds.
DP Conformity Bit : Meaningful only with differential pressure transmitters.

Conformity Bit 0 = linear output; Conformity Bit 1 =
square root output. The flow computer requires linear
output and will automatically set this bit to 0 should it be
set to a 1.
SP LRV
: Lower Range Value of the Static Pressure variable in

engineering units. Engineering units are inches of water
at 39 degrees Fahrenheit.
SP Span
: The Span of the Static Pressure variable in engineering

units (the span is the difference between the lower and
upper ranges of the transmitter). Engineering units are
inches of water at 39 degrees Fahrenheit. The flow
computer will display DB Error if the user tries to enter a
span of 0% or a span which would exceed the static
pressure sensor range (described later).
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
TB-980502

SP Damp Secs
: Damping Time of the Static Pressure transmitter output

in seconds.
SP Conformity Bit : Meaningful only with differential pressure transmitters.

TT LRV
: Lower Range Value of the temperature variable in

engineering units. Engineering units are degrees Celsius.
TT Span
: The Span of the Temperature variable in engineering

units (the span is the difference between the lower and
upper ranges of the transmitter). Engineering units are
degrees Celsius. The flow computer will display DB
Error if the user tries to enter a span of 0% or a span
which would exceed the temperature sensor range
(described later).
TT Damp Secs
: Damping Time of the Temperature transmitter output in

seconds.
TT Conformity Bit : Meaningful only with differential pressure transmitters.

Software Revision : Current Software installed within the smart multivariable
device.
Serial #
: Serial Number of the smart multivariable device.
DP Range
: Maximum range of the DP sensor in inches of water at

39 degrees Fahrenheit. The transmitter will not accept
configuration entries which exceed this value.
SP Range
: Maximum range of the Static Pressure sensor in inches

of water at 39 degrees Fahrenheit. The transmitter will
not accept configuration entries which exceed this value.
TT Range
: Maximum range of the Temperature sensor in degrees

Celsius. The transmitter will not accept configuration
entries which exceed this value.
ID/TAG
: ASCII string used to identify the SMV DP transmitter.
Filter Hertz
: Frequency used to filter sensor signals to minimize AC

mains interference. Selections are 50 or 60 Hertz.
Sensor Type
: Temperature sensor types are:

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
RTD-PT100
J type Thermocouple
K type Thermocouple
T type Thermocouple
E type Thermocouple
Note: Thermocouples can be internally or externally

compensated.
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
Technical Bulletin
Obtaining More Detailed Status Information

from the Keypad
Additional data based upon the Primary, Secondary and Tertiary Detailed
Status bytes which are retrieved from the SMV data base is available by
pressing [Input] [Status] [Alarm] and [Enter]. The display will approximate the
following messages depending upon certain bits being ON in the appropriate
detailed status byte. Some of these status bits also cause alarm status points
within the flow computer data base to be activated. When this happens, these
alarm events are time and date tagged and logged in the alarm log as any other
flow computer alarm.
HONEYWELL
DETAILED STATUS
BYTE-BIT
1-0
1-1
1-2
T EXT IN BOLD DISPLAYED

Meter
Body
Fault:
Communication
between sensor board and SMV main board
electronics is suspect.
Characterization PROM Fault or Checksum
Error
Suspect Input: Possibly Meter Body or
Electronics Failure
OMNI
ALARM
POINT(S)
ACTIVATED
2n44 CR
2n47 CR
2n50 CR
2n44 CR
2n47 CR
2n44 CR
2n47 CR
1-3
DAC Compensation: Fault Detected
2n52 CR
1-4
NVM Fault: Non Volatile Memory Error

Detected
2n52 CR
1-5
RAM Fault: RAM Memory Error Detected
2n52 CR
1-6
ROM Fault: ROM Memory Error Detected
2n52 CR
1-7
PAC Fault Detected
2n44 CR
2n47 CR
2-0
MB OverTemp: Meter Body Sensor Over

Temperature
DP Zero Correction Value is Outside of
Acceptable Limits
DP Span Correction Value is Outside of
Acceptable Limits
Status 2-3 (Consult with Honeywell for
meaning)
MB Overload or : (Always with next
message)
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
NC = None Critical Alarm.
2n51 NC
2n42 NC
2n42 NC
2n47 CR
CR = Critical Alarm Override Action Considered.
Note: The n in the Modbus address refers to the number of the meter run.
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
TB-980502

HONEYWELL
DETAILED STATUS
BYTE-BIT
2-5
2-6

Meter Body Fault: Pressure input is twice
the URL
DP Cal Corr Default: Reset Corrects
command issued or Calibrate and Power
Cycle performed
OMNI
ALARM
POINT(S)
ACTIVATED
2n47 CR
2n42 NC
2-7
DAC Tempco Data Bad: Analog mode only.
3-0
Invalid Database: Some error detected in

the SMVs configuration. All PVs are suspect.
2n44 CR
2n47 CR
2n50 CR
3-1
3-2
3-3
Suspect SP Input: Static pressure input

suspect
meaning)
meaning)
2n47 CR
3-4
DP Term Out of Range
3-5
V-T Term Out of Rng: Viscosity

temperature term out of range
D-T Term Out of Rng: Density temperature
term out of range
Ind Var Out of Range: Independent
variable out of range
meaning)
Excess Zero Corr SP: Excess zero
correction for static pressure
Excess Span Corr SP: Excess span
correction for static pressure
SP is Absolute: Static pressure sensor is
absolute
SP is Gauge: Static pressure sensor is
gauge
meaning)
SP Corrects Reset: Static pressure
corrections reset
3-6
3.7
4-0
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
2n45 NC
2n45 NC
2n45 NC
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
Technical Bulletin
HONEYWELL
DETAILED STATUS
BYTE-BIT
4-7
5-0
5-1
5-2
5-3
OMNI
ALARM
POINT(S)
ACTIVATED

meaning)
meaning)
meaning)
meaning)
meaning)
5-4
DP in Input Mode
2n43 CR
5-5
SP in Input Mode
2n46 CR
5-6
Temp in Input Mode
2n49 CR
5-7
PV4 in Input Mode
6-0
2 Wire RTD Used
6-1
3 Wire RTD Used
6-2
4 Wire RTD Used
6-3
2 Wire TC Used
6-4
DP in Output Mode
2n43 CR
6-5
SP in Output Mode
2n46 CR
6-6
Temp in Output Mode
2n49 CR
6-7
PV4 in Output Mode
7-0
Temp A/D Fault : Temperature A to D

failure
2n50 CR
7-1
Temp Char Fault: Temperature

characterization fault
Temp Input Suspect: Temperature input
signal is suspect
meaning)
Temp NVM Fault: Temperature non-volatile
memory fault detected
meaning)
2n50 CR
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
2n50 CR
2n50 CR
10
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
TB-980502

HONEYWELL
DETAILED STATUS
BYTE-BIT
7-6
7-7
8-0
OMNI
ALARM
POINT(S)
ACTIVATED

meaning)
meaning)
Delta Temperature : (FUTURE - Consult
with Honeywell for meaning)
8-1
Excess Zero Cor Temp
2n48 NC
8-2
Excess Span Cor Temp
2n48 NC
8-3
Temp Input Open : Open circuit

temperature sensor
Temp Over Range : Process temperature is
over range
Redun Backup Temp : (FUTURE - Consult
with Honeywell for meaning)
2n50 CR
8-6
Temp Corrects Active
2n48 NC
8-7
Temp Sensor Mismatch
2n50 CR
8-4
8-5
2n50 CR
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
11
Technical Bulletin
Transducer Alarms Logged by the Flow

Computer
The following alarm points are automatically updated with data contained in the
detailed status bytes within the flow computers copy of the SMVs data base
(see the previous table). These alarms are time and date tagged and logged by
the flow computer whenever the respective bit changes state. Other than the
logging function, non critical alarms cause no other action to occur. Critical
alarms are alarms which are considered to adversely impact the credibility of
the measurement reading, these alarms cause the flow computer to examine
the Override Code strategy and apply an override if so configured.
ADDRESS OF
ALARM POINT
ALARM T ITLE
ALARM T YPE
2n42
Meter n DP: Invalid Corrects or Corrects

Reset
NC
2n43
Meter n DP is in the Input or Output Mode
CR
2n44
Meter n DP Signal is Suspect
CR
Meter n Pressure: Invalid Corrects or Corrects

Reset
Meter n Pressure is in the Input or Output
Mode
NC
Meter n Pressure Signal is Suspect
CR
Meter n Temperature - Invalid Corrects or

Corrects Reset
Meter n Temperature is in the Input or Output
Mode
NC
2n50
Meter n Temperature Signal is Suspect
CR
2n51
Meter n Body Fault - Over Temperature
NC
2n52
Meter n Critical Failure of SMV Electronics
CR
2n53
Meter n SMV Not Communicating
CR
2n45
2n46
2n47
2n48
2n49
CR
CR
12
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
TB-980502

HV Combo Module Address Jumpers

The HV Combo Module actually uses the same physical PCB module as a
regular H type combo module, except it uses a different address jumper setting.
Module Address
Jumpers
In * Position
Green LED
Indicates Any
Activity
*
Red LED Indicates

OMNI is
Transmitting
SMV Channel #1
SMV Channel #2
Transmitter Loop
Status LEDs
SMV Channel #3
SMV Channel #4
Figure 1. Setting the Address Jumpers of the HV Combo Module
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
13
Technical Bulletin
How the I/O Points are Assigned

When the flow computer detects that an HV combo module is installed it
automatically allocates 12 of its 24 process inputs to the HV module. The
presence or absence of combo modules is checked after a RESET ALL RAM or
after a CHECK I/O MODULES command is executed.
Although the HV combo has only 4 physical Honeywell DE ports, each SMV3000 provides 3 variables for a total I/O requirement of 4 x 3 = 12. As the total
process input count of the flow computer is limited to 24 it is obvious that if an
HV combo module is fitted there can only be 3 other combo modules of type A,
B, E/D, E or H. The HV combo module is always the last module in the list,
and the I/O assignments reflect this fact (see the following example).
Example 1: Omni 6000 - 2A - H1 HV ( Flow computer contains - 2 A
combos, 1 H combo, and an HV combo).
The 1st A combo is allocated:
Input points
Output points
1, 2, 3 & 4
1&2
The 2nd A combo is allocated:
Input points
Output points
5, 6, 7 & 8
3&4
The H combo is allocated:
Input points
Output points
9, 10, 11 & 12
5&6
The HV combo is allocated:
Input points
13, 14, 15 & 16 Diff. Pressure

17, 18, 19 & 20 Temperature
21, 22, 23 & 24 Pressure
7&8
Output points
While the example shown above employs 4 combo modules in total, it uses all
24 process input assignments, this means that 2 physical I/O module slots will
be unusable on the backplane.
To configure an HV combo module it is only necessary to configure the
Diff-Pressure I/O points in the Meter Run Config menu, the I/O points for
the temperature and pressure variables are automatically assigned by the flow
computer and cannot be changed by the user.
14
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
TB-980502

Using the above example the following table identifies the I/O point
assignments that will occur.
Getting Tech Support Technical support is available
at:
( (281) 240-6161
Email should be sent via the
WEB Page at:
www.omniflow.com
or email to:
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE
T EMPERATURE
PRESSURE
METER RUN # 1
13
17
21
METER RUN # 2
14
18
22
METER RUN # 3
15
19
23
METER RUN # 4
16
20
24
Numbers in bold are entered by the user. Numbers in italics are assigned
automatically by the flow computer and cannot be changed.
OmniCom Revision
OmniCom revision ??.72 or later is required to support the SMV-3000
multivariable transmitter.
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
15
Date: 05
13
98
TB # 980503
Serial I/O Modules: Installation Options

Contents
contained in Volume 1, and
is applicable to all firmware
revisions.
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract........................................................................................................... 1
Features and Specifications .......................................................................... 2
Dual Channel RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model #68-6005 ......................... 3
RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model #68-6205-A .............................. 4
RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model #68-6205-B .............................. 6
RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial Port Jumper Options ............................................ 8
Scope
All Omni 6000/3000 Flow Computers have serial communications capabilities
via proprietary serial I/O modules.
Abstract
Omni flow computers can come equipped with serial I/O modules that
communicate with RS-232-Compatible or RS-485 devices. Omni manufactures
three models of serial modules:
q Dual Channel RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005
q RS-232-C/RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205-A
q RS-232-C/RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205-B
Each serial module has 2 ports. Omni 6000 flow computers can have up to two
serial modules installed for a maximum of 4 ports. Omni 3000 flow computers
typically use one serial module providing 2 ports. Each serial communication
port is individually optically isolated for maximum common-mode and noise
rejection. Jumpers are provided for selection of module address and serial port
communication standards. Communication parameters such as protocol type,
baud rate, stop bits and parity settings are software selectable.
Technical Bulletin
Features and Specifications

Proprietary serial modules and multi-bus serial I/O interface specifications are:
Omni Serial I/O Modules
M ODEL #
68-6005
68-6205-A
68-6205-B
Omnis proprietary RS-232Compatible serial port.
Thirty-two devices may be
connected when using the
RS-485 mode.
Typically, one serial I/O
module is used on the Omni
3000, providing two ports. A
maximum of two serial
modules can be installed in
the Omni 6000, providing
four ports.
TYPE
q Dual channel serial communications

providing two RS-232-Compatible
ports.
q Communications protocol, baud rate,
stop bits and parity settings are
Dual Channel RS-232Compatible
RS-232-Compatible / RS-485
(Non-selectable Ports)
RS-232-Compatible / RS-485
(Selectable Ports)
q Port #1 is factory-set as RS-232Compatible mode (jumper blocks are

soldered in place).
q Port #2 is factory set to RS-485
mode.
q RS-485 communications are jumperselectable as:
2-wire terminated or nonterminated
q Both Ports #1 and #2 are jumperselectable as either RS-232-C or RS485 modes.
q RS-485 communications are jumperselectable as:
Omni Multi-bus Serial I/O Interface

RS-232-COMPATIBLE
RS-485
7.5 volts (typical)
5 volts (differential driver)
1.5 k ohm
120 ohm
10 mA (limited)
20 mA
INPUT LOW THRESHOLD
-3.0 volts
0.8 volts (differential input)
INPUT HIGH THRESHOLD
+3.0 volts
5.0 volts (differential input)
DATA OUTPUT VOLTAGE

LOAD IMPEDANCE
SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT
BAUD RATES
COMMON M ODE VOLTAGE
LEDS
BASIC COMMUNICATION FEATURES
1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, & 38.4 k bps (software selectable)
250 Volts to chassis ground
channel inputs/outputs & handshaking signals
TB-980503
Serial I/O Module: Installation Options
Dual Channel RS-232-C Serial I/O Module

Model #68-6005
serial port.
four ports.
Dual channel serial communication modules can be installed providing two RS232-Compatible ports. Although providing RS-232-C signal levels, the tristate
output design allows multiple flow computers to share one RS-232 device. This
serial module is the oldest model manufactured by Omni.
Address Selection
Jumpers
Jumper Settings - For

information on setting the
jumpers of serial I/O modules
refer to 1.6.3. Serial
in Volume 1, Chapter 1 of
the User Manual.
Address S1 (1)
Selected for Serial
Ports 1 & 2
Address S2 (0)
Selected for Serial
Ports 3 & 4
RTS Out
TX Out
Chan. B
RTS Out
TX Out
Chan. A
LED Indicators
RX In
RDY In
Chan. A
RX In
RDY In
Chan. B
Fig. 1. Dual RS-232 Serial I/O Module Model Showing Selection Jumper
and Indicator LEDs
Technical Bulletin
RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model

#68-6205-A
serial port. Up to 32 devices
may be connected when
using the RS-485 mode.
Refer to technical bulletin
TB980401 Peer-to-Peer
Basics for more information.
four ports.
Serial I/O Module # 68-6205-A (manufactured 1997) has two communication

ports. The first serial port (Ports #1 and #3 if two 68-6205 modules are installed)
is factory set in the RS-232-C mode (jumpers are soldered into place and
cannot be moved). The second serial port (Ports #2 and #4) is configurable for
RS-485 communications only. Although the first serial port provides RS-232-C
signal levels, the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share
one serial link.
Address Selection
Jumpers
Address S1 Selected
for Serial Ports 1 & 2

the User Manual. For serial
port jumper settings see also
Fig. 6 in this bulletin.
Address S2 Selected
IRQ Select Jumper

IRQ 2 Selected
(If using an SV
Module, select
IRQ 3)
LED Indicators
68-6205
REV: A
Port #2 (#4) Jumpers
(RS-485 Options Only)
(Hard-wired to RS-232-C Only)
Fig. 2. RS-232/485 Module #68-6205-A Showing Selection Jumpers and

Indicator LEDs
TB-980503
The first serial port jumpers are factory hard-wired for RS-232-C mode. This
port is non-selectable and cannot be changed by the user. The second serial
port jumpers are factory preset in the RS-485 two-wire, terminated positions.
This port is user-selectable for RS-485 two-wire/four-wire terminated/nonterminated jumper positions (see Fig. 6). Back panel wiring is shown below.
Micro Motion
RFT 9739
Devices - Users of Micro
connected to the peer-to-peer
networks should be
and that Terminal A from the
RFT 9739 should be wired to
Omni Terminal B (7), and B
from the RFT must be wired
to Omni Terminal A (11).
Omni 6000
(Omni 3000)
Terminal
TB3 (TB2)
First
Serial
Port
Second
Serial
Port
RS-232-C
RS-485
2-Wire
RS-485
4-Wire
TX
TERM
RX
RS-232-C
GND
Hard-wired
RTS
RDY
TX-B
RX-A
10
GND
GND
11
TX-A
12
RX-B
N/A
Fig. 3. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232-C/RS-485 Module #68-6205-A
Technical Bulletin
RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model

#68-6205-B
serial port. Up to 32 devices
may be connected when
using the RS-485 mode.
four ports.
Serial I/O Module # 68-6205-B is the latest serial module manufactured by

Omni (1998). It is capable of handling two communication ports. Each serial
port is jumper-selectable for either RS-232-Compatible or RS-485
communications. Although providing RS-232-C signal levels when in this mode,
the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share one serial link.
In addition to the RS-232 mode, jumper selections have been provided on each
port to allow selection of RS-485 format. With this option, a total of two RS-485
ports are available on this model.
Address Selection
Jumpers
Address S1 Selected

the User Manual. For serial
port jumper settings see also
Fig. 6 in this bulletin.
Address S2 Selected
IRQ Select Jumper

IRQ 2 Selected
(If using an SV
Module, select
IRQ 3)
LED Indicators
68-6205
Port #2 (#4)Jumpers
REV: B
Fig. 4. RS-232-C/RS-485 Module #68-6205-B Showing Selection Jumpers

and Indicator LEDs
TB-980503
Jumpers for both serial ports are user-selectable to RS-232-C or RS-485

formats (see Fig. 6). The RS-485 options are either 2-wire or 4-wire mode; each
mode can be set as terminated or non-terminated connections. Back panel
wiring is shown below.
Micro Motion
RFT 9739
Devices - Users of Micro
connected to the peer-to-peer
networks should be
and that Terminal A from the
RFT 9739 should be wired to
Omni Terminal B (7), and B
from the RFT must be wired
to Omni Terminal A (11).
Omni 6000
(Omni 3000)
Terminal
TB3 (TB2)
First
Serial
Port
Second
Serial
Port
RS-232-C
RS-485
2-Wire
RS-485
4-Wire
TX
TX-B
TERM
RX
RX-A
GND
GND
GND
RTS
TX-A
RDY
RX-B
TX
TX-B
TERM
RX
RX-A
10
GND
GND
GND
11
RTS
TX-A
12
RDY
RX-B
Fig. 5. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232-C/RS-485 Module #68-6205-B
Technical Bulletin
RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial Port Jumper Options

Serial Port I/O Software
Settings - Each serial port is
configurable via OmniCom
software or the Omni front
panel. Detailed information
on how to configure these
and other flow computer
settings is available in
Volume 3, Chapter 2 of the
User Manual and in
OmniCom Help.
The RS-232-C/RS-485 serial port has been designed so that RS-232 or RS-485
communications standards can be selected by placement of 16-pin resistor
networks into the correct blocks. The following diagrams show the locations of
blocks JB1, JB2, JB3 for the first serial port (Model #68-6205-B only), and JB4,
JB5, JB6 for the second serial port (Models #68-6205-A and #68-6205-B) for
each format. Serial I/O Module #68-6205-A only has the RS-485 options
available for the second serial port, and the first port is hard-wired to the RS232-C position and cannot be changed by the user.
RS-232
JB1 or JB4
JB2 or JB5
RS-485
RS-485 2-WIRE
JB3 or JB6
RS-485
TERMINATED

JB1 or JB4
JB2 or JB5
JB3 or JB6

JB1 or JB4
JB2 or JB5
JB3 or JB6
RS-232/485
NON-TERMINATED
RS-232
Terminated/Nonterminated RS-485 - The

RS-485 devices located at
each extreme end of an RS485 run should be
terminated. Note that the
device located at an extreme
end may or may not be an
Omni Flow Computer.
RS-232/485 4-WIRE
RS-232

JB1 or JB4
JB2 or JB5
JB3 or JB6
RS-485
TERMINATED

JB1 or JB4
RS-232/485
RS-232
RS-232/485 4-WIRE
JB2 or JB5
JB3 or JB6
RS-485 2-WIRE
RS-232
RS-485
TERMINATED
Fig. 6. Layout of Jumper Blocks Showing RS-232/485 Formats
Date: 05
21
98
TB # 980504
Multivariable Flow Transmitter Interfaces:

Connectivity and Data Transfer Issues
Contents
Manual, applicable to all
revision .72+.
Multivariable Flow
Transmitters - These are a
special type of smart digital
instrumentation device that
incorporates multiple
sensors. The sensors are
controlled by
microprocessors.
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract........................................................................................................... 1
Improving Accuracy and Performance.......................................................... 2
Multiple Sensors and Parameters..............................................................................2
Scan Interval.............................................................................................................2
Time Lag ..................................................................................................................2
Transferring Flow Rate and Totalizer Data ................................................... 3

Serial Data Communications ......................................................................... 4
The Flowmeter Device as a Communication Slave ....................................................4
The Flowmeter Device as a Communication Pseudo Master......................................4
The Flowmeter Device as a Full Communication Master............................................4
Point-to-Point Configurations ....................................................................................5
Advantages and Disadvantages of a Serial Data Link ................................................6
Direct Pulse Train........................................................................................... 7
Scope
This technical bulletin applies to all firmware revisions versions .72+ of Omni
6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers.
Abstract
The term multivariable flow transmitter denominates a class of smart digital
instrumentation devices. This class of device incorporates multiple sensors
controlled by either one or more microprocessors. Coriolis and ultrasonic liquid
and gas flowmeters are examples of current multivariable transmitter
technology. These devices use some form of serial data communication link to
transfer data to and from the Omni flow computer, requiring an SV
multivariable communication combo module. In addition, the devices provide
an output pulse train which is proportional to the flow (either mass or volume).
TB-980504 w ALL.72+
Technical Bulletin
Improving Accuracy and Performance

Obtaining high accuracy is the primary goal of instrumentation designers. The
inclusion of one or more microprocessors gives the instrument designer the
ability to improve the performance of a device, by taking advantage of the fact
that the measurement sensor is far more repeatable than it is accurate. For
example, given the same set of operating conditions, the sensor is able to
reproduce its results in an extremely predictable manner within the range of its
sensors. At a different set of operating conditions, the sensor results may be
different but still extremely predictable.
Some considerations for improving measurement accuracy and instrument
performance are the use of multiple secondary sensors and parameters, and
the devices scan interval and the time lag it produces to calculate results from
a sensor measurement.
Multiple Sensors and Parameters

The microprocessor allows the manufacture to characterize and correct the
measurement sensor results by monitoring its electronic ambient conditions and
sensor operating conditions. This is done using secondary sensors or
calculating parameters such as temperature, pressure and density. The net
result is greatly improved accuracy of the measurement output, and the
availability of other measured or calculated parameters, which can be used by
tertiary devices such as flow computers. The flow computer uses these
parameters as values for input variables in equations of state and to diagnose
the condition of the transmitter.
Scan Interval
All microprocessor controlled multivariable flowmeter devices operate on some
scan interval; i.e., input parameters are measured on a scan interval (fixed or
variable). The measured parameters are then input into a calculation sequence
which produces a resultant flow rate, (either mass / unit time or volume / unit
time).
Time Lag
Note that sensor measurements must be taken before a result can be
calculated. The calculated flow rate represents that which existed for the
previous scan interval; i.e., there is a time lag from when the measurement is
taken to when the flow rate is calculated. Fast scan intervals are typically used
to minimize any uncertainty that may be introduced by this time lag.
TB-980504 w ALL.72+
TB-980504
MV Flow Transmitter Interfaces: Serial Connectivity vs. Direct Pulse Trains
Transferring Flow Rate and Totalizer Data

Multivariable flowmeters provide useful and important diagnostic data and
alarms which can be of great benefit to the user. This data could be processed
and used to warn the user of impending failures or operational problems before
they have had a major impact on the uncertainty of the measurement result.
There is no question that the integrity of the measurement is greatly enhanced
by providing this data to the flow computer and allowing the flow computer to
log and alarm any abnormalities detected.
Various multivariable flowmeter devices update their database with the most
recently calculated volume or mass flow rate. The Omni flow computer, which is
operating on a 500 msec calculation cycle, uses the last flow rate received from
the flowmeter to calculate the incremental flow quantity for the current
calculation cycle.
INFO - At the time that this
bulletin was being prepared,
certain manufacturers were
making firmware adjustments
to their products to provide
high resolution totalizers
suitable for use by the Omni
flow computer.
TB-980504 w ALL.72+
Most flowmeter devices also provide internal totalizers. Using these totalizers
can be difficult unless they are provided in a numeric format which increments
and rolls over predictably. Floating point variables for example normally keep
increasing in value and do not roll over to zero at any point. This causes a
problem because as the totalizer increases in size, a point is reached when the
bit resolution of the mantissa portion of the number is exceeded, and the
totalizer begins to increment using larger and larger steps. The flow computer
could compare the totalizer values received between successive serial
transmissions, but because of the totalizer roll over and resolution problems,
and the inability to synchronize the reading of successive totalizer readings with
the calculation cycle of the flow computer, it is better to use the instantaneous
flow rate value obtained via a direct connection to calculate and totalize the
flow in the flow computer. This has significance because it forms the basis for
the totalizer integration within the transmitter.
Technical Bulletin
Serial Data Communications

Each time the device performs its measurement scan and calculation process,
it typically updates the values of calculated variables, measured parameters
and alarm points in its database. Some flowmeter devices act as serial
communication slaves, allowing the database to be asynchronously read and,
in some cases, modified. Other devices act as serial communication pseudo
masters and simply transmit certain database points on a regular time interval,
while acting as a slave and accepting commands and configuration changes. At
least one device the Krohne Ultrasonic flowmeter can be both full
communication master and communication slave.
The Flowmeter Device as a Communication Slave

In this mode the flowmeter device transmits data as requested by the flow
computer communication master. When asked for data, the flowmeter will
transmit the most recently calculated data or block of data. In normal operation,
the flow computer requests flow and diagnostic data on a regular interval and
intersperses any other data transmissions (e.g., configuration data or
commands) between these regular flow update polls. Sometimes due to heavy
communications traffic, communication glitches or transmission retries, flow
update polls can be time-skewed or missed altogether.
The Flowmeter Device as a Communication Pseudo

Master
In this mode a fixed block of data is transmitted over and over on a regular
interval without requiring a response, (e.g., Instromet ultrasonic gas flowmeter
transmits a information data block every second). Any command or
configuration data that is needed to be sent to the flowmeter transmitter must
be interspersed between these regular data block transmissions. It is the job of
the flow computer acting as communication master to ensure that configuration
changes do not collide with information data block transmissions. Sometimes
due to flow computer task loading, communication glitches or transmission
retries, flow data blocks can be time-skewed.
The Flowmeter Device as a Full Communication Master

The Krohne ultrasonic flowmeter can be configured to act as a Modbus master.
In this mode the flowmeter can be configured to realize transactions of up to 20
predefined data blocks, which can be writes of data to a flow computer or reads
of data from a flow computer. Each transaction requires a response from the
slave flow computer. Update cycle time can be excessive if too many blocks
with too much data are transferred and, as with the other serial communication
methods, glitches and transmission retries can delay or time-skew the data
received.
TB-980504 w ALL.72+
TB-980504
Point-to-Point Configurations
Point-to-point configurations (Fig. 1), with both the flow computer and
transmitter terminated, is the only acceptable wiring configuration.. Each
flowmeter transmitter is connected to an independent SV port of the flow
computer. Because each SV port is connected to only one flowmeter
transmitter, each transmitter can now use a default communication address of
1, greatly simplifying flow transmitter replacement issues. Data transfers are
much faster then in a multi-drop mode and the likelihood of transmitter
interaction is greatly minimized.
All 4 MV Ports of
Flow Computer
must be Terminated
Multivariable
Device
ID #1
Multivariable
Device
ID #2
Multivariable
Device
ID #3
Multivariable
Device
ID #1
Omni Flow
Computer
(Using
Independent
SV Ports)
Modbus IDs of Multivariable

Devices can be the same in this
Point-to-Point Configuration
All Four Multivariable

Devices must be
Terminated
Fig. 1. Point-to-Point Wiring Configuration
TB-980504 w ALL.72+
Technical Bulletin
Advantages and Disadvantages of a Serial Data Link

The advantages of totalizing the flow in the flow computer using data obtained
via a serial data link are:
q Saving of two wires needed to transmit the pulse signal
q No need to setup the multivariable flowmeter to output a pulse signal
Disadvantages of totalizing the flow in the flow computer using data obtained
via a serial data link are:
q High level of instrumentation and technical expertise needed to maintain
and debug an installation; e.g., the average metering technician is
unlikely to be familiar with serial communication protocols, or able to
operate a serial data protocol analyzer needed to interpret the data
messages received from the flowmeter.
q A cyclic or rapid change in flow rate at the flowmeter may not be
captured correctly because of the relatively slow scan rate of the serial
transmission link.
q The flow rate update rate cannot be guaranteed to be regular in some
cases due to communication glitches requiring communication retries and
time-outs. Other factors which affect this are intermittent configuration
and calibration transactions which may occur on the serial link. (these
concerns are multiplied in a multi-dropped wiring system).
TB-980504 w ALL.72+
TB-980504
Direct Pulse Train

From the calculated flow rate obtained from each measurement scan, the
device calculates and outputs a pulse train of a certain frequency via a digital
output. Each pulse will represent an exact amount of incremental flow. In some
cases, a second digital output can be used to provide an exact copy of the
pulse train except that it will be out of phase with the original pulse. These two
pulse trains approximate the type of pulse output that is received from a dual
pickoff turbine meter and as such can satisfy many of the Pulse Fidelity
checking requirements expressed in API MPMS, Chapter 5.5. The flow
computer counts each and every pulse output by the flowmeter device and
applies a flowmeter K-Factor as it would for any other pulse producing
flowmeter. K-factors can be either in pulses per mass unit or pulses per volume
unit. Changes in flow rate are immediately reflected in the pulse output and
registered by the flow computer, within the cycle update limitations of both
devices.
The advantages of totalizing the flow in the flow computer via a direct pulse
train are:
q Flowmeter response time is as fast as the measurement and calculation
scan period; e.g., a sudden increase or loss of flow would be detected
within one calculation cycle.
q Individual device scan cycles have no impact on uncertainty. Signal
aliasing is not a problem.
q Easy to implement Dual Pulse Fidelity Checking using a second out of
phase pulse using existing flow computer technology.
q Low level of instrumentation and technical expertise needed to maintain
and debug an installation; e.g., a metering technician with simple digital
counter is all that is required to verify proper operation.
q Ability to prove the device using conventional pipe provers and compact
provers (applying double chronometry pulse interpolation methods).
Disadvantages of totalizing the flow in the flow computer via direct pulse train
are:
q Two extra wires are needed to transmit the pulse signal.
q Need to configure (scale) the digital I/O point pulse train frequency.
TB-980504 w ALL.72+
Date: 07
22
98
Author(s): T.J. Tajani / Robert L. Stallard
TB # 980701
Using the Totalizer Maintenance Mode

Contents
User Manual Reference This technical bulletin is
applicable to Revisions
24.72+, 26.72+ and 27.72+
for metric units only.
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract........................................................................................................... 1
Procedure to Start and End Maintenance Mode........................................... 2
Displaying the Maintenance Totals ............................................................... 3
Totalizer Maintenance
Mode - This mode allows the
operator to verify meter run
calculations by measuring
meter run flow rate (gross,
net, mass, or energy) without
impacting the custody
transfer totals.
Totalizers ........................................................................................................ 3
Status.............................................................................................................. 3
Maintenance Mode Command ....................................................................... 4
Modbus Database Points Associated with the Totalizer Maintenance
Mode ............................................................................................................... 4
Scope
The Maintenance Mode feature applies to the following application revisions:
q 24.72+ Turbine / Positive Displacement / Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering
Systems with K Factor Linearization (metric units only)
q 26.72+ Turbine / Positive Displacement Liquid Flow Metering Systems
with Meter Factor Linearization (metric units only)
q 27.72+ Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems (metric units only)
Abstract
The purpose of maintenance mode function is to allow operators to verify meter
run calculations. This function measures meter run flow rate (gross, net, mass,
and energy) without impacting the overall operation of the custody transfer
totals.
When in the maintenance mode, the flow measured by the target meter run will
not be accumulated in the meter run and/or station totalizers used for normal
operation. Furthermore, any D/A outputs configured to output flow rate will not
be impacted. While the specific meter is in the maintenance mode, the meter
will display zero flow in all the non-maintenance mode displays.
TB-980701 w 24/26/27.72+
Technical Bulletin
Procedure to Start and End Maintenance

Mode
The maintenance mode function requires a technician Level '1' password.
Following is the required procedure to Start and End the Maintenance Mode:
(1) Enter a positive value for low flow cutoff or active frequency (see
Meter Run Setup in Chapter 3 of the User Manual). A positive entry
must be made to ensure that the meter active flag operates correctly at
zero flow.
(2) Shutdown the meter (flow rate = Zero).
(3) In the display mode, press [Alpha Shift] [Prog] [Meter] [n] [Enter]. The
Omni LCD screen will display:
METER #1 MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Mode
N
Reset Maint Totals
Toggle Maint Mode _
Maintenance Mode
Active/Inactive - If there is a
Y next to Maintenance
Mode in the display (see
right), then the mode is
active. The maintenance
mode is inactive when an N
is displayed.
(4) Press [
] (down arrow key) to place the cursor at Toggle Maint Mode
and press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter]. Depending on the maintenance
mode status, the Omni will toggle the mode. If the maintenance mode is
active, then this step will end or turn off the mode; and vice versa.
You will be prompted for the password. The LCD screen will display:
Maintenance Mode
N
Reset Maint Totals
Password _
Configuration Settings The maintenance mode uses

current flow computer
configuration settings; i.e.,
additional configuration
entries are not required
INFO - When the

maintenance mode starts
after selecting the type of
measurement (gross, net,
mass or energy), the flow
rate and totalized flow are
zero.
(5) Type the Level 1 password and press [Enter]. The Omni LCD screen
will display a screen similar to the following:
Maintenance Mode
Y
Reset Maint Totals
Toggle Maint Mode _
(6) To end (deactivate) the totalizer maintenance mode, repeat steps (2)
through (5).
TB-980701 w 24/26/27.72+
TB-980701
Using the Totalizer Maintenance Mode
Displaying the Maintenance Totals

INFO -Pressing [Gross]
[Enter] in the maintenance
mode will display the station
and meter flow for this mode.
In the display mode, select the displays you want by entering the corresponding
keypress sequence:
q For Gross Flow Maintenance Totals, press [Meter] [n] [Gross].
q For Net Flow Maintenance Totals, press [Meter] [n] [Net].
q For Mass Flow Maintenance Totals, press [Meter] [n] [Mass].
q For Energy Flow Maintenance Totals (gas applications only Revision
27.72+), press [Meter] [n] [Energy].
The Omni LCD screen will display:
MaintenanceMode am3h
Meter Tag
0.000
MaintenanceMode am3
Meter Tag
0.000
Current Flow Rate

Totalized Value
Totalizers
Meter Run Database
Registers - The n in the
database point number
represents the meter run
number (n = 1, 2, 3 or 4).
In the totalizer maintenance mode, the flow computer will realize all normal
calculations and accumulate resulting flow quantities into special maintenance
totalizers. The special totalizer registers reset to zero upon entry to
maintenance mode or can be manually reset while in the maintenance mode.
This reset will not affect the regular meter run totalizers. In this mode, the LCD
screen will display meter run current flow rate and accumulated flow rate for the
maintenance mode. Following are the Modbus database registers assigned as
special maintenance mode totalizers:
5n92
5n93
5n94
5n95
Gross Maintenance Total

Net Maintenance Total
Mass Maintenance Total
Energy (NSV) Maintenance Total
Status
The following status points are provided in the Omni flow computers Modbus
database to indicate when a meter run is in the totalizer maintenance mode:
1197
1297
1397
1497
TB-980701 w 24/26/27.72+
Meter Run #1 - Maintenance Mode Status

Technical Bulletin
Maintenance Mode Command

The maintenance mode function can be activated/deactivated remotely,
providing that the flow rate is zero and the meter run is inactive (1n05 = 0). The
meter run totalizer maintenance mode is activated by setting one or all the
following Modbus database points to '1'; the mode will be ended by writing '0' to
these same database points.
2737
2738
2739
2740
Meter Run #1 - Toggle Maintenance Mode Command

Modbus Database Points Associated with the

Totalizer Maintenance Mode
The following table comprises the database registers for the maintenance mode
function:
MODBUS DATABASE POINTS ASSOCIATED WITH THE MAINTENANCE MODE
Database Point Number
Database Point Description
Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
Meter Run Maintenance Mode Status
1197
1297
1397
1497
Gross Maintenance Mode Totalizers
5192
5292
5392
5492
Net Maintenance Mode Totalizers
5193
5293
5393
5493
Mass Maintenance Mode Totalizers
5194
5294
5394
5494
Energy (NSV) Maintenance Mode Totalizers
5195
5295
5395
5495
Maintenance Mode Command
2737
2738
2739
2740
TB-980701 w 24/26/27.72+
Date: 08
17
98
Author(s): Robert L. Stallard
TB # 980801
Unsolicited Transmissions of Custom

Modbus
Data Packets
Contents
Manual, specifically Volume
3, Chapter 4 Modbus
Protocol Implementation,
revisions .71+.
Unsolicited Transmissions
- These type of
transmissions are used for
Omni flow computers to
transmit custom data packets
via an RS-232-C serial port
without a poll. This feature is
especially useful when
communicating via VSAT
satellite systems. Modbus
protocol Function Code 67
has been assigned to this
function exclusively for Omni
flow computers.
TB-980801 w ALL.71+
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract........................................................................................................... 2
Custom Modbus
Data Packets.................................................................... 2
Prerequisites for Using Unsolicited Transmissions of Custom Data
Packets ........................................................................................................... 2
User-customized Modbus Driver................................................................................2
Compatible Serial Communications ..........................................................................3
Modbus
Protocol Implementation of Omni Proprietary Function
Code 67: Transmit Read Unsolicited Custom Data Packet.......................... 3
Configuring Your Flow Computer for Unsolicited Transmissions of
Custom Data Packets ..................................................................................... 4
Example ...................................................................................................................4
Scope
This technical bulletin applies to all firmware revisions versions .71+ of Omni
6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers.
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
Unsolicited transmissions are used to transmit a Custom Modbus Data Packet
from a selected flow computer RS-232-C serial port without it being polled for
data by the receiving device. Modbus protocol Function Code 67 was assigned
for this feature, which allows the receiving device to discriminate between a
transmission without a poll (unsolicited) and a normal Modbus read.
This function, among other uses, was designed for communicating via VSAT
satellite systems where operating cost is directly proportional to RF bandwidth
used. In communications via satellite, polled transmissions are much more
costly than unsolicited transmissions. Typically, the device requesting data
(master) would poll the flow computer to transmit the data to it through a
satellite link. This would require a signal from the master device to the flow
computer and yet another from the flow computer back to the requesting
device. Whereas with unsolicited transmissions, the flow computer can be
configured to transmit Modbus custom data packets at specified time intervals,
when a certain event occurs, or by some other transmission triggering cause,
without the master device having to poll the flow computer for such data. In this
manner, only one signal is transmitted via satellite; i.e., from the flow computer
to the master device.
Custom Modbus
Data Packets
Custom Modbus
Data
Packets - Many point
numbers were left unused
when numbering the
variables within the database.
This allows for future growth
and different application data.
Without custom data
packets many polls would be
required to retrieve data
distributed throughout the
database. The custom data
packets allows you to
concatenate or join different
groups or sets of data in any
order and of any data type
into 1 message response.
These custom packets are
located at points 0001, 0201
and 0401 in the database.
For more information refer to
2.5.18 and 4.6 in Volume 3,
and 1.1, 1.3.14 and 2.1 in
Volume 4 of the User
Manual.
Custom Modbus Data Packets are provided to reduce the number of polls
needed to read multiple variables which may be in different areas of the
database. Groups of consecutive database points of any type of data can be
joined together into one packet by entering each data groups starting database
index number. The number of data bytes in a custom packet which will be used
for unsolicited transmissions cannot exceed 248 in RTU mode or 496 in ASCII
mode.
Prerequisites for Using Unsolicited

Transmissions of Custom Data Packets
Before you can configure your flow computer to realize unsolicited
transmissions of custom Modbus data packets, you must have the following:
q User-customized Modbus driver for receiving device
q Compatible serial communications capability
User-customized Modbus Driver

Various communication master devices can be connected to the Omni flow
computer via Modbus serial link including, but not limited to, front-end
supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) system devices. In order for
these devices to be able to identify and read unsolicited transmissions of Omni
flow computer custom data packets, the user must develop a custom driver
capable of identifying the Modbus protocol Function Code 67; which is an Omni
proprietary function. The custom driver must then be installed in the SCADA or
other receiving device and verified for adequate performance.
TB-980801 w ALL.71+
TB-980801
Unsolicited Transmissions of Custom Modbus

Data Packets
Compatible Serial Communications

Both the Omni flow computer and the receiving device must be equipped with
appropriate RS-232 compatible or RS-485 serial ports configured for Modbus
protocol implementation. The Omni flow computer has several hardware and
software options for RS-232 or RS-485 compatible serial data links (refer to the
User Manual for details).
Modbus
Protocol Implementation of Omni
Proprietary Function Code 67: Transmit
Unsolicited Custom Data Packet
A typical unsolicited transmission Modbus protocol message format using
Function Code 67 is as follows:
Modbus Protocol Message Format using Function Code 67
DEVICE FUNCTION
ADDRESS CODE 67
XX
43HEX
BYTE
COUNT
CUSTOM
PACKET
ADDRESS
DATA
CRC ERROR
CHECK BYTES
XX
XXXXHEX
DD DD ... DD DD
CRC CRC
Device Address : The address that identifies the Omni flow

computer that is transmitting unsolicited
data.
Function Code 67 : Represented in hexadecimal value as 43.
Byte Count : The number of bytes of the data field
(maximum of 248 bytes in RTU mode or
496 bytes in ASCII mode).
Custom Packet Address : The flow computer database address of the
custom Modbus data packet, represented in
hexadecimal value:
Custom Modbus Data Packet Addresses
Hexadecimal Equivalents
PACKET
NUMBER
PACKET
ADDRESS
HEXADECIMAL
EQUIVALENT
#1
0001
0001
#2
0201
00C9
#3
0401
0191
Data : The actual flow computer data transmitted

without a poll to the receiving device.
CRC Error Check Bytes : Used to check the message for errors.
For more information on Modbus protocol implementation, see Chapter 4 in
Volume 3 of the User Manual.
TB-980801 w ALL.71+
Technical Bulletin
Configuring Your Flow Computer for

Unsolicited Transmissions of Custom Data
Packets
User-programmable
Boolean Statements and
Variables - For more
information, see Volume 4
for addresses of Boolean
statements and userprogrammable variables, and
Chapter 2 in Volume 3 on
configuring Boolean
statements and userprogrammable variables.
To activate unsolicited transmissions you must enable any of the following

edge triggered command points below which causes the appropriate custom
Modbus data packet to be transmitted out of the selected serial port without the
serial port being polled for data:
Flow Computer Modbus Database Points for
Unsolicited Transmissions
ADDRESS
UNSOLICITED TRANSMISSION TYPE
2701
2702
2703
Custom Data Packet #1 via Serial Port #1

2704
2705
2706

2707
2708
2709

2710
2711
2712

Example
The following user-programmable variables are an example of programming a
timer for every 15 seconds which triggers the unsolicited transmission of a
custom Modbus data packet.
7025: 7026 ) 7026 = # -15
7026: 7026 + # 0.5
The following Boolean statement is an example of an unsolicited transmission
where every 15 seconds the data contained in Custom Modbus Data Packet #3
will be transmitted without a poll via the flow computers Serial Port #2 to the
receiving device:
1025: 2706 = 7026
TB-980801 w ALL.71+
Date: 08
19
98
TB # 980802
Digital I/O Modules: Installation Options

Contents
contained i nVolume 1 , and
is applicable to all firmware
revisions.
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract ........................................................................................................... 1
Installation Options and Jumper Settings .................................................... 2
Digital I/O Module Model # 68-601 1..........................................................................2
Digital I/O Module Model # 68-621 1..........................................................................3
Scope
All Omni 6000/3000 Flow Computers have digital I/O capabilities via proprietary
digital I/O modules.
Abstract
Omni flow computers have digital I/O module options with user-selectable
jumpers for module address, sequence and interrupt request (IRQ). Omni
manufactures two models of digital modules:
q Digital I/O Module Model #68-6011
q Digital I/O Module Model #68-6211
Each digital module has 12 digital points. Each digital point can be individually
configured as either an input or an output, via the front panel keypad or a serial
port using OmniCom configuration PC software.
TB-980802 w ALL.71+
Technical Bulletin
Installation Options and Jumper Settings

Only 1 digital I/O module can be installed in the Omni 3000 and a maximum of
2 installed in the Omni 6000. This provides a total of 12 digital I/O points for the
Omni 3000 and a total of 24 digital I/O for the Omni 6000.
Digital I/O Module Model # 68-6011

I/O Point LEDs - Each digital
I/O point has 2 LEDs (green
and dual red/green) which
indicate its status. When the
single green LED is glowing,
the digital I/O point is active.
The dual red/green LED
indicates a blown fuse, red
indicating a source current
and green a sinking current.
Inputs and outputs are provided for control of prover functions, remote
totalizing, sampler operation, tube control, injection pump control, and other
miscellaneous functions. Each digital I/O module provides a total of 12 digital
I/O points. Each point can be configured independently as an input or output.
Points are individually fused and include LEDs indicating that the point is active
and if the fuse is blown. The digital I/O module normally occupies I/O Slots 1
and 2 on the Omni 6000 backplane, and I/O Slot 1 on Omni 3000. Userselectable jumper settings are shown in Figure 1 (below):


Select Jumpers for
NOTE: If D2 remove all jumpers
Module Address
Jumper
Select D1
Select D2
Green LED On
Point Active
F3
F2
F1
I/O Point
#01
Dual (Red/Green)
Fuse Blown LED
Individual Fuses
for Each I/O Point
F6
F5
F4
F9
F8
F7
F12
F11
F10
Red On
= Sourcing
Current
Green On = Sinking
Current
#12
Digital I/O Point

LED Indicators
Figure 1. Digital I/O Module Model # 68-6011 - Jumper Settings
TB-980802 w ALL.71+
TB-980802
Digital I/O Modules: Installation Options
Digital I/O Module Model # 68-6211

Digital Module # 68-6211 has the same features as the Model # 68-6011, plus
the following:
Surface-mounted circuitry
Individual resetable fuses for each digital I/O point
Redesigned user-selectable jumpers for IRQ polarity, channel assign, and
module address selection using 1 or 2 digital I/ O modules.
User-selectable jumper settings are shown in Figure 2 (below). When using a
second digital I/O (D2) module, no jumper is required on JP1 and JP2.
Neither Jumper is Required for D2 Module

Select Jumpers for
Assign IRQ to
I/O Point #1
Assign IRQ to
I/O Point #2
JP2
JP2
JP1 In = Rising Edge Trigger

JP1 Out = Falling Edge Trigger
JP1
JP2
JP4
JP5
Green LED On
Point Active
Module Address
Jumper
F3
ADDRESS
JP4
JP5
D1
Out
Out
D2
In
Out
F2
F1
I/O Point
#01
I/O Point
#01
Dual (Red/Green)
Fuse Blown LED
F6
F5
F4
F9
F8
F7
F12
F11
F10
Red On
Individual Resetable
Fuses for Each I/O Point
= Sourcing
Current
Green On = Sinking
Current
#12
#12
Digital I/O Point

LED Indicators
Figure 2. Digital I/O Module Model # 68-6211 - Jumper Settings
TB-980802 ! All.71+
Date: 08
27
98
Author(s): Richard Dojs / Isaac Perez / Robert L. Stallard
TB # 980803
Upgrading Flow Computer Firmware

Contents
revisions. This technical
bulletin replaces and
invalidates TB-980301
Upgrading EPROM
Chips.
IMPORTANT!
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract........................................................................................................... 2
Safety Considerations.................................................................................... 2
Instructions .................................................................................................... 3
Installing New OmniCom PC Configuration Software..............................................3
Replacing the Central Processor Module (CPU) and EPROM Chips ..........................4
Resetting RAM..........................................................................................................5
Verifying and Updating Information of Installed Modules (Check I/O Modules) ...........6
Setting the Number of Digits and Decimal Places for Totalizers .................................7
Special Instructions If Upgrading from Revision 20.56 Firmware .................................................... 8
After Replacing CPU

Module or EPROMs and
Before Downloading
Configuration File - You
must perform the Check I/O
Modules procedure (see
page 6 in this bulletin) and
calibrate your analog I/Os
before downloading the
configuration file to the
upgraded flow computer.
Also, you must reset RAM as
expressed in this technical
bulletin before downloading
the configuration file. These
procedures must be
performed whether or not a
corresponding message is
displayed on the front panel
LCD screen of the flow
computer. Failure to do so
may void the warranty and
cause future problems and
unpredictable results with
your flow computer.
TB-980803 w All Revs
Downloading the Configuration File from OmniCom to the Flow Computer .............9
Returning the Old EPROMs ....................................................................................10
Troubleshooting Tips .................................................................................. 10

Omni Display Does Not Come On After Resetting All RAM......................................10
Omni Front Panel Display is Blinking and/or the Keypad is Locked..........................11
Cannot Open File Message is Displayed when Trying to Transmit the Saved Report
Templates to the Omni............................................................................................11
Incorrect Data in Printed Customized Reports .........................................................11
Unable to Complete a Prove Sequence ...................................................................11
OmniCom Unable to Communicate to the Flow Computer.......................................12
Scope
This technical bulletin is applicable to all firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni
3000 Flow Computers. The information contained in this technical bulletin is
targeted to qualified professionals only.
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
DANGER!
Electrical Shock Hazard!

Dangerous AC voltages are
present on the power supply
module and ribbon cable
when the unit is AC powered.
To avoid electrical shock
which could be fatal, It is
imperative that you remove all
power before opening and
disassembling the flow
computer and take any other
necessary precautions.
Only qualified technicians
should work on any internal
circuitry. Omni Flow
Computers, Inc. is not
responsible for personal
injuries or accidents that may
occur when working on flow
computer circuitry.
CAUTION!
Static electricity can damage
flow computer circuitry. Take
approved static device
handling precautions when
working on the flow
computer.
Upgrading Omni flow computer firmware allows users to incorporate new

features and increase the capabilities of their flow metering system application.
An upgrade may also be necessary for system conformance to API standards
and Year 2000 (Y2K) requirements.
To upgrade your flow computer firmware you will need to perform certain critical
steps, such as:
q Install new version of OmniCom Configuration PC Software.
q Save flow computer configuration file and report templates.
q Replace Central Processor Module or EPROM chips.
q Reset RAM.
q Set the number of digits and decimal places for totalizers and factors.
q Download and adjust flow computer configuration file and report
templates.
Safety Considerations
Before removing any circuit boards from the flow computer, the following must
be observed:
q Personal Safety : Although most of the internal circuits are powered
by relatively low voltages, dangerous AC voltages
are present on the power supply module and ribbon
cable when the unit is AC powered. For this reason
it is important to remove all power before
disassembling the computer.
q Static Electricity : Static electricity can be generated simply by moving
around on certain surfaces or wearing certain types
of clothing. The flow computers printed circuits can
be damaged by this static electricity. Take approved
static device handling precautions when working on
the flow computer.
TB-980803
Instructions
Before removing the Central Processor Module (CPU) or old EPROMs, you
must install the new version of OmniCom Configuration PC Software supplied
with your new CPU or EPROMs and use this new version to retrieve the
configuration file from the flow computer.
Installing New OmniCom PC Configuration Software

Using OmniCom Help Context sensitive help is
available by pressing the [F1]
key on your PC keyboard
when running OmniCom.
(1) With the old EPROMs still in the flow computer, install the new
OmniCom to your PC from the diskette shipped with the CPU or
EPROMs. The diskette label provides installation instructions.
(2) Create a new file from within the newly installed version of OmniCom
by opening File/New and entering the file name.
(3) When prompted for the EPROM version number of the file to create,
select the version number that corresponds to the NEW EPROMs you
will be installing.
(4) Upload the configuration file from the OLD set of EPROMs installed in
the flow computer by opening Online/Start Comm and selecting
Receive Omni Configuration Data.
(5) Subsequently, receive ALL the report templates by selecting Receive
Report Templates within the Online/Start Comm menu. As a
precautionary measure, this should be done regardless of whether or
not default report templates are being used.
(6) Print the configuration file from OmniCom by opening File/Print and
selecting your print option (Yes or No).
(7) Verify all settings indicated in the configuration file printout and make
any necessary adjustments to these settings that are appropriate for
your particular application.
(8) Close OmniCom by selecting Exit from the Print menu. You will be
prompted on whether to save the configuration file and each of the
report templates. Answer Yes to all.
Technical Bulletin
Replacing the Central Processor Module (CPU) and

EPROM Chips
CAUTION!
When removing the CPU
Module, take extreme care
not to bend or fold the
membrane keypad ribbon
cable too sharply, or the
metallic traces could be
damaged.
Location of EPROM ChipsThe location of the EPROM
chips on the CPU Module is
shown in Fig. 1. The
EPROMs are the two large
32-pin Integrated Circuits
(ICs or chips) with labels
marked U3 and U4. Note the
position of the orientation
notches at one end of each
EPROM.
IMPORTANT!
Replacing EPROM Chips Ensure that all pins plug into

there respective holes and
that none are bent.
IMPORTANT!
After Replacing CPU
Before Downloading
procedures must be
your flow computer.
(9) If you are replacing ONLY the EPROM chips and NOT the CPU
module, reset all RAM in the Omni via the front panel keypad. If you
will be replacing the entire CPU module, DO NOT reset the RAM.
To reset RAM from the front panel keypad, press [Prog] [Setup]
[Enter] [Enter] [Enter], then type in your privileged password as
prompted. Scroll down by pressing the [
] key to the Reset All Ram?
prompt and answer [Y] to answer yes. Answer Yes or OK to any
warnings. (Go to Step 14 for detailed instruction on resetting Ram.)
(10) Remove power from the Omni flow computer and remove the CPU
module.
(11) Make note of the new EPROM version and checksum indicated in the
label placed on the EPROM chips. You will need this information later.
(12) Either replace the old CPU module with a new CPU that has the new
set of EPROMs, or simply replace the old set of EPROMs with the new
set.
(13) After replacing or reinstalling the CPU module, apply power to the Omni
flow computer. Make a note of what your LCD screen displays when
powering up. If you receive a display indicating loss of calibration data,
you will need to calibrate your analog I/Os after completing the EPROM
upgrade. (Refer to Volume 1 System Architecture and Installation
of the User Manual for more information.)
Math
Processor
Central
Processor
Program
EPROM
Program
RAM
Archive
RAM
Backup
Batttery
J1
J2
EPROM Size
1 OR 4 Meg Bit
Select 4 Meg
As Shown
J3
System Watchdog
J3 In = Enabled
J3 Out = Disabled
(Always Enabled)
Figure 1. Layout of Central Processor Module Showing Location of

EPROM ICs and Jumpers J1, J2 and J3.
TB-980803
Resetting RAM
IMPORTANT!
After Replacing CPU
Before Downloading
procedures must be
your flow computer.
Program Mode - Pressing

the [Prog] key will activate
the Program Mode. While in
this mode, the Program LED
above the keypad is lit red.
To exit the Program Mode,
press the [Prog] key
repeatedly until the Program
LED goes off.
(14) You will need to reset RAM before and after replacing EPROM chips. If
you will be replacing the entire CPU module, reset RAM only AFTER
replacing the CPU. DO NOT reset the RAM before replacing. When
power is applied to the flow computer after replacing EPROM chips, the
following screen is displayed:
RAM Data Invalid
Reconfigure System
Using OMNI as
Initial Password
Enter the key press sequence [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] [Enter]
and the following screen is displayed:
Privileged
_
Level 1
Level 1A
Different screens will be displayed each time you press enter before
you reach the above screen.
(15) At the Privileged prompt, enter the following key press sequence to
use OMNI as the privileged password: [Alpha Shift] [Alpha Shift] [O]
[M] [N] [I] [Enter]. The cursor will move down to the next entry.
Privileged
OMNI
Level 1
_
Level 1A
(16) Scroll down by pressing repeatedly the [

] key to Reset All Ram?
and press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter] for Yes.
Archive Run?(Y/N)
Reset All Totals
Reset All Ram ?
Y
The display will briefly go blank, the backlight will go off and come back
on. The following screen may then reappear:
RAM Data Invalid
Reconfigure System
Using OMNI as
Initial Password
Technical Bulletin
(17) Press [Status] and a screen similar to the following will be displayed:
B-1
Y
Y
E-1
Y
Y
D-1
Y
Y

] key to the end to display the
Revision Number and EPROM Checksum.
S-1
Y
Y
Revision No. 021.72
EPROM Checksum 2408
Verify that these match with what you previously noted in Step 11. If
they do not match and there is an EPROM Checksum alarm, stop at
this point and contact Omni technical support.
IMPORTANT!
After Replacing CPU
Before Downloading
Modules procedure and
procedures must be
your flow computer.
LED goes off.
Verifying and Updating Information of Installed Modules

(Check I/O Modules)
(19) If the EPROM Revision number and Checksum are correct, verify if
both the S-Ware (Software) and H-Ware (Hardware) columns read Y
(Yes) for all the installed modules before proceeding any further. Scroll
up and down the screen in the previous step by using the [
] / [
]
arrow keys to view installed modules. If both columns read Y, go to
Step 25. If not, proceed to the following step (20).
B-1
Y
Y
E-1
Y
Y
D-1
Y
N
S-1
N
Y
Revision No. 021.72
EPROM Checksum 2408
(20) If one or more of the installed modules reads N (No) under the SWare (Software) and/or H-Ware (Hardware) columns, press [Prog]
[Setup] [Enter] [Enter] and the following is displayed:
*** MISC. SETUP ***
Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station?(Y)
TB-980803
(21) Move the cursor down by pressing the [

] key to Check Modules?.
*** MISC. SETUP ***
Password Maint?(Y)
Check Modules ?(Y) _
Config Station?(Y)
(22) Press [Enter] and a screen similar to the following is displayed:

B-1
Y
Y
E-1
Y
Y
D-1
Y
N

] key to Update S-Ware?
and press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter] to enter Y for Yes.
D-1
Y
N
S-1
N
Y
Update S_Ware ?
Y
You will be prompted to enter your password. Also enter Y to answer
OK if cautioned that updating the software will cause the I/O
configurations to be cleared.
(24) Exit the Program Mode when you are done by pressing the [Prog] key
repeatedly until the Program LED above the keypad goes out. This
returns you to the Display Mode.
Setting the Number of Digits and Decimal Places for

Totalizers
(25) In newer versions of EPROMs, you are given an option to set the
number of digits for cumulative totalizer rollover (8 or 9 digits) and the
number of decimal places for volume and mass totalizers. Set these
options via keypad ONLY by pressing [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter]
[Enter]. The following screen is displayed:
Privileged
_
Level 1
Level 1A
Technical Bulletin
(26) At the Privileged prompt, enter the following key press sequence to
use OMNI as the privileged password: [Alpha Shift] [Alpha Shift] [O]
[M] [N] [I] [Enter]. The cursor will move down to the next entry.
Setting the Number of
Digits for Totalizers Totalizers within the flow
computer can be rolled at 8
or 9 significant digits. To set
totalizer rollover to 9 digits,
press [0] [Enter]. To set
totalizer rollover to 8 digits,
press [1] [Enter].
Setting Volume and Mass

Totalizer Resolution Gross and net volume and
mass totalizer values can be
expressed with up to 3
decimal places. To set the
number of decimal places for
totalizer resolution, press the
corresponding number key
([0], [1], [2] or [3] decimal
places, where 0=Klbs,
1=100lbs, 2=10lbs, 3=lbs).
Then press the [Enter] key.
All firmware revisions, except
for Version 20.56, provide
Mass in pounds.
Help for Number of Digits

and Decimal Place
Settings - You can view the
Help in OmniCom under
Factor Setup & Sys
Constants by highlighting
each of the fields. Then use
F1 for a detailed explanation
of each of your choices.
However, DO NOT set these
options via OmniCom.
Context-sensitive help is also
available via the Omni front
panel keypad by pressing the
[Help] key (same as the
[Enter] key) rapidly twice
while the cursor is at the
entry you want to set.
Privileged
OMNI
Level 1
_
Level 1A

] key to Reset All Totals?.
Archive Run?(Y/N) N
Reset All Totals ? _
(28) Press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter] for Yes and a screen similar to the
following is displayed:
All Totals Now Reset
Totalizer Resolution
# Digits, 0=9, 1=8 0
DecPlacesGross&Net 0
DecimalPlaces Mass 3
Enter the respective values you want for each and every totalizer
resolution setting and press the [Enter] key after each entry (see
sidebar).
It is strongly recommended that you set these resolutions NOW
because you will not be able to change these settings after configuring
your flow computer or during flow operations without resetting to zero
all your totalizers.
Special Instructions If Upgrading from Revision 20.56

Firmware
Version 20.56 EPROMs provide Mass in hundreds of pounds. If you
want to continue receiving your Mass in hundreds of pounds, press [1]
[Enter] at the DecimalPlaces Mass entry.
(29) Exit the Program Mode when you are done by pressing the [Prog] key
repeatedly until the Program LED above the keypad goes out. This
returns you to the Display Mode.
TB-980803
Downloading the Configuration File from OmniCom to

the Flow Computer
LED goes off.
(30) In the Display Mode, press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] to display
the Misc. Setup menu.
*** MISC. SETUP ***
Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station?(Y)
] key to Serial I/O n.
*** MISC. SETUP ***
User Display ? n
Config Digitaln
Serial I/O n
_
Enter the number of the flow computer serial port to which your
OmniCom PC is connected and press [Enter]. A screen similar to the
following will display:
SERIAL PORT #2
Baud Rate
38400
Number of Data Bit 8
Number of Stop Bit 1
IMPORTANT!
It is recommended that you
select Modbus RTU
(modem) protocol for the
Modbus Type in Step 32 if
it is available in your new
EPROM version. If you
decide to use this protocol,
ensure that you make this
same change in your
OmniCom configuration file
under Config Serial I/O
before proceeding to
download the configuration
file to the Omni
(32) Scroll down to Modbus ID and then to Modbus Type and enter the
corresponding settings indicated in the OmniCom configuration file you
printed earlier. Remember to press [Enter] after typing each setting.
SERIAL
TX Key
Modbus
Modbus
PORT #2
Delay
ID
Type
1
1
2
(33) Run OmniCom and open the configuration file you saved earlier which
pertains to this flow computer. Open the File Menu and select Print.
Print the file to a printer on your PC to have an updated printout of the
flow computer configuration.
(34) Open Offline/Omni Configuration/Config Serial I/O and ensure that
the Modbus Type is set correctly to match what you selected in Step
32.
Technical Bulletin
(35) Open Online/Start Comm. Check the Modbus ID, Comm Port, Baud
Rate, and Comm Media settings to ensure that these are correct. If you
set the port in Step 32 to Modbus RTU (modem) protocol, ensure that
Comm Media is set to Modem.
(35) Transmit Omni Configuration Data.
(36) Transmit Omni Report Templates.
(37) Calibrate your analog I/Os if you are required to do so. For more
information on calibrating analog I/O, see Volume 1, Chapter 8 of the
User Manual.
Returning the Old EPROMs

You are now done. Remember to use the Business Reply Label supplied with
your new EPROMs. If you have not yet completed your EPROM Upgrade Form,
please do so now and return along with the old EPROMs to Omni Flow
Computers, Inc.
Troubleshooting Tips
Omni Display Does Not Come On After Resetting All RAM
Tech Support - If you
encounter any other
difficulties, please contact
our technical staff.
Phone: (281) 240-6161
Fax: (281) 240-6162
E-mail:
If the Omni Display does not come on after resetting all RAM, proceed as
follows:
(1) Disconnect all power to the Omni.
(2) Remove CPU Module and also remove the System Watchdog Jumper
J3 (See Figure 1) on the CPU.
(3) Reinstall CPU Module with Jumper J3 removed.
IMPORTANT!
Replacing RAM and
EPROM Chips - Ensure that
all pins plug into there
respective holes and that
none are bent.
(4) Power up the Omni and reset all RAM again. Display should be on.
(5) Power down again the flow computer and remove CPU Board.
(6) Replace Jumper J3 and then reinstall the CPU Module.
(7) Once again, apply power to the flow computer.
The Omni display should now be normal. However, if problem persists, try
unplugging and reconnecting the RAM chips into the CPU board as follows:
(2) Remove CPU Module.
(3) Unplug and reconnect RAM chips to the CPU board
(4) Reinstall the CPU Module.
(5) Power up the Omni and reset all RAM again. Display should be normal.
10
TB-980803
Omni Front Panel Display is Blinking and/or the Keypad

is Locked
This problem may be solved by unplugging and reconnecting the RAM chips
into the CPU board as follows:
(2) Remove CPU Module.
(3) Unplug and reconnect RAM chips to the CPU board
(4) Reinstall the CPU Module.
(5) Power up the Omni and reset all RAM again. Display should be normal.
Cannot Open File Message is Displayed when Trying to

Transmit the Saved Report Templates to the Omni
Sometimes, when trying to transmit the saved report templates to the flow
computer, OmniCom will display a message indicating that it cannot open the
file. Simply go to the OmniCom pull-down Report menu and open each of the
reports individually, make the necessary changes and resave the reports. The
change can simply represent change to the same thing it was before.
Subsequently, save the template (usually ALT-S). Exit OmniCom and then
restart OmniCom. Open the file and try transmitting the templates to the Omni
again.
Incorrect Data in Printed Customized Reports

When upgrading EPROMs and using customized reports, the data in the printed
report may not be correct because some of the database registers may have
changed, moved or redefined in the new version with respect to the old version.
If you see that the printed data is not what you expected, then you should open
the report template files to check if you are retrieving the data from the correct
registers for the new EPROM version. Also verify with OmniCom that Use
Default Report Template under Printer Setup is set to No.
Unable to Complete a Prove Sequence

Sometimes you are unable to get through a prove sequence after an EPROM
upgrade. Open up the deviation percentages in the Prover Setup to establish
an initial prove sequence. Once a prove sequence has been established, you
can tighten up the deviation percentages to what you had set before the
EPROM upgrade.
11
Technical Bulletin
OmniCom Unable to Communicate to the Flow Computer

Sometimes you are unable to communicate to an Omni after replacing the
EPROMs. This may be caused by the following:
q The OmniCom Start Comm/Comm Media setting differs from the Omni
flow computer Modbus Type setting in the serial port setup. In the newest
versions of EPROMs when the flow computer is powered-up, the
EPROMs default to Modbus RTU (modem) for Serial Port # 2. The
Modbus RTU (modem) protocol is the preferred protocol; therefore, make
this change in your OmniCom configuration file AND also set the Comm
Media to Modem in the Online/Start Comm menu.
q The new EPROMs default to Modbus ID 1 on power-up. Ensure that your

Modbus ID matches in both the Online/Start Comm menu and in the
serial port setup in the Omni. Also ensure the OmniCom configuration
file, Omni serial port, and OmniCom Start Comm screen are all set to
the same Modbus ID.
12
Date: 11
04
98
TB # 981101
Using the Audit Trail (Event Logger) Feature

and Sealing of the Flow Computer
Contents
contained in Volumes 2 & 3
of the User Manual,
revisions.
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract........................................................................................................... 2
Activating the Audit Trail Feature ................................................................. 2
Password Protecting Serial Port Access ....................................................................3
Enabling Rigorous Auditing of Serial Ports ................................................................4
Printing and Viewing the Audit Trail Report................................................. 5

Audit Trail Feature - This
feature is an event logger that
records the last 150 changes
made to the flow computer
database. A fixed format
report provides an audit trail
of these changes. This report
comprises time and date
stamped changes made to
the flow computer database,
either via the local keypad or
via password protected serial
port access.
Printing the Audit Trail Report via Front Panel Keypad ..............................................5
Viewing and Printing the Audit Trail Report via OmniCom .........................................5
Sealing the Flow Computer ........................................................................... 6

Download Disabling (OmniCom Lockout) ..................................................................6
Serial Port Lockout Switch Enable Option .................................................................7
Program Inhibit (Keypad Lockout) Switch ..................................................................7
Housing Sealing........................................................................................................8
Scope
All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 flow computers have the Audit
Trail feature. The information contained in this technical bulletin is for
intermediate users.
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
All Omni flow computer firmware revisions include the Audit Trail feature. In
current revisions, this security feature consists of an archive file that stores 150
records of the most recent changes made to the flow computer database. The
flow computer always logs changes made to the database via the Omni front
panel keypad. It can also log changes made remotely via a Modbus port, using
OmniCom PC Configuration Software for instance, if passwords have been
activated on the serial port.
Each record consists of a unique event number, time and date tag, the
database index number of the affected variable, and the new and old value of
that variable. The value of gross and net totals at the moment of the event are
also stored in the record. Furthermore, the firmware can log events that involve
a group of consecutive database addresses. In this case, only the starting index
number and the number of consecutive index points appear in the audit trail.
The records comprise the Audit Trail Report which, when printed, lists the latest
150 records in time sequence starting with the most recent. You can view this
report in OmniCom and print it either with OmniCom or the front panel keypad.
The Audit Trail Report has a fixed format and is not customizable by the user.
Activating the Audit Trail Feature

The Omni flow computer will automatically log all changes made to the
configuration settings via the front panel keypad. However, to avoid flushing the
audit trail, the firmware does not log configuration changes made via serial
ports other then complete download events, unless rigorous auditing is enabled.
In order for the flow computer to log configuration changes made through a
serial port, whether remotely (via modem) or via direct connection, the
corresponding serial port must be password protected or enabled for rigorous
auditing.
With passwords activated, the firmware will fully log the target database
address old and new value only when single point writes occur. When blocks of
data are written, only the starting database index and total number of
consecutive points written to will be recorded in the audit trail log.
Enabling rigorous auditing does not require serial port passwords to be used.
The flow computer will archive all serial port transactions that represent
configuration changes.
TB-981101
Using the Audit Trail Feature (Event Logger) and Sealing the Flow Computer
Password Protecting Serial Port Access

Entering a Serial Port
Password Initially, you can only assign
serial port passwords via the
Omni front panel keypad.
Choose up to 8
alphanumerical characters
for the password. Enter the
selected password at the
corresponding serial port
entry under the Password
Maintenance submenu:
q Ser1 Passwd for Serial
Port #1
Port #2
Port #3
Port #4
Note: If Serial Port #1 has a
printer connected to it, you
need not assign a password
to this port. Ports #3 and #4
are available only if your flow
computer has a second serial
I/O module installed.
The flow computer will automatically log any single point writes to a specific
database address made via a password protected serial port. Assigning serial
port passwords for the first time can only be done via the front panel keypad of
the flow computer.
To assign passwords and restrict access to serial ports via the Omni front panel
keypad, proceed as follows:
(1) Using the flow computers front panel keypad and in the normal display
mode, press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] [Enter]. This will display the
submenu
of
the
Miscellaneous
Configuration menu.
Priveledged
_
Level 1
Level 1A
(2) Scroll down to place the cursor at the desired Sern Passwd prompt
and enter a password of your choice. The n in Sern represents the
serial port number (e.g., the display shows Ser2 for Serial Port #2 see
sidebar).
Ser1 Passwd
Lockout SW Active? N
Ser2 Passwd _
(3) Press [Enter] once you have keyed-in your password for the selected
serial port. The flow computer will prompt you to enter the privileged
password for the flow computer to validate the new serial port password.
If you have not yet assigned a privileged password, either use OMNI
as the default or scroll up and assign the password now. If you do the
latter, repeat the procedure for assigning the serial port password.
Once assigned, you have the option of changing the serial port passwords via
OmniCom PC configuration software. To do this, while on any field edit screen,
press [Ctrl] [Alt] [P] on your PC keyboard and follow the online instructions.
You will need to enter the current valid password before you can change it.
Technical Bulletin
Enabling Rigorous Auditing of Serial Ports

Rigorous auditing is normally used only as a diagnostic tool to track down
unexpected changes made to the flow computer database. It allows you to log
all transactions of one or more non-password protected serial ports. Actually,
the only way to log all changes to the Omni database done through serial ports
is by enabling rigorous auditing.
To enable rigorous auditing you must define a user-programmable variable
statement. This statement places the decimal value of the serial ports
hexadecimal code into the database address the corresponds to the special
diagnostic function (Index # 3800).
To enable rigorous auditing to one or more serial ports, do the following:
(1) From the table below, select the hexadecimal codes of the serial ports to
which you want to apply rigorous auditing. Then determine the decimal
equivalent of the selected hexadecimal codes (indicated in the table).
(2) Formulate a variable statement that writes the desired decimal value to
Database Point # 3800 (Special Diagnostic Function) using the following

logic:
Address 3800 is EQUAL (=)to the CONSTANT (#) decimal value
Or simply select the respective variable statement from among those

provided in the table.
VARIABLE STATEMENTS
TO
Serial Port(s) #
1
Hexadecimal
Code
Decimal
Equivalent
Variable
Statement
000A
10
3800=#10
00A0
160
3800=#160
0A00
2560
3800=#2560
A000
40960
3800=#40960
00AA
170
3800=#170
0A0A
2570
3800=#2570
A00A
40970
3800=#40970
0AA0
2720
3800=#2720
A0A0
41120
3800=#41120
AA00
43520
3800=#43520
0AAA
2730
3800=#2730
A0AA
41130
3800=#41130
AA0A
43530
3800=#43530
E N A B L I N G R I G O R O U S AU D I T I N G
SERIAL PORTS
FOR
AAA0
43680
3800=#43680
AAAA
43690
3800=#43690
TB-981101
Verifying the Audit Trail

Feature - To verify that the
audit trail feature and
rigorous auditing are active,
make any necessary flow
computer configuration
changes and view or print the
Audit Trail Report (as
indicated in this technical
bulletin). If the changes you
made appear on the report,
the audit trail feature is
working fine.
(3) Either via OmniCom or the front panel keypad, open the Program
Variable submenu under the Miscellaneous Configuration menu,
select an available (empty) variable point, and key-in the variable
statement. Press [Enter] when done to enable the rigorous auditing
feature. In OmniCom, remember to download the variable statement to
the flow computer when done if working offline.
Printing and Viewing the Audit Trail Report

You can print the Audit Trail Report from either the flow computers front panel
keypad or from OmniCom. However, you can view this report only from
OmniCom.
Printing the Audit Trail Report via Front Panel Keypad

To print the Audit Trail Report from the flow computers keypad, do as follows:
(1) In the display mode, press [Prog] [Print] [Enter] to display the Print
Report Menu.
(2) Scroll down to place the cursor at the Audit Trail ? (Y) prompt and type
the number 150, indicating the total number of records to print. It is not
necessary to print all 150 records, unless you want to.
(3) Press [Enter] and the report will print.
Viewing and Printing the Audit Trail Report via OmniCom

To print the Audit Trail Report from OmniCom, do the following:
(1) With OmniCom running, select Audit Trail Report under the Report
menu and press [Enter].
(2) Select Load from Omni in the popup box and press [Enter]. OmniCom
will prompt you for a password to continue. It will allow you to change
the password if you want (for loading the Audit Trail report via OmniCom
only). In any case you will need to enter the password you assigned for
rigorous auditing.
(3) Type the password and press [Enter]. OmniCom will proceed to load the
audit trail data and display the Audit Trail Report.
(4) If you want to print the report, press [Alt] [P] and follow the online
instructions.
(5) Exit OmniCom when done.
Technical Bulletin
Sealing the Flow Computer

TIP - You can set the
download disabling and serial
port lockout switches in one
session while in the
setup. You can set these
features only via the front
panel keypad or using the
Omni Panel Emulator
provided in OmniCom. The
recommended order for
applying the sealing features
is as follows:
(1) Disable download to the
flow computer
(2) Select the serial port
lockout switch option
(3) Activate the program
inhibit switch
(4) Seal the flow computer
housing enclosure
In addition to the audit trail, Omni flow computers provide sealing features for
added security. These security features prevent access to the circuitry and
tampering of configuration settings, protecting data and system integrity.
The key sealing features are:
q Download Disabling (OmniCom Lockout)
q Serial Port Lockout Switches
q Program Inhibit (Keypad Lockout) Switch
q Housing Sealing
Download Disabling (OmniCom Lockout)

Omni flow computer firmware allows you to block all complete downloads from
OmniCom to the flow computer. This feature protects against accidental
downloads that could occur due to incorrect logon. Once a flow computer is
configured, the correct way to log on is to Receive the configuration in
OmniCom.
You can set this feature only via the front panel keypad. To set the download
disabling feature, proceed as follows:
(1) In the normal display mode, press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter]
[Enter] to access Password Maintenance setup.
(2) At the Privileged Password prompt, type-in the corresponding
password and press [Enter]. The download disabling setting will not
appear if you do not enter the privileged password.
(3) Scroll down to the Disable Download? prompt. The LCD screen
displays as shown below.
Lockout SW Active? N
Model #? 0=3K,1=6K 1
Disable Download? N
(4) Press [Y] [Enter] to disable or [N] [Enter] to enable OmniCom

downloading of the configuration data to the Omni flow computer.
If desired, you can proceed to set the serial port lockout switches while in the
Password Maintenance setup. The following section describes this feature.
TB-981101
Serial Port Lockout Switch Enable Option

The flow computers configuration provides a lockout switch option for each
serial port. You can activate or deactivate the serial port lockout switch option
only via the front panel keypad, as follows:
(1) In the normal display mode, press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter]
[Enter] to access Password Maintenance settings.
(2) Scroll down to the Lockout SW Active? setting that corresponds to the
selected serial port. Press [Y] [Enter] to activate or [N] [Enter] to
deactivate the lockout switch for each serial port to which you want to
set this feature.
(3) Press the [Prog] several times to exit the Program Mode and return to
the Display Mode.
Program Inhibit (Keypad Lockout) Switch

Preventing Access to the
Program Inhibit Switch To prevent unauthorized
activating or deactivating of
the program inhibit switch,
seal the flow computer
housing as indicated in this
technical bulletin.
Activating the program inhibit
switch with firmware
revisions prior to .72 blocked
all configuration changes.
This was subsequently
modified to allow
configuration changes to
password level 2 operational
parameters such as PID
setpoints, batch end
commands, and prove
commands.
The Program Inhibit Switch allows you to lock access to the Program and
Diagnostic/Calibration Modes via the front panel keypad. This prevents
configuration settings from being changed. Attempting to enter a configuration
submenu will have no effect when the switch is in the inhibit position, and
PROGRAM LOCKOUT will display on the bottom line of the LCD screen.
Nonetheless, you can still enter key presses to only view data in the normal
Display Mode.
Figure 1 (on following page) shows the location of the program inhibit switch;
which is behind the front panel. To access and activate or deactivate, do the
following:
(1) Hold the front panel from the bottom, gently lift it upwards to disengage
the latching bezel, and withdraw the flow computer a couple of inches
from its housing case.
(2) Locate the red Program Inhibit Switch. It will be on the bottom right
(when facing the front panel) behind the front panel (see Figure 1).
(3) Using your right hand (recommended), place the switch to the downward
position to lock the keypad or place it to the upward position to unlock
the keypad.
(4) Reinsert the flow computer into its housing, making sure that the bezel
latches in place.
You can test the program inhibit switch by pressing the [Prog] [Setup] [Enter]
keys on the front panel keypad. This will take you to the Setup Menu in the
Program Mode. Place the cursor on any of the submenus listed and press
[Enter]. If the Program Lockout message flashes on the bottom line of the
LCD screen, the program inhibit switch is active.
CAUTION!
Technical Bulletin

latching mechanism which
you must first disengage by
lifting the bezel upwards
before withdrawing the unit
from the case.
Figure 1. The Program Inhibit Switch
Housing Sealing
You can lock or seal the inner enclosure of the flow computer within the outer
enclosure, blocking access to the 'Program Inhibit Switch' and to the circuitry.
To seal the flow computer, insert an instrument sealing wire through the holes
provided on the top-right and towards the back of the enclosures. Before
placing the sealing wire, make sure that the integral latching mechanism is in
place aligning the holes of both enclosures (inner and outer).
Date: 01
05
99
TB # 990101
Communicating with Instromet Q-Sonic

Ultrasonic Gas Flowmeters
Contents
complements the
information contained in the
User Manual, applicable to
Revision 23.73/27.73+.
Scope....................................................................................................................1
Abstract ................................................................................................................1
Q-Sonic Flowmeter Theory of Operation .......................................................2
Omni Flow Computer Logic ...............................................................................2
Wiring Installation ...............................................................................................4
Communicating with
Instromet Q-Sonic
Ultrasonic Gas
Flowmeters - The
Instromet Q-Sonic
ultrasonic flowmeter
measures gas flow with
acoustic pulse reflection
paths by using the Absolute
Digital Time Travel (ADTT)
method. This device
communicates with Omni
flow computers via Omnis
SV process I/O combo
module using a proprietary
protocol. To use the scaled
pulse output of the
Instromet flowmeter, the
flow computer must either
have an A, B or E
combo module installed.
Getting Tech Support Omni Technical support is

available at:
Phone: (281) 240-6161
Fax: (281) 240-6162
Technical information is
available on our website at:
www.omniflow.com
or send email to:
TB-990101 23/27.73+
Flow Computer Configuration ...........................................................................4

Miscellaneous Configuration Meter Run Settings.......................................................... 5
Meter Run Setup Entries ............................................................................................... 5
Flow Computer Database Addresses and Index Numbers .............................6

Flow Computer User Displays .........................................................................10
SV Module Serial Communications Port ..................................................................... 10
Meter Run Data ........................................................................................................... 11
Scope
This technical bulletin applies to firmware revisions 23.73+ and 27.73+ of Omni
6000/Omni 3000 flow computers, for gas flow metering systems.
Abstract
The Q-Sonic ultrasonic flowmeter determines the linear gas velocity through the
meter tube by using multiple acoustic pulse reflection paths. The Q-Sonic
analyzes these paths employing the Absolute Digital Time Travel (ADTT)
measurement method. The Omni flow computer totalizes either the flowmeter
pulse input signal or the profile corrected gas velocity data, received from the QSonic, to calculate the actual flow rate of gas. The Omni compensates
temperature expansion effects on the flowmeter tube by equaling the flow to the
profile corrected gas velocity multiplied by the temperature compensated tube
area. If required, it can also directly use the non-compensated flow rate value
transmitted by the ultrasonic meter as the actual flow rate.
Technical Bulletin
Q-Sonic Flowmeter Theory of Operation

Instromets ultrasonic gas flow metering technology incorporates multiple pairs
of transducers into a smart digital inferential instrumentation device. The device
is installed into a gas pipeline system to measure fluid flow. Each pair of
transducers emits ultrasonic (acoustic) pulses that travel bi-directionally, in either
a single (axial or diagonal) or double (swirl) reflection path, to and from each
transducer in the pair.
The flowmeters apply the Absolute Digital Time Travel (ADTT) method of
ultrasonic pulse analysis, which is based on the fact that pulses travel (between
a transducer pair) faster downstream with the flow than upstream against the
flow. The gas flow velocity is determined from this upstream/downstream travel
time differential of the ultrasonic pulses within the multiple reflection paths. When
there is no gas flow in the pipeline, the upstream and downstream travel times
are the same; i.e., the time differential is zero.
The Q-Sonic flowmeter employs 3 or 5 transducer pairs with a minimum of one
axial path and two swirl paths. This configuration allows for unique combinations
of reflection paths to best take into account the different effects of gas flow
profile variations, including swirl in the pipeline. The gas velocity can be
determined for bi-directional (forward or reverse) fluid flow.
Omni Flow Computer Logic

The Omni flow computer can determine the actual flow rate from either data
received serially from the Q-Sonic flowmeter or from a live pulse frequency
signal input, if one has been connected and assigned.
Totalization will be based on the flow pulse frequency input when the flow
transmitted by the Q-Sonic is in the correct direction (forward/reverse) and the
pulse frequency is within limits. This live signal will also be used in the event of a
communications failure between the Q-Sonic and the Omni. However, In order
for the Omni to use the pulse frequency signal, it must be wired to the Q-Sonic
and an I/O point assigned in the flow computer configuration.
The flow computer will temperature compensate the meter tube area and
calculate flow rate based on the profile corrected velocity of the gas transmitted
serially by the flowmeter. If the calculated flow rate is not within reasonable
limits, the Omni will directly use the transmitted flow rate as the actual flow rate.
TB-990101 23/27.73+
Communicating with Instromet Q-Sonic Ultrasonic Flowmeters
TB-990101
Start
No
Q.Sonic
Comm unications
OK?
Yes
Set Q.Sonic
Comm unication
Failed Alarm
Clear Q.Sonic
Comm unication
Failed Alarm
No
Is
Transm itted
Flow Rate in
the Correct
Direction?
Yes
No
Are Pulse I/O

Assigned?
Yes
Are Pulse I/O

Assigned?
No
Clear Pulse Signal

Suspect Alarm
No
Set Pulse Signal

Suspect Alarm
Yes
Is the
Flow Based on
Pulses within
Limits?
Yes
No
Clear Pulse Signal
Suspect Alarm
Is the
Flow Based on
Gas Velocity
within Limits?
Yes
Disable
Totalizing
Clear Flow
Delta Alarm
Set Flow
Delta Alarm
Clear Flow
Delta Alarm
Set Run as
Inactive
Calculate Actual Flow

Based on Pulse
Input Signal

Based on Gas Velocity
& Temp Comp Area

Based on Transm itted
Flow Rate
End
Figure 1. Flow computer logic flow diagram for the Q-Sonic ultrasonic gas flowmeter.
TB-990101 23/27.73+
Technical Bulletin
Wiring Installation
Serial Data
serial interface between
these devices is 2-wire RS485 mode utilizing a
proprietary protocol.
Setting Up and Wiring to

Omni Combo Modules - In
order to communicate with
Q-Sonic ultrasonic
flowmeters, the Omni flow
computer must be equipped
with at least one SV combo
module (Model 68-6203).
For instructions on jumper
settings and other process
I/O combination module
setup information, please
refer to Volume 1, Chapter
2 of the Omni User Manual
Figure 2 shows the typical wiring required for connecting a Q-Sonic flowmeter to
the Omni flow computer. A 2-wire RS-485 interface can be wired to either port
(terminals 1 and 2 for port 1, or 3 and 4 for port 2) of the flow computer terminal
block that corresponds to the SV combo module. You can install up to two SV
modules in the Omni flow computer, which will give you an availability of 4 SV
RS-485 ports. Although not required, it is recommended that the flowmeter
frequency pulse signals also be wired to the Omnis input channel #3 (forward
direction) and input channel # 4 (reverse direction) of an A combo module.
Input channel #3 corresponds to terminals 5 and 6, and input channel #4 to
terminals 7 and 8 of the back panel terminal block respective to the combo
module. The actual terminal block numbers depend upon which backplane
connector or slot the module is plugged. The E combo module can also be
used in this configuration with slight variations in wiring connections (see
Volume I, Chapter 2-12).
Figure 2. Example of wiring a Q-Sonic flowmeter to the Omni flow computers

RS-485 port #1 of an SV module with the recommended bi-directional
(forward/reverse) pulse output to input channels #3 and 4 of an A combo
module.

The flow configuration settings that are specific to the Q-Sonic flowmeter are
entered in the miscellaneous configuration meter run menu and the meter run
setup menu. You must enter the miscellaneous configuration meter run settings
first and then proceed to the meter run setup entries. These configuration
settings can be entered either via the Omni flow computers front panel keypad
or using OmniCom configuration PC software (see Chapter 2 Flow Computer
Configuration in Volume 3 of the Omni User Manual, and the technical bulletin
TB-960701 Overview of OmniCom Configuration PC Software).
TB-990101 ! 23/27.73+
TB-990101
Miscellaneous Configuration Meter Run Settings

The following miscellaneous configuration meter run settings correspond to the
Q-Sonic ultrasonic gas flowmeter:
" Select Flowmeter Device Type Enter [4] for each meter run that you want
to select the Instromet Q-Sonic flowmeter as the device type.
" Select SV Module Port The Omni flow computer can accept two SV combo
modules. With one SV module you have two SV ports available, and with two SV
modules four ports are available. For each ultrasonic meter run, enter the SV port
number (1 to 4) to which the RS-485 serial interface input from the Q-Sonic
flowmeter is wired to the flow computer.
" Select Flow Direction Q-Sonic flowmeters allow for bi-directional fluid flow
measurement. You can setup the flow computer to totalize either forward or
reverse flow on any meter run with an ultrasonic flowmeter.
" Assign Flow Pulse Frequency I/O Point Flowmeter pulse signals can
only be assigned to Input Channels #3 and #4 of A and E combo modules, and
input channel #3 of a B combo module. Enter the input channel number, which
will be used to input the ultrasonic flowmeter pulse signal.
Meter Run Setup Entries

The following meter run setup entries are available for the Q-Sonic ultrasonic
gas flowmeter:
Enter the diameter of the ultrasonic flowmeter tube, in inches
" Tube Diameter
(firmware 23) or millimeters (firmware 27). This diameter is subsequently
corrected for expansion due to temperature, and used together with the 'corrected
gas velocity' through the meter to calculate flow rate.
Enter the temperature, as degrees

" Tube Reference Temperature
Fahrenheit (firmware 23) or degrees Celsius (firmware 27), at which the ultrasonic
meter tube was measured.
The ultrasonic meter tube will expand and

" Tube Expansion Coefficient
contract with temperature. The flow computer requires the linear coefficient of
thermal expansion for the meter tube material in order to correct the meter tube
area.
US Customary Units
Metric Units
Mild Carbon Steel Plate
-100 to 300 F = 6.20 x e
-73.3 to 148.9 C = 1.12 x e
-100 to 300 F = 9.25 x e
-73.3 to 148.9 C = 1.67 x e
-6
-6
-5
-5
The actual user" Q-Sonic Maximum Flow Rate Deviation Percent

entered flow used by the flow computer to totalize depends upon several factors:
(1) If a pulse signal is available the flow computer will use it for calculations as
long as the calculated flow rate is within this 'flow rate deviation percentage'
of the flow transmitted serially by the Q-Sonic.
(2) If a pulse signal is not available or failed, the flow computer will use the
'corrected linear gas velocity' transmitted by the Q-Sonic and calculate flow
based on the 'temperature compensated area' of the meter tube. The flow
rate calculated by this method must also be within this 'flow rate deviation
percentage' of the flow transmitted serially by the Q-Sonic.
Summarizing, the flow computer first tries to use the pulse signal, then the
transmitted gas velocity value and finally the transmitted flow rate.
TB-990101 ! 23/27.73+
Technical Bulletin
" Minimum Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Ratio The flow computer
calculates the AGC ratio for each ultrasonic path in both path directions. An alarm
will occur if the AGC ration of any path drops below this ratio. Reasonable entries
are 1.5 to 2.
Difference Between Gas
Velocity and Velocity of
Sound - The gas velocity
through the meter tube is
directly proportional to the
actual flow rate of the gas in
the pipeline. The velocity of
sound (VOS) refers to the
amount of time it takes a
transmitted acoustic pulse
to travel through the gas
ultrasonic paths. The VOS
will vary depending upon
gas quality and flowing
conditions.
" Minimum Percent Sample Ratio This entry checks the ratio of good
received data pulses verses total transmitted pulses for each ultrasonic path in
both directions. A ratio below this setting will cause an alarm. Reasonable entries
are 50% to 70%.
" Velocity of Sound (VOS) in Gas Deviation Percent In some

configurations, the flow computer can verify that the average VOS calculated for
all paths agrees with the VOS of each individual path. This entry is the maximum
percent that any one path VOS varies from the average VOS of all the paths.
" Gas Velocity Low Cutoff Some gas movement can occur even when an
ultrasonic meter is blocked-in. This is caused by convection currents within the
meter tube. Enter a minimum gas velocity, in feet per second (Revision 23) or
meters per second (Revision 27), below which you do not want to totalize.
Consult with Instromet to determine this value.
Flow Computer Database Addresses and Index

Numbers
The following tables list the Modbus database addresses within the Omni have
been assigned to the Q-Sonic ultrasonic metering feature. These tables are
categorized per data type.
Meter Run Alarm Status Points Real Time Data
Description
Database Address
for Meter Run Number
Description
Database Address
Loss of communication
Loss of pulse impulse
Flow rate delta alarm
Path 1a - AGC ratio alarm
Path 1b - AGC ratio alarm
2154
2155
2156
2157
2158
2159
2160
2161
2162
2163
2164
2254
2255
2256
2257
2258
2259
2260
2261
2262
2263
2264
2354
2355
2356
2357
2358
2359
2360
2361
2362
2363
2364
2454
2455
2456
2457
2458
2459
2460
2461
2462
2463
2464
Path 1 - sample error alarm

Overall sample error alarm
Path 1 - gas VOS alarm
2165
2265
2365
2465
2166
2266
2366
2466
Notes: AGC # Automatic Gain Control

VOS # Velocity of Sound
2167
2168
2169
2170
2171
2172
2173
2174
2175
2176
2177
2267
2268
2269
2270
2271
2272
2273
2274
2275
2276
2277
2367
2368
2369
2370
2371
2372
2373
2374
2375
2376
2377
2467
2468
2469
2470
2471
2472
2473
2474
2475
2476
2477
TB-990101 ! 23/27.73+
TB-990101
16-bit Integer Registers Real Time Data

Description
Database Address
1
Flow direction (0=frwd,1=rvrs)

Path 1 - performance (%)*
Path 1a - AGC ratio*
Path 1b - AGC ratio*
Number of paths
Number of samples taken
Path 1 - valid sample
3155
3158
3159
3160
3161
3162
3163
3164
3165
3166
3167
3168
3169
3170
3171
3172
3173
3174
3175
3176
3255
3258
3259
3260
3261
3262
3263
3264
3265
3266
3267
3268
3269
3270
3271
3272
3273
3274
3275
3276
3355
3358
3359
3360
3361
3362
3363
3364
3365
3366
3367
3368
3369
3370
3371
3372
3373
3374
3375
3376
3455
3458
3459
3460
3461
3462
3463
3464
3465
3466
3467
3468
3469
3470
3471
3472
3473
3474
3475
3476
3177
3277
3377
3477
3178
3278
3378
3478
3179
3279
3379
3479
Description
Path 1a - AGC level
Path 1b - AGC level
Path 2a - AGC level
Path 2b - AGC level
Path 3a - AGC level
Path 3b - AGC level
Path 4a - AGC level
Path 4b - AGC level
Path 5a - AGC level
Path 5b - AGC level
Path 1a - AGC limit
Path 1b - AGC limit
Path 2a - AGC limit
Path 2b - AGC limit
Path 3a - AGC limit
Path 3b - AGC limit
Path 4a - AGC limit
Path 4b - AGC limit
Path 5a - AGC limit
Path 5b - AGC limit
Database Address
1
3180
3181
3182
3183
3184
3185
3186
3187
3188
3189
3190
3191
3192
3193
3194
3195
3196
3197
3198
3199
3280
3281
3282
3283
3284
3285
3286
3287
3288
3289
3290
3291
3292
3293
3294
3295
3296
3297
3298
3299
3380
3381
3382
3383
3384
3385
3386
3387
3388
3389
3390
3391
3392
3393
3394
3395
3396
3397
3398
3399
3480
3481
3482
3483
3484
3485
3486
3487
3488
3489
3490
3491
3492
3493
3494
3495
3496
3497
3498
3499
Notes: AGC # Automatic Gain Control
* Integer with two inferred decimal places.

32-bit IEEE Floating Points Real Time Data
Description
Database Address
Description
Database Address
Maximum flow deviation (%)

Minimum AGC ratio (1 to 10)
Minimum sample ratio (%)
Max. VOS deviation (%)
Gas velocity low cutoff
Avg. path performance (%)
Velocity of sound (VOS)
Gas velocity
Pressure
Temperature
17513
17514
17515
17516
17517
17520
17521
17522
17523
17524
17613
17614
17615
17616
17617
17620
17621
17622
17623
17624
17713
17714
17715
17716
17717
17720
17721
17722
17723
17724
17813
17814
17815
17816
17817
17820
17821
17822
17823
17824
Gas flow rate
17525 17625 17725 17825 Notes: AGC # Automatic Gain Control

17526 17626 17726 17826
VOS # Velocity of Sound
Net flow rate
TB-990101 ! 23/27.73+
Path 1 - velocity of sound

Path 1 - gas velocity
17527
17528
17529
17530
17531
17532
17533
17534
17535
17536
17627
17628
17629
17630
17631
17632
17633
17634
17635
17636
17727
17728
17729
17730
17731
17732
17733
17734
17735
17736
17827
17828
17829
17830
17831
17832
17833
17834
17835
17836
Technical Bulletin
32-bit IEEE Floating Points

Previous Hours Average Data
Description
Path 1a - AGC level
Path 1b - AGC level
Path 2a - AGC level
Path 2b - AGC level
Path 3a - AGC level
Path 3b - AGC level
Path 4a - AGC level
Path 4b - AGC level
Path 5a - AGC level
Path 5b - AGC level
Path 1a - AGC limit
Path 1b - AGC limit
Path 2a - AGC limit
Path 2b - AGC limit
Path 3a - AGC limit
Path 3b - AGC limit
Path 4a - AGC limit
Path 4b - AGC limit
Path 5a - AGC limit
Path 5b - AGC limit
32-bit IEEE Floating Points

Previous Days Average Data
Database Address
1
17537
17538
17539
17540
17541
17542
17543
17544
17545
17546
17547
17548
17549
17550
17551
17552
17553
17554
17555
17556
17557
17558
17559
17560
17561
17562
17563
17564
17565
17566
17567
17637
17638
17639
17640
17641
17642
17643
17644
17645
17646
17647
17648
17649
17660
17661
17662
17663
17664
17665
17666
17667
17668
17669
17660
17661
17662
17663
17664
17665
17666
17667
17737
17738
17739
17740
17741
17742
17743
17744
17745
17746
17747
17748
17749
17770
17771
17772
17773
17774
17775
17776
17777
17778
17779
17760
17761
17762
17763
17764
17765
17766
17767
17837
17838
17839
17840
17841
17842
17843
17844
17845
17846
17847
17848
17849
17880
17881
17882
17883
17884
17885
17886
17887
17888
17889
17860
17861
17862
17863
17864
17865
17866
17867
Description
Path 1a - AGC level
Path 1b - AGC level
Path 2a - AGC level
Path 2b - AGC level
Path 3a - AGC level
Path 3b - AGC level
Path 4a - AGC level
Path 4b - AGC level
Path 5a - AGC level
Path 5b - AGC level
Path 1a - AGC limit
Path 1b - AGC limit
Path 2a - AGC limit
Path 2b - AGC limit
Path 3a - AGC limit
Path 3b - AGC limit
Path 4a - AGC limit
Path 4b - AGC limit
Path 5a - AGC limit
Path 5b - AGC limit
Notes: AGC
Database Address
1
17568
17569
17570
17571
17572
17573
17574
17575
17576
17577
17578
17579
17580
17581
17582
17583
17584
17585
17586
17587
17588
17589
17590
17591
17592
17593
17594
17595
17596
17597
17598
17668
17669
17670
17671
17672
17673
17674
17675
17676
17677
17678
17679
17680
17681
17682
17683
17684
17685
17686
17687
17688
17689
17690
17691
17692
17693
17694
17695
17696
17697
17698
17768
17769
17770
17771
17772
17773
17774
17775
17776
17777
17778
17779
17780
17781
17782
17783
17784
17785
17786
17787
17788
17789
17790
17791
17792
17793
17794
17795
17796
17797
17798
17868
17869
17870
17871
17872
17873
17874
17875
17876
17877
17878
17879
17880
17881
17882
17883
17884
17885
17886
17887
17888
17889
17890
17891
17892
17893
17894
17895
17896
17897
17898
Automatic Gain Control
TB-990101 23/27.73+
TB-990101
Flow Computer Configuration Data Miscellaneous Meter Run Configuration

Database Address
Description
Flowmeter device type
SV module port #
3108
3153
3208
3253
3308
3353
Description
Database Address
1
3408 Flow direction (0=frwd,1=rvrs) 3155 3255 3355 3455

3453 Flow pulse freq. I/O point # 13001 13014 13027 13040
Flow Computer Configuration Data Meter Run Setup

Description
Tube diameter
Tube coefficient
Tube reference temperature
Maximum flow deviation (%)
TB-990101 23/27.73+
Database Address
1
7145
7146
7147
17513
7245
7246
7247
17613
7345
7346
7347
17713
7445
7446
7447
17813
Description
Minimum AGC ratio (1 to 10)
Minimum sample ratio (%)
Max. VOS deviation (%)
Gas velocity low cutoff
Database Address
1
17514
17515
17516
17517
17614
17615
17616
17617
17714
17715
17716
17717
17814
17815
17816
17817
Technical Bulletin
Flow Computer User Displays

SV Module Serial Communications Port
You can view live data received via RS-485 communications on the flow
computer front panel LCD display only if a SV port is used to input the RS-485
interface from the Q-Sonic flowmeter. To view this data, press [Setup] [n]
[Display] on the Omni front panel keypad (where n equals the SV port
number, 1 to 4, you want to display) when in the Display Mode. The following
data will display:

!"#

" !"#
$
" !"#
$
" !"#
%
&'()*+#,#"
-&'()*+#,#" .//
&)0()*+#,#" .
-&)0()*+#,#" $$
&'()*+#,#" $./
-&'()*+#,#" /
&'()*+ /
-&'()*+ /
&)0()*+ /
-&)0()*+ /
&'()*+ /
-&'()*+ /

1
2
3 #"
2.
# 4 $2$$$56$
7#*28 $2$$$56$
9
2/.
9
$2$$$56$
-":

1
2

1
2/

1
2.
3#"
2
3#"
2
3#"
2
10
TB-990101 23/27.73+
TB-990101
Meter Run Data

To view the meter run data on the flow computer LCD display, press [Meter] [n]
[Display] on the Omni front panel keypad (where n equals the meter run
number, 1 to 4, you want to display) when in the Display Mode. The following
data will display:
;55

# #< 2

2.
3 #"
2
="'
2/
# '"
# < 2
# < 2
# < 2

2
-
2/

2.
-
2%

2
-
2.
TB-990101 23/27.73+
11
LIMITED WARRANTY. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. ( Omni Flow ) warrants all equipment
manufactured by it to be free from defects in workmanship and materials, provided that such
equipment was properly selected for the service intended, properly installed, and not misused.
Equipment which is returned, transportation prepaid, to Omnis assembly plant within three (3)
years after date of shipment, and is found after inspection by Omni Flow Computers, Inc. to be
defective in workmanship or materials, will be repaired or replaced, at the sole option of Omni
Flow Computers, Inc., free-of-charge, and return-shipped at lowest cost transportation, prepay
and add. Warranties on third-party manufactured devices supplied by Omni Flow or incorporated
by Omni Flow in the manufacture of equipment bearing an Omni label shall be extended by the
original device manufacturer.
This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the equipment has resulted from accident, abuse or
misapplication.
NO OTHER WARRANTIES. Omni Flow disclaims any and all warranties, either expressed or
implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantibility, fitness for a particular
purpose, and any other warranties which extend beyond the terms herein. No agreement varying
or extending the foregoing warranties or limitations will be binding upon Omni Flow unless in
writing, signed by a duly authorized officer.
LOSS OR DAMAGE. Omni Flow shall by liable only for loss or damage caused directly by its sole
negligence. Liability of Omni Flow for any claim of any kind for any loss or damage arising out of,
or connected with this warranty; or from the performance or breach hereof shall in no case exceed
the price allocated to the equipment or unit thereof which gives rise to the claim. The liability of
Omni Flow shall terminate three (3) years after the shipment of the equipment from Omni Flow.
NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Omni Flow shall not be liable in any
circumstance for any incidental or consequential damages whatsoever (including, without
limitation, loss of business profits or revenue, business interruption, loss of business information,
or other pecuniary loss, or claims of customers of the purchaser for any and such damages)
arising out of the use or inability to use Omni Flow equipment or devices manufactured by third
party manufacturers.
Copyright 1991-1999 by Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
No part of this manual may be used or reproduced in any form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval
system, without prior written consent of Omni Flow Computers, Inc., Stafford, Texas, USA. Making copies of any part of
this manual for any purpose other than your own personal use is a violation of United States copyright laws and
international treaty provisions.
Omni Flow Computers, Inc., pursuant to a policy of product development and improvement, may make any necessary
changes to this document without notice.
Omni 3000 and Omni 6000 are trademarks of Omni Flow Computers, Inc.
OmniCom is a registered trademark of Omni Flow Computers, Inc.
(SINGLE-USER PRODUCTS)
This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and Omni Flow Computers, Inc. By the
installation and use of accompanying equipment manufactured by Omni Flow Computers, Inc.,
you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of this Agreement.
OMNI FLOW COMPUTERS SOFTWARE LICENSE

1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. ( Omni Flow ) grants to you the right to
use one copy of Omni Flow software programs (the SOFTWARE) provided with the
accompanying equipment manufactured by Omni Flow.
2. COPYRIGHT. The SOFTWARE is owned by Omni Flow and is protected by United States
copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore, you must treat the SOFTWARE like
any other copyrighted material (e.g.: a book or recording on magnetic media).
3. OTHER RESTRICTIONS. You may not reverse engineer, duplicate, decompile, or
disassemble the SOFTWARE provided on magnetic media in the form of disks or erasable
programmable memory circuits ( EPROMs ). If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade and transferred by
Omni Flow over a modem connection to magnetic media, or a single hard disk, then you may use
the SOFTWARE for the sole purpose of permanent transfer to EPROMs. You may not retain a
copy for backup or archival purposes.
LIMITED WARRANTY
LIMITED WARRANTY. Omni Flow warrants that the SOFTWARE will perform substantially in
accordance with the accompanying written materials provided with the purchase of an Omni
manufactured product for a period of three (3) years from the date of shipment from Omnis
production facility.
Omni Flows entire liability shall be, at Omni Flows sole option, (a) remedy any defect and provide
you, at no charge, with replacement magnetic media or (b) download an upgrade via a dial-up
modem connection between Omni Flow and the end user, provided that equipment specified by
Omni Flow for that purpose is used.
This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the SOFTWARE has resulted from accident, abuse or
misapplication.
purpose, and any other warranties which extend beyond the terms herein, with respect to the
SOFTWARE and accompanying hardware. No agreement varying or extending the foregoing
warranties or limitations will be binding upon Omni Flow unless in writing, signed by a duly
authorized officer.
NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Omni Flow shall not be liable in any
circumstance for any damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, loss of business profits or
revenue, business interruption, loss of business information, or other pecuniary loss, or claims of
customers of the purchaser for any and such damages) arising out of the use or inability to use
the SOFTWARE.
(SINGLE-USER PRODUCTS)
This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and Omni Flow Computers, Inc. By the
installation and use of this product you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of this Agreement.
OMNICOM SOFTWARE LICENSE

1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. ( Omni Flow ) grants to you the right to
use one copy of the OmniCom software program and accompanying written materials (the
SOFTWARE) provided with the accompanying equipment manufactured by Omni Flow.
2. COPYRIGHT. The SOFTWARE and accompanying written materials is owned by Omni Flow
or its suppliers and is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty
provisions. Therefore, you must treat the SOFTWARE like any other copyrighted material (e.g.: a
book or recording on magnetic media) except that in the sole instance of SOFTWARE provided
on 5 or 3 magnetic media disks, you may (a) make one copy of the SOFTWARE solely for
backup or archival purposes, or (b) transfer the SOFTWARE to a single hard disk provided you
keep the original solely for backup or archival purposes.
3. OTHER RESTRICTIONS. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the
SOFTWARE provided on magnetic media. You may transfer the SOFTWARE and accompanying
written materials on a permanent basis provided you maintain no copies, and the recipient agrees
to the terms of this Agreement.
4. DUAL MEDIA SOFTWARE. If the SOFTWARE is provided on 5 or 3 magnetic media
disks, then you may use the disks appropriate for your single-user computer. You may not use the
other disks on another computer or loan or transfer them to another user except as part of the
permanent transfer (as provided above) of all SOFTWARE and written materials
LIMITED WARRANTY
LIMITED WARRANTY. Omni Flow warrants that the SOFTWARE will perform substantially in
accordance with the accompanying written materials provided with the purchase of an Omni
manufactured product for a period of three (3) years from the date of shipment from Omnis
production facility.
Omni Flows entire liability shall be, at Omni Flows sole option, (a) remedy any defect and provide
you, at no charge, with replacement magnetic media or (b) download an upgrade via a dial-up
modem connection between Omni Flow and the end user, provided that equipment specified by
Omni Flow for that purpose is used.
This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the SOFTWARE has resulted from accident, abuse or
misapplication.
purpose, and any other warranties which extend beyond the terms herein, with respect to the
SOFTWARE, the accompanying written materials and hardware.
NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Omni Flow or its suppliers shall not be liable
in any circumstance for any damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, loss of business
profits or revenue, business interruption, loss of business information, or other pecuniary loss, or
claims of customers of the purchaser for any and such damages) arising out of the use or inability
to use the SOFTWARE.

Omni Flow

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Omni Flow

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Manual Guide

System Architecture and Installation

Effective May 1999

About Our Company

Contacting Our Corporate Headquarters

Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

World-wide Web Site:

Getting User Support

Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 User Manual

About the Flow Computer Applications

About the User Manual

Volume 1. System Architecture and Installation

Basic hardware/software features

Volume 2. Basic Operation

The application-related topics may include:

Volume 3. Configuration and Advanced Operation

Overview of keypad functions

Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 User Manual

Volume 5. Technical Bulletins

Volume 5 includes technical bulletins that contain important complementary

Conventions Used in this Manual

Several typographical conventions have been established as standard reference

Sample screens that correspond to the flow

2.3.1. Subsection Heading

Figure captions are numbered in sequence as they

Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 User Manual

Copyright Information and Modifications Policy

Warranty, Licenses and Product Registration

Copyright 1991-1999 by Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

Effective May 1999

Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 User Manual

1. Overview of Hardware and Software Features..................................................... 1-1

LCD Display ..........................................................................................................1-2

Diagnostic and Program LEDs...............................................................................1-2

Active Alarm LED..................................................................................................1-2

Alpha Shift LED.....................................................................................................1-2

Operator Keypad ...................................................................................................1-2

1.3. Passive Backplane Mother Board....................................................................... 1-4

Back Panel Terminations.......................................................................................1-6

Extended Back Panel ............................................................................................1-7

1.5. Central Processor Module................................................................................... 1-8

Photo-Optical Isolation ........................................................................................ 1-10

Digital I/O Modules.............................................................................................. 1-11

Serial Communication Modules ........................................................................... 1-12

Process I/O Combination Modules....................................................................... 1-16

1.7. Operating Power ................................................................................................ 1-17

Interrupt-Driven CPU........................................................................................... 1-19

Cycle Time.......................................................................................................... 1-19

On-line Diagnostics and Calibration..................................................................... 1-19

PC Communications Interface ............................................................................. 1-19

OmniCom Configuration PC Software ............................................................... 1-20

Year 2000 Compliance ........................................................................................ 1-20

1.9. Initializing Your Flow Computer ........................................................................ 1-21

System Architecture and Installation

2. Process Input/Output Combination Module Setup ............................................. 2-1

Setting the Address of the Combo Modules........................................................... 2-2

Hardware Analog Configuration Jumpers .............................................................. 2-2

Assigning Specific Signal Inputs ........................................................................... 2-3

Sample Omni Flow Computer Configuration Charts .............................................. 2-4

2.3. The A and B Combo I/O Modules ........................................................................2-6

A and B Combo Module Non-Selectable or Selectable Address ............................ 2-7

The A Type Combo I/O Module............................................................................. 2-8

The B Type Combo I/O Module........................................................................... 2-10